B-64504en - 02 Fanuc Series 30i-Pb, Series 31i-Pb Operator's Manual

FANUC Series 30+-PB
FANUC Series 31+-PB
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
B-64504EN/02
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export of Series 30i-PB from Japan is subject to an export
license by the government of Japan. Other models in this manual may also be subject to
export controls.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
some serious accidents or losses are predicted due to a failure of the product, make
adequate consideration for safety.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as “impossible”.
B-64504EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units.
It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines
equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some
precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to
control the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this
manual and relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................................................................s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING .......................................................s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING ................................................................s-6
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE .........................................................................s-8
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the
approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.
• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64504EN/02
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING
1 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the
machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating
correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate
override, or machine lock function or by operating the machine with neither a tool
nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to
the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
2 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation.
Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate.
The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual
provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate.
If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and
amount of compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
machine itself, or injury to the user.
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is not need
to change them. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a
parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before
making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself,
or injury to the user.
6 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the
MDI unit until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI unit are dedicated to maintenance or other special
operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its
normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave
unexpectedly.
7 The OPERATOR’S MANUAL and programming manual supplied with a CNC
unit provide an overall description of the machine's functions, including any
optional functions. Note that the optional functions will vary from one machine
model to another. Therefore, some functions described in the manuals may not
actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification of the
machine if in doubt.
8 Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine-tool
builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine-tool builder for details of their use and any related cautions.
s-2
CAUTION
The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very precise fabrication
technology. Some pixels may not be turned on or may remain on. This
phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is not a defect.
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in non-volatile memory in
the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off.
Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to
delete all data from non-volatile memory as part of error recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of
deleted data, backup all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.
The number of times to write machining programs to the non-volatile memory is
limited.
You must use "High-speed program management" when registration and the
deletion of the machining programs are frequently repeated in such case that the
machining programs are automatically downloaded from a personal computer at
each machining.
In "High-speed program management", the program is not saved to the
non-volatile memory at registration, modification, or deletion of programs.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to perform
programming, read the supplied OPERATOR’S MANUAL carefully such that you are fully familiar with
their contents.
s-3
WARNING
1 Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave
unexpectedly as a result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move
command. Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
2 Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear
movement between the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully
confirmed before performing programming. Positioning involves rapid traverse. If
the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the tool, the machine itself,
the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Function involving a rotation axis
When programming normal-direction (perpendicular) control, pay careful
attention to the speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect programming may result in
the rotation axis speed becoming excessively high, such that centrifugal force
causes the chuck to lose its grip on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted
securely. Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
4 Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement
units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current
position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which measurement
units are being used. Attempting to perform an operation with invalid data
specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury
to the user.
s-4
WARNING
5 Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as
required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is
performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even
if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
6 Same address command in same block
The G code or M code including the same address cannot be commanded on
the same block. If you use the same address, it may result in the machine
machine itself, or injury to the user. Command on separate block.（About
address P, refer to the appendix “List of functions include address P in the
program command”）
7 Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice
versa, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
8 Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or
a canned cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the
descriptions of the respective functions for details.
9 Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip
is specified without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will
be executed without performing a skip.
10 Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable
mirror image is enabled.
11 Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position
return command is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is
temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel
compensation function mode.
s-5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to
operate your machine, read the supplied OPERATOR’S MANUAL carefully, such that you are fully
familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1 Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool
and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have
been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the
tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
2 Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as
required.
If the machine is operated without first performing manual reference position
return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual
reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100,
applied causes the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may
damage the tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.
4 Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable), the
speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
5 Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is
operating under the control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing
injury to the user.
6 Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece
coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control
of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making
allowances for any shift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may
behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
s-6
WARNING
7 Software operator's panel and menu switches
Using the software operator's panel and menu switches, in combination with the
MDI unit, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine
operator's panel, such as mode change, override value change, and jog feed
commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI unit keys are operated inadvertently, the machine
may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
8 RESET key
Pressing the RESET key stops the currently running program. As a result, the
servo axes are stopped. However, the RESET key may fail to function for
reasons such as an MDI unit problem. So, when the motors must be stopped,
use the emergency stop button instead of the RESET key to ensure security.
9 Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the
machine, the tool path may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting
the machine after manual intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the
manual absolute switches, parameters, and absolute/incremental command
mode.
10 Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled
using custom macro system variable #3004. Be careful when operating the
machine in this case.
11 Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry
run, the machine operates at dry run speed, which differs from the
corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may
sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
12 Cutter radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode,
because cutter radius compensation is not applied. When a command is entered
from the MDI to interrupt in automatic operation in cutter radius compensation
mode, pay particular attention to the tool path when automatic operation is
subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions
for details.
13 Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited
(modification, insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if
machining is resumed under the control of that program. Basically, do not
modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining program while it is in use.
s-7
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING
1 Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine
(CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this
work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel
who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must
retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters even while external
power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a
week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC's memory will be lost.
Refer to the Section “Method of replacing battery” in the OPERATOR’S
MANUAL (Common to T/M series) for details of the battery replacement
procedure.
WARNING
2 Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine
(CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this
work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel
who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a
week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual for details
of the battery replacement procedure.
s-8
WARNING
3 Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the
cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous
WARNING
When using the controller unit, display unit, MDI unit, or machine operator's
panel, prevent these units from directly exposing to chips or coolants. Even if
direct exposure to coolants is prevented, coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at
a high activation level, oil-free synthetic-type coolants, or water-soluble coolants
at a high alkali level particularly have large effects on the control unit and
peripheral units, possibly causing the following failures.
• Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level
Some coolants containing sulfur or chlorine are at an extremely high activity
level. If such a coolant adheres to the CNC or peripheral units, it reacts
chemically with a material, such as resin, of equipment, possibly leading to
corrosion or deterioration. If it gets in the CNC or peripheral units, it corrodes
metals, such as copper and silver, used as component materials, possibly
leading to a defective component.
• Synthetic-type coolants having a high permeability
Some synthetic-type coolants whose lubricating component is, for example,
PAG (polyalkylene glycol) have an extremely high permeability. If such a
coolant is used even in equipment having a high closeness, it can readily flow
into the CNC or peripheral units through, for example, gaskets. It is likely that,
if the coolant gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it may deteriorate the
insulation and damage the components.
• Water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level
Some coolants whose pH is increased using alkanolamine are so strong
alkali that its standard dilution will lead to pH10 or higher. If such a coolant
spatters over the surface of the CNC or peripheral unit, it reacts chemically
with a material, such as resin, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration.
s-9
B-64504EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Volume 1 of 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING ............................ s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING...................................... s-6
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ............................................... s-8
TABLE OF CONTENTS ..............................................................................c-1
I. GENERAL
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................... 3
1.1 NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL.......................................................... 5
1.2 NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA ...................................................... 6
II. PROGRAMMING
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................... 9
1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS
FIGURE-INTERPOLATION ......................................................................... 10
1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION ............................................................................. 11
1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT ................................................ 12
1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position) ....................................................12
1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System Specified by CNC -
Coordinate System .................................................................................................13
1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool (Absolute and
Incremental Programming).....................................................................................14
1.4 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING - TOOL
FUNCTION .................................................................................................. 15
1.5 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - AUXILIARY FUNCTION ...... 16
1.6 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 17
1.7 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE...................................................... 19
2 CONTROLLED AXES ........................................................................... 20
2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES ........................................................... 20
2.2 NAMES OF AXES ....................................................................................... 20
2.3 INCREMENT SYSTEM................................................................................ 21
2.4 MAXIMUM STROKE.................................................................................... 22
3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) ...................................... 23
3.1 G CODE LIST .............................................................................................. 24
4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS............................................................ 26
4.1 POSITIONING (G00) ................................................................................... 26
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64504EN/02
4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)................................................................ 27

4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03).................................................. 29
4.4 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) ..................................................... 32
4.5 SKIP FUNCTION (G33)............................................................................... 34
4.6 MULTI-STEP SKIP (G33) ............................................................................ 35
4.7 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL (G33) ............................................................. 36
4.8 SKIP POSITION MACRO VARIABLE IMPROVEMENT .............................. 36
4.9 CONTINUOUS HIGH-SPEED SKIP FUNCTION......................................... 37
4.10 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP .................................................................................. 38
5 FEED FUNCTIONS ............................................................................... 41
5.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 41
5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE ..................................................................................... 42
5.3 CUTTING FEED .......................................................................................... 43
5.4 CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL .............................................................. 44
5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61), Cutting Mode (G64) ........................................................45
5.4.2 Automatic Corner Override....................................................................................45
5.4.2.1 Automatic override for inner corners (G62) ...................................................... 45
5.4.2.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change ........................................................... 47
5.5 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY CIRCLE FOR A ROTARY AXIS
..................................................................................................................... 48
5.6 DWELL ........................................................................................................ 51
6 REFERENCE POSITION....................................................................... 53
6.1 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN............................................................. 53
6.2 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30.1)............................. 56
7 COORDINATE SYSTEM ....................................................................... 58
7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM............................................................ 58
7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM ...................................................... 60
7.2.1 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System................................................................60
7.2.2 Selecting a Workpiece Coordinate System ............................................................61
7.2.3 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System ..............................................................62
7.2.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1).......................................................63
7.2.5 Automatic Coordinate System Setting ...................................................................65
7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM ................................................................ 66
7.4 PLANE SELECTION.................................................................................... 67
8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION ........................................... 68
8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING.................................. 68
8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) ................................................. 68
8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING ............................................................ 71
9 PRESS FUNCTION ............................................................................... 73
9.1 PUNCH FUNCTION (1-CYCLE PRESSING)............................................... 73
9.1.1 Block in which Punching is Made..........................................................................73
9.2 POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF (G70) .................................................... 75
9.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION ................................................................................ 75
9.3.1 Circular Nibbling (G68) .........................................................................................77
9.3.2 Linear Nibbling (G69)............................................................................................81
c-2
9.3.3 Notes on Circular Nibbling (G68) and Linear Nibbling (G69) ..............................82
9.4 NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION....................................................................... 84
9.4.1 G00 Command in Nibbling Mode..........................................................................84
9.4.2 G01, G02, and G03 Commands in Nibbling Mode................................................85
9.4.3 Notes on Nibbling by M Function..........................................................................88
9.5 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION ............................................................... 88
10 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) ........................................................ 89
10.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION .................................................................. 89
10.2 T COMMAND NEGLECT............................................................................. 90
10.3 TOOL OFFSET............................................................................................ 91
10.4 CONTROLLING THE TURRET-AXIS (T-AXIS) ........................................... 91
10.5 MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL ...................................................................... 92
10.5.1 Tool Number ..........................................................................................................92
10.5.2 Relationship between the Multiple–Tool System and the C Axis..........................93
10.5.3 Tool Compensation ................................................................................................94
10.5.4 Operational Notes...................................................................................................94
10.6 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION .................................................... 94
10.6.1 Tool Life Management Data ..................................................................................94
10.6.2 Register and Change of Tool Life Management Data ............................................95
10.6.3 Tool Life.................................................................................................................95
11 AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................................................................ 96

11.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)..................................................... 96
11.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK...................................... 98
11.3 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION .............................................................. 99
11.3.1 Setting an M Code Group Number Using the Setting Screen ................................99
11.3.2 Setting an M Code Group Number Using a Program...........................................100
11.3.3 M Code Group Check Function ...........................................................................101
11.4 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (B CODES) ...................................... 101
11.5 M COMMAND FOR SWITCHING THE PUNCH AND LASER MODE ....... 103
12 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ............................................................... 105
12.1 FOLDERS.................................................................................................. 105
12.1.1 Folder Configuration ............................................................................................105
12.1.2 Folder Attributes...................................................................................................107
12.1.3 Default Folders .....................................................................................................107
12.2 PROGRAMS.............................................................................................. 108
12.2.1 Program Name......................................................................................................108
12.2.2 Program Attributes ...............................................................................................110
12.3 RELATION WITH CONVENTIONAL FUNCTIONS.................................... 110
12.3.1 Relation with Folders ...........................................................................................110
12.3.2 Relation with Program Names..............................................................................111
12.3.3 Related Parameters ...............................................................................................112
12.3.4 Part Program Storage Size / Number of Registerable Programs ..........................113
13 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION........................................................... 115

13.1 PROGRAM COMPONENTS OTHER THAN PROGRAM SECTIONS....... 116
13.2 PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION ................................................ 118
13.3 SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99) ..................................................................... 124
14 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING ................................... 129
c-3
14.1 PATTERN FUNCTION .............................................................................. 129

14.1.1 Base Point Command (G72).................................................................................130
14.1.2 Bolt Hole Circle (G26) .........................................................................................131
14.1.3 Line at Angle (G76) .............................................................................................133
14.1.4 Arc (G77) .............................................................................................................134
14.1.5 Grid (G78, G79) ...................................................................................................135
14.1.6 Share Proofs (G86)...............................................................................................137
14.1.7 Square (G87) ........................................................................................................139
14.1.8 Radius (G88) ........................................................................................................141
14.1.9 Cut at Angle (G89) ...............................................................................................142
14.1.10 Incremental Command Just After Pattern Function .............................................142
14.1.11 Notes on Pattern Functions...................................................................................145
14.2 MEMORY AND CALL BY A/B MACRO ..................................................... 146
14.3 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) ...................................................... 147
14.4 U/V/W MACRO FUNCTION ...................................................................... 152
14.4.1 Storage of Macros ................................................................................................152
14.4.2 Macro Call............................................................................................................153
14.4.3 Nesting Call of Macros.........................................................................................154
14.4.4 Macro Storage Capacity .......................................................................................155
14.4.5 Storage and Call of Multiple Macros (Macro Numbers 90 to 99)........................155
14.4.6 Deletion of Stored Macros ...................................................................................156
14.5 MULTI–PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION .................................................. 156
14.5.1 Base Point Command of Multi-Piece Machining (G98) ......................................156
14.5.2 Multi–Piece Machining Commands (G73, G74)..................................................159
14.5.3 Setting of Machining Method for Multi–Piece Machining ..................................160
14.5.4 Command for Restarting Machining Multiple Products ......................................161
14.5.5 Command to End Punching Multiple Products ....................................................162
14.6 BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, G39) ................................................. 163
14.7 LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND ........................................ 165
14.7.1 Linear Punch Command (G45) ............................................................................165
14.7.2 Circular Punch Commands (G46 and G47)..........................................................167
14.7.3 Controlling the C–axis..........................................................................................169
14.8 Y–AXIS CRACK CANCEL ......................................................................... 170
15 COMPENSATION FUNCTION ............................................................ 171
15.1 SCALING (G50, G51) ................................................................................ 171
15.2 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1) ............................... 177
15.3 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1, or
G150,G151,G152) ..................................................................................... 178
15.4 OVERVIEW OF TOOL COMPENSATION (G40-G42)............................... 183
15.5 DETAILS OF TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION....................................... 188
15.5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................188
15.5.2 Tool Movement in Start-up ..................................................................................191
15.5.3 Tool Movement in Offset Mode...........................................................................196
15.5.4 Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel...............................................................214
15.5.5 Prevention of Overcutting Due to Tool Radius Compensation............................220
15.5.6 Interference Check ...............................................................................................223
15.5.6.1 Operation to be performed if an interference is judged to occur ..................... 226
15.5.6.2 Interference check alarm function ................................................................... 227
15.5.6.3 Interference check avoidance function ............................................................ 228
15.5.7 Tool Radius Compensation for Input from MDI..................................................234
c-4
15.6 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF COMPENSATION VALUES,

AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) ....................... 235
15.7 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G84, G85)..................................... 237
16 CUSTOM MACRO............................................................................... 244
16.1 VARIABLES............................................................................................... 244
16.2 SYSTEM VARIABLES ............................................................................... 249
16.3 DISPLAY OF SYSTEM VARIABLES ......................................................... 275
16.4 READING AND WRITING VARIABLES FOR ANOTHER PATH ............... 275
16.5 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION .................................................. 278
16.6 INDIRECT AXIS ADDRESS SPECIFICATION .......................................... 285
16.7 READING PARAMETERS......................................................................... 286
16.8 MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS..................................... 287
16.9 BRANCH AND REPETITION..................................................................... 288
16.9.1 Unconditional Branch (GOTO Statement) ...........................................................288
16.9.2 GOTO Statement Using Stored Sequence Numbers ............................................288
16.9.3 Conditional Branch (IF Statement) ......................................................................289
16.9.4 Repetition (WHILE Statement)............................................................................290
16.9.5 Precision Specification for Macro Relational Operators ......................................292
16.10 MACRO CALL ........................................................................................... 294
16.10.1 Simple Call (G65) ................................................................................................294
16.10.2 Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66) .............................................298
16.10.3 Modal Call: Each Block Call (G66.1) ..................................................................299
16.10.4 Macro Call Using a G Code .................................................................................301
16.10.5 Macro Call Using a G Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions)...................302
16.10.6 Macro Call Using a G Code with a Decimal Point (Specification of Multiple
Definitions)...........................................................................................................303
16.10.7 Macro Call Using an M Code...............................................................................304
16.10.8 Macro Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions) ................305
16.10.9 Special Macro Call using M code ........................................................................306
16.10.10 Subprogram Call Using an M Code .....................................................................308
16.10.11 Subprogram Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions).......309
16.10.12 Subprogram Calls Using a T Code.......................................................................309
16.10.13 Subprogram Calls Using an S Code .....................................................................310
16.10.14 Subprogram Calls Using a Secondary Auxiliary Function ..................................310
16.10.15 Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address .........................................................311
16.11 MACRO CALL ARGUMENT FOR AXIS NAME EXPANSION ................... 313
16.12 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENTS ................................................... 315
16.13 REGISTERING CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMS ..................................... 318
16.14 CODES AND RESERVED WORDS USED IN CUSTOM MACROS ......... 318
16.15 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS.......................................................... 318
16.16 RESTRICTIONS ........................................................................................ 322
16.17 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO............................................... 324
16.17.1 Specification Method ...........................................................................................325
16.17.2 Details of Functions..............................................................................................325
17 REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO .......................................................... 332

17.1 TYPES OF REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS......................................... 334
17.1.1 Modal Real Time Macro Command / One-shot Real Time Macro Command.....334
17.2 VARIABLES............................................................................................... 339
17.2.1 Variables Dedicated to Real Time Custom Macros .............................................340
c-5
17.2.1.1 System variables .............................................................................................. 340

17.2.1.2 Real time macro variables (RTM variables) .................................................... 342
17.2.2 Custom Macro Variables......................................................................................343
17.2.2.1 System variables .............................................................................................. 344
17.2.2.2 Local variables................................................................................................. 345
17.3 ARITHMETIC AND LOGICAL OPERATION.............................................. 345
17.4 CONTROL ON REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS .................................. 346
17.4.1 Conditional Branch (ZONCE Statement).............................................................347
17.4.2 Condition Transition (ZEDGE Statement) ...........................................................348
17.4.3 Repetition (ZWHILE Statement) .........................................................................349
17.4.4 Multi-statement (ZDO...ZEND Statement) ..........................................................350
17.5 MACRO CALL ........................................................................................... 352
17.6 OTHERS.................................................................................................... 353
17.7 AXIS CONTROL COMMAND .................................................................... 354
17.8 NOTES ...................................................................................................... 363
17.9 LIMITATION .............................................................................................. 364
18 PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT (G10) ............................................ 367
18.1 PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT (G10).................................................... 367
18.2 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ....................................... 368
18.3 TOOL DATA INPUT................................................................................... 372
19 HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS................................................ 373
19.1 Ai Contour Control Function I .................................................................... 373
20 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS............................................................ 383
20.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL........................................................... 383
20.2 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER ..................................................................... 384
20.2.1 Rotary Axis Roll-over ..........................................................................................384
20.3 TANDEM CONTROL ................................................................................. 385
20.4 C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING)............................................ 385
20.4.1 Simultaneously Controlled Axes..........................................................................387
20.4.2 Increment System .................................................................................................387
20.4.3 Maximum Programmable Dimension ..................................................................387
20.4.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ..................................................................387
20.4.5 Manual Continuous Feed, Incremental Feed, Manual Reference Point Return ...387
20.4.6 Relationship with Absolute/Incremental Command (G90/G91) ..........................387
20.4.7 Positioning in Smaller Angle Rotating Direction.................................................387
20.4.8 Blocks Where C–axis Command is Possible........................................................387
20.4.9 C–axis Command and its Operation.....................................................................388
20.4.10 Pattern Function, Nibbling Function and C–axis Command................................389
20.4.11 C–axis Command in Nibbling Mode....................................................................390
20.4.12 T–axis Command Ignore Signal TNG and C–axis Command .............................390
20.4.13 Compensating the Position of the C–axis.............................................................390
20.4.14 Compensating Backlash Along the C–axis for Each Tool Group ........................390
20.5 T–AXIS AND C–AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL ................................ 391
20.6 RAM-AXIS CONTROL............................................................................... 391
20.6.1 Setting RAM-axis Motion Pattern........................................................................391
20.6.2 Press Motion by RAM-axis Control.....................................................................392
20.6.3 RAM-axis Up Motion ..........................................................................................392
21 MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION.................................................. 393

c-6
21.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 393

21.2 WAITING FUNCTION FOR PATHS .......................................................... 394
21.3 COMMON MEMORY BETWEEN EACH PATH......................................... 397
III. OPERATION
1 GENERAL ........................................................................................... 401
1.1 MANUAL OPERATION.............................................................................. 401
1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATIC OPERATION ..... 402
1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ....................................................................... 403
1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM ............................................................................ 404
1.4.1 Check by Running the Machine ...........................................................................404
1.4.2 How to View the Position Display Change without Running the Machine .........406
1.5 EDITING A PROGRAM ............................................................................. 406
1.6 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA.......................................................... 406
1.7 DISPLAY ................................................................................................... 409
1.7.1 Program Display...................................................................................................409
1.7.2 Current Position Display ......................................................................................410
1.7.3 Alarm Display ......................................................................................................411
1.7.4 Parts Count Display, Run Time Display ..............................................................412
2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES .................................................................. 413

2.1 POWER ON/OFF....................................................................................... 413
2.1.1 Turning on the Power ...........................................................................................413
2.1.2 Power Disconnection............................................................................................414
2.2 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS............................................................... 414
2.2.1 8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel..............................................................................414
2.2.2 10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel (12.1"/15"/19" LCD CNC Display Panel).........415
2.2.3 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) ...........................................................................415
2.2.4 Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key)...................................................................416
2.2.5 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)................................................................................416
2.3 EXPLANATION OF THE MDI UNIT........................................................... 417
2.4 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ........................................................ 419
2.4.1 General Screen Operations ...................................................................................419
2.4.2 Function Keys ......................................................................................................420
2.4.3 Soft Keys ..............................................................................................................421
2.5 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES ......................................................................... 428
3 MANUAL OPERATION ....................................................................... 430
3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN........................................... 430
3.2 JOG FEED (JOG) ...................................................................................... 431
3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED .............................................................................. 432
3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 433
3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON ......................................................................... 436
3.6 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ................................... 440
3.6.1 Procedure for Reference Position Establishment .................................................440
3.6.2 Reference Position Return....................................................................................441
3.6.3 Distance Coded Rotary Encoder ..........................................................................441
3.6.4 Axis Synchronization Control ..............................................................................442
3.6.5 Axis Control by PMC...........................................................................................443
3.6.6 Note ......................................................................................................................443
c-7
3.7 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL)

................................................................................................................... 445
4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ................................................................. 449
4.1 MEMORY OPERATION ............................................................................ 449
4.2 MDI OPERATION ...................................................................................... 451
4.3 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 454
4.4 SCHEDULE OPERATION ......................................................................... 456
4.5 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)............................................... 459
4.6 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALLS USING THE DATA SERVER
AVAILABLE IN MULTI-PATH SYSTEMS .................................................. 463
4.7 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION ........................................................ 464
4.8 MIRROR IMAGE........................................................................................ 470
4.9 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART.................................................................... 472
4.10 RETRACE.................................................................................................. 475
5 TEST OPERATION ............................................................................. 483
5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK ............................. 483
5.1.1 Machine Lock.......................................................................................................483
5.1.2 Auxiliary Function Lock ......................................................................................484
5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ............................................................................ 484
5.3 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE................................................................ 485
5.4 DRY RUN .................................................................................................. 486
5.5 SINGLE BLOCK ........................................................................................ 487
5.6 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK FUNCTION ........................................ 488
5.7 PUNCH...................................................................................................... 490
5.8 MANUAL PUNCH ...................................................................................... 490
6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS......................................................................... 491
6.1 EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................. 491
6.2 OVERTRAVEL........................................................................................... 491
6.3 STORED STROKE CHECK....................................................................... 492
6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE ................................................. 495
6.5 STROKE LIMIT AREA CHANGING FUNCTION ....................................... 497
6.6 STORED STROKE LIMIT RANGE SWITCHING FUNCTION BY SIGNAL 498
6.7 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS ................................ 498
6.7.1 Functions that are Used When Data is Set ...........................................................499
6.7.1.1 Input data range check ..................................................................................... 499
6.7.1.2 Confirmation of incremental input .................................................................. 500
6.7.1.3 Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key ............................................. 501
6.7.1.4 Confirmation of the deletion of the program ................................................... 501
6.7.1.5 Confirmation of the deletion of all data........................................................... 502
6.7.1.6 Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process ........................ 502
6.7.2 Functions that are Used when the Program is Executed ......................................503
6.7.2.1 Display of updated modal information ............................................................ 503
6.7.2.2 Start check signal............................................................................................. 503
6.7.2.3 Axis status display ........................................................................................... 504
6.7.2.4 Confirmation of the start from a middle block ................................................ 505
6.7.2.5 Data range check ............................................................................................. 506
6.7.2.6 Maximum incremental value check ................................................................. 506
6.7.3 Setting Screen.......................................................................................................507
c-8
6.7.3.1 Operation confirmation function setting screen............................................... 507
6.7.3.2 Tool offset range setting screen ....................................................................... 508
6.7.3.3 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen .................................................. 510
6.8 SAFETY ZONE CHECK ............................................................................ 512
6.8.1 Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area (Type A) ........................512
6.8.2 Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area (Type B).........................513
6.8.3 Setting the Safety Zone ........................................................................................514
6.8.4 Setting the Tool Shape Area.................................................................................515
6.8.5 Automatic Setting of the Safety Zone ..................................................................515
6.8.6 Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone ........................................................517
6.9 WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE FUNCTION....... 518
6.9.1 Type B ..................................................................................................................518
6.9.2 Tool/Workpiece Holder Areas .............................................................................521
6.10 SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENSION (EIGHT AREAS) .............................. 522
7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS.................................. 523
7.1 ALARM DISPLAY ...................................................................................... 523
7.2 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY ..................................................................... 525
7.3 CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY................................................... 526
7.4 RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN ................................................... 527
7.4.1 Return from the Alarm Screen .............................................................................527
7.4.2 Relationship with Other Functions.......................................................................529
8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ....................................................................... 530

8.1 OVERWRITING FILES ON A MEMORY CARD/USB MEMORY............... 531
8.2 INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN ....................................................... 533
8.2.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program.....................................................................533
8.2.1.1 Inputting a program ......................................................................................... 533
8.2.1.2 Outputting a program....................................................................................... 535
8.2.1.3 Inputting and outputting of O8-digit................................................................ 537
8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters....................................................................537
8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters ........................................................................................ 537
8.2.2.2 Outputting parameters ..................................................................................... 538
8.2.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data...................................................................539
8.2.3.1 Inputting offset data......................................................................................... 539
8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data ...................................................................................... 540
8.2.4 Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data ...................................541
8.2.4.1 Inputting pitch error compensation data .......................................................... 541
8.2.4.2 Outputting pitch error compensation data ....................................................... 542
8.2.4.3 Input/output format of pitch error compensation data ..................................... 543
8.2.5 Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables .............................545
8.2.5.1 Inputting custom macro common variables ..................................................... 545
8.2.5.2 Outputting custom macro common variables .................................................. 545
8.2.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data ..........................547
8.2.6.1 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data.................................................... 547
8.2.6.2 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data................................................. 548
8.2.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data................................................549
8.2.7.1 Outputting operation history data .................................................................... 549
8.2.7.2 Inputting operation history signal selection data ............................................. 549
8.2.7.3 Outputting operation history signal section data ............................................. 550
8.2.7.4 Input/output format of operation history signal selection data ........................ 551
8.2.8 Inputting and Outputting Tool Data .....................................................................552
8.2.8.1 Inputting tool data............................................................................................ 552
8.2.8.2 Outputting tool data ......................................................................................... 553
8.2.8.3 Output format of tool data ............................................................................... 554
c-9
8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN.............................................. 554

8.3.1 Inputting/Outputting a Program ...........................................................................557
8.3.2 Inputting/Outputting all Programs and Folders....................................................560
8.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Parameters....................................................................561
8.3.4 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data...................................................................563
8.3.5 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data..........................................564
8.3.6 Inputting/Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables ....................................566
8.3.7 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data ..........................567
8.3.8 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data................................................568
8.3.9 File Format and Error Messages...........................................................................569
8.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS.................................................. 570
8.4.1 FTP File Transfer Function ..................................................................................570
8.5 SCREEN HARD COPY FUNCTION .......................................................... 576
8.6 USB FUNCTION........................................................................................ 578
8.7 NC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION................................................................ 579
8.7.1 All Data Output Screen ........................................................................................579
8.7.1.1 Output operation .............................................................................................. 580
8.7.1.2 Format.............................................................................................................. 581
8.7.2 Output Directory...................................................................................................581
8.7.2.1 LCD mounted type CNC ................................................................................. 581
8.7.2.2 Stand-alone type CNC (without personal computer function) ........................ 581
8.7.2.3 Stand-alone type CNC (with personal computer function / HSSB connection)581
8.7.2.4 Stand-alone type CNC (with personal computer function / Ethernet connection)
......................................................................................................................... 583
8.7.3 List of Output Data...............................................................................................584
8.7.3.1 Text data .......................................................................................................... 584
8.7.3.2 SRAM data and User files ............................................................................... 585
8.7.4 List of Message ....................................................................................................585
8.7.4.1 Warning message............................................................................................. 585
8.7.4.2 Error message .................................................................................................. 586
8.8 INPUT/OUTPUT FILE NAME FOR MULTI-PATH SYSTEM...................... 586
9 CREATING PROGRAMS .................................................................... 588
9.1 CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI PANEL.................................. 588
9.2 AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS ........................... 589
9.3 CREATING PROGRAMS IN TEACH IN MODE (PLAYBACK) .................. 590
10 EDITING PROGRAMS ........................................................................ 593
10.1 EDIT DISABLE ATTRIBUTE AND DISPLAY DISABLE ATTRIBUTE ........ 593
10.2 INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD ................................ 594
10.2.1 Word Search .........................................................................................................595
10.2.2 Heading a Program...............................................................................................597
10.2.3 Inserting a Word...................................................................................................597
10.2.4 Altering a Word....................................................................................................598
10.2.5 Deleting a Word ...................................................................................................598
10.3 REPLACING A WORD OR ADDRESS...................................................... 599
10.4 DELETING BLOCKS ................................................................................. 600
10.4.1 Deleting a Block...................................................................................................600
10.4.2 Deleting Multiple Blocks .....................................................................................601
10.5 PROGRAM SEARCH ................................................................................ 601
10.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH .............................................................. 603
10.7 DELETING PROGRAMS........................................................................... 604
10.7.1 Deleting One Program..........................................................................................604
c-10
10.7.2 Deleting All Programs..........................................................................................604
10.8 EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS ............................................................. 604
10.9 CURSOR MOVEMENT LIMITATIONS ON PROGRAM EDITING............. 605
10.10 PASSWORD FUNCTION .......................................................................... 606
10.11 EDITING PROGRAM CHARACTERS ....................................................... 608
10.11.1 Available Keys .....................................................................................................610
10.11.2 Input Mode ...........................................................................................................611
10.11.3 Line Number Display ...........................................................................................611
10.11.4 Search ...................................................................................................................611
10.11.5 Replacement .........................................................................................................612
10.11.6 Reversing Edit Operations (Undo Function)........................................................613
10.11.7 Copy .....................................................................................................................613
10.11.8 Cut ........................................................................................................................613
10.11.9 Paste .....................................................................................................................613
10.11.10 Saving...................................................................................................................614
10.11.11 Creation ................................................................................................................614
10.11.12 Line Search...........................................................................................................614
10.12 KEYS AND PROGRAM ENCRYPTION..................................................... 615
10.13 SIMULTANEOUS EDITING OF MULTIPATH PROGRAMS ...................... 618
10.14 MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION .......................................................... 620
10.14.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................620
10.14.2 Details...................................................................................................................621
11 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ............................................................... 626

11.1 SELECTING A DEVICE............................................................................. 627
11.1.1 Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device...................................................627
11.1.2 Selecting a From Cassette as a Device .................................................................631
11.1.3 Selecting a USB Memory as a Device..................................................................632
11.2 CREATING A FOLDER ............................................................................. 633
11.3 RENAMING A FOLDER ............................................................................ 634
11.4 CHANGING CURRENT FOLDER ............................................................. 634
11.5 CHANGING FOLDER ATTRIBUTES......................................................... 636
11.6 DELETING A FOLDER.............................................................................. 636
11.7 SELECTING A DEFAULT FOLDER .......................................................... 637
11.8 RENAMING A FILE ................................................................................... 638
11.9 DELETING A FILE..................................................................................... 638
11.10 CHANGING FILE ATTRIBUTES................................................................ 639
11.11 SELECTING A MAIN PROGRAM.............................................................. 640
11.12 MAKING A PROGRAM COMPACT........................................................... 641
11.13 PROGRAM AND FOLDER COPY/MOVE FUNCTION .............................. 641
11.13.1 Copy and movement between different devices...................................................644
11.14 FOLDER MANAGEMENT ......................................................................... 645
11.14.1 Program Management under the Path Folder .......................................................646
11.14.2 Program Management only in the Path Folder.....................................................647
11.14.3 Folder for Subprogram/Macro Calls ....................................................................648
11.15 PROGRAM VERIFICATION ...................................................................... 649
11.16 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT .............................................. 650
12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA................................................... 652
12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................................... 668
c-11
12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System .......................................668

12.1.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System............................................669
12.1.3 Overall Position Display ......................................................................................671
12.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ..................................................................672
12.1.5 Actual Feedrate Display .......................................................................................673
12.1.6 Display of Run Time and Parts Count..................................................................675
12.1.7 Setting the Floating Reference Position ...............................................................676
12.1.8 Operating Monitor Display ..................................................................................676
12.1.9 Overall Position Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) ............................................677
12.1.10 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (15/19-inch Display Unit)........................679
12.1.11 Actual Feedrate Display (15/19-inch Display Unit).............................................680
12.1.12 Display of Run Time and Parts Count (15/19-inch Display Unit) .......................681
12.1.13 Setting the Floating Reference Position (15/19-inch Display Unit).....................683
12.1.14 Operating Monitor Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) ........................................683

12.2.1 Program Contents Display....................................................................................685
12.2.1.1 Displaying the executed block......................................................................... 686
12.2.1.2 Text display ..................................................................................................... 688
12.2.1.3 Call stack display............................................................................................. 689
12.2.1.4 Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen ....................... 691
12.2.2 Editing a Program.................................................................................................694
12.2.3 Program Screen for MDI Operation .....................................................................696
12.2.4 Program Folder Screen .........................................................................................696
12.2.4.1 Split display on the program folder screen ...................................................... 697
12.2.4.2 Folder tree display ........................................................................................... 701
12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen ..................................................................................703
12.2.6 Program Check Screen .........................................................................................703
12.2.7 Background Editing..............................................................................................704
12.2.8 Stamping the Machining Time .............................................................................709
12.2.9 Program Contents Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) .........................................717
12.2.9.1 Displaying the executed block......................................................................... 718
12.2.9.2 Call stack display (15/19-inch display unit) .................................................... 718
12.2.9.3 Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen (15/19-inch display
unit).................................................................................................................. 721
12.2.10 Editing a Program (15/19-inch Display Unit) ......................................................723
12.2.11 Program Screen for MDI Operation (15/19-inch Display Unit)...........................725
12.2.12 Program Folder Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..............................................725
12.2.12.1 Split display on the program folder screen ...................................................... 726
12.2.12.2 Folder tree display (15/19-inch display unit)................................................... 730
12.2.13 Next Block Display Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ........................................730
12.2.14 Program Check Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)...............................................731
12.2.15 Background Editing (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...................................................732
12.2.16 Stamping the Machining Time (15/19-inch Display Unit)...................................737

12.3.1 Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value ........................................746
12.3.2 Displaying and Entering Setting Data ..................................................................747
12.3.3 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop .............................................................749
12.3.4 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time ..................................751
12.3.5 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value ................................753
12.3.6 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured ..................................754
12.3.7 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables.................................755
12.3.8 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data ......................................756
12.3.9 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel ........................................758
c-12
12.3.10 Displaying and Switching the Display Language ................................................761
12.3.11 Protection of Data at Eight Levels........................................................................762
12.3.11.1 Operation level setting..................................................................................... 762
12.3.11.2 Password modification..................................................................................... 763
12.3.11.3 Protection level setting .................................................................................... 765
12.3.11.4 Setting the change protection level and output protection level of a program 767
12.3.12 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screens ..........................768
12.3.12.1 Displaying and setting items on the initial tool registration screen ................. 768
12.3.12.2 Displaying and setting items on the tool number registration screen .............. 770
12.3.12.3 Displaying and setting items on the screen for the number of press operations771
12.3.12.4 Displaying and setting items on the tool figure registration screen (for drawing
figures)............................................................................................................. 773
12.3.13 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screen for Multiple Tools
..............................................................................................................................775
12.3.13.1 Displaying and setting items on the tool number registration screen for multiple
tools ................................................................................................................. 775
12.3.13.2 Displaying and setting items on the tool figure registration screen for multiple
tools (for drawing figures) ............................................................................... 776
12.3.14 Tool Data Setting Function ..................................................................................779
12.3.15 Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen ........................781
12.3.16 Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value ........................................785
12.3.17 Displaying and Entering Setting Data (15/19-inch Display Unit)........................786
12.3.18 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop (15/19-inch Display Unit)...................788
12.3.19 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time (15/19-inch Display Unit)
..............................................................................................................................790
12.3.20 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value (15/19-inch Display
Unit) .....................................................................................................................792
12.3.21 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured (15/19-inch Display Unit)
..............................................................................................................................793
12.3.22 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables (15/19-inch Display
Unit) .....................................................................................................................794
12.3.23 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data (15/19-inch Display Unit)
..............................................................................................................................796
12.3.24 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel (15/19-inch Display Unit)
..............................................................................................................................797
12.3.25 Displaying and Switching the Display Language (15/19-inch Display Unit) ......800
12.3.26 Protection of Data at Eight Levels (15/19-inch Display Unit) .............................801
12.3.26.1 Operation level setting (15-inch display unit) ................................................. 801
12.3.26.2 Password modification (15-inch display unit) ................................................. 803
12.3.26.3 Protection level setting (15-inch display unit) ................................................. 804
12.3.26.4 Setting the change protection level and output protection level of a program
(15-inch display unit)....................................................................................... 806
12.3.27 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screens (15/19-inch Display
Unit) .....................................................................................................................807
12.3.27.1 Displaying and setting items on the initial tool registration screen ................. 808
12.3.27.2 Displaying and setting items on the tool number registration screen .............. 809
12.3.27.3 Displaying and setting items on the screen for the number of press operations810
12.3.27.4 Displaying and setting items on the tool figure registration screen (for drawing
figures)............................................................................................................. 812
12.3.28 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Number Registration Screen for Multiple
Tools (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..........................................................................814
12.3.28.1 Displaying and setting items on the tool number registration screen for multiple
tools ................................................................................................................. 814
12.3.28.2 Displaying and setting items on the tool figure registration screen for multiple
tools (for drawing figures) ............................................................................... 815
12.3.29 Tool Data Setting Function (15/19-inch Display Unit)........................................817
c-13
12.3.30 Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen (15/19-inch Display
Unit) .....................................................................................................................819

12.4.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters.......................................................................824
12.4.2 Servo Parameters ..................................................................................................826
12.4.3 Servo Tuning ........................................................................................................827
12.4.4 Color Setting Screen.............................................................................................828
12.4.5 Displaying Memory Data .....................................................................................829
12.4.6 Parameter Tuning Screen .....................................................................................831
12.4.6.1 Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item .................................. 831
12.4.6.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) ........................................................ 833
12.4.6.3 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) ............................................................. 835
12.4.6.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen ..................... 835
12.4.6.5 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen ....................................... 836
12.4.6.6 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen ............................................... 836
12.4.6.7 Parameter tuning screen (miscellaneous settings) ........................................... 837
12.4.6.8 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen ............................................... 837
12.4.7 Periodic Maintenance Screen ...............................................................................838
12.4.8 System Configuration Screen ...............................................................................845
12.4.9 Displaying and Setting Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit) ............................847
12.4.10 Servo Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit) .......................................................849
12.4.11 Servo Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit)..............................................................850
12.4.12 Color Setting Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..................................................851
12.4.13 Displaying Memory Data (15/19-inch Display Unit)...........................................852
12.4.14 Parameter Tuning Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...........................................854
12.4.14.1 Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item (15/19-inch display unit)
......................................................................................................................... 854
12.4.14.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15/19-inch display unit)................ 857
12.4.14.3 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) (15/19-inch display unit) .................... 858
12.4.14.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen (15/19-inch
display unit) ..................................................................................................... 859
12.4.14.5 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen (15/19-inch display unit)859
12.4.14.6 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen (15/19-inch display unit) ...... 860
12.4.14.7 Parameter tuning screen (miscellaneous settings) (15/19-inch display unit)... 860
12.4.14.8 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen (15/19-inch display unit)....... 861
12.4.15 Periodic Maintenance Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit).....................................861
12.4.16 System Configuration Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ....................................869

12.5.1 External Operator Message History .....................................................................871
12.6 SWITCHING BETWEEN MULTI-PATH DISPLAY AND SINGLE-PATH
DISPLAY FUNCTION ................................................................................ 874
12.7 FIVE AXES DISPLAY IN ONE SCREEN FOR THE 8.4-INCH DISPLAY UNIT
................................................................................................................... 877
12.8 PATH NAME EXPANSION DISPLAY FUNCTION .................................... 881
12.9 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE
FUNCTION ................................................................................................ 883
12.10 LOAD METER SCREEN ........................................................................... 885
12.10.1 Single-path Display ..............................................................................................885
12.10.2 Two-path Display and Three-path Display ..........................................................886
12.11 DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER/NAME, SEQUENCE NUMBER,
AND STATUS, AND WARNING MESSAGES FOR DATA SETTING OR
INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION .................................................................. 887
c-14
12.11.1 Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and Sequence Number..........887
12.11.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation.888
12.11.3 Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and Sequence Number
(15/19-inch Display Unit) ....................................................................................891
12.11.4 Displaying the Program Name .............................................................................891
12.11.5 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation
(15/19-inch Display Unit) ....................................................................................892
12.12 CALCULATION KEY FUNCTION .............................................................. 894
12.12.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................894
12.12.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................895
12.12.3 Details...................................................................................................................895
13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION......................................................................... 897

13.1 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 898
13.2 REGISTERING THE TOOL FIGURE......................................................... 898
13.3 SPECIFYING DRAWING PARAMETERS ................................................. 899
13.4 GRAPHIC DISPLAY SCREEN AND DRAWING........................................ 902
13.5 EXAMPLE.................................................................................................. 905
14 VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION.......................................................... 908
14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY.................................................................................... 908
14.1.1 Limitations............................................................................................................911
15 TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION .................................................. 912

15.1 TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION......................................................... 912
15.1.1 Details...................................................................................................................912
15.1.2 Operation ..............................................................................................................915
15.1.3 Protection Function ..............................................................................................919
15.1.4 Limitations............................................................................................................921
16 MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION..................... 922

16.1 MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION............................ 922
16.1.1 Details...................................................................................................................922
16.1.1.1 Multi-path program folder ............................................................................... 922
16.1.1.2 Making of machining programs....................................................................... 922
16.1.1.3 Edit of multi-path program .............................................................................. 924
16.1.1.4 Selection of machining program...................................................................... 925
16.1.1.5 Input/output of Multi-path program................................................................. 925
16.1.1.6 Name change of the Multi-path program folder .............................................. 928
16.1.2 Operation of Inputting and Editing for Each Program .........................................929
16.1.3 Limitations............................................................................................................930
IV. MAINTENANCE
1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ................................................................. 933
1.1 ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURRED ..................... 934
1.2 BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS ..................................................... 935
1.3 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY ...................................................... 937
1.3.1 Replacing Battery for Control Unit ......................................................................938
1.3.2 Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC) .........................................................................941
1.3.3 Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders ........................................................942
1.3.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 942
1.3.3.2 Replacing batteries........................................................................................... 942
c-15
1.3.3.3 Replacing the batteries in a separate battery case ............................................ 943

1.3.3.4 Replacing the battery built into the servo amplifier......................................... 943
Volume 2 of 2
APPENDIX
A PARAMETERS.................................................................................... 947
A.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS........................................................... 947
A.2 DATA TYPE............................................................................................. 1088
A.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES....................................... 1089
B PROGRAM CODE LIST .................................................................... 1091
C LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT .......................... 1094
D RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE....................................................... 1099
E NOMOGRAPHS ................................................................................ 1102
E.1 TOOL PATH AT CORNER ...................................................................... 1102
E.2 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING ............................ 1105
F SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET
STATE ............................................................................................... 1106
G CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE .............. 1108
G.1 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE...................... 1108
G.2 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE ........................... 1109
H ALARM LIST ..................................................................................... 1115
I WARNING LIST ................................................................................ 1152
J PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING
........................................................................................................... 1163
J.1 PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING ... 1163
J.1.1 Usage Notes........................................................................................................1163
J.1.2 List of Functions of PC Tool..............................................................................1163
J.1.3 Explanation of Operations..................................................................................1164
J.2 NAMING RULES ..................................................................................... 1172
J.2.1 Naming Rules of Program File...........................................................................1172
J.2.2 Naming Rules of Folder .....................................................................................1172
J.3 RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE..................................... 1173
J.3.1 Usable Characters in Program File.....................................................................1173
J.4 ERROR MESSAGE AND NOTE.............................................................. 1174
J.4.1 List of Error Message .........................................................................................1174
J.4.2 Note ....................................................................................................................1175
K ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL........................................... 1176
c-16
I. GENERAL
B-64504EN/02 GENERAL 1.GENERAL
1 GENERAL
This manual consists of the following parts:
About this manual

I. GENERAL
Describes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals, and notes for reading this
manual.
II. PROGRAMMING
Describes each function: Format used to program functions in the NC language, explanations, and
limitations.
III. OPERATION
Describes the manual operation and automatic operation of a machine, procedures for inputting and
outputting data, and procedures for editing a program.
IV. MAINTENANCE
Describes procedures for daily maintenance and replacing batteries.
APPENDIX
Lists parameters, valid data ranges, and alarms.
NOTE
1 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some products.
For detail, refer to the Descriptions manual (B-64502EN).
2 This manual does not detail the parameters not mentioned in the text. For details
of those parameters, refer to the Parameter Manual (B-64510EN).
Parameters are used to set functions and operating conditions of a CNC
machine tool, and frequently-used values in advance. Usually, the machine tool
builder factory-sets parameters so that the user can use the machine tool easily.
3 This manual describes not only basic functions but also optional functions. Look
up the options incorporated into your system in the manual written by the
machine tool builder.
Applicable models
This manual describes the models indicated in the table below.
In the text, the abbreviations indicated below may be used.
Model name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 30i-PB 30i –PB Series 30i –PB
FANUC Series 31i-PB 31i –PB Series 31i –PB
NOTE
1 Unless otherwise noted, the model names 30i-PB, and 31i-PB are collectively
referred to as 30i. However, this convention is not necessarily observed when
item 2 below is applicable.
2 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some products.
For details, refer to the Descriptions (B-64502EN).
-3-
1.GENERAL GENERAL B-64504EN/02
Special symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
- IP
Indicates a combination of axes such as X_ Y_ Z_
In the underlined position following each address, a numeric value such as a coordinate value is placed
(used in PROGRAMMING.).
- ;
Indicates the end of a block. It actually corresponds to the ISO code LF or EIA code CR.
Related manuals of Series 30i/31i-PB

The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i-PB, Series 31i-PB. This manual is indicated by
an asterisk(*).
Table 1 (a) Related manuals

Manual name Specification number
FANUC Series 30i/31i–PB DESCRIPTIONS B-64502EN
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–B CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64483EN
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64483EN-1
FANUC Series 30i/31i–PB CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64503EN
FANUC Series 30i/31i–PB OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64504EN *
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–B MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64485EN
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–B PARAMETER MANUAL B-64490EN
FANUC Series 30i/31i–PB PARAMETER MANUAL B-64510EN
Programming
Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63943EN-2
Macro Compiler PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-66263EN
C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63943EN-3
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64513EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-63993EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN
DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64043EN
FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64163EN
CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64463EN
Dual Check Safety
Dual Check Safety CONNECTION MANUAL B-64483EN-2
-4-
B-64504EN/02 GENERAL 1.GENERAL
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series
Table 1 (b) Related manuals

Manual name Specification number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65262EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65302EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65282EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65322EN
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series
B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC SERVO MOTOR βis series
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series B-65325EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series B-65270EN
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS series PARAMETER
MANUAL
The above servo motors and the corresponding spindles can be connected to the CNC covered in this
manual. In the αi SV, αi PS, and βi SV series, however, they can be connected only to 30 i-B-compatible
versions. In the βi SVSP series, they cannot be connected.
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series of servo motor is used. For
servo motor and spindle information, refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually
connected.
1.1 NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL

CAUTION
1 The function of an CNC machine tool system depends not only on the CNC, but
on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo system,
the CNC, the operator's panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe the function,
programming, and operation relating to all combinations. This manual generally
describes these from the stand-point of the CNC. So, for details on a particular
CNC machine tool, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder, which
should take precedence over this manual.
2 In the header field of each page of this manual, a chapter title is indicated so that
the reader can reference necessary information easily.
By finding a desired title first, the reader can reference necessary parts only.
3 This manual describes as many reasonable variations in equipment usage as
possible. It cannot address every combination of features, options and commands
that should not be attempted.
If a particular combination of operations is not described, it should not be attempted.
-5-
1.GENERAL GENERAL B-64504EN/02
1.2 NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA

CAUTION
Machining programs, parameters, offset data, etc. are stored in the CNC unit
internal non-volatile memory. In general, these contents are not lost by the
switching ON/OFF of the power. However, it is possible that a state can occur
where precious data stored in the non-volatile memory has to be deleted,
because of deletions from a maloperation, or by a failure restoration. In order to
restore rapidly when this kind of mishap occurs, it is recommended that you
create a copy of the various kinds of data beforehand.
-6-
II. PROGRAMMING
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL
1 GENERAL
Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections:
1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-INTERPOLATION .....................10

1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION ..................................................................................................................11
1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT .................................................................................12
1.4 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING - TOOL FUNCTION ...................15
1.5 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - AUXILIARY FUNCTION...................................16
1.6 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................17
1.7 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE ........................................................................................19
(1) Punching is performed after positioning..............Punching function
Punching Punching Program command

G00 X_ Y_ T01 ;
X_ T02 ;
Tool T01 Tool T02
(2) Continuous, repetitive punching can be performed without halting the pressing process after
positioning.............Nibbling function
Program command
M12 ;
G00 X_ Q_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
:
:
M13 ;
(3) By giving commands for block, it is possible to perform at multiple positions in a given profile.
.............Pattern function
#1 to #n：The order of punching operation
#n
#(n−1)
d #3 Program command
#2 G76 I_ J_ K_ ;
#1
θ
+X
In case of line at angle (G76)
This CNC supports the eight different patterns that will be used most frequently.
-9-
1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-

INTERPOLATION
The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constituting the workpiece parts figure (See Chapter,
“INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS”).
Explanation
The function of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs is called the interpolation.
- Tool movement along a straight line
Program
G01X_Y_T_;
X_;
Tool
Workpiece
Y
Fig. 1.1 (a) Tool movement along a straight line
- Tool movement along an arc
Program
G03X_Y_R_;
Tool
Workpiece
Fig. 1.1 (b) Tool movement along an arc
The term interpolation refers to an operation in which the tool moves along a straight line or arc in the
way described above.
Symbols of the programmed commands G01, G02, ... are called the preparatory function and specify the
type of interpolation conducted in the control unit.
- 10 -
(a) Movement along straight line (b) Movement along arc
G01 Y_ ; G03X_ Y_ R_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
CNC
X axis
Tool
Interpolation movement
Y axis
a)Movement
along straight
line
b)Movement
along arc
Fig. 1.1 (c) Interpolation function
NOTE
Some machines move tables instead of tools but this manual assumes that tools
are moved against workpieces.
1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION

Movement of the tool at a specified speed for punching a workpiece is called the feed.
mm/min Tool
F
Workpiece
Fig. 1.2 (a) Feed function
For example, to feed the tool at a rate of 150 mm/min (feed per minute), specify the following in the
program:
F150.0
The function of deciding the feed rate is called the feed function (See Chapter, “FEED FUNCTIONS”).
- 11 -
1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT
1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position)

A CNC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Normally, tool change and programming of
absolute zero point as described later are performed at this position. This position is called the reference
position.
Reference point
Distance between reference point

and workpiece holder is intrinsically
determined according to machines.
End locator
Workpiece holder
The distance between the

reference point and the end
locator is intrinsically
determined according to
machines.
Fig. 1.3.1 (a) Reference position
Explanation
The tool can be moved to the reference position in two ways:
1. Manual reference position return (See Section, “MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN”)
Reference position return is performed by manual button operation.
2. Automatic reference position return (See Section, “REFERENCE POSITION RETURN”)
In general, manual reference position return is performed first after the power is turned on. In order
to move the tool to the reference position for tool change thereafter, the function of automatic
reference position return is used.
- 12 -
1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System

Specified by CNC - Coordinate System
Z
Z
Y Program Y
X X
Coordinate system
Part drawing CNC
Tool
Command
Tool
Z
Y
Workpiece
X
Machine tool
Fig. 1.3.2 (a) Coordinate system
Explanation
- Coordinate system
The following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations:
(See Chapter, “ COORDINATE SYSTEM”)
1 Coordinate system on part drawing
The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program data, the coordinate values on
this coordinate system are used.
2. Coordinate system specified by the CNC
The coordinate system is prepared on the actual machine tool table. This can be achieved by
programming the distance from the current position of the tool to the zero point of the coordinate
system to be set.
230 Present tool position
300 Distance to the zero point of a coor-

Program dinate system to be set
origin
X
X
Fig. 1.3.2 (b) Coordinate system specified by the CNC
Concrete programming methods for setting coordinate systems specified by the CNC are explained in
Chapter, “COORDINATE SYSTEM”
- 13 -
The positional relation between these two coordinate systems is determined when a workpiece is set on
the table.
The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the CNC in accordance with the command program
generated with respect to the coordinate system on the part drawing, and cuts a workpiece into a shape on
the drawing.
Therefore, in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the drawing, the two coordinate systems
must be set at the same position.
Methods of setting the two coordinate systems in the same position

When a workpiece is set on the table, these two coordinate systems lay as follows:
The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the CNC in accordance with the command program
generated with respect to the coordinate system on the part drawing, and cut a workpiece into a shape
on the drawing.
Therefore, in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the drawing, the two coordinate systems
must be set at the same position.
To set the two coordinate systems at the same position, when setting a workpiece to be machined to
general turret punch press, the workpiece is held by the workpiece holders after positioning it by applying
the end face of the workpiece to the end locator and workpiece holders mounted on the machine as
illustrated below.
Face B
Workpiece X
End locator Face A

Workpiece holder
図1.3.2 (c)
Generally, the distance between the reference point and the and locator as well as the distance between
the reference point and the workpiece holders are intrinsically determined according to machines, and
they are separated from each other by a fixed distance.
1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool

(Absolute and Incremental Programming)
Explanation
Command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute command or incremental command (See
Section, “ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING”).
- 14 -
- Absolute command
The tool moves to a point at "the distance from zero point of the coordinate system" that is to the position
of the coordinate values.
Tool
B(10,30)
A
X
Command specifying movement G90 X10.0 Y30.0 ;

from point A to point B
Coordinates of point B
- Incremental command
Specify the distance from the previous tool position to the next tool position.
Tool
Y=-30
X=40 B
X
Command specifying movement G91 X40.0 Y-30.0 ;

from point A to point B
Distance and direction for movement

along each axis
1.4 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING -

TOOL FUNCTION
When drilling, tapping, or the like, is performed, it is necessary to select a suitable tool. When a number
is assigned to each tool and the number is specified in the program, the corresponding tool is selected.
- 15 -
03
04
02
05
Tool number
01
06
08
07
Turret
<When No.01 is assigned to a punching tool>

When the tool is stored at location 01 in the turret, the tool can be
selected by specifying T01. This is called the tool function (See Chapter, “TOOL FUNCTION (T
FUNCTION)”).
1.5 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - AUXILIARY

FUNCTION
During machining, on–off operation of workpiece holder and clamper is performed.
For this purpose, on–off operations of workpiece holder and clamper should be controlled.
Workpiece
Clamper
Workpiece holder
The function of specifying the on–off operations of the components of the machine is called the
miscellaneous function. In general, the function is specified by and M code.
- 16 -
1.6 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called the program. By specifying
the commands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an arc.
In the program, specify the commands in the sequence of actual tool movements.
Block
Block
Tool movement
sequence
Block
Program Block
:
:
:
:
Block
Fig. 1.6 (a) Program configuration
A group of commands at each step of the sequence is called the block. The program consists of a group of
blocks for a series of machining. The number for discriminating each block is called the sequence number,
and the number for discriminating each program is called the program number (See Chapter,
“PROGRAM CONFIGURATION”).
Explanation
The block and the program have the following configurations.
- Block
1 block
Nxxxxx Gxx Xxxx.x Yxxx.x Mxx Sxx Txx ;
Sequence Preparatory Dimension word Auxiliary Spindle Tool

number function function function function
End of block
Fig. 1.6 (b) Block configuration
A block starts with a sequence number to identify the block and ends with an end-of-block code.
This manual indicates the end-of-block code by; (LF in the ISO code and CR in the EIA code).
The contents of the dimension word depend on the preparatory function. In this manual, the portion of the
dimension word may be represent as IP_.
- 17 -
- Program
;
Oxxxxx ; Program number
Block
Block
Block
: :
: :
: :
M30 ; End of program
Fig. 1.6 (c) Program configuration
Normally, a program number is specified after the end-of-block (;) code at the beginning of the program,
and a program end code (M02 or M30) is specified at the end of the program.
- Main program and subprogram

When machining of the same pattern appears at many portions of a program, a program for the pattern is
created. This is called the subprogram. On the other hand, the original program is called the main
program. When a subprogram execution command appears during execution of the main program,
commands of the subprogram are executed. When execution of the subprogram is finished, the sequence
returns to the main program.
Main program
: Subprogram #1
:
M98P1001 O1001
:
:
:
M99
M98P1002
:
:
Subprogram #2
M98P1001 O1002
:
:
:
M99
Fig. 1.6 (d) Subprogram execution
- 18 -
1.7 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE

Limit switches are installed at the ends of each axis on the machine to prevent tools from moving beyond
the ends. The range in which tools can move is called the stroke.
Machine zero point
Motor
Limit
switch
Stroke area
Besides strokes defined with limit switches, the operator can define an area which the tool cannot enter
using a program or data in memory. This function is called stroke check (See Section, “STORED
STROKE CHECK”).
Motor
Limit
switch
Machine zero point
Specify these distances.
Tools cannot enter this area. The area is

specified by data in memory or a program.
- 19 -
2.CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
2 CONTROLLED AXES
Chapter 2, "CONTROLLED AXES", consists of the following sections:
2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES...............................................................................................20

2.2 NAMES OF AXES .............................................................................................................................20
2.3 INCREMENT SYSTEM.....................................................................................................................21
2.4 MAXIMUM STROKE........................................................................................................................22
2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES

Explanation
The number of controlled axes used with this NC system depends on the model and system control type
as indicated below.
Series 30i-PB Series 31i-PB

Number of controlled axes 3 axes 3 axes
Controlled axes expansion (each axis) (including PMC axes) Max. 24 axes Max. 12 axes
Controlled axes expansion (total) (including PMC axes) Max. 32 axes Max. 20 axes
Simultaneously controlled axes (each path) 2 axes 2 axes
Simultaneously controlled axes expansion (total / each path) Max. 24 axes Max. 4 axes
PMC control axis Max. 32 axes Max. 16 axes
NOTE
1 The maximum number of controlled axes that can be used is limited depending
on the option configuration. Refer to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder for details.
2 The number of simultaneously controllable axes for manual operation (jog feed,
manual reference position return, or manual rapid traverse) is 1 or 3 (1 when bit
0 (JAX) of parameter No. 1002 is set to 0 and 3 when it is set to 1).
2.2 NAMES OF AXES

Explanation
The user can assign any one of the following nine characters as the axis name: A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, T,
and Z. Parameter No. 1020 is used to determine the name of each axis.
When this parameter is set to 0 or a character other than the valid characters is specified, an axis name
from 1 to 8 is assigned by default.
With complex machines, one character would become insufficient for representing axis names. So, up to
three characters can be used for axis names. A move axis may be named "X", "X1", or "XA1". The first
character of the three characters is called the first axis name character, the second character is called the
second axis name character, and third character is called the third axis name character.
Example)
X A 1
3rd axis name character
2nd axis name character
1st axis name character
- 20 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 2.CONTROLLED AXES
NOTE
1 Axis names are predetermined according to the machine used. Refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
2 Since many ordinary machines use one character to represent each address,
one-character addresses are used in the description in this manual.
Limitations
- Default axis name
When a default axis name (1 to 8) is used, operation in the MEM mode, MDI mode and RMT mode is
disabled.
- Duplicate axis names

If a duplicate axis name is specified in the parameter, operation is enabled only for the axis specified first.
If A, B, U, V and W is specified an axis name, the punch press macro function is not available.
2.3 INCREMENT SYSTEM

Explanation
The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input) and least command increment (for
output). The least input increment is the least increment for programming the travel distance. The least
command increment is the least increment for moving the tool on the machine. Both increments are
represented in mm, inches, or deg.
Five types of increment systems are available as indicated in Table 2.3 (a). For each axis, an increment
system can be set using a bit from bit 0 to bit 3 (ISA, ISC, ISD, or ISE) of parameter No. 1013.
IS-C, IS-D, and IS-E are optional functions.
Table 2.3 (a) Increment system

Name of increment system Least input increment Least command increment
0.01 mm 0.01 mm
IS-A 0.001 inch 0.001 inch
0.01 deg 0.01 deg
0.001 mm 0.001 mm
IS-B 0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch
0.001 deg 0.001 deg
0.0001 mm 0.0001 mm
IS-C 0.00001 inch 0.00001 inch
0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg
0.00001 mm 0.00001 mm
IS-D 0.000001 inch 0.000001 inch
0.00001 deg 0.00001 deg
0.000001 mm 0.000001 mm
IS-E 0.0000001 inch 0.0000001 inch
0.000001 deg 0.000001 deg
The least command increment is either metric or inch depending on the machine tool. Set metric or inch
to the bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 0100.
For selection between metric and inch for the least input increment, G code (G20 or G21) or a setting
parameter selects it.
Combined use of the inch system and the metric system is not allowed. There are functions that cannot be
used between axes with different unit systems (circular interpolation, cutter compensation, etc.). For the
increment system, see the machine tool builder's manual.
- 21 -
2.CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
NOTE
Some increment systems are unavailable depending on the model. For details,
refer to “Descriptions” (B-64502EN).
2.4 MAXIMUM STROKE

Explanation
The maximum stroke controlled by this CNC is shown in the table below:
Maximum stroke = Least command increment × 999999999 (99999999 for IS-A)
Commands that exceed the maximum stroke are not permitted.
Table 2.4 Maximum strokes

Name of increment system Least input increment Maximum stroke
0.01 mm ±999999.99 mm
IS-A 0.001 inch ±99999.999 inch
0.01 deg ±999999.99 deg
0.001 mm ±999999.999 mm
IS-B 0.0001 inch ±99999.9999 inch
0.001 deg ±999999.999 deg
0.0001 mm ±99999.9999 mm
IS-C 0.00001 inch ±9999.99999 inch
0.0001 deg ±99999.9999 deg
0.00001 mm ±9999.99999 mm
IS-D 0.000001 inch ±999.999999 inch
0.00001 deg ±9999.99999 deg
0.000001 mm ±999.999999 mm
IS-E 0.0000001 inch ±99.9999999 inch
0.000001 deg ±999.999999 deg
NOTE
1 The actual stroke depends on the machine tool.
2 Some increment systems are unavailable depending on the model. For details,
refer to "Descriptions" (B-64502EN)
- 22 -
3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING (G FUNCTION)
3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned block.
G codes are divided into the following two types.
Type Meaning
One-shot G code The G code is effective only in the block in which it is specified.
Modal G code The G code is effective until another G code of the same group is specified.
(Example)
G01 and G00 are modal G codes in group 01.
G01 X_ ;
Y_ ; G01 is effective in this range.
X_ ;
G00 Y_ ;
:
Explanation
1. When the clear state (bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402) is set at power-up or reset, the modal G
codes are placed in the states described below.
(1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with as indicated in Table.
(2) G20 and G21 remain unchanged when the clear state is set at power-up or reset.
(3) Which status G22 or G23 at power on is set by bit 7 (G23) of parameter No. 3402. However,
G22 and G23 remain unchanged when the clear state is set at reset.
(4) The user can select G00 or G01 by setting bit 0 (G01) of parameter No. 3402.
(5) The user can select G90 or G91 by setting bit 3 (G91) of parameter No. 3402.
(6) In the machining center system, the user can select G17, G18, or G19 by setting bits 1 (G18)
and 2 (G19) of parameter No. 3401.
2. G codes other than G10 and G11 are one-shot G codes.
3. When a G code not listed in the G code list is specified, or a G code that has no corresponding
option is specified, alarm PS0010 occurs.
4. Multiple G codes can be specified in the same block if each G code belongs to a different group. If
multiple G codes that belong to the same group are specified in the same block, only the last G code
specified is valid.
5. G codes are indicated by group.
6. There are two G code systems in the FANUC Series 30i/31i-PB (Table 3.1). Select a G code system
using bit 6 (GSB) of parameter No. 3401.
- 23 -
3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION
(G FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
3.1 G CODE LIST

Table3.1 G code list
G code system
Group Function
A B
G00 G00 Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01 G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
G04 G04 Dwell
G05.1 G05.1 AI contour control (*1)
G05.4 G05.4 HRV3 on/off
G08 G08 AI contour control (advanced preview control compatible
00
command) (*1)
G09 G09 Exact stop
G10 G10 Programmable data input
G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G17 G17 XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 G18 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19 G19 YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G20 G20 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 Input in mm
G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
G26 G26 Bolt hole circle
G28 G50 Automatic reference point return
G30.1 G30.1 Floating reference position return operation
G32 G32 00 Automatic safety zone setting
G33 G33 Skip function
G38 G38 Bending compensation X
G39 G39 Bending compensation X
G40 G40 Tool radius compensation : cancel
G41 G41 07 Tool radius compensation : left
G42 G42 Tool radius compensation : right
G40.1(G150) G40.1(G150) Normal direction control cancel mode
G41.1(G151) G41.1(G151) 18 Normal direction control on : left
G42.1(G152) G42.1(G152) Normal direction control on : right
G45 G45 Linear punching
G46 G46 00 Circular punching (CW)
G47 G47 Circular punching (CCW)
G50 G34 Scaling cancel
11
G51 G35 Scaling
G50.1 G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G52 G93 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
14
G61 G61 Exact stop mode
G62 G62 15 Automatic corner override
G64 G64 Cutting mode
- 24 -
3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING (G FUNCTION)
G code system
Group Function
A B
G65 G95 00 Macro call
G66 G96 Macro modal call A
G66.1 G66.1 12 Macro modal call B
G67 G97 Macro modal call A/B cancel
G68 G68 Circular nibbling
G69 G69 Linear nibbling
G70 G70 Positioning & press off
G72 G72 Standard point command
G73 G75 Multi–piece machining command X
G74 G76 00 Multi–piece machining command Y
G75 G27 Automatic repositioning
G76 G28 Line at angle
G77 G29 Arc
G78 G36 GridⅠ
G79 G37 GridⅡ
G84 G84 Coordinate system rotation start
16
G85 G85 Coordinate system rotation cancel
G86 G66 Share proof
G87 G67 Square
00
G88 G78 Radius
G89 G79 Cut at angle
G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
G91 G91 Incremental programming
G91.1 G91.1 Checking the maximum incremental amount specified
G92 G92 Setting for workpiece coordinate system
00
G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G98 G98 Coordinate system setting (Multi–piece machining)
*1: In punching mode, AI Contour Control I function cannot be used.
- 25 -
4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Interpolation functions specify the way to make an axis movement (in other words, a movement of the
tool with respect to the workpiece or table).
Chapter 4, "INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
4.1 POSITIONING (G00).........................................................................................................................26

4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)...................................................................................................27
4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03).....................................................................................29
4.4 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)........................................................................................32
4.5 SKIP FUNCTION (G33) ....................................................................................................................34
4.6 MULTI-STEP SKIP (G33) .................................................................................................................35
4.7 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL (G33) .................................................................................................36
4.8 SKIP POSITION MACRO VARIABLE IMPROVEMENT ..............................................................36
4.9 CONTINUOUS HIGH-SPEED SKIP FUNCTION............................................................................37
4.10 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP.......................................................................................................................38
4.1 POSITIONING (G00)

The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with an absolute or an
incremental programming at a rapid traverse rate.
In the absolute programming, coordinate value of the end point is programmed.
In the incremental programming the distance the tool moves is programmed.
Format
G00 IP_ ;
IP_ : For an absolute programming, the coordinates of an end point, and for an
incremental programming, the distance the tool moves.
Explanation
Either of the following tool paths can be selected according to bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401.
• Nonlinear interpolation type positioning
The tool is positioned with the rapid traverse rate for each axis separately. The tool path is normally
straight.
• Linear interpolation type positioning
The tool is positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed that is not more than the rapid
traverse rate for each axis.
Linear interpolation type positioning Start position
End position
Non linear interpolation type positioning
- 26 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
The rapid traverse rate in G00 command is set to the parameter No. 1420 for each axis independently by
the machine tool builder. In the positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a
predetermined speed at the start of a block and is decelerated at the end of a block. Execution proceeds to
the next block after confirming the in-position.
"In-position " means that the feed motor is within the specified range.
This range is determined by the machine tool builder by setting to parameter No. 1826.
When G00X_Y_T ; is specified in a machine having a turret axis (T–axis), the X and Y axes move to the
specified positions at rapid traverse rate and also the T–axis moves at the predetermined rapid traverse
rate in such a way as to select a specified tool number.
In a machine provided with a die angle index (C–axis), if “G00X_Y_C_ ; ” is specified, the X, Y, and C
axes move simultaneously at the predetermined rapid traverse rate.
Refer to “C axis control” for the details. Since this control system treats the turret punch press as a
controlled system, the tool moves to the commanded position as fast as possible for punching as the basic
principle.
Accordingly, the tool is positioned at rapid traverse, punching is done after axis movement in the G00
mode, in principle.
Refer to “Punch function” for details.
CAUTION
For T– or C–axis command blocks, nonlinear interpolation positioning is
performed, even if linear interpolation positioning is specified.
And, for block including G28 or G53 command, nonlinear interpolation
positioning is performed.
4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)

Tools can move along a line.
Format
G01 IP_ F_ ;
IP_ : For an absolute programming, the coordinates of an end point, and for an incremental
programming, the distance the tool moves.
F_ : Speed of tool feed (Feedrate)
Explanation
A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate specified in F.
The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It need not be specified for each
block.
The feedrate commanded by the F code is measured along the tool path. If the F code is not commanded,
the feedrate is regarded as zero.
The feedrate of each axis direction is as follows.
G01 αα ββ γγ ζζ Ff ;
α β
Feed rate of α axis direction : Fα = ×f Feed rate of β axis direction : Fβ = ×f
L L
γ ζ
Feed rate of γ axis direction : Fγ = ×f Feed rate of ζ axis direction : Fζ = ×f
L L
L = α 2 + β 2 +γ 2 +ζ 2
The feedrate of the rotary axis is commanded in the unit of deg/min (the unit is decimal point position).
- 27 -
When the straight line axis α (such as X, Y, or Z) and the rotating axis β (such as A, B, or C) are linearly
interpolated, the feedrate is that in which the tangential feedrate in the α and β cartesian coordinate
system is commanded by F (mm/min).
β-axis feedrate is obtained ; at first, the time required for distribution is calculated by using the above
formula, then the β-axis feedrate unit is changed to deg/min.
A calculation example is as follows.

G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ;
This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metric input.
The time required for distribution is calculated as follows:
20 2 + 40 2
0.14907(mm)
300
The feedrate for the C axis is
40
268.3 deg/ min
0.14907
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the feedrate is calculated the same way as in 2 axes control.
Limitations
• Punching (1–cycle pressing) is not performed in G01 mode. However, when bit 7 (CPF) of
parameter No.16001 is set to 1, punching can be performed on the end point in G01 mode.
• T code can’t be specified in G01 mode. If specified, an alarm (PS 4600) occurs.
However, when T code is specified independently and bit 0 (NMG) of parameter No.16181 is set, an
alarm does not occur.
Example
- Linear interpolation
(G91) G01X200.0Y100.0F200.0;
Y axis
100.0 (End point)
X axis
0 (Start point) 200.0
- Feedrate for the rotary axis

G91G01C-90.0 F300.0 ;Feed rate of 300deg/min
(Start point)
90°
(End point)
Feedrate is 300 deg/min
- 28 -
4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)

The command below will move a tool along a circular arc.
Format
Arc in the XpYp plane
G02 I_ J_
G17 Xp_ Yp_ F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc in the ZpXp plane
G02 I_ K_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc in the YpZp plane
G02 J_ K_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ F_ ;
G03 R_
Command Description
G17 Specification of arc on XpYp plane
G18 Specification of arc on ZpXp plane
G19 Specification of arc on YpZp plane
G02 Circular Interpolation : Clockwise direction (CW)
G03 Circular Interpolation : Counterclockwise direction (CCW)
Xp_ Command values of X axis or its parallel axis (set by parameter No. 1022)
Yp_ Command values of Y axis or its parallel axis (set by parameter No. 1022)
Zp_ Command values of Z axis or its parallel axis (set by parameter No. 1022)
I_ Xp axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc with sign
J_ Yp axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc with sign
K_ Zp axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc with sign
R_ Arc radius (with sign, radius value for lathe cutting)
F_ Feedrate along the arc
Explanation
- Direction of the circular interpolation
"Clockwise"(G02) and "counterclockwise"(G03) on the XpYp plane (ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are
defined when the XpYp plane is viewed in the positive-to-negative direction of the Zp axis (Yp axis or
Xp axis, respectively) in the Cartesian coordinate system. See the figure below (Fig. 4.3 (a)).
Y X Z
G03 G03 G03
G02 G02 G02

X Z Y
G17 G18 G19
Fig. 4.3 (a)
- Distance moved on an arc

The end point of an arc is specified by address Xp, Yp or Zp, and is expressed as an absolute or
incremental value according to G90 or G91. For the incremental value, the distance of the end point
which is viewed from the start point of the arc is specified with sign.
- 29 -
- Distance from the start point to the center of arc

The arc center is specified by addresses I, J, and K for the Xp, Yp, and Zp axes, respectively. The
numerical value following I, J, or K, however, is a vector component in which the arc center is seen from
the start point, and is always specified as an incremental value irrespective of G90 and G91, as shown
below (Fig. 4.3 (b)).
I, J, and K must be signed according to the direction.
End point (x,y) End point (z,x) End point (y,z)
y x z
x Start z Start y Start
i k j
point point point
j i k
Center Center Center
Fig. 4.3 (b)

I0, J0, and K0 can be omitted.
When Xp, Yp , and Zp are omitted (the end point is the same as the start point) and the center is specified
with I, J, and K, a 360° arc (circle) is specified.
G02I; Command for a circle
If the difference between the radius at the start point and that at the end point exceeds the value in a
parameter (No.3410), an alarm (PS0020) occurs.
- Arc radius
The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can be specified using the
radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K.
In this case, one arc is less than 180°, and the other is more than 180° are considered. When an arc
exceeding 180° is commanded, the radius must be specified with a negative value. If Xp, Yp, and Zp are
all omitted, if the end point is located at the same position as the start point and when R is used, an arc of
0° is programmed
G02R_ ; (The cutter does not move.)
For arc <1> (less than 180°)
G91 G02 XP60.0 YP55.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
For arc <2> (greater than 180°)
G91 G02 XP60.0 YP55.0 R-50.0 F300.0 ;
<2>
r=50mm
End point
<1>
Start point
r=50mm
Y
- Feedrate
The feedrate in circular interpolation is equal to the feedrate specified by the F code, and the feedrate
along the arc (the tangential feedrate of the arc) is controlled to be the specified feedrate.
The error between the specified feedrate and the actual tool feedrate is ±2% or less. However, this
feedrate is measured along the arc after the tool radius compensation is applied
- 30 -
Limitation
- Simultaneously specifying R with I, J, and K
If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the arc specified by address R takes precedence
and the other are ignored.
- Specifying an axis that is not contained in the specified plane

If an axis not comprising the specified plane is commanded, an alarm PS0021 occurs.
For example, if the X-axis and a U-axis parallel to the X-axis are specified when the XY plane is
specified
- Specifying a semicircle with R

When an arc having a center angle approaching 180° is specified, the calculated center coordinates may
contain an error. In such a case, specify the center of the arc with I, J, and K.
- Difference in the radius between the start and end points

If the difference in the radius between the start and end points of the arc exceeds the value specified in
parameter No. 3410, alarm PS0020 is generated.
When an end point does not lie on the arc, a spiral results, as shown below.
End point
γe
γ(t) ( γ e − γ s) θ(t )
γ (t) = γ s +
θ θ
θ(t)
Start point
γs Center
Radius
Start point
γs
γe End point
Center θ
θ
The arc radius changes linearly with the center angle θ(t). Spiral interpolation is performed using a
circular command that specifies one arc radius for the start point and another arc radius for the end point.
To use spiral interpolation, set a large value in parameter No. 3410, used to specify the limit on the arc
radius error.
- Punching operation
Punching (1–cycle pressing) is not performed in G02 and G03 mode. However, when bit 7 (CPF) of
parameter No.16001 is set to 1, punching can be performed on the end point in G02 or G03 mode.
- T code
If T command is specified in G02 and G03 mode, however, when T code is specified independently and
bit 0 (NMG) of parameter No. 16181 is set, an alarm (PS 4600) doesn’t occur.
- 31 -
Example
Y axis
100
50
60
60
40
X axis
0
90 120 140 200
The above tool path can be programmed as follows;

(1) In absolute programming
G92X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ;
G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0 R60.0 F300. ;
G02 X120.0 Y60.0 R50.0 ;
or
G92X200.0 Y40.0Z0 ;
G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0I-60.0 F300. ;
G02 X120.0 Y60.0I-50.0 ;
(2) In incremental programming
G91 G03 X-60.0 Y60.0 R60.0 F300. ;
G02 X-20.0 Y-40.0 R50.0 ;
or
G91 G03 X-60.0 Y60.0 I-60.0 F300. ;
G02 X-20.0 Y-40.0 I-50.0 ;
4.4 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)

Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up to two other axes which move
synchronously with the circular interpolation by circular commands.
Format
Arc in the XpYp plane
G02 I_ J_
G17 Xp_ Yp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc in the ZpXp plane
G02 K_ I_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc in the YpZp plane
G02 J_ K_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 R_
α, β : Any one axis where circular interpolation is not applied.
Up to two other axes can be specified.
- 32 -
Explanation
A tangential velocity of an arc in a specified plane or a tangential velocity about the linear axis can be
specified as the feedrate, depending on the setting of bit 5 (HTG) of parameter No.1403.
An F command specifies a feedrate along a circular arc, when HTG is specified to 0. Therefore, the
feedrate of the linear axis is as follows:
Length of linear axis
F×
Length of circular arc
Determine the feedrate so the linear axis feedrate does not exceed any of the various limit values.
Tool path
X Y
The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolated axes is the
specified feedrate.
If HTG is set to 1, specify a feedrate along the tool path about the linear axis. Therefore, the tangential
velocity of the arc is expressed as follows:
Length of arc
F×
2 2
(Length of arc) + (Length of linear axis)
The velocity along the linear axis is expressed as follows:
Length of linear axis
F×
2 2
(Length of arc) + (Length of linear axis)
Tool path
X Y
The feedrate along the tool path is specified.
Limitation
• Tool radius compensation is applied only for a circular arc.
• Tool offset and tool length compensation cannot be used in a block in which a helical interpolation
is commanded.
- 33 -
4.5 SKIP FUNCTION (G33)

Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G33 command, like G01.
If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is
interrupted and the next block is executed.
The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed but specified with a signal from
the machine, for example, in grinding. It is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece.
Format
G33 IP ;
G33 : One-shot G code (If is effective only in the block in which it is specified)
Explanation
The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a custom macro because they are
stored in the custom macro system variable #100151 to #100182, as follows. For systems with up to 20
axes, FS16-compatible system variables (#5061 to #5080) may also be used.
#100151 (#5061) : First axis coordinate value
#100152 (#5062) : Second axis coordinate value
:
#100170 (#5080) : 20th axis coordinate value
#100171 : 21st axis coordinate value
#100172 : 22nd axis coordinate value
:
#100182 : 32nd axis coordinate value
CAUTION
Disable feedrate override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration
(however, these become available by setting bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200
to 1.) when the feedrate per minute is specified, allowing for an error in the
position of the tool when a skip signal is input. These functions are enabled
when the feedrate per rotation is specified.
NOTE
If G33 command is issued while tool radius compensation is applied, an alarm
PS0035 is displayed. Cancel the tool radius compensation with the G40
command before the G33 command is specified.
Example
- The next block to G33 is an incremental programming
G33 G91 X100.0 F100;
Y50.0;
Skip signal is input here 50.0
Y
100.0
Actual motion
X
Motion without skip signal
Fig. 4.5 (a) The next block is an incremental programming
- 34 -
- The next block to G33 is an absolute programming for 1 axis

G33 G90 X200.0 F100; Y100.0
Y100.0;
Skip signal is input here
X200.0
Actual motion
Fig. 4.5 (b) The next block is an absolute programming for 1 axis
- The next block to G33 is an absolute programming for 2 axes

G33 G90 X200.0 F100;
X300.0 Y100.0;
Y
Skip signal is input here

100
(300,100)
Actual motion
X
100 200 300
Fig. 4.5 (c) The next block is an absolute programming for 2 axes
4.6 MULTI-STEP SKIP (G33)

In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G33, the multi-step skip function stores coordinates in a custom
macro variable when a skip signal (4-point or 8-point ; 8-point when a high-speed skip signal is used) is
turned on. In the block where Q1 to Q4 are specified after G04, dwell can be skipped when skip signals
(four or eight signals, or eight signals when high-speed skip signals are used) are input.
A skip signal from equipment such as a fixed-dimension size measuring instrument can be used to skip
programs being executed.
In plunge grinding, for example, a series of operations from rough machining to spark-out can be
performed automatically by applying a skip signal each time rough machining, semi-fine machining,
fine-machining, or spark-out operation is completed.
Format
Move command
G33 IP_ F_ P_ ;
IP_ : End point
F_ : Feedrate
P_ : P1 to P4
Dwell
G04X(U,P)_ (Q_ );
X(U,P)_ : Dwell time
Q_ : Q1 to Q4
- 35 -
Explanation
Multi-step skip is caused by specifying P1, P2, P3, or P4 in a G33 block. For an explanation of selecting
(P1, P2, P3, or P4), refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Specifying Q1, Q2, Q3, or Q4 in G04 (dwell command) enables dwell skip in a similar way to specifying
G33. A skip may occur even if Q is not specified. For an explanation of selecting (Q1, Q2, Q3, or Q4),
refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
- Correspondence to skip signals

Parameters Nos. 6202 to 6205 can be used to specify whether the 4-point or 8-point skip signal is used
(when a high-speed skip signal is used). Specification is not limited to one-to-one correspondence. It is
possible to specify that one skip signal correspond to two or more Pn's or Qn's (n=1, 2, 3, 4). Also, bits 0
(DS1) and 7 (DS8) parameter No.6206 can be used to specify dwell.
CAUTION
Dwell is not skipped when Qn is not specified and bits 0 (DS1) and 7 (DS8)
parameter No.6206 are not set.
4.7 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL (G33)

The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (connected directly to the NC; not via the
PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal. In this case, up to eight signals can be input.
Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 - 2 msec at the NC side (not considering those at the PMC side).
This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec or less, thus allowing high
precision measurement.
For details, refer to the appropriate manual supplied from the machine tool builder.
Format
G33 IP ;
G33; One-shot G code (If is effective only in the block in which it is specified)
4.8 SKIP POSITION MACRO VARIABLE IMPROVEMENT

Overview
In macro variables #100151 to #100200 (#5061 to #5080) for reading the skip position when executing
the skip command (G33), by setting bit 7 (SKM) of parameter No. 6007 to 1, it is now possible to read
the skip position in the workpiece coordinate system at the time a skip is made even if the workpiece
coordinate system setting/selection command is executed after the skip command is executed.
By setting bit 7 (SKM) of parameter No. 6007 to 0, it is possible to read the skip position that reflects the
workpiece coordinate system at the time it is read, as usual, if the workpiece coordinate system
setting/selection command is executed after the skip command is executed.
Macro variable
The following are the macro variables that can read the position at the time a skip is made even if the
workpiece coordinate system setting/selection command is executed after the skip command is executed,
by setting bit 7 (SKM) of parameter No. 6007 to 1.
- 36 -
System variable System variable

Attribute Description
number name
#5061 to #5080 [#_ABSKP[n]] R Skip position (workpiece coordinate system)
Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20).
#100151 to #100200 The numbers to the left can also be used.
#5421 to #5440 [#_SKPDTC[n]] R Skip position (workpiece coordinate system, detection unit)
#100701 to #100750 The numbers to the left can also be used.
4.9 CONTINUOUS HIGH-SPEED SKIP FUNCTION

Overview
The continuous high-speed skip function is used to read absolute coordinates using high-speed skip
signals HDI0 to HDI7. Inputting a high-speed skip signal in a G33P90 block causes absolute coordinates
to be stored in custom macro variables #5061 to #5080.
For a system with more than 20 axes, they are stored in variables #100151 to #100182. An axis
movement does not stop even if a signal is input, so that the coordinates of multiple points can be read.
Using bit 5 (CSE) of parameter No. 6201, it is possible to enable both the rising and falling edges of a
high-speed skip signal.
For details, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Format
G33 P90 IP ;
G33; One-shot G code (If is effective only in the block in which it is specified)
Explanation
- Custom macro variables
If a high-speed skip signal is input when G33P90 is issued, absolute coordinates are stored in custom
macro variables #5061 to #5080. For a system exceeding 20 axes, they are stored in variables #100151 to
#100182.
These variables are updated as soon as the axis reaches a new skip position. It is, therefore, necessary to
specify a speed so that the axis reaches the next skip position in a period of time longer than it takes for
the application to read the variable values.
System with 20 or less axes System with more than 20 axes
#5061 Coordinates on the first axis #100151 Coordinates on the first axis
#5062 Coordinates on the second axis #100152 Coordinates on the second axis
#5063 Coordinates on the third axis #100153 Coordinates on the third axis
: :
#5079 Coordinates on the 19th axis #100181 Coordinates on the 31st axis
#5080 Coordinates on the 20th axis #100182 Coordinates on the 32nd axis
- High-speed skip signal

This function works with a high-speed skip signal only.
Select a high-speed skip signal with bits 0 to 7 (9S1 to 9S8) of parameter No. 6208.
- Ending a block
A G33P90 block is ended when the axis reaches the end point.
- 37 -
Limitation
The continuous high-speed skip function (G33P90) block must be a command for a single axis only. If an
attempt is made to specify two or more axes, alarm PS5068 is issued.
4.10 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP

Overview
Executing the move command following G33P99 (or G33P98) while overriding the torque limit*1 on the
servo motor enables cutting feed in to be performed in the same way as in linear interpolation (G01). If,
during the movement with this command, the torque of the servo motor reaches the torque limit value
(torque limit on the servo motor multiplied by the override) due to pressing or other causes or a skip
signal (including a high-speed skip signal) is input, any remaining move commands will be canceled, and
the next block is executed. (The operation of canceling any remaining move commands and executing the
next block is called a skip operation in the remainder of this document.)
It is possible to override the torque limit on the servo motor with the following command methods:
(1) Execute the torque limit override command in the PMC window.
(2) Execute an address Q command in the same block as that containing a G33P99 (or G33P98)
command.
*1 : The torque limit on the servo motor is automatically set to a value conforming to the motor type
setting. The override is applied to the maximum torque of the servo motor.
In order to override the torque limit on the servo motor, set bit 0 (TQO) of parameter No. 6286 to 1.
Format
G33 P98 Q_ α_ F_
G33 P99 Q_ α_ F_
G33 : Skip command (one-shot G code)

P98 : Performs a skip operation if the torque of the servo motor reaches the limit value.
P99 : Performs a skip operation if the torque of the servo motor reaches the limit value or if
a skip signal is input.
Q : Override value for the torque limit
Range of valid settings: 1 to 254 (%)
0 to 255 correspond to 0% to 100%.
The Q command is optional. If omitting it, specify the torque limit command in the
PMC window beforehand. If it is omitted, and no torque limit override is set
beforehand, alarm PS0035 is issued.
If an attempt is made to specify a value out of range, alarm PS0366 is issued.
The specified override value is effective only to the block in which it is specified.
At the end of the skip operation, the override value returns to the one assumed
immediately before the G33 command.
α : Axis address on any one axis
F : Feedrate
- Conditions for performing a skip operation

Command
Condition
G33P98 G33P99
The torque limit value is reached. A skip operation is performed. A skip operation is performed.
A skip signal is input. No skip operation is performed. A skip operation is performed.
- 38 -
- Operation during a torque limit skip

(Example)
N1 G33 P99 Q50 Y400.0 F100.0 ;
N2 G01 X300.0 F500.0 ;
X
A : Machine stop position
300.0 B : Current position of the CNC when the
torque limit is reached
N2 C : N1 command end point position
200.0
Error amount
100.0
N1 A B C
100.0 200.0 300.0 400.0 Y
A torque limit skip presses a specified axis against a previously prepared part or other item while the
torque limit command is being executed on the servo motor, and then performs a skip operation when the
servo motor reaches the torque limit value. A skip operation is performed with the fact that the torque
limit value as detected in the servo motor is reached. It is, therefore, not necessary to input a skip signal
using a separate sensor or other device unlike with normal skip functions.
(1) At point A, the machine comes in contact with the object under measurement and stops. At this time,
because the torque limit value is not reached, no skip operation is performed, move commands are
continuously output, and the current position of the CNC is updated.
(2) Because move commands are output but the machine remains stopped, there occurs a difference
(error amount) between the current position of the CNC and the machine position, and torque is
applied to the servo motor.
(3) When the torque limit value is reached, a skip operation is performed at machine stop position, point
A, and the N2 command is executed. Assuming that the current position of the CNC when the torque
limit is reached is point B, the error amount during the torque limit skip is (A - B).
- Torque limit command

If, with the torque limit skip command, no torque limit override value is specified with address Q and no
torque limit command is issued from the PMC window, etc., alarm PS0035 is issued.
When no toque limit command is issued, the torque limit override value is either 0% or 100%.
If, in a torque limit skip command block, no torque limit override value is specified with address Q, a
torque limit is to be specified as in the program example below.
(Program example)
O0012
:
Mxx (Specify a torque limit from the PMC via the window)
:
G33 P99 X200. F100.(Torque limit skip command)
:
G01 X100. F500.(Move command with the torque limit being still effective)
:
Myy (Cancel the torque limit from the PMC)
- 39 -
:
M30
- Positional deviation limit during the torque limit command

While the torque limit skip command is being executed, the positional deviation limit check with the
settings of parameters Nos. 1828 and 1829 is not performed. Instead, the positional deviation limit check
with the settings of parameter No. 6287 is performed. If the positional deviation exceeds the limit, alarm
SV0004 is issued and an instantaneous stop occurs.
- Custom macro variables

When the torque limit skip command is executed, the custom macro system variables #5061 to #5080
(skip signal position; for a system with more than 20 axes, variables #100151 to #100182 are used) store
the coordinate position assumed at the end of the skip. In reality, there is a deviation due to the delay of
the servo system between the machine position and the current position of the CNC when a skip operation
is executed. This deviation can be determined from the positional deviation of the servo. By setting bit 2
(TSE) of parameter No. 6201, it is possible to select whether or not the skip signal position to be stored in
system variables should be compensated for with the error (positional deviation) of the servo system.
Position during a skip operation
Current position of the CNC
Machine position Error
Coordinate origin Stop point
Position compensated for by

reflecting the delay
Position not reflecting the delay
NOTE
1 Specify only a single axis with the torque limit skip command. If no axis is
specified or an attempt is made to specify more than one, alarm PS0369 is
issued.
2 Do not issue the torque limit skip command in 3-dimensional coordinate
conversion mode or to a parallel axis. Otherwise, alarm PS0035 is issued.
3 Do not issue the torque limit skip command in G41 or G42 mode. Otherwise,
alarm PS0035 is issued.
4 A torque limit arrival signal is output regardless of the torque limit skip command.
5 Do not issue the torque limit skip command for an axis being synchronized with
twin table control.
6 Do not specify the torque limit skip command in a continuous block.
7 The higher the movement speed, the larger the error between the position at
which the machine stops and the position at which a skip is actually detected.
Also, the error increases as the speed is varied during movement. Do not vary
the speed with override and so on.
- 40 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS
5 FEED FUNCTIONS
Chapter 5, "FEED FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
5.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................41

5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE ...........................................................................................................................42
5.3 CUTTING FEED ................................................................................................................................43
5.4 CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL ..................................................................................................44
5.5 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY CIRCLE FOR A ROTARY AXIS ......................48
5.6 DWELL...............................................................................................................................................51
5.1 OVERVIEW
The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions are available:
- Feed functions
1. Rapid traverse
When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid traverse feedrate set in
the CNC (parameter No. 1420).
2. Cutting feed
The tool moves at a programmed cutting feedrate.
- Override
Override can be applied to a rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate using the switch on the machine
operator's panel.
- Automatic acceleration/deceleration
To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automatically applied when the tool starts and
ends its movement (Fig. 5.1 (a)).
Rapid traverse rate
FR FR : Rapid traverse
rate
TR : Deceleration time
constant for rapid
traverse rate
0 Time
TR TR
Feedrate
FC : Feedrate
FC
TC : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for a
cutting feedrate
0 Time
TC TC
Fig. 5.1 (a) Automatic acceleration/deceleration (example)
- 41 -
5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
- Tool path in a cutting feed

When the movement direction changes between a specified block and the next block during cutting feed,
the tool path may be rounded because of the relationship between the time constant and feedrate (Fig. 5.1
(b)).
Y
Programmed path
Actual tool path
0
X
Fig. 5.1 (b) Example of tool path between two blocks
In circular interpolation, a radial error occurs (Fig. 5.1 (c)).
Y Δr : Error
Programmed path
Actual tool path
0 X
Fig. 5.1 (c) Example of radial error in circular interpolation
The rounded-corner path shown in Fig. 5.1 (b) and the error shown in Fig. 5.1 (c) depend on the feedrate.
So, the feedrate needs to be controlled for the tool to move as programmed.
5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE

Format
G00 IP_ ;
G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse)
IP_ : Dimension word for the end point
Explanation
The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse and punching is performed.In rapid
traverse, the next block is executed after the specified feedrate becomes 0 and the servo motor reaches a
certain range set by the machine tool builder (in-position check).
A rapid traverse rate is set for each axis by parameter No. 1420, so no rapid traverse feedrate need be
programmed.
The following overrides can be applied to a rapid traverse rate with the switch on the machine operator's
panel: 25, 50, 75, 100 %
- Rapid Traverse Rate by F Command

Each axis rapid traverse rate of rapid traverse command (G00) are set independently to parameter by
machine tool builders.
Whereas, by setting bit 0 (G0F) of parameter No. 16050 to 1, the rapid traverse rate of X and Y axes to
rapid traverse command (G00) can be designated by F code. Refer to the manual issued by a machine tool
builder for this function.
- 42 -
There are following specifications notices for this function.
(1) The feedrate specified by F code is the each axis rapid traverse rate of X and Y axes.
(2) 4-step rapid traverse override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate designated by F code, using
signals (ROV2, ROV1) from the machine side.
(3) When axial move of rapid traverse (G00) is specified in the tape, memory and MDI modes, the rapid
traverse rate may not specified by F code or when the speed command is 0, an alarm (PS 0011)
occurs.
(4) In circular nibbling (G68), linear nibbling (G69) and nibbling by M function, the speed to nibbling
pitch after the first punch point corresponds to the rapid traverse rate preset by the parameter (No.
1420).
(5) F1-digit function for programmable rapid traverse override is ineffective.
(6) When the rapid traverse rate designated by F code exceeds the speed preset by a parameter (set by a
machine tool builder), it is clamped to the speed preset by the parameter (No. 1420).
5.3 CUTTING FEED

Overview
Feedrate of linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), etc. are commanded with
numbers after the F code.
In cutting feed, the next block is executed so that the feedrate change from the previous block is
minimized.
The feed of FANUC Series 30i/31i-PB is performed at feed per minute always.
Format
Feed per minute
F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/min or inch/min)
Explanation
- Direction of the cutting feedrate
Cutting feed is controlled so that the tangential feedrate is always set at a specified feedrate.
Y Y
Start
End point point
F F
Start
point Center End
X X
Linear interpolation Circular interpolation
Fig. 5.3 (a) Tangential feedrate (F)
- Feed per minute

An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied to feed per minute with the switch on the
machine operator's panel. For detailed information, see the appropriate manual of the machine tool
builder.
- 43 -
Feed amount per minute

(mm/min or inch/min)
Tool
ワーク
Fig. 5.3 (b) Feed per minute
CAUTION
Cutting feed is invalid for the turret axis (T–axis) and C–axis.
T–axis and C–axis commands, therefore, cannot be specified in linear
interpolation (G01) mode and circular interpolation (G02, G03) mode. However,
when bit 5 (CIP) of parameter No.16360 is set to 1, C–axis can be specified.
Reference
See Appendix D for range of feedrate command value.
5.4 CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL

Cutting feedrate can be controlled, as indicated in Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 Cutting Feedrate Control

Function name G code Validity of G code Description
The tool is decelerated at the end point of a
This function is valid for
Exact stop G09 block, then an in-position check is made.
specified blocks only.
Then the next block is executed.
Once specified, this The tool is decelerated at the end point of a
Exact stop mode G61 function is valid until G62, block, then an in-position check is made.
G63, or G64 is specified. Then the next block is executed.
Once specified, this
The tool is not decelerated at the end point
Cutting mode G64 function is valid until G61,
of a block, but the next block is executed.
G62, or G63 is specified.
When the tool moves along an inner corner
Automatic Once specified, this during tool radius compensation, override is
override for G62 function is valid until G61, applied to the cutting feedrate to suppress
Automatic inner corners G63, or G64 is specified. the amount of cutting per unit of time so
corner that a good surface finish can be produced.
override This function is valid in
Internal circular
the tool radius The internal circular cutting feedrate is
cutting feedrate -
compensation mode, changed.
change
regardless of the G code.
- 44 -
NOTE
1 The purpose of in-position check is to check that the servo motor has reached
within a specified range (specified with a parameter by the machine tool builder).
In-position check is not performed when bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 is set
to 1.
2 Inner corner angle θ: 2° < θ ≤ α ≤ 178°
(α is a set value)
Workpiece
θ
Tool
Format
Exact stop G09 IP_ ;
Exact stop mode G61 ;
Cutting mode G64 ;
Automatic corner override G62 ;
5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61), Cutting Mode (G64)

Explanation
The inter-block paths followed by the tool in the exact stop mode, and cutting mode are different (Fig.
5.4.1).
Y
(2) In-position check
Tool path in the exact stop mode

(1)
Tool path in the cutting mode
0 X
Fig. 5.4.1 Example of tool paths from block (1) to block (2)
CAUTION
The cutting mode (G64 mode) is set at power-on or system clear.
5.4.2 Automatic Corner Override

When tool radius compensation is performed, the movement of the tool is automatically decelerated at an
inner corner and internal circular area. This reduces the load on the tool and produces a smoothly
machined surface.
5.4.2.1 Automatic override for inner corners (G62)

Explanation
- Override condition
When G62 is specified, and the tool path with tool radius compensation applied forms an inner corner, the
feedrate is automatically overridden at both ends of the corner.
There are four types of inner corners (Fig. 5.4.2.1 (a)).
2°≤θ≤θp≤178° in Fig. 5.4.2.1 (a).
- 45 -
θp is a value set with parameter No. 1711. When θ is approximately equal to θp, the inner corner is
determined with an error of 0.001° or less.
: Tool
1. Straight line-straight line 2. Straight line-arc
: Programmed path
: Tool center path
θ θ
3. Arc-straight line 4. Arc-arc
θ
θ
Fig. 5.4.2.1 (a) Inner corner
- Override range
When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, the feedrate is overridden before and after the inner
corner. The distances Ls and Le, where the feedrate is overridden, are distances from points on the tool
center path to the corner (Fig. 5.4.2.1 (b), Fig. 5.4.2.1 (c), Fig. 5.4.2.1 (d)). Ls and Le are set with
parameters Nos. 1713 and 1714.
Programmed path
Le Ls
a b
Tool center path
The feedrate is overridden from point a to point b.
Fig. 5.4.2.1 (b) Override Range (Straight Line to Straight Line)
When a programmed path consists of two arcs, the feedrate is overridden if the start and end points are in
the same quadrant or in adjacent quadrants (Fig. 5.4.2.1 (c)).
Programmed path
Tool center path
The feedrate is overridden from point a to b.

Fig. 5.4.2.1 (c) Override Range (Arc to Arc)
- 46 -
Regarding program (2) of an arc, the feedrate is overridden from point a to point b and from point c to
point d (Fig. 5.4.2.1 (d)).
Programmed path
d a
Le Ls Le Ls
c b
(2)
Tool center path

Tool
Fig. 5.4.2.1 (d) Override Range (Straight Line to Arc, Arc to Straight Line)
- Override value
An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value is valid even for dry run and
one-digit F code feed specification.
In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows:
F = (automatic override for inner corners) × (feedrate override)
Limitation
- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Override for inner corners is disabled during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
- Start-up/G41, G42
Override for inner corners is disabled if the corner is preceded by a start-up block or followed by a block
including G41 or G42.
- Offset
Override for inner corners is not performed if the offset is zero.
5.4.2.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change

For internally offset circular cutting, the feedrate on a programmed path is set to a specified feedrate (F)
by specifying the circular cutting feedrate with respect to F, as indicated below (Fig. 5.4.2.2). This
function is valid in the tool radius compensation mode, regardless of the G62 code.
Rc
F=
Rp
Rc : Tool center path radius
Rp : Programmed radius
It is also valid for the dry run and the one-digit F code feed command.
- 47 -
Programmed
Rc Tool center
Rp path
Fig. 5.4.2.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change
If Rc is much smaller than Rp, Rc/Rp 0; the tool stops. A minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is to be
specified with parameter No. 1710. When Rc/Rp≤MDR, the feedrate of the tool is (F×MDR).
If parameter No. 1710 is 0, the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is at 100%.
CAUTION
When internal circular cutting must be performed together with override for inner
corners, the feedrate of the tool is as follows:
Rc
F× × (override for the inner corners) × (feedrate override)
Rp
5.5 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY CIRCLE FOR

A ROTARY AXIS
Overview
For the feedrate instruction on imaginary circle for a rotary axis, a circle with the radius specified with
parameter No. 1465 (which is referred to as an imaginary circle) is considered, and the feedrate of the
rotary axis is set to the feedrate on its circumference.
Explanation
- Cutting feedrate
Conventional method
Usually, the feedrate of a rotary axis is set to the rotation feedrate (deg/mm).
ΔX
Feedrate of liner axis(X axis) FX = F × ( mm / min )
L
ΔC
Feedrate of rotary axis(C axis) FC = F × ( deg / min )
L
Synthetic movement distance L = ΔX 2 + ΔY 2 + ΔZ 2 + ΔC 2 ( mm )
L
Movement time T= (min )
F
Feedrate instruction on imaginary circle of a rotary axis

For the feedrate instruction on imaginary circle for a rotary axis, the feedrate of the rotary axis is set to
the movement feedrate on an imaginary circle with the radius specified with parameter No. 1465.
By setting the imaginary radius to 0, the rotary axis can be excluded from feedrate calculation.
- 48 -
Y Rotary axis feedrate

Program example
N1G91G01X10.F10.
N2C10.
C N2
Imaginary N1 X
radius
Imaginary circle
ΔX
Feedrate of liner axis(X axis) FX = F × ( mm / min )
L′
ΔC
Feedrate of rotary axis(C axis) FC = F × ( deg / min )
L′
⎛ π × lC × ΔC ⎞
2
Synthetic movement distance L ′ = ΔX 2 + ΔY 2 + ΔZ 2 + ⎜ ⎟ ( mm )

⎝ 180 ⎠
L′
Movement time T ′ = (min )
F
lC : imaginary radius(parameter No.1465)
For the feedrate instruction on imaginary circle for a rotary axis, due to the difference in how to determine
the movement distance, if a particularly small value is set for the imaginary radius, the movement on the
axis will be fast. Pay careful attention to the input to the parameter.
The cutting feedrate is clamped on the basis of the maximum cutting feedrate parameter for each axis
No.1430 and the feedrate of the actual axis (data before this function is converted). It is, therefore,
possible to specify a command with a feedrate greater than the setting of the maximum cutting feedrate by
setting a large value as the imaginary radius parameter No. 1465. By setting a small value as an imaginary
radius, the cutting feedrate is clamped at the feedrate less than the setting of the maximum cutting
feedrate.
The feedrate instruction on imaginary circle for a rotary axis is also effective to a dry run.
- AI Contour Control
AI contour control is performed on the movement feedrate on an imaginary circle. The movement
feedrate may, therefore, not be the feedrate for the calculation in the feedrate instruction on imaginary
circle for a rotary axis if the feedrate is changed with the feedrate control of AI contour control. The
feedrate during AI contour control is clamped with parameter No.1432. If parameter No. 8465 is not 0, it
is also clamped with parameter No. 8465.
- 0mm in imaginary radius

When an imaginary radius is assumed 0mm, synthesized distance is as follows because the movement
distance of a rotary axis becomes 0mm.
L ′ = ΔX 2 + ΔY 2 + ΔZ 2
A movement feedrate of a linear axis can be instruction feedrate F by excluding feedrate element of a
rotary axis.
Moreover, it moves at the maximum cutting feedrate in case of this setting and instruction only in a rotary
axis.
Examples
When the following block is instructed on IS-B,
G91 G01 C10. F10. ;
- 49 -
(1) The calculation is as follows, when 10.000(10mm) is set in an imaginary radius(parameter No.1465).
⎛ π × 10 ( mm ) × 10 ( deg ) ⎞
2
⎛ π × l C × ΔC ⎞
2
L′ = ⎜ ⎟ = ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ = 1.7453292 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( mm )
⎝ 180 ⎠ ⎝ 180 ⎠
10 ( deg )
FC = 10 (mm / min ) × = 57.2957795 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( deg / min )
1.7453292 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( mm )
L ′ 1.7453292 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( mm )
T′= = = 0.17453292 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( min ) = 10.4719755 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( sec )
F 10 ( mm / min )
Therefore, the movement time becomes about 10.472(sec), and the rotation feedrate becomes about
57.296(deg/min). The feedrate on 10.000mm in an imaginary radius becomes 10.000mm/min at
instruction feedrate in Fig. 5.5.
(2) The calculation is as follows, when 36.000(36mm) is set in an imaginary radius(parameter No.1465).
⎛ π × 36 ( mm ) × 10 ( deg ) ⎞
2
⎛ π × l C × ΔC ⎞
2
L′ = ⎜ ⎟ = ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ = 6.28318530 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( mm )
⎝ 180 ⎠ ⎝ 180 ⎠
10 ( deg )
FC = 10 (mm / min ) × = 15.9154943 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( deg / min )
6.28318530 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( mm )
L′ 6.28318530 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( mm )
T′= = = 0.628318530 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( min ) = 37.6991118 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( sec )
F 10 ( mm / min )
Therefore, the movement time becomes about 37.700(sec), and the rotation feedrate becomes about
15.915(deg/min). The feedrate on 36.000mm in an imaginary radius becomes 10.000mm/min at
instruction feedrate in Fig. 5.5.
Rotation feedrate when

Instruction feedrate
10mm setting.:(1)
F=10mm/min
Rotation feedrate when

36mm setting.:(2)
10mm
36mm
Fig. 5.5
Limitation
This function corresponds only the linear interpolation(G01).
However, it doesn't correspond to the following functions.
• Normal direction control
• Axis control by PMC
In this function, in case of using the parallel axis control and the twin table control, an imaginary radius
parameter(No.1465) specifies the same value with a master axis and a slave axis.
- 50 -
NOTE
1 When the bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 and the bit 0 (RFDx) of parameter
No. 1408 are 1, this function becomes effective.
2 The bit 0 (RFDx) of parameter No. 1408 and an imaginary radius (parameter
No.1465) of this function can be rewriting by the programmable parameter
input(G10).
3 It moves at the maximum cutting feedrate when this function effectively and sets
0 in an imaginary radius (parameter No.1465) and it instructs only a rotary axis.
4 Note setting bit 0 (RFDx) of parameter No. 1408 and an imaginary radius
(parameter No.1465) enough. Especially, a movement of axis quickens
compared with this function unused when small value is set to an imaginary
radius.
5 In this function, the same value as the parameter value (No.1408, No.1465) of a
master axis is used with a slave axis, when it uses axis synchronous control.
5.6 DWELL
Format
G04 X_; or G04 P_;
X_ : Specify a time (decimal point permitted)
P_ : Specify a time (decimal point not permitted)
Explanation
By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delayed by the specified time. (Dwell per
second)
Table 5.6 (a) Command value range of the dwell time (Command by X or U)
Increment system Command value range Dwell time unit
IS-A 0.01 to 999999.99
IS-B 0.001 to 99999.999
IS-C 0.0001 to 9999.9999 s
IS-D 0.00001 to 999.99999
IS-E 0.000001 to 99.999999
Table 5.6 (b) Command value range of the dwell time (Command by P)
IS-A 1 to 99999999 0.01 s
IS-B 1 to 99999999 0.001 s
IS-C 1 to 99999999 0.0001 s
IS-D 1 to 99999999 0.00001 s
IS-E 1 to 99999999 0.000001 s
In the case of dwell per second, the specification unit for dwell time specified with P can be fixed at 0.001
second by setting bit 7 (DWT) of parameter No. 1015 to 1.
- 51 -
NOTE
1 When X, U, or P is specified without a decimal point, the specification unit does
not depend on inch/metric input. Depending on whether the X-axis is present,
the following increment system is used:
- When the X-axis is present
The increment system of the X-axis is used.
- When the X-axis is not present
The increment system of the reference axis is used.
2 When P is specified, bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 exercises no influence.
3 Specify dwell in a single block specifying no other codes.
While dwell is being executed, 1 is set for diagnosis data No. 0002.
Specify dwell also to make an exact check in the cutting mode (G64 mode).
If the specification of P and X is omitted, an exact stop occurs.
Diagnosis data
2 Dwell execution status
While dwell is being executed, 1 is displayed.
- 52 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION
6 REFERENCE POSITION
A CNC machine tool has a special position where, generally, the tool is exchanged or the coordinate
system is set, as described later. This position is referred to as a reference position.
Chapter 6, "REFERENCE POSITION", consists of the following sections:
6.1 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN..................................................................................................53

6.2 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30.1) ...............................................................56
6.1 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

Overview
- Reference position
The reference position is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can easily be moved by the
reference position return function.
When setting a workpiece to be machined to general turret punch press, the workpiece is held by the
workpiece holders after positioning it by applying the end face of the workpiece to the end locator and
workpiece holders mounted on the machine as illustrated below.
Workpiece
Face B
Y
Face A
End locator Workpiece holder
Fase B
Apply face B to the end locator.
End locator Workpiece
Apply face A to workpiece holder.
Workpiece Face A Workpiece holder
- 53 -
6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
Generally, the distance between the reference position and the end locator as well as the distance between
the reference position and the workpiece holders are intrinsically determined according to machines, and
they are separated from each other by a fixed distance.
Reference position
Distance between reference position

and workpiece holder is intrinsically
determined according to machines.
End locator
Workpiece holder
The distance between the reference

positionand the end locator is
intrinsically determined according to
machines.
Accordingly, if the start point is at the reference position and the point located at the left lower side of the
workpiece is presumed as the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system, tool position at the start
point can be taught to NC as a position in the workpiece coordinate system by giving the following
command at the initial stage of programming.
G92X xR Y yR;
where, xR : Distance from end locator to reference position along X-axis

yR : Distance from workpiece holder to reference position along Y-axis
- Reference position return

Tools are automatically moved to the reference position. When reference position return is completed, the
lamp for indicating the completion of return goes on.
Setting bit 0 (SZR) of parameter No.16205 allows specifying whether to pass through the intermediate
point or not when the axis is returned to reference position.
Automatic reference position return A→R
R (Reference position)
A (Start position for reference position return)
- 54 -
Automatic reference position return A→Intermediate position→R
R (Reference position)
Intermediate
A (Start position for reference position
Format
- Return to the reference position without passing through the intermediate
point
G28_; Reference position return
- Return to the reference position via the intermediate point

G28 IP_; Reference position return
IP : Specify the intermediate position in the absolute coordinate system.
(absolute/incremental programming)
Explanation
- Return to the reference position without passing through the intermediate
point (G28)
Reference positions are performed at the rapid traverse rate of each axis.
Therefore, for safety, the compensation functions, such as the tool radius compensation, should be
cancelled before executing this command.
(Example)
G28 M30 ;
- Return to the reference position via the intermediate point

Positioning to the intermediate or reference positions are performed at the rapid traverse rate of each axis.
Therefore, for safety, the compensation functions, such as the tool radius compensation, should be
cancelled before executing this command.
(Example)
G28 X100.0 Y150.0 ;
Limitation
- Status the machine lock being turned on
The lamp for indicating the completion of reference position return does not go on when the machine lock
is turned on, even when the tool has automatically returned to the reference position
- First return to the reference position after the power has been turned on
(without an absolute position detector)
When the G28 command is specified when manual return to the reference position has not been
performed after the power has been turned on, the movement from the intermediate point is the same as in
manual return to the reference position.
- 55 -
6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
In this case, the tool moves in the direction for reference position return specified in parameter ZMIx (bit
5 of No. 1006).
- Lighting the lamp when the programmed position does not coincide with the
reference position
When the machine tool system is an inch system with metric input, the reference position return lamp
may also light up even if the programmed position is shifted from the reference position by the least
setting increment. This is because the least input increment of the machine tool system is smaller than its
least command increment.
- Restriction
There are restrictions when the following functions are used. Please refer to each function for detail.
- Mirror image
- Machine lock
- Retrace
- Positioning by optimum accelerations
- In-position check disable signal
- Programmable mirror image
- High-speed program check function
- Normal direction control
- Scaling
- Coordinate system rotation
- Cutter compensation
Reference item
- Manual reference position return
See III–3.1.
6.2 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30.1)

Overview
Tools ca be returned to the floating reference position.
A floating reference point is a position on a machine tool, and serves as a reference point for machine tool
operation.
A floating reference point need not always be fixed, but can be moved as required.
Format
G30.1 IP_;
IP_ : Specify the intermediate position to the floating reference position in the absolute
coordinate system. (absolute/incremental programming)
Explanation
Generally speaking, cutting tools can be replaced only at specific positions.
On some machine tools, the cutting tools can be replaced at any position unless they interfere with the
workpiece. With these machines, the cutting tools should be replaced at a position as close to the
workpiece as possible so as to minimize the machine cycle time. For this purpose, the tool change
position is to be changed, depending on the figure of the workpiece. This operation can easily be
performed using this function.
That is, a tool change position suitable for the workpiece is memorized as a floating reference point. Then
command G30.1 can easily cause return to the tool change position.
- 56 -
A floating reference point becomes a machine coordinate position memorized by pressing the soft key
[SETFRP] on the current positions display screen. The coordinates of the floating reference position are
stored with parameter No. 1244.
The G30.1 block first positions the tool at the intermediate point along the specified axes at rapid traverse
rate, then further moves the tool from the intermediate point to the floating reference point at rapid
traverse rate. Before using G30.1, cancel the compensation functions, such as tool radius compensation.
A floating reference point is not lost even if power is turned off.
- Restriction
There are restrictions when the following functions are used. Please refer to each function for detail.
- Retrace
- In-position check disable signal
- Scaling
- Coordinate system rotation
- Cutter compensation
Example
G30.1 G90 X50.0 Y40.0 ;
Y Intermediate position (50,40)
Floating reference
position
Workpiece
- 57 -
7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
7 COORDINATE SYSTEM
By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to the position. Such a tool position is
represented by coordinates in a coordinate system. Coordinates are specified using program axes.
When two program axes, the X-axis and Y-axis are used, coordinates are specified as follows:
X_Y_
This command is referred to as a dimension word.
• Tool position specified by X40.0Y50.0
Tool
Y
50.0
40.0
Coordinates are specified in one of following three coordinate systems:

(1) Machine coordinate system
(2) Workpiece coordinate system
(3) Local coordinate system
The number of the axes of a coordinate system varies from one machine to another. So, in this manual, a
dimension word is represented as IP_.
7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM

The point that is specific to a machine and serves as the reference of the machine is referred to as the
machine zero point. A machine tool builder sets a machine zero point for each machine.
A coordinate system with a machine zero point set as its origin is referred to as a machine coordinate
system.
A machine coordinate system is set by performing manual reference position return after power-on (see
Section, “MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN”). A machine coordinate system, once set,
remains unchanged until the power is turned off.
The reference position is not always the origin of the machine coordinate system.
(See Item, "Setting a machine coordinate system" described later.)
Format
(G90)G53 IP _ P1;
IP_ : Absolute command dimension word
P1 : Enables the high-speed G53 function.
(G90)G53.2 G01 IP＿F＿;

IP_ : Absolute command dimension word
F_ : Feedrate
- 58 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM
Explanation
- Selecting a machine coordinate system (G53)
When a command is specified the position on a machine coordinate system, the tool moves to the position
by rapid traverse. G53, which is used to select a machine coordinate system, is a one-shot G code; that is,
it is valid only in the block in which it is specified on a machine coordinate system. Specify an absolute
command for G53. When an incremental command is specified, the G53 command is ignored. When the
tool is to be moved to a machine-specific position such as a tool change position, program the movement
in a machine coordinate system based on G53.
- High-speed G53 function

This function enables the inter-rapid traverse block overlap function between machine coordinate
selection command (G53) and positioning (rapid traverse) command (G00) blocks, thus making it
possible to execute the next rapid traverse command (G00) without decelerating to a stop at the end of the
machine coordinate selection command (G53). Therefore, high-speed positioning is available even when
the machine coordinate selection command (G53) is used.
Specifying P1 in a G53 block enables the high-speed G53 function.
- Selecting a machine coordinate system with feedrate (G53.2)

Positioning of machine coordinate system at a feed rate is available with the command of G53.2. The feed
rate can be used in the modal of G01. This function is optional.
G53.2 is one shot G code. Moreover, the tool offset value is temporarily canceled by G53.2 command
like G53.
As for the time constant, a usual feed rate are used. At the point of G53.2 command, the axis decelerates
to a stop once like G53 command.
When group 01 G-code except G00/G01 is commanded with G53.2, the alarm PS5372, “IMPROPER
MODAL G-CODE” is generated. And, when G53.2 is commanded while group 01 Modal G-code is the
one except G00/G01, the alarm PS5372, “IMPROPER MODAL G-CODE(G53.2)” is generated.
Limitation
- Cancel of the compensation function
When the G53 command is specified, cancel the compensation functions such as the cutter compensation,
tool length compensation, tool nose radius compensation, and tool offset beforehand.
- G53 command immediately after power supply turning on

The Reference point by the manual Reference point return or G28 command should return once after
turning on the power supply because it should set the machine coordinate system before it instructs in
G53.
However, the operation is unnecessary for the machine with the absolute-position detector.
- Specification in the same block

Commands G50/G51, and G84/G85 cannot be specified in the same block where the G53 command is
specified.
Note
NOTE
G53 is a G code for disabling buffering.
Reference
- Setting a machine coordinate system
When manual reference position return is performed after power-on, a machine coordinate system is set
so that the reference position is at the coordinate values of (α, β) set using parameter No.1240.
- 59 -
Machine coordinate system
Machine zero point
Reference position
Fig. 7.1 (a)
Example (selecting a machine coordinate system with specifying a feedrate)

N1 G90 G01 ;
N2 G53.2 X50.0 Y100.0 F1000 ; Absolute command with feedrate F1000
N3 G53.2 X150.0 F500 ; Absolute command with feedrate F500
Y axis
Temporarily decelerates and stops.
100
0
50 150 X axis
Fig. 7.1 (b)
7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM

Overview
A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate system. A
workpiece coordinate system is to be set with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate
system).
A machining program sets a workpiece coordinate system (selecting a workpiece coordinate system).
A set workpiece coordinate system can be changed by shifting its origin (changing a workpiece
coordinate system).
7.2.1 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System

A workpiece coordinate system can be set using one of three methods:
(1) Method using a workpiece coordinate system setting G code
A workpiece coordinate system is set by specifying a value in the program after a workpiece
coordinate system setting G code.
(2) Automatic setting
If bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 is set to 1, a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set
when manual reference position return is performed. (See Section, “MANUAL REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN”.)
This function is, however, disabled when the workpiece coordinate system option is being used.
(3) Method using a workpiece coordinate system selection G code
- 60 -
Six workpiece coordinate systems can be set beforehand using the MDI unit. Program commands
G54 to G59 can be used to select the workpiece axis to be used. (See Subsection, “Displaying and
Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value”.)
When using an absolute command, establish the workpiece coordinate system in any of the above ways.
Format
- Setting a workpiece coordinate system
(G90) G92 IP_
Explanation
A workpiece coordinate system is set so that a point on the tool, such as the tool center, is at specified
coordinates.
Cutter compensation is cancelled temporarily with G92.
Example
Setting the coordinate system by the
G92 X25.2 Y23.0 ; command
Y Meet the programming start

point with a center of the tool
and command G92 at the start
of program.
23.0
25.2
0 X
Notes
When the manual reference position return is performed, the value of the workpiece coordinate system set
by G code (G92) is cleared to 0. And when the automatic reference position return (G28) is performed,
this workpiece coordinate system is not cleared to 0 but stored.
7.2.2 Selecting a Workpiece Coordinate System

The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described below. (For information about
the methods of setting, see Subsection, “Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System”.)
(1) Once a workpiece coordinate system is set by a workpiece coordinate system setting G code or by
automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, absolute commands indicate positions in the
workpiece coordinate system.
(2) Choosing from six workpiece coordinate systems set using the MDI unit
By specifying a G code from G54 to G59, one of the workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 can be
selected.
G54 : Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 : Workpiece coordinate system 2
- 61 -
Workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 are established after reference position return after the power is
turned on. When the power is turned on, G54 coordinate system is selected.
When bit 2 (G92) of parameter No. 1202 is set to 1, executing the workpiece coordinate system setting
G92 code command results in the issue of an alarm PS0010. This is designed to prevent the user from
confusing coordinate systems.
Example
G90 G55 G00 X40.0 Y100.0 ;
Workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55)
100.0 In this example, positioning is made to

positions (X=40.0, Y=100.0) in workpiece
coordinate system 2.
X
40.0
Fig. 7.2.2
7.2.3 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System

The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be changed by changing an external
workpiece origin offset value or workpiece origin offset value.
Three methods are available to change an external workpiece origin offset value or workpiece origin
offset value.
(1) Inputting from the MDI unit (see Subsection, “Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset
Value”.)
(2) Programming (using a programmable data input G code or a workpiece coordinate system setting G
code)
(3) Using the external data input function
An external workpiece origin offset value can be changed by input signal to CNC. Refer to machine
tool builder's manual for details.
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

coordinate system 1 coordinate system 2 coordinate system 3 coordinate system 4
(G54) (G55) (G56) (G57)
ZOFS2 ZOFS3
ZOFS4
ZOFS1
Workpiece coordinate
ZOFS5 system 5 (G58)
EXOFS
Machine zero point ZOFS6 Workpiece coordinate

system 6 (G59)
EXOFS : External workpiece origin offset value
ZOFS1 to ZOFS6 : Workpiece origin offset value
Fig. 7.2.3 Changing an external workpiece origin offset value or workpiece origin offset value
- 62 -
Format
- Changing by inputting programmable data
G10 L2 Pp IP_;
p=0 : External workpiece origin offset value
p=1 to 6 : Workpiece origin offset value correspond to workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6
IP_ : For an absolute command, workpiece origin offset for each axis.
For an incremental command, value to be added to the set workpiece origin offset for
each axis (the result of addition becomes the new workpiece origin offset).
- Changing by setting a workpiece coordinate system

G92 IP_ ;
Explanation
- Changing by inputting programmable data
By specifying a programmable data input G code, the workpiece origin offset value can be changed for
each workpiece coordinate system.
- Changing by setting a workpiece coordinate system

By specifying a workpiece coordinate system setting G code, the workpiece coordinate system (selected
with a code from G54 to G59) is shifted to set a new workpiece coordinate system so that the current tool
position matches the specified coordinates (IP_).
Then, the amount of coordinate system shift is added to all the workpiece origin offset values. This means
that all the workpiece coordinate systems are shifted by the same amount.
CAUTION
When a coordinate system is set with workpiece coordinate system setting G92
code command after an external workpiece origin offset value is set, the
coordinate system is not affected by the external workpiece origin offset value.
When G92X100.0Y80.0; is specified, for example, the coordinate system having
its current tool reference position at X = 100.0 and Y = 80.0 is set.
Example
Y Y’
G54 workpiece coordinate system
If G92X100Y100; is commanded when the tool is positioned

160 100 Tool position at (200, 160) in G54 mode, workpiece coordinate system 1
(X' - Y') shifted by vector A is created.
60 A X’ New workpiece coordinate system

100
X Original workpiece coordinate system

100 200
7.2.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1)

The workpiece coordinate system preset function presets a workpiece coordinate system shifted by
manual intervention to the pre-shift workpiece coordinate system. The latter system is displaced from the
machine zero point by a workpiece origin offset value.
There are two methods for using the workpiece coordinate system preset function. One method uses a
programmed command. The other uses MDI operations on the absolute position display screen, relative
- 63 -
position display screen, and overall position display screen (see Subsection, “Workpiece Coordinate
System Preset”).
Format
G92.1 IP 0 ;
IP 0 : Specifies axis addresses subject to the workpiece coordinate system preset
operation. Axes that are not specified are not subject to the preset operation.
Explanation
When manual reference position return operation is performed in the reset state, a workpiece coordinate
system is shifted by the workpiece origin offset value from the machine coordinate system zero point.
Suppose that the manual reference position return operation is performed when a workpiece coordinate
system is selected with G54. In this case, a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set which has its
origin displaced from the machine zero point by the G54 workpiece origin offset value; the distance from
the origin of the workpiece coordinate system to the reference position represents the current position in
the workpiece coordinate system.
G54 workpiece coordinate system
Workpiece origin
G54 workpiece
origin offset value
Reference position
Machine zero point

Manual reference position return
If an absolute position detector is provided, the workpiece coordinate system automatically set at
power-up has its origin displaced from the machine zero point by the G54 workpiece origin offset value.
The machine position at the time of power-up is read from the absolute position detector and the current
position in the workpiece coordinate system is set by subtracting the G54 workpiece origin offset value
from this machine position. The workpiece coordinate system set by these operations is shifted from the
machine coordinate system using the commands and operations listed below.
(a) Manual intervention performed when the manual absolute signal is off
(b) Move command executed in the machine lock state
(c) Movement by handle interruption
(d) Operation using the mirror image function
(e) Shifting the workpiece coordinate system by setting the local coordinate system or workpiece
coordinate system
In the case of (a) above, the workpiece coordinate system is shifted by the amount of movement during
manual intervention.
- 64 -
G54 workpiece Po
coordinate system before
manual intervention Amount of
movement during
WZo manual intervention
Workpiece origin
G54 workpiece coordinate
offset value system after manual
intervention
Pn
Machine zero point
WZn-
In the operation above, a workpiece coordinate system once shifted can be preset using G code (G92.1)
specification or MDI operation to a workpiece coordinate system displaced by a workpiece origin offset
value from the machine zero point.
Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 specifies whether to preset relative coordinates (RELATIVE) as well
as absolute coordinates. Moreover, the difference below the least input increment between absolute
coordinate point and relative coordinate point is corrected to the value of the preset(or origin) of relative
coordinates when bit 4 (RPP) of parameter No.3129 is set to 1.
When no workpiece coordinate system option (G54 to G59) is selected, the workpiece coordinate system
is preset to the coordinate system with its origin placed at the reference position.
Limitation
- Tool radius compensation
When using the workpiece coordinate system preset function, cancel compensation modes: Tool radius
compensation. If the function is executed without canceling these modes, compensation vectors are
cancelled.
- Prohibited modes
Do not use the workpiece coordinate system preset function when the scaling, coordinate system rotation,
or programmable image is set.
7.2.5 Automatic Coordinate System Setting

When bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 for automatic coordinate system setting is 1, a coordinate
system is automatically determined when manual reference position return is performed.
Once α and β are set with parameter No. 1250, a workpiece coordinate system is set upon reference
position return so that the base point on the tool holder or the tip of the basic tool is positioned at X = α
and Y = β.
This processing occurs as if the following are specified at the reference position:
G92XαYβ;
This function cannot be used, however, when the workpiece coordinate system option is selected.
- 65 -
7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM

When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child workpiece coordinate system can be
set for easier programming. Such a child coordinate system is referred to as a local coordinate system.
Format
G52 IP_; Setting the local coordinate system
:
G52 IP 0 ; Canceling of the local coordinate system
IP_ : Origin of the local coordinate system
Explanation
By specifying G52 IP_;, a local coordinate system can be set in all the workpiece coordinate systems
(G54 to G59). The origin of each local coordinate system is set at the position specified by IP_ in the
workpiece coordinate system.
Once a local coordinate system is established, the coordinates in the local coordinate system are used in
an axis shift command. The local coordinate system can be changed by specifying the G52 command with
the origin of a new local coordinate system in the workpiece coordinate system.
To cancel the local coordinate system or specify the coordinate value in the workpiece coordinate system,
match the origin of the local coordinate system with that of the workpiece coordinate system.
IP_ (Local coordinate system)
(G54: Workpiece coordinate system 1)
G55 IP_ (Local coordinate system)

G56
G57
G58 (G59: Workpiece coordinate
system 6)
(Machine coordinate system)
Machine coordinate system zero point
Reference position
Fig. 7.3 Setting the local coordinate system
CAUTION
1 When ZCL (bit 2 of parameter No.1201) is set to 1 and an axis returns to the
reference position by the manual reference position return function, the origin of
the local coordinate system of the axis matches that of the workpiece coordinate
system. The same is true when the following command is issued:
G52α0;
α: Axis which returns to the reference position
2 The local coordinate system setting does not change the workpiece and machine
coordinate systems.
- 66 -
CAUTION
3 Whether the local coordinate system is canceled at reset depends on the
parameter setting. The local coordinate system is canceled when either bit 6
(CLR) of parameter No.3402 or bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No.1202 is set to 1
4 When a workpiece coordinate system is set with the G92 command, the local
coordinate system is canceled. However, the local coordinate system of an axis
for which no coordinate system is specified in a G92 block remains unchanged.
5 G52 cancels the offset temporarily in tool radius compensation.
6 The incremental programming after the G52 block is not regarded as the
incremental distance from the current tool position. This programming is
regarded the incremental distance from origin of the local coordinate system
specified.
However, When the bit 0 (LIP) of parameter No. 16201 is set to 1, the
incremental programming after the G52 block is regarded as the incremental
distance from the current tool position.
7.4 PLANE SELECTION

Select the planes for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and drilling by G-code.
The following table lists G-codes and the planes selected by them.
Explanation
Table 7.4 Plane selected by G code
G code Selected plane Xp Yp Zp
G17 Xp Yp plane
X-axis or an axis Y-axis or an axis Z-axis or an axis
G18 Zp Xp plane
parallel to it parallel to it parallel to it
G19 Yp Zp plane
Xp, Yp, Zp are determined by the axis address appeared in the block in which G17, G18 or G19 is
commanded.
When an axis address is omitted in G17, G18 or G19 block, it is assumed that the addresses of basic three
axes are omitted.
Parameter No. 1022 is used to specify that an optional axis be parallel to the each axis of the X-, Y-, and
Z-axes as the basic three axes.
The plane is unchanged in the block in which G17, G18 or G19 is not commanded.
The movement instruction is irrelevant to the plane selection.
When the power is turned on or the CNC is reset, G17 (XY plane), G18 (ZX plane), or G19 (YZ plane) is
selected by bits 1 (G18) and 2 (G19) of parameter No. 3402).
Example
Plane selection when the X-axis is parallel with the U-axis.
G17 X_Y_ ; XY plane,
G17 U_Y_ ; UY plane
G18 X_Z_ ; ZX plane
X_Y_ ; Plane is unchanged (ZX plane)
G17 ; XY plane
G18 ; ZX plane
G17 U_ ; UY plane
G18Y_ ; ZX plane, Y axis moves regardless without any relation to the plane.
- 67 -
8. COORDINATE VALUE AND
DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION

Chapter 8, "COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION", consists of the following sections:
8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING .................................................................68

8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21).....................................................................................68
8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING ..............................................................................................71
8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING

There are two ways to command travels of the tool; the absolute programming, and the incremental
programming. In the absolute programming, coordinate value of the end position is programmed. The
incremental programming is used to program the amount of a tool movement.
G90 and G91 are used to programming absolute or incremental programming, respectively.
Format
Absolute programming G90 IP_ ;
Incremental programming G91 IP_ ;
Example
G90 X40.0 Y70.0 ; Absolute programming
G91 X-60.0 Y40.0 ; Incremental programming
Y End point
70.0
30.0 Start point
X
40.0 100.0
8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21)

Either inch or metric input (least input increment) can be selected by G code.
Format
G20 ; Inch input
G21 ; Metric input
This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the coordinate system at the
beginning of the program. After the G code for inch/metric conversion is specified, the unit of input data
is switched to the least inch or metric input increment of increment system (see Section, “INCREMENT
SYSTEM”). The unit of data input for degrees remains unchanged. The unit systems for the following
values are changed after inch/metric conversion:
- 68 -
8.COORDINATE VALUE AND
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING DIMENSION
• Feedrate commanded by F code

• Positional command
• Workpiece origin offset value
• Tool compensation value
• Unit of scale for manual pulse generator
• Movement distance in incremental feed
• Some parameters
When the power is turned on, the G code is the same as that held before the power was turned off.
WARNING
G20 and G21 must not be switched during a program.
NOTE
1 When the least input increment and the least command increment systems are
different, the maximum error is half of the least command increment. This error
is not accumulated.
2 The inch and metric input can also be switched using settings (see Subsection,
“Displaying and Entering Setting Data”).
3 If a function selected using bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 or bit 0 (NIM) of
parameter No. 11222 is not used, be sure to perform inch/metric conversion at
the reference position (machine coordinate system origin).
4 G code of inch/metric conversion must be specified in a single block in principle.
However, G17, G18, G19, G90, and G91 can be exceptionally specified in the
same block. If especially “move command”, “tool offset” and “command that
changes coordinate system” are specified in the same block, the machine may
behave unexpectedly.
Performing inch/metric conversion in the reference position (parameter No.

1240 is not 0)
Conventionally, inch/metric conversion must be performed at the machine coordinate system origin.
However, setting bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 to 1 enables inch/metric conversion to be performed
in the reference position (parameter No. 1240).
If an attempt is made to perform inch/metric conversion when an axis with this function enabled is not in
the reference position, alarm PS5362, “CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS” is issued to cancel the
attempt.
Before trying to perform inch/metric conversion, be sure to set the axis of interest to the reference
position, using the G28 command, for example.
In addition, if the workpiece coordinate system has been shifted from the machine coordinate system,
using the following commands or operations, bit 1 (CIM) of parameter No. 11222 can be used to select
whether to issue alarm PS1298 or to clear the offset.
• Manual intervention performed with the manual absolute signal being off
• Move command issued with the machine locked
• Move command issued using a handle interrupt
• Mirror image-based operation
• Workpiece coordinate system shift caused by local coordinate system setting (G52) or workpiece
coordinate system setting (G92)
- 69 -
Switching conditions
Performing inch/metric conversion in any position other than the reference position requires satisfying all
of the following conditions. Failing to satisfy any of the conditions results in alarm PS1298, “ILLEGAL
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION” being issued
• Positioning or linear interpolation
• Tool radius compensation cancel
• Normal direction control cancel
• Scaling cancel
• Programmable mirror image cancel
• Macro modal call A/B cancel
• Coordinate system rotation mode off
In addition, performing inch/metric conversion in any position other than the reference position requires
the following options.
• Inch/metric conversion
• Workpiece coordinate system
Restrictions
When performing the following operations, make sure that the axis of interest is in the reference position
(machine coordinate system origin).
• Inch/metric conversion based on bit 2 (INI) of setting parameter No. 0
• Inch/metric conversion based on programmable parameter input (G10)
• Inch/metric conversion based on custom macro variable No. 3005
Performing inch/metric conversion in positions other than the reference

position
Setting bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 enables inch/metric conversion to be performed even in
positions other than the reference position.
In addition, if the workpiece coordinate system has been shifted from the machine coordinate system,
using the following commands or operations, bit 1 (CIM) of parameter No. 11222 can be used to select
whether to issue alarm PS1298 or to clear the offset.
• Manual intervention performed with the manual absolute signal being off
• Move command issued with the machine locked
• Move command issued using a handle interrupt
• Mirror image-based operation
• Workpiece coordinate system shift caused by local coordinate system setting (G52) or workpiece
coordinate system setting (G92)
If an axis is under any of the following controls, however, no automatic coordinate system conversion
based on this function can be carried out for the axis.
• Axis control by PMC
• Axis synchronous control (for slave axes when the master axis is a PMC axis)
Switching conditions
Performing inch/metric conversion in any position other than the reference position requires satisfying all
of the following conditions. Failing to satisfy any of the conditions results in alarm PS1298 being issued.
• Positioning or linear interpolation
• Tool radius compensation cancel
• Normal direction control cancel
• Scaling cancel
• Programmable mirror image cancel
- 70 -
8.COORDINATE VALUE AND
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING DIMENSION
• Macro modal call A/B cancel

• Coordinate system rotation mode off
In addition, performing inch/metric conversion in any position other than the reference position requires
the following options.
• Inch/metric conversion
• Workpiece coordinate system
• Workpiece coordinate system preset
Restrictions
When performing the following operations, make sure that the axis of interest is in the reference position
(machine coordinate system origin).
• Inch/metric conversion based on bit 2 (INI) of setting parameter No. 0
• Inch/metric conversion based on programmable parameter input (G10)
• Inch/metric conversion based on custom macro variable No. 3005
8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING

Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a
distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses:
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, Q, R, F
Explanation
There are two types of decimal point notation: calculator-type notation and standard notation.
When calculator-type decimal notation is used, a value without decimal point is considered to be
specified in millimeters inch, or deg. When standard decimal notation is used, such a value is considered
to be specified in least input increments. Select either calculator-type or standard decimal notation by
using the bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No.3401.Values can be specified both with and without decimal point
in a single program.
Example
Pocket calculator type decimal Standard type decimal point
Program command
point programming programming
X1000 1000mm 1mm
Command value without decimal point Unit :mm Unit : Least input increment (0.001mm)
X1000.0 1000mm 1000mm
Command value with decimal point Unit :mm Unit :mm
CAUTION
When specifying a dimension word for a command G code in a block, be sure to
place the dimension word after the command G code.
- 71 -
NOTE
1 A specified value less than the minimum unit is treated as described below.
Example 1)
When a value is specified directly at an address (in the case of 1/1000mm
IS-B)
X1.2345 ; Treated as X1.235
X-1.2345 ; Treated as X-1.234
Example 2)
When a value is assigned to a macro variable (in the case of 1/1000mm IS-B)
#100=1.2345;
X#100 ; Treated as X1.235
#100=-1.2345;
X#100 ; Treated as X-1.234
2 When more than eight digits are specified, an alarm occurs. If a value is entered
with a decimal point, the number of digits is also checked after the value is
converted to an integer according to the least input increment.
Examples:
X1.23456789;
Alarm PS0003, “TOO MANY DIGIT” occurs because more than eight digits
are specified.
X123456.7;
If the least input increment is 0.001 mm, the value is converted to integer
123456700. Because the integer has more than eight digits, an alarm
occurs.
- 72 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.PRESS FUNCTION
9 PRESS FUNCTION
Chapter 9, "PRESS FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
9.1 PUNCH FUNCTION (1-CYCLE PRESSING) ..................................................................................73

9.2 POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF (G70).........................................................................................75
9.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION ....................................................................................................................75
9.4 NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION .........................................................................................................84
9.5 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION..................................................................................................88
9.1 PUNCH FUNCTION (1-CYCLE PRESSING)

This control sends a signal “Start press and punch” to the machine after moving a tool to the position
commanded in a predetermined block.
When the machine receives this signal, it starts pressing. As a result, punching is made on a workpiece by
the selected tool. After punching, the press motion stops, and a signal returns to the NC to indicate that
“punch has finished”.
Thus, NC proceeds to the execution of the next block. In this manner, punching on a workpiece by press
motion is executed by data transfer between the NC and the machine, and it is necessary to know the
blocks to be punched, in advance.
This description is made from the viewpoints of the NC side. Since details may differ depending upon the
machine tool builders, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual without fail.
NOTE
This section covers one-cycle punch only. For nibbling (punching by sequential
repeated press motion), refer to “9.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION”.
9.1.1 Block in which Punching is Made

Punching is made in a block where the X-axis or Y-axis is positioned at rapid traverse, in principle. In
other words, punching is not done in a block where the X-axis or Y-axis
is not positioned at rapid traverse. Blocks where punching is done are as follows:
(1) Block where X-axis or Y-axis is positioned in the positioning mode (G00)
CAUTION
If the same position as the present tool position is commanded by address X or
Y, positioning is not done, but punching is executed. (This is regarded as the
positioning command with movement amount 0)
G00G91X0; . . . Punching is made.
This applies to such a case that punching is done at the same position using a
different tool.
- 73 -
9.PRESS FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
Tool 01 profile
Tool 02 profile
N711G00G90X50.0Y30.0T02; . . . Punching is done using tool 02

N712X50.0Y30.0T01; . . . Punching is made using tool 01
The punch profile at (50, 30) position is as shown below.
No punching is made in case of N712T01;, N712T01C50.01;
CAUTION
Punching is not done in T single block where the X-axis or Y-axis moves for tool
offset.
(2) Block where pattern function G26, G76, G77, G78, G79, G86, G87 or G89 was commanded
Punching is made after positioning to respective points on a pattern.
Punching is not done in the following cases, even if the block corresponds to (1) or (2).
(a) MDI mode is selected.
(b) M code is commanded.
(c) Blocks inserted between M code of workpiece clamp and M code of workpiece unclamp which
are employed for repositioning of workpiece.
(d) Block where positioning & punch off (G70) was commanded.
CAUTION
Punching is not done even in G00 mode if the block is irrespective of positioning
such as coordinate system setting (G92), local coordinate system setting (G52),
standard point command (G72), dwell (G04), etc.
- 74 -
9.2 POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF (G70)

Punching is made in a block where the X-axis or Y-axis if positioned at rapid traverse, in principle.
Command the following code, if it is not desired to punch a workpiece after positioning a tool to the
commanded position at rapid traverse.
G70X__Y__;
CAUTION
1 G70 is an one–shot G code.
2 Rapid traverse is made in a G70 block even if in G01, G02 or G03 mode.
9.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION

Nibbling means sequential repeated punching without stopping press motion.
Assume Tt be the time required for one-cycle press motion. The remaining time obtained by subtracting
punching time Tp from Tt (or, Ti = Tt – Tp) is the time allowable for positioning.
Flywheel
Position of tool
Upper dead
Crank mechanism point
workpiece
Lower dead
Tool for point
punching Tp Ti
Position Tt
Tt : One cycle in press motion
Time Tp : Processing time of press motion
Ti : Positioning time for the workpiece
Fig.9.3
The maximum distance (maximum pitch) which can be positioned in time Ti is limited by various
conditions, such as machine, servo motor, and others as well as time Ti.
In this NC, the maximum nibbling pitch determined by these conditions is preset to parameter Nos.16186,
16188. On the other hand, the nibbling pitch is commanded by a program. If the commanded pitch
exceeds the maximum pitch preset by the parameter, an alarm is produced.
Since this pitch can be specified directly, programming can be done, while taking the scallop into
consideration.
- 75 -
Scallop s
p
d
The relation between pitch p and scallop s is as shown below in case of linear
nibbling
p=2 d s − s2
where d: Tool diameter
The following functions are prepared for nibbling.

Function Description
Punching at constant intervals #n
(distance) along the Circular arc for d
#2
r
Circular nibbling (G68) a specified angle. p #1
Δθ
θ
G68 I r J θ K Δθ P d Q p
Punching at constant intervals d
(distance) along the straight line for l
#n
Linear nibbling (G69) a specified distance. p
θ
G69 I l J θ P d Q p #1 #2
M## ← M code of nibbling mode（Set value of parameter No.16183）

‥‥‥‥‥
‥‥‥‥‥ The route and the pitch are specified according to these
Nibbling by M function
‥‥‥‥‥ command
M$$ ← M code of nibbling mode cancel
（Set value of parameter No.16184）
- 76 -
9.3.1 Circular Nibbling (G68)

Circular nibbling (G68) specifies punching at constant pitch (distance) on the circular arc with a start
point specified by G72 or the current tool position as the center of the circle.
Format
r : Radius of arc (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)

Unit of data : Input unit (inch/mm)
-Should be specified by positive number.
θ : Angle formed between the first punch point and the + X axis
(Valid data range : When the increment system is IS-B, −359999 to 359999)
Unit of data : minimum unit of data (deg)
-The counterclockwise direction is commanded by a positive number.
Δθ : Incremental angle from the first punch point to the least punch point
(Valid data range : −999999999～999999999)
-Counterclockwise nibbling is made when this angle is commanded by a positive
number.
d : Tool diameter value (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-Nibbling is made outside the arc when this value is positive, inside the arc when this
value is negative, and on the circumference when this value is 0.
-Actual tool path is the arc having radius r+d/2.
p :Pitch (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)

-This pitch is specified as an arc length.
Nibbling is made at pitch p using a tool having diameter d, starting with the point which forms angle θ
with reference to the X-axis on the circumference having radius r, with the preset tool position or the
position specified by G72 being set as the circle center, to the point which forms angle θ + Δθ with
reference to the X-axis.
When θ>0, Δθ>0, and d>0 #1 to #n ：Order of punch motion
#(n−1)
#n
#3
r #2
p
Δθ #1
Center of circle θ d
(Pattern base point) +X
- 77 -
Example
N1111 G90 G00 X50. Y97. Coordinates are expressed by IS-B

N1112 G72 X50. Y100. #1 to #9：Order of punch motion in
N1113 G68 I4. J−60. K90. P−1. Q0.8 N1113
：Path of tool
1.000
4.000
#9:(53.031,101.750)
#8:(53.314,101.125)
#7:(53.470,100.457)
N1112
+X
(50.000,100.000)
−60° 90° #6:(53.493,99.771)
#5:(53.381,99.094)
#4:(53.139,98.452)
N1111:(50.000,97.000) #3:(52.777,97.869)
#2:(52.308,97.369)
0.800 → Actual pitch=0.785

#1:(51.750,96.969)
- 78 -
CAUTION
1 G68 is an one-shot G code.
2 The base point of G68 is the center of arc.
3 Pitch specification
The pitch is specified by the arc length.
The pitch is defined as the divided length of the arc having radius r specified in
address I. The pitch does not mean the arc length between the centers of
adjacent punch points, i.e., the divided length of the arc having a radius of r + d/2
(d: tool diameter).
This reason is shown below.
：Path of tool
These faces are required as

product profiles.
The commanded arc faces are required as a final product, irrespective of

whether the tool moves along outside of the arc (right upper part) or inside of the
arc (right lower part).
Accordingly, it is desirable that the pitch along the specified arc is equal to the
commanded pitch, when taking the scallop into consideration.
- 79 -
4 Pitch compensation
In punching using the command pitch (p), it is generated a remainder that does
not come up to 1 pitch. When the remainder is the pitch moving the last
punching point, only the last pitch is different from the other pitch. That is why
the pitch automatically corrected by the method of below figure is used as an
actual pitch to keep a constant pitch from first to last. As a result, an actual pitch
becomes the maximum below the instruction pitch and constant an interval.
Calculating method of actual pitch
#(n−1) #2
#n #1
Arc length
r
p (command pitch)
Δθ ↓
p’ (real pitch)
(1) The command pitch (p) is defined as a temporary pitch.

(2) When the number of punching point without first punching point is defined
as a, the number of punching point a is calculated by the following
expression. (In the point, the number of punching point a must be integral
number. However, when the number after the decimal point is cut off, tool
does not arrive at the terminal punching point. So the number after the
decimal point is rounded up.)
Δθ
2π × r ×
a=
Arc length
= 360 = 2π × r × Δθ
p p 360 × p
(after the decimal point rounded up.)
(3) And when the actual pitch is defined as p', pitch p' is the pitch to punch
evenly by the number of punching point a rounded up. Therefore, pitch p is
calculated by the following expression.
Arc length 2π × r × Δθ
p′ = =
a 360 × a
5 If radius is 0, or if the pitch is 0 or more than a specified value, alarm (PS 4523)
is produced.
- 80 -
9.3.2 Linear Nibbling (G69)

Linear nibbling (G69) specifies punching at constant pitch (distance) on the straight line which forms an
specified angle with a start point specified by G72 or the current tool position as the start point.
Format
G69 I l J θ P d Q p
l : Length of straight line (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-If a negative number is commanded, the angle between the straight line and the +X axis
becomes θ + 180 deg.
θ : Angle formed between straight line and the + X axis
-The counterclockwise direction is commanded by a positive number.
-The clockwise direction is commanded by a negative number.
d : Tool diameter value (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-When this value is positive, nibbling is made leftwards as viewed from the start point to
the end point of the straight line.
-When this value is negative, nibbling is made rightwards as viewed from the start point to
the end point of the straight line.
-When this value is 0, nibbling is made along the straight line.
p : Pitch (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)

-This pitch is specified as an straight line length.
By the above command, nibbling is made at pitch p using a tool having diameter d along a straight line of
length l which forms angle θ with reference to the X-axis, starting with the present tool position or the
position specified by G72 as the start point.
When l>0, θ>0, and d>0

#n
#(n−1)
l
p #2 #3
#1
θ
d +X
Start point
(Pattern base point) #1 to #n：Order of punch motion
- 81 -
Example

N1212 G72 X80. Y60. #1 to #8：Order of punch motion in
N1213 G69 I10. J135. P−2. Q1.5 N1213
： Path of tool
#8:(73.636,67.778)
#7:(74.646,66.768)
#6:(75.656,65.758)
10.000
#5:(76.666,64.748)
1.500
→ Actual pitch = 1.429
#4:(77.677,63.738)
#3:(78.687,62.727)
#2:(79.697,61.717) N1211
(84.000,62.000)
#1:(80.707,60.707)
+X
N1212:(80.000,60.000) 2.000
135°
NOTE
1 G69 is a one-shot G code.
2 The base point of G69 is the start point.
3 The pitch compensation is the same as in circular nibbling (G68); except that the
circumferential length of an arc in G68 is changed to the linear length (For
details, refer to Note 4 in 9.3.1)
4 If pitch is 0 or more than specified, alarm (PS 4524) is produced.
9.3.3 Notes on Circular Nibbling (G68) and Linear Nibbling (G69)

CAUTION
1 The maximum pitches in G68 and G69 are set by parameters No. 16186.
2 If T code is commanded in G68 or G69 block, nibbling is started after the X and
Y axes have moved to the first punch point and also a tool has been selected.
3 M code is not commandable in G68 and G69 blocks.
4 For the rapid traverse to the first punch point, the rapid traverse override is
effective when it is specified by the rapid traverse override switch on the
machine operator’s panel or by F1-digit specification. For the pitch movement up
to the final point, the rapid traverse override is ineffective and fixed to 100%.
5 If G68 or G69 is commanded using the single block operation, nibbling is made
up to the last punch point, and then, stopped.
- 82 -
6 If feed hold is applied halfway during the movement to the first punch point, the
X and Y axes stop at once. These axes also stop immediately when the feed
hold is applied halfway during the pitch movement from the first point to the last
point. However, this can be changed by bit 2 (NSP) of parameter No. 16181 in
such a way that the X and Y axes stop after pitch movement.
7 In a block just after G68 or G69, the tool does not move by the incremental
amount from the tool position when nibbling ends, but moves from the
programmed end point of the arc or straight line by the incremental amount.
N1311 G90 G72 X60. Y50. #1 to #10：Order of punch motion

N1312 G68 I70. J0 K90. P20. Q15. ：Path of tool
N1313 G91 G00 X−60. Y−10.
End punch point
Tool does not move by the incremental #9:(60.0,130.0)
amount from end punch point. #8
(0.0,120.0)
(60.0,120.0)
(−60.0,−10.0)
End point in N1313 Program end
#10:(0.0,110.0) #2
(60.0,50.0) #1
Pattern base point
Fig.9.3.3 (a) Incremental programming Immediately after circular nibbling (G68)
N1311 G90 G72 X0. Y30. #1～#10 ：Order of punch motion

N1312 G69 I60. J0 P20. Q8. ：Path of tool
N1313 G91 G00 X30. Y-30.
End punch point

#9:(60.0,40.0)
#1 #2 #8 #9
Tool does not move by the
incremental amount from
end punch point.
(60.0,30.0)
Program end
End point in N1313
#10:(90.0,0.0)
Fig.9.3.3 (b) Incremental programming Immediately after linear nibbling (G69)
8 Since radius, straight line length in G68 and G69 are not modal data, they must be
commanded correctly in every block.
9 It is possible in certain machines that nibbling is not performed by G68 or G69
command, but one-cycle punching is executed at respective positioning points.
- 83 -
9.4 NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION

In addition to the circular or linear nibbling according to the G68 or G69 command, this control can
perform nibbling by M function. In other words, it can execute nibbling in the blocks from a block with
the M code of nibbling mode to a block with the M code of nibbling mode cancel as shown below.
M## M code of nibbling mode (S et value of parameter No.16183)

‥‥‥‥‥‥
‥‥‥‥‥‥
‥‥‥‥‥‥ Nibbling is done in these blocks. (nibbling mode )
‥‥‥‥‥‥
‥‥‥‥‥‥
M$$ M code of nibbling mode cancel (Set value of parameter No.16184)
In this manual, the M code of nibbling mode is described as M12, while the M code of the nibbling mode
cancel is described as M13. However, since these M codes may be different from those specified above in
certain machine tool builders, you are requested to read these M codes correspondingly according to the
manual prepared by these machine tool builders. Don’t use this nibbling by M function in a different way
other than specified in this manual, since there are certain restriction about its use.
WARNING
Each of the M codes for nibbling mode and nibbling mode cancel must be
commanded in a single block.
9.4.1 G00 Command in Nibbling Mode

Example
N100 G00 G90 Xx1 Yy1 ;
N110 M12 ;
N120 Xx2 Yy2 T ;
N130 Xx3 Yy3 ;
N140 Xx4 Yy4 ;
N150 Xx5 Yy5 ;
N160 Xx6 Yy6 ;
N170 Xx7 Yy7 ;
N180 M13 ;
(1) The first punch point of nibbling is commanded in the block next to M12. A T code can also be
commanded in this block concurrently.
The first punch point (x2, y2) of nibbling is previously commanded in N120 block, and nibbling
is started when the positioning to (x2, y2) has been completed and the motion corresponding to
the T code has been finished.
The movement amounts along the X-axis and Y-axis in this block are not restricted by the maximum
positioning distances (parameter No. 16188) of the X-axis and Y-axis in the nibbling mode.
(2) In the blocks after the first punch point of nibbling has been commanded, the positioning command
is given to correspond to the pitches by G68 and G69 commands.
If the movement amounts along the X-axis and Y-axis in these blocks exceed the parameter set values
(parameter No. 16188), alarm (PS 4521) results.
- 84 -
In N130 to N170 blocks, the positioning corresponding to the nibbling pitch is commanded. If
the movement amounts along X-axis x3-x2, x4-x3, x5-x4, x6-x5, x7-x6 or the movement amounts
of Y-axis y3-y2, y4-y3, y5-y4, y6-y5, y7-y6 exceed the parameter set values in each block, alarm
(PS 4521) is issued.
(3) M13 is commanded in the block next to the block where the last punch point of nibbling was
commanded.
The last punch point (x7, y7) of nibbling is commanded in the N170 block and M13 is
commanded in the next block, i.e. in block N180. Punching is done at (xn, yn) and nibbling
terminates.
The G00 command in the nibbling mode is given to execute the positioning to the commanded position,
and the movement amounts along X-axis and Y-axis should not exceed the parameter set values (No.
16188), except for the command to the first punch point of nibbling.
9.4.2 G01, G02, and G03 Commands in Nibbling Mode

Linear nibbling can be done by commanding G01 in the nibbling mode, while circular nibbling can be
done by commanding G02 and G03 in the nibbling mode.
The tool diameter cannot be offset by G01, G02, G03 commands. Accordingly, these commands are used
together with cutter compensation commands (G40, G41, G42) when nibbling is done by offsetting a
continuous straight line or circular arc leftwards or rightwards by the tool diameter.
(1) Straight line
G01 X x Yy Qp
x,y : Specified in the same way as an ordinary G01.

-This pitch is specified as an straight line length.
(2) Circular arc
G02 Ii Jj
Xx Yy Qp
G03 Rr
x,y,i,j,r : Specified in the same way as an ordinary G02 or G03.

-This pitch is specified as an arc length.
- 85 -
Example 1

N1432 M12 #1 ：Punching in N1433
N1433 G41 X120. Y120. D01 #2 to #6 ：Order of punch motion in N1434
N1434 G01 X125. Y130. Q3. #7 to #9 ：Order of punch motion in N1435
N1435 X130. Y130. #10 to #19：Order of punch motion in N1436
N1436 G03 X150. Y130. I10. #20 to #25：Order of punch motion in N1437
N1437 G01 X155. Y140. #26 to #34：Order of punch motion in N1438
N1438 X160. Y120. p ：Actual pitch
N1439 M13 ：Path of tool
N1440 G40 G00 X160. Y110.
p=2.363
#25 #26
Cutter compensation = 2.000 (154.106,142.683) (156.455,142.425)
Commanded pitch = 3.000
p=2.730
p=2.745 #9
(132.000,132.000) p=2.827
#6 #7
#20
(123.764,132.000) (148.000,130.472) (155,140)
p=2.000 p=0.472 N1437

N1435 #10 #19 (150,130)
(130,130)
N1438
#2
(125,130)
p=2.483
N1434
#1 (120,120) p=2.793 N1436 (160,120)

(118.211,120.894) #34
(161.940,120.485)
N1433 N1440
N1431:(120,110) N1440:(160,110)
Fig.9.4.2
The G40, G41, and G42 codes function as follows.

For details, refer to “Details of tool radius compensation”.
G code Function
G40 Cutter compensation cancel
G41 Leftward offset for moving direction of tool
G42 Rightward offset for moving direction of tool
Assume that the tool radius (2.0) is preset to offset No. 01.
(1) The first punch point of nibbling and either G41 or G42 to offset the tool leftwards or rightwards as
viewed from the moving direction of the tool are commanded in the block next to M12 block. The
first punch point is commanded by G00.
The first punch point (120.0, 120.0) of nibbling is commanded and also G41 is commanded
in the N1433 block.
Accordingly, positioning is done at rapid traverse to the point (118.211, 120.894) being
offset leftwards to the commanded position by the tool diameter being preset to offset No. 01.
Nibbling is started when the positioning has been completed.
(2) The straight line is commanded by G01, the circular arc is commanded by G02, G03, and the pitch is
commanded by Q, starting with the block next to the block where the first punch point was
commanded.
- 86 -
Since pitch Q is a modal data, it is no longer needed to designate pitch Q after pitch Q was
designated once.
The axis movement to pitch Q is done at rapid traverse.
The straight line and circular arc along which nibbling is done are commanded in N1434 to
N1438 blocks. The straight line and circular arc obtained by offsetting the commanded
straight line and circular arc leftwards by the tool diameter being preset to offset No. 01, are
divided by pitch Q.
The axis movement to pitch is done at rapid traverse.
(3) M13 is commanded in the block next to the block where the end point of nibbling was commanded.
The end point (160.0, 120.0) of nibbling is commanded in N1438 block, and M13 is
commanded in the N280 block next to the N1439 block. Nibbling is completed after
punching was done at point (161.940, 120.485) being offset leftwards by the tool diameter at
end point (160.0, 120.0).
For G01, G02, and G03 in the nibbling mode, the straight line and circular arc are divided by the pitch
commanded by address Q, and the movement to respective pitches is done at rapid traverse. If the pitch
commanded by address Q exceeds the parameter set value No. 16186: for mm input, No. 16187: for inch
input, alarm (PS 4523) is issued.
Now, the difference of the motion will be described when the program shown in example 1 is presumed
to have been programmed as shown in example 2.
Example 2
N1431 G90 G00 X120. Y110.
N1432 G41 X120. Y120. D01
N1433 M12
N1434 G01 X125. Y130. Q3.
…………………………
…………………………
…………………………
In the program shown in example 1, nibbling is started after the positioning has been completed to
(118.211, 120.894). In case of the program shown in example 2, on the other hand, one-cycle punching
only is done after the positioning has been completed to point (118.211, 120.894), and nibbling is started
after the axis movement by pitch Q along the straight line in N1434 block.
NOTE
For executing the G41 and G42 commands, “Cutter compensation” option is
necessary.
- 87 -
9.4.3 Notes on Nibbling by M Function

CAUTION
1 The following commands only are executable in nibbling mode.
(i) X, Y positioning command by G00
Provided that the T code and F1-digit command can be included in the same
block where the X, Y positioning is made by G00 to the first punch point of
nibbling.
(ii) G26 (bolt hole circle), G76 (line at angle), G77 (arc), G78, G79 (grid), G86
(share proofs), G87 (square), G88 (radius), G89 (cut at angle)
The movement amounts along the X-axis and Y-axis to respective
positioning points should not exceed the parameter set value (No. 16188),
except when the first positioning point is equivalent to the first punch point of
nibbling.
(iii) G01, G02, G03, G41 and G42 commands in the range described in 9.4.2.
2 The positioning distance commandable by the X-Y positioning command by G00
is not composite distance Δx + Δy obtained by the movement amounts along
2 2
X-axis and Y-axis.

If the absolute value of the movement amount along either X-axis or Y-axis
exceeds the parameter set value (No. 16188), alarm (PS 4521) is issued.
This provision also applies to G26, G76, G77, G78, G79, G86, G87, G88 and
G89, correspondingly.
3 When offset was made by the tool diameter by G41 or G42 to G01, G02 and
G03 as described in example 5 the offset straight line or circular arc is divided by
the pitch commanded by address Q.
Be careful since the above division differs form such a case that a commanded
circular arc is divided by a commanded pitch, like in G68 (circular nibbling).
9.5 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION

Section 9.1 “PUNCH FUNCTIONS (1-CYCLE PRESSING)” explained the blocks, in which punching is
made after positioning. In certain cases, no punching is made, but tapping and other mechanical motion
may be executed in these blocks.
Example
M80;
G00X Y T ;
X Y ;
…………………………
………………………… Tapping is made instead of punching.
…………………………
X Y ;
M81
Since this function depends upon the machine tool builders, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual.
- 88 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)
10 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)

Chapter 10, "TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)", consists of the following sections:
10.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION ......................................................................................................89

10.2 T COMMAND NEGLECT.................................................................................................................90
10.3 TOOL OFFSET...................................................................................................................................91
10.4 CONTROLLING THE TURRET-AXIS (T-AXIS)............................................................................91
10.5 MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL..........................................................................................................92
10.6 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION......................................................................................94
10.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION

By specifying an up to 8–digit numerical value following address T, tools can be selected on the machine.
One T code can be commanded in a block. Refer to the machine tool builder’s manual for the number of
digits commandable with address T and the correspondence between the T codes and machine operations.
When a move command and a T code are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one
of the following two ways:
(1) Simultaneous execution of the move command and T function commands.

(2) Executing T function commands upon completion of move command execution.
The selection of either (1) or (2) depends on the machine tool builder’s specifications. Refer to the
manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
The T command must be given without fail to the block before a block where punching is first made by
press motion in one program or to the same block where punching is first made by press motion.
If the T command is not given to these blocks, the press start signal which instructs “Punch by press
motion”, is not sent to the machine, and machining does not proceed to the next block.
Example
O1000G92……………;
N1G00G90X Y ;
……………
……………
Punching should be made in N1 block.

However, since no T command is given to a block before N1 block or N1 block, no punching is made,
and machining does not proceed to the next block.
- 89 -
10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
CAUTION
1 The correspondence between commandable T codes and tools depends upon
machine tool builders.
The commandable T codes are set in tool registering screen before shipment
from factory. If a commanded T code was not registered, alarm (PS 4602) is
produced.
2 No T code is commandable in the following blocks.
(i) G10 (Programmable data input)
(ii) G22 (Stored stroke limit function on)
(iii) G23 (Stored stroke limit function off)
(iv) G92 (Coordinate system setting)
(v) G52 (Local coordinate system setting)
(vi) G72 (Standard point command)
(vii) G75 (Automatic repositioning)
(viii)G98 (Base point command for multi-piece machining)
(ix) G73, G74 (Multi-piece machining command)
3 If tape or memory operation is made in the T command neglect status, the T command
is ignored, and the operation is made as if the T command were not given.
The press start signal is not sent to the machine side in a block to be punched, and
processing does not proceed to the next block. If a program is checked by marking to a
workpiece by using a marking tool, for example, select the marking punch tool by a T
command in the MDI mode in advance, and perform the tape or memory operation
without reset operation in the T command neglect status. Now, punching is made using
the tool selected in the MDI mode.
4 If automatic operation is applied to the machine side by the cycle start when the cycle
start lamp signal is not sent, i.e., in the reset status, the cycle start lamp signal is sent.
If a block to be punched appears before a T command is given after this cycle start lamp
signal has been sent, the press start signal is not sent to the machine side, and also
machining does not proceed to the next block. The cycle start lamp signal is stopped by
reset operation.
5 The press start signal can be sent by setting bit 5 (TCF) of parameter No. 16003 even if
no T command is given to a block before the block where the punching is made or the
block in which punching is made. In this case, the integrated value of the number of
punch times may differ from actual number of punch times about respective tools.
10.2 T COMMAND NEGLECT

This function ignores the T command. Whether the T command is ignored or not is generally selected by
a switch on the machine operator’s panel.
If the T command is ignored, it is treated, as if no T code command were present on a program.
Accordingly, it is not checked that whether the T code be commandable or not.
CAUTION
The ignorance of T command is judged when the command is read from a tape
reader or memory into buffer register. Accordingly, the selection of the T
command ignorance switch is not effective for the block that has been read into
the buffer register.
NOTE
By setting bit 5 (TNM) of parameter No. 16260, it is checked that whether the T code be
commandable or not, only in the machine lock status.
- 90 -
10.3 TOOL OFFSET

Tool offset is applicable to respective T codes in the X-axis and Y-axis directions.
Since use of this tool offset function depends upon machine tool builders, refer to the machine tool
builder’s manual.
CAUTION
1 Tool offset compensation applies to tools numbered from 1 to 9999.
2 Tool offset values are set in the tool registering screen in the unit of the least
command increment for each X axis and Y axis before shipment of the machine
from the machine tool builder’s factory.
3 If data are inputted by inch in a millimeter system machine, or if data are inputted
by millimeter in an inch system machine, a tool offset error is produced within the
sum of a half of the least input increment and half of the least command
increment. This error is not accumulated.
10.4 CONTROLLING THE TURRET-AXIS (T-AXIS)

The CNC uses set parameters to control the turret which is indexed for a tool to be used. A specified T
code is output, and at the same time, the turret is positioned at the location which was specified for the
tool on the tool registration screen. Up to 136 tools can be registered on the screen. A T code consisting
of one to four digits is used for controlling the turret. This control substantially reduces the time required
to change tools because changing the tool, which was conventionally performed in the machine tool, is
done by positioning the turret using the CNC. For detailed information, refer to the manual prepared by
the machine tool builder.
NOTE
1 The T-axis can be controlled when TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260, is 1.
2 When T axis control is valid, the T axis should be set as a rotation axis. (bit 0
(ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1)
3 Setting the following parameters of T axis allows the CNC to be compatible with
FANUC Series 16i-PB, as follows:
Setting Meaning
Bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No.1006=1
Rotary axis (A type)
Bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter No.1006=0
Bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No.1008=1 The rotary axis roll-over is valid.
Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008=0 In the absolute programming, the axis rotates
in the direction in which the distance to the
target is shorter.
Bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.1008=1 Relative coordinates are rounded by the
amount of the shift per one rotation
4 The T codes digit can be extended up to 8–digit by setting parameter.
- 91 -
10.5 MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL

In general, the tool holder of a punch holds one tool (die). To select a tool the tool holder is first moved to
the position at which the tool is changed using the T command (cartridge indexing). Then, at that position,
the tool holder is set on the punch holder.
In the case of the multiple-tool system, only the dies in the tool holder are changed because the tool
holder keeps different types of dies (See Fig. 10.5). The multiple-tool system enables the tool holder to
change dies very quickly. Also, many dies can be used to widen the range of machining applications.
For details, refer to the manuals issued by machine manufacturers.
Tool
Tool holder
Turret
Rotation of the turret
Subtool Multiple-tool holder
Rotation of the multiple-tool holder
Fig.10.5 Multiple–tool system
10.5.1 Tool Number

The pot numbers of a multiple-tool system are specified with T codes consisting of three or four digits, as
follows:
T ○○△△
Tool number of the multiple-tool system

Pot number (for specifying a tool holder)
The T codes used for controlling the indexing of the turret (tool holder) in a CNC are two-digit pot
numbers from 00 to 99, including those for a multiple-tool system as shown above.
The T codes consisting of three or four digits are used to control a multiple-tool system. The first two
digits are the pot numbers of the multiple-tool system and the last two digits are the tool numbers in the
multiple-tool system.
- 92 -
NOTE
1 Tool numbers for controlling the turret setting in a CNC system are registered in
tool registering screen. The number of tools is less than or equal to the number
of the tools to be controlled.
2 Assign tool numbers for controlling a turret which is not that for a multiple-tool
system as T codes consisting of one or two digits.
3 Assign tool numbers of a multiple-tool system to parameters 4500 to 5463.
4 The T codes digit of the multiple–tool system can be extended up to 8–digit by
setting parameter.
10.5.2 Relationship between the Multiple–Tool System and the C

Axis
The tools of a multiple-tool system are selected by turning the C axis. A tool is selected by placing it at
the tool reference position. This position is parallel to the Y axis and on the center line of the tool holder
of a multiple-tool system.
For each tool in a multiple-tool system, the angle the tool makes with the tool reference position is set in
tool registering screen for. When the T code of a multiple-tool system is issued, the CNC system sends an
internal command to the C axis, indicating the angle with the tool reference position corresponding to the
selected tool. The CNC system places the selected tool in the tool reference position.
Y Subtool reference position
Center of the subtool

X
Center of the tool holder
T1101 ＋
Direction
of rotation
T1104 T1102 Angular displacement controlled

by indexing for the subtool
－
reference position
T1101 ＝ 0.00°
T1103 T1102 ＝ 90.00°
T1103 ＝ 180.00°
T1104 ＝ 270.00°
Multiple-tool holder：T11
Fig.10.5.2 Subtool reference position and angular displacement controlled by indexing
CAUTION
When the angular displacement for the tool reference position is set to 0, the tool that is
selected when the tool holder has been indexed is used.
- 93 -
10.5.3 Tool Compensation

When a multiple-tool system is used, the centers of the dies in the multiple-tool system are not at the
center of the tool holder. Therefore, tool compensation is necessary. Tool compensation for tools in a
multiple-tool system works in the direction of the Y axis only. Specify the distance between the center of
the tool holder and each of the tools when the tool is located in the tool reference position in tool
registering screen. The distance is the compensation value in the direction of the Y axis.
Y Punching position
（programmed position）
Subtool reference position
X
Turret
Subtool：T1101
Y–axis compensation
Multiple-tool holder：T11
Fig.10.5.3 Tool position compensation
10.5.4 Operational Notes

CAUTION
1 Do not issue any C axis command when multiple-tool control is selected.
2 For indexing a multiple-tool system, T codes consisting of at least three digits
must be used. For using regular tools, T codes consisting of one or two digits
must be used.
3 When using multiple-tool control, set bit 5 (CRM) of parameter No. 16362 to 0.
NOTE
To use multiple-tool control, the C axis control option is required.
Optionally, the number of digits in a T code of the multi–tool command can be
extended up to eight.
10.6 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

Tools are classified into various groups, with the tool life (frequency of use) for each group being
specified.
10.6.1 Tool Life Management Data

Tool life management data consists of number of punches and tool life value.
Explanation
- Number of punches
The number of punches count is incremented by 1 for each tool used punching.
- 94 -
10.6.2 Register and Change of Tool Life Management Data

In a program, tool life management data can be registered in the CNC unit, and registered tool life
management data can be changed.
Format
G10L30 ; Tool data entry mode setting
N_P7R_ ; tool life management data setting
:
:
G11 ; Tool data entry mode cancel
N_ : Tool data No.

P7 : Tool life data setting
R_ : Tool data setting value
Explanation
- Types
For tool life management, the type used varies from one machine to another. For details, refer to the
appropriate manual of each machine tool builder.
10.6.3 Tool Life

The life of a tool is specified by a usage frequency (count).
- 95 -
11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
11 AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Overview
There are two types of auxiliary functions; auxiliary function (M code) for specifying program end and so
on, and secondary auxiliary function (B code).
When a move command and auxiliary function are specified in the same block, the commands are
executed in one of the following two ways:
(1) Simultaneous execution of the move command and auxiliary function commands.
(2) Executing auxiliary function commands upon completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builder's specification. Refer to the manual
issued by the machine tool builder for details.
Chapter 11, "AUXILIARY FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
11.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION) .....................................................................................96

11.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK .....................................................................98
11.3 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION...................................................................................................99
11.4 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (B CODES) ........................................................................101
11.5 M COMMAND FOR SWITCHING THE PUNCH AND LASER MODE......................................103
11.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

When a numeral is specified following address M, code signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine.
The machine uses these signals to turn on or off its functions.
Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. Depending on the setting of bit 7 (M3B) of
parameter No. 3404, up to three M codes can be specified.
Which M code corresponds to which machine function is determined by the machine tool builder. The
machine processes all operations specified by M codes except those specified by M98, M99, M198 or
called subprogram (parameter No.6071 to 6079), or called custom macro (parameter No.6080 to 6089).
Refer to the machine tool builder's instruction manual for details.
Explanation
The following M codes have special meanings.
- M02, M30 (End of program)

This indicates the end of the main program.
Automatic operation is stopped and the CNC unit is reset. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)
After a block specifying the end of the program is executed, control returns to the start of the program.
Bits 5 (M02) and 4 (M30) of parameter No. 3404 can be used to disable M02, M30 from returning control
to the start of the program.
- M00 (Program stop)

Automatic operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped,
all existing modal information remains unchanged. The automatic operation can be restarted by actuating
the cycle operation. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)
- M01 (Optional stop)

Similarly to M00, automatic operation is stopped after a block containing M01 is executed. This code is
only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the machine operator's panel has been pressed.
- 96 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION
- M98 (Calling of subprogram)

This code is used to call a subprogram. The code and strobe signals are not sent. See the Section,
“SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99)” for details.
- M99 (End of subprogram)

This code indicates the end of a subprogram.
M99 execution returns control to the main program. The code and strobe signals are not sent. See the
Section, “SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99)” for details.
- M08, M09（Forming mode and forming mode cancel）

If punching (excluding nibbling) is executed in a block between M08; and M09; it is executed when the
preset time by parameter (No. 16032) has passed after completion of positioning, and machining proceeds
to the next block when the preset time by parameter (No. 16033) has passed after receiving the punch
finish signal from the machine side. (Other M codes may be used for these functions depending upon the
machine tool builders.)
- M10, M11（Workpiece clamp and workpiece unclamp）

The movement amounts of the X and Y axes are not added to the absolute coordinate value in a block
between by M10; and M11;. No punching is executed, even if punching is specified in the block.
Used to reposition a workpiece. (Other M codes may be used for these functions, depending upon
machine tool builders.)
- M12, M13（Nibbling mode and nibbling mode cancel）

Nibbling is executable in a block between M12; and M13;. (Other M codes may be used for these
functions depending upon machine tool builders)
WARNING
M08, M09, M10, M11, M12 and M13 must be commanded in a single block.
CAUTION
1 No punching is made in a block where an M code is commanded. But punching
may be made by some machine tool builder.
2 No M code is commandable in the following blocks.
(i) G10 (Offset amount setting)
(ii) G22 (Stored stroke limit function ON)
(iii) G23 (Stored stroke limit function OFF)
(iv) G26 (Bolt hole circle)
(v) G76 (Line at angle)
(vi) G77 (Arc)
(vii) G78, G79 (Grid)
(viii) G68 (Circular nibbling)
(ix) G69 (Linear nibbling)
(x) G72 (Base point command)
(xi) G75 (Automatic repositioning)
(xii) G86 (Share proofs)
(xiii) G87 (Square)
(xiv) G88 (Radius)
(xv) G89 (Cut at angle)
(xvi) G98 (Base point command of Multi-piece machining)
(xvii) G73, G74 (Multi-piece machining command)
(xviii) G52 (Local coordinate system setting)
- 97 -
NOTE
1 If there is a block following M00, M01, M02, or M30, it is not read into the buffer
storage. Similarly, ten M codes which cause the block following them not to enter
the buffer storage are available by parameter setting (Nos. 3411 - 3421). As for
these M codes, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual.
2 For M98 code and M99 code, their code signals and strobe signals are not
transmitted.
11.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK

Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. By setting bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 to
1, however, up to three M codes can be specified simultaneously in one block.
Up to three M codes specified in one block are output to the machine at the same time. So, when
compared with a case where a single M code is specified in one block, a reduced machining cycle time
can be achieved.
Explanation
CNC allows up to three M codes to be specified in one block. However, some M codes cannot be
specified at the same time due to mechanical operation restrictions. For detailed information about the
mechanical operation restrictions on simultaneous specification of multiple M codes in one block, refer to
the manual of each machine tool builder.
M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be specified together with another M code.
Some M codes other than M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, and M198 cannot be specified together with
other M codes; each of those M codes must be specified in a single block.
Such M codes include these which direct the CNC to perform internal operations in addition to sending
the M codes themselves to the machine. To be specified, such M codes are M codes for calling program
numbers 9001 to 9009 and M codes for disabling advance reading (buffering) of subsequent blocks.
Meanwhile, multiple of M codes that direct the CNC only to send the M codes themselves (without
performing internal operations) can be specified in a single block.
However, it is possible to specify multiple M codes that are sent to the machine in the same block unless
they direct the CNC to perform internal operations. (Since the processing method depends on the machine,
refer to the manual of the machine tool builder.)
Example
One M command in a single block Multiple M commands in a single block

M40; M40M50M60;
M50; G28G91X0Y0Z0;
M60; :
G28G91X0Y0Z0; :
: :
: :
: :
- 98 -
11.3 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION

Overview
Classifying a maximum of 500 M codes into a maximum of 127 groups allows the user:
• To receive an alarm if an M code that must be specified alone is included when multiple M codes are
specified in a block.
• To receive an alarm if M codes belonging to the same group are specified in the same block when
multiple M codes are specified in a block.
11.3.1 Setting an M Code Group Number Using the Setting Screen

- Procedure for displaying the M code group setting screen
Fig. 11.3.1 M code group setting screen
You can use the “M code group setting screen (Fig. 11.3.1 ” to set a group number for each M code.
Display the “M code group setting screen” using the following procedure:
(1) Press function key and the continuous menu key several times. Soft key [M CODE GROUP]
appears.
(2) Press soft key [M CODE GROUP].
In the “NO.” field, M codes for which an M code group can be set are displayed.
An M code group can be set for the following M codes: M00 to M99, and any 400 M codes selected from
M100 and subsequent M codes. For details of how to add the 100th and subsequent M codes, see the
explanation of parameters Nos. 3441 to 3444.
In the “DATA” field, the M code group number corresponding to each M code is displayed.
- Setting a group number

To set an M code group number on the “M code group setting screen (Fig. 11.3.1 ),” use he following
procedure:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Set “PARAMETER WRITE” on the setting screen to 1.
3 Display the “M code group setting screen”.
- 99 -
4 Move the cursor to the M code to be set using page keys and cursor keys. You can also enter the
number of the M code to be set and press soft key [NO.SRH] to move the cursor to the M code.
5 Enter a group number and press soft key [INPUT] or the key.
The valid range of M code group numbers is from 1 to 127 (127 groups). If a value of 0 is input, it is not
registered as an M code group.
- Examples of setting parameters Nos. 3441 to 3444

In the following examples, the number of digits of an M code is 4.
<1> to <4> indicate parameters Nos. 3441 to 3444.
(1) When <1> = 300, <2> = 400, <3> = 500, and <4> = 900 are set
Number
0000
: 100 codes
0099
0300
: 100 codes
0399 M code groups can be set for M0000 to M0099, M0300 to
0400 M0599, and M0900 to M999.
: 100 codes M codes M0300 to M0599 and M0900 to M999 are added to the
0499 M code group setting screen.
0500
: 100 codes
0599
0900
: 100 codes
0999
(2) When <1> = 200, <2> = 0, <3> = 550, and <4> = 800 are set
Number
0000
:
0099
0200 M code groups can be set for M0000 to M0099, M0200 to M0299, M0550
: to M0649, and M0800 to M0899.
0299 (The setting of parameter <2> is invalid because it is 0.)
0550 In this case, M codes M0200 to M0299, M0550 to M0649, and M0800 to
: M0899 are added to the M code group setting screen.
0649
0800
:
0899
11.3.2 Setting an M Code Group Number Using a Program

You can execute a program to set an M code group number and M code name. The command format is
shown below.
Format
G10 L40 Pn Rg ;
Pn: “n” specifies an M code.
Rg: “g” specifies an M code group number.
- 100 -
NOTE
1 If the format is invalid, an alarm PS1144, “G10 FORMAT ERROR” is issued.
2 If an M code group cannot be set for the M code specified for the P command or
if the group number specified for the R command is not within the range between
0 and 127, an alarm PS1305, “DATA OUT OF RANGE” is issued.
(Example)
Executing the following program sets M code group “1” to M03:
G10 L40 P03 R1 ;
11.3.3 M Code Group Check Function

When multiple M commands in a single block (enabled when bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 is set to
1) are used, you can check the following items. You can also select whether to check the items using bit 1
(MGC) of parameter No. 3400.
(1) M code to be specified in a single block containing no other M codes

If an M code which must be specified in a single block containing no other M codes is specified
together with another M code, an alarm PS5016, “ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M CODES” is
issued.
(2) M codes in the same group
If multiple M codes in the same group are specified together, an alarm PS5016 is issued.
The valid range of group numbers is from 0 to 127 (128 groups).

Group numbers 0 and 1 have special meaning. Note the following points:
• Each M code with group number 1 is assumed to be an M code to be specified in a single block
containing no other M codes.
• For each M code with group number 0, the “same group M code check” is ignored. That is, when
multiple M codes with group number 0 are specified in a single block, the alarm is not issued.
• For each M code with group number 0, the “check for an M code to be specified in a single block
containing no other M codes” is not ignored. That is, if an M code with group number 1 and an M
code with group number 0 are specified in a single block, the alarm is issued.
• For M codes that are not to be output to the machine such as M98, M99, M198, and M codes for
subprogram and macro calls (set in parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079 and Nos. 6080 to 6089 and with
the macro executor), be sure to set 0 as the group number.
• For M00, M01, M02, M30, and M codes for which buffering is suppressed (set in parameters Nos.
3411 to 3432 and No.11290 to 11299), be sure to set 1 as the group number.
11.4 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (B CODES)

Overview
If a value with a maximum of eight digits is specified after address B, the code signal and strobe signal
are transferred for calculation of the rotation axis. The code signal is retained until the next B code is
specified.
Only one B code can be specified for each block. When the maximum number of digits are specified by
parameter No.3033, an alarm is issued if the number of digits of a command exceeds the specified
number.
In addition, the address used for specifying the second auxiliary function can be changed to an address
other than address B (address A, C, U, V, or W) by setting parameter No.3460.
However, the address used for the second auxiliary function cannot also be used as the address of the
controlled axis. For details, refer to the manual available from the machine tool builder.
- 101 -
Explanation
- Range of specification
-99999999 to 99999999
- Output value
The value specified after the address of the second auxiliary function is output on the code signals B00 to
B31. Note the following about a output value.
1. When a command with a decimal point or a negative command is disabled

(When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No.3450 is set to 0)
When the second auxiliary function with no decimal point is specified, the specified value is output
on the code signals as is, regardless of the desktop calculator decimal point setting (bit 0 (DPI) of
parameter No.3401).
Example:
Specified value Output value
B10 10
When the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is specified, alarm PS0007, “ILLEGAL
USE OF DECIMAL POINT” is issued.
When the second auxiliary function is specified with a negative value, alarm PS0006, “ILLEGAL
USE OF MINUS SIGN” is issued.
2. When a command with a decimal point or a negative command is enabled

(When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No.3450 is set to 1)
When the desktop calculator decimal point setting is not specified (when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter
No.3401 is set to 0), if the second auxiliary function with no decimal point is specified, the specified
value is output on the code signals as is.
Example:
B10 10
When desktop calculator decimal point input is specified (when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No.3401 is
set to 1), if the second auxiliary function with no decimal point is specified, the specified value
multiplied by a magnification is output on the code signals. (Magnifications are shown in Table 11.4
(a).)
Example:
B10 10000 (When metric input is used and the reference axis is IS-B. The
magnification is 1000.)
When the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is specified, the specified value multiplied
by a magnification is output to the code signals. (Magnifications are shown in Table 11.4 (a).)
Example:
B10. 10000 (When metric input is used and the reference axis is IS-B. The
magnification is 1000.)
B0.123 1230 (When inch input is used, the reference axis is IS-B, and parameter AUX
is set to 1. The magnification is 10000.)
The magnification is determined as shown below according to the setting unit of the reference axis
(specified by parameter No.1031) and bit 0 (AUX) of parameter No.3405.
- 102 -
Table 11.4 Magnifications for an output value when the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is
specified for desktop calculator decimal point input
Bit 0 (AUX) of parameter Bit 0 (AUX) of parameter
Setting unit
No.3405 = 0 No.3405 = 1
Reference axis: IS-A 100× 100×
Reference axis: IS-B 1000× 1000×
Metric input system Reference axis: IS-C 10000× 10000×
Reference axis: IS-D 100000× 100000×
Reference axis: IS-E 1000000× 1000000×
Reference axis: IS-A 100× 1000×
Reference axis: IS-B 1000× 10000×
Inch input system Reference axis: IS-C 10000× 100000×
Reference axis: IS-D 100000× 1000000×
Reference axis: IS-E 1000000× 10000000×
CAUTION
If a decimal fraction remains after multiplying the specified value with a decimal
point by a magnitude in Table 11.4 , the fraction is truncated.
Example:
B0.12345 1234 (When inch input is used, the reference axis is IS-B, and
parameter AUX is set to 1. The magnification is 10000.)
NOTE
If the number of digits of the specified value exceeds the allowable number of
digits (set by parameter No. 3033), alarm PS0003, “TOO MANY DIGIT” is
issued.
When the specified value is multiplied by a magnitude in Table 11.4 (a), the
allowable number of digits must be set for the resultant value.
Limitation
Addresses used for the second auxiliary functions (addresses specified with B or parameter No. 3460)
cannot be used as the addresses used for controlled axis names.
11.5 M COMMAND FOR SWITCHING THE PUNCH AND LASER

MODE
The punch mode and laser mode can be switched by specifying M codes in parameters. An M code is
specified in the first block for punching and for laser machining in a machining program. This will
improve processing precision in the interpolation mode of the laser mode.
In the laser mode, punching is not performed even in blocks where positioning is done by rapid traverse
along the X and Y axes. Manual punching, however, is possible. Note that pattern commands such as G26
and nibbling commands such as G68 cannot be specified. (These commands cause alarm (PS4630).)
（Example）
G92X1000. Y800. ;
M40 ;
G72X200. Y200. ; Punch mode
G26I50. J0K10. T101;
M41;
G90G00X100. Y100. ;
- 103 -
G01X300. F300;
Y300. ; Laser mode
X100. ;
Y100. ;
M40 ;
G28M30 ;
WARNING
1 The punch mode and laser mode can be switched only when bit 0 (ALA) of
parameter No. 16242 is set to 1.
Set the M code to the parameter (No. 16244, 16245).
2 The punch mode is entered immediately after the power is turned on or the
system is reset. (Laser mode is entered when bit 5 (RLM) of parameter No.
16240 is set.)
3 The M codes for switching the punch and laser modes must be specified in a
single block.
4 In punch mode, AI Contour Control I function cannot be used.
- 104 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
12 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
Chapter 12, "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT", consists of the following sections:
12.1 FOLDERS.........................................................................................................................................105
12.2 PROGRAMS.....................................................................................................................................108
12.3 RELATION WITH CONVENTIONAL FUNCTIONS....................................................................110
Operation around program management is described in "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in

OPERATION.
12.1 FOLDERS
Overview
Folders can be created in program memory.
12.1.1 Folder Configuration

The following folders can be created:
• Folder names are up to 32 characters long.
• The following characters can be used in folder names:
Alphabetical characters (uppercase and lowercase letters), numeric characters, and the symbols
below:
−+_.
Because "." and ".." are reserved folder names, they cannot be used.
- Initial folders
When program memory is initialized, folders having predefined structures and names are created. These
folders are called initial folders.
(1) Root folder

The parent folder of all folders
(2) System folder (SYSTEM)
Contains subprograms and macro programs of the system.
(3) MTB dedicated folder 1 (MTB1)
Contains subprograms and macro programs created by the machine tool builder.
Contains subprograms and macro programs created by the machine tool builder.
(5) User folder
Contains programs created by the user.
The following folders are further created in this folder:
(a) Path folders (PATHn: As many folders as the number of paths are created.)
Each contains main programs, subprograms, and macro programs used for the corresponding
path.
(b) Common program folder (LIBRARY)
Contains subprograms and macro programs used commonly.
NOTE
The initial folders can neither be deleted nor renamed.
- 105 -
12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
[Initial folder configuration]

The device that used to contain
programs is called CNC_MEM.
//CNC_MEM
(1) Root folder

/
SYSTEM/ (2) System folder (SYSTEM)

MTB1/

MTB2/
(5) User folder

USER/
PATH1/
(a) Path folders (PATHn)
PATH2/
PATHn/
(b) Common program folder (LIBRARY)

LIBRARY/
- User created folders

Folders other than the initial folders are called user created folders.
User created folders can be created in the following initial folders:
• User folder
• Path folders
User created folders can contain user created main programs, subprograms, and macro programs.
NOTE
1 Folder names must each be unique in the same folder.
2 Each time a user created folder is created, the number of programs that can be
registered decreases by one.
3 Folder hierarchical levels of user created folders are limited.
Up to three hierarchical levels starting from the user folder (USER/) are
permitted.
- 106 -
[Sample folder configuration]
//CNC_MEM
SYSTEM/
MTB1/
MTB2/
USER/
PATH1/
CYLINDER/
PISTON/
User created folders

PATH2/ Programs are grouped by
part to be machined, and the
program groups are stored in
GEAR1/ individual folders.
GEAR2/
LIBRARY/
12.1.2 Folder Attributes

The following attributes can be set for folders except the root folder:
• Edit disable
• Edit/display disable
- Edit disable
Editing of the programs and folders in a folder can be disabled.
A program in the folder can be output to an external device.
A program cannot be input (registered) from an external device to the folder.
- Edit/display disable
Editing and display of the programs and folders in a folder can be disabled.
When this attribute is set for a folder, the programs and folders in the folder become invisible. (The folder
appears to contain nothing.)
A program in the folder cannot be output to an external device and a program cannot be input (registered)
from an external device to a folder.
12.1.3 Default Folders

Default folders are folders on which operations are performed when no folder is specified. There are two
types of default folders as follows:
• Foreground default folder
• Background default folder
How to select a default folder is described in "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in OPERATION.
- 107 -
- Foreground default folder

A folder used for foreground operations except automatic operations and program editing is set.
The target operations include:
• Program input/output
• External data input
• External workpiece number search
- Background default folder

A folder used for background operations is set.
The target operations include:
• Program input/output
• External I/O device control
NOTE
1 When the foreground or background default folder is not set, a path folder, which
is an initial folder, is assumed.
2 Foreground and background default folder settings are stored in default folder
setting files.
3 When a program file, program folder, or program folder management file is
cleared, the default folder setting file is cleared at the same time.
12.2 PROGRAMS
Overview
Desired program names can be given to part programs in program memory.
12.2.1 Program Name

Program names can be set as follows:
• Program names are up to 32 characters long.
• The following characters can be used in program names:
Alphabetical characters (uppercase and lowercase letters), numeric characters, and the symbols
below:
−+_.
Because "." and ".." are reserved program names, they cannot be used.
- Program names and program numbers

Program names are associated with program numbers as explained below.
When the program name of a program consists of "O" plus a numeric with the following limitation, the
program can be handled also by program number.
• The numeric must be a leading zero suppressed value from 1 to 9999. (Bit 3 (ON8) of parameter
No.11304 = 0)
• The numeric must be a leading zero suppressed value from 1 to 99999999. (Bit 3 (ON8) of
parameter No.11304 = 1)
When the program name of a program does not have the above format, the program cannot be handled by
program number.
When a program name consisting of "O" plus a numeric does not satisfy the above limitation, the program
cannot be created.
Example)
Program names that can be treated as program numbers
- 108 -
O123 Program number 123
O1 Program number 1
Program names that cannot be treated as program numbers
ABC
o123
O123.4
NOTE
1 Program names must each be unique in the same folder.
2 When the program name of a program is not treated as a program number, the
program is restricted as follows:
- The program cannot be specified by program number.
- Information output by program number is impossible..
- Displaying Program Names and Program Numbers

The program name of the program selected or being executed as the main program is displayed as shown
in Fig. 12.2.1 (a) to Fig. 12.2.1 (c).
• For program names that can be handled as program numbers, the program number is displayed.
Fig. 12.2.1 (a) Program name display 1
• For program names that cannot be handled as program numbers, the program name is displayed.
The display layout varies as shown below, depending on the length of a program name.
Fig. 12.2.1 (b) Program name display 2
Fig. 12.2.1 (c) Program name display 3
- 109 -
12.2.2 Program Attributes

The following attributes can be set for programs:
• Edit disable
• Edit/display disable
• Encoding
• Change protection level/output protection level
- Edit disable
Editing of a specified program can be disabled.
A program cannot be input (registered) from an external device to the folder.
- Edit/display disable
Editing and display of a specified program can be disabled.
When this attribute is set, the program becomes invisible.
(The folder appears not to contain this program.)
An output to an external device and an input from an external device (program registration) cannot be
made.
- Encoding
A specified program can be encoded.
For details of encoding, see the description of the “Program encryption” function.
An output to an external device and an input from an external device (program registration) cannot be
made.
- Change protection level/output protection level

With the 8-level data protection function, change and output protection can be provided for a specified
program.
For details of the 8-level data protection function, see the description of the “Protection of data at eight
levels” function.
12.3 RELATION WITH CONVENTIONAL FUNCTIONS

This section explains relation with conventional functions when folder names and program names are
used.
12.3.1 Relation with Folders

This subsection explains how folders are used for operations and editing.
- Automatic operation
Main program
As the main program running for an automatic operation, a program in a desired folder can be selected.
Subprogram (called by M98)

Macro program (called by G65/G66/G66.1/M96)
• Subprogram call (M98)
• Macro call (simple call G65/modal call G66, G66.1)
• Macro interrupt (M96)
When a call listed above is made, folders are searched in the following order, and the program found first
is called:
<1> Folders containing the main program
- 110 -
<2> Common program folder, which is an initial folder (LIBRARY)
Bit 7 (SCF) of parameter No. 3457 can be used to add the following search folders. (The folders are
searched in the order listed below.) The folder to be actually enabled is separately set by bits 1 to 3 of
parameters No. 3457.
<3> MTB dedicated folder 2, which is an initial folder (MTB2)
<5> System folder, which is an initial folder (SYSTEM)
Subprogram (called by M code/specific address/2nd auxiliary function)

Macro program (called by G code/M code/T code/one touch macro)
• Subprogram call by M code/specific address/2nd auxiliary function code
• Macro call by G code/M code/T code
• One touch macro call
For programs called as listed above, the folders to be searched are set in bits 0 to 3 of parameter No.3457
in advance. (The search order is described below.)
The folders set as the search targets are searched, and the program found first is called.
<1> Common program folder, which is an initial folder (LIBRARY)
<4> System folder, which is an initial folder (SYSTEM)
- Program editing
A program in any folder can be edited.
- Program I/O
The following functions are performed for default folders:
• Program input from external devices
• Program output to external devices
(Except the format with folder names)
The following functions are performed for a set background default folder:
• External I/O device control
- External data input

A set foreground default folder is searched for an external program.
- External workpiece number search

A set foreground default folder is searched for an external workpiece number.
- Macro executor
Programs called by execution macros, conversational macros, and auxiliary macros are programs in
P-Code files regardless of the default folder.
For programs on the macro executor, the folder function and program name function are unavailable.
12.3.2 Relation with Program Names

Program names can be used with the following functions:
• Macro call (simple call G65/modal call G66, G66.1)
• Interruption type macro call (M96)
• Program I/O with external devices
- 111 -
- Subprogram call by program name

- Macro call by program name
• Macro call (G65/G66/G66.1)
• Interruption type macro call (M96)
When a program is called in the above functions, a subprogram call by program name and a macro call by
program name can be used.
• Subprogram call by program name

M98 <program-name> Lxx ;
• Macro call by program name
G65 <program-name> Lxx argument-specification ;
G66 <program-name> Lxx argument-specification ;
G66.1 <program-name> Lxx argument-specification ;
• Interruption type macro call
M96 <program-name> ;
In the above subprogram and macro calls, the program having the program name indicated by
<program-name> is called.
Format examples:
• Subprogram call
M98 <R50> L1 ;
• Macro call
G65 <R50> L1 A0 ;
G66 <R50> L1 A1 ;
G66.1 <R50> L1 A2 ;
• Interruption type macro call
M96 <R50> ;
NOTE
1 When characters in <> are read, they are treated in the same way as for
characters in comments. So, note that these characters are treated differently
from other significant information portions.
Refer to Appendix B “PROGRAM CODE LIST” for details.
2 The <program-name> word must be placed immediately after each word for
calling (M98, G65, and so forth).
12.3.3 Related Parameters

This subsection lists the meanings of parameters related to program numbers and the folders and
programs to be manipulated or executed.
Parameter No. Bit No. Description Manipulation/execution target

Disables or enables editing of programs O8000 Corresponding programs in all
0 (NE8)
to O8999. folders
3202
Disables or enables editing of programs O9000
4 (NE9) Same as above
to O9999.
- 112 -
Parameter No. Bit No. Description Manipulation/execution target

Disables or enables editing of programs
3 (P8E) Same as above
O80000000 to O8999999.
Disables or enables editing of programs
4 (P9E) Same as above
3204 O90000000 to O99999999.
Assumes or does not assume a particular
5 (SPR) program number in the nine thousands to be a Same as above
number obtained by adding 90000000.
Password/keyword for protecting programs in
3210/3211 - Same as above
the nine thousands
Program protection range (minimum
value)/(maximum value)
In the subprogram call function, address P in
(Not dependent on the folder
3404 2 (SBP) the M198 block specifies a file/program
function and file name function)
number.
The following initial folders can be
selected by parameter setting:
- Common program folder
Calls or does not call a custom macro by T
6001 5 (TCS) (LIBRARY)
code.
- MTB dedicated folder 2 (MTB2)
- MTB dedicated folder 1 (MTB1)
- System folder (SYSTEM)
G code for calling a custom macro with
6050 to 6059 - Same as above
program No. 9010 to 9019
M code for calling a subprogram with program
No. 9001 to 9009
M code for calling a custom macro with
program No. 9020 to 9029
ASCII code for calling a subprogram with
program No. 9004/9005
Target program number (for 4- and 8-digit O
Foreground or background default
8341/8343 - number) for sequence number comparison and
folder depending on the mode
stop
Corresponding programs in all
11304 3 (ON8) Program number is 4-digit / 8-digit
folders
12.3.4 Part Program Storage Size / Number of Registerable

Programs
The following table lists the combinations of program storage sizes and the total number of registrable
programs.
Number of
Part program Number of registerable Number of registerable
registerable
storage size programs expansion 1 programs expansion 2
programs
64Kbyte 63 125 -
128Kbyte 63 250 -
256Kbyte 63 500 -
512Kbyte 63 1000 -
1Mbyte 63 1000 2000
2Mbyte 63 1000 4000
4Mbyte 63 1000 4000
8Mbyte 63 1000 4000
- 113 -
NOTE
1 Creating one folder results in the number of
Program O0001
programs yet to be registerable decreasing
O0001 ;
N1 G01 ; First page one.
2 The program storage size means the
(Area in use)
maximum size of a program if the program is
the one and only program registered.
N100 … ;
Second page 3 If more than one program is registered, the
total size of registerable programs reduces
(Area in use)
for the following reason.
The Series 30i/31i-PB manage programs in
M30 ;
(Area in use)
Last page page units. The unit of program storage is
managed also in page units. When a
(Unused area) program is created, as many pages as
necessary to store the program are secured,
Unusable for any other and the program is stored on these pages.
program Generally, the last program storage page
has an unused area (Fig. 12.3.4 (a)). This
Example of creating program O0001 unused area cannot be used to store any
other program. For the sake of program
Fig. 12.3.4 (a) Unit of program storage management, it is regarded as an area in
use.
The Series 16i/18i/21i uses a similar way of
management, but the unit of pages in it
differs from that in the Series 30i/31i-PB.
So, if more than one program is registered in
the Series 30i/31i-PB, the total program size
of registerable programs in the Series
30i/31i-PB differs from that in the Series
16i/18i/21i.
- 114 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
13 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
Overview
- Main program and subprogram
There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, the CNC operates according to
the main program. However, when a command calling a subprogram is encountered in the main program,
control is passed to the subprogram. When a command specifying a return to the main program is
encountered in a subprogram, control is returned to the main program.
Main program Subprogram
Instruction 1 Instruction 1’
Instruction 2 Instruction 2’
Follow the direction of the

subprogram
Instruction n
Instruction n+1
Return to the main program

Fig. 13 (a) Main program and Subprogram
The CNC memory can hold up to 4000 main programs and subprograms (63 as standard). A main
program can be selected from the stored main programs to operate the machine. See Chapter,
“CREATING PROGRAMS” and Section, “PROGRAM SEARCH” for the methods of registering and
selecting programs.
- Program components
A program consists of the following components:
Table 13 (a) Program components
Components Descriptions
Program code start Symbol indicating the start of a program file
Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc.
Program start Symbol indicating the start of a program
Program section Commands for machining
Comment section Comments or directions for the operator
Program code end Symbol indicating the end of a program file
Leader section
Program code start % TITLE ; Program start

O0001 ;
Program section (COMMENT) Comment section
M30 ;
% Program code end
Fig. 13 (b) Program configuration
- 115 -
13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
- Program section configuration

A program section consists of several blocks. A program section starts with a program number or
program name and ends with a program end code.
Program section configuration Program section
Program number O0001 ;

Block 1 N1 G91 G00 X120.0 Y80.0 ;
Block 2 N2 G43 Z-32.0 H01 ;
: :
Block n Nn Z0 ;
Program end M30 ;
A block contains information necessary for machining, such as a move command or coolant on/off
command. Specifying a slash (/) at the start of a block disables the execution of some blocks (see
"optional block skip" in II-13.2).
13.1 PROGRAM COMPONENTS OTHER THAN PROGRAM

SECTIONS
This section describes program components other than program sections. See Section, “PROGRAM
SECTION CONFIGURATION” for a program section.
Leader section
Program code start % TITLE ; Program start

O0001 ;
(COMMENT) Comment section

Program section
M30 ;
% Program code end
Fig. 13.1 Program configuration
Explanation
- Program code start
The program code start indicates the start of a file that contains NC programs.
The mark is not required when programs are entered using SYSTEM P or ordinary personal computers.
The mark is not displayed on the screen. However, if the file is output, the mark is automatically output at
the start of the file.
Table 13.1 (a) Code of a program code start

Name ISO code EIA code Notation in this manual
Program code start % ER %
- Leader section
Data entered before the programs in a file constitutes a leader section.
When machining is started, the label skip state is usually set by turning on the power or resetting the
system. In the label skip state, all information is ignored until the first end-of-block code is read. When a
file is read into the CNC unit from an I/O device, leader sections are skipped by the label skip function.
- 116 -
A leader section generally contains information such as a file header. When a leader section is skipped,
even a TV parity check is not made. So a leader section can contain any codes except the EOB code.
- Program start
The program start code is to be entered immediately after a leader section, that is, immediately before a
program section.
This code indicates the start of a program, and is always required to disable the label skip function.
With SYSTEM P or ordinary personal computers, this code can be entered by pressing the return key.
Table 13.1 (b) Code of a program start

Program start LF CR ;
NOTE
If one file contains multiple programs, the EOB code for label skip operation
must not appear before a second or subsequent program number.
- Comment section
Any information enclosed by the control-out and control-in codes is regarded as a comment.
The user can enter a header, comments, directions to the operator, etc. in a comment section.
Table 13.1 (c) Codes of a control-in and a control-out

Name ISO code EIA code Notation in this manual Meaning
Control-out ( 2-4-5 ( Start of comment section
Control-in ) 2-4-7 ) End of comment section
When a program is read into memory for memory operation, comment sections, if any, are not ignored
but are also read into memory. Note, however, that codes other than those listed in the code table in
Appendix A are ignored, and thus are not read into memory.
When data in memory is output on external I/O device (See Chapter, “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT”), the
comment sections are also output.
When a program is displayed on the screen, its comment sections are also displayed. However, those
codes that were ignored when read into memory are not output or displayed.
During memory operation or DNC operation, all comment sections are ignored.
The TV check function can be used for a comment section by setting bit 1 (CTV) of parameter No. 0100.
CAUTION
If a long comment section appears in the middle of a program section, a move
along an axis may be suspended for a long time because of such a comment
section. So a comment section should be placed where movement suspension
may occur or no movement is involved.
NOTE
1 If only a control-in code is read with no matching control-out code, the read
control-in code is ignored.
2 The following codes cannot be used in the comment section:
- EOB
- % (ER for EIA)
- Program code end

A program code end is to be placed at the end of a file containing NC programs.
If programs are entered using the automatic programming system, the mark need not be entered.
- 117 -
The mark is not displayed on the screen. However, when a file is output, the mark is automatically output
at the end of the file.
If an attempt is made to execute % when M02 or M30 is not placed at the end of the program, the alarm
PS5010, “END OF RECORD” is occurred.
Table 13.1 (d) Code of a program code end

Program code end % ER %
13.2 PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION

This section describes elements of a program section. See Section, “PROGRAM COMPONENTS
OTHER THAN PROGRAM SECTIONS” for program components other than program sections.
Program number
% TITLE ;
O0001 ;
N1 ... ;
Sequence number
Program section (COMMENT)
M30 ;
% Program end
Fig. 13.2 (a) Program configuration
- Program number
A program number consisting of address O followed by a four-digit number is assigned to each program
at the beginning registered in memory to identify the program. When the 8-digit number function is
selected, the program number consists of eight digits.
In ISO code, the colon ( : ) can be used instead of O.
When no program number is specified at the start of a program, the sequence number (N....) at the start of
the program is regarded as its program number. If a five-digit sequence number is used, the lower four
digits are registered as a program number. If the lower four digits are all 0, the program number registered
immediately before added to 1 is registered as a program number. Note, however, that N0 cannot be used
for a program number.
If there is no program number or sequence number at the start of a program, a program number must be
specified using the MDI panel when the program is stored in memory (See Section, “INPUT/OUTPUT
ON EACH SCREEN” or “CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI UNIT”)
NOTE
Program numbers 8000 to 9999 may be used by machine tool builders, and the
user may not be able to use these numbers.
- Program name
A program name can be assigned instead of a program number.
When coding a program name, be sure to place the program name enclosed in "<" and ">" at the
beginning of a program.
- 118 -
Example) % ;
<PARTS_1> ;
N1 ...
:
M30 ;
%
NOTE
A program name can be coded:
- At the beginning of a program
- Immediately after M98, G65, G66, G66.1, M96, G72.1, or G72.2
Do not code a program name in other than the above.
- Sequence number and block

A program consists of several commands. One command unit is called a block. One block is separated
from another with an EOB of end of block code.
Table 13.2 (a) EOB code

End of block (EOB) LF CR ;
At the head of a block, a sequence number consisting of address N followed by a number not longer than
eight digits (1 to 99999999) can be placed. Sequence numbers can be specified in a random order, and
any numbers can be skipped. Sequence numbers may be specified for all blocks or only for desired blocks
of the program. In general, however, it is convenient to assign sequence numbers in ascending order in
phase with the machining steps (for example, when a new tool is used by tool replacement, and
machining proceeds to a new surface with table indexing.)
N300X200.0Z300.0 ; A sequence number is underlined.

Fig. 13.2 (b) Sequence number and block (example)
NOTE
N0 must not be used for the reason of file compatibility with other CNC systems.
Program number 0 cannot be used. So 0 must not be used for a sequence
number regarded as a program number.
- TV check (Vertical parity check)

A parity check is made for each block of input data. If the number of characters in one block (starting
with the code immediately after an EOB and ending with the next EOB) is odd, an alarm PS0002, “TV
ERROR” is output.
No TV check is made only for those parts that are skipped by the label skip function. Bit 1 (CTV) of
parameter No. 0100 is used to specify whether comments enclosed in parentheses are counted as
characters during TV check. The TV check function can be enabled or disabled by setting on the MDI
unit (See Subsection, “Displaying and Entering Setting Data”).
- Block configuration (word and address)

A block consists of one or more words. A word consists of an address followed by a number some digits
long. (The plus sign (+) or minus sign (-) may be prefixed to a number.)
For an address, one of the letters (A to Z) is used ; an address defines the meaning of a number that
follows the address.
Word = Address + number (Example : X-1000)
Table 13.1 (b) indicates the usable addresses and their meanings.
The same address may have different meanings, depending on the preparatory function specification.
- 119 -
Table 13.2 (b) Major functions and addresses

Function Address Meaning
Program number O(*) Program number
Sequence number N Sequence number
Preparatory function G Specifies a motion mode (linear, arc, etc.)
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C Coordinate axis move command
Dimension word I, J, K Coordinate of the arc center
R Arc radius
Feed function F Rate of feed per minute
Spindle speed function S S code
Tool function T Tool number
M On/off control on the machine tool
Auxiliary function
B Table indexing, etc.
Program number designation P Subprogram number
Number of repetitions P, L Number of subprogram repetitions
Parameters for pattern function and Nibbling
Parameter P, Q, K
function
Offset number D Offset number
Dwell P, X Dwell time
Macro function A,B,U,V,W Macro number
NOTE
(*) In ISO code, the colon ( : ) can also be used as the address of a program
number.
N_ G_ X_ Y_ F_ S_ T_ M_ ;
Sequence number Preparatory Dimension word Feed-function Spindle speed Tool function Auxiliary function
function function
Fig. 13.2 (c) 1 block (example)
- Major addresses and ranges of command values

Major addresses and the ranges of values specified for the addresses are shown below. Note that these
figures represent limits on the CNC side, which are totally different from limits on the machine tool side.
For example, the CNC allows a tool to traverse up to about 100 m (in millimeter input) along the X axis.
However, an actual stroke along the X axis may be limited to 2 m for a specific machine tool.
Similarly, the CNC may be able to control a cutting feedrate of up to 240 m/min, but the machine tool
may not allow more than 3 m/min. When developing a program, the user should carefully read the
manuals of the machine tool as well as this manual to be familiar with the restrictions on programming.
Table 13.2 (c) Major addresses and ranges of command values

Function Address Input in mm Input in inch
Program number O (*1) 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
Sequence number N 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
Preparatory function G 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9
Increment system ±999999.99 mm ±99999.999 inch *3
IS-A ±999999.99 deg. ±999999.99 deg.
IS-B ±999999.999 deg. ±999999.999 deg.
X,Y,Z,U,V,
Dimension Increment system ±99999.9999 mm ±9999.99999 inch *3
W,A,B,C,I,J,
word IS-C ±99999.9999 deg. ±99999.9999 deg.
K,R (*2)
IS-D ±9999.99999 deg. ±9999.99999 deg.
IS-E ±999.999999 deg. ±999.999999 deg.
- 120 -
Function Address Input in mm Input in inch

Increment system
0.01 to 999000.00mm/min 0.001 to 96000.000inch/min
IS-A
Increment system
IS-B
Feed per Increment system
F 0.0001 to 99999.9999mm/min 0.00001 to 4000.00000inch/min
minute IS-C
Increment system
IS-D
Increment system 0.000001 to 0.0000001 to
IS-E 999.999999mm/min 40.0000000inch/min
Tool function T (*4) 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
M (*4) 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Auxiliary function
B (*4) 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Offset number (M series only) H, D 0 to 999 0 to 999
Increment system
0 to 999999.99 sec 0 to 999999.99 sec
IS-A
Increment system
0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 99999.999 sec
IS-B
X,
Increment system
Dwell U (T series 0 to 9999.9999 sec 0 to 9999.9999 sec
IS-C
only)
Increment system
0 to 999.99999 sec 0 to 999.99999 sec
IS-D
Increment system
0 to 99.999999 sec 0 to 99.999999 sec
IS-E
Dwell P 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
Designation of a program number P 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
L 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
Number of subprogram repetitions
P 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
*1 In ISO code, the colon ( : ) can also be used as the address of a program number.
*2 When address I, J, K, or R is used to specify the radius for circular interpolation, the specifiable
range is as follows:
Increment system Input in mm Input in inch
IS-A ±999999999.99 mm ±99999999.999 inch
IS-B ±999999999.999 mm ±99999999.9999 inch
IS-C ±99999999.9999 mm ±9999999.99999 inch
IS-D ±9999999.99999 mm ±999999.999999 inch
IS-E ±999999.999999 mm ±99999.9999999 inch
*3 For inch input/millimeter machines, the maximum specifiable range of dimension words is as
follows:
Increment system Maximum specifiable range
IS-A ±39370.078 inch
IS-B ±39370.0787 inch
IS-C ±3937.00787 inch
IS-D ±393.700787 inch
IS-E ±39.3700787 inch
*4 The maximum value of addresses M, S, T, and B is 99999999. Note that, however, values longer
than the permissible number of digits set in parameter No. 3030 to 3033 cannot be specified.
The values and uses for some codes are limited by parameter setting. (For example, some M codes
are not buffered.) For details, refer to the parameter manual.
- 121 -
- Optional block skip

When a slash followed by a number (/n (n=1 to 9)) is specified at the head of a block, and optional block
skip signals BDT1 to BDT9 are set to 1 during automatic operation, the information (/n to the end of the
block (EOB)) contained in the block for which /n corresponding to signal BDTn is specified is ignored.
Example 1)
/2 N123 X100.0 Y200.0 ;
Example 2)
//3 N123 X100.0 Y200.0 ; → Incorrect
/1 /3 N123 X100.0 Y200.0 ;→ Correct
Input signal and program code

Input signal Start code to be ignored
BDT1 / or /1(NOTE)
BDT2 /2
BDT3 /3
BDT4 /4
BDT5 /5
BDT6 /6
BDT7 /7
BDT8 /8
BDT9 /9
NOTE
1 Number 1 for /1 can be omitted. However, when two or more optional block skips
are specified for one block, number 1 for /1 cannot be omitted.
2 Depending on the machine tool, all optional block skip signals (1 to 9) may not
be usable. Refer to manuals of the machine tool builder to find which switches
are usable.
The following shows the relationship between the timing at which optional block skip signals BDT1 to
BDT9 are set to 1 and the range of information to be ignored.
1. When the signal BDTn is set to 1 before the CNC starts reading a block that contains /n, the block is
ignored.
BDTn "1"
"0"
Read by CNC → . . . ; /n N123 X100. Y200. ;N234 . . . .
This range of information is ignored.
2. When the signal BDTn is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a block that contains /n, the block is not
ignored.
BDTn "1"
"0"
Read by CNC → . . . ; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 . . . .
This range of information is not ignored.
- 122 -
3. When the signal BDTn is set to 0 while the CNC is reading a block that contains /n, the block is
ignored.
BDTn "1"
"0"
Read by CNC → . . . ; /n N123 X100. Y200.; N234 . . . .
4. Two or more optional block skips can be specified in one block. When the signal corresponding to
any of the specified skips is set to 1, the block is ignored.
BDT3 "1"
"0"
Read by CNC → . . . ; /1 /3 /5 N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 . . . .
NOTE
1 This function is not used when a program is registered in memory. A block
containing / is registered in memory regardless of the statuses of optional block
skip signals. When a program in memory is also output regardless of the
statuses of optional block skip signals.
In addition, the optional block skip function is enabled during a search for a
sequence number.
2 Position of a slash
A block skip slash (/) must be specified at the beginning of a block. Note that if a
slash is placed elsewhere, the information from the slash to immediately before
the EOB code is ignored.
3 TV and TH check
When the optional block skip signal is set to 1, TH and TV checks are made for
the skipped portions in the same way as when the optional block skip signal is
set to 0.
- Program end
The end of a program is indicated by programming one of the following codes at the end of the program:
Table 13.2 (d) Code of a program end

Code Meaning usage
M02
For main program
M03
M99 For subprogram
If one of the program end codes is executed in program execution, the CNC terminates the execution of
the program, and the reset state is set. When the subprogram end code is executed, control returns to the
program that called the subprogram.
CAUTION
A block containing an optional block skip code such as /M02 ; , /M30 ; , or /M99 ;
is not regarded as the end of a program. (see "Optional block skip".)
- 123 -
13.3 SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99)

If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, such a sequence or pattern can be
stored as a subprogram in memory to simplify the program.
A subprogram can be called from the main program.
A called subprogram can also call another subprogram.
Format
- Subprogram configuration
One subprogram
Oxxxx ; Subprogram number or subprogram name (or the colon (:) optionally in
: the case of ISO)
M99; Program end
M99 need not constitute a separate block as indicated below.
Example) X100.0Y100.0M99;
- Subprogram call
- When a subprogram with a 4-digit or shorter program number is called
M98 Pxxxx xxxx ;
Subprogram number
Number of times the subprogram is called repeatedly
or
M98 Pxxxx Lxxxxxxxx ;

Subprogram number
- When a subprogram with a 5-digit or longer program number is called

M98 Pxxxxxxxx Lxxxxxxxx ;
Subprogram number
- When a subprogram is called by program name

M98 <xxxx> Lxxxxxxxx ;
Subprogram name
- Called program and folders to be searched

The order in which folders are searched depends on the method of calling a subprogram. Folders are
searched in sequence and the program found first is called. For details, see the "Managing Programs"
chapter.
- 124 -
NOTE
1 When calling a subprogram of a 4-digit or shorter subprogram number
repeatedly (P8 digit), make the subprogram number 4 digits by prefixing it with
“0” if the subprogram number is shorter than 4 digits.
Example)
P100100: Call subprogram No. 100 ten times.
P50001: Call subprogram No. 1 five times.
2 If the number of times the subprogram is called repeatedly is omitted when a
subprogram with a 4-digit or shorter program number is called, the subprogram
is called just once.
In this case, it is not necessary to adjust the subprogram number length to 4
digits as described in Item 1 above.
3 When calling a subprogram of a 4-digit or shorter program number repeatedly
(P8 digit), do not specify address L in the same block.
4 When calling a subprogram with a 5-digit or longer program number, do not omit
the specification of the number of repeats.
5 When calling a subprogram by program name, be sure to specify the program
name immediately after M98.
Explanation
When the main program calls a subprogram, it is regarded as a one-level subprogram call. Thus,
subprogram calls can be nested up to ten levels as shown below. In addition, when the custom macro
option is used, subprogram and macro calls can be nested up to a total of 15 levels.
Main program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram
O0001 ; O0010 ; O0020 ; O0090 ; O0100 ;
M98P0010 ; M98P0020 ; M98P0030 ; M98P0100 ;
M30 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ;

(One-level nesting) (Two-level nesting) (Nine-level nesting) (Ten-level nesting)
A single call command can repeatedly call a subprogram up to 99999999 times. For compatibility with
automatic programming systems, in the first block, Nxxxxxxxx can be used instead of a subprogram
number that follows O (or :). A sequence number after N is registered as a subprogram number.
NOTE
1 The M98 and M99 code signal and strobe signal are not output to the machine
tool.
2 If the subprogram number specified by address P cannot be found, an alarm
PS0078, “SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND” is output.
3 When an attempt is made to call a subprogram by program name, but the
specified program cannot be found, alarm PS0310, “FILE NOT FOUND” is
issued.
- 125 -
Example
M98 P51002 ;
This command specifies "Call the subprogram (number 1002) five times in
succession." A subprogram call command (M98P_) can be specified in the same
block as a move command.
X1000.0 M98 P1200 ;

This example calls the subprogram (number 1200) after an X movement.
Execution sequence of subprograms called from a main program

1 2 3
N0010 . . . ; O1010 . . . ;
N0020 . . . ; N1020 . . . ;
N0030 M98 P21010 ; N1030 . . . ;
N0040 . . . ; N1040 . . . ;
N0050 M98 P1010 ; N1050 . . . ;
N0060 . . . ; N1060 . . . M99 ;
A subprogram can call another subprogram in the same way as a main program
calls a subprogram.
Special usage
- Specifying the sequence number for the return destination in the main
program
If P is used to specify a sequence number when a subprogram is terminated, control does not return to the
block after the calling block, but returns to the block with the sequence number specified by P. Note,
however, that P is ignored if the main program is operating in a mode other than memory operation mode.
This method consumes a much longer time than the normal return method to return to the main program.
N0010 . . . ; O0010 . . . ;
N0020 . . . ; N1020 . . . ;
N0030 M98 P1010 ; N1030 . . . ;
N0040 . . . ; N1040 . . . ;
N0050 . . . ; N1050 . . . ;
N0060 . . . ; N1060 . . . M99 P0060 ;
- Using M99 in the main program

If M99 is executed in a main program, control returns to the start of the main program. For example, M99
can be executed by placing /M99 ; at an appropriate location of the main program and setting the optional
block skip function to off when executing the main program. When M99 is executed, control returns to
the start of the main program, then execution is repeated starting at the head of the main program.
Execution is repeated while the optional block skip function is set to off.
If the optional block skip function is set to on, the /M99 ; block is skipped ; control is passed to the next
block for continued execution.
If/M99Pn ; is specified, control returns not to the start of the main program, but to sequence number n. In
this case, a longer time is required to return to sequence number n.
N0010 . . . ;
N0020 . . . ;
N0030 . . . ;
N0040 . . . ;
Optional block skip N0050 . . . ;
/ N0060 . . . M99 P0030 ; Optional block skip
OFF
N0070 . . . ; ON
N0080 M02 ;
- 126 -
- Using a subprogram only

A subprogram can be executed just like a main program by searching for the start of the subprogram with
the MDI.
(See Section, “PROGRAM SEARCH” for information about search operation.)
In this case, if a block containing M99 is executed, control returns to the start of the subprogram for
repeated execution. If a block containing M99Pn is executed, control returns to the block with sequence
number n in the subprogram for repeated execution. To terminate this program, a block containing /M02 ;
or /M30 ; must be placed at an appropriate location, and the optional block switch must be set to off ; this
switch is to be set to on first.
N1010 . . . ;
N1020 . . . ;
N1030 . . . ;
/ N1040 . . . M02 ;
N1050 M99 P1020 ; Optional block skip ON
- Subprogram call with sequence number

Setting bit 0 (SQC) of parameter No. 6005 to 1 can call a specified sequence number in the subprogram
for execution.
In a subprogram call command, specify the letter Q followed by a sequence number to be called after the
letter P for specifying a program number.
M98 Pxxxx Qxxxxx ;
Sequence number
Program number
This command causes program execution to start at the called sequence number in the subprogram. If a
repetition count is specified, program execution is repeated from the specified sequence number.
Main program Sub program
N0010…; O1010…;
N0020…; N1020…;
N0030 M98 P1010 Q1030 ; N1030…;
N0040…; N1040…;
N0050…; N1050…;
N0060…; N1060…M99 ;
This function enables a sequence number in the same program to be called for execution as shown below.
This method, however, requests the programmer to be aware of an allowable call nesting level. If an
attempt is made to exceed the allowable nesting level, alarm PS0077, “TOO MANY SUB,MACRO
NESTING” is issued.
O0001 ;
N0010…;
N0020 M98 (P0001) Q0050 ;
N0030…;
N0040…;
N0050…;
N0060…;
N0070…M99;
For a call within the same program, specification of Pxxxx in a block can be omitted when the block
includes M98.
This function is usable only for subprogram calls by M98; it is unusable for non-M98 calls, such as macro
calls or external subprogram calls based on M198.
- 127 -
NOTE
If bit 0 (SQC) of parameter No. 6005 is ”0”, and an M98 Pxxxx Qxxxxx command
is specified, alarm PS0009, "IMPROPER NC-ADDRESS", is issued.
- 128 -
14.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING
14 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING

Chapter 14, "FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING", consists of the following sections:
14.1 PATTERN FUNCTION....................................................................................................................129

14.2 MEMORY AND CALL BY A/B MACRO ......................................................................................146
14.3 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) .........................................................................................147
14.4 U/V/W MACRO FUNCTION ..........................................................................................................152
14.5 MULTI–PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION....................................................................................156
14.6 BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, G39) .....................................................................................163
14.7 LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH- COMMAND .......................................................................165
14.8 Y–AXIS CRACK CANCEL.............................................................................................................170
14.1 PATTERN FUNCTION

The pattern function means a function to punch multiple positions conforming to a certain format by
one-block command including G function. This pattern function requires only one block command
instead of several-block commands, and thus, its program is simplified.
This control system prepares the following patterns as the standard functions, which are used most
frequently.
Table14.1 Pattern functions
G code Pattern function Patterns
G26 Bolt hole circle #1

-Punching specified times at constant pitch r θ
(angle) on the circle. #2 #n
G26 I r J θ K n
G76 Line at angle

#n
-Punching specified times at constant pitch #2
(distance) on the straight line. #1
d
θ
G76 I d J θ K n
G77 Arc #n
-Punching specified times at constant pitch #2
(angle) on the circular arc. r
Δθ #1
θ
G77 I r J θ P Δθ K n
G78 Grid
ny #n
G79 -Punching specified times in grid points
having specified interval. dy #1
G78 I dx J dy P nx K ny dx nx
G79 I dx J dy P nx K ny
- 129 -
14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
G code Pattern function Patterns
G86 Share proofs

-Punching straight l
#1 #n
G86 I l J θ P w1 Q w2 w2 θ
w1
G87 Square
-Punching a rectangle ly #n
w2
G87 I lx J ly P w1 Q w2
#1 lx w1
G88 Radius #n
-Punching specified times at constant pitch d
#2
r
(distance) along the circular arc that have p #1
Δθ
specified angle. θ
G89 Cut at angle d
-Punching specified times at constant pitch l
#n
(distance) along the straight line that have p
specified distance. θ
#1 #2
NOTE
G26, G76, G77, G78, G79, G86, G87, G88 and G89 are one-shot G codes.
In pattern function, the following two motions are repeatedly done to

punch at respective positions.
Motion 1 ... Positioning of X, Y axes (rapid traverse)
Motion 2 ... Punch by press motion
Motion 2
（Punching operation）
Motion 1 Repetition
（Movement of the
X and Y axes）
14.1.1 Base Point Command (G72)

Of the pattern function, the center point of the bolt hole circle (G26), arc (G77) and radius (G88), and also
the start point of line at angle (G76), grid (G78, G79), share proofs (G86), Square (G87) and cut at angle
(G89) are called base point of pattern.
The present position of the tool when the pattern function was commanded, i.e. the tool position in the
block just before the pattern function command, is the base point of pattern. If it is desired to set another
position as the pattern base point, the base point of pattern is assignable by the following command.
G72X x Y y ;
- 130 -
The (x, y) point in the work coordinate system is the pattern base point in absolute (G90) programming,
while the point distant from the present position by (x, y) is the reference point in incremental (G91)
programming.
G72 specifies the pattern base point, and the tool does not move.
Example
Movement of tool in program 1

Movement of tool in program 2
(150,150)
(210,150)
Program 1 Program 2
（Not use G72）（Use G72）
G90 G00 X50. Y50. G90 G00 X50. Y50.
G90 G00 X150.Y150. G72 X150.Y150.
(50,50) （pattern base point）（pattern base point）
G26 I60. J0 K4 G26 I60. J0 K4
CAUTION
1 None of T code, M code, and F code is commandable in G72 block.
2 G72 is one-shot G code.
14.1.2 Bolt Hole Circle (G26)

Bolt Hole Circle (G26) specifies punching the specified times at the constant pitch (angle) on the circular
arc with the pattern base point being set as the circle center.
Format
G26 I r J θ K n
θ : Angle between the first punch point and +X axis (Valid data range : When the increment system is IS-B,
−359999 to 359999)
Unit of data : Least input increment (deg)
-The counterclockwise direction is commanded as positive. While, clockwise direction is commanded as
negative.
n : Number of punch points (Valid data range : ±1 to ±9999)

-Counterclockwise punching is made by a positive number, while clockwise punching is made by a negative
number.
This G26 punches n pieces of equally divided points on the circumference, starting with the point which
forms angle θ with the reference to X axis on the circumference having radius r with the pattern base
point being set as the circle center.
- 131 -
When θ>0 and n>0 #2
#3
#1
#4 θ #n
+X
Center of Circle
(Pattern base point)
#(n−3) #(n−1)
#(n−2) #1 to #n：Order of punch motion
Example
- When θ<0, n>0, and punching in the pattern base point

N212 G00 X100. Y80. #1 to #8 ：Order of punch motion in N213
N213 G26 I30. J−60. K8 ：Path of tool
(107.765,108.978)
(85.000,105.981)
#4
#5
(125.981,95.000)
#3
(71.022,87.765)
#6
(100.000,80.000)
N211
+X
N212
(60.000,80.000) #2
−60° 45°
(128.978,72.235)
#7 30.000
(74.019,65.000)
#8 #1
(115.000,54.019)
(92.235,51.022)
If it is desired to punch the center of the circle, omit G72 of block N521.
NOTE
1 If the radius is 0 or the number of punch points is 0, an alarm (No. 4502) is
issued.
2 T and C commands are possible in same block of G26.
- 132 -
14.1.3 Line at Angle (G76)

Line at angle (G76) specifies punching the specified times at the constant pitch (distance) on the straight
line with the pattern base point as the start point.
Format
G76 I d J θ K n
d : Punch point interval (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
-If this value is commanded with positive, punching is made in the θ direction.
-If this value is commanded with negative, punching is made in the θ + 180 ° direction.
θ : Angle which is formed between the +X axis and the line connecting the start point and punch points (Valid
data range : When the increment system is IS-B, −359999 to 359999)
Unit of data : Least input increment (deg)
-Counterclockwise direction is commanded by a positive number.
-Clockwise direction is commanded by a negative number.
n : Number of punch points (Valid data range : 1 to 9999)
By the above command, punching is made at n pieces of points which lie every intervals of d along the
straight line which forms angle θ with reference to the X axis, starting with the pattern base point as the
start point.
When d>0 and θ>0 #n
#(n−1)
d #3
#2
#1
θ
+X
Start point
（pattern base point） #1 to #n ：Order of punch motion
Example
- When d>0, θ>0, and not punching in the pattern base point

N313 G76 I30. J30. K6 ：Path of tool
#6
(205.885,100.000)
#5
(179.904,85.000)
#4
(153.923,70.000)
(30.000,50.000) #3
(127.942,55.000)
#2
30.000
N311 (101.962,40.000)
#1 (75.981,25.000)
30°
+X
N312:(50.000,10.000)
- 133 -
NOTE
If the number of punch points is 0, alarm (PS4503) is produced.
14.1.4 Arc (G77)

Arc (G77) specifies punching the specified times at the constant pitch (angle) on the circular arc with the
pattern base point as the circle center.
Format
G77 I r J θ P Δθ K n
θ : Angle formed between the first punch point and the +X axis (Valid data range : When the increment system is
IS-B, −359999 to 359999)
Unit of data : Minimum unit of data (deg)
-Counterclockwise punching is commanded by a positive number.
-Clockwise punching is commanded by a negative number.
Δθ : Angle formed between adjacent punch points axis (Valid data range : When the increment system is IS-B,
−359999 to 359999)
n : Number of punch points (Valid data range : 1 to 9999

By the above command, punching is made at n pieces of points every incremental Δθ angle, starting with
the point which forms θ angle with reference to the X-axis on the circumference of radius r, with the
pattern base point being set as the circle center.
When θ>0 and Δθ>0

#3
#(n−2) #2
#(n−1) #1
r
#n
Δθ
+X
Center
#1 to #n：Order of punch motion
- 134 -
Example
- When θ>0, Δθ<0 and not punching in the pattern base point

N413 G77 I40. J135. P−22.5 K6 ：Path of tool
(60.000,140.000)
(44.693,136.955) (75.307,136.955)
#3
N411 #2
(31.716,128.284) #4 (88.284,128.284)
(10.000,130.000)
#1 #5
40.000 −22.5° #6
135° (96.955,115.307)
+X
N412:(60.000,100.000)
NOTE
If the radius is 0 or the number of punch points is 0, alarm (PS 4504) is produced.
14.1.5 Grid (G78, G79)

Grid (G78, G79) specifies punching the specified times in the grid points having specified interval with
the pattern base point as the start point.
G78 commands punching in the X-axis direction, while G79 commands punching in the Y-axis direction.
Format
dx : Punch point intervals in the X-axis direction (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
-This is commanded by a positive number when the first punch point in the X-axis direction is located in the
+X direction as viewed from the start point.
-This is commanded by a negative number when the first punch point in the X-axis direction is located in
the -X direction as viewed from the start point.
dy : Punch point intervals in the Y-axis direction (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
-This is commanded by a positive number when the first punch point in the Y-axis direction is located in the
+Y direction as viewed from the start point.
-This is commanded by a negative number when the first punch point in the Y-axis direction is located in
the -Y direction as viewed from the start point.
nx : Number of punch points in the X-axis direction (Valid data range : 1 to 9999)
-The start point is not included in the number.
ny : Number of punch points in the Y-axis direction (Valid data range : 1 to 9999)
-The start point is not included in the number.
- 135 -
By the above command, punching is made at matrix points consisting of nx pieces at intervals of dx in the
X-axis direction and ny pieces at intervals of dy in the Y-axis direction, starting with the pattern base
point being set as the start point.
When G78 Amount of number of punch point n：(nx+1)×(ny+1) −1

#1 to #n ：Order of punch motion
+Y ：Path of tool
#n #(n−1)
ny
#(nx+1)
dy
#1 #(nx−1) #nx
+X
Start point
dx nx
When G79 Amount of number of punch point n：(nx+1)×(ny+1) −1

#1 to #n ：Order of punch motion
+Y ：Path of tool
#ny #(ny+1)
#(ny−1)
ny
#1 #(n−1)
dy
#n
+X
Start point
dx nx
- 136 -
Example
- When dx<0, dy<0 and punching in the pattern base point

N512 X100. Y120. #1 to #14：Order of punch motion in N513
N513 G78 I−20. J−15. P4 K2 ：Path of tool
20 N511
(120,130)
#4 #3 #2 #1 N512
(20,120) (40,120) (60,120) (80,120) (100,120)

15
#5 #6 #7 #8 #9
(20,105) (40,105) (60,105) (80,105) (100,105)
#14 #13 #12 #11 #10
+Y (20,90) (40,90) (60,90) (80,90) (100,90)
+X
NOTE
If the number of punch points is 0 in the X-axis or Y-axis direction, alarm (PS
4505) is produced.
14.1.6 Share Proofs (G86)

Share proofs (G86) specifies punching for the specified distance along straight line starting with the
pattern base point by using specified tool that figure is rectangle.
For this command, the CNC calculates the pitch automatically as follows to stack adjacent punch areas
before punching in this pitch for the specified distance. Then, the product is stamped out .
Format
G86 I l J θ P w1 Q w2
l : Length of punching (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-If this value is commanded with negative, punching is made in the θ+180° direction.
θ : The angle for the X-axis (Valid data range : When the increment system is IS-B, −359999 to 359999)
-The counterclockwise direction corresponds to positive.
-The clockwise direction corresponds to negative.
w1 : Tool width measured in parallel with the direction in which the tool advances
(Valid data range : ±1 to ±999999999)
-For positive and negative, punch the left and right sides in the forward direction, respectively.
w2 : Tool width measured vertically to the direction in which the tool advancess
(Valid data range : ±1 to ±999999999)
-Both w1 and w2 must be designated when either positive or negative.
- For a square tool with w1 = w2, w2 may be omitted.
- 137 -
With the pattern base point as a start point, this function allows to punch length ⏐l⏐ in the direction of
angle θ for the X-axis, using a rectangular tool with w1 as the width and w2 as the length.
When l>0, θ>0, and w1>0
#n
#(n−1)
w1
#2 θ
w2 #1 +X
Start point
(Pattern base point) #1 to #n: Order of punch motion
- Method of calculating actual pitch

The CNC calculates the pitch automatically as follows:
Method of calculating actual pitch

a
#1 #2 #(n−1) #n
⏐l⏐−⏐w1⏐
⏐l⏐
(1) 95% of w1 (0.95×w1) is defined as a temporary pitch.
(2) When the number of punching point without first punching point is a, the
number of punching point (a) is shown the following expression.
( In the point, the number of punching point a must be integral number.
However, when the number after the decimal point is cut off, tool does not
arrive at the terminal punching point. So the number after the decimal
point is rounded up. )
l − w1
a= (after the decimal point rounded up.)
0.95 × w1
(3) And the pitch to punch evenly by the number of punching point a rounded
up is defined as an actual pitch p. Therefore, pitch p is calculated by the
following expression.
l − w1
p=
a
- Relationship between length of punching l (specified by I code) and tool with

w1 (specified by P code)
Length l must be; l ≧ 1.5 w1. If this limitation is not satisfied, the alarm (PS4506) “ILLEGAL
COMMAND IN SHARE PROOFS” is issued. However, When bit 0 (AIP) of parameter No. 16202 is set
to 1, length l must be; l ≧ w1.
- 138 -
Example
- When l<0, θ>0, w1<0, and w2<0

N612 G72 X80. Y100. #1 to #7 : Order of punch motion in N613
N613 G86 I−60. J30. P−10. Q−5. : Path of tool
N612:(80.000,100.000)
30°
10.000 +X
5.000
60.000
#1:(76.920,95.335)
#2:(69.703,91.168)
N611
#3:(62.486,87.002) (110.000,90.000)
#4:(55.269,82.335)
#5:(48.052,78.668)
#6:(40.835,74.502)
#7:(33.619,70.335)
14.1.7 Square (G87)

Square (G87) specifies punching a rectangle with the pattern base point as the start point by using
specified tool that figure is rectangle.
For this command, the CNC calculates the pitch automatically as well as Share proofs (G86) to stack
adjacent punch areas before punching in this pitch along the edge of the specified rectangle. Then, the
product is stamped out .
Format
G87 I lx J ly P w1 Q w2
lx : Length of punching in the X-axis direction (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
-For positive and negative, the length shall be in the +X and –X directions, respectively.
ly : Length of punching in the Y-axis direction (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
-For positive and negative, the length shall be in the +Y and –Y directions, respectively.
w1 : With of the tool in the X-axis direction (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)
w2 : With of the tool in the Y-axis direction (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)
- For a square tool with w1 = w2, w2 may be omitted.
With the Pattern base point as a starting point, it allows to punch a rectangle with length ⏐lx⏐ in the
X-axis direction and length ⏐ly⏐ in the Y-axis direction, using a tool with w1 as the width and w2 as the
length. The punching operation is performed from the longitudinal direction (i.e.: direction with large
length between ⏐lx⏐ and ⏐ly⏐). If ⏐lx⏐ = ⏐lx⏐, punching operation will be performed in the X-axis
direction.
- 139 -
When lx>0, ly>0, ⏐lx⏐≧⏐ly⏐ #1 to #n: Order of punch motion
ly
#(n−1)
#n
w2
#1 #2
Start point
+Y
(Pattern base point) w1 lx
+X
Example
- When lx<0, ly<0, and ⏐lx⏐<⏐ly⏐

N712 G72 X80. Y100. #1 to #18: Order of punch motion in N713
N713 G87 I−50. J−60. P15. Q10. : Path of tool
N712:(80.000,100.000)
50.000
15.000 N711
#17 #18
(120.000,110.000)
#1
95.000 #16 10.000
#2
86.667
#15
78.333 #3
#14
#4
70.000 #13 60.000
#5
61.667
#12
53.333 #6
#11
#7
45.000 #10
+Y #9 #8
+X 37.500 49.167 60.833 72.500
- 140 -
14.1.8 Radius (G88)

Radius (G88) specifies punching at the constant pitch (distance) along the circular arc with the specified
angle and the pattern base point as the circle center.
Format

θ : Angle of the first punch point for the X-axis

-Counterclockwise is commanded by a positive number.
-Clockwise is commanded by a negative number.
Δθ : Incremental angle from the first punch point to the last punch point
(Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
d : Tool diameter (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-It allows to punch the circle outside, the circle inside, and the circumference, when positive, negative, and
0, respectively.
-Actual tool path is on the circular arc having the radius, r+d/2.

-Designate the circular length, respectively.
The punching operation is performed at pitch P between a point having angle θfor the X-axis on the
circumference (diameter r) and a point having angle θ + Δθ for the X-axis with the pattern base point as a
center according to the above, using a tool with diameter d.
When θ＞0, Δθ＞0, d＞0 #1 to #n : Order of punch motion
#(n−1)
#n
#3
r #2
p
Δθ #1
Center θ d
(Pattern base point) +X
Radius (G88) is the same as with circular nibbling (G68) except that there is no pitch limit value by
parameter setting (No. 468 and 469), and it stops at each punch point for a single block. Therefore, also
refer to the Circular Nibbling (G68) paragraph given under 9.3.1.
- 141 -
14.1.9 Cut at Angle (G89)

Cut at angle (G89) specifies punching at the constant pitch (distance) along the straight line starting with
the pattern base point as a starting point.
Format
l : Straight line length (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-If this value is commanded with negative, punching is made in the θ+180° direction.
θ : The angle for the X-axis (Valid data range : When the increment system is IS-B, −359999 to 359999)
-The counterclockwise direction corresponds to positive.
-The clockwise direction corresponds to negative.

-For positive and negative, punch the left and right sides in the forward direction, respectively.
-Perform punching operation on the straight line at 0.

-Designate the straight line length, respectively.
This function allows to punch a straight line with length l having angle θ to X-axis with the current tool
position or the position designated by G72 as a starting point, at pitch P, using a tool with diameter d.
When l>0, θ>0 and d>0

#n
#(n−1)
l
p #2 #3
#1
θ
d +X
Start point
(Pattern base point) #1 to #n: Order of punch motion
Cut at angle (G89) is the same as with straight line nibbling (G69) except that there is no pitch limit value
by parameter setting (No. 468 and 469) and it stops at each punching point for a single block; therefore,
refer to 9.3.2 “Straight Line Nibbling (G69)” as well.
14.1.10 Incremental Command Just After Pattern Function

If an incremental command is given in a block just after the pattern function, the tool may not move by
the incremental amount from the end point of the pattern function. In case of bolt hole circle (G26), share
proofs (G86), square (G87), radius (G88) and cut at angle (G89).
The amount of movement attained by an incremental command just after the bolt hole circle is the
commanded incremental amount from the center of the bolt hole circle.
In case of bolt hole circle (G26) and square (G87), the incremental amount is from the base point of
pattern, namely, center and start point respectively.
- 142 -
In case of share proofs (G86), radius (G88) and cut at angle (G89), the incremental amount is from the
end point of the program. The incremental amount is all started with the end point of the pattern function
in line at angle (G76), arc (G77), and grid (G78, G79).
N3111 G90 G72 X100. Y100. #1 to #9 ：Order of punch motion

N3112 G26 I70. J45. K8 ：Path of tool
N3113 G91 G00 X80. Y50.
#2
End point in N3113
#9:(180.0,150.0)
#3 (250.0,150.0)
#1
(80.0,50.0)
Tool does not move by the
incremental amount from end
#4
point of pattern function
(100.0,100.0)
#8:(170.0,100.0)
Pattern base point
End point of the pattern function
#7
#5 #6
Fig.14.1.10 (a) Incremental command just after bolt hole circle (G26)
N3121 G90 G72 X50. Y50. #1 to #5: Order of punch motion

N3122 G86 I100. J0 P30. Q15. : Path of tool
N3123 G91 G00 X50. Y40.
(185.0,97.5)
Tool does not move by the incremental
amount from end point of pattern function
End point in N3123
End point of pattern function #5:(200.0,90.0)
(135.0,57.5)
#1 #2 #3 #4
(50.0,40.0)
(50.0,50.0) (150.0,50.0)
Pattern base point End point of program
Fig.14.1.10 (b) Incremental command just after share proofs (G86)
- 143 -
N3125 G90 G72 X60. Y50. #1 to #10 : Order of punch motion

N3126 G88 I70. J0 K90. P20. Q15. : Path of tool
N3127 G91 G00 X−60. Y−10.
End point of pattern function
Tool does not move by the incremental #9:(60.0,130.0)
amount from end point of pattern function
#8
(0.0,120.0)
(60.0,120.0)
(−60.0,−10.0)
End point of
N3127 の終点 program
#10:(0.0,110.0) #2
#1
(60.0,50.0)
Pattern base point
Fig.14.1.10 (c) Incremental command just after radius (G88)
When the block execution of the bolt hole circle (G26) has been finished, the tool is located at the end
point, in practice.
However, a programmer shall make a program assuming that the tool be located at the base point, i.e., the
center of the pattern.
Thus, programming is simplified in machining, like the following example.
Example
- Concentric bolt hole circles
N3115 G90 G72 X100. Y100.

#6
N3116 G26 I40. J−90. K4 #5
N3117 G26 I70. J45. K4 #3
#1 to #8：Order of punch motion

：Path of tool (100.0,100.0)
#2 #4
40.0 70.0
It is not required to command
G90 G72 X100. Y100. ;
#1
between N3116 and N3117.
#7 #8
- 144 -
- Machining when the centers are given as an incremental sizes

N564G00G90X48.5Y50.0 ; #1 to #15：Order of punch motion
N565G26I20.0J45.0K4 ;
：Path of tool
N566G91X52.3 ;
N567G26I20.0J45.0K4 ;
N568X52.3 ;
N569G26I20.0J45.0K4 ;
#3 #2 #8 #7 #13 #12
#1 (48.5,50.0) #6 (100.8,50.0) #11 (153.1,50.0)
#4 #5 #9 #10 #14 #15
14.1.11 Notes on Pattern Functions

CAUTION
1 Don’t command M code in a block where the pattern function is commanded.
2 If a T code is commanded in a block where the pattern function is commanded,
the X, Y axes are positioned to the first punch point and also a tool is selected
concurrently.
After positioning and tool selection, punching is made at the first punch point.
3 Even when the pattern function is commanded in G01, G02 or G03 mode, the X,
Y axes are positioned at rapid traverse. However, since T code cannot be
commanded in G01, G02, or G03 mode, such a command is not executable, in
general.
4 If a pattern function is executed using the single block operation, the single block
stop is made after punching has been finished at respective punch points.
5 If the pattern function is commanded in MDI mode, punching is not executed, but
positioning only is made. Some machines may execute punching.
6 Since radius, number of punch points, and other parameters in the pattern
function are not modal data, they must be commanded correctly in each block.
7 Operation for the C-axis can be specified in a block in which the pattern function
is specified.
- 145 -
14.2 MEMORY AND CALL BY A/B MACRO

When it is desired to repeatedly use a pattern with the same figure among the pattern functions, this
function can store it in memory with a given number and access it as needed. Programs other than those
using the pattern functions can be stored in memory and can be called.
(1) Memory
When a one-digit numeral from 1 to 5 subsequent to address A is given before the G code of the
pattern function, the pattern function according to the G-code is stored in the memory.
(Example) A2G76I300J3000K5;
(2) Call
By giving a one-digit numeral from 1 to 5 subsequent to address B, it is possible to call the pattern
function stored previously with address A.
(Example) B2;
(3) Example
When bolt hole circles with the same figure having a center in (100, 100), (200, 100), (250, 180),
and (150, 180) are present:
････････
N01G72X100.Y100.; Base point command
N02A2G26I40.J0K4; Bolt hole circle command
N04B2; Equal to the block which commanded A2
････････
(150,180) (250,180)
・・
・・
(100,100) (200,100)
CAUTION
1 Do not give the same number because the pattern function differs. At this time,
the previous memory is erased.
2 Only a block with up to 192 characters can be stored in memory.
- 146 -
14.3 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75)

By changing the hold position of a workpiece by the workpiece holders, a workpiece having a size larger
than the stroke in X–axis direction of the machine can be machined.
If it is desired to punch a workpiece at the workpiece holder position when the workpiece was set to the
machine, the hold position of the workpiece must be changed.
Y Workpiece
Workpiece holder
Fig.14.3 (a) Workpiece holder
Repositioning of a workpiece is generally done according to the following procedure, assuming that the
workpiece is positioned at a location where the repositioning of the workpiece is executable.
(1) The claw of the workpiece holder is opened, and also the clamper depresses the workpiece
concurrently to fix the workpiece as a general procedure, so that the workpiece is not deviated from
the table.
Clamper
Y
Workpiece Workpiece holder
Fig.14.3 (b) Workpiece clamp
- 147 -
(2) The workpiece holder moves in the Y–axis direction and separates from the workpiece.
Clamper
Y
Fig.14.3 (c) Retreat of workpiece holder
(3) The workpiece holder moves in the X–axis direction to relocate the hold position.
Y Workpiece
Workpiece holder
Fig.14.3 (d) Movement of workpiece holder
(4) The workpiece holder moves in the Y–axis direction to return to the position where it can hold the
workpiece.
clamper
Y
Fig.14.3 (e) Advancement of workpiece holder
- 148 -
(5) The claw of the workpiece holder is closed to hold the workpiece, and the clamper lifts and separates
from the workpiece concurrently.
Clamper
Y
Fig.14.3 (f) Workpiece unclamp
A series of the above operation can be done by one–block command including G function.
G75 X x
The above command is executed by being divided into the following 5 blocks.
<1> M10 ;
<2> G70G91Y yR ;
<3> G70G91X －x ;
<4> G70G91Y －yR ;
<5> M11 ;
Blocks <1>- <5>correspond to operation steps (1) – (5), respectively.
A relief or a return mount R in the Y-axis direction is preset by parameter (No. 16209).
By G75 command, the X and Y axes move.

The movement of the Y-axis is just cancelled by its relief and return. If it is assumed that the movement
of the X-axis is the movement of a tool in the same manner as in ordinary block, for the X-axis command
hereafter, X-axis command value must be subtracted by the value displaced by G75 or a coordinate
system must be set by a G92 command with the tool at the position where the G75 was commanded in the
block next to G75.
y
(200.0,100.0)
This position becomes
100.0 (100,100) after executing
G75block.
In other words, the work
coordinate system shifts by
100.0 in the X-axis
x direction.
Workpiece holder
Fig.14.3 (g) The work coordinate system after executing automatic repositioning
- 149 -
The movement of the X-axis for repositioning changes the workpiece holder position. The tool position
remains unchanged in the work coordinate system, in practice. Accordingly, internal processing is made
in this control system so that the coordinate value of the tool is not changed by the axis movement
performed by repositioning.
Thus, it is not necessary to take the repositioning of a workpiece into consideration in programming.
Now, the following description covers such a case that several workpieces are sequentially machined
according to a program including the repositioning command.
y
Workpiece Reference point
End locator
Workpiece holder
200.0
1000.0
Fig.14.3 (h) The work position before executing automatic repositioning
Refer to Fig.14.3 (h) as an example. The reference point is assumed as the start point of the tool. Assume
that the distance between the reference point and the end locator is 1000 mm, and the left workpiece
holder is mounted at a place distant from the end locator by 200 mm.
In order to machine the next workpiece by the same program after machining one workpiece, the start
point of the tool must also be the reference point to the next workpiece. Accordingly, programming must
be made to set the end point to the reference point.
G92X1000.0Y . . . ;
..........
..........
..........
..........
G75X300.0 ;
..........
..........
.........
G28M30 ;
“The end point is the reference point.” means that the position of the end point is just the same as the start
point on the machine tool, and the workpiece holder position is the start point, i.e., the position distant
from the end locator by 200 mm. However, the left lower point of the workpiece, i.e., the zero point of the
work coordinate system, does not meet the end locator position, but it is distant from the end locator by
300 mm in the –X direction.
- 150 -
y
Workpiece Reference point
End
locator
Workpiece holder
300.0 200.0
1000.0
Fig.14.3 (i) The work position after executing automatic repositioning
When a new workpiece is set by attaching it to the end locator after removing the workpiece, the zero
point of the work coordinate system must be positioned at the end locator.
Accordingly, the coordinate system must be set by G92 command at the start of the program without fail.
CAUTION
1 Neither T code nor M code should be commanded in G75 block.
2 The repositioning amount of the workpiece holder is specified by a numerical value
following address X in G75 command. If repositioning is made in the +X direction of the
work coordinate system, specify it by a positive numerical value.
3 Other M codes may be used for M10 and M11 depending upon machine tool builders.
4 Programming is made, assuming that the workpiece is fixed and a tool moves along the
workpiece. However, the workpiece moves, while the tool is fixed generally.
Accordingly, the movement direction of the workpiece, or, the movement direction of the
workpiece holder, is contrary to the movement direction of the tool.
This means that, when the workpiece holder moves in the +X and +Y directions of the
work coordinate system, the tool must be regarded to move in the –X and –Y direction
respectively. Accordingly, the command in <2>, <3>, <4> blocks is opposite to
movement direction in the work coordinate system of the workpiece holder.
- 151 -
CAUTION
5 In G75 command, the relief quantity of the workpiece holder from the workpiece is equal
to the return quantity of the workpiece holder to the workpiece in the absolute value of
its movement amount.
However, if a workpiece is uneven, the workpiece holder depresses the workpiece,
causing the workpiece to be deviated, assuming that the workpiece holder returns by
the relief quantity as it is. For such a work, change the relief quantity and return quantity
by the following programming.
M10;
G91Y y1 ;
X –x ;
Y –y2 ; y1 differs from y2.
M11;
Even in the above command, internal processing is made in NC so that the tool position
remains unchanged in the work coordinate system, irrespective of the movement of the
X and Y axes.
Accordingly, it is not necessary for programming to take this movement into
consideration in the subsequent commands. However, since the workpiece cannot be
held if such a command is given again, it is necessary to take these circumstances into
consideration when performing repositioning again.
6 It is not recommended for cycle time and machining accuracy to repeatedly execute
repositioning by a program.
7 The single block stop is made after five sequential motion, if G75 is executed by a
single block operation.
14.4 U/V/W MACRO FUNCTION

The U/V/W macro function enables commands consisting of several blocks to be stored in the NC
memory as a single macro and to be called when necessary.
14.4.1 Storage of Macros

To store several blocks as a single macro, attach numerics of 2 digits (01 to 89) following address work U
before commanding several blocks to be stored and attach the same numerals following address word V
after them, then the several blocks sandwiched in between U and V are stored.
We call the numerics of 2 digits following U or V “macro number”. If the macro number is any of 01 to
59, then blocks sandwiched in between U and V are stored with their execution. If the macro number is
any of 60 to 89, only storage of blocks is performed without their execution.
Example
;
G92X1830.0Y1270.0 ;
………………
………………
U02 ;
G90X100.0Y500.0T32;
G72X150.0Y700.0;
G87I100.0J300.0P10.0;
N100M00 ; Storing while command executing
G72X500.0Y300.0T26;
A03G26I100.0J0K4;
G72X800.0Y300.0;
- 152 -
B03;
V02;
………………
………………
U70 ;
G90X200.0Y100.0T20;
G79I8.0J10.0P3K10; Storing without command executing
G90X1000.0Y50.0T31;
G76I25.0J60.0K6 ;
V70 ;
………………
………………
In the blocks to be sandwiched in between U and V, all commands other than ones for storage of macros
according to other macro numbers (see below example (limitation)) may be specified. But controller
resetting commands, such as M02, M30, etc., can not be specified. In addition, the part for custom macros
cannot be specified. Address words U and V must be specified in independent blocks except for the
sequence number (a numeric string of 5 digits following N).
Details of macro numbers 90 to 99 will be described later.
Example (limitation)
………………
………………
U10 ;
G90X10000Y50000T32 ;
G72X15000Y70000 ;
G87I10000J30000P1000 ;
N100M00 ;
U20 ;
G72X50000Y30000T26 ;
A03G26I10000J0K4 ;
G72X80000Y30000 ;
B03 ;
V20 ;
G90X20000Y10000T20 ;
V10 ;
As shown in the above example, another macro cannot be stored while a certain macro is being stored.
14.4.2 Macro Call

Several blocks stored previously as a single macro can be called by specifying numerics of 2 digits
attached following address word W.
Example
………
………
U05 ;
G90X100.0Y500.0T32 ;
G72X150.0Y700.0 ;
G87I100.0J300.0P10.0 ;
M00 ;
V05 ;
………
………
- 153 -
G93G90X500.0Y0 ;
W05 ;
………
Address word W must be specified in a independent block except for the sequence number. But as
regards the commands G73 and G74 for the multi-piece machining function, W can be specified together
with their G codes.
14.4.3 Nesting Call of Macros

A certain macro can call another macro and then further the latter macro can call any other macro.
Example
U05; ( ): Signifies a block number
………; (1)
………; (2)
V05;
U20;
………; (3)
W05;
………; (4)
V20;
U70;
………; (5)
W20; These are not executed during storage because the macro number is 70.
………; (6)
V70;
W70;
The execution sequence of this example is as follows:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Depth 1
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Depth 2
(1) (2)
Depth 3
W5 W5
W20
U5-V5 U20-V20 W70
Fig.14.4.3 The order of executing macro
- 154 -
14.4.4 Macro Storage Capacity

The storage capacity for U/V/W macro function is limited to 100kbyte. And storage method of U/V/W
macro function is the same as a usual program
Effective use of the storage area for storing macros is guaranteed since previously stored macros are erased if
they are changed to new macros with the same macro numbers as before when they are out of use.
Example
N100U10 ;
〔G90X10000Y5000T20;
N101A01G26I4000J9000K10;
G91X10000;
N102B01;〕
N105V10;
………
Program codes in brackets 〔〕 are stored in memory.
14.4.5 Storage and Call of Multiple Macros (Macro Numbers 90 to

99)
With macro numbers 90 to 99, several macros can be stored and called as a single macro, though the item
14.4.1 “Storage of macros” describes that another macro cannot be stored while a certain macro is being
stored. Macro numbers 90 to 99, however, only define several macros as a single macro, but they cannot
store any executable commands by themselves.
Example
U90;
U01;
………
………
V01;
U10;
………
………
V10;
U15;
………
………
V15;
G90X10000Y20000T15; ← This block is not stored.
U02; (such a use is no good)
………
………
V02;
V90;
………
………
W90; ← This command is equivalent to the following set of several commands.
W01 ;
W10 ; =W900
W15 ;
W02 ;
- 155 -
14.4.6 Deletion of Stored Macros

Macros stored therefore are all deleted in the following cases:
(1) Reset (including reset due to M02, M30, etc.)

(2) Controller power off
When the system is reset, the stored macros can be prevented from deletion by setting of bit 0 (UVC) of
parameter No. 16200.
14.5 MULTI–PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION

The multi-piece machining function enables several sheets of product with the same punching shape to be
produced from a single sheet of material at a time by simple commands.
This function allows so called “trial machining” that performs punching only on a sheet of product from
the machining command tape for “multi-piece machining” by a simple setup method, therefore the
machining command tape can be easily checked before full machining.
14.5.1 Base Point Command of Multi-Piece Machining (G98)
Cutting margin
(3) (4) (9)
Workpiece
(2) (5) (8)
(1) (6) (7)
Catching margin
Base point of multi-piece machining
X
Fig.14.5.1 (a) Multi-piece machining
Parts (2) to (9) as shown above have the same punching shape as part (1).
Machining commands to punch on a sheet of material must be specified on the product part at the lower
left (1). The point at the lower left of the set of multi-products (point B shown in Fig. 14.5.1 (a); called as
“Base point of multi-piece machining” hereafter) must be specified prior to the machining commands to
punch on a product part by G98 as absolute co-ordinates under the system of co-ordinates specified using
G92 command. In the G98 command, the X-axial and Y-axial lengths of one product and the numbers of
products in the directions of X-axis and Y-axis must be specified.
- 156 -
Format
G98Xxb Yyb Ilx Jly Pnx Kny;
xb : X–axis coordinate value of the base point of multi–piece machining
yb : Y–axis coordinate value of the base point of multi–piece machining
lx : X axial length of one product part (a positive number)
ly : Y axial length of one product part (a positive number)
nx : The number of products in the X axial direction (Note) (Command range is 0 to
9999)
ny : The number of products in the Y axial direction (Note) (Command range is 0 to
9999)
NOTE
Product part (1) is not counted.
After command of G98, specify machining commands on the lower left product part ((1) in Fig.14.5.1
(a)) using the U/V/W macro function (specify the machining commands between address word U and V).
In the multi-piece machining function, if a set of machining commands corresponding to a single tool is
executed continuously on the all product parts, the tool change count is decreased so that the time
required for full machining on a material sheet can be considerably decreased. The following illustrates
this.
(3) (4) (9)
Workpiece
(2) (5) (8)
(1) (6) (7)
Fig.14.5.1 (b) Processing example
Let the following four types of tools be used to punch products for one sheet, as shown in Fig.14.5.1 (c).
T31
T11
T22
T33
Fig.14.5.1 (c) Tools be used to punch products for processing example (Fig.14.5.1 (b))
- 157 -
Method 1
In this method, the machining commands to punch on one product part are stored as a single macro.
U01 ;
………T31 ;
……………
……………
………T22 ;
……………
……………
………T33 ;
……………
……………
………T11 ;
……………
……………
V04 ;
This method will run the risk of taking longer time for machining on a sheet of material because tool
change is performed in the order, T31 → T22 → T33 → T11, while the respective product parts from 1 to
6 are machined if macro number 01 is called by the multi-piece machining command. (Tool change
counts: 4×6=24)
Method 2
In this method, each set of machining commands to punch with a single tool is stored as a single macro.
U01 ;
………T31 ;
……………
……………
V01 ;
U02 ;
………T22 ;
……………
……………
V02 ;
U03 ;
………T33 ;
……………
……………
V03 ;
U04 ;
………T11 ;
……………
……………
V04 ;
If macro numbers 01, 02, 03 and 04 are called sequentially by the multi-piece machining command in this
case, machining proceeds as follows.
1) Tool T31 performs full machining on all product parts.
2) Then, T22 performs full machining on all product parts.
- 158 -
Thus, its tool change is completed by only four steps so that tool change time is considerably decreased
compared with method 1.
CAUTION
1 The G98 coordinate system is canceled by the G92 command.
2 If bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set, the G98 coordinate system is
canceled by a reset.
3 When the UV macro contains the G91 command, the tool moves according to
the incremental value from the current position rather than the incremental
position based on the G98 coordinate system.
14.5.2 Multi–Piece Machining Commands (G73, G74)

Specify any of the following commands, and then multi-piece machining is performed by calling
machining commands stored using the U/V/W macro function.
Format
G73(G74) Wwn Qq ;
wn : A macro number
q: Machining start area specification
G73 goes on punching in the X axial direction, whereas G74 goes on punching in the Y axial direction in
grid parts-line.
G73 W_ Q1 ; G73 W_ Q2 ; G73 W_ Q3 ; G73 W_ Q4 ;
G74 W_ Q1 ; G74 W_ Q2 ; G74 W_ Q3 ; G74 W_ Q4 ;
Fig.14.5.2 Multi-piece machining
In the example shown in Fig.14.5.1 (b) to start machining from area (1) and to punch in the X axial
direction, specify the following commands
for the respective methods:
Method 1:G73W01Q1;
Method 2:G73W01Q1;
G73W02Q1;
G73W03Q1;
G73W04Q1;
- 159 -
Let the number of tool required to machine products for one sheet be n, and method 2 requires n times of
commands G73/G74 to be specified. In such a case, several macro numbers can be represented by a single
macro number if machining start area (specified by Q) and machining direction (G73/G74) are both the
same with respect to the corresponding tools. Macro numbers to be provided for this purpose are 90 to 99.
(These are called multiple macro storage numbers hereafter.) To store macro numbers 01, 02 and 04 as a
single macro number 90 in the example shown in Fig.14.5.1 (b), specify as follows.
U90 ;
U01 ;
………T31 ;
……………
V01 ;
U02 ;
………T22 ;
……………
V02 ;
U04 ;
………T11 ;
……………
V04 ;
V90 ;
In this case, the command of “G73 W90 Q1” becomes identical with the following series of commands.
G73W01Q1 ;
G73W02Q1 ;
G73W04Q1 ;
Though multi-piece machining commands (G73/G74) are generally used to punch products of the same
shape arranged at intervals of grid, they can be also performed to punch exclusively in the X or Y axial
direction. In such a case, specify the number of products in the X or Y axial direction (to be specified by
address word P or K) in G98 to 0.
14.5.3 Setting of Machining Method for Multi–Piece Machining

When products are machined using a NC tape for multi-piece machining, any desired machining method
can be selected.
- Select with parameter

When bit 3 of parameter No.16201 is set to 0, parameter No.16206 can set the method for multi-piece
machining.
Machining process when multiple

Parameter No.16206
workpieces are taken
0 Multi–piece machining is not used
1 Trial punching for multi–piece machining
2 Machining on the reset of material punched
3 Full machining for multi–piece machining
- 160 -
- Select with signal

Multi–piece machining setting signal MLP1, MLP2 can set the method for multi-piece machining.
Multi–piece machining
Machining process when multiple
setting signal
workpieces are taken
MLP1 MLP2
0 0 Multi–piece machining is not used
1 0 Trial punching for multi–piece machining
0 1 Machining on the reset of material punched
1 1 Full machining for multi–piece machining
If trial punching is selected, only the lower-left product part of material ((1) in Fig. 14.5.1 (a) and (b)). As
a result, macros except 60 to 89 are executed while storing, and blocks specified in G73/G74 are all
ignored.
Machining on the reset of material punched for trial signifies that after punching on only the lower-left
product part of material, the remaining product parts of material are machined entirely. For this purpose,
no machining is performed during the storage of macros, and the machining on the lower-left product part
is skipped when commands of G73/G74 are executed.
For full machining on a material, no machining is performed during the storage of macros, but machining
over the entire product parts is performed by G73/G74. Set to “0” if NC tape for the multi-piece
machining is not used.
14.5.4 Command for Restarting Machining Multiple Products

Specifying the position from which machining multiple products restarts with address P in a block in
which the G73 or G74 command for machining multiple products is specified enables machining multiple
products to restart from the specified position.
Format
G73(G74) W_ Q_ P_ ;
W_ : UV macro number or subprogram number
Q_ : Machining sequence
P_ : Position from which machining restarts (Valid setting: 1 ≦ P ≦total number of
products to be machined (Max. 99999999))
- Example
Please specify a restart point by a P–code. Fig. 14.5.4 shows an example that restarting operation at point
(6). In this case, specify P6.
(9) (10) (11) (12)
(8) (7) (6) (5)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
G73 W_ Q1 P6 ;
Fig.14.5.4 Command for Restarting Machining Multiple Products
- 161 -
CAUTION
When restarting machining multiple products is specified, the reference position
specified by the G98 command for setting the reference position used in
machining multiple products must be used. Do not change the reference
position.
NOTE
1 A restart command is invalid for trial machining.
2 When machining multiple products is restarted, specify the position from which
machining restarts using address P so that the number of products includes the
number of products to be used for the trial, though they are not machined.
3 If a setting specified with address P is not within the range from 1 to the total
number of products inclusive, alarm (PS 4544) is issued.
14.5.5 Command to End Punching Multiple Products

By commanding a R–code in a block containing G73/G74 (commands for punching multiple products), it
is possible to end punching multiple products with the specified product as counted from machining start
point.
Format
G73(G74) W_ Q_ P_ R_ ;
W_: UV macro number or subprogram number
Q_ : Machining start area specification
P_ : Restart point (Command range : 1 to total number of workpieces (Max. 99999999))
R_ : End point (Command range : 1 to total number of workpieces (Max. 99999999))
NOTE
1 When trial punching for multi–piece machining is selected, R-code is not
enabled.
2 For R-code, please command the end point as contained products for trial
punching for multi–piece machining.
3 When the end point is larger than the total number of workpiece, the alarm
(PS4544) is issued.
4 When the end point is smaller than the total number of workpiece (excepting R0
command), the alarm (PS4544) is issued.
5 When R0 or no R-code is commanded, the CNC executes punching multiple
products until the last point of all workpieces.
6 When minus value is specified as end point, the alarm (PS0006) is issued.
7 When the end point is larger than the maximum command range, the alarm
(PS0003) is issued.
8 When R-code is commanded without option of this function, the CNC ignores
R-code and continues to punch until the last point
9 P-code can be omitted..
Example
Please specify a end point by a R–code. Fig. 14.5.5 shows an example that end operation at point (10). In
this case, specify P10.
- 162 -
(9) (10) (11) (12)
(8) (7) (6) (5)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
G73 W_ Q1 R10 ;
Fig.14.5.5 Command to End Punching Multiple Products
14.6 BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, G39)

The hole position gap accompanied bending is compensated and the drilling is performed.
Format
Bending compensation for X axis direction
G38 Ix1 Jx2 Kx3 Px4 Qx5 R_ ;
Bending compensation for Y axis direction
G39 Iy1 Jy2 Ky3 Py4 Qy5 R_ ;
x1 to x5 : Bending position of X axis direction (Input unit)
y1 to y5 : Bending position of X axis direction (Input unit)
R: The compensation amount attendant on a single bending is specified. (Input
unit)
The reference point is specified by setting the local coordinate system.
G52X - - - Y - - - ;
In a block after a bending compensation command is sent, it is judged to which area automatically
designated the movement command value belongs, thus allowing compensation in accordance with the
bending frequency.
When bending compensation cancel is required.
(1) Specify the cancel of bending compensation.

G38R0 ; ··· (Cancel of X axis direction)
G39R0 ; ··· (Cancel of Y axis direction)
(2) Specify M02, M30.
It is possible to cancel even in the reset state according to reset, clear, and emergency stop.
(Example) When the bending compensation of only X axis direction is performed.

G52X10.0Y10.0 ;
G38 I 100.0 J 250.0 K 450.0 P 650.0 Q 1000.0 R-0.5 ;
G90 X175.0 Y0.0 ;
X350.0 ;
X550.0 ;
- 163 -
z Bending position
100.0 250.0
x 450.0
650.0
1000.0
Command position Workpiece
Compens ation position

Absolute (10.0,10.0) (184.5,10.0) (359.0,10.0) (558.5,10.0)
coordinate Standard Compensation Compensation Compensation
(X,Y) point amount -0.5 amount -1.0 amount -1.5
Bending
200.0
150.0
200.0 100.0
350.0
Program:
G52X100.Y0 ; Specifications of standard point
G38I180.J260.K420.R-1. ; Bending compensation command
G90X-50. ; Absolute coordinate (X50.)
X270. ; Absolute coordinate (X368.)
X300. ; Absolute coordinate (X398.)
M02 ; Cancel of bending compensation execution
In the above example, when the negative direction from the standard point, for example, X50. direction
(X-50. since the coordinates system is offset in the program in the coordinates form the origin) is
designated, bending compensation is not performed. At this time, it is regarded as area 1, that is, an area
with no compensation by bending. As described above, when the number of bending is less than 4, it is
possible to omit what is not required among X1-X5 and Y1-Y5 representing the distance from the
standard point which indicates the area boundary.
CAUTION
In one block to which a pattern command, for example, is given during bending
compensation, it is regarded as a move within the area, and no command over
the area can be given.
- 164 -
14.7 LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND
14.7.1 Linear Punch Command (G45)

Using linear punching command (G45) allows that workpiece is punched out along strait line from the
pattern base point to the specified end point with the specified rectangle tool.
Format
G45 X x Y y P w1 Q w2 R r D Δd
( x , y ) : End point (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
In G90 mode, please specify the position of the end point.
In G91 mode, please specify the amount of movement to the end point.
W1 : Tool width measured in parallel with the direction in which the tool advances (Valid data range :
1 to 999999999)
W2 : Tool width measured vertically to the direction in which the tool advances (Valid data range : 1 to
999999999)
-When this code is omitted, the CNC regards that W2 is same as W1.
r : Direction of tool offset with respect to the direction in which the tool advances (Valid data range :
−1, 0, 1)
Unit of data : None
-Should be specified by positive number for offset to the left of the direction in which the tool
advances.
-Should be specified by negative number for offset to the right of the direction in which the
tool advances.
-Should specify R0 to punch out on programmed line (no offset). When R-code is omitted, the
CNC regard that R0 is specified.
Δd : Microjoint width (Compensation value) (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-Should be specified by positive number for compensation in such a way that the resultant
workpiece dimensions increase.
-Should be specified by negative number for compensation in such a way that the resultant
workpiece dimensions decrease.
-Should specify D0 to punch out with no compensation. When D-code is omitted, the CNC
regard that D0 is specified.
Using above command allows workpiece is punched out along a straight line from the pattern base point
as a start point to the end point (x, y) with a tool having dimensions (w1, w2). Moreover, specifying
microjoint width Δd effects compensation at the punch start and end points.
- 165 -
For r>0 and Δd>0 (x, y)
#n Δd
#(n−1)
w1
#2
w2 #1
+Y Δd
Start point
#1 to #n: Order of punch motion
+X
・Calculating method of actual pitch

Pitch is calculated automatically as follows:
Calculating method of actual pitch

a
#1 #2 #(n−1) #n
p
l−w1
l
(1) When the length of punching is defined as l, length l is shown by the

following express.
l= (x − x of base po int )2 + (y − y of base po int )2 + Δd × 2

(In G90 mode)
l = x + y + Δd × 2
2 2
(In G91 mode)
(2) 95% of w1 (0.95×w1) is defined as a temporary pitch.
(3) When the number of punching point without first punching point is a, the
number of punching point (a) is shown the following expression.
( In the point, the number of punching point a must be integral number.
However, when the number after the decimal point is cut off, tool does not
arrive at the terminal punching point. So the number after the decimal point
is rounded up. )
l − w1
a= (after the decimal point rounded up.)
0.95 × w1
(4) And the pitch to punch evenly by the number of punching point a rounded up
is defined as an actual pitch p. Therefore, pitch p is calculated by the
following expression.
l − w1
p=
a
- 166 -
Example
・When r<0 and Δd<0

N1012 G72 X80. Y70. #1 to #5: Order of punch motion in N1013
N1013 G45 X40. Y100. P10. Q5. R−1 D−2. : Path of tool
(40.000,100.000)
2.000
#5:(47.100,97.800)
#4:(54.300,92.400)
#3:(61.500,87.000)
10.000
#2:(68.700,81.600)
#1:(75.900,76.200)
5.000
2.000
N1012:(80.000,70.000)
N1011:(65.000,65.000)
NOTE
1 When the amount of movement is 0 or is smaller than 1.5 times of w1 value
during G45 block, the alarm PS4500, “ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LINE-PUNCH” is
issued.
2 When the Tool width measured in parallel with the direction in which the tool
advances (w1) is not specified, the alarm PS4510 is issued. Moreover, Tool
width measured vertically to the direction in which the tool advances (w2) is not
specified, the CNC regards the tool shape as regular square.
14.7.2 Circular Punch Commands (G46 and G47)

Using circular punching commands (G46, G47) allows that workpiece is punched out on a circle with a
radius of r between the pattern base point and the specified end point in constant pitches.
By using G46 command, the tool moves along the arc clockwise. And, by using G47 command, the tool
moves along the arc counterclockwise.
- 167 -
Format
G46 X x Y y R r P d Q p
G47 X x Y y R r P d Q p
( x , y ) : End point (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

In G90 mode, please specified the position of the end point.
In G91 mode, please specified the amount of movement to the end point.
r : Radius of arc (Valid data range : ±1 to ±999999999)

-Should be specified by positive number to assign the arc with an angle of 180°or less.
-Should be specified by negative number to assign the arc with an angle of 180°or larger.
-R0 cannot be specified.

-Should be specified by positive number to punch outside the arc.
-Should be specified by negative number to punch inside the arc.
-Should specify P0 to punch on the arc.
p : Nibbling pitch (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)

-This pitch is specified as an arc length by positive number.
Using above command allows workpieces are punched out on a circle with a radius of r in pitches of q,
using a tool with a diameter of d.
When r>0, d>0 #1 to #n: Order of punch motion
#(n−1)
#n
#2 r
#1 p (x, y)
Center of circle
d Start point
Moreover, when the distance between the start point and the end point is larger than a circular arc
diameter (2r), workpiece is punched out with a start point on a circle with a radius of r. In this case ,
therefore, the tool cannot arrive in the end point specified.
- 168 -
Example
・When r<0 and d<0

N1112 G72 X80. Y100. #1 to #9 : Order of punch motion in N1113
N1113 G47 X45. Y55. R−30. P−10. Q15. : Path of tool
#3:(55.969,108.228) #2:(67.236,105.108)
#4:(44.517,105.885)
15.000
#5:(35.382,98.591) →(Actual pitch = 14.159)
N1112:(80.000,100.000)
#6:(30.562,87.942) #1:(75.852,97.207)
10.000
Center of circle
(55.116,83.243)
N1111:(95.000,90.000)
30.000
#7:(31.110,76.264)
#9:(46.685,59.707)
#8:(36.907,66.113)
(45.000,55.000)
NOTE
1 When the start and end points of an arc are the same in a G46 or G47
command, if either the radius of the arc is zero or the interval exceeds the
circumference, alarm (PS4511) is issued.
2 If address R and address Q are not specified, alarm (PS4511) is issued.
14.7.3 Controlling the C–axis

When any of the tools which can be rotated around the C-axis are specified in parameters No. 16370 to
No. 16389 are selected in a block containing a G45, G46, or G47 command or a preceding block, the
C-axis is automatically controlled in the following way in the block containing the G45, G46, or G47
command.
When a G45 command is specified, the C-axis is controlled at the first punch position so that the C-axis is
oriented to the angle formed by the X-axis and the line connecting the start and end points.
When a G46 or G47 command is specified, the C-axis is controlled at each punch position so that one
side of the tool is oriented to the center of the arc.
- 169 -
14.8 Y–AXIS CRACK CANCEL

The Y-axis crack cancel M–codes which is set by parameters (No. 16610 to 16614) are commanded, the
crack between work coordinate system and machine coordinate system of Y–axis repositioning motion is
canceled.
(Example 1)
Y1525 M30 ;
Y–axis moves including the crack of repositioning.
(Example 2)
Y1525 ;
M30 ;
The work coordinate system is preset to the machine coordinate system to cancel the crack of
repositioning by M30.
Limitation
The Y-axis crack cancel M–code must be different from another special meaning M–code.
But M02 and M30 are possible.
- 170 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION
15 COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Chapter 15, "COMPENSATION FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
15.1 SCALING (G50, G51) ......................................................................................................................171

15.2 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1).................................................................177
15.3 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1 or G150,G151,G152) ..........................178
15.4 OVERVIEW OF TOOL COMPENSATION (G40-G42).................................................................183
15.5 DETAILS OF TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION ........................................................................188
15.6 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF COMPENSATION VALUES, AND
ENTERING VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10)..................................................................235
15.7 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G84, G85) .......................................................................237
15.1 SCALING (G50, G51)

Overview
A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).
Two types of scaling are available, one in which the same magnification rate is applied to each axis and
the other in which different magnification rates are applied to different axes.
The magnification rate can be specified in the program.
Unless specified in the program, the magnification rate specified in the parameter is applied.
Y
P4
P3
P4’ P3’
P0
P1’ P2’
P1 P2
0 X
P0 : Scaling center
P1 to P4 : Programmed figure
P1’ to P4’ : Scaled figure
Fig. 15.1 (a) Scaling
Format
Scaling up or down along all axes at the same rate of magnification
(When bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 = 0)
Format Meaning of command
G51 IP_P_ ; Scaling start IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate
Scaling is effective. value of scaling
(Scaling mode) P_ : Scaling magnification
G50 ; Scaling cancel
- 171 -
15.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
Scaling up or down along each axes at a different rate of magnification (mirror image)
(When bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 = 1)
Format Meaning of command
G51 IP_I_J_K_; Scaling start IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate
Scaling is effective. value of scaling
(Scaling mode) I_J_K_ : Scaling magnification for basic 3 axes (X, Y,
and Z axes) respectively
G50 ; Scaling cancel
CAUTION
1 Specify G51 in a separate block.
2 After the figure is enlarged or reduced, specify G50 to cancel the scaling mode.
NOTE
1 Entering electronic calculator decimal point input mode (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter
No. 3401 = 1) does not cause the units of the magnification rates P, I, J, and K
to change.
2 Setting the least input increment equal to 10 times the least command increment
(bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 = 1) does not cause the units of the
magnification rates P, I, J, and K to change.
3 An attempt to specify 0 as a magnification rate causes alarm PS0142, “ILLEGAL
SCALE RATE” to occur in a G51 block.
Explanation
- Axis for which scaling is to be enabled
For the axis for which scaling is to be enabled, set bit 0 (SCL) of parameter No. 5401 to 1.
- Minimum unit of scaling magnification

Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001.
It is 0.00001 (one hundred thousandth) if bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is 0 and 0.001 if it is 1.
- Scaling center
Even in incremental command (G91) mode, the scaling center coordinates IP_ specified in the G51 block
are assumed those of an absolute position.
If the scaling center coordinates are omitted, the position assumed when G51 is specified is assumed the
scaling center.
CAUTION
With the move command subsequent to the G51 block, execute an absolute
(G90 mode) position command.
If no absolute position command is executed after the G51 block, the position
assumed when G51 is specified is assumed the scaling center; once an absolute
position command is executed, the scaling center assumes the coordinates
specified in the G51 block, after that block.
- Scaling along each axis at the same rate of magnification

Set bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 to 0.
If the scaling magnification P is not specified, the magnification set in parameter No. 5411 is used.
Decimal point input is not accepted as the magnification P. If decimal point input is made, alarm PS0007,
“ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT” will occur.
A negative value cannot be specified as the magnification P. If a negative value is specified, alarm
PS0006, “ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN” will occur.
- 172 -
The allowable magnification range is from 0.00001 to 9999.99999.
- Scaling of each axis, programmable mirror image (negative magnification)

Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative magnification is specified, a
mirror image is applied. The axis subject to the mirror image is the one that contains the scaling center.
Set bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400to 1 to validate each axis scaling (mirror image).
Using I, J, and K, specify the scaling magnifications for the basic 3 axes (X to Z axes). Use parameter No.
1022 to specify which axes to use as the basic 3 axes. For those of the X to Z axes for which I, J, and K
are not specified and for axes other than the basic 3 axes, the magnification set with parameter No. 5421
is used.
A value other than 0 must be set to parameter No. 5421.
Decimal point programming can not be used to specify the rate of magnification (I, J, K).
Magnification can be set within the range of ±0.00001 to ±9999.99999.
a/b : Scaling magnification of X axis
Y axis c/d : Scaling magnification of Y axis
o : Scaling center
Programmed figure
d
Scaled figure
c
o
X axis
a
b
Fig. 15.1 (b) Scaling of each axis
CAUTION
Specifying the following commands at the same time causes them to be
executed in the order indicated below:
<1> Programmable mirror image (G51.1)
<2> Scaling (G51) (including a mirror image with a negative magnification)
<3> Mirror image due to the external switch of the CNC or the settings of the
CNC
In this case, the programmable mirror image is effective to the scaling center
and magnification as well.
To specify G51.1 and G51 at the same time, specify them in this order; to cancel
them, specify them in the reverse order.
- Scaling of circular interpolation

Even if different magnifications are applied to each axis in circular interpolation, the tool will not trace an
ellipse.
G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0;
G51 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 I2000 J1000;
(A magnification of 2 is applied to the X-component and a magnification of 1 is applied to the
Y-component.)
G02 X100.0 Y0.0 I0 J–100.0 F500;
Above commands are equivalent to the following command:
G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0;
G02 X200.0 Y0.0 I0 J–100.0 F500;
- 173 -
(Because the end point is not on an arc, spiral interpolation is assumed.)
Scaled shape
X
(0,0) (100.0) (200.0)
Fig. 15.1 (c) Scaling for circular interpolation1
Even for an R-specified arc, scaling is applied to each of I, J, and K after the radius value (R) is converted
into a vector in the center direction of each axis.
If, therefore, the above G02 block contains the following R-specified arc, the operation will be same as
that in which I and J are specified.
G02 X100.0 Y0.0 R100.0 F500 ;
- Scaling and coordinate system rotation

If both scaling and coordinate system rotation are specified at the same time, scaling is performed first,
followed by coordinate system rotation. In this case, scaling is effective to the rotation center as well.
To specify both of them, specify scaling first and then coordinate system rotation. To cancel them,
specify them in the reverse order.
Example
Main program
O1
G90 G00 X20.0 Y10.0 ;
M98 P1000 ;
G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I3000 J2000 ; (×3 in the X direction and ×2 in the Y direction)
M98 P1000 ;
G17 G84 X35.0 Y20.0 R30. ;
M98 P1000 ;
G85 ;
G50 ;
M30 ;
Subprogram
O1000 ;
G01 X20.0 Y10.0 F500 ;
G01 X50.0 ;
G01 Y30.0 ;
G01 X20.0 ;
G01 Y10.0 ;
M99 ;
- 174 -
Y
Rotation center
of coordinate
system before
scaling
Rotation center of
coordinate system
after scaling
Original program
Shape after X
coordinate system
Scaling center rotation Scaled shape
Fig. 15.1 (d) Scaling and coordinate system rotation
Limitation
- Tool compensation
This scaling is not applicable to tool radius compensation values (Fig. 15.1 (e)).
Programmed figure
Scaled figure
Cutter compensation values are not scaled.
Fig. 15.1 (e) Scaling during tool compensation
- 175 -
CAUTION
1 If a parameter setting value is employed as a scaling magnification without
specifying P, the setting value at G51 command time is employed as the scaling
magnification, and a change of this value, if any, is not effective.
2 Before specifying the G code for reference position return (G27, G28, G29, G30,
etc.) or coordinate system setting (G52 to G59, G92, etc.), cancel the scaling
mode.
3 If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and
disregarding the rest, the move amount may become zero. In this case, the
block is regarded as a no movement block, and therefore, it may affect the tool
movement by tool compensation. See the description of tool compensation.
4 Refrain from scaling on a rotation axis for which the rollover function is enabled.
Otherwise, the tool may rotate in a short-cut manner, possibly resulting in
unexpected movement.
NOTE
1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling.
2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the
following results:
(1) Circular command ......................................... Direction of rotation is reversed.
(2) Tool radius compensation ............................. Offset direction is reversed.
(3) Coordinate system rotation ........................... Rotation angle is reversed.
Example
Sample program of a scaling in each axis
O1;
G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I750 J250; (× 0.75 in the X direction, × 0.25 in the Y direction)
G00 G90 X60.0 Y50.0;
G01 X120.0 F100;
G01 Y90;
G01 X60;
G01 Y50;
G50;
M30;
Y axis
90
Programmed figure
80
(60,50) Scaled figure
30
20
10
Scaling center
X axis
75
100
20 95 120
Fig. 15.1 (f) Program example of scaling in each axis
- 176 -
15.2 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1)

A mirror image of a programmed command can be produced with respect to a programmed axis of
symmetry (Fig. 15.2).
Y Axis of symmetry (X=50)
(2) (1)
100
60
Axis of symmetry
50
(Y=50)
40
0
(3) (4)
0 40 50 60 100 X
(1) Original image of a programmed command

(2) Image symmetrical about a line parallel to the Y-axis and crossing the
X-axis at 50
(3) Image symmetrical about point (50, 50)
(4) Image symmetrical about a line parallel to the X-axis and crossing the
Y-axis at 50
Fig. 15.2 Programmable mirror image
Format
G51.1 IP_ ; Setting a programmable image
:
A mirror image of a command specified in these blocks is produced
:
with respect to the axis of symmetry specified by G51.1 IP_;.
:
G50.1 IP_ ; Canceling a programmable mirror image
IP_ : Point (position) and axis of symmetry for producing a mirror image when specified with
G51.1.
Axis of symmetry for producing a mirror image when specified with G50.1. Point of
symmetry is not specified.
Explanation
- Mirror image by setting
If the programmable mirror image function is specified when the command for producing a mirror image
is also selected by a CNC external switch or CNC setting (see Section, “MIRROR IMAGE”), the
programmable mirror image function is executed first.
- 177 -
- Mirror image on a single axis in a specified plane

Applying a mirror image to one of the axes on a specified plane changes the following commands as
follows :
Command Explanation
Circular command G02 and G03 are interchanged.
Tool radius compensation G41 and G42 are interchanged.
Coordinate system rotation CW and CCW (directions of rotation) are interchanged.
Limitation
Processing proceeds from program mirror image to scaling and coordinate system rotation in the stated
order. The commands should be specified in this order, and, for cancellation, in the reverse order. Do not
specify G50.1 or G51.1 during scaling or coordinate system rotation mode.
- Commands related to reference position return and coordinate system

In programmable mirror image mode, G codes related to reference position return (G28, etc.) and those
for changing the coordinate system (G52 to G59, G92, etc.) must not be specified. If any of these G codes
is necessary, specify it only after canceling the programmable mirror image mode.
15.3 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1, or

G150,G151,G152)
Overview
When a tool with a rotation axis (C-axis) is moved in the XY plane during cutting, the normal direction
control function can control the tool so that the C-axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 15.3
(a)).
Normal direction
Programmed tool path
Center of the arc
Fig. 15.3 (a) Sample Movement of the tool
- 178 -
Format
G41.1 ; Normal direction control, left
G42.1 ; Normal direction control, right
G40.1 ; Cancel normal direction control
The normal direction control, left (G41.1) command is used when the workpiece is on the
right side of the tool as viewed while you are looking into the tool’s way.
Once either G41.1 or G42.1 is issued, normal direction control is enabled (normal
direction control mode).
Issuing G40.1 cancels the normal direction control mode.
Explanation
- Angle of the C axis
When viewed from the center of rotation around the C-axis, the angular displacement about the C-axis is
determined as shown in Fig. 15.3 (b). The positive side of the X-axis is assumed to be 0, the positive side
of the Y-axis is 90°, the negative side of the X-axis is 180°, and the negative side of the Y-axis is 270°.
+Y
90°
180° 0° +X
Center of rotation 270°
Fig. 15.3 (b) Angle of the C axis
- Normal direction control of the C axis

When the cancel mode is switched to the normal direction control mode, the C-axis becomes
perpendicular to the tool path at the beginning of the block containing G41.1 or G42.1.
In the interface between blocks in the normal direction control mode, a command to move the tool is
automatically inserted so that the C-axis becomes perpendicular to the tool path at the beginning of each
block. The tool is first oriented so that the C-axis becomes perpendicular to the tool path specified by the
move command, then it is moved along the X- and Y axes.
In the tool compensation mode, the tool is oriented so that the C-axis becomes perpendicular to the tool
path created after compensation.
In single-block operation, the tool is not stopped between a command for rotation of the tool and a
command for movement along the X- and Y-axes. A single-block stop always occurs after the tool is
moved along the X- and Y-axes.
- 179 -
S：Single block stop point

C-axis direction
S

The C-axis is controlled
to become perpendicular
to the tool path at the
beginning of the block
S
S
Fig. 15.3 (c) Point at which a single-block stop occurs in the normal direction control mode
Before circular interpolation is started, the C-axis is rotated so that the C-axis becomes normal to the arc
at the start point. During circular interpolation, the tool is controlled so that the C-axis is always
perpendicular to the tool path determined by circular interpolation.
The tool is controlled so
that the C-axis is always
normal to the tool path
determined by circular
interpolation.
Center of the arc
Fig. 15.3 (d) Normal direction control of the circular interpolation
NOTE
During normal direction control, the C axis always rotates through an angle less
than 180 deg. I.e., it rotates in whichever direction provides the shorter route.
- C axis feedrate
Movement of the tool inserted at the beginning of each block is executed at the feedrate set in parameter
5481. If dry run mode is on at that time, the dry run feedrate is applied. If the tool is to be moved along
the X-and Y-axes in rapid traverse (G00) mode, the rapid traverse feedrate is applied.
The feedrate of the C axis during circular interpolation is defined by the following formula.
Amount of movement of the C axis (deg)
F× (deg/min)
Length of arc (mm or inch)
F : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min) specified by the corresponding block of the arc

Amount of movement of the C axis : The difference in angles at the beginning and the end of the block.
- 180 -
NOTE
If the feedrate of the C axis exceeds the maximum cutting speed of the C axis
specified to parameter No. 1430, the feedrate of each of the other axes is
clamped to keep the feedrate of the C axis below the maximum cutting speed of
the C axis.
- Normal direction control axis

A C-axis to which normal-direction control is applied can be assigned to any axis with parameter No.
5480.
- Angle for which figure insertion is ignored

When the rotation angle to be inserted, calculated by normal-direction control, is smaller than the value
set with parameter No. 5482, the corresponding rotation block is not inserted for the axis to which
normal-direction control is applied. This ignored rotation angle is added to the next rotation angle to be
inserted, the total angle being subject to the same check at the next block.
If an angle of 360 degrees or more is specified, the corresponding rotation block is not inserted.
If an angle of 180 degrees or more is specified in a block other than that for circular interpolation with a
C-axis rotation angle of 180 degrees or more, the corresponding rotation block is not inserted.
- Movement for which arc insertion is ignored

Specify the maximum distance for which machining is performed with the same normal direction as that
of the preceding block.
• Linear movement
When distance N2, shown below, is smaller than the set value, machining for block N2 is performed
using the same direction as that for block N1.
Tool center path
N2
N3
N1
Distance
• Circular movement
When the diameter of block N2, shown below, is smaller than the set value, machining for block N2
is performed using the same normal direction as that for block N1. And control as compensation
along the circular arc is not performed.
Tool center path
N2
N3
Diameter
N1
- 181 -
NOTE
1 Do not specify any command to the C axis during normal direction control. Any
command specified at this time is ignored.
2 Before processing starts, it is necessary to correlate the workpiece coordinate of
the C axis with the actual position of the C axis on the machine using the
coordinate system setting (G92) or the like.
3 The helical cutting option is required to use this function. Helical cutting cannot
be specified in the normal direction control mode.
4 Normal direction control cannot be performed by the G53 move command.
5 The C-axis must be a rotation axis.
6 The following functions must be commanded with normal direction control cancel
mode.
- Plane selection command
- AI contour control
- T and C commands during normal–line direction control

(1) During normal–line direction control, the T command results in an alarm (PS4606).
(2) During normal–line direction control, the C command is ignored. A C–axis offset command is also
ignored if a C–axis index tool is specified.
(3) A C–axis offset command specified before a normal–line direction control mode is entered remains
valid after the normal–line direction control mode is entered.
(4) Usually, a check is made on T commands during normal–line direction control. If a T command is
already specified when a normal–line direction control mode is entered, a check is not made on the T
command. Normal–line direction control is carried out no matter what tool type is specified.
Under normal direction control, a punch press shears a sheet while holding the sheet and moving the tool
with interpolation. The cutting of an arc should be programmed as follows: Linear positioning is
performed with the C–axis set in the direction normal to the tangential direction at the start point of the
arc; The sheet is held by the PF signal; A C–axis normal–direction movement is made with circular
interpolation. The program should be created so that an arc and a straight line are connected by a tangent
even in the normal direction control mode.
(Example)
G92 X1525 Y1525;
G90;
T201;
G70 X500 Y200; Positioning for creating a tangent at the start point of the arc
G41.1; (G70: Positioning and press off command)
G00 X500 Y500; Positioning to the arc start point with the C–axis set in the
G03 X421.14 Y459.171–50F5000; direction normal to the direction of the arc tangent
G40.1;
- 182 -
15.4 OVERVIEW OF TOOL COMPENSATION (G40-G42)

When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the tool (Fig. 15.4 (a)).
To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, CNC first creates an offset vector with a length equal
to the radius of the tool (start-up). The offset vector is perpendicular to the tool path. The tail of the vector
is on the workpiece side and the head positions to the center of the tool.
If a linear interpolation or circular interpolation command is specified after start-up, the tool path can be
shifted by the length of the offset vector during machining.
To return the tool to the start point at the end of machining, cancel the tool compensation mode.
Cutter
compensation
cancel
Start-up
Fig. 15.4 (a) Outline of tool compensation
Format
- Start up (tool compensation start)
G00(or G01)G41(or G42) IP_D_;
G41 : Tool compensation left (Group 07)
G42 : Tool compensation right (Group 07)
IP_ : Command for axis movement
D_ : Code for specifying as the tool compensation value (1-3 digits) (D code)
- Tool compensation cancel (offset mode cancel)

G40 IP_;
G40 : Tool compensation cancel (Group 07)
(Offset mode cancel)
IP_ : Command for axis movement
- 183 -
- Selection of the offset plane

Offset plane Command for plane selection IP_
XpYp G17 ; Xp_Yp_
ZpXp G18 ; Xp_Zp_
YpZp G19 ; Yp_Zp_
Explanation
- Offset cancel mode
At the beginning when power is applied the control is in the cancel mode. In the cancel mode, the vector
is always 0, and the tool center path coincides with the programmed path.
- Start-up
When a tool compensation command (G41 or G42, D code other than 0) is specified in the offset cancel
mode, the CNC enters the offset mode.
Moving the tool with this command is called start-up.
Specify positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) for start-up.
If circular interpolation (G02, G03) is specified, alarm PS0034, “ONLY G00/G01 ALLOWED IN
STUP/EXT BLK” occurs.
For the start-up and subsequent blocks, the CNC prereads as many blocks as the number of preread
blocks set in the parameter No. 19625.
- Offset mode
In the offset mode, compensation is accomplished by positioning (G00), linear interpolation (G01), or
circular interpolation (G02, G03).
If three or more blocks that move the tool cannot be read in offset mode, the tool may make either an
excessive or insufficient cut.
If the offset plane is switched in the offset mode, alarm PS0037, “CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN
G41/G42” occurs and the tool is stopped.
- Offset mode cancel

In the offset mode, when a block which satisfies any one of the following conditions is executed, the
CNC enters the offset cancel mode, and the action of this block is called the offset cancel.
1. G40 has been commanded.
2. 0 has been commanded as the offset number for tool compensation (D code).
When performing offset cancel, circular arc commands (G02 and G03) are not available. If these
commands are specified, an PS0034 is generated and the tool stops. In the offset cancel, the control
executes the instructions in that block and the block in the tool compensation buffer.
In the meantime, in the case of a single block mode, after reading one block, the control executes it and
stops. By pushing the cycle start button once more, one block is executed without reading the next block.
Then the control is in the cancel mode, and normally, the block to be executed next will be stored in the
buffer register and the next block is not read into the buffer for tool compensation.
Start up
(G41/G42)
Offset cancel mode Offset mode
Offset mode cancel
(G40/D0)
Fig. 15.4 (b) Changing the offset mode
- Change of the tool compensation value

In general, the tool compensation value shall be changed in the cancel mode, when changing tools. If the
tool compensation value is changed in offset mode, the vector at the end point of the block is calculated
for the new tool compensation value.
- 184 -
Calculated from the cutter Calculated from the cutter

compensation value in the block N6 compensation value in the block N7
N7
N6 N8
Programmed path
Fig. 15.4 (c) Changing the tool compensation value
- Positive/negative tool compensation value and tool center path

If the compensation value is negative (–), distribution is made for a figure in which G41's and G42's are
all replaced with each other on the program. Consequently, if the tool center is passing around the outside
of the workpiece, it will pass around the inside, and vice versa.
Fig. 15.4 (d) shows one example.
Generally, the compensation value is programmed to be positive (+).
When a tool path is programmed as in <1>, if the compensation value is made negative (–), the tool center
moves as in <2>, and vice versa. Consequently, the same program permits cutting both male and female
shapes, and any gap between them can be adjusted by the selection of the compensation value.
Applicable if start-up and cancel is A type. (See the descriptions about the start-up of tool compensation.)
<1> <2>
Tool center path
Programmed path
Fig. 15.4 (d) Tool center paths when positive and negative tool
compensation values are specified
- Tool compensation value setting

Assign a tool compensation values to the D codes on the MDI panel.
NOTE
The tool compensation value for which the D code corresponds to 0 always
means 0.
It is not possible to set the tool compensation value corresponding to D0.
- Valid compensation value range

The valid range of values that can be set as a compensation value is either of the following, depending on
the bits 3 (OFE), 2 (OFD), 1 (OFC), and 0 (OFA) of parameter No. 5042.
Valid compensation range (metric input)

OFE OFD OFC OFA Range
0 0 0 1 ±9999.99 mm
0 0 0 0 ±9999.999 mm
0 0 1 0 ±9999.9999 mm
0 1 0 0 ±9999.99999 mm
1 0 0 0 ±999.999999 mm
- 185 -
Valid compensation range (inch input)

OFE OFD OFC OFA Range
0 0 0 1 ±999.999 inch
0 0 0 0 ±999.9999 inch
0 0 1 0 ±999.99999 inch
0 1 0 0 ±999.999999 inch
1 0 0 0 ±99.9999999 inch
The compensation value corresponding to offset No. 0 always means 0. It is not possible to set the
compensation value corresponding to offset No. 0.
- Offset vector
The offset vector is the two dimensional vector that is equal to the tool compensation value assigned by D
code. It is calculated inside the control unit, and its direction is up-dated in accordance with the progress
of the tool in each block.
The offset vector is deleted by reset.
- Specifying a tool compensation value

Specify a tool compensation value with a number assigned to it. The number consists of 1 to 3 digits after
address D (D code).
The D code is valid until another D code is specified. The D code is used to specify the tool offset value
as well as the tool compensation value.
- Plane selection and vector

Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18 and G19, (G codes for plane
selection). This plane is called the offset plane.
Compensation is not executed for the coordinate of a position which is not in the specified plane. The
programmed values are used as they are.
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the tool path projected on the offset plane is compensated.
The offset plane is changed during the offset cancel mode. If it is performed during the offset mode, an
PS0037 is displayed and the machine is stopped.
- 186 -
Example
250R
N5
C1(700,1300)
P4(500,1150) P5(900,1150)
C3 (-150,1150) C2 (1550,1150)
650R 650R
N4 N6
N3 N7
P2 P3(450,900) P6(950,900) P7
(250,900) (1150,900)
N8
N2
P9(700,650)
P1 P8
(250,550) (1150,550)
N10 N9
Y axis
N1
N11
X axis Unit : mm
Start point
G17 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ;............................. Specifies absolute coordinates.

The tool is positioned at the start point (X0, Y0, Z0).
N1 G90 G00 G41 D07 X250.0 Y550.0 ; .... Starts tool compensation (start-up).
The tool is shifted to the left of the programmed path by the
distance specified in D07.
In other words the tool path is shifted by the radius of the
tool (offset mode) because D07 is set to 15 beforehand (the
radius of the tool is 15 mm).
N2 G01 Y900.0 F150 ;................................ Specifies machining from P1 to P2.
N3 X450.0 ;................................................. Specifies machining from P2 to P3.
N4 G03 X500.0 Y1150.0 R650.0 ; ............. Specifies machining from P3 to P4.
N5 G02 X900.0 R-250.0 ;........................... Specifies machining from P4 to P5.
N6 G03 X950.0 Y900.0 R650.0 ; ............... Specifies machining from P5 to P6.
N7 G01 X1150.0 ;....................................... Specifies machining from P6 to P7.
N8 Y550.0 ;................................................. Specifies machining from P7 to P8.
N9 X700.0 Y650.0 ;.................................... Specifies machining from P8 to P9.
N10 X250.0 Y550.0 ;.................................... Specifies machining from P9 to P1.
N11 G00 G40 X0 Y0 ; .................................. Cancels the offset mode.
The tool is returned to the start point (X0, Y0, Z0).
- 187 -
15.5 DETAILS OF TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION
15.5.1 Overview
The following explanation focuses on the tool compensation.
- Inner side and outer side

When an angle of intersection of the tool paths specified with move commands for two blocks on the
workpiece side is over 180°, it is referred to as "inner side." When the angle is between 0° and 180°, it is
referred to as "outer side."
Inner side Outer side
Programmed path
Workpiece α
Workpiece α
Programmed path
180°≤a 0°≤α<180°
- Outer corner connection method

If the tool moves around an outer corner in tool compensation mode, it is possible to specify whether to
connect compensation vectors with linear interpolation or with circular interpolation, using bit 2 (CCC) of
<1> Linear connection type [Bit <2> Circular connection type

2 (CCC) of parameter No. [Bit 2 (CCC) of
19607 = 0] parameter No. 19607 = 1]
Vectors are connected with linear Vectors are connected with circular
interpolation. interpolation.
- Cancel mode
The tool compensation enters the cancel mode under the following conditions. (The system may not enter
the cancel mode depending on the machine tool.)
<1> Immediately after the power is turned on
<2> When the key on the MDI panel is pushed
<3> After a program is forced to end by executing M02 or M30
<4> After the tool compensation cancel command (G40) is exercised
- 188 -
In the cancel mode, the compensation vector is set to zero, and the path of the center of tool coincides
with the programmed path. A program must end in cancel mode. If it ends in the tool compensation mode,
the tool cannot be positioned at the end point, and the tool stops at a location the compensation vector
length away from the end point.
NOTE
The operation to be performed when a reset operation is performed during tool
compensation differs depending on bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402.
- If CLR is 0
The system enters the reset state. G41/G42 are retained as the modal code
of group 07, but to perform tool compensation, an offset number (D code)
must be specified again.
- If CLR is 1
The system enters the clear state. The modal code of group 07 is G40, and to
perform tool compensation again, G41/G42 and an offset number (D code)
must be specified.
- Start-up
When a block which satisfies all the following conditions is executed in cancel mode, the CNC enters the
tool compensation mode. Control during this operation is called start-up.
<1> G41 or G42 is contained in the block, or has been specified to place the CNC in the tool
compensation mode.
<2> 0 < compensation number of tool compensation ≤ maximum compensation number
<3> Positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) mode
<4> A compensation plane axis command with a travel distance of 0 (except start-up type C) is specified.
If start-up is specified in circular interpolation (G02, G03) mode, PS0034 will occur.
In a start-up block, workpiece coordinate system switching (G54 to G59) cannot be specified.
As a start-up operation, one of the three types A, B, and C can be selected by setting bit 0 (SUP) of
parameter No. 5003 and bit 1 (SUV) of parameter No. 5003 appropriately. The operation to be performed
if the tool moves around an inner side is of single type only.
Table 15.5.1 (a) Start-up/cancel operation

SUV SUP Type Operation
0 0 Type A A compensation vector is output, which is vertical to the block
subsequent to the start-up block and the block preceding the cancel
block.
Tool center path
G41
Programmed path
N2
N1
0 1 Type B A compensation vector is output, which is vertical to the start-up

block and the cancel block. An intersection vector is also output.
Intersection
Tool center path
Programmed path
G41
N2
N1
- 189 -

1 0 Type C When the start-up block and the cancel block are blocks without tool
1 movement, the tool moves by the tool radius compensation value in
the direction vertical to the block subsequent to the start-up block
and the block preceding the cancel block.
Intersection
Tool center path
Programmed N3 Programmed path

path
G41 N2
N1
For a block with tool movement, the tool follows the SUP setting: If it
is 0, type A is assumed and if 1, type B is assumed.
- Reading input commands in tool compensation mode

In tool compensation mode, input commands are read from usually three blocks and up to eight blocks
depending on the setting of parameter No. 19625 to perform intersection calculation or an interference
check, described later, regardless of whether the blocks are with or without tool movement, until a cancel
command is received.
To perform intersection calculation, it is necessary to read at least two blocks with tool movement. To
perform an interference check, it is necessary to read at least three blocks with tool movement.
As the setting of parameter No. 19625, that is, the number of blocks to read, increases, it is possible to
predict overcutting (interference) for up to more subsequent commands. Increases in blocks to read and
analyze, however, cause reading and analysis to take more time.
- Ending (canceling) tool compensation

In tool compensation mode, tool compensation is canceled if a block that satisfies at least either one of the
following conditions is executed:
<1> G40 is specified.
<2> D00 is specified as the compensation number of tool compensation.
If tool compensation cancel is to be performed, it must not be by a circular command (G02, G03).
Otherwise, an alarm will occur.
For a cancel operation, one of three types, A, B, and C, can be selected by appropriately setting bit 0
(SUP) of parameter No. 5003 and bit 1 (SUV) of parameter No. 5003. The operation to be performed if
the tool turns around the inside is of a single type.
- Bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000

When bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000 is set to 1, a single block stop can be performed in a block
created internally for tool compensation.
Use this parameter to check a program including tool compensation.
Stop point in a block created internally
N1 Single block stop point

S
N1
N2
N2
N1 Cutter center path
Programmed path
- 190 -
NOTE
When an M code (auxiliary function), S code, T code (tool function), or B code
(second auxiliary function) is specified in the N1 block in the figure above, FIN is
not accepted if the tool stops at the stop point in a block created internally
(excluding the single block stop point).
- Meaning of symbols
The following symbols are used in subsequent figures:
• S indicates a position at which a single block is executed once.
• SS indicates a position at which a single block is executed twice.
• SSS indicates a position at which a single block is executed three times.
• L indicates that the tool moves along a straight line.
• C indicates that the tool moves along an arc.
• r indicates the tool radius compensation value.
• An intersection is a position at which the programmed paths of two blocks intersect with each other
after they are shifted by r.
• indicates the center of the tool.
15.5.2 Tool Movement in Start-up

When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode, the tool moves as illustrated below (start-up):
Explanation
- Tool movement around an inner side of a corner (180°≤ α)
Linear→Linear
α
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
G42
S L Tool center path

L
Start point
Linear→Circular
α
Work-
G42 r piece
S
C
L
Start point Tool center path Programmed path
- 191 -
- Cases in which the start-up block is a block with tool movement and the tool
moves around the outside at an obtuse angle (90°≤ α<180°)
Tool path in start-up has two types A and B, and they are selected by bit 0 (SUP) of parameter No. 5003.
Linear→Linear Start point
G42
α Workpiece
L Programmed path
r

Type
A Linear→Circular
Start point
G42
α
r Work
Work-
piece
piece
S
C
Tool center path Programmed path

Linear→Linear
(Linear connection type) Start point
G42
α
Workpiece
L
Programmed path
r
r
L
S Tool center path
Intersection L
Type
Linear→Circular
B (Linear connection type)
Start point
G42
α
r Work-
r piece
S
C
L L
Intersection
- 192 -

(Circular
connection type) G42
α Workpiece
L
Programmed path
r
r
C S L Tool center path
Type
B Linear→Circular Start point
(Circular
α
r Workpiece
r
C S
C
- 193 -
- Cases in which the start-up block is a block with tool movement and the tool
moves around the outside at an acute angle (α<90°)
Tool path in start-up has two types A and B, and they are selected by bit 0 (SUP) of parameter No. 5003.
G42
L Workpiece
α
Programmed path
r

Type
A Linear→Circular Start point
G42
L
α
r Work-
piece
S C
Tool center path

Programmed path
Linear→Linear
(Linear connection type) Start point
L
G42
Workpiece
r α
L
Programmed path
r
L
S L L Tool center path

Type
Linear→Circular
B (Linear connection type) Start point
L
G42
r α
L
r
L
Work-
S L C piece
Tool center path
Programmed path
- 194 -

(Circular L
connection type)
G42 Workpiece
r α
Programmed path
r
C

Type
B Linear→Circular Start point
(Circular L
connection type)
G42
r α
r Work-
C piece
S C
Tool center path

Programmed path
- Tool movement around the outside linear → linear at an acute angle less than
1 degree (α<1°)
S Tool center path
L
r L
Programmed path
(G41)
G41 Less than 1 deg Start point
- A block without tool movement specified at start-up

For type A and B
If the command is specified at start-up, the offset vector is not created. The tool does not operate in a
start-up block.
SS
N7
S
N6 N8
r
Tool center path
G40 … ;
N6 X100.0 Y100.0 ; N9
N7 G41 X0 ;
N8 Y-100.0 ;
N9 Y-100.0 X100.0 ;
Programmed path
- 195 -
For type C
The tool shifts by the compensation value in the direction vertical to the block with tool movement
subsequent to the start-up block.
Without tool
movement
L
α
S Programmed path
L
Tool center path
S
Intersection
15.5.3 Tool Movement in Offset Mode

In offset mode, compensation is performed even for positioning commands, not to speak of linear and
circular interpolations. To perform intersection calculation, it is necessary to read at least two blocks with
tool movement. If, therefore, two or more blocks with tool movement cannot be read in offset mode
because blocks without tool movement, such as auxiliary function independent commands and dwell, are
specified in succession, excessive or insufficient cutting may occur because intersection calculation fails.
Assuming the number of blocks to read in offset mode, which is determined by parameter No. 19625, to
be N and the number of commands in those N blocks without tool movement that have been read to be M,
the condition under which intersection calculation is possible is (N - 2) ≥ M. For example, if the
maximum number of blocks to read in offset mode is 5, intersection calculation is possible even if up to
three blocks without tool movement are specified.
NOTE
The condition necessary for an interference check, described later, differs from
this condition. For details, see the explanation of the interference check.
If a G or M code in which buffering is suppressed is specified, no subsequent commands can be read

before that block is executed, regardless of the setting of parameter No. 19625. Excessive or insufficient
cutting may, therefore, occur because of an intersection calculation failure.
- 196 -
- Tool movement around the inside of a corner (180°≤ α)

Linear→Linear
α Workpiece
Programmed path

Intersection
L
Linear→Circular
α
Work-
piece
Intersection
S C
L
Circular→Linear
α Workpiece
Programmed path
L
S Tool center path
C Intersection
Circular→Circular α
Work-
Intersection piece
S
C C
Tool center Programmed path

path
- 197 -
- Tool movement around the inside (α<1°) with an abnormally long vector,
linear → linear
Intersection
r Tool center path
Programmed path
r
r
S
Intersection
Also in case of arc to straight line, straight line to arc and arc to arc, the reader should infer in the same
procedure.
- 198 -
- Tool movement around the outside corner at an obtuse angle (90°≤α<180°)

Linear→Linear
(Linear
connection type)
α Workpiece
L Programmed path
S
Intersection L Tool center path
Linear→Circular
(Linear
connection type)
Work-
L r
piece
S L C
Intersection
Circular→Linear
(Linear connection type)
α Workpiece
r Programmed path
C
L
Intersection S L Tool center path
6
Circular→Circular
(Linear
connection type)
α
Programmed path
r Work-
r piece
C
Tool center L
path S L
Intersection C
- 199 -
Linear→Linear
(Circular
connection type)
α Workpiece
L
r Programmed path
r
C L
S Tool center path
Linear→Circular
(Circular
connection type)
r
Work-
L r
piece
C
S C
Circular→Linear
(Circular
connection type)
α Workpiece
Programmed path
r
r
C
C L
S Tool center path
Circular→Circular
(Circular
connection type)
α
Programmed path
r Work-
r piece
C
Tool center path
C
S C
- 200 -
- Tool movement around the outside corner at an acute angle (α<90°)

Linear→Linear
(Linear
connection type) L
Workpiece
r α
L
Programmed path
r
L
Linear→Circular
(Linear
connection type) L
r α
L
Work-
r piece
L
S L
C Programmed path
Tool center path
Circular→Linear
(Linear
connection type)
Workpiece
r α
L
Programmed path
r
L
Circular→Circular
(Linear
connection type)
r α
L
Work-
r piece
L
S L C
- 201 -
Linear→Linear
(Circular
connection type) L
Workpiece
r α
Programmed path
r
C
Linear→Circular
(Circular
connection type) L
r α
r Work-
piece
C
S
C
Programmed path
Tool center path
Circular→Linear
(Circular
connection type)
Workpiece
r α
Programmed path
r
C
Circular→Circular
(Circular
connection type)
r α
Work-
r piece
C
S
C
- 202 -
- When it is exceptional
End point for the arc is not on the arc
If the end of a line leading to an arc is not on the arc, the system assumes that the tool compensation has
been executed with respect to an imaginary circle that has the same center as the arc and passes the
specified end point. Based on this assumption, the system creates a vector and carries out compensation.
The same description applies to tool movement between two circular paths.
End the arc Work-

piece
Imaginary circle
Programmed path
r r
Tool center path
r C L
L
Center of the arc L S
There is no inner intersection

If the tool radius compensation value is sufficiently small, the two circular tool center paths made after
compensation intersect at a position (P). Intersection P may not occur if an excessively large value is
specified for tool radius compensation. When this is predicted, PS0033, “NO INTERSECTION AT
G41/G42” occurs at the end of the previous block and the tool is stopped.
For example, tool center paths along arcs A and B intersect at P when a sufficiently small value is
specified for tool radius compensation. If an excessively large value is specified, this intersection does not
occur.
Alarm occurs and the tool stops
When the tool radius
compensation value is large
When the tool radius compensation

value is small
Center of the arc B Center of the arc A

Programmed path
r r
Arc A P Arc B
- 203 -
- When the center of the arc is identical with the start point or the end point
If the center of the arc is identical with the start point or end point, PS0041, “INTERFERENCE IN
G41/G42” is displayed, and the tool will stop at the start point of the preceding block of the arc.
(G41)
N5 G91 G01 X50.0 ;
Tool center path N6 X50.0 ;
N7 G02 X100.0 I0 J0 ;
Alarm is displayed and the
N8 G01 Y-100.0 ;
tool stops
N5 N6 N7
Programmed path
N8
- Change in the offset direction in the offset mode

The offset direction is decided by G codes (G41 and G42) for tool radius compensation and the sign of
the compensation value as follows.
Sign of compensation
+ –
G code
G41 Left side offset Right side offset
G42 Right side offset Left side offset
The offset direction can be changed in the offset mode. If the offset direction is changed in a block, a
vector is generated at the intersection of the tool center path of that block and the tool center path of a
preceding block.
However, the change is not available in the start-up block and the block following it.
- 204 -
- Tool center path with an intersection

Linear→Linear
Workpiece S
G42 L
Intersection
r
Programmed path r
L G41
Tool center path Workpiece
Linear→Circular
r
Workpiece
G41
G42
Programmed path
r
Workpiece
Intersection
Tool center path L S
Circular→Linear
Workpiece
G42
Programmed path
r
Tool center path
C L
S
Intersection r
G41
Workpiece
Circular→Circular
C
Workpiece
G42
r
Programmed path
r
G41
Tool center path Workpiece

S
Intersection
- 205 -
- Tool center path without an intersection

When changing the offset direction in block A to block B using G41 and G42, if intersection with the
offset path is not required, the vector normal to block B is created at the start point of block B.
Linear→Linear
S L
Workpiece r
Programmed path G42 (G42)
G41
A B
L Workpiece
r
Tool center path

L S
G42
Programmed path
G41
r
Tool center path

L S
Linear→Circular Intersection
S
L
L
Tool center path A

(G41) G42 B
(G41) r
Programmed path
Circular→Circular
C
An arc whose end position

r
is not on the arc
C
G41
Programmed path (G42)
(G42)
r r
C L S L
Center Center
Tool center path
- 206 -
- The length of tool center path larger than the circumference of a circle
Normally there is almost no possibility of generating this situation. However, when G41 and G42 are
changed, or when a G40 was commanded with address I, J, and K this situation can occur.
The tool compensation is not performed with more than one circle circumference: an arc is formed from
P1 to P2 as shown. Depending on the circumstances, an alarm may be displayed due to the "Interference
Check" described later. To execute a circle with more than one circumference, the circle must be
specified in segments.
N5 N7
P1 P2
(G42)
N5 G01 G91 X500.0 Y-700.0 ;
N6
N6 G41 G02 J-500.0 ;
N7 G42 G01 X500.0 Y700.0 ;
- Tool compensation G code in the offset mode

The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving direction in the previous block,
irrespective of machining inner or outer side, by commanding the tool compensation G code (G41, G42)
in the offset mode, independently. If this code is specified in a circular command, correct circular motion
will not be obtained.
When the direction of offset is expected to be changed by the command of tool compensation G code
(G41, G42), see "Change in the offset direction in the offset mode".
Linear→Linear
A block specified by G42

G42 mode
r L
L
Tool center path S Intersection
Circular→Linear
A block specified by G42
r
G42 mode L
C
S Intersection
Programmed path
- 207 -
- Command canceling the offset vector temporarily

During offset mode, if G92 (workpiece coordinate system setting) or G52 (local coordinate system
setting) is commanded, the offset vector is temporarily cancelled and thereafter offset mode is
automatically restored.
In this case, without movement of offset cancel, the tool moves directly from the intersecting point to the
commanded point where offset vector is canceled.
Also when restored to offset mode, the tool moves directly to the intersecting point.
S S
L L
L L
Tool center path

N6 S
N5 N8
Programmed path N7
G92 block
(G41)
N5 G01 X700.0 Y300.0 ;
N6 X600.0 Y-300.0 ;
N7 G92 X200.0 Y100.0 ;
N8 G01 X800.0 Y400.0 ;
Before specifying G28 (reference position return), G30.1 (floating reference position return), and G53
(machine coordinate system selection) commands, cancel offset mode, using G40. If an attempt is made
to specify any of the commands in offset mode, the offset vector temporarily disappears.
- If I, J, and K are specified in a G00/G01 mode block

At the start of tool compensation or in that mode, by specifying I, J, and K in a positioning mode (G00) or
linear interpolation mode (G01) block, it is possible to set the compensation vector at the end point of that
block in the direction vertical to that specified by I, J, and K. This makes it possible to change the
compensation direction intentionally.
IJ type vector (XY plane)

The following explains the compensation vector (IJ type vector) to be created on the XY compensation
plane (G17 mode). (The same explanation applies to the KI type vector on the G18 plane and the JK type
vector on the G19 plane.) It is assumed that the compensation vector (IJ type vector) is the vector with a
size equal to the compensation value and vertical to the direction specified by I and J, without performing
intersection calculation on the programmed path. I and J can be specified both at the start of tool
compensation and in that mode. If they are specified at the start of compensation, any start-up type set in
the appropriate parameter will be invalid, and an IJ type vector is assumed.
Offset vector direction

In G41 mode, the direction specified by I, J, and K is assumed an imaginary tool movement direction, and
an offset vector is created vertical to that direction and on the left side.
Compensation vector
I, J, K
In G42 mode, the direction specified by I, J, and K is assumed an imaginary tool movement direction, and
an offset vector is created vertical to that direction and on the right side.
- 208 -
I, J, K
Compensation vector
Example
If I and J are specified at the start of compensation (with
tool movement)
N50
N40
(G40) N30
N10 G91 G41 X100.0 Y100.0 N20 N60
I1 D1 ;
N20 G04 X1000 ; D1 Tool center path
N30 G01 F1000 ; N10
N40 S300 ;
N50 M50 ; Programmed path
N60 X150. ;
Note) In N10, a vector is

specified with a size of D1
in the direction vertical to
the X axis, using I1.
If I and J are specified at the start of compensation

(without tool movement)
(G40)
N30
N10 G41 I1 D1 ;
N20 G91 X100. Y100. ; Tool nose radius
N30 X150. ; center path
N20
Note) In N10, a vector is Programmed path
specified with a size
of D1 in the direction
N10
vertical to the X axis,
using I1. D1
- 209 -
If I and J are specified at the start of compensation (with

tool movement)
(G17 G41 G91 D1)

N10 G00 X150. J50. ;
N20 G02 I50. ; (I,J)
N30 G00 X-150. ; <2>
Note) In N10, a vector is specified N10

with a size of D1 in the N20
N30 <1>
direction vertical to the Y axis,
using J50. <2>
<1> IJ type vector

<2> Vector determined with
intersection calculation
Tool center path
Programmed path
Path determined with

intersection calculation
If I and J are specified in a block without tool movement in

compensation mode
N30
N40 Tool center
S S path
Start-up/cancel type C
N20
N50
N10 G41 D1 G01 F1000 ; (I, J)
N20 G91 X100. Y100. ;
N30 I10. ; Programmed path
N40 X150. ;
N50 G40 ;
N10
D1
Limitation
If an IJ type vector is specified, tool interference may occur due to that vector alone, depending on the
direction. If this occurs, no interference alarm will occur, or no interference avoidance will be performed.
Overcutting may, therefore, result.
Overcutting
(I, J)
Start-up/cancel
Type C N40
N30
Programmed
N10 G42 D1 F1000 ; path N20
N20 G91 X100. ;
N30 X100. Y-100. I10. ; N10 N50
N40 X100. Y-100. ;
N50 G40 ;
Tool center path
- 210 -
- A block without tool movement

The following blocks have no tool movement. In these blocks, the tool will not move even if tool
compensation is effected.
M05 ; : M code output
S21 ; : S code output
G04 X10.0 ; : Dwell
G22 X100000 ; : Machining area setting
G10 L11 P01 R10.0 ; : Tool compensation value setting/changing
(G17) Z200.0 ; : Move command not included in the offset plane.
G90 ;, O10 ;, N20 ; : G, O, and N codes only
G91 X0 ; : Move distance is zero.
- A block without tool movement specified in offset mode

Unless the number of blocks without movement consecutively specified is more than N-2 blocks (where
N is the number of blocks to read in offset mode (parameter No. 19625)) in offset mode, the vector and
the tool center path will be as usual. This block is executed at the single block stop point.
N6 G91 X100.0 Y100.0 ; N7 N8
N7 G04 X10.0 ; Programmed path
N8 X100.0 ;
N6
L
Tool center path
SS
L Block N7 is executed here.
In offset mode, the number of blocks without movement consecutively specified must not exceed N-2
(where N is the number of blocks to read in offset mode (parameter No. 19625). If commanded, a vector
whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in a normal direction to tool motion in earlier block,
so overcutting may result.
N6 G91 X100.0 Y100.0 ; N7,N8 N9
N7 S21 ; Programmed path
N8 G04 X10.0 ;
N9 X100.0 ;
(No. of blocks to read in N6
offset mode = 3) L Tool center path
SSS
L Blocks N7 and N8 are executed here.
- If an M/G code that suppresses buffering is specified

If an M/G code that suppresses buffering is specified in offset mode, it is no longer possible to read and
analyze subsequent blocks regardless of the number of blocks to read in offset mode, which is determined
by parameter No. 19625. Then, intersection calculation and a interference check, described later, are no
longer possible. If this occurs, overcutting may occur because a vertical vector is output in the
immediately preceding block.
- 211 -
If an M code (M50) that suppresses buffering is not specified
(G42) N6
N5 G91 G01 X40.0 Y40.0 ; Programmed path
N6 X40.0 ;
:
: N5
L
Tool center path
S
L Intersection
If an M code (M50) that suppresses buffering is specified
(G42) N6 N7
Programmed path
N5 G91 G01 X40.0 Y40.0 ;
N6 M50 ;
N7 X40.0 ;
: N5
: L
Tool center path
SS
L Block N6 is executed here.
- Workpiece coordinate system or local coordinate system command in the

offset mode
If the local coordinate system (G52) or workpiece coordinate system (G92) is specified in the tool
compensation (G41 or G42) mode, G52 or G92 is assumed to be a buffering masked G code. The
subsequent blocks are not executed until the G52 or G92 block is executed.
- Corner movement
When two or more offset vectors are produced at the end of a block, the tool moves linearly from one
vector to another. This movement is called the corner movement.
If these vectors almost coincide with each other (the distance of corner movement between the vectors is
judged short due to the setting of parameter No. 5010), corner movement is not performed. In this case,
the vector to the single block stop point takes precedence and remains, while other vectors are ignored.
This makes it possible to ignore the very small movements arising from performing tool compensation,
thereby preventing velocity changes due to interruption of buffering.
This vector is ignored, if ΔVX

ΔVX ≤ ΔVlimit and
ΔVY ≤ ΔVlimit
ΔVY
r S
r The vector to the single block

stop point remains even if
N1
N1 ΔVX ≤ ΔVlimit and ΔVY ≤ Vlimit.
Tool center path
N2
Programmed path
ΔVlimit is determined with the setting of parameter (No. 5010).
- 212 -
If the vectors are not judged to almost coincide (therefore, are not erased), movement to turn around the
corner is performed. The corner movement that precedes the single block stop point belongs to the
previous block, while the corner movement that succeeds the single block stop point belongs to the latter
block.
This move belongs to block N6, thus, the feedrate is equal
to that in block N6.
S
This move belongs to block N7, thus, the
feedrate is equal to that in block N7.
N6 N7
However, if the path of the next block is semicircular or more, the above function is not performed.
The reason for this is as follows:
P2 P3 P4 P5
N4 G41 G91 G01 X150.0 Y200.0 ;
N5 X150.0 Y200.0 ;
N6 G02 J-600.0 ;
N7 G01 X150.0 Y-200.0 ; P1 P6
N8 G40 X150.0 Y-200.0 ;
N5 N7
N4 N8
Programmed path N6
Tool center path
If the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as follows:

P1 → P2 → P3 → (Circle) → P4 → P5 → P6
But if the distance between P2 and P3 is negligible, the point P3 is ignored. Therefore, the tool path is as
follows:
P2 → P 4
Namely, circle cutting by the block N6 is ignored.
- Interruption of manual operation

For manual operation during the offset mode, see "Manual Absolute ON."
- 213 -
15.5.4 Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel

Explanation
- If the cancel block is a block with tool movement, and the tool moves around
the inside (180° ≤ α)
Linear→Linear
Workpiece α
Programmed path
r
G40

L
Circular→Linear
α
Work-
piece r
G40
S
C
L
Programmed path Tool center path
- 214 -
the outside at an obtuse angle (90° ≤ α < 180°)
Tool path has two types A and B, and they are selected by bit 0 (SUP) of parameter No. 5003.
Linear→Linear
G40
Workpiece α
Programmed path L

Type
A Circular→Linear
G40
α
L
Work-
piece r
S
C
Linear→Linear
(Linear
Workpiece α
L
Programmed path
r
Tool center path Intersection L

S
Type
B Circular→Linear
(Linear
α
Work- r
piece r
S
C Inter- L
section
L
- 215 -
Linear→Linear
(Circular
Workpiece α
L
Programmed path
r
C S
Tool center path
Type
B Circular→Linear
(Circular
α
Work- r
piece r
C S
C
- 216 -
the outside at an acute angle (α<90°)
Tool path has two types A and B, and they are selected by bit 0 (SUP) of parameter No. 5003.
Linear→Linear
G40
Workpiece L α
Programmed path G42

r

Type
A Circular→Linear
G40
L α
Work- r
piece G42
C S
Tool center path

Programmed path
Linear→Linear
(Linear
connection type) L
Workpiece G40
α r
L
Programmed path
r S
L
Tool center path L L
Type
B
Circular→Linear
(Linear L
connection type)
α r
L
S
Work- r
piece
L
C L
Tool center path

Programmed path
- 217 -
Linear→Linear
(Circular
connection type) L
S
Workpiece G40
α r
Programmed path
r C
Tool center path L

Type
B
Circular→Linear
(Circular L
connection type) S
α r
C
Work- r
piece
C S
Tool center path

Programmed path
the outside at an acute angle of 1 degree or less in a linear → linear manner
(α≤1°)
S Tool center path
L
r L
(G42) Programmed path
1° or less
G40
- A block without tool movement specified together with offset cancel

For types A and B
In the block preceding the cancel block, a vector is created with a size equal to the tool radius
compensation value in the vertical direction. The tool does not operate in the cancel block. The
remaining vectors are canceled with the next move command.
N6 G91 X100.0 Y100.0 ; N7 N8
N7 G40 ;
N8 X130.0 ;
N6
L
Programmed path SS
L
Tool center path
- 218 -
For type C
The tool shifts by the compensation value in the direction vertical to the block preceding the cancel
block.
Programmed path
Tool center path

S
G40 (without
movement)
L
L
S
- Block containing G40 and I_J_K_

The previous block contains G41 or G42
If a G41 or G42 block precedes a block in which G40 and I_, J_, K_ are specified, the system assumes
that the path is programmed as a path from the end point determined by the former block to a vector
determined by (I,J), (I,K), or (J,K). The direction of compensation in the former block is inherited.
N1 (G42 mode) ; In the N1 block, the tool nose radius center moves
towards P.
N2 G40 Xa Yb I_ J_ ; In the N2 block, the tool nose radius moves towards E.
E(a, b)
(I, J)
G40
N2
P Tool center path
r S N1
r
(G42) Programamed path
Workpiece
In this case, note that the CNC obtains an intersection of the tool path irrespective of whether inner or
outer side machining is specified.
E
G40
P
Tool center path
S
r
Programmed path
(G42)
r
(I, J)
When an intersection is not obtainable, the tool comes to the normal position to the previous block at the
end of the previous block.
- 219 -
P G40 Tool center path

S
r
(G42) Programmed path
(I, J)
r
- Length of the tool center path larger than the circumference of a circle
In the Example shown below, the tool does not trace the circle more than once. It moves along the arc
from P1 to P2. The interference check function described below may raise an alarm.
To make the tool trace a circle more than once, program two or more arcs.
P1
Tool center path
P2
Programmed path N7
N5
(I, J) N6
(G41)
N5 G01 G91 X100.0 ;
N6 G02 J-60.0 ;
N7 G40 G01 X50.0 Y50.0 I-10.0 J-10.0 ;
15.5.5 Prevention of Overcutting Due to Tool Radius Compensation

Explanation
- Machining a groove smaller than the diameter of the tool
Since the tool compensation forces the tool center path to move in the reverse of the programmed
direction, overcutting will result. In this case an alarm is displayed and the CNC stops at the start of the
block.
An alarm is displayed and
Tool center path the operation stops
Programmed path
Workpiece
Overcutting if the operation would not stop

Fig. 15.5.5 (a) Machining a groove smaller than the diameter of the tool
- 220 -
- Machining a step smaller than the tool radius

For a figure in which a workpiece step is specified with an arc, the tool center path will be as shown in
Fig. 15.5.5 (b). If the step is smaller than the tool radius, the tool center path usually compensated as
shown in Fig. 15.5.5 (c) may be in the direction opposite to the programmed path. In this case, the first
vector is ignored, and the tool moves linearly to the second vector position. The single block operation is
stopped at this point. If the machining is not in the single block mode, the cycle operation is continued.
If the step is of linear, no alarm will be generated and cut correctly. However uncut part will remain.
Single block stop point
S
Tool center path
Programmed path
Workpiece Arc center
Fig. 15.5.5 (b) Machining a step larger than the tool radius
Single block stop point
Linear movement S Tool center path
Path to be taken if the Programmed path

vector is not ignored
The first vector is ignored
Arc center
Workpiece Arc
An overcutting will result if the first vector is not ignored.

However, tool moves linearly.
Fig. 15.5.5 (c) Machining a step smaller than the tool radius
- Starting compensation and cutting along the Z-axis

It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z axis after the tool compensation
(normally XY plane) is effected at some distance from the workpiece at the start of the machining. In the
case above, if it is desired to divide the motion along the Z axis into rapid traverse and cutting feed,
follow the procedure below.
Let us consider the program in the Fig. 15.5.5 (d), assuming the number of blocks to read in tool
compensation mode (parameter No. 19625) to be 3.
- 221 -
N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y500.0 D1 ;

N3 G01 Z-300.0 F100 ;
N6 Y1000.0 F200 ;
After compensation Workpiece
N6
N3:Move command in Z axis (one block)
N1
Fig. 15.5.5 (d)
In the program example in the Fig. 15.5.5 (d), when executing block N1, blocks N3 and N6 are also
entered into the buffer storage, and by the relationship among them the correct compensation is
performed as in the Fig. 15.5.5 (d).
Then, suppose that the block N3 (move command in Z axis) is divided into N3 and N5 in the Fig. 15.5.5
(e).
N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y500.0 D1 ;
N3 G01 Z-250.0 ;
N5 G01 Z-50.0 F100 ;
N6 Y1000.0 F200 ;
After compensation
Workpiece
N6
N3, N5:Move command for the Z axis (two blocks)
N1
Fig. 15.5.5 (e)
At this time, because the number of blocks to read is 3, blocks up to N5 can be read at the start of N1
compensation, but block N6 cannot be read. As a result, compensation is performed only on the basis of
the information in block N1, and a vertical vector is created at the end of the compensation start block.
Usually, therefore, overcutting will result as shown in the Fig. 15.5.5 (e).
In such a case, it is possible to prevent overcutting by specifying a command with the exactly the same
direction as the advance direction immediately before movement along the Z axis beforehand, after the
tool is moved along the Z axis using the above rule.
- 222 -
N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y400.0 D1 ;

N2 Y100.0 ;
N3 Z-250.0 ;
N5 G01 Z-50.0 F100 ;
N6 Y1000.0 F200 ;
After compensation N6
Workpiece
N3, N5 : Move command for the Z axis (2 blocks)
N2
N1
Fig. 15.5.5 (f)
As the block with sequence N2 has the move command in the same direction as that of the block with
sequence N6, the correct compensation is performed.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent overcutting in the same way by specifying an IJ type vector with
the same direction as the advance direction in the start-up block, as in N1 G91 G00 G41 X500. Y500. I0
J1 D1;, after the tool has moved along the Z axis.
15.5.6 Interference Check

Tool overcutting is called interference. The interference check function checks for tool overcutting in
advance. However, all interference cannot be checked by this function. The interference check is
performed even if overcutting does not occur.
Explanation
- Condition under which an interference check is possible
To perform an interference check, it is necessary to read at least three blocks with tool movement. If,
therefore, three or more blocks with tool movement cannot be read in offset mode because blocks without
tool movement, such as independent auxiliary function and dwell, are specified in succession, excessive
or insufficient cutting may occur because an interference check fails. Assuming the number of blocks to
read in offset mode, which is determined by parameter No. 19625, to be N and the number of commands
in those N blocks without tool movement that have been read to be M, the condition under which an
interference check is possible is
(N - 3) ≥ M.
For example, if the maximum number of blocks to read in offset mode is 8, an interference check is
possible even if up to five blocks without tool movement are specified. In this case, three adjacent blocks
can be checked for interference, but any subsequent interference that may occur cannot be detected.
- Interference check method

Two interference check methods are available, direction check and circular angle check. Bit 1 (CNC) of
parameter No. 5008 and bit 3 (CNV) of parameter No. 5008 are used to specify whether to enable these
methods.
- 223 -
CNV CNC Operation

An interference check is enabled, and a direction check and a circular
0 0
angle check can be performed.
An interference check is enabled, and only a circular angle check is
0 1
performed.
1 – An interference check is disabled.
NOTE
There are no settings for performing a direction check only.
- Interference reference <1> (direction check)

Assuming the number of blocks to read during tool compensation to be N, a check is first performed on
the compensation vector group calculated in (block 1 - block 2) to be output this time and the
compensation vector group calculated in (block N-1 - block N); if they intersect, they are judged to
interfere. If no interference is found, a check is performed sequentially in the direction toward the
compensation vector group to be output this time, as follows:
(Block 1 - block 2) and (block N-2 - block N-1)

(Block 1 - block 2) and (block N-3 - block N-2)
:
:
(Block 1 - block 2) and (block 2 - block 3)
Even if multiple number of compensation vector groups are generated, a check is performed on all pairs.
The judgment method is as follows: For a check on the compensation vector group in (block 1 - block 2)
and those in (block N-1 - block N), the direction vector from the specified (end point of block 1) to the
(end point of block N-1) is compared with the direction vector from the (point resulting from adding the
compensation vector to be checked to the end of block 1) to the (point resulting from adding the
compensation vector to be checked to the end of block N-1), and if the direction is 90o or greater or 270o
or less, they are judged to intersect and interfere. This is called a direction check.
Example of interference standard <1>

(If the block 1 end-point vector intersects with the block 7 end-point vector)
The direction differs by
180°.
Tool center path
Programmed path
Block 2 Block 7
Block 1 Block 8
Block 3
Block 6
Block 4 Block 5
- 224 -
Example of interference standard <1>
(If the block 1 end-point vector intersects with the block 2 end-point vector)
Programmed path
Tool center path
Block 1
The directions of
these two paths are
different (180°).
Block 2
- Interference reference <2> (circular angle check)

In a check on three adjacent blocks, that is, a check on the compensation vector group calculated on
(block 1 - block 2) and the compensation vector group calculated on (block 2 - block 3), if block 2 is
circular, a check is performed on the circular angle between the start and end points of the programmed
path and the circular angle of the start and end point of the post-compensation path, in addition to
direction check <1>. If the difference is 180o or greater, the blocks are judged to interfere. This is called a
circular angle check.
Example of <2> (if block 2 is circular and the start point of the post-compensation arc coincide with the
end point)
Block 3
Block 1
Programmed path
Block 2
- 225 -
- When interference is assumed although actual interference does not occur

<1> Depression which is smaller than the tool radius compensation value
Programmed
path Tool center path
Stopped
A C
B
There is no actual interference, but since the direction programmed in block B is opposite to that of
the path after the tool compensation, the tool stops and an alarm is displayed.
<2> Groove which is smaller than the tool radius compensation value
Programmed
path Tool center path
Stopped
A
B C
Like <1>, an alarm is displayed because of the interference as the direction is reverse in block B.
15.5.6.1 Operation to be performed if an interference is judged to

occur
The operation to be performed if an interference check judges that an interference (due to overcutting)
occurs can be either of the following two, depending on the setting of bit 5 (CAV) of parameter No.
19607.
Parameter CAV Function Operation

Interference check alarm An alarm stop occurs before the execution of the block in
0
function which overcutting (interference) occurs.
Interference check avoidance The tool path is changed so that overcutting (interference)
1
function does not occur, and processing continues.
- 226 -
15.5.6.2 Interference check alarm function

- Interference other than those between adjacent three blocks
If the end-point vector of block 1 and the end-point vector of block 7 are judged to interfere as shown in
the Fig. 15.5.6.2(a), an alarm will occur before the execution of block 1 so that the tool stops. In this case,
the vectors will not be erased.
Stopped
Tool center path

Block 1
Block 8
Programmed path
Block 2 Block 7
Block 3
Block 6
Block 4 Block 5
Fig. 15.5.6.2 (a)
- Interference between adjacent three blocks

If an interference is judged to occur between adjacent three blocks, the interfering vector, as well as any
vectors existing inside of it, is erased, and a path is created to connect the remaining vectors. In the
Example shown in the Fig. 15.5.6.2 (b), V2 and V5 interfere, so that V2 and V5 are erased, so are V3 and
V4, which are inside of them, and V1 is connected to V6. The operation during this time is linear
interpolation.
V6
V1
V2
V5
V4
V3
Tool center path
Programmed path
Fig. 15.5.6.2 (b)
If, after vector erasure, the last single vector still interferes, or if there is only one vector at the beginning
and it interferes, an alarm will occur immediately after the start of the previous block (end point for a
single block) and the tool stops. In the Example shown in the Fig. 15.5.6.2 (c), V2 and V3 interfere, but,
even after erasure, an alarm will occur because the final vectors V1 and V4 interfere.
- 227 -
Stopped
Tool center path
Programmed path
V4 V1
V3 V2
Fig. 15.5.6.2 (c)
15.5.6.3 Interference check avoidance function

Overview
If a command is specified which satisfies the condition under which the interference check alarm function
generates an interference alarm, this function suppresses the generation of the interference alarm, but
causes a new compensation vector to be calculated as a path for avoiding interference, thereby continuing
machining. For the path for avoiding interference, insufficient cutting occurs in comparison with the
programmed path. In addition, depending on the specified figure, no path for avoiding interference can be
determined or the path for avoiding interference may be judged dangerous. In such a case, an alarm stop
will occur. For this reason, it is not always possible to avoid interference for all commands.
- Interference avoidance method

Let us consider a case in which an interference occurs between the compensation vector between (block 1
- block 2) and the compensation vector between (block N-1 - block N). The direction vector from the end
point of block 1 to the end point of block N-1 is called a gap vector. At this time, a post-compensation
intersection vector between (block 1 - gap vector) and a post-compensation intersection vector between
(gap vector - block N) is determined, and a path connecting them is created.
- 228 -
Post-compensation intersection vector Post-compensation intersection vector

between block 1 and gap vector between gap vector and block 8
Movement o f block 7
Post-compensation
path Gap vector
Block 1
Block 8
Block 2
Block 7
Programmed path
Block 3 Block 6
Block 4 Block 5
In this case, the post-compensation end points of blocks 2 to 6 coincide with the end
point of block 1. Thus, after compensation, blocks 2 to 6 will be blocks without tool
movement.
Fig. 15.5.6.3 (a)
If the post-compensation intersection vector of (block 1 - gap vector) and the post-compensation
intersection vector of (gap vector - block N) further intersect, vector erasure is first performed in the same
way as in "Interference between adjacent three blocks". If the last vectors that remains still intersects, the
post-compensation intersection vector of (block 1 - block N) is re-calculated.
- 229 -
Post-compensation path
Re-calculation
Programmed path
Block 1 Block 8
Block 1 Block 8
Post-compensati
Post-compensation on intersection
Post-compensation vector between
intersection vector
intersection between block 1 and
between block 1
gap vector and block 8 block 8
and gap vector
Block 2 Gap vector
Block 7 Block 2 Block 7

Block 6

Block 5
In this case, the post-compensation end points of blocks 2 to 7

coincide with the end point of block 1. Thus, after compensation,
blocks 2 to 7 will be blocks without tool movement.
Fig. 15.5.6.3 (b)
If the tool radius compensation value is greater than the radius of the specified arc as shown in the Fig.
15.5.6.3 (c), and a command is specified which results in compensation with respect to the inside of the
arc, interference is avoided by performing intersection calculation with an arc command being assumed a
linear one. In this case, avoided vectors are connected with linear interpolation.
Post-compensation path
Programmed path
Fig. 15.5.6.3 (c)

- 230 -
- If no interference avoidance vector exists

If the parallel pocket shown in the Fig. 15.5.6.3 (d) is to be machined, the end-point vector of block 1 and
the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and an attempt is made to calculate, as an
interference avoidance vector, the intersection vector of the post-compensation path of block 1 and the
post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, because blocks 1 and 3 are parallel to each other, no
intersection exists. In this case, an alarm will occur immediately before block 1 and the tool will stop.
Stopped
Tool center path
Programmed path
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
Fig. 15.5.6.3 (d)
If the circular pocket shown in the Fig. 15.5.6.3 (e) is to be machined, the end-point vector of block 1 and
the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and an attempt is made to calculate, as an
post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, because blocks 1 and 3 are circular, no
post-compensation intersection exists. In this case, an alarm will occur immediately before block 1 and
the tool will stop, as in the previous example.
Stopped
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
Fig. 15.5.6.3 (e)
- 231 -
- If it is judged dangerous to avoid interference

If the acute-angle pocket shown in the Fig. 15.5.6.3 (f) is to be machined, the end-point vector of block 1
and the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and an attempt is made to calculate, as an
post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, the movement direction of the post-avoidance path
extremely differs from the previously specified direction. If the post-avoidance path extremely differs
from that of the original command (90° or greater or 270° or less), interference avoidance operation is
judged dangerous; an alarm will occur immediately before block 1 and the tool will stop.
Post-compensation intersection of
blocks 1 and 3
Tool center path Stopped
Programmed path
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
Fig. 15.5.6.3 (f)
If a pocket in which the bottom is wider than the top, such as that shown in the Fig. 15.5.6.3 (g), is to be
machined, the end-point vector of block 1 and the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and
an attempt is made to calculate, as an interference avoidance vector, the intersection vector of the
post-compensation path of block 1 and the post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, the relation
between blocks 1 and 3 is judged an outer one, the post-avoidance path results in overcutting as compared
with the original command. In such a case, interference avoidance operation is judge dangerous; an alarm
will occur immediately before block 1 and the tool will stop.
Stopped
Tool center path
Programmed path
Block 1 Block 3
Block 2
Post-compensation intersection
of blocks 1 and 3
Fig. 15.5.6.3 (g)
- If further interference with an interference avoidance vector occurs

If the pocket shown in the Fig. 15.5.6.3 (h) is to be machined, if the number of blocks to read is 3, the
end-point vector of block 1 and the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and an attempt is
made to calculate, as an interference avoidance vector, the intersection vector of the post-compensation
path of block 1 and the post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, however, the end-point vector of
block 3 that is to be calculated next further interferes with the previous interference avoidance vector.
- 232 -
If a further interference occurs to the interference avoidance vector once created and output, the
movement in the block will not be performed; an alarm will occur immediately before the block and the
tool will stop.
The intersection vectors of
blocks 3 and 4 further
Tool center path interfere.
Programmed path Sropped
Block 5
Block 4
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
Fig. 15.5.6.3 (h)
NOTE
1 For "If it is judged dangerous to avoid interference" and "If further interference
with an interference avoidance vector occurs", by setting bit 6 (NAA) of
parameter No. 19607 appropriately, it is possible to suppress an alarm to
continue machining. For "If no interference avoidance vector exists", however, it
is not possible to avoid an alarm regardless of the setting of this parameter.
2 If a single block stop occurs during interference avoidance operation, and an
operation is performed which differs from the original movement, such as
manual intervention, MDI intervention, tool radius compensation value change,
intersection calculation is performed with a new path. If such an operation is
performed, therefore, an interference may occur again although interference
avoidance has been performed once.
- 233 -
15.5.7 Tool Radius Compensation for Input from MDI

Explanation
- MDI operation
During MDI operation, that is, if a program command is specified in MDI mode in the reset state to make
a cycle start, intersection calculation is performed for compensation in the same way as in memory
operation/DNC operation. Compensation is performed in the same way if a subprogram is called from
program memory due to MDI operation.
Subprogram in program memory

MDI command
G90 G00 X0 Y0 ;
O9000 ;
M98 P9000 ;
N1 G41 G17 G91 G01 X10. Y10. D1 ;
M02 ;
N2 Y15. ;
N3 X15. ;
N4 Y-15. ;
N5 X-15. ;
N6 G40 X-10. Y-10. ;
M99 ;
N3
N2 N4
N1
N5
N6
- 234 -
- MDI intervention
If MDI intervention is performed, that is, if a single block stop is performed to enter the automatic
operation stop state in the middle of memory operation, DNC operation, and the like, and a program
command is specified in MDI mode to make a cycle start, tool compensation does not perform
intersection calculation, retaining the last compensation vector before the intervention.
MEM mode MDI intervention
(G41) G91 X30. ;

N2 G91 X10. Y30. ; X20. Y20. ;
N3 X10. Y-30. ; X20. Y-20. ;
N4 X40. ;
Last compensation vector
MDI intervention Retained compensation vector
N2 N3
N4
Program command
15.6 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF

COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES
FROM THE PROGRAM (G10)
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the MDI panel or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the corresponding code is specified
after address D in a program.
The value is used for tool compensation.
Tool compensation memories are available tool compensation memory A.
Explanation
- Tool compensation memory A
In tool compensation memory A, the compensation value for tool compensation (for D code) is to be set
in the compensation memory
Setting example
Compensation number Compensation value
001 10.000
002 20.000
003 100.000
: :
- Unit and valid range of tool compensation values

A unit and valid range of tool offset values can be selected from the following by parameter setting:
- 235 -
Unit and valid range of tool compensation values (metric input)

OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit Valid range
0 0 0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0 0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
0 0 1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm
0 1 0 0 0.00001mm ±9999.99999mm
1 0 0 0 0.000001mm ±999.999999mm
Unit and valid range of tool compensation values (inch input)

OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit Valid range
0 0 0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0 0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
0 0 1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch
0 1 0 0 0.000001inch ±999.999999inch
1 0 0 0 0.0000001inch ±99.9999999inch
- Number of tool compensation data items

The number of tool compensation data items used by the entire system varies from one machine to
another. Refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder.
Format
The format for programming depends on the type of tool compensation memory.
For tool compensation memory A

G10 L11 P_ R_ Q_ ;
P_ : Tool compensation number
R_ : Tool compensation value
By specifying G10, a tool compensation value can be set or modified.

When G10 is specified by absolute input (G90), the specified value is used as the new tool compensation
value.
When incremental input (G91) is used, a specified value added to the tool compensation value currently
set is used as the new tool compensation value.
NOTE
1 Address R follows the increment system for tool offset values.
2 If L is omitted for compatibility with the conventional CNC format, or L1 is
specified, the same operation as when L11 is specified is performed.
- 236 -
15.7 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G84, G85)

A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes possible, for example, to modify a
program using a rotation command when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the
programmed position on the machine. Further, when there is a pattern comprising some identical shapes
in the positions rotated from a shape, the time required for programming and the length of the program
can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling it after rotation.
Y
Angle of rotation
Center of rotation
X
0
Fig. 15.7 (a) Coordinate system rotation
Format
G17
G18 G84 α_β_ R_ ; Start rotation of a coordinate system.
G19
: Coordinate system rotation mode

: (The coordinate system is rotated.)
G85 ; Coordinate system rotation cancel command
G17 (G18 or G19) : Select the plane in which contains the figure to be rotated.
α_β_ : Absolute programming for two of the X_, Y_, and Z_ axes that correspond to the
current plane selected by a command (G17, G18, or G19). The command
specifies the coordinates of the center of rotation for the values specified
subsequent to G84
R_ : Angular displacement with a positive value indicates counter clockwise rotation.
Bit 0 (RIN) of parameter No. 5400 selects whether the specified angular
displacement is always considered an absolute value or is considered an
absolute or incremental value depending on the specified G code (G90 or G91).
Least input increment : 0.001 deg
Valid data range : -360,000 to 360,000
- 237 -
Angle of rotation R (incremental value)

Center of Angle of rotation (absolute value)
rotation
(α, β)
X
Fig. 15.7 (b) Coordinate system rotation
NOTE
When a decimal fraction is used to specify angular displacement (R_), the 1's
digit corresponds to degree units.
Explanation
- G code for selecting a plane: G17,G18 or G19
The G code for selecting a plane (G17,G18,or G19) can be specified before the block containing the G
code for coordinate system rotation (G84). G17, G18 or G19 must not be designated in the mode of
coordinate system rotation.
- Incremental programming in coordinate system rotation mode

The center of rotation for an incremental programming programmed after G84 but before an absolute
programming is the tool position when G84 was programmed (Fig. 15.7 (c)).
- Center of rotation
When α_β_ is not programmed, the tool position when G84 was programmed is assumed as the center of
rotation.
- Angular displacement
When R_ is not specified, the value specified in parameter No. 5410 is assumed as the angular
displacement.
To specify angular displacement (R_) in 0.00001 degrees (one hundred-thousandth), set bit 0 (FRD) of
parameter No. 11630 to 1. In this case, angular displacement R is specified within the range of -36000000
to 36000000.
- Coordinate system rotation cancel command

The G code used to cancel coordinate system rotation (G85) may be specified in a block in which another
command is specified.
- Tool compensation
Tool radius compensation, and other compensation operations are executed after the coordinate system is
rotated.
Limitation
- Commands related to reference position return and the coordinate system
In coordinate system rotation mode, G codes related to reference position return (G27, G28, G29, G30,
etc.) and those for changing the coordinate system (G52 to G59, G92, etc.) must not be specified. If any
of these G codes is necessary, specify it only after canceling coordinate system rotation mode.
- 238 -
- Incremental programming
The first move command after the coordinate system rotation cancel command (G85) must be specified
with absolute values. If an incremental move command is specified, correct movement will not be
performed.
- Note on the specification of one axis in coordinate system rotation

With the parameter below, a move position in the case where one axis is specified in the absolute mode
can selected. If two axes are specified, a movement is made to the same position, regardless of the setting
of the parameter.
Bit 5 (AX1) of parameter No. 11600

If one axis is specified in the absolute mode when the coordinate system rotation mode is set:
0: The specified position is first calculated in the coordinate system before rotation then the
coordinate system is rotated.
1: The coordinate system is first rotated then a movement is made to the specified position in the
rotated coordinate system. (FS16i/18i/21i-compatible specification)
This parameter changes the handling of coordinates on axes not specified, so that a position to be
reached by movement changes.
(Example)
G90 G0 X0 Y0
G01 X10. Y10. F6000
G84 X0 Y0 R45.... ...... Specifies coordinate system rotation.
Y14.142....................... Specifies one axis ....(1)
G85
When bit 5 (AX1) of parameter No. 11600= 0:

The specified position is calculated in the coordinate system (XY) before rotation then the
coordinate system is rotated. So, with the specification of (1), the position on the unspecified X
axis is X10, and the specified position is (X10,Y14.142). Next, a movement is made to the
move position (X-2.929,Y17.071) obtained by 45° rotation.
Y
Move position
: X-2.929,Y17.071
Specified position
: X10,Y14.142
●
Coordinates before
Tool path
45° coordinate system rotation is
specified
: X10,Y10
- 239 -
When bit 5 (AX1) of parameter No. 11600= 1:

With the specification of (1), coordinates (X10,Y10) before coordinate system rotation are
converted to coordinates (X'14.142,Y'0) in the coordinate system (X'Y') obtained by 45°
rotation. Next, a movement is made to the specified position (X'14.142,Y'14.142), that is, the
move position (X0,Y20).
Specified position
: X'14.142,Y'14.142
Y Move position
: X0,Y20
X'
Tool path
Coordinates before coordinate
system rotation is specified
Y' : X10,Y10
● Conversion
Coordinates in rotated coordinate
system
45° : X'14.142,Y'0
X
Explanation
- Absolute/Incremental position commands
N1 G92 X-500.0 Y-500.0 G69 G17 ;
N2 G84 X700.0 Y300.0 R60.0 ;
N3 G90 G01 X0 Y0 F200 ;
(G91X500.0Y500.0)
N4 G91 X1000.0 ;
N5 G02 Y1000.0 R1000.0 ;
N6 G03 X-1000.0 I-500.0 J-500.0 ;
N7 G01 Y-1000.0 ;
N8 G85 G90 X-500.0 Y-500.0 M02 ;
Tool path when the incremental

command is designated in the N3
block (in parenthesis) Originally programmed tool path
Center of rotation
(700.0,300.0)
(0,0)
60º
(-500.0,-500.0)
Tool path after rotation
Fig. 15.7 (c) Absolute/incremental programming during coordinate system rotation
- 240 -
- Tool compensation and coordinate system rotation

It is possible to specify G84 and G85 in cutter compensation mode.
The rotation plane must coincide with the plane of cutter compensation.
N1 G92 X0 Y0 G69 G01 ;

N2 G42 G90 X1000 Y1000 F1000 D01 ;
N3 G84 R-30000 ;
N4 G91 X2000 ;
N5 G03 Y1000 R1000 J500 ;
N6 G01 X-2000 ;
N7 Y-1000 ;
N8 G85 G40 G90 X0 Y0 M30 ; Programmed shape before
coordinate system rotation
Programmed shape
after coordinate
system rotation
30°
(0, 0)
Tool path
Fig. 15.7 (d) Tool compensation and coordinate system rotation

If a coordinate system rotation command is executed in the scaling mode (G51 mode), the coordinate
value (a, b) of the rotation center will also be scaled, but not the rotation angle (R). When a move
command is issued, the scaling is applied first and then the coordinates are rotated.
A coordinate system rotation command (G84) should not be issued in tool compensation mode (G41,
G42) on scaling mode (G51). The coordinate system rotation command should always be specified prior
to setting the tool compensation mode.
1. When the system is not in tool compensation mode, specify the commands in the following order :
G51 ; Scaling mode start
G84 ; Coordinate system rotation mode start
:
G85 ; Coordinate system rotation mode cancel
G50 ; Scaling mode cancel
2. When the system is in tool compensation, specify the commands in the following order (Fig. 15.7
(e)) :
(tool compensation cancel)
G51 ; Scaling mode start
G84 ; Coordinate system rotation start
:
G41 ; Tool compensation mode start
:
- 241 -
G92 X0 Y0 ;
G51 X300.0 Y150.0 P500 ;
G84 X200.0 Y100.0 R45.0 ;
G01 X400.0 Y100.0 ;
Y100.0 ;
X-200.0 ;
Y-100.0 ;
X200.0 ;
When scaling and coordinate

system rotation are applied
When only coordinate system
Y rotation is applied
When only scaling is

applied
200.0
Cutting program
100.0
X
0 200.0 400.0
Fig. 15.7 (e) Scaling and coordinate system rotation in tool compensation mode
- 242 -
- Repetitive commands for coordinate system rotation

It is possible to store one program as a subprogram and recall subprogram by changing the angle.
Sample program for when parameter RIN (No. 5400#0) is set to 1.
The specified angular displancement is treated as an absolute or
incremental value depending on the specified G code (G90 or G91).
G92 X0 Y0 G85 G17;

G01 F200 H01 ;
M98 P2100 ;
M98 P072200 ;
G00 G90 X0 Y0 M30 ;
O 2200 G84 X0 Y0 G91 R45.0 ;

G90 M98 P2100 ;
M99 ;
O 2100 G90 G01 G42 X0 Y-10.0 ;

X4.142 ;
X7.071 Y-7.071 ;
G40 ;
M99 ;
Programmed path
(0, 0)
When offset is
applied
(0, -10.0)
Subprogram
Fig. 15.7 (f) Coordinate system rotation command
- 243 -
16.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
16 CUSTOM MACRO
Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows
use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of
general programs such as pocketing and user-defined canned cycles.
A machining program can call a custom macro with a simple command, just like a subprogram.
Machining program Custom macro
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: #1=#18/2 ;
: G01 G42 X#1 Y#1 F300 ;
: 02 X#1 Y-#1 R#1 ;
G65 P9010 R50.0 L2 ; :
: :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
16.1 VARIABLES
An ordinary machining program specifies a G code and the travel distance directly with a numeric value;
examples are G100 X100.0.
With a custom macro, numeric values can be specified directly or using a variable number. When a
variable number is used, the variable value can be changed by a program or using operations on the MDI
panel.
#1=#2+100 ;
G01 X#1 F300 ;
Explanation
- Variable representation
When specifying a variable, specify a number sign (#) followed by a variable number.
#i (i = 1, 2, 3, 4, .....)
[Example] #5
#109
#1005
A variable can also be represented as follows using <expression> described in the section about
arithmetic and logic operation commands.
#[<expression>]
[Example] #[#100]
#[#1001-1]
#[#6/2]
Variable #i shown in the following can be replaced with a variable of #[<expression>].
- Types of variables
Variables can be classified as local variables, common variables, and system variables according to the
variable number. Each of those variables has its own usage and characteristics. Read-only system
constants are also provided.
- 244 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 16.CUSTOM MACRO
- Range of variable values

Local and common variables can have a value in the following ranges. If the result of calculation exceeds
the range, an alarm PS0111, “OVERFLOW :FLOATING” is issued.
When bit 0 (F16) of parameter No.6008 = 0
Maximum value: approx. ±10308
Minimum value: approx. ±10-308
Numeric data handled by a custom macro conforms to the IEEE standard and is handled as a
double-precision real number. An error resulting from operation depends on the precision.
When bit 0 (F16) of parameter No.6008 = 1
Maximum value: approx. ±1047
Minimum value: approx. ±10-29
- Local variable (#1-#33)

A local variable is a variable that is used locally in a macro. That is, local variable #i used by a macro
called at a certain time is different from that used by a macro called at another time, regardless of whether
the two macros are the same. Therefore, for example, when macro A calls macro B during multiple calls
or the like, it is impossible for macro B to corrupt a local variable used by macro A by erroneously using
the variable.
A local variable is used to pass arguments. For information on correspondence between arguments and
addresses, see the section about macro calling commands. The initial state of a local variable to which no
arguments are passed is <null> and the user can freely use the variable. The attribute of a local variable is
READ/WRITE enabled.
- Common variable (#100-#199, #500-#999)

A common variable is shared among the main program, subprograms called by the main program, and
macros while a local variable is used locally in a macro. That is, #i used by a macro is the same as that used
by another macro. Therefore, a resultant common variable obtained by using a macro can be used by another
macro. The attribute of a common variable is basically READ/WRITE enabled. However, the common
variable can be protected (its attribute is set to READ only) by specifying its variable number using
parameters No.6031 and No.6032. A common variable can be freely used by the user even when its usage is
not defined by the system. The number of common variables can be specified by selecting one of the
following options.
(a) 100 common variables (specified only with the custom macro option)
The common variables #100 to #149 and #500 to #549 can be used. The variables #100 to #149 are
cleared during power-down, but the variables #500 to #549 are retained during power-down.
(b) 600 common variables (specified with the custom macro option or custom macro common
variable addition option)
The common variables #100 to #199 and #500 to #999 can be used. The variables #100 to #199 are
cleared during power-down, but the variables #500 to #999 are retained during power-down.
- Write protection of a common variable

Multiple common variables (#500 to #999) can be protected (their attributes are set to READ only) by
setting variable numbers in parameters No.6031 and No.6032. This protection is enabled for both
Input/All Clear by MDI on the macro screen and write operation by a macro program. If the NC program
specifies WRITE operation (used in the left side) for a common program in the set range, an alarm
PS0116, “WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE” is issued.
- Custom macro common variables between each path

Some or all of the custom macro common variables (#100 to #149 (#199, #499) and #500 to #599 (#999))
can be made common to all paths by setting parameter No. 6036 (#100 to #149 (#199, #499)) and
parameter No. 6037 (#500 to #599 (#999)) appropriately. Also, whether or not to make the variables
common can be selected on a path-by-path basis by setting bit 0 (NC1) of parameter No. 6020 for
parameter No. 6036 and bit 1 (NC2) of parameter No. 6020 for parameter No. 6037 appropriately.
- 245 -
[Example]
Assume that system common parameter No. 6036 is set to 20.
If the setting of parameter No. 6036 is not to be reflected in the fourth path only, make the settings
below (Table 16.1).
Table 16.1
Path number No.6036 NC1 Area of the custom macro variables used
1 0
Variables #100 to #119 are common to all paths, while
2 0
20 other variables for each path are independent.
3 0
4 1 Variables for path 4 are all independent.
- System variable
A variable whose usage does not vary in the system. The attribute of a system variable is READ only,
WRITE only, or READ/WRITE enabled depending on the nature of a system variable.
- System constant
A system constant can be referenced as with a variable even though its value is fixed. The attribute of a
system constant is READ only.
- Omission of the decimal point

When a variable value is defined in a program, the decimal point can be omitted.
[Example] When #1 = 123; is defined, the actual value of variable #1 is 123.000.
- Referencing variables
The value following an address can be replaced with a variable. When programming as <address>#i or
<address>-#i, the variable value or the complement of it is used as the specified value of the address.
[Example] F#33 is the same as F1.5 when #33 = 1.5.
Z-#18 is the same as Z-20.0 when #18 = 20.0.
G#130 is the same as G3 when #130 = 3.0.
A variable cannot be referenced using address/, :, or O and N.
[Example] Programming such as O#27 or N#1 is not allowed.
n (n = 1 to 9) in the optional block skip /n cannot be a variable.
A variable number cannot be specified by a direct variable.
[Example] When replacing 5 in #5 with #30, specify #[#30] instead of ##30. No values
exceeding the maximum allowable value for each address can be specified.
[Example] When #140 = 10000, G#140 exceeds the maximum allowable value.
When a variable is used as address data, the variable is automatically rounded off
to the number of significant figures of each address or less.
[Example] For a machine with an increment system of 1/1000 mm (IS-B), when #1 = 12.3456,
G00 X#1; becomes G00 X12.346;.
If <expression>, described later, is used, the value following an address can be
replaced with <expression>.
<address>[<expression>] or <address>-[<expression>]
The program code shown above indicates the value of <expression> or the
complement of the value is used as an address value. Note that a constant with no
decimal point, enclosed in brackets ([ ]), is assumed to have a decimal point at the
end.
[Example] X[#24+#18*COS[#1]]
Z-[#18+#26]
- Undefined variable
When the value of a variable is not defined, such a variable is referred to as a "null" variable. Variables
#0 and #3100 are always null variables. They cannot be written to, but they can be read.
- 246 -
(a) Quotation
When an undefined variable is quoted, the address itself is also ignored.
Original command G90 X100 Y#1
Equivalent command when #1 = <null> G90 X100
Equivalent command when #1 = 0 G90 X100 Y0
(b) Definition/replacement, addition, multiplication

When a local variable or common variable is directly replaced with <null>, the result is <null>.
When a system variable is directly replaced with <null> or the result of calculation including <null>
is replaced, a variable value of 0 is assumed.
Original expression (local variable) #2=#1 #2=#1*5 #2=#1+#1
Replacement result (when #1 = <null>) <null> 0 0
Replacement result (when #1 = 0) 0 0 0
Original expression (common variable) #100=#1 #100=#1*5 #100=#1+#1

Replacement result
<null> 0 0
(when #1 = <null>)
Original expression (system variable) #2001=#1 #2001=#1*5 #2001=#1+#1

Replacement result (when #1 = <null>) 0 0 0
(c) Comparison
<null> differs from 0 only for EQ and NE.
<null> is equal to 0 for GE, GT, LE, and LT.
• When <null> is assigned to #1
Conditional
#1 EQ #0 #1 NE 0 #1 GE #0 #1 GT 0 #1 LE #0 #1 LT 0
expression
Not Not
Evaluation Established Established Established Established
established established
result (true) (true) (true) (true)
(false) (false)
• When 0 is assigned to #1
Conditional
#1 EQ #0 #1 NE 0 #1 GE #0 #1 GT 0 #1 LE #0 #1 LT 0
expression
Not Not Not Not
Evaluation Established Established
established established established established
result (true) (true)
(false) (false) (false) (false)
- Specifying a system variable (constant) by its name

A system variable (constant) is specified by its variable number, but it can also be specified by its
predetermined system variable (constant) name. A system variable (constant) name begins with an
underscore (_), followed by up to seven uppercase letters, numerics, or underscores. For axis-dependent
variables (such as coordinates) or variables having a lot of data of similar types (such as tool
compensation), subscript [n] (n: integer) can be used to specify values. In this case, n can be specified in
<expression> format (calculation format).
The command format must be specified in [#system-variable-name] format, as shown below.
[#_DATE]
[Example]
[#_DATE]=20040117 ; : 2004.01.17 is assigned to #3011 (year month date).
[#_TIME]=161705 ; : 16:17:05 is assigned to #3012 (time minute second).
#101=[#_ABSMT[1]] ; : #5021 (machine coordinate value of the 1st axis) is read off
and assigned to #101.
- 247 -
#102=[#_ABSKP[#500*2]] ; : #506x (skip position of [#500*2]th axis) is read off and

assigned to #102.
If a value other than an integer is specified for subscript n, a variable value is referenced, assuming that
the fractional portion is rounded off.
[Example]
[#_ABSIO[1.4999999]] : This value is assumed to be [#_ABSIO[1]], that is, #5001.
[#_ABSIO[1.5000000]] : This value is assumed to be [#_ABSIO[2]], that is, #5002.
NOTE
1 When the specified variable name is not registered, an alarm PS1098, “NO
VARIABLE NAME” is issued.
2 When a negative or other invalid subscript is specified, an alarm PS1099,
“ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ]” is issued.
- System constant #0, #3100-#3102 (Attribute: R)

Constants used as fixed values in the system can be used as system variables. Such constants are called
system constants. The system constants provided are shown below.
Constant number Constant name Description
#0, #3100 [#_EMPTY] Null
#3101 [#_PI] Circular constant π = 3.14159265358979323846
#3102 [#_E] Base of natural logarithm e = 2.71828182845904523536
- Specifying a common variable by its name

Specifying a variable name set by the SETVN command described later allows reading from or writing to
a common variable.
The command must be specified in the form [#common-variable-name] such as [#VAR500].
[Example]
X[#POS1] Y[#POS2] ; : Specifying a position by the variable name
[#POS1] = #100+#101 ; : Executing a assignment statement by the variable name
#[100+[#ABS]] = 500 ; : Same as above (by a variable number)
#500 = [1000+[#POS2]*10] ; : Reading a variable by a variable name
- Setting and specifying the name of a common variable (SETVN)

For the 50 common variables, #500 to #549, a name of up to eight characters can be specified by using a
command as shown below. If the custom macro variable name expansion function is enabled, a name of
up to 31 characters can be specified.
SETVN n [VAR500, VAR501, VAR502,......] ;
n represents the starting number of a common variable for which the name is specified.
VAR500 is the variable name of variable n, VAR501 is the variable name of variable n+1, and VAR502
is the variable name of variable number n+2, and so on. Each string is delimited by a comma (,). All
codes that can be used as meaningful information in a program except control in, control out, [, ], EOB,
EOR, and : (colon in a program number) can be used. However, each name must begin with an
alphabetical character. Variable names are not cleared on switch-off.
Specifying a set variable name allows reading from or writing to the common variable. The command
must be specified in the form [#common-variable-name] such as [#VAR500].
[Example] SETVN 510[ TOOL_NO, WORK_NO, COUNTER1, COUNTER2 ];
The command above names the variables as follows.
Variable Name
#510 TOOL_NO
#511 WORK_NO
#512 COUNTER1
#513 COUNTER2
- 248 -
The names specified by the command can be used in a program. For example, when 10 is assigned to
#510, the expression [#TOOL_NO]=10; can be used instead #510=10;.
If the custom macro variable name expansion function is enabled,
the SETVN 510[TOOL_NUMBER000001_CHANGE_DETECT]; command assigns a name of 31
characters to the variable.
Variable Name
#510 TOOL_NUMBER000001_CHANGE_DETECT
NOTE
If the same name was specified for different common variables, only the variable
which has the smaller variable number can be referenced with the specified
name.
16.2 SYSTEM VARIABLES

System variables can be used to read and write internal CNC data such as tool compensation values and
current position data. System variables are essential for automation and general-purpose program
development.
List of system variables and constants

n represents a subscript.
R, W, and R/W are attributes of a variable and indicate read-only, write-only, and read/write enabled,
respectively.
- Interface signals
System System
variable variable Attribute Description
number name
#1000-#1031 [#_UI[n]] R Interface input signals (BIT), UI000-UI031
NOTE) Subscript n represents a BIT position (0-31).
#1032-#1035 [#_UIL[n]] R Interface input signals (LONG), UI000-UI031/ UI100-UI131/
UI200-UI231/UI300-UI331
NOTE) Subscript n (0-3): 0 = UI000-UI031, 1 = UI100-UI131,
2 = UI200-231, 3 = UI300-UI331
#1036-#1067 [#_UI[n]] R Interface input signals (BIT), UI400-UI431
#1068-#1071 [#_UIL[n]] R Interface input signals (LONG), UI400-UI431 / UI500-UI531 /
UI600-UI631 / UI700-UI731
NOTE) Subscript n (4-7): 4=UI400-UI431, 5=UI500-UI531,
6=UI600-UI631, 7=UI700-UI731
#1100-#1131 [#_UO[n]] R/W Interface output signals (BIT), UO000-UO031
#1132-#1135 [#_UOL[n]] R/W Interface output signals (LONG), UO000-UO031/
UO100-UO131/UO200-UO231/UO300-UO331
NOTE) Subscript n (0-3): 0 = UO000-UO031, 1 = UO100-UO131,
2 = UO200-231, 3 = UO300-UO331
#1136-#1167 [#_UO[n]] R/W Interface output signals (BIT), UO400-UO431
#1168-#1171 [#_UOL[n]] R/W Interface output signals (LONG), UO400-UO431/ UO500-UO531 /
UO600-UO631 / UO700-UO731
NOTE) Subscript n (4-7): 4=UO400-UO431, 5=UO500-UO531,
6=UO600-UO631, 7=UO700-UO731
- 249 -
- Tool compensation value

System variable System
number variable name
#2001-#2200 [#_OFS[n]] R/W Tool compensation value
Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 200).
#10001-#10400 When the number of sets is larger than 200, the numbers to the
left can also be used.
Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 400).
- Automatic operation or the like

number name
#3000 [#_ALM] W Macro alarm
#3001 [#_CLOCK1] R/W Clock 1 (ms)
#3002 [#_CLOCK2] R/W Clock 2 (hr)
#3003 [#_CNTL1] R/W Enable or disable the suppression of single block stop.
Enable or disable the waiting of the auxiliary function
completion signal.
#3003 bit 0 [#_M_SBK] R/W Enable or disable the suppression of single block stop.
#3003 bit 1 [#_M_FIN] R/W Enable or disable waiting for the auxiliary function completion
signal.
#3004 [#_CNTL2] R/W Enable or disable feed hold.
Enable or disable feedrate override.
Enable or disable exact stop check.
#3004 bit 0 [#_M_FHD] R/W Enable or disable feed hold.
#3004 bit 1 [#_M_OV] R/W Enable or disable feedrate override.
#3004 bit 2 [#_M_EST] R/W Enable or disable exact stop check.
#3005 [#_SETDT] R/W Read/write setting data.
#3006 [#_MSGSTP] W Stop with a message.
#3007 [#_MRIMG] R Status of a mirror image (DI and setting)
- Time
number name
#3011 [#_DATE] R Year/Month/Date
#3012 [#_TIME] R Hour/Minute/Second
- Path number of the parameter to be read or written

number name
#3018 － R/W Path number of the parameter to be read or written
- Number of the path on which a macro is being executed

number name
#3019 [#_PATH_NO] R Number of the path on which a macro is being executed
- Number of parts
number name
#3901 [#_PRTSA] R/W Total number of parts
#3902 [#_PRTSN] R/W Number of required parts
- 250 -
- Tool compensation memory

number name
#3980 [#_OFSMEM] R Tool compensation memory information
- Main program number

number name
#4000 [#_MAINO] R Main program number
- Modal information
number name
#4001-#4030 [#_BUFG[n]] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (G code)
Note) Subscript n represents a G code group number.
#4102 [#_BUFB] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (B code)
#4107 [#_BUFD] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (D code)
#4108 [#_BUFE] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (E code)
#4109 [#_BUFF] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (F code)
#4111 [#_BUFH] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (H code)
#4113 [#_BUFM] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (M code)
#4114 [#_BUFN] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (sequence number)
#4115 [#_BUFO] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (program number)
#4119 [#_BUFS] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (S code)
#4120 [#_BUFT] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (T code)
#4130 [#_BUFWZP] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (additional workpiece coordinate system number)
#4201-#4230 [#_ACTG[n]] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (G
code)
#4302 [#_ACTB] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (B
code)
#4307 [#_ACTD] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (D
code)
#4308 [#_ACTE] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (E
code)
#4309 [#_ACTF] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (F
code)
#4311 [#_ACTH] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (H
code)
#4313 [#_ACTM] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (M
code)
#4314 [#_ACTN] R Modal information on the block currently being executed
(sequence number)
- 251 -

number name
#4315 [#_ACTO] R Modal information on the block currently being executed
(program number)
#4319 [#_ACTS] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (S
code)
#4320 [#_ACTT] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (T
code)
#4330 [#_ACTWZP] R Modal information on the block currently being executed
(additional workpiece coordinate system number)
#4401-#4430 [#_INTG[n]] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (G code)
#4502 [#_INTB] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (B code)
#4507 [#_INTD] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (D code)
#4508 [#_INTE] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (E code)
#4509 [#_INTF] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (F code)
#4511 [#_INTH] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (H code)
#4513 [#_INTM] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (M code)
#4514 [#_INTN] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (sequence number)
#4515 [#_INTO] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (program number)
#4519 [#_INTS] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (S code)
#4520 [#_INTT] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (T code)
#4530 [#_INTWZP] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (additional workpiece
coordinate system number)
- Position information
number name
#5001-#5020 [#_ABSIO[n]] R End point position of the previous block (workpiece
coordinate system)
Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 20)
#100001-#100050 The numbers to the left can also be used.
#5021-#5040 [#_ABSMT[n]] R Specified current position (machine coordinate system)
#5041-#5060 [#_ABSOT[n]] R Specified current position (workpiece coordinate system)
#5061-#5080 [#_ABSKP[n]] R Skip position (workpiece coordinate system)
- Servo position deviation

number name
#5101-#5120 [#_SVERR[n]] R Servo positional deviation
- 252 -
- Manual handle interruption

number name
#5121-#5140 [#_MIRTP[n]] R Manual handle interruption
- Distance to go
number name
#5181-#5200 [#_DIST[n]] R Distance to go
- Workpiece origin offset value

number name
#5201-#5220 [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W External workpiece origin offset value
#5221-#5240 [#_WZG54[n]] R/W G54 workpiece origin offset value
#100301-#100350 [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W External workpiece origin offset value
- 253 -
- Skip position (detection unit)

number name
#5421-#5440 [#_SKPDTC[n]] R Skip position (detection unit)
- Program auto restart function

System variable Attribu
System variable name Description
number te
#6060 [#_MPREXC] R State of program auto restart
0 : Normal operation
1 : Program auto restart
#6061 [#_PRBCSTP] R/W Block of simulated execution during program auto restart
0: Block simulated execution during program auto
restart
Except 0 : Block of non-simulated execution during
program auto restart
（Valid data range : 0 to ±99999999）
- Pattern function
number te
#6251-#6258 [#_MPTREFP[n]] R Coordinate of pattern base point
(NOTE) Subscript n is number of axis (1 to 8)
#154001-#154050 Following number is enabled.
- Multi-piece machining function

number te
#6261-#6268 [#_MHSREFP[n]] R Coordinate of multi-piece machining
（NOTE）Subscript n is number of axis (1 to 50)
- Automatic repositioning
number te
#6270 [#_MATREP] R Repositioning value
- Local coordinate system

number te
#6271-#6278 [#_MLOCPOS[n]] R Origin of the local coordinate system
（NOTE）Subscript n is number of axis (1 to 50)
- 254 -
- Feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap

number name
#100851- #100900 [#_ROVLP [n]] R/W Feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap
- Local coordinate system offset value

System variable System
number variable name
#118501-#118550 [#_LCLOFS[n]] R Local coordinate system offset value
- Others
System constant System
number constant name
#8570 - R/W Switching of P-CODE variables/system variables (#10000
and above)
- System constant
System constant System
number constant name
#0, #3100 [#_EMPTY] R Null
#3101 [#_PI] R Circular constant π = 3.14159265358979323846
#3102 [#_E] R Base of natural logarithm e = 2.71828182845904523536
Explanation
R, W, and R/W are attributes of a variable and represents read-only, write-only, and read/write enabled,
respectively.
- Interface signal #1000-#1031, #1032, #1033-#1035 (Attribute: R)

#1100-#1131, #1132, #1133-#1135 (Attribute: R/W)
[Input signal]
The status of interface input signals can be obtained by reading the value of system variables #1000 to
#1032.
Variable number Variable name Point Interface input signal

#1000 [#_UI[0]] 1 UI000 (20)
#1001 [#_UI[1]] 1 UI001 (21)
#1002 [#_UI[2]] 1 UI002 (22)
#1003 [#_UI[3]] 1 UI003 (23)
#1004 [#_UI[4]] 1 UI004 (24)
#1005 [#_UI[5]] 1 UI005 (25)
#1006 [#_UI[6]] 1 UI006 (26)
#1007 [#_UI[7]] 1 UI007 (27)
#1008 [#_UI[8]] 1 UI008 (28)
#1009 [#_UI[9]] 1 UI009 (29)
#1010 [#_UI[10]] 1 UI010 (210)
#1011 [#_UI[11]] 1 UI011 (211)
#1012 [#_UI[12]] 1 UI012 (212)
#1013 [#_UI[13]] 1 UI013 (213)
#1014 [#_UI[14]] 1 UI014 (214)
#1015 [#_UI[15]] 1 UI015 (215)
#1016 [#_UI[16]] 1 UI016 (216)
- 255 -

#1017 [#_UI[17]] 1 UI017 (217)
#1018 [#_UI[18]] 1 UI018 (218)
#1019 [#_UI[19]] 1 UI019 (219)
#1020 [#_UI[20]] 1 UI020 (220)
#1021 [#_UI[21]] 1 UI021 (221)
#1022 [#_UI[22]] 1 UI022 (222)
#1023 [#_UI[23]] 1 UI023 (223)
#1024 [#_UI[24]] 1 UI024 (224)
#1025 [#_UI[25]] 1 UI025 (225)
#1026 [#_UI[26]] 1 UI026 (226)
#1027 [#_UI[27]] 1 UI027 (227)
#1028 [#_UI[28]] 1 UI028 (228)
#1029 [#_UI[29]] 1 UI029 (229)
#1030 [#_UI[30]] 1 UI030 (230)
#1031 [#_UI[31]] 1 UI031 (231)
#1032 [#_UIL[0]] 32 UI000-UI031
#1033 [#_UIL[1]] 32 UI100-UI131
#1034 [#_UIL[2]] 32 UI200-UI231
#1035 [#_UIL[3]] 32 UI300-UI331
Variable value Input signal

1.0 Contact closed
0.0 Contact opened
Since the read value is 1.0 or 0.0 regardless of the unit system, the unit system must be considered when a
macro is created.
The input signals at 32 points can be read at a time by reading from system variables #1032 to #1035.
30
#1032 = ∑ # [1000 + i] × 2 −#1031× 2
i =0
i 31
∑ {2 ×V }− 2
30
# [1032 + n] = i
i
31
× V31
i =0
When UIni = 0, Vi = 0.
n = 0-3
[Output signal]
Interface output signals can be sent by assigning values to system variables #1100 to #1132 for sending
interface signals.

#1100 [#_UO[0]] 1 UO000 (20)
#1101 [#_UO[1]] 1 UO001 (21)
#1102 [#_UO[2]] 1 UO002 (22)
#1103 [#_UO[3]] 1 UO003 (23)
#1104 [#_UO[4]] 1 UO004 (24)
#1105 [#_UO[5]] 1 UO005 (25)
#1106 [#_UO[6]] 1 UO006 (26)
#1107 [#_UO[7]] 1 UO007 (27)
#1108 [#_UO[8]] 1 UO008 (28)
#1109 [#_UO[9]] 1 UO009 (29)
#1110 [#_UO[10]] 1 UO010 (210)
#1111 [#_UO[11]] 1 UO011 (211)
- 256 -

#1112 [#_UO[12]] 1 UO012 (212)
#1113 [#_UO[13]] 1 UO013 (213)
#1114 [#_UO[14]] 1 UO014 (214)
#1115 [#_UO[15]] 1 UO015 (215)
#1116 [#_UO[16]] 1 UO016 (216)
#1117 [#_UO[17]] 1 UO017 (217)
#1118 [#_UO[18]] 1 UO018 (218)
#1119 [#_UO[19]] 1 UO019 (219)
#1120 [#_UO[20]] 1 UO020 (220)
#1121 [#_UO[21]] 1 UO021 (221)
#1122 [#_UO[22]] 1 UO022 (222)
#1123 [#_UO[23]] 1 UO023 (223)
#1124 [#_UO[24]] 1 UO024 (224)
#1125 [#_UO[25]] 1 UO025 (225)
#1126 [#_UO[26]] 1 UO026 (226)
#1127 [#_UO[27]] 1 UO027 (227)
#1128 [#_UO[28]] 1 UO028 (228)
#1129 [#_UO[29]] 1 UO029 (229)
#1130 [#_UO[30]] 1 UO030 (230)
#1131 [#_UO[31]] 1 UO031 (231)
#1132 [#_UOL[0]] 32 UO000-UO031
#1133 [#_UOL[1]] 32 UO100-UO131
#1134 [#_UOL[2]] 32 UO200-UO231
#1135 [#_UOL[3]] 32 UO300-UO331

1.0 Contact closed
0.0 Contact opened
The output signals at 32 points can be written at a time by writing to system variables #1132 to #1135.
The signals can also be read.
30
#1132 = ∑ # [1000 + i] × 2 −#1131× 2
i =0
i 31
∑ {2 ×V }− 2
30
# [1132 + n] = i
i
31
× V31
i =0
n = 0-3
NOTE
1 When a value other than 1.0 or 0.0 is assigned to variables #1100 to #1131, it is
assumed as follows.
<null> is assumed to be 0.
A value other than <null> or 0 is assumed to be 1.
Where, a value less than 0.00000001 is undefined.
2 When any of UI016 to UI031, UI100 to UI131, UI200 to UI231, UI300 to UI331,
UO016 to UO031, UO200 to UO231, and UO300 to UO331 are used, bit 0 (MIF)
of parameter No. 6001 must be set to 1.
- 257 -
Example
Structure of DI
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 1 0
Used for other Sign 10 10 10
purposes
Structure of DO
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Not used Used for other purposes Address
<1> The specified address D value is output to DO and signed BCD 3 digits are read into #100.
Macro calling instruction

G65 P9100 D (address);
A custom macro body is created as follows.

O9100 ;
#1132 = #1132 AND 496 OR#7 ; : Address output
G65 P9101 T60 ; : Timer macro. For details, refer to the example of clock (#3001).
#100 = BIN[#1032 AND 4095] ; : BCD 3 digits are read.
IF [#1012 EQ 0] GOTO 9100 ; : A sign is attached.
#100 = -#100
N9100 M99
<2> Eight types of specified address D values are output to DO and signed BCD 6 digits (3-digit integer
part + 3-digit fractional part) are read into #101.
Structure on the machine side

When DO 20 = 0: Data with 3 decimal places
When DO 20 = 1: Data with 3-digit integer part
When DO 23 to 21 = 000: No1 data when #1 = 0
:
Macro calling instruction

G65 P9111 D (data number);

O9111 ;
G65 P9100 D[#7*2+1] ; : Call the macro of <1> O9100
#101 = #100 ;
G65 P9100 D[#7*2] ;
#101 = #101 + #100/1000 ;
M99 ;
- 258 -
- Interface signal R address

#1036 to #1067, #1068, #1069 to #1071 (Attribute: R)
#1136 to #1167, #1168, #1169 to #1171 (Attribute: R/W)
By setting bit 2 (IFR) of parameter No. 6020 to 1, this function is enabled. Set the start address of each R
area in parameter No. 6093 or 6094. From the start address, 128 signal inputs or outputs are assigned. Set
a multiple of 4 (0, 4, 8, ...) in parameters Nos. 6093 and 6094.
[Input signal]
The status of the input signal at each R address can be read with the value of system variable #1036 to
#1071.
#1036 [#_UI[32]] 1 UI400 (20)
#1037 [#_UI[33]] 1 UI401 (21)
to to to to
#1067 [#_UI[63]] 1 UI431 (231)
#1068 [#_UIL[4]] 32 UI400 to UI431
#1069 [#_UIL[5]] 32 UI500 to UI531
#1070 [#_UIL[6]] 32 UI600 to UI631
#1071 [#_UIL[7]] 32 UI700 to UI731

1.0 Contact closed
0.0 Contact opened
[Output signal]
A value can be written to the output signal at each R address and the status of the signal can be read with
the value of system variable #1136 to #1171.
#1136 [#_UO[32]] 1 UO400 (20)
#1137 [#_UO[33]] 1 UO401 (21)
to to to to
#1167 [#_UO[63]] 1 UO431 (231)
#1168 [#_UOL[4]] 32 UO400 to UO431
#1169 [#_UOL[5]] 32 UO500 to UO531
#1170 [#_UOL[6]] 32 UO600 to UO631
#1171 [#_UOL[7]] 32 UO700 to UO731

1.0 Contact closed
0.0 Contact opened
NOTE
1 When signals UO400 to UO431 are handled from system variables #1136 to
#1171, do not write any of signals UO400 to UO431 from a ladder or another
interface. Specifying a write may cause a conflict between read from and write to
the signal, resulting in an unexpected change to the signal.
2 For signals UO400 to UO731, R addresses are used, while for signals UO000 to
UO331, F addresses are used. Therefore, to handle these signals with a ladder,
it is necessary to consider synchronization processing of I/O signals. For details,
refer to Subsection, “Synchronization Processing of I/O Signals”, in the “PMC
Programming Manual (B-64513EN)”.
- 259 -
- Tool compensation value #2001-#2200, #10001-#10400 (Attribute: R/W)

The compensation values can be obtained by reading system variables #2001 to #2200 or #10001 to
#10400 for tool compensation. The compensation values can also be changed by assigning values to the
system variables.
• When the number of compensations is 200 or less

Compensation number Variable number Variable name
1 #2001 [#_OFS[1]]
2 #2002 [#_OFS[2]]
3 #2003 [#_OFS[3]]
: : :
199 #2199 [#_OFS[199]]
200 #2200 [#_OFS[200]]
• When the number of compensations is more than 200 (For compensation with a compensation
number of 200 or less, #2001 to #2200 can also be used.)
Compensation number Variable number Variable name
1 #10001 [#_OFS[1]]
2 #10002 [#_OFS[2]]
3 #10003 [#_OFS[3]]
: : :
399 #10399 [#_OFS[399]]
400 #10400 [#_OFS[400]]
- Alarm #3000 (Attribute: W)

When an error is detected in a macro, an unit can enter the alarm state. In addition, an alarm message of
up to 60 characters with alphabet and numerals can be specified between a control-out and a control-in
after the expression. When an alarm message is not specified, a macro alarm is used instead.
Variable number Variable name Description

#3000 [#_ALM] Macro alarm
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No.6008 = 0

#3000 = n (ALARM MESSAGE); (n: 0-200)
On the screen, the alarm number obtained by adding the value of #3000 to 3000 and alarm message
appear after MC.
(Example) #3000 = 1 (ALARM MESSAGE);
→ "MC3001 ALARM MESSAGE" appears on the alarm screen.
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No.6008 = 1
#3000 = n (ALARM MESSAGE); (n: 0-4095)
On the screen, the alarm number of #3000 and alarm message appear after MC.
(Example) #3000=1 (ALARM MESSAGE);
→ "MC0001 ALARM MESSAGE" appears on the alarm screen.
When #3000 is commanded with the comment section, the order of alarm message and the comment
section change places by setting value of bit 3 (NCM) of parameter No.6020.
When bit 3 (NCM) of parameter No.6020 is set to 0
The first section is an alarm message and followings are comments.
(Example) #3000 =1 (ALARM MESSAGE) (COMMENT 1) (COMMENT 2);
When bit 3 (NCM) of parameter No.6020) is set to 1
The last section is an alarm message and others are comments.
(Example) #3000 =1 (COMMENT 1) (COMMENT 2) (ALARM MESSAGE);
- 260 -
- Clock #3001, #3002 (Attribute: R/W)

The clock time can be obtained by reading system variables #3001 and #3002 for clocks. The time can be
preset by entering a value in the system variables.
Variable
Type Variable name Unit At power-on Count condition
number
Clock 1 #3001 [#_CLOCK1] 1 ms Reset to 0 Anytime
Clock 2 #3002 [#_CLOCK2] 1 hour Same as at power-down When the STL signal is on
The clock accuracy is 16 ms. Clock 1 returns to 0 after a lapse of 2147483648 ms. Clock 2 returns to 0
after a lapse of 9544.37176 hours.
[Example]
Timer
Macro calling command
G65 P9101 T (wait time) ms ;
A macro is created as follows.
O9101;
#3001 = 0; Initial setting
WHILE [#3001 LE #20] DO1: Wait for a specified time
END1 ;
M99 ;
- Controlling of single block stop and waiting for the auxiliary function
completion signal #3003 (Attribute: R/W)
Assigning the following values in system variable #3003 allows the specification of whether single block
stop is disabled in the following blocks or whether a wait for the completion signal (FIN) of the auxiliary
function (M, S, T, or B) before going to the next block is enabled. When a wait for completion signal is
disabled, the distribution end signal (DEN) is not sent. Be careful not to specify the next auxiliary
function without waiting for the completion signal.
Variable number and variable name Value Single block stop Auxiliary function completion signal
0 Enabled Waiting
#3003 1 Disabled Waiting
[#_CNTL1] 2 Enabled Not waiting
3 Disabled Not waiting
In addition, the following variable names can be used to enable or disable single block stop and a wait for
the auxiliary function completion signal, individually.
Variable name Value Single block stop Auxiliary function completion
0 Enabled -
[#_M_SBK]
1 Disabled -
0 - Waiting
[#_M_FIN]
1 - Not waiting
[Example]
Drill cycle (for incremental programming)
(G81 equivalent)
Macro calling command
G65 P9081 L Iterations R R point Z Z point;
- 261 -
O9081 ;
#3003 = 1 ;
G00 Z#18 ;
Disable single block stop.
G01 Z#26 ;
#18 corresponds to R and #26 to Z.
G00 Z-[ ROUND[#18] + ROUND[#26] ] ;
#3003 = 0 ;
M99 ;
NOTE
#3003 is cleared by a reset.
- Enabling of feed hold, feedrate override, and exact stop check #3004
(Attribute: R/W)
Assigning the following values in system variable #3004 allows the specification of whether feed hold
and feedrate override are enabled in the following blocks or whether exact stop in G61 mode or by G09
command is disabled.
Variable number and variable name Value Field hold Feedrate override Exact stop
0 Enabled Enabled Enabled
1 Disabled Enabled Enabled
2 Enabled Disabled Enabled
#3004 3 Disabled Disabled Enabled
[#_CNTL2] 4 Enabled Enabled Disabled
5 Disabled Enabled Disabled
6 Enabled Disabled Disabled
7 Disabled Disabled Disabled
In addition, the following variable names can be used to enable or disable feed hold, feedrate override,
and exact stop in G61 mode or by the G09 command, individually.
Variable number and variable name Value Feed hold Feedrate override Exact stop
0 Enabled - -
[#_M_FHD]
1 Disabled - -
0 - Enabled -
[#_M_OV]
1 - Disabled -
0 - - Enabled
[#_M_EST]
1 - - Disabled
NOTE
1 These system variables are provided to maintain compatibility with conventional
NC programs. It is recommended that functions provided by G63, G09, G61, and
other G codes be used to enable or disable feed hold, feedrate override, and
exact stop.
2 When the feed hold button is pressed during execution of a block for which feed
hold is disabled:
<1> If the feed hold button is kept pressed, operation stops after execution of
the block. When single block stop is disabled, however, operation does not
stop.
<2> If the pressed feed hold button is released, the feed hold lamp lights, but
operation does not stop until the end of the first block that was enabled.
3 #3004 is cleared by a reset.
4 If exact stop is disabled by #3004, the original exact stop position between
cutting feed and positioning block is not affected. #3004 can temporarily disable
exact stop in G61 mode or by the G09 command between cutting feed and
cutting feed.
- 262 -
- Settings #3005 (Attribute: R/W)

Settings can be read and written.
Binary values are converted to decimals.
#3005
#15 #14 #13 #12 #11 #10 #9 #8

Setting FCV
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Setting SEQ INI ISO TVC
#9 (FCV) : Whether to use the FANUC Series 15 program format conversion capability
#5 (SEQ) : Whether to automatically insert sequence numbers
#2 (INI) : Millimeter input or inch input
#1 (ISO) : Whether to use EIA or ISO as the output code
#0 (TVC) : Whether to make a TV check
- Stop with a message #3006 (Attribute: W)

When "#3006=1 (MESSAGE);" is commanded in the macro, the program executes blocks up to the
immediately previous one and then stops. When a message of up to 60 characters with alphabet and
numerals, which is enclosed by a control-in character and control-out character, is programmed in the
same block, the message is displayed on the external operator message screen.
#3006 [#_MSGSTP] Stop with a message
When #3006 is commanded with the comment section, the order of message and the comment section
changes places by setting value of bit 3 (NCM) of parameter No.6020.
It is assumed that it message first, and assumes since the second to be comment section.
(Example) #3000 =1 (MACRO MESSAGE) (COMMENT 1) (COMMENT 2);
The end is assumed to be message, and it assumes to be comment section from it ahead.
(Example) #3000 =1 (COMMENT 1) (COMMENT 2) (MACRO MESSAGE);
NOTE
If the single block stop is disabled by #3003=1 command, the program does not
stop even if #3006=1 is commanded. However, the message commanded by
#3006=1 is displayed on the external operator message screen.
- Status of a mirror image #3007 (Attribute: R)

The status of an mirror image (setting or DI) at that point in time can be obtained for each axis by reading
#3007.
#3007 [#_MRIMG] Status of a mirror image
When the status is indicated in binary, each bit corresponds with an axis as follows.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
nth axis 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nth axis 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For the 32 bits, 0 indicates that a mirror image is disabled and 1 indicates that a mirror image is enabled.
- 263 -
[Example] When #3007 is 3, a mirror image is enabled for the 1st and 2nd axes.
NOTE
1 The status of a programmable mirror image is not reflected on this variable.
2 When the mirror image function is set for the same axis by the mirror image
signal and setting, the signal value and setting value are ORed and then output.
3 When mirror image signals for axes other than the controlled axes are turned on,
they are not read into system variable #3007.
- Time #3011, #3012 (Attribute: R)

Year/month/date and hour/minute/second can be obtained by reading system variables #3011 and #3012.
This variable is read-only. To change year/month/date and hour/minute/second, use the timer screen.
[Example] May 20, 2004, PM 04:17:05

#3011 = 20040520
#3012 = 161705
- Path number of the parameter to be read or written #3018 (Attribute: R/W)

If a parameter for another path is to be read or written using parameter reading with the operation
command PRM or using parameter writing with programmable parameter input (G10L52), this system
variable is used to specify that path.
Relationships between specified values and path numbers are as follows:
#3018 Selected path
0 Local path
1 Path 1
2 Path 2
: :
4 Path 4

#3018 － Path number of the parameter to be read or written
- Number of the path on which a macro is being executed #3019 (Attribute: R)

This system variable can be used to read the number of the path on which a macro is being executed.
By using this variable, it is possible to execute a single program differently for different paths.
The path number can be read as follows:
Path #3019
Path 1 1
Path 2 2
Path 3 3
: :
Path 4 4

#3019 [#_PATH_NO] Path number
- Total number of parts and the number of required parts #3901 and #3902
(Attribute: R/W)
The number of required parts and the number of machined parts can be displayed on the screen by using
the operation time and part number displaying function. When the (total) number of machined parts
reaches the number of required parts, a signal indicating the fact is sent to the machine (PMC side).
The system variables can be used to read or write the total number of parts and the number of required
parts.
- 264 -

#3901 [#_PRTSA] Total number of parts
#3902 [#_PRTSN] Number of required parts
- Type of tool compensation memory #3980 (Attribute: R)

System variable #3980 can be used to read the type of compensation memory.
#3980 [#_OFSMEM] Types of tool compensation memory
0: Tool compensation memory A
NOTE
There are three types of tool compensation memory, the tool compensation
memory A, B, and C. However, only tool compensation memory A can be used
by Series 30i/31i-PB.
- Main program number #4000 (Attribute: R)

System variable #4000 can be used to read the main program number regardless of the level of a
subprogram.
#4000 [#_MAINO] Main program number
NOTE
1 The main program number indicates the number of the program that is first
started.
2 When an O number is specified by MDI during execution of the main program or
when the second O number is specified in DNC mode, the value of #4000
changes to the specified O number. In addition, when no programs are
registered or when no O numbers are specified in DNC mode, the value of
#4000 changes to 0.
- Modal information #4001-#4130, #4201-#4330, #4401-#4530 (Attribute: R)

The modal information specified before the previous block of the macro statement that reads system
variables #4001 to #4130 can be obtained in the block currently being looked ahead, by reading system
variables #4001 to #4130.
The modal information of the block currently being executed can be obtained by reading system variables
#4201 to #4330.
The modal information specified before the block interrupted by an interruption type custom macro by
reading system variables #4401 to #4530.
The unit used when it was specified is applied.
(Category: <1> Previous block, <2> Running block, <3> Interrupted block)
Category Variable number Variable name Description
<1> #4001 [#_BUFG[1]]
<2> #4201 [#_ACTG[1]] Modal information (G code: group 1)
<3> #4401 [#_INTG[1]]
<1> #4002 [#_BUFG[2]]
<3> #4402 [#_INTG[2]]
: : : :
<1> #4030 [#_BUFG[30]]
<3> #4430 [#_INTG[30]]
- 265 -
Category Variable number Variable name Description

<1> #4102 [#_BUFB]
<2> #4302 [#_ACTB] Modal information (B code)
<3> #4502 [#_INTB]
<1> #4107 [#_BUFD]
<2> #4307 [#_ACTD] Modal information (D code)
<3> #4507 [#_INTD]
<1> #4108 [#_BUFE]
<2> #4308 [#_ACTE] Modal information (E code)
<3> #4508 [#_INTE]
<1> #4109 [#_BUFF]
<2> #4309 [#_ACTF] Modal information (F code)
<3> #4509 [#_INTF]
<1> #4111 [#_BUFH]
<2> #4311 [#_ACTH] Modal information (H code)
<3> #4511 [#_INTH]
<1> #4113 [#_BUFM]
<2> #4313 [#_ACTM] Modal information (M code)
<3> #4513 [#_INTM]
<1> #4114 [#_BUFN]
<2> #4314 [#_ACTN] Modal information (sequence number N)
<3> #4514 [#_INTN]
<1> #4115 [#_BUFO]
<2> #4315 [#_ACTO] Modal information (sequence number O)
<3> #4515 [#_INTO]
<1> #4119 [#_BUFS]
<2> #4319 [#_ACTS] Modal information (S code)
<3> #4519 [#_INTS]
<1> #4120 [#_BUFT]
<2> #4320 [#_ACTT] Modal information (T code)
<3> #4520 [#_INTT]
<1> #4130 [#_BUFWZP]
Modal information (additional workpiece coordinate
<2> #4330 [#_ACTWZP]
system number P)
<3> #4530 [#_INTWZP]
NOTE
1 Previous block and running block
Since the CNC reads the block that is ahead of the block currently being
executed by the machining program, the block being retrieved by the CNC is
normally different from that currently being executed. The previous block
indicates the block that is ahead of the block being retrieved by the CNC, that is,
the block that is ahead of the program block in which #4001 to #4130 are
specified.
2 When variables exceeding the number of control axes are specified, the alarm
PS0115, “VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE” occurs.
[Example] O1234 ;
N10 G00 X200. Y200. ;
N20 G01 X1000. Y1000. F10. ;
:
:
N50 G00 X500. Y500. ;
N60 #1 = #4001 ;
- 266 -
Assume that the CNC is currently executing N20. If the CNC retrieved and processed the blocks up to
N60 as shown above, the running block is N20 and the previous block is N50. Therefore, group 1 modal
information in the running block is G01 and group 1 modal information in the previous block is G00.
When N60 #1 = #4201, #1 = 1.
When N60 #1 = #4001, #1 = 0.
- Position information #5001-#5080, #100001-#100200 (Attribute: R)

The end position of the previous block, the specified current position (for the machine coordinate system
and workpiece coordinate system), and the skip signal position can be obtained by reading the values of
system variables #5001 to #5080 or #100001 to -#100200.
Reading
Tool position
Variable Coordinate operation
Variable name Position information cutter
number system during
compensation
movement
#5001 [#_ABSIO[1]] 1st axis block end point position
#5002 [#_ABSIO[2]] 2nd axis block end point position
: : :
Workpiece
#5020 [#_ABSIO[20]] 20th axis block end point position
coordinate Not included Enabled
#100001 [#_ABSIO[1]] 1st axis block end point position
system
#100002 [#_ABSIO[2]] 2nd axis block end point position
: : :
#100050 [#_ABSIO[50]] 50th axis block end point position
#5021 [#_ABSMT[1]] 1st axis current position
#5022 [#_ABSMT[2]] 2nd axis current position
: : :
Machine
#5040 [#_ABSMT[20]] 20th axis current position
coordinate Included Disabled
#100051 [#_ABSMT[1]] 1st axis current position
system
#100052 [#_ABSMT[2]] 2nd axis current position
: : :
#100100 [#_ABSMT[50]] 50th axis current position
#5041 [#_ABSOT[1]] 1st axis current position
#5042 [#_ABSOT[2]] 2nd axis current position
: : :
Workpiece
#5060 [#_ABSOT[20]] 20th axis current position
coordinate Included Disabled
#100101 [#_ABSOT[1]] 1st axis current position
system
#100102 [#_ABSOT[2]] 2nd axis current position
: : :
#100150 [#_ABSOT[50]] 50th axis current position
#5061 [#_ABSKP[1]] 1st axis skip position
#5062 [#_ABSKP[2]] 2nd axis skip position
: : :
Workpiece
#5080 [#_ABSKP[20]] 20th axis skip position
coordinate Included Enabled
#100151 [#_ABSKP[1]] 1st axis skip position
system
#100152 [#_ABSKP[2]] 2nd axis skip position
: : :
#100200 [#_ABSKP[50]] 50th axis skip position
- 267 -
NOTE
2 The position information for 20th or earlier axis can be used with #5001 to
#5080.
3 The block end point position (ABSIO) of the skip (G33) is the position where the
skip signal is turned on. If the skip signal is not turned on, the position is the end
position of the block.
4 "Read operation during movement is disabled" means that the accurate reading
of values during movement is not guaranteed.
- Servo position deviation #5101-#5120, #100251-#100300 (Attribute: R)

The servo position deviation for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5101 to #5120 or
#100251 to #100300.
Variable Read operation
Variable name Position information
number during movement
#5101 [#_SVERR[1]] 1st axis servo position deviation
#5102 [#_SVERR[2]] 2nd axis servo position deviation
: : :
#5120 [#_SVERR[20]] 20th axis servo position deviation
Disabled
#100251 [#_SVERR[1]] 1st axis servo position deviation
#100252 [#_SVERR[2]] 2nd axis servo position deviation
: : :
#100300 [#_SVERR[50]] 50th axis servo position deviation
NOTE
2 The servo position deviation for 20th or earlier axis can be used with #5101 to
#5120.
- Manual handle interruption #5121-#5140, #100651-#100700 (Attribute: R)
The manual handle interruption for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5121 to #5140
or #100651 to #100700.
#5121 [#_MIRTP[1]] 1st axis manual handle interruption
#5122 [#_MIRTP[2]] 2nd axis manual handle interruption
: : :
#5140 [#_MIRTP[20]] 20th axis manual handle interruption
Disabled
#100651 [#_MIRTP[1]] 1st axis manual handle interruption
#100652 [#_MIRTP[2]] 2nd axis manual handle interruption
: : :
#100700 [#_MIRTP[50]] 50th axis manual handle interruption
NOTE
2 The manual handle interruption for 20th or earlier axis can be used with #5121 to
#5140.
- 268 -
- Distance to go #5181-#5200, #100801-#100850 (Attribute: R)

The distance to go value for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5181 to #5200 or
#100801 to #100850.
#5181 [#_DIST[1]] 1st axis distance to go value
#5182 [#_DIST[2]] 2nd axis distance to go value
: : :
#5200 [#_DIST[20]] 20th axis distance to go value
Disabled
#100801 [#_DIST[1]] 1st axis distance to go value
#100802 [#_DIST[2]] 2nd axis distance to go value
: : :
#100850 [#_DIST[50]] 50th axis distance to go value
NOTE
2 The distance to go values for 20th or earlier axis can be used with #5181 to
#5200.
- Workpiece origin offset value #5201-#5340, #100301-#100650 (Attribute: R/W)

The workpiece origin offset value can be obtained by reading system variables #5201 to #5340 or
#100301 to #100650. The offset value can also be changed by assigning values to the system variables.
Variable Workpiece
Variable name Controlled axis
number coordinate system
#5201 [#_WZCMN[1]] 1st axis external workpiece origin offset value External workpiece
#5202 [#_WZCMN[2]] 2nd axis external workpiece origin offset value origin offset value
: : : (applied to all
#5220 [#_WZCMN[20]] 20th axis external workpiece origin offset value coordinate systems)
#5221 [#_WZG54[1]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset value
#5222 [#_WZG54[2]] 2nd axis workpiece origin offset value
G54
: : :
#5240 [#_WZG54[20]] 20th axis workpiece origin offset value
G55
: : :
G56
: : :
G57
: : :
G58
: : :
G59
: : :
- 269 -
Variable Workpiece
Variable name Controlled axis
number coordinate system
#100301 [#_WZCMN[1]] 1st axis external workpiece origin offset value External workpiece
#100302 [#_WZCMN[2]] 2nd axis external workpiece origin offset value origin offset value
: : : (applied to all
#100350 [#_WZCMN[50]] 50th axis external workpiece origin offset value coordinate systems)
G54
: : :
G55
: : :
#100451 [#_WZG56[1]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset
#100452 [#_WZG56[2]] 2nd axis workpiece origin offset
G56
: : :
#100500 [#_WZG56[50]] 50th axis workpiece origin offset
G57
: : :
G58
: : :
G59
: : :
The following variables can also be used:

Axis Function Variable number
1st axis External workpiece origin offset value #2500
G54 workpiece origin offset value #2501
2nd axis External workpiece origin offset value #2600
3rd axis External workpiece origin offset value #2700
- 270 -
Axis Function Variable number

4th axis External workpiece origin offset value #2800
NOTE
2 The workpiece origin offset value for 20th or earlier axis can be used with #5201
to #5340.
NOTE
To use variables #2500 to #2806, #5201 to #5340, and #100301 to #100650,
optional variables for the workpiece coordinate systems are necessary.
- Skip position (detection unit) #5421-#5440, #100701-#100750 (Attribute: R)

The skip position with the detection unit can be obtained by reading system variables #5421 to #5440 or
#100701 to #100750. The values of these variables are integers, and values in the workpiece coordinate
system.
#5421 [#_SKPDTC[1]] 1st axis skip position (detection unit)
#5422 [#_SKPDTC[2]] 2nd axis skip position (detection unit)
: : :
#5440 [#_SKPDTC[20]] 20th axis skip position (detection unit)
Disabled
#100701 [#_SKPDTC[1]] 1st axis skip position (detection unit)
#100702 [#_SKPDTC[2]] 2nd axis skip position (detection unit)
: : :
#100750 [#_SKPDTC[50]] 50th axis skip position (detection unit)
NOTE
2 The skip position (detection unit) for 20th or earlier axis can be used with #5421
to #5440.
3 To specify these variables, set bit 2 (DSK) of parameter No. 6210 to 1. (If an
attempt is made to specify them when DSK is 0, alarm PS0115 is issued.)
- Switching between P-CODE variables and system variables (#10000 or later)

#8570 (Attribute: R/W)
This system variable allows read/write operations of P-CODE variables (#10000 to #89999) for the macro
executor function. For details on P-CODE variables, refer to the Macro Executor Programming Manual
(B-63943EN-2).
System variable #8570 can be used to make variables #10000 or later correspond to either P-CODE
variables or system variables.
- 271 -
#8570 setting Specified variable Corresponding variable

#10000 P-CODE variables (#10000)
#8570 = 1 : :
#10000 System variables (#10000)
#8570 = 0 : :
Example
#8570 = 0 ;
#10001 = 123 ; → Writing to system variable #10001 (tool compensation)
#8570 = 1 ;
#10001 = 456 ; → Writing to P-CODE variable #10001 (tool compensation)
NOTE
1 Variable #8570 can be used only when the macro executor function is enabled.
2 System variables (#10000 or later) always correspond to system variables
specified by their variable names even when #8570 is 1.
3 When an attempt is made to access a variable that cannot be used with
P-CODE variables (#10000 or later), an alarm PS0115, “VARIABLE NO. OUT
OF RANGE” occurs.
- Operating state of program auto restart #6060 (Attribute : R)

Operating state of each program auto restart function can be obtained by reading system variables #6060.
Using #6060 allows to skip the block that need not be simulated execution at the program auto restart
operate, the subprogram, and the execution macro.

#6060 [#_MPREXC] Operating state of program auto restart
0 : Normal operation
1 : Program auto restart
- Control of program auto restart #6061 (Attribute : R)

Whether a block that is the simulated block of program auto restart operation can be distinguished by
reading system variables #6061.
When the operating block is skipped by using # 6060, #6060 is set to the values except 0 before the block
using #6060 and #6061 is set to 0 after the skipped block because the skipped block is specified not to be
the simulated block of program auto restart operation.

#6061 [#_PRBCSTP] Block of simulated execution during program auto restart
0: Block simulated execution during program auto restart
Except 0 : Block of non-simulated execution during program auto
restart
(Valid data range : 0 to ±99999999)
- 272 -
Example
O1000;
Subprogram :
G90G00X100.Y100.;
O9100;
M98P9100;
#6061=#6061+1;
G01X_Y_; IF[#6060NE0]GOTO999;
: :
: M100; These blocks are not
M30; (Processing by machine) Unnecessary simulated block at
: processing is program auto restart
N999; skipped at operation
#6061=#6061-1; restart
M99;
- Base point of pattern function #6251 to #6258, #154001 to #154050 (Attribute:

R)
The coordinate of base point of pattern function in executing block can be obtained by reading system
variables #6251 to #6258, and #154001 to #154050.
#6251 [#_MPTREFP[1]] Pattern base point on 1st axis
#6252 [#_MPTREFP[2]] Pattern base point on 2nd axis
: : :
#6258 [#_MPTREFP[8]] Pattern base point on 8th axis
#154001 [#_MPTREFP[1]] Pattern base point on 1st axis
#154002 [#_MPTREFP[2]] Pattern base point on 2nd axis
: : :
#154050 [#_MPTREFP[50]] Pattern base point on 50th axis
- Base point of multi-piece machining function #6261 to #6268, #154051 to

#154100 (Attribute: R)
#6261 [#_MHSREFP[1]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 1st axis
#6262 [#_MHSREFP[2]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 2nd axis
: : :
#6268 [#_MHSREFP[8]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 8th axis
#154051 [#_MHSREFP[1]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 1st axis
#154052 [#_MHSREFP[2]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 2nd axis
: : :
#154100 [#_MHSREFP[50]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 50th axis
- Repositioning value #6270 (Attribute: R)

Repositioning value of automatic repositioning function in executing block can be obtained by reading
system variables #6270.
#6270 [#_MPATREP] Repositioning value
- Origin of local coordinate system #6271 to #6278, #154101 to #154150

(Attribute: R)
The offset from origin of the workpiece coordinate system to origin of local coordinate system can be
obtained by reading system variables #6721 to #6278 and #15401 to #154150.
- 273 -

#6271 [#_MLOCPOS[1]] Origin of local coordinate system on 1st axis
#6272 [#_MLOCPOS[2]] Origin of local coordinate system on 2nd axis
: : :
#6278 [#_MLOCPOS[8]] Origin of local coordinate system on 8th axis
#154101 [#_MLOCPOS[1]] Origin of local coordinate system on 1st axis
#154102 [#_MLOCPOS[2]] Origin of local coordinate system on 2nd axis
: : :
#154150 [#_MLOCPOS[50]] Origin of local coordinate system on 50th axis
- Feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap #100851-#100900 (Attribute:

R/W)
The feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap can also be changed by setting values to the system
variables #100851 to #100900.
Variable number Variable name Controlled axis
#100851 [#_ROVLP[1]] 1st axis feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap
#100852 [#_ROVLP[2]] 2nd axis feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap
: : :
#100900 [#_ROVLP[50]] 50th axis feedrate reduction ratio for rapid traverse overlap
- Local coordinate system offset value #118501-#118550 (Attribute: R)

Using system variables #118501 to #118550, it is possible to determine the local coordinate system (G52)
offset value.
Variable Variable name Description
number
#118501 [#_LCLOFS[1]] 1st axis local coordinate system offset value
#118502 [#_LCLOFS[2]] 2nd axis local coordinate system offset value
: : :
#118550 [#_LCLOFS[50]] 50th axis local coordinate system offset value
- Switching between P-CODE variables and system variables (#10000 or later)

#8570 (Attribute: R/W)
This system variable allows read/write operations of P-CODE variables (#10000 to #89999) for the macro
executor function. For details on P-CODE variables, refer to the Macro Executor Programming Manual
(B-63943EN-2).
System variable #8570 can be used to make variables #10000 or later correspond to either P-CODE
variables or system variables.
#8570 setting Specified variable Corresponding variable
#8570 = 1 : :
#8570 = 0 : :
Example
#8570 = 0 ;
#10001 = 123 ; → Writing to system variable #10001 (tool compensation)
#8570 = 1 ;
#10001 = 456 ; → Writing to P-CODE variable #10001 (tool compensation)
- 274 -
NOTE
1 Variable #8570 can be used only when the macro executor function is enabled.
2 System variables (#10000 or later) always correspond to system variables
specified by their variable names even when #8570 is 1.
3 When an attempt is made to access a variable that cannot be used with
P-CODE variables (#10000 or later), an alarm PS0115, “VARIABLE NO. OUT
OF RANGE” occurs.
16.3 DISPLAY OF SYSTEM VARIABLES

System variables are displayed on the custom macro screen.
Explanation
System variables of the previous section (#1000-#8499, #10000-#89999, #100000-#199999 ) can be
displayed on the custom macro screen when bit 4 (CSD) of parameter No.11369 is set to 1. The value of
system variables which is not used is not displayed.
Refer to the section of "Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables" for the display of the
custom macro screen.
When macro executor is effective, the P-CODE variable can be used. The number of the P-CODE
variable overlaps with the number of system variables (#10000-#89999) because #10000-#89999 is used
for the P-CODE variable. Therefore, the treatment of the system variable and the P-CODE variable can be
changed by system variable #8570. Refer to the previous section for system variable #8570.
When bit 4 (CSD) of parameter No.11369 is 1, the display of #10000-#89999 is switched as follows by
setting of #8570.
- In case of #8570=0, system variables are displayed in #10000-#89999.
- In case of #8570=1, P-CODE variables are displayed in #10000-#89999.
NOTE
When macro executor is effective, the macro screen of macro executor is
displayed besides the macro screen of the custom macro. (Macro screen of
execution macro, conversational macro, auxiliary macro) However, bit 4 (CSD)
of parameter No.11369 is invalid on these screens.
16.4 READING AND WRITING VARIABLES FOR ANOTHER

PATH
By adding a path number to the high-order 8th and 9th digits of a variable, it is possible to read and write
a common variable or a system variable for another path.
For a list of variables that can be read and written, see "List of variables that can be read and written".
Format
#ppxxxxxxx
pp: Path number
Omitted = Local path
1 = First path
: :
4 = fourth path
xxxxxxx: Variable number
- 275 -
Common variable (#100 to #499(Note), #500 to #999(Note)) or system variable number (1000 and above,
10000 and above, 100000 and above)
NOTE
Available common variables and system variables differ depending on the
system configuration.
Example
Machine coordinates for path 1 Machine coordinates for path 2
X1 123.456 X2 -123.456
Y1 45.670 Z2 78.900
Z1 345.789 C2 45.000
In the case above, if #100=#5023 is executed on path 1, the machine coordinate
345.789 on the third axis on path 1 is read into variable #100.
If #100=#20005023 is executed, the machine coordinate 45.0 on the third axis
on path 2 is read into variable #100.
NOTE
1 Variable names cannot be specified.
2 If a path number out of the range is specified, alarm PS0115, “VARIABLE NO.
OUT OF RANGE” is issued.
3 Local variables for another path cannot be read or written.
4 If a real time custom macro is executed, alarm PS0390, “ILLEGAL MACRO
VAR” is issued.
Caution
CAUTION
System variables include those that affect automatic operation (for example,
variables #3000 to #3999), and they affect the operation on another path. Use
great caution when writing them.
List of variables that can be read and written

This function can read and write the following variables for another path.
For details of system variables, see the description of variables in the previous section.
R, W, and R/W are variable attributes, and respectively represent READ only, WRITE only, and
READ/WRITE.
- Common variable
System variable number Attribute Description
#100 to #149(#199) R/W Available common variables differ depending on the system
#200 to #499 configuration.
#500 to #549(#999)
- Interface signals
#1000 to #1035 R Interface input signals
#1100 to #1135 R/W Interface output signals
- 276 -
- Tool compensation value

#2001 to #2200 R/W Tool compensation value
#10001 to #10400
- Automatic operation or the like

#3001, #3002 R/W Clock
#3003 R/W Control for waiting for a single block stop and the auxiliary function
completion signal
#3004 R/W Feed hold, feedrate override, exact stop check
#3005 R/W Setting data.
#3007 R Status of a mirror image (DI and setting)
- Time
#3011 to #3012 R Year/Month/Date, Hour/Minute/Second
- Number of parts
#3901 to #3902 R/W Total number of parts, Number of required parts

#3980 R Tool compensation memory information
- Main program number

#4000 R Main program number
- Modal information
#4001 to #4530 R Modal information
- Position information
#5001 to #5020 R End point position of the block (workpiece coordinate system)
#100001 to #100050
#5021 to #5040 R Current position (machine coordinate system)
#100051 to #100100
#5041 to #5060 R Specified current position (workpiece coordinate system)
#100101 to #100150
#5061 to #5080 R Skip position (workpiece coordinate system)
#100151 to #100200
- Servo position deviation

#5101 to #5120 R Servo positional deviation
#100251 to #100300
- 277 -
- Manual handle interruption

#5121 to #5140 R Manual handle interruption
#100651 to #100700
- Distance to go
#5181 to #5200 R Distance to go
#100801 to #100850
- Workpiece origin offset value

#5201 to #5340 R/W Workpiece origin offset value
#100301 to #100650
- Skip position (detection unit)

#5421 to #5440 R Skip position (detection unit)
#100701 to #100750
- Others (#8570)
#8570 R/W Switching of P-CODE variables/system variables (#10000 and above)
16.5 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION

Various operations can be performed on variables. Program an arithmetic and logic operation in the same
way as for a general arithmetic expression.
#i=<expression>
<Expression>
The expression to the right of the arithmetic and logic operation contains constants and/or variables
combined by a function or operator. Variables #j and #k below can be replaced with a constant. If a
constant used in an expression has no decimal point, it is assumed to end with a decimal point.
Table 16.5 (a) Arithmetic and logic operation

Type of operation Operation Description
<1> Definition or #i=#j Definition or replacement of a variable
replacement
<2> Addition-type #i=#j+#k Addition
operations #i=#j-#k Subtraction
#i=#j OR #k Logical OR (bit by bit of 32 bits)
#i=#j XOR #k Exclusive OR (bit by bit of 32 bits)
<3> Multiplication-type #i=#j*#k Multiplication
operations #i=#j/#k Division
#i=#j AND #k Logical AND (bit by bit of 32 bits)
#i=#j MOD #k Remainder (A remainder is obtained after #j and #k are
rounded to their nearest whole numbers. When #j is a
negative value, #i is assumed to be a negative value.)
- 278 -

<4> Functions #i=SIN[#j] Sine (in degrees)
#i=COS[#j] Cosine (in degrees)
#i=TAN[#j] Tangent (in degrees)
#i=ASIN[#j] Arc sine
#i=ACOS[#j] Arc cosine
#i=ATAN[#j] Arc tangent (one argument), ATN can also be used.
#i=ATAN[#j]/[#k] Arc tangent (two arguments), ATN can also be used.
#i=ATAN[#j,#k] Arc tangent (two arguments), ATN can also be used.
#i=SQRT[#j] Square root, SQR can also be used.
#i=ABS[#j] Absolute value
#i=BIN[#j] Conversion from BCD to binary
#i=BCD[#j] Conversion from binary to BCD
#i=ROUND[#j] Rounding off, RND can also be used.
#i=FIX[#j] Rounding down to an integer
#i=FUP[#j] Rounding up to an integer
#i=LN[#j] Natural logarithm
#i=EXP[#j] Exponent using base e (2.718...)
#i=POW[#j,#k] Power (#j to the #kth power)
#i=ADP[#j] Addition of a decimal point
#i=PRM[#j] Parameter reading (system common, path, or machine group

parameter)
#i=PRM[#j,#k] Parameter reading (system common, path, or machine group
parameter bit number specification)
#i=PRM[#j]/[#l] Parameter reading (axis parameter)
#i=PRM[#j,#k]/[#l] Parameter reading (axis parameter bit number specification)
Explanation
- Angle units
The units of angles used with the SIN, COS, ASIN, ACOS, TAN, and ATAN functions are degrees. For
example, 90 degrees and 30 minutes is represented as 90.5 degrees.
- ARCSIN #i = ASIN[#j];
• The solution ranges are as indicated below:
When the bit 0 (NAT) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 0: 270° to 90°
When the bit 0 (NAT) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 1: -90° to 90°
• When #j is beyond the range of -1 to 1, an alarm PS0119, “ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF
RANGE” is issued.
• A constant can be used instead of the #j variable.
- ARCCOS #i = ACOS[#j];
• The solution ranges from 180° to 0°.
• When #j is beyond the range of -1 to 1, an alarm PS0119, “ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF
RANGE” is issued.
- ARCTAN #i = ATAN[#j]/[#k]; (two arguments)

• ATAN[#j,#k] is equivalent to ATAN[#j]/[#k].
• When point (#k,#j) on plane X-Y is given, this function returns the value of the arc tangent for the
angle made by the point.
• If the #j=0 and #k=0, an alarm PS0119, “ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF RANGE” is issued.
• The solution ranges are as follows:
- 279 -
When the bit 0 (NAT) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 0: 0° to 360°

Example: When #1 = ATAN[-1]/[-1]; is specified, #1 is 225.0.
When the bit 0 (NAT) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 1: -180° to 180°
Example: When #1 = ATAN[-1]/[-1]; is specified, #1 is -135.0.
- ARCTAN #i = ATAN[#j]; (one argument)

• When ATAN is specified with one argument, this function returns the main value of arc tangent
(-90° ≤ ATAN[#j] ≤ 90°). In other word, this function returns the same value as ATAN in calculator
specifications.
• To use this function as the dividend of a division, be sure to enclose it with brackets ([]). If this
function is not enclosed, ATAN[#j]/[#k] is assumed.
Example:
#100 = [ATAN[1]]/10 ; : Divides ATAN with one argument by 10.
#100 = ATAN[1]/[10] ; : Executes ATAN with two arguments.
#100 = ATAN[1]/10 ; : Assumes ATAN with two arguments, but issues an alarm PS1131,
“MISSING OPEN BRACKET” because the X coordinate
specification is not enclosed with brackets ([]).
- Natural logarithm #i = LN[#j];

• When the antilogarithm (#j) is zero or smaller, an alarm PS0119, “ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF
RANGE” is issued.
- Exponential function #i = EXP[#j];

• When the result of the operation overflows, an alarm PS0111, “OVERFLOW :FLOATING” is
issued.
- ROUND function
• When the ROUND function is included in an arithmetic or logic operation command, IF statement,
or WHILE statement, the ROUND function rounds off at the first decimal place.
Example:
When #1=ROUND[#2]; is executed where #2 holds 1.2345, the value of variable #1 is
1.0.
• When the ROUND function is used in NC statement addresses, the ROUND function rounds off the
specified value according to the least input increment of the address.
Example:
Creation of a drilling program that cuts according to the values of variables #1 and #2,
then returns to the original position
Suppose that the increment system is 1/1000 mm, variable #1 holds 1.2345, and
variable #2 holds 2.3456. Then,
G00 G91 X-#1; Moves 1.235 mm in negative direction.
G01 X-#2 F300; Moves 2.346 mm in negative direction.
G00 X[#1+#2]; Since 1.2345 + 2.3456 = 3.5801 in positive direction, the travel
distance is 3.580, which does not return the tool to the original position.
This difference comes from whether addition is performed before or after rounding off.
G00X-[ROUND[#1]+ROUND[#2]]; must be specified to return the tool to the original
position.
- Add decimal point (ADP) function

• ADP[#n] (n = 1 to 33) can be executed to add a decimal point to an argument passed with no
decimal point, in the subprogram.
- 280 -
Example:
In the subprogram called with G65 P_X10;, the value of ADP[#24] is a value to which a
decimal point is added at its end (that is, 10.). Use this function when you do not want
to consider the increment system in the subprogram. When bit 4 (CVA) of parameter
No. 6007 is set to 1, however, the ADP function cannot be used because any
argument is converted to 0.01 the moment it is passed.
NOTE
For compatibility among programs, it is recommended that the ADP function be
not used, and decimal points be added in the argument specification for a macro
call.
- Rounding up and down to an integer (FUP and FIX)

With CNC, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than
the absolute value of the original number, such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer.
Conversely, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is less than the
absolute value of the original number, such an operation is referred to as rounding down to an integer. Be
particularly careful when handling negative numbers.
Example:
Suppose that #1=1.2 and #2=-1.2.
When #3=FUP[#1] is executed, 2.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FIX[#1] is executed, 1.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FUP[#2] is executed, -2.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FIX[#2] is executed, -1.0 is assigned to #3.
- Parameter reading (PRM)

- The following formats are available depending on the parameter type and the data to be read.
Format Remarks
#i = PRM[#j]; Format for a system common, path, or machine group parameter.
Format for specifying the number of a bit of a system common, path, or machine group
#i = PRM[#j, #k];
parameter.
#i = PRM[#j] /[#l]; Format for an axis parameter
#i =PRM[#j, #k] /[#l]; Format for specifying the number of a bit of an axis parameter
• For #j, set a parameter number.
• For #k, set a bit number.
• For #l, set an axis number.
- By specifying a path number, it is possible to read a parameter for that path. There are two ways to
specify a path number.
a) Adding a path number to a parameter number
b) Specifying a path number using a system variable
a) Adding a path number to a parameter number

By adding a path number to the 8th and 9th high-order digits of the parameter number specified
with the operation command PRM, it is possible to read the parameter for the specified path.
#i = PRM[#j];
#j = ppxxxxxxx ; For pp, set a path number and for xxxxxxx, set a parameter number.
NOTE
1 If a path number is omitted or if 0 is specified, a parameter for the local path will
be read.
2 If a path number out of the range is specified, alarm PS0115, “VARIABLE NO.
OUT OF RANGE” is issued.
- 281 -
b) Specifying a path number using a system variable

By specifying a path number using system variable #3018, it is possible to read a parameter for
the specified path.
Example
Reading the fourth axis of parameter No. 01322 for the second path
#3018 = 2 ; ................. Set the second path.
#1 =PRM[1322] /[4] ; .. Read the fourth axis of parameter No. 01322 for the
: second path and write it to variable #1 for the local path.
#3018= 0 ; .................. Return the path number to that of the local path.
- Abbreviations of arithmetic and logic operation commands

When a function is specified in a program, the first two characters of the function name can be used to
specify the function.
Example: ROUND → RO
FIX → FI
NOTE
POW cannot be abbreviated.
- Priority of operations
<1> Functions
<2> Operations such as multiplication and division (*, /, AND)
<3> Operations such as addition and subtraction (+, -, OR, XOR)
Example) #1=#2+#3*SIN[#4];
<1>
<2>
<1>, <2> and <3> indicate the order of
<3> operations.
- Bracket nesting
Brackets are used to change the order of operations. Brackets can be used to a depth of five levels
including the brackets used to enclose a function. When a depth of five levels is exceeded, an alarm
PS0118, “TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING” occurs.
Example) #1=SIN [ [ [#2+#3] *#4 +#5] *#6];
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<1> to <5> indicate the order of operations.
Limitation
• Caution concerning decreased precision
When bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0
• Addition and subtraction
Note that when an absolute value is subtracted from another absolute value in addition or subtraction,
the relative error may become 10-15 or greater.
For example, assume that #1 and #2 have the following true values in the process of operation.
- 282 -
(The following values are examples in the process of operation and cannot actually be specified from
any program.)
#1=9876543210.987654321
#2=9876543210.987657777
You cannot obtain the following result with operation #2-#1:
#2-#1=0.000003456
This is because the precision of custom macro variables is 15 decimal digits. With this precision, the
values of #1 and #2 become:
#1=9876543210.987650000
#2=9876543210.987660000
(Precisely, the actual values are slightly different from the above values because they are internally
processed in binary.) Therefore, the result is:
#2-1=0.000010000
A large error occurs.
• Logical expressions
Be aware of errors that can result from conditional expressions using EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, and LE
because they are processed basically in the same way as addition and subtraction. For example, if the
following statement is used to decide whether #1 is equal to #2 in the above example, a correct
decision may not be resulted because errors may occur:
IF [#1 EQ #2]
Evaluate the difference between #1 and #2 with:
IF [ABS [#1-#2]LT 0.1]
Then, assume that the values are equal when the difference does not exceed the allowable error
range.
• Trigonometric functions
The absolute error is guaranteed for trigonometric functions. However, the relative error is 10-15 or
greater. Carefully perform multiplication or division after executing a trigonometric function.
• FIX function
When using the FIX function for the result of an operation, be careful with the precision. For
example, when the following operations are performed, the value of #3 may not always be 2.
N10 #1=0.002;
N20 #2=#1*1000;
N30 #3=FIX[#2];
This is because an error may occur in operation N20 and the result may not be
#2=2.0000000000000000
but a value a little smaller than 2 such as the following:
#2=1.9999999999999997
To prevent this, specify N30 as follows:
N30 #3=FIX[#2+0.001];
Generally, specify the FIX function as follows:
FIX[expression] → FIX[expression ±ε]
(Specify +ε when the value of the expression is positive or -ε when it is negative, and 0.1, 0.01,
0.001, ... for ε as required.)
NOTE
The operation result of exponential function #i=EXP[#j]; overflows when #j
exceeds about 790.
When bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1

Errors may occur when operations are performed.
- 283 -
Table 16.5 (b) Errors involved in operations

Operation Average error Maximum error Type of error
a = b*c 1.55×10-10 4.66×10-10 Relative error(*1)
a=b/c 4.66×10-10 1.88×10-9 ε
a= b 1.24×10-9 3.73×10-9 a
a=b+c 2.33×10-10 5.32×10-10 (*2)
a=b–c ε ε
MIN
b c
a = SIN [ b ] 5.0×10-9 1.0×10-8 Absolute error(*3)

a = COS [ b ]
ε degrees
a = ATAN [ b ] / [ c ] 1.8×10-6 3.6×10-6
NOTE
1 The relative error depends on the result of the operation.
2 Smaller of the two types of errors is used.
3 The absolute error is constant, regardless of the result of the operation.
4 Function TAN performs SIN/COS.
5 Note that, in the case of natural logarithm #i=LN[#j]; and exponential function
#i=EXP[#j];, the relative error may become 10-8 or greater.
6 The operation result of exponential function #i=EXP[#j]; overflows when #j
exceeds about 110.
• The precision of variable values is about 8 decimal digits. When very large numbers are handled in
an addition or subtraction, the expected results may not be obtained.
Example:
When an attempt is made to assign the following values to variables #1 and #2:
#1=9876543210123.456
#2=9876543277777.777
the values of the variables become:
#1=9876543200000.000
#2=9876543300000.000
In this case, when #3=#2-#1; is calculated, #3=100000.000 results. (The actual result
of this calculation is slightly different because it is performed in binary.)
• Also be aware of errors that can result from conditional expressions using EQ, NE, GE, GT, LE, and
LT.
Example:
IF[#1 EQ #2] is effected by errors in both #1 and #2, possibly resulting in an incorrect
decision.
Therefore, instead find the difference between the two variables with IF[ABS[#1-#2] LT
0.001].
Then, assume that the values of the two variables are equal when the difference does
not exceed an allowable limit (0.001 in this case).
• Also, be careful when rounding down a value.
Example:
When #2=#1*1000; is calculated where #1=0.002;, the resulting value of variable #2 is
not exactly 2 but 1.99999997.
Here, when #3=FIX[#2]; is specified, the resulting value of variable #3 is not 2.0 but
1.0.
In this case, round down the value after correcting the error so that the result is greater
than the expected number, or round it off as follows:
#3=FIX[#2+0.001]
#3=ROUND[#2]
- 284 -
- Brackets
Brackets ([ ]) are used to enclose an expression.
Note that parentheses ( ) are used for comments.
- Divisor
When a divisor of zero is specified in a division, an alarm PS0112, “ZERO DIVIDE” occurs.
16.6 INDIRECT AXIS ADDRESS SPECIFICATION

Overview
When the custom macro function is enabled, you can use AX[(axis-number)] in an axis address
specification to indirectly specify an axis with its axis number and not to directly specify it with its axis
name.
You can also use AXNUM[(axis-name)] to obtain the axis number for an axis name.
Explanation
- Indirect axis address
You can use indirect axis address AX[ ] to specify an axis with its axis number. (An equal sign (=) is
always required following AX[ ].)
AX[(axis-number)] = (numeric-value) ;
(axis-number): 1 to the number of controlled axes (number of controlled axes for each
path in a multi-path system)
(numeric-value): Value specified for the axis specified with its axis number
If an invalid axis number is specified, an alarm PS0331, “ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER IN AX[]” occurs.
If a value is put in a decimal place, the number is rounded off to an integer and the result is treated as the
axis number.
You can also specify a variable (local, common, or system variable) for (axis-number). To specify an
operation using a variable name in (axis-number), however, enclose the variable name with brackets ([ ]).
1. AX[1]=100.0;
Specifies a value of 100.000 for the first axis.
2. AX[#500]=200.0;
Specifies a value of 200.000 for the axis having the axis number indicated by the value stored in #500.
3. AX[#500+1]=300.0;
Specifies a value of 300.000 for the axis having the axis number obtained by adding 1 to the value stored in
#500.
4. SETVN 500 [ABC];
AX[#ABC]=400.0;
Specifies a value of 400.000 for the axis having the axis number indicated by the value stored in #ABC
(#500).
5. SETVN 500 [ABC];
AX[[#ABC]+1]=500.0;
Specifies a value of 400.000 for the axis having the axis number obtained by adding 1 to the value stored in
#ABC (#500).
6. SETVN 500 [ABC];
AX[#ABC+1]=500.0;
Alarm PS0331 occurs.
- AXNUM function
You can use AXNUM[ ] to obtain an axis number.
AXNUM[(axis-name)];
- 285 -
If an invalid axis name is specified, an alarm PS0332, “ILLEGAL AXIS ADDRESS IN AXNUM[]”
occurs.
When the number of controlled axes is 3, the name of the first axis is X, that of the second axis is Y, and
that of the third axis is Z
1. #500=AXNUM[X];
A value of 1 is stored in #500.
2. #501=AXNUM[Y];
3. #502=AXNUM[Z];
4. #503=AXNUM[A];
Alarm PS0332 occurs.
Example
Examples when the name of the first axis is X, that of the second axis is Y, and that of the third axis is Z1
N10 SETVN 500[AXIS1,AXIS2,AXIS3] ;

N20 [#AXIS1]=AXNUM[X] ;
N30 [#AXIS2]=AXNUM[Y] ;
N40 [#AXIS3]=AXNUM[Z1] ;
N50 G92 AX[#AXIS1]=0 AX[#AXIS2]=0 AX[#AXIS3]=0 ;
N60 G90G01F1000. ;
N70 AX[#AXIS1]=100.0 AX[#AXIS2]=100.0 AX[#AXIS3]=100.0 ;
N80 G02 AX[#AXIS1]=100. 0 AX[#AXIS2]= 0.0 R50.0 ;
N90 M02;
Limitation
When the custom macro function is enabled, AX and AXN cannot be used as an extended axis name. AX
is assumed to be AX[ ] and AXN is assumed to be AXNUM[ ].
16.7 READING PARAMETERS

Overview
By using the PRM function, it is possible to read parameters.
Format Remarks
#i = PRM[ #j, #k ] ; In the case of parameters other than axis type parameters
#i = PRM[ #j, #k ] / [ #l ] ; In the case of axis type parameters
Explanation
- Reading a parameter
#i=PRM[#j,#k]
#i=PRM[#j,#k]/[#l]
• For #j, enter a parameter number. If the number of a parameter that cannot be read, alarm PS0119,
"ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF RANGE", is issued.
• To read a bit type parameter, specify, for #k, the bit number of the bit type parameter in the range of
0 to 7. If a bit number is specified, data with the specified bit is read. If none is specified, data with
all bits is read. For parameters other than bit type parameters, the bit number is ignored.
• For #l, set the axis number of an axis type parameter in the range of 1 to the number of controlled
axes. If an axis type parameter is to be read but #l is not specified, alarm PS0119 is issued. For
parameters other than axis type parameters, #1 may be omitted together with '/'.
- 286 -
Example
1. Reading the value of the third axis of bit 0 (MIR) of bit axis type parameter No. 0012
If parameter No. 0012 (third axis) = 10010001
#2=12 ; Parameter number setting
#3=0 ; Bit number setting
#4=3 ; Axis number setting
If reading data with all bits
#1=PRM[#2]/[#4] ; #1=10010001
If reading data with a specified bit
#1=PRM[#2, #3]/[#4] ; #1=1
2. Reading the value of the fourth axis of axis type parameter No. 1322
#4=4 ; Axis number setting
#1=PRM[#2]/[#4] ;
3. Reading bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404

If parameter No. 0012 (third axis) = 01010000
#3=2 ; Bit number setting
If reading data with all bits
#1=PRM[#2] ; #1=1010000
If reading data with a specified bit
#1=PRM[#2,#3] ; #1=0
16.8 MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS

The following blocks are referred to as macro statements:
• Blocks containing an arithmetic or logic operation (=)
• Blocks containing a control statement (such as GOTO, DO, END)
• Blocks containing a macro call command (such as macro calls by G65, G66, G66.1, G67, or other G
codes, or by M codes)
Any block other than a macro statement is referred to as an NC statement.
Explanation
- Differences from NC statements
• Even when single block mode is on, the machine does not stop. Note, however, that the machine
stops in the single block mode when bit 5 of parameter SBM No. 6000 is 1.
• Macro blocks are not regarded as blocks that involve no movement in the cutter compensation mode.
- NC statements that have the same property as macro statements

• NC statements that include a subprogram call command (such as subprogram calls by M98 or other
M codes, or by T codes) and not include other command addresses except an O, file name, N, P, or L
address have the same property as macro statements.
• NC statements that include M99 and those do not include other command addresses except an O, file
name, N, P, or L address have the same property as macro statements.
- 287 -
16.9 BRANCH AND REPETITION

In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement. Three
types of branch and repetition operations are used:
Branch and repetitionGOTO (unconditional branch)

IF (conditional branch: if ..., then...)
WHILE (repetition while ...)
16.9.1 Unconditional Branch (GOTO Statement)

A branch to sequence number n occurs. When a sequence number outside of the range 1 to 99999999 is
specified, an alarm PS1128, “SEQUENCE NUMBER OUT OF RANGE” occurs. A sequence number can
also be specified using an expression.
GOTOn ; n: Sequence number (1 to 99999999)
Example: GOTO 1;
GOTO #10;
WARNING
Do not specify multiple blocks with the same sequence number in a single
program. It is very dangerous to specify such blocks because the destination of a
branch from the GOTO statement is undefined.
NOTE
1 A backward branch takes more time as compared with a forward branch.
2 In the destination of GOTOn, that is, the block with sequence number n, the
sequence number must appear at the beginning of the block. If the sequence
number is not at the beginning of the block, a branch cannot be made.
16.9.2 GOTO Statement Using Stored Sequence Numbers

When the GOTO statement is executed in a custom macro control command, a sequence number search is
made for sequence numbers stored at previous execution of the corresponding blocks at a high speed.
As a "sequence number stored at previous execution of the corresponding block", a unique sequence
number within the same program or the sequence number of a subprogram call with which the block was
executed is stored.
The storage type differs depending on the values of the following parameters.
(1) When bit 1 (MGO) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1
• Fixed type: Up to 20 sequence numbers stored at execution of the corresponding blocks
from the start of operation
(2) When bit 4 (HGO) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1
• Variable type: Up to 30 sequence numbers stored at execution of the corresponding blocks
before execution of the GOTO statement
• History type: Up to 10 sequence numbers stored by a sequence number search previously
made using the GOTO statement
The stored sequence numbers are canceled in the following cases:
• Immediately after power-on
• After a reset
• Operation after program registration or editing (including background editing and MDI program
editing)
- 288 -
WARNING
Do not specify multiple blocks with the same sequence number in a single
program.
It is very dangerous to specify the sequence number of the branch destination
before and after the GOTO statement and execute the GOTO statement
because the branch destination changes according to the values of the
parameters as shown below:
When bit 1 (MGO) or 4 (HGO) of parameter No. When both bits 1 (MGO) and 4 (HGO) of
6000 is set to 1 parameter No. 6000 are set to 0
: :
N10; A branch to N10;
N10 before
: : A branch to
the GOTO
GOTO10; statement GOTO10; N10 after the
: occurs. : GOTO
N10; N10; statement
occurs.
When bit 1 (MGO) or 4 (HGO) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1 and the GOTO
statement is executed, the sequence number of the branch destination may not
be contained in the sequence numbers stored at previous execution of the
corresponding blocks. In this case, a branch to the sequence number in a block
following the GOTO statement occurs (the destination is the same as when both
bits are set to 0).
NOTE
When an external program is read and executed by DNC operation, the
executed sequence numbers are not stored.
When a program registered in memory is executed by a subprogram call, the
sequence numbers are stored.
CAUTION
According to the restrictions on the GOTO statement, no branch to a sequence
number within a DO-END loop cannot be made. If a program in which a branch
to a sequence number within a loop occurs is executed, operation may differ
depending on whether the GOTO statement using stored sequence numbers is
used.
16.9.3 Conditional Branch (IF Statement)

Specify a <conditional expression> after IF.
IF[<conditional expression>]GOTOn
If the specified <conditional expression> is satisfied (true), a branch to sequence number n occurs. If the
specified condition is not satisfied, the next block is executed.
If the value of variable #1 is greater than 10, a branch to sequence number N2 occurs.
If the condition is IF [#1 GT 10] GOTO 2 ;
not satisfied
Processing If the condition is satisfied
N2 G00 G91 X10.0 ;

:
- 289 -
IF[<conditional expression>]THEN
If the specified <conditional expression> is satisfied (true), a macro statement specified after THEN is
executed.
Only a single macro statement is executed.
If the values of #1 and #2 are the same, 0 is assigned to #3.

IF[#1 EQ #2] THEN#3=0 ;
If the values of #1 and #2 are the same and those of #3 and #4 are also the same, 0 is assigned to #5.
IF[[#1 EQ #2] AND [#3 EQ #4]] THEN#5=0 ;
If the values of #1 and #2 are the same or those of #3 and #4 are the same, 0 is assigned to #5.
IF[[#1 EQ #2] OR [#3 EQ #4]] THEN#5=0 ;
Explanation
- <Conditional expression>
<Conditional expressions> are divided into <simple conditional expressions> and <complex conditional
expressions>. In a <simple conditional expression>, a relational operator described in Fig. 16.9.3 (a) is
specified between two variables or between a variable and constant to be compared. An <expression> can
be used instead of a variable. With a <complex conditional expression>, an AND (logical AND), OR
(logical OR), or XOR (exclusive OR) operation is performed for the results (true or false) of multiple
<simple conditional expressions>.
- Relational operators
Relational operators each consist of two letters and are used to compare two values to determine whether
they are equal or one value is smaller or greater than the other value. Note that the equal sign (=) and
inequality sign (>, <) cannot be used as a relational operator.
Fig. 16.9.3 (a) Relational operators

Operator Meaning
EQ Equal to(=)
NE Not equal to(≠)
GT Greater than(>)
GE Greater than or equal to(≥)
LT Less than(<)
LE Less than or equal to(≤)
Sample program
The sample program below finds the total of numbers 1 to 10.
O9500;
#1=0;................................ Initial value of the variable to hold the sum
#2=1;................................ Initial value of the variable as an addend
N1 IF[#2 GT 10] GOTO 2; ... Branch to N2 when the addend is greater than 10
#1=#1+#2;........................ Calculation to find the sum
#2=#2+1;.......................... Next addend
GOTO 1; .......................... Branch to N1
N2 M30;............................... End of program
16.9.4 Repetition (WHILE Statement)

Specify a conditional expression after WHILE. While the specified condition is satisfied, the program
from DO to END is executed. If the specified condition is not satisfied, program execution proceeds to
the block after END.
- 290 -
WHILE [conditional expression] DO m ; (m=1,2,3)
If the If the Processing

condition condition
is not is satisfied
satisfied
END m ;
:
Explanation
While the specified condition is satisfied, the program from DO to END after WHILE is executed. If the
specified condition is not satisfied, program execution proceeds to the block after END. The same format
as for the IF statement applies. A number after DO and a number after END are identification numbers
for specifying the range of execution. The numbers 1, 2, and 3 can be used. When a number other than 1,
2, and 3 is used, an alarm PS0126, “ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER” occurs.
- Nesting
The identification numbers (1 to 3) in a DO-END loop can be used as many times as desired. Note,
however, when a program includes crossing repetition loops (overlapped DO ranges), an alarm PS0124,
“MISSING END STATEMENT” occurs.
1. The identification numbers (1 3. DO loops can be nested to a
to 3) can be used as many maximum depth of three levels.
times as required.
WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ; WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;
:
Processing WHILE [ … ] DO 2 ;
:
END 1 ;
WHILE [ … ] DO 3 ;
:
WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ; Processing
Processing END 3 ;
:
END 1 ;
END 2 ;
:
:
2. DO ranges cannot END 1 ;
overlap.
4. Control can be transferred
to the outside of a loop.
WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;
Processing WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;
WHILE [ … ] DO 2 ; IF [ … ] GOTO n ;
:
END 1 ;
END 1 ;
Nn
Processing
5. Branches cannot be made to a
location within a loop.
END 2 ;
IF [ … ] GOTO n ;
:
WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;
:
Nn … ;
END 1 ;
Limitation
- Infinite loops
When DO m is specified without specifying the WHILE statement, an infinite loop ranging from DO to
END is produced.
- 291 -
- Processing time
When a branch to the sequence number specified in a GOTO statement occurs, the sequence number is
searched for. For this reason, processing in the reverse direction takes a longer time than processing in the
forward direction. Therefore, in the case of processing in the reverse direction, use the WHILE statement
for repetition to reduce processing time.
- Undefined variable
In a conditional expression that uses EQ or NE, a <null> and zero have different effects. In other types of
conditional expressions, a <null> is regarded as zero.
Sample program
The sample program below finds the total of numbers 1 to 10.
O0001;
#1=0;
#2=1;
WHILE[#2 LE 10]DO 1;
#1=#1+#2;
#2=#2+1;
END 1;
M30;
16.9.5 Precision Specification for Macro Relational Operators

When making a comparison using a relational operator in a custom macro, you can specify the number of
decimal places in the two values to be compared. The values are compared after rounded off to the
specified number of decimal places.
Setting bit 5 (EDP) of parameter No. 6019 to 1 enables this function. Specify the number of significant
decimal places you want to set in parameter No. 6100.
Relational operators
The precision specification is valid for the following relational operators.
Operator Meaning
EQ Equal to(=)
NE Not equal to(≠)
GT Greater than(>)
GE Greater than or equal to(≥)
LT Less than(<)
LE Less than or equal to(≤)
Limitation
The precision specification for macro relational operators is valid for the following functions:
• Custom macro
• Macro executor
NOTE
The precision specification is invalid for real-time custom macros.
- 292 -
Example
Macro program
O1000 ;
#100=1.2344567 ;
#101=1.2345678 ;
N10 IF[#100 EQ #101] GOTO 20 ;
...
N20 ;
N30 IF[#100 NE #101] GOTO 40 ;
...
N40 ;
...
When a comparison is executed, the target two values are compared after rounded off to the specified
number of decimal places.
The actual values are not rounded.
#100=1. 2344567
^ ^ ^ The number of significant decimal places is 3.
^ Rounded off.
1. When the precision specification for macro relational operators is disabled
Bit 5 (EDP) of parameter No. 6019 is set to 0.
The values of #100 and #101 are compared as is. In the N10 block, a branch to N20 does not occur.
In the N30 block, a branch to N40 occurs.
2. When the precision specification for macro relational operators is enabled - 1
Bit 5 (EDP) of parameter No. 6019 is set to 1 and parameter No. No.6100 is set to 2.
The value obtained by rounding off the value of #100, 1.23, is compared with the value obtained by
rounding off the value of #101, 1.23. The values of #100 and #101 are not changed.
In the N10 block, a branch to N20 occurs. In the N30 block, a branch to N40 does not occur.
3. When the precision specification for macro relational operators is enabled - 2
The value obtained by rounding off the value of #100, 1.234, is compared with the value obtained by
rounding off the value of #101, 1.235. The values of #100 and #101 are not changed.
In the N10 block, a branch to N20 does not occur. In the N30 block, a branch to N40 occurs.
When variable values are negative, processing is performed as follows:
Macro program
O1000 ;
#100=-1.2344 ;
#101=-1.2345 ;
N10 IF[#100 EQ #101] GOTO 20 ;
...
N20 ;
...
#100=- 1. 2345
^ ^ ^ The number of significant decimal places is 3.
^ Rounded off.
1. When the precision specification for macro relational operators is enabled
The value obtained by rounding off the value of #100, -1.234, is compared with the value obtained
by rounding off the value of #101, -1.235. The values of #100 and #101 are not changed.
In the N10 block, a branch to N20 does not occur.
- 293 -
16.10 MACRO CALL

A macro program can be called using the following methods. The calling methods can roughly be divided
into two types: macro calls and subprogram calls.
A macro program can also be called during MDI operation in the same way.
Macro call Simple call (G65)
Modal call (G66, G66.1, G67)
Macro call using a G code
Macro call using an M code
Subprogram call Subprogram call using an M code
Subprogram call using a T code
Subprogram call using an S code
Subprogram call using a second auxiliary function code
Subprogram call using a specific code
Limitation
- Call nesting
Macro calls can be nested to a depth of up to five levels. Subprogram calls can be nested to a depth of up
to 15 levels including macro calls.
- Differences between macro calls and subprogram calls

Macro call (G66, G66.1, Ggg, or Mmm) differs from subprogram call (for example M98, Mmm, or Ttt)
as described below.
• With a macro call, an argument (data passed to a macro) can be specified. A subprogram call does
not have this capability.
• If a macro call block contains another NC command (such as G01 X100.0 G65 Pp), an alarm
PS0127, “DUPLICATE NC,MACRO STATEMENT” occurs.
• If a subprogram call block contains another NC command (such as G01 X100.0 M98 Pp), the
subprogram is called after the command is executed.
• In any macro call block, the machine does not stop in the single block mode.
If a subprogram call block contains another NC command (such as G01 X100.0 M98 Pp), the
machine stops in the single block mode.
• With a macro call, the level of local variables changes. With a subprogram call, the level of local
variables does not change. (See "Local variable levels" in Limitation of Subsection, “Simple Call
(G65)”.)
- Called program and folders to be searched

The order in which folders are called depends on the method of calling a macro or subprogram.
Folders are searched in sequence and the program found first is called. For details, see the "Managing
Programs" chapter.
16.10.1 Simple Call (G65)

When G65 is specified, the custom macro specified at address P is called. Data (argument) can be passed
to the custom macro program.
- 294 -
G65 P p L l <argument- P : Number of the program to call

specification> ; l : Repetition count (1 by default)
Argument : Data passed to the macro
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: #3=#1+#2 ;
G65 P9010 L2 A1.0 B2.0 ; IF [#3 GT 360] GOTO 9 ;
: G00 G91 X#3 ;
M30 ; N9 M99 ;
Explanation
- Call
• After G65, specify at address P the program number of the custom macro to call.
• When a number of repetitions is required, specify a number from 1 to 999999999 after address L.
When L is omitted, 1 is assumed.
• By using argument specification, values are assigned to corresponding local variables.
- Argument specification
Two types of argument specification are available. Argument specification I uses letters other than G, L,
O, N, and P once each. Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and also uses I, J, and K up
to ten times. The type of argument specification is determined automatically according to the letters used.
• Argument specification I
Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable
number number number
A #1 I #4 T #20
B #2 J #5 U #21
C #3 K #6 V #22
D #7 M #13 W #23
E #8 Q #17 X #24
F #9 R #18 Y #25
H #11 S #19 Z #26
• Addresses G, L, N, O, and P cannot be used in arguments.

• Addresses that need not be specified can be omitted. Local variables corresponding to an omitted
address are set to null.
• Addresses do not need to be specified alphabetically. They conform to word address format.
I, J, and K need to be specified alphabetically, however.
Argument specification I is always used for I, J, and K by setting bit 7 (IJK) of parameter No. 6008
to 1
Example
- When bit 7 (IJK) of parameter No. 6008 is 0, I_J_K_ means that I = #4, J = #5,
and K = #6 while K_J_I_ means K = #6, J = #8, and I= #10 because argument
specification II is used.
- When bit 7 (IJK) of parameter No. 6008 is 1, K_J_I_ means that I = #4, J = #5,
and K = #6, which is the same as with I_J_K_, because argument specification I
is used.
• Argument specification II
Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and uses I, J, and K up to ten times. Argument
specification II is used to pass values such as 3-dimensional coordinates as arguments.
- 295 -
Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable

A #1 IK3 #12 J7 #23
B #2 I4 #13 K7 #24
C #3 J4 #14 I8 #25
I1 #4 K4 #15 J8 #26
J1 #5 I5 #16 K8 #27
K1 #6 J5 #17 I9 #28
I2 #7 K5 #18 J9 #29
J2 #8 I6 #19 K9 #30
K2 #9 J6 #20 I10 #31
I3 #10 K6 #21 J10 #32
J3 #11 I7 #22 K10 #33
• Subscripts of I, J, and K for indicating the order of argument specification are not written in the
actual program.
NOTE
When bit 7 (IJK) of parameter No. 6008 is 1, argument II cannot be used.
Limitation
- Format
G65 must be specified before any argument.
- Mixture of argument specifications I and II

The CNC internally identifies argument specification I and argument specification II. If a mixture of
argument specification I and argument specification II is specified, the type of argument specification
specified later takes precedence.
[Example]
G65 A1.0 B2.0 I-3.0 I4.0 D5.0 P1000 ;
(Variables)
#1:1.0
#2:2.0
#3:
#4:-3.0
#5:
#6:
#7:4.0 5.0
When both the I4.0 and D5.0 arguments are commanded for variable #7 in this example, the latter, D5.0,
is valid.
- Position of the decimal point

The units used for argument data passed without a decimal point correspond to the least input increment
of each address.
CAUTION
The value of an argument passed without a decimal point may vary according to
the system configuration of the machine. It is good practice to use decimal points
in macro call arguments to maintain program compatibility.
- Extended axis name

The axis address of an extended axis name cannot be specified as an argument. If an attempt is made to
specify it, alarm PS0129, “'G' AS ARGUMENT” is issued.
- 296 -
When a value is specified with no decimal point, the number of decimal places is determined as follows.
Address For a non-axis address For an axis address
D, E, H, M, S, or T 0
Q or R α (NOTE 2)
A, C, I, J, K, X, Y, or Z α (NOTE 2) β (NOTE 3)
B, U, V(NOTE 1), or W 0 β (NOTE 3)
Second auxiliary function γ (NOTE 4)
Address Metric input Inch input

F (G94 mode) 0 2
NOTE
1 When V is used in a call using a specific code, the number of decimal places is
determined according to the setting for the reference axis.
2 α is determined according to the increment system for the reference axis (axis
specified with parameter No. 1031) as listed in the table in NOTE 3.
3 β is determined according to the increment system for the corresponding axis
address as listed in the following table.
Increment
Linear axis (metric input) Linear axis (inch input) Rotation axis
system
IS-A 2 3 2
IS-B 3 4 3
IS-C 4 5 4
IS-D 5 6 5
IS-E 6 7 6
When bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 is set to 1, the above values from which
1 is subtracted are used. When the increment system for an axis is IS-A,
however, the setting of bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 is not effective.
When calculator-type decimal notation for each axis is used (bit 0 (ADX) of
parameter No. 3455 is set to 1), the number of decimal places is 0. When bit 7
(EAP) of parameter No. 3452 is set to 1, however, calculator-type decimal
notation is not effective and the number of decimal places is determined as listed
in the above table.
4 γ is determined according to the increment system for the reference axis (axis
specified with parameter No. 1031) as listed in the following table. (When bit 7
(BDX) of parameter No. 3450 is set to 1, γ is also determined in the same way.)
AUP(No.3450#0) = 1
Increment system for AUP (No.3450#0)
AUX (No.3405#0) = 0 AUX (No.3405#0) = 1
the reference axis =0
Metric Inch Metric Inch
IS-A 2 2 3
IS-B 3 3 4
IS-C 0 4 4 5
IS-D 5 5 6
IS-E 6 6 7
5 When calculator-type decimal notation is used (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401
is set to 1), the number of decimal places is 0.
- Call nesting
Macro calls can be nested to a depth of up to five levels including simple calls (G65) and modal calls
(G66/G66.1). Subprogram calls can be nested to a depth of up to 15 levels including macro calls.
A macro program can also be called during MDI operation in the same way.
- 297 -
- Local variable levels

• Local variables from level 0 to 5 are provided for nesting.
• The level of the main program is 0.
• Each time a macro is called (with G66, G66.1, Ggg, or Mmm), the local variable level is
incremented by one. The values of the local variables at the previous level are saved in the CNC.
• When M99 is executed in a macro program, control returns to the calling program. At that time, the
local variable level is decremented by one; the values of the local variables saved when the macro
was called are restored.
Main program Macro Macro Macro Macro Macro
(level 0) (level 1) (level 2) (level 3) (level 4) (level 5)
O0001 ; O0002 ; O0003 ; O0004 ; O0005 ; O0006
: : : : : :
#1=1 ; : : : : :
G65 P2 A2 ; G65 P3 A 3; G65 P4 A4 ; G65 P5 A5 ; G65 P6 A6 ; :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
M30 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ;
Local variables
(Level 1) (Level 2) (Level 3) (Level 4) (Level 5)
(level 0)
1 2 3 4 #1 5 #1 6
#1 #1 #1 #1
: : : : : : : : : : : :
: : : : : :
#33 #33 #33 #33 #33 #33
Common variables
#100-, #500- Variables that can be read from and written to by macros at different levels
16.10.2 Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66)

Once G66 is issued to specify a modal call a macro is called after a block specifying movement along
axes is executed. This continues until G67 is issued to cancel a modal call.
G66 P p L l <argument-specification> ; P : Number of the program to call
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
O0001 ; O9100 ;
: :
G66 P9100 L2 A1.0 B2.0 ; G00 Z-#1 ;
G00 G90 X100.0 ; G01 Z-#2 F300 ;
Y200.0 ; :
X150.0 Y300.0 ; :
G67 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Explanation
- Call
• After G66, specify at address P a program number subject to a modal call.
• When a number of repetitions is required, a number from 1 to 999999999 can be specified at address
L.
• As with a simple call (G65), data passed to a macro program is specified in arguments.
• In the G66 mode, a macro or subprogram can be called.
- Cancellation
When a G67 code is specified, modal macro calls are no longer performed in subsequent blocks.
- 298 -
- Call nesting
- Modal call nesting

For a single modal call (when G66 is specified only once), each time the move command is executed, the
specified macro is called. When nested modal macro calls are specified, the macro at the next higher level
is called each time the move command for a macro call is executed.
Macros are called in reverse order in which they are specified. Each time G67 is issued, the macros are
canceled one by one in reverse order in which they are specified.
[Example]
G66 P9100 ; O9100 ; O9200 ;
X10.0 ; (1-1) Z50.0 ; (2-1) X60.0 ; (3-1)
G66 P9200 ; M99 ; Y70.0 ; (3-2)
X15.0 ; (1-2) M99;
G67 ; Cancels P9200.
G67 ; Cancels P9100.
X-25.0 ; (1-3)
Execution order of the above program (blocks not containing the move command omitted)
(1-1) (1-2) (1-3)

(2-1) (3-1) (3-2)
(2-1) (2-1)
* No modal call is performed after (1-3) because the mode is not the macro call mode.
Limitation
• G66 and G67 blocks are specified in pairs in the same program. If a G67 code is specified not in the
G66 mode, an alarm PS1100, “CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL” occurs. Bit 0 (G67) of
parameter No. 6000 can be set to 1 to specify that the alarm does not occur in this case.
• In a G66 block, no macros can be called. Local variables (arguments) are set, however.
• G66 needs to be specified before any arguments.
• No macros can be called in a block which contains a code such as a auxiliary function that does not
involve movement along an axis.
• Local variables (arguments) can only be set in G66 blocks. Note that local variables are not set each
time a modal call is performed.
NOTE
If M99 is specified in a block in which a call is performed, it is executed after the
call is performed.
16.10.3 Modal Call: Each Block Call (G66.1)

In this macro call mode, the specified macro is unconditionally called for each NC command block. All
data other than O, file name, N, and G codes that is specified in each block is not executed and is used as
arguments. (The G code in the block in which G66.1 is specified is not used as an argument. Only the last
G code specified in subsequent blocks is used as an argument.)
The NC command blocks having O or file name N have the same effect as when G65P is specified in the
next position, the other NC command blocks have the same effect as when G65P is specified at the
beginning.
- 299 -
P : Number of the program to call

G66.1 P p Ll <argument-specification> ;
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
O0001 ; O9100 ;
: :
G66.1 P9100 L2 A1.0 G00 Z-#1 ;
B2.0 ; G01 Z-#2 F#9 ;
A10.0 B20.0 F300 ; :
A0 B-30.0 ; :
F1000 ; :
G67 ; :
: M99 ;
[Example]
In the G66.1 P100 ; mode,
N001 G01 G91 X100 Y200 D1 R1000 ;
is the same as
N001 G65 P100 G01 G91 X100 Y200 D1 R1000 ;
Explanation
- Call
• After G66.1, specify at address P a program number subject to a modal call.
• When a number of repetitions is required, a number from 1 to 999999999 can be specified at address
L.
• As with a simple call (G65), data passed to a macro program is specified in arguments.
• In the G66.1 mode, a macro or subprogram can be called.
- Cancellation
When a G67 code is specified, modal macro calls are no longer performed in subsequent blocks.
- Call nesting
- Modal call nesting

For a single modal call (when G66.1 is specified only once), the specified macro is called for each NC
command block. When nested modal macro calls are specified, the macro at the next higher level is also
called in a block within a called macro in which an NC command is specified.
Macros are called in reverse order in which they are specified. Each time G67 is issued, the macros are
canceled one by one in reverse order in which they are specified.
[Example] Axis specification switching

N1 G66.1 P1000 X10.0 ; → Calls O1000 and executes Y10.0.
N2 X20.0 ; → Calls O1000 and executes Y20.0.
N3 G66.1 P2000 Y10.0 Z20.0 ; → Calls O2000 and executes Y20.0 Z10.0. Then, calls O1000 and
executes X20.0 Z10.0.
N4 X10.0 Y20.0 Z30.0 ; → Calls O2000 and executes X10.0 Y30.0 Z20.0. Then, calls O1000
and executes X30.0 Y10.0 Z20.0.
N5 G67 ; → Cancels P2000.
N6 G67 ; → Cancels P1000.
O1000 X#25 Y#24 Z#26 ; (X-Y switching)

M99 ;
O2000 X#24 Y#26 Z#25 ; (Y-Z switching)

M99 ;
- 300 -
Execution order of the above program (blocks not containing the move command omitted)
Calling program N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6
program
Called
O1000
s
O2000
In N1 and N2 blocks, O1000 is called and the X and Y specifications are made to change places.
In N3 and N4 blocks, O2000 is called first and the Y and Z specifications are made to change places. For
the switched specification, O1000 is called and the X and Y specifications are made to change places.
Therefore, the X, Y, and Z specifications are switched to the Z, X, and Y specifications.
Limitation
• G66.1 and G67 blocks are specified in pairs in the same program. If a G67 code is specified not in
the G66.1 mode, an alarm PS1100, “CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL” occurs. Bit 0 (G67) of
parameter No. 6000 can be set to 1 to specify that the alarm does not occur in this case.
• G66.1 block
(a) In a G66.1 block, a macro is called.
(b) The correspondence between addresses specified as arguments and variables is the same as for
simple calls.
• Block following a G66.1 block in which a call is performed (not including G66.1 blocks)
(a) Addresses G, P, and L can also be used as arguments. Address G corresponds to #10; address L
to #12; address P to #16. However, the restrictions on the input format of normal NC
commands are put on the data. For example, ;G1000. P0.12 L-4 cannot be specified.
(b) When multiple G codes are specified, only the last G code is used as an argument. O, file name,
and N codes and G codes not in group 00 are passed to the next and subsequent blocks.
NOTE
1 In a block in which only an O number, file name, sequence number, EOB, macro
statement, or M99 command is specified, a macro is not called for each block.
2 In each block, when an address other than O, file name, or N is specified, it is
assumed to be an NC command and a macro is called for each block. When N is
specified following an address other than O, file name, or N, it is used as an
argument. In this case, N corresponds to variable #14 and the number of
decimal places is 0.
3 If M99 is specified in a block in which a macro is called, it is executed after the
call is performed.
16.10.4 Macro Call Using a G Code

By setting a G code number used to call a macro program in a parameter, the macro program can be
called in the same way as for a simple call (G65).
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: :
G81 X10.0 Y20.0 Z-10.0 ; :
: :
M30 ; N9 M99 ;
Parameter No.6050=81
Explanation
By setting a G code number from -9999 to 9999 used to call a custom macro program (O9010 to O9019)
in the corresponding parameters Nos.6050 to 6059, the macro program can be called in the same way as
- 301 -
with G65. To call custom macro program O9040 to O9049 using a G code with a decimal point, set bit 0
(DPG) of parameter No. 6007 to 1 and set the G code number in the corresponding parameters Nos. 6060
to 6069.
The number of decimal places of a G code is 1. Set the value obtained by multiplying a desired G code
number by 10 in the corresponding parameter.
[Example] When parameter No. 6060 is set to 234, custom macro program O9040 is called using G23.4.
When a negative G code is set, a modal call is performed. In this case, bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No.
6007 can be set to select the G66 or G66.1 mode.
For example, when a parameter is set so that macro program O9010 can be called with G81, a
user-specific cycle created using a custom macro can be called without modifying the machining
program.
- Correspondence between parameter numbers and program numbers

G code with no decimal point G code with a decimal point
Parameter number Program number Parameter number Program number
6050 O9010 6060 O9040
6051 O9011 6061 O9041
6052 O9012 6062 O9042
6053 O9013 6063 O9043
6054 O9014 6064 O9044
6055 O9015 6065 O9045
6056 O9016 6066 O9046
6057 O9017 6067 O9047
6058 O9018 6068 O9048
6059 O9019 6069 O9049
- Repetition
As with a simple call, a number of repetitions from 1 to 999999999 can be specified at address L.
As with a simple call, two types of argument specification are available: Argument specification I and
argument specification II. The type of argument specification is determined automatically according to
the addresses used.
Limitation
- Nesting of calls using G codes
• To call another program in a program called using a G code, only G65, M98, G66, or G66.1 can be
used normally.
• When bit 6 (GMP) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1, a call using an M, T, or S code, second
auxiliary function, or specific code can be performed in a program called using a G code.
16.10.5 Macro Call Using a G Code (Specification of Multiple

Definitions)
By setting the starting G code number used to call a macro program, the number of the starting program
to be called, and the number of definitions, macro calls using multiple G codes can be defined.
Explanation
As many custom macros as the number specified in parameter No. 6040 can be called using as many G
codes as the number specified in parameter No. 6040. The numeric value set in parameter No. 6038
indicates the starting G code number and the program number set in parameter No. 6039 indicates the
starting program number. To disable this type of call, set 0 in parameter No. 6040.
- 302 -
When a negative G code is set in parameter No. 6038, modal calls are performed. In this case, bit 3
(MGE) of parameter No. 6007 can be set to select the G66 or G66.1 mode.
The number of repetitions and argument specification are set in the same way as with a macro call using a
G code.
[Example]
Set parameter No. 6038 to 900, parameter No. 6039 to 10000000, and parameter No.
6040 to 100.
G900 → O1000
G901 → O1001
G902 → O1002
:
G999 → O1099
Custom macro calls (simple calls) for 100 combinations are defined as shown above. When parameter No.
6038 is changed to -900, custom macro calls (modal calls) for the same combinations are defined.
NOTE
1 The calls defined by this setting become all invalid in the following cases:
<1> A value outside the valid data range is set in one of the above parameters.
<2> (No. 6039 + No. 6040 - 1) > 99999999
2 Simple and modal calls cannot be mixed in the specification.
3 If the G code set in parameters Nos. 6050 to 6059 to call the corresponding
macro program is within the G code range for calling programs using multiple G
codes, the macro program corresponding to the G code set in parameters Nos.
6050 to 6059 is called.
16.10.6 Macro Call Using a G Code with a Decimal Point

(Specification of Multiple Definitions)
When bit 0 (DPG) of parameter No. 6007, by setting the starting G code number with a decimal point
used to call a macro program, the number of the starting program to be called, and the number of
definitions, multiple macro calls using multiple G codes with a decimal point can be defined.
Explanation
As many custom macros as the number specified in parameter No. 6043 can be called using as many G
codes with a decimal point as the number specified in parameter No. 6043. The numeric value set in
parameter No. 6041 indicates the starting G code number with a decimal point and the program number
set in parameter No. 6042 indicates the starting program number. To disable this type of call, set 0 in
parameter No. 6043.
When a negative G code is set in parameter No. 6041, modal calls are performed. In this case, bit 3
(MGE) of parameter No. 6007 can be set to select the G66 or G66.1 mode.
G code.
[Example]
Set parameter No. 6041 to 900, parameter No. 6042 to 2000, and parameter No. 6043 to
100.
G90.0 → O2000
G90.1 → O2001
G90.2 → O2002
:
G99.9 → O2099
Custom macro calls (simple calls) for 100 combinations are defined as shown above. When parameter No.
6041 is changed to -900, custom macro calls (modal calls) for the same combinations are defined.
- 303 -
NOTE
<2> (No. 6042 + No. 6043 - 1) > 99999999
<3> Bit 0 (DPG) of parameter No. 6007 is set to 0 (this setting invalidates a
macro call using a G code with a decimal point).
2 Simple and modal calls cannot be mixed in the specification.
3 If the G code set in parameters Nos. 6060 to 6069 to call the corresponding
macro program is within the G code range for calling programs using multiple G
codes, the macro program corresponding to the G code set in parameters Nos.
16.10.7 Macro Call Using an M Code

By setting an M code number used to call a macro program in a parameter, the macro program can be
called in the same way as with a simple call (G65).
O0001 ; O9020 ;
: :
M50 A1.0 B2.0 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Explanation
By setting an M code number from 3 to 99999999 used to call custom macro program O9020 to O9029 in
the corresponding parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089, the macro program can be called in the same way as
with G65.

Parameter number Corresponding program number
6080 O9020
6081 O9021
6082 O9022
6083 O9023
6084 O9024
6085 O9025
6086 O9026
6087 O9027
6088 O9028
6089 O9029
Example) When parameter No. 6080 is set to 990, O9020 is called using M990.
- Repetition
As with a simple call, two types of argument specification are available: Argument specification I and
argument specification II. The type of argument specification is determined automatically according to
the addresses used. When bit 2 (MAA) of parameter No.6009 is set to 1, address G becomes an argument,
too.
1. When bit 2 (MAA) of parameter No.6009 is set to 0
The address commanded after call code become arguments. Argument specification I or argument
- 304 -
specification II are used.
Argument specification I
Variable Variable Variable
Address Address Address
A #1 J #5 S #19
B #2 K #6 T #20
C #3 L *2 U #21
D #7 M #13 *3 V #22
E #8 M(Call code) *4 W #23
F #9 N #14 *5 X #24
G *1 P #16 Y #25
H #11 Q #17 Z #26
I #4 R #18
*1: Address G can not command. If address G is commanded, alarm PS0129 occurs.
*2: Address L is a number of times in which the macro call is repeated.
*3: Address M other than call code is passed to variable #13.
*4: Address M for call code does not become an argument.
*5: Address N is passed to variable #14.
2. When bit 2 (MAA) of parameter No.6009 is set to 1

The address commanded after call code become arguments. Address G becomes an argument, too.
Argument specification I or argument specification II are used.
A #1 J #5 S #19
B #2 K #6 T #20
C #3 L *2 U #21
D #7 M #13 *3 V #22
F #9 N #14 *5 X #24
G #28 to #32 *1 P #16 Y #25
H #11 Q #17 Z #26
I #4 R #18
*1: The first five addresses G in ascending order of G code groups are used as arguments and
passed to variables #28 to #32.
*2: Address L is a number of times in which the macro call is repeated.
*5: Address N is passed to variable #14.
Limitation
• An M code used to call a macro program must be specified at the start of a block.
• To call another program in a program called using an M code, only G65, M98, G66, or G66.1 can be
used normally.
• When bit 6 (GMP) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1, a call using a G code can be performed in a
program called using an M code.
16.10.8 Macro Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple

Definitions)
By setting the starting M code number used to call a macro program, the number of the starting program
to be called, and the number of definitions, macro calls using multiple M codes can be defined.
- 305 -
Explanation
As many custom macros as the number specified in parameter No. 6049 can be called using as many M
indicates the starting M code number and the program number set in parameter No. 6048 indicates the
starting program number. To disable this type of call, set 0 in parameter No. 6049.
M code.
[Example]
Set parameter No. 6047 to 9000, parameter No. 6048 to 4000, and parameter No. 6049 to
100.
M90000000 → O4000
M90000001 → O4001
M90000002 → O4002
:
M90000099 → O4099
Custom macro calls (simple calls) for 100 combinations are defined as shown above.
NOTE
<2> (No. 6048 + No. 6049 - 1) > 99999999
2 If the M code set in parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089 to call the corresponding
macro program is within the M code range for calling programs using multiple M
codes, the macro program corresponding to the M code set in parameters Nos.
16.10.9 Special Macro Call using M code

Usually, it is necessary to command M code for Macro Call using M code or Macro Call using M code
(Specification of 3 sets) at the head of the block. Alarm PS0127 occurs if M code is commanded for
macro call at the position of the block that is not the head.
Special Macro Call using M code is a function to execute macro call when call code is commanded at the
position of the block that is not the head. By setting bit 0 (MSM) of parameter No. 6009 is set to 1, it
becomes possible.
Example
When M code is commanded for a macro call at the position of the block
that is not the head
O0001 ; O9020 ;
: :
T123 M50 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
When bit 0 (MSM) of parameter No. 6009 is set to 0, PS0127 alarm

occurs.
When bit 0 (MSM) of parameter No. 6009 is set to 1, Macro Call using M
code is executed. And, Address T becomes an argument and #20 is
set to 123.0.
- 306 -
Explanation
When Special Macro Call using M code becomes possible because bit 0 (MSM) of parameter No. 6009 is
set to 1, the execution of macro call changes by the position in which M code for macro call is
commanded.
1. When M code for macro call is commanded at the head of the block
It operates as usual Macro Call.
For details, see Subsection "Macro Call Using an M Code".
2. When M code for macro call is commanded at the position of the block that is not the head
It operates as Special Macro Call using M code.
- Repetition
Address L is also used as an argument, so that no repetition count can be specified.
All addresses are treated as arguments. However, the specifiable addresses and specification range
conform to the specification address range of the CNC. Only argument specification I can be used.
When bit 2 (MAA) of parameter No. 6009 is set to 1, address G becomes an argument, too.
1. When bit 2 (MAA) of parameter No. 6009 is set to 0
All addresses other than M for call code, G and L are treated as arguments. However, the specifiable
addresses and specification range conform to the specification address range of the CNC. Only
argument specification I can be used.
A #1 J #5 S #19
B #2 K #6 T #20
C #3 L *2 U #21
D #7 M #13 *3 V #22
F #9 N #14 *5 X #24
G *1 P #16 Y #25
H #11 Q #17 Z #26
I #4 R #18
*1: Even if address G is commanded, PS alarm does not occur. And address G does not become an
argument.
*2: Address L does not become a number of times in which the macro call is repeated, and does not
become an argument.
*5: Address N is passed to variable #14, and becomes a sequence number.
2. When bit 2 (MAA) of parameter No. 6009 is set to 1

All addresses are treated as arguments. However, the specifiable addresses and specification range
conform to the specification address range of the CNC. Only argument specification I can be used.
Address G, L and M for call code become arguments, too.
A #1 J #5 S #19
B #2 K #6 T #20
C #3 L #12 *2 U #21
D #7 M #13 *3 V #22
E #8 M(Call code) #27 *4 W #23
F #9 N #14 *5 X #24
- 307 -

G #28 to #32 *1 P #16 Y #25
H #11 Q #17 Z #26
I #4 R #18
*1: The first five addresses G in ascending order of G code groups are used as arguments and
passed to variables #28 to #32.
*2: Address L is passed to variable #12, and does not become a number of times in which the
macro call is repeated.
*4: Address M for call code is passed to variable #27.
*5: Address N is passed to variable #14, and becomes a sequence number.
Limitation
- To call another program in a program called using an M code, only G65, M98, G66, or G66.1 can be
used normally.
- When bit 6 (GMP) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1, a call using a G code can be performed in a
- When multiple call commands are specified in the same block, the first call code is selected.
16.10.10 Subprogram Call Using an M Code

By setting an M code number used to call a subprogram (macro program) in a parameter, the macro
program can be called in the same way as with a subprogram call (M98).
O0001 O9001
; ;
: :
M03 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Explanation
By setting an M code number from 3 to 99999999 used to call subprogram O9001 to O9009 in the
corresponding parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079, the subprogram can be called in the same way as with M98.

Parameter number Program number
6071 O9001
6072 O9002
6073 O9003
6074 O9004
6075 O9005
6076 O9006
6077 O9007
6078 O9008
6079 O9009
- Repetition
Argument specification is not allowed.
- 308 -
- M code
An M code in a macro program that has been called is treated as an ordinary M code.
Limitation
• To call another program in a program called using an M code, only G65, M98, G66, or G66.1 can be
used normally.
16.10.11 Subprogram Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple

Definitions)
By setting the starting M code number used to call a subprogram, the number of the starting subprogram
to be called, and the number of definitions, subprogram calls using multiple M codes can be defined.
Explanation
As many subprograms as the number specified in parameter No. 6046 can be called using as many M
indicates the starting M code number and the numeric value set in parameter No. 6045 indicates the
starting subprogram number. To disable this type of call, set 0 in parameter No. 6046.
[Example]
Set parameter No. 6044 to 80000000, parameter No. 6045 to 30000000, and parameter
No. 6046 to 100.
M80000000 → O3000
M80000001 → O3001
M80000002 → O3002
:
M80000099 → O3099
Subprogram calls for 100 combinations are defined as shown above.
NOTE
<2> (No. 6045 + No. 6046 - 1) > 99999999
2 If the M code set in parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079 to call the corresponding
subprogram is within the M code range for calling subprograms using multiple M
codes, the subprogram corresponding to the M code set in parameters Nos.
16.10.12 Subprogram Calls Using a T Code

By enabling subprograms to be called with a T code in a parameter, a subprogram can be called each time
the T code is specified in the machining program.
O0001 ; O9000 ;
: :
T23 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Bit 5 (TCS) of parameter No. 6001 = 1
- 309 -
Explanation
- Call
By setting bit 5 (TCS) of parameter No. 6001 to 1, subprogram O9000 can be called each time a T code is
specified in a machining program. A T code specified in a machining program is assigned to common
variable #149.
- Repetition
Limitation
• To call another program in a program called using a T code, only G65, M98, G66, or G66.1 can be
used normally.
program called using a T code.
16.10.13 Subprogram Calls Using an S Code

By enabling subprograms to be called with an S code in a parameter, a subprogram can be called each
time the S code is specified in the machining program.
O0001 ; O9029 ;
: :
S23 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Bit 1 (SCS) of parameter No. 6007 = 1
Explanation
- Call
By setting bit 1 (SCS) of parameter No. 6007 to 1, subprogram O9029 can be called each time a S code is
specified in a machining program. An S code specified in a machining program is assigned to common
variable #147.
- Repetition
Limitation
• To call another program in a program called using an S code, only G65, M98, G66, or G66.1 can be
used normally.
program called using an S code.
16.10.14 Subprogram Calls Using a Secondary Auxiliary Function

By enabling subprograms to be called with a secondary auxiliary function in a parameter, a subprogram
can be called each time the secondary auxiliary function is specified in the machining program.
- 310 -
O0001 ; O9028 ;
: :
B23 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Bit 2 (BCS) of parameter No. 6007 = 1
Explanation
- Call
By setting bit 2 (BCS) of parameter No. 6007 to 1, subprogram O9028 can be called each time a
secondary auxiliary function code is specified in a machining program. A secondary auxiliary function
specified in a machining program is assigned to common variable #146.
- Repetition
Limitation
• To call another program in a program called using a second auxiliary function, only G65, M98, G66,
or G66.1 can be used normally.
program called using a second auxiliary function.
16.10.15 Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address

By enabling subprograms to be called with a specific address in a parameter, a subprogram can be called
each time the specific address is specified in the machining program.
O0001 ; O9004 ;(#146=100.)

: :
B100. ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Parameter No.6090=66(B)
Explanation
- Call
By setting the code (ASCII code converted to decimal) corresponding to a specific address in parameter
No. 6090 or No. 6091, the custom macro program, O9004 or O9005, corresponding to each parameter can
be called when the specific address is specified in a machining program. The code value corresponding to
a specific address specified in a machining program is assigned to the common variables (#146, #147).
The table below indicates the addresses that can be set.
Address Parameter setting Address Parameter setting

A 65 P 80
B 66 Q 81
D 68 R 82
F 70 S 83
H 72 T 84
I 73 V 86
- 311 -
Address Parameter setting Address Parameter setting

J 74 X 88
K 75 Y 89
L 76 Z 90
M 77
NOTE
When address L is set, the number of repetitions cannot be set.
- Correspondence between parameter numbers and program numbers and

between the parameter numbers and common variables
Parameter number Program number Common variable
6090 O9004 #146
6091 O9005 #147
- Repetition
Limitation
• To call another program in a program called using a specific code, only G65, M98, G66, or G66.1
can be used normally.
program called using a specific code.
Sample program
By using the subprogram call function that uses M codes, the cumulative usage time of each tool is
measured.
Conditions
• The cumulative usage time of each of tools T01 to T05 is measured.
No measurement is made for tools with numbers greater than T05.
• The following variables are used to store the tool numbers and measured times:
#501 Cumulative usage time of tool number 1

• Usage time starts being counted when the M03 command is specified and stops when M05 is
specified. System variable #3002 is used to measure the time during which the cycle start lamp is on.
The time during which the machine is stopped by feed hold and single block stop operation is not
counted, but the time used to change tools and pallets is included.
Operation check
- Parameter setting
Set 3 in parameter No.6071, and set 5 in parameter No.6072.
- 312 -
- Variable value setting

Set 0 in variables #501 to #505.
- Program that calls a macro program

O0001;
T01 M06;
M03;
:
M05;.................... Changes #501.
T02 M06;
M03;
:
M05;.................... Changes #502.
T03 M06;
M03;
:
M05;.................... Changes #503.
T04 M06;
M03;
:
M05;.................... Changes #504.
T05 M06;
M03;
:
M05;.................... Changes #505.
M30;
- Macro program (program called)

O9001(M03); ....................................... Macro to start counting
M01;
IF[#4120 EQ 0]GOTO 9; ....................... No tool specified
IF[#4120 GT 5]GOTO 9; ....................... Out-of-range tool number
#3002=0; ....................................... Clears the timer.
N9 M03; ....................................... Rotates the spindle in the forward direction.
M99;
O9002(M05); ....................................... Macro to end counting

M01;
IF[#4120 EQ 0]GOTO 9; ....................... No tool specified
IF[#4120 GT 5]GOTO 9; ....................... Out-of-range tool number
#[500+#4120]=#3002+#[500+#4120]; .. Calculates cumulative time.
N9 M05; ...................................................... Stops the spindle.

M99;
16.11 MACRO CALL ARGUMENT FOR AXIS NAME EXPANSION

Macro argument can be specified to the address of axis name expansion. By setting the parameter No.
11647, the address of axis name expansion is allocated to local variable number(#1 - #33).
This function is effective to not only an axis name expansion but also a usual axis address of one
character. A usual axis address of one character can allocate to the local variable number (#1-#33).
- 313 -
Example
In case of the following axis configuration, if all arguments are specified, the
relationship between the parameter No. 11647 and local variable number is as
follows.
Parameter
Axis name Local variable
(No.11647)
XA1 (*1) 1 Argument is set to #1
Y 0 Argument is set to #25
Z 21 Argument is set to #21
C 0 Argument is set to #3
C2 (*1) 22 Argument is set to #22
(*1) Axis name expansion
G65 XA1=10. XA2=20. Y30. Z40. C50. C2=60. P1000；
(Variable)
#1: 10.0
#2: 20.0
#25: 30.0
#21: 40.0
#3: 50.0
#22: 60.0
Allocating the same local variable

Please do not allocate the same local variable to 2 or more arguments. If the same local variable is
allocated, the argument specified later becomes effective.
Example
When 2 arguments of XA1=10. and D20.0 are commanded to local variable #7,
the later argument D20.0 becomes effective.
Parameter
(No.11647)
G65 XA1=10. D20.0 P1000；
(Variable)
#7: 20.0
Using the same axis name

When using the same axis name, the parameter No. 11647 setting of the smallest axis number becomes
effective. The setting of the other axis becomes invalid.
- 314 -
Example
When using the same axis name and using the axis name expansion, the
relationship between the parameter No. 11647 and local variable number is as
follows.
Parameter
(No.11647)
XA1 (*1) 0 The argument for XA1 is invalid
XA1 (*1) 2 Invalid setting
YA2 (*1) 3 Argument is set to #3
YA2 (*1) 4 Invalid setting
C 5 Argument is set to #5
C 6 Invalid setting
G65 XA1=10. YA2=20. C30. P1000 ;

Because the argument for XA1 is invalid, the alarm PS0129, “USE 'G' AS ARGUMENT”
occurs.
G65 YA2=20. C30. P1000 ;
(Variable)
#3: 20.0
#5: 30.0
The setting range of the parameter

The setting range of the parameter No. 11647 is 0,1-33. This corresponds to local variable number
(#1-#33). When other values are set, the setting of the axis is invalid. Therefore, when using the axis
name expansion, the alarm PS0129, “USE 'G' AS ARGUMENT” occurs by commanding the axis. If the
axis does not use the axis name expansion, the argument is assigned to original local variable (#1-#33).
16.12 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENTS

For smooth machining, the CNC prereads the NC statement to be performed next. This operation is
referred to as buffering. For example, in prereading due to AI contour control, up to 30 blocks of NC
statements are buffered.
In the cutter compensation mode (G41 or G42), the CNC prereads the NC statements in at least three
blocks ahead to calculate intersections.
Macro statements for arithmetic expressions and conditional branches are processed as soon as they are
read into the buffer. Therefore, the timing of the macro statement execution is not always the specified
order.
At the blocks containing M00, M01, M02 or M30, blocks containing M-codes for which buffering is
suppressed by setting parameters Nos. 3411 to 3420, 3421 to 3432, and 11290 to 11299, and blocks
containing prevention buffering G codes such as G33 or G53, the CNC stops to preread the NC statement
after that. Then, the stop of the macro statement execution is guaranteed until such M codes or G codes
complete its execution.
Explanation
- When the next block is buffered
Example 1:
Prereading the next block when the system is not in AI contour control mode or cutter compensation
mode (G41, G42)
- 315 -
N1 X100.0 ; Block being executed
N2 #1=100 ;
N3 #2=200 ; Block read into the buffer
N4 Y200.0 ;
:
NC statement execution N1 N4
Macro statement execution N2 N3
Buffer N4
Time
While N1 is being executed, the next NC statement in N4 is read into the buffer.
The macro statements in N2 and N3 between N1 and N4 are processed while N1 is being executed.
Example 2:
In AI contour control mode
G05.1Q1 ;
N1 G01 X100.0 F100 ; Block being executed
N2 #1=100 ;
N3 #2=200 ;
N4 Y100.0 ;
: Block read into the buffer
Nn Y150.0 ;
N n+1 #3=300 ;
N n+2 X200.0 ;
:
N1 N4
NC statement
execution
N2 N3 N n+1
Macro statement
execution
N4 Nn N n+2
Time
While N1 is being executed, the NC statements in up to the subsequent 30 blocks (Nn+2) are read
into the buffer. The macro statements in N2, N3, and Nn+1 between the blocks are processed while
N1 is being executed.
- 316 -
Example 3:
In cutter compensation mode (G41, G42)
N1 G01 G41 X100.0 F100 Dd ; Block being executed
N2 #1=100 ;
N3 Y100.0 ;
N4 #2=200 ;
N5 Y150.0 ; Block read into the buffer
N6 #3=300 ;
N7 X200.0 ;
:
N1 N3
NC statement
N2 N4 N6
Macro statement
N3 N5 N7
Buffer
Time
While N1 is being executed, the NC statements in the subsequent three blocks (blocks up to N7) are
read into the buffer.
The macro statements in N2, N4, and N6 between the blocks are processed while N1 is being
executed.
- When the next block is not buffered (M codes that are not buffered, G33, etc.)
N1 G33 X100.0 ; Block being executed
N2 #1=100 ;
:
N1
NC statement execution
N2
Macro statement execution
Buffer
Time
CAUTION
In case that you need to execute the macro statement after completing the block
just before the macro statement, specify M code or G code that is not buffered
just before the macro statement. Specially, in case of reading/writing the system
variables to control signals, coordinates, offset value, etc., it may different system
variable data by the timing of the NC statement execution. To avoid this
phenomenon, specify such M codes or G codes before the macro statement, if
necessary.
Diagnosis data
Diagnosis 1493 Number of macro statement blocks executed by custom and execution macros
[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] Block
The number of macro statement blocks executed by custom and execution macros per
1024 ms is displayed.
This data provides an indication of the actual macro statement processing speed.
- 317 -
16.13 REGISTERING CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMS

Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms. They can be registered and edited in the same way
as subprograms. The storage capacity is determined by the total length of tape used to store both custom
macros and subprograms.
16.14 CODES AND RESERVED WORDS USED IN CUSTOM

MACROS
In addition to the codes used in ordinary programs, the following codes are used in custom macro
programs.
Explanation
- Codes
(1) When the ISO code is used or when bit 4 (ISO) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0
(The codes are represented in hexadecimal.)
Meaning Code Meaning Code
* 0AAh ? 03Fh
= 0BDh @ 0C0h
# 0A3h & 0A6h
[ 0DBh _ 05Fh
] 0DDh O 0CFh
(2) When the EIA code is used or when the ISO code is used with bit 4 (ISO) of parameter No. 6008 set
to 1
Meaning Code Meaning Code
* Code set in parameter No. 6010 ? Code set in parameter No. 6015
= Code set in parameter No. 6011 @ Code set in parameter No. 6016
# Code set in parameter No. 6012 & Code set in parameter No. 6017
[ Code set in parameter No. 6013 _ Code set in parameter No. 6018
] Code set in parameter No. 6014
For O, the same code as for O indicating a program number is used. Set a hole pattern for each of *, =, #,
[, ], ?, @, &, and _ in the ISO or EIA code in the corresponding parameters Nos. 6010 to 6018.
The code 00h cannot be used. The code indicating an alphabetic character can be used for the code
indicating a character listed above, but the code can be no longer used to indicate the original character.
- Reserved words
The following reserved words are used in custom macros:
AND, OR, XOR, MOD, EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, LE,
SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, ATN, SQRT, SQR, ABS, BIN, BCD, ROUND, RND, FIX,
FUP, LN, EXP, POW, ADP, IF, GOTO, WHILE, DO, END, BPRNT, DPRNT, POPEN, PCLOS,
SETVN, AX, AXNUM, PRM
System variable (constant) names and registered common variable names are also used as reserved words.
16.15 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS

In addition to the standard custom macro commands, the following macro commands are available. They
are referred to as external output commands.
• BPRNT
• DPRNT
• POPEN
- 318 -
• PCLOS
These commands are provided to output variable values and characters through the the input/output
interface. In the external output commands, RS232-C, Memory card, USB memory, Data Server, and
Embedded Ethernet can be specified for an external input/output device by the parameter No. 0020.
Explanation
Specify these commands in the following order:
Open command: POPEN

Before specifying a sequence of data output commands, specify this command to establish a
connection to an external input/output device.
Data output command: BPRNT or DPRNT
Specify necessary data output.
Close command: PCLOS
When all data output commands have completed, specify PCLOS to release a connection to an
external input/output device.
- Open command POPEN

The POPEN command establishes a connection to an external input/output device. It must be specified
before a sequence of data output commands.
NOTE
1 When RS232-C is used as an external input/output device and the specification
number of the parameter No. 102, 112 or 122 is set to 0, the CNC outputs a DC2
control code by POPEN command.
2 When Memory card, USB memory, Data Server, or Embedded Ethernet is used
as an external input/output device, the file is opened by POPEN command.
Please refer to the later explanation about the file name.
- Data output command BPRNT

The BPRNT command outputs characters and variable values in binary.
BPRNT [ a #b [c] … ]
Number of significant decimal places Variable

Variable
Character
(i) Specified characters are output.
Specifiable characters are as follows:
• Letters (A to Z)
• Numbers
• Special characters (*, /, +, -, ?, @, &, _)
NOTE
1 An asterisk (*) is output by a space code.
2 When specifying RS232-C as an external input/output device, specified
characters are converted to the codes according to the setting data (bit 1 (ISO)
of parameter No. 0000) that is output at that time. When using ?, @, &, and/or _,
use the ISO code as the output code (setting data (ISO) = 1).
(ii) All variables are stored with a decimal point. Specify a variable followed by the number of
significant decimal places enclosed in brackets. A variable value is treated as 2-word (32-bit) data,
including the decimal digits. It is output as binary data starting from the highest byte.
- 319 -
(iii) When specified data has been output, an EOB code is output.
NOTE
When specifying RS232-C as an external input/output device, specified EOB
code is converted to the codes according to the setting data (bit 1 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0000) that is output at that time.
(iv) <Null> variables are regarded as 0.
Example
BPRNT [ C** X#100 [3] Y#101 [3] M#10 [0] ]
Variable value
#100=0.40956
#101=-1638.4
#10=12.34
are output as follows:
C3 A0 A0 D8 00 00 01 9A 59 FF E7 00 00 4D 00 00 00 0C 0A
↓ ↓
C sp sp X0000019A YFFE70000 M0000000C LF
(**) (410) (-1638400) (12) (;)
- Data output command DPRNT

DPRNT [a #b [c d] … ]
Number of significant decimal places
Number of significant digits in the integer part
Variable
Character
The DPRNT command outputs characters and each digit in the value of a variable.
(i) For an explanation of the DPRNT command, see Items (i), (iii), and (iv) for the BPRNT command.
(ii) When outputting a variable, specify # followed by the variable number, then specify the number of
digits in the integer part and the number of decimal places enclosed in brackets.
For the value of a variable, as many codes as the specified number of digits are output according to
the settings one by one, starting with the highest digit. The decimal point is also output using the set
code.
Each variable must be a numeric value consisting of up to nine digits. When high-order digits are
zeros, these zeros are not output if bit 1 (PRT) of parameter No. 6001 is 1. If parameter PRT is 0, a
space code is output each time a zero is encountered.
When the number of decimal places is not zero, digits in the decimal part are always output. If the
number of decimal places is zero, no decimal point is output.
When bit 1 (PRT) of parameter No. 6001 is 0, a space code is output to indicate a positive number
instead of +; if parameter PRT is 1, no code is output.
- 320 -
Example
DPRNT [ X#2 [53] Y#5 [53] T#30 [20] ]
Variable value
#2=128.47398
#5=-91.2
#30=123.456
are output as follows:
(1) Parameter PRT (No.6001#1) = 0

D8 A0 A0 A0 B1 B2 B8 2E B4 B7 B4 59 2D A0 A0 A0 39 B1 2E B2 30 30 D4 A0 B2 33 0A
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
X sp sp sp 128.474 Y- sp sp sp 91.200 T sp 023 LF
(2) Parameter PRT (No.6001#1) = 1

D8 B1 B2 B8 2E B4 B7 B4 59 2D 39 B1 2E B2 30 30 D4 A0 B2 33 0A
↓
X128.474 Y-91.200 T023 LF
- Close command PCLOS

The PCLOS command releases a connection to an external input/output device. Specify this command
when all data output commands have terminated.
NOTE
1 When RS232-C is used as an external input/output device and the specification
number of the parameter No.102, 112 or 122 is set to 0, the CNC outputs a DC4
control code by PCLOS command.
2 When Memory card, USB memory, Data Server, or Embedded Ethernet is used
as an external input/output device, the file is closed by PCLOS command.
File name
When Memory card, USB memory, Data Server, or Embedded Ethernet is used as an external
input/output device, the created file name is from “PRNT0000.DAT” to “PRNT9999.DAT”. The
numerical part of the file name is sequentially counted from 0000 to 9999. When the CNC is turned off,
the number is counted from 0 again. But the number can be memorized and continuously counted by the
bit 7 (SFN) of parameter No. 6019.
Moreover, the created file name can be fixed as “MCR_PRNT.TXT” by the bit 3 (OFN) of parameter No.
6019.
NOTE
1 If the file which has the same file name already exists when the file is created
into an external input/output device, the following operation is done by an
In case of memory card : Alarm SR1973 is issued.
In case of USB memory : The file is overwritten.
In case of Data Server (Storage mode) : Alarm PS2032 is issued.
In case of Data Server (FTP mode) : The file is overwritten. (NOTE2)
In case of Embedded Ethernet : The file is overwritten. (NOTE2)
If a file with the same name already exists, the external output command cannot
use bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308, for whether to overwrite the file or
cancel overwriting, cannot be used.
- 321 -
NOTE
2 This operation depends on the specification of FTP server software on the Host
computer. Generally, the file is overwritten. Please refer to the specification of
the FTP server software for details.
- Notice
NOTE
1 When an external input/output device is RS232-C, it is necessary to set the
settings (baud-rate etc.) for RS232-C interface. Moreover, set 0 or 4 to the
specification number of the input/output device of the parameters Nos. 102, 112
and 122.
2 It is not necessary to always specify the open command (POPEN), data output
command (BPRNT, DPRNT), and close command (PCLOS) together. Once an
open command is specified at the beginning of a program, it does not need to be
specified again except after a close command was specified.
3 Be sure to specify open commands and close commands in pairs. Specify the
close command at the end of the program. However, do not specify a close
command if no open command has been specified.
4 When a reset operation is performed while commands are being output by a
data output command, output is stopped and subsequent data is erased.
Therefore, when a reset operation is performed by a code such as M30 at the
end of a program that performs data output, specify a close command at the end
of the program so that processing such as M30 is not performed until all data is
output.
5 When an external input/output device is Data Server (FTP mode) or Embedded
Ethernet, the FTP is used. Therefore, it is necessary to execute the FTP server
on the personal computer.
Moreover, please note that there is a possibility that the FTP communication is
aborted by the security function of the personal computer side when a time that
the data doesn't flow is long.
16.16 RESTRICTIONS
- Sequence number search
A custom macro program cannot be searched for a sequence number.
- Single block
Even while a macro program is being executed, blocks can be stopped in the single block mode.
A block containing a macro call command (G66, G66.1, Ggg, Mmm, or G67) does not stop even when
the single block mode is on.
Whether blocks containing arithmetic and logic operation commands and control commands are stopped
depends on the settings of bits 5 (SBM) and 7 (SBV) of parameter No. 6000 as shown in the following
table.
Bit 5 (SBM) of parameter No. 6000
0 1
Not stopped when the single block mode Can be stopped in the single block mode.
0
is on. (Variable #3003 cannot be used to
Bit 7 (SBV) of
Can be stopped in the single bock mode. disable single block stop. Single block
parameter No. 6000
1 (Variable #3003 can be used to enable or stop is always enabled.)
disable single block stop.)
- 322 -
Note that when a single block stop occurs at a macro statement in cutter compensation mode, the
statement is assumed to be a block that does not involve movement, and proper compensation cannot be
performed in some cases. (Strictly speaking, the block is regarded as specifying a movement with a travel
distance 0.)

A / appearing in the middle of an <expression> (enclosed in brackets [ ] on the right-hand side of an
arithmetic expression) is regarded as a division operator; it is not regarded as the specifier for an optional
block skip code.
- Operation in EDIT mode

By setting bit 0 (NE8) of parameter No.3202 and bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No.3202 to 1, deletion and
editing are disabled for custom macro programs and subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999
and 9000 to 9999. This prevents registered custom macro programs and subprograms from being
destroyed by accident. When the entire memory is cleared, the contents of memory such as custom macro
programs are deleted.
- Reset
With a reset operation, local variables and common variables #100 to #199 are cleared to null values.
They can be prevented from clearing by setting bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No.6001. System variables
#100 to #199 are not cleared.
A reset operation clears any called states of custom macro programs and subprograms, and any DO states,
and returns control to the main program.
- Feed hold
When a feed hold is enabled during execution of a macro statement, the machine stops after execution of
the macro statement. The machine also stops when a reset or alarm occurs.
- DNC operation
The control commands (such as GOTO and WHILE-DO) cannot be executed during DNC operation.
However, this restriction is removed when a program registered in program memory is called during DNC
operation.
- Constant values that can be used in <expression>

+0.00000000001 to +999999999999
-999999999999 to -0.00000000001
The number of significant digits is 12 (decimal).
If this range is exceeded, an alarm PS0004, “INVALID BREAK POINT OF WORDS” occurs.
- Comment section
Usually, the position in which comment section can be inserted in macro statements is as follows.
(ABC) #100 = 1; Head of the block
#100 = 1(ABC); End of the block
N01 (ABC) #100 = 1; Just behind of the sequence number
If bit 3 (NCM) of parameter No. 6020 is set to 1, the position in which comment section can be inserted in
macro statements as follows, too.
#100(ABC) = 1; Just behind of variable number
#100 = #101 +1.(ABC) *#102; Just behind of numeric values
#100 = [#_UIL[1]](ABC) *100.; Just behind of the name of variable
In word editing, it might become difficult to do the program edit since comment section is inserted. Such
a case uses character editing.
Comment section cannot be inserted in the character string such as variable number, numeric values,
name of variable, functions and control commands.
- 323 -
Example that cannot be inserted

#(ABC)100 = 1;
#100 = [#_UIL(ABC)[1]] *100.;
IF[ #100 EQ 1 ] GO(ABC)TO99;
16.17 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO

When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal UINT
from the machine.
This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program an interrupt command
in the following format:
Format
M96Pxxxxxxxx ; Enables custom macro interrupt
M97 ; Disables custom macro interrupt
Explanation
Use of the interruption type custom macro function allows the user to call a program during execution of
an arbitrary block of another program. This allows programs to be operated to match situations which
vary from time to time.
(1) When a tool abnormality is detected, processing to handle the abnormality is started by an external
signal.
(2) A sequence of machining operations is interrupted by another machining operation without the
cancellation of the current operation.
(3) At regular intervals, information on current machining is read.
:
Listed above are examples like adaptive control applications of the interruption type custom macro
function.
M96 Pxxxxxxxx;
Interrupt signal
(UINT) * O xxxxxxxx;
Interrupt signal
(UINT) **
M99 (Pxxxxxxxx) ;
Nxxxxxxxx ;
M97 ; Interrupt signal

(UINT) *
Fig 16.17 Interruption type custom macro function
When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program operation can be interrupted by an

interrupt signal UINT input to execute the program specified by Pxxxx. When the interrupt signal UINT
(marked with an asterisk (*) in Fig 16.17 ) is input during execution of the interrupt program or after M97,
it is ignored.
- 324 -
16.17.1 Specification Method

Explanation
- Interrupt conditions
A custom macro interrupt is available only during program execution. It is enabled under the following
conditions
• When memory operation, DNC operation, or MDI operation is selected
• When STL (start lamp) is on
• When a custom macro interrupt is not currently being processed
A macro interrupt cannot be performed during manual operation.
- Specification
Generally, the custom macro interrupt function is used by specifying M96 to enable the interrupt signal
UINT and M97 to disable the signal.
Once M96 is specified, a custom macro interrupt can be initiated by the input of the interrupt signal UINT
until M97 is specified or the CNC is reset. After M97 is specified or the CNC is reset, no custom macro
interrupts are initiated even when the interrupt signal UINT is input. The interrupt signal UINT is ignored
until another M96 command is specified.
M96 M97 M96
1
0
Interrupt signal
(UINT)
Effective interrupt
input signal
When UINT is kept on
The interrupt signal UINT becomes valid after M96 is specified. Even when the signal is input in M97
mode, it is ignored. When the signal input in M97 mode is kept on until M96 is specified, a custom macro
interrupt is initiated as soon as M96 is specified (only when the status-triggered scheme is employed);
when the edge-triggered scheme is employed, the custom macro interrupt is not initiated even when M96
is specified.
NOTE
For the status-triggered and edge-triggered schemes, see the Subsection,
“Details of Functions”.
16.17.2 Details of Functions

Explanation
- Subprogram-type interrupt and macro-type interrupt
There are two types of custom macro interrupts: Subprogram-type interrupts and macro-type interrupts.
The interrupt type used is selected by bit 5 (MSB) of parameter No.6003.
(a) Subprogram-type interrupt: When bit 5 (MSB) of parameter No.6003 is set to 1

An interrupt program is called as a subprogram.
This means that the levels of local variables remain unchanged before and after the interrupt.
- 325 -
This interrupt is not included in the nesting level of subprogram calls.

(b) Macro-type interrupt: When bit 5 (MSB) of parameter No.6003 is set to 0
An interrupt program is called as a custom macro.
This means that the levels of local variables change before and after the interrupt.
The interrupt is not included in the nesting level of custom macro calls.
When a subprogram call or a custom macro call is performed within the interrupt program, this call
is included in the nesting level of subprogram calls or custom macro calls.
Arguments cannot be passed from the current program even when the custom macro interrupt is a
macro-type interrupt. The local variables immediately after interruption are all cleared to null.
- M codes for custom macro interrupt control

In general, custom macro interrupts are controlled by M96 and M97. However, these M codes, may
already being used for other purposes (such as an M function or macro M code call) by some machine
tool builders.
For this reason, bit 4 (MPR) of parameter No.6003 is provided to set M codes for custom macro interrupt
control.
When specifying this parameter to use the custom macro interrupt control M codes set by parameters, set
parameters Nos.6033 and 6034 as follows:
Set the M code to enable custom macro interrupts in parameters Nos.6033, and set the M code to disable
custom macro interrupts in parameter 6034.
When specifying that parameter-set M codes are not used, M96 and M97 are used as the custom macro
control M codes regardless of the settings of parameters Nos.6033 and 6034.
The M codes used for custom macro interrupt control are processed internally (they are not output to
external units). However, in terms of program compatibility, it is undesirable to use M codes other than
M96 and M97 to control custom macro interrupts.
- Custom macro interrupts and NC statements

When performing a custom macro interrupt, the user may want to interrupt the NC statement being
executed, or the user may not want to perform the interrupt until the execution of the current block is
completed. Bit 2 (MIN) of parameter No.6003)is used to select whether to perform interrupts even in the
middle of a block or to wait until the end of the block. The type of interrupt performed even in the middle
of a block is called type I and the type of interrupt performed at the end of the block is called type II.
CAUTION
For interrupt type I, operation after control is returned differs depending on
whether the interrupt program contains an NC statement.
When the program number block contains EOB (;), it is assumed to contain an
NC statement.
(Program containing an NC statement) (Program containing no NC statement)
O0013; O0013#101=#5041;
#101=#5041; #102=#5042;
#102=#5042; #103=#5043;
#103=#5043; M99;
M99;
Type I (when an interrupt is performed even in the middle of a block)

(i) When the interrupt signal UINT is input, any movement or dwell being performed is stopped
immediately and the interrupt program is executed.
(ii) If there are NC statements in the interrupt program, the command in the interrupted block is lost and
the NC statement in the interrupt program is executed. When control is returned to the interrupted
program, the program is restarted from the next block after the interrupted block.
(iii) If there are no NC statements in the interrupt program, control is returned to the interrupted program
by M99, then the program is restarted from the command in the interrupted block.
- 326 -
Interrupted by macro interrupt
Execution in progress
Normal program
CNC command restart;
Interrupt signal when there are no NC statements
(UINT) input in the interrupt program
Custom macro interrupt
Fig. 16.17.2 (a) Custom macro interrupt and NC command (type I)
Type II (when an interrupt is performed at the end of the block)

(i) If the block being executed is not a block that consists of several cycle operations such as a drilling
canned cycle and automatic reference position return (G28), an interrupt is performed as follows:
When an interrupt signal UINT is input, macro statements in the interrupt program are executed
immediately unless an NC statement is encountered in the interrupt program. NC statements are not
executed until the current block is completed.
(ii) If the block being executed consists of several cycle operations, an interrupt is performed as follows:
When the last movement in the cycle operations is started, macro statements in the interrupt program
are executed unless an NC statement is encountered. NC statements are executed after all cycle
operations are completed.
Normal program
Interrupt signal (UINT) input
Custom macro interrupt NC statement in the

interrupt program
Fig. 16.17.2 (b) Custom macro interrupt and NC command (type II)
NOTE
During execution of a program for cycle operations, interrupt type II is performed
regardless of whether bit 2 (MIN) of parameter No. 6003 is set to 0 or 1. Cycle
operations are available for the following functions:
<1> Automatic reference position return
<2> Tool radius compensation (generating multiple blocks using the specified
block such as when the tool moves around the outside of an acute angle)
<3> Normal direction control
- Conditions for enabling and disabling the custom macro interrupt signal
The interrupt signal becomes valid after execution starts of a block that contains M96 for enabling custom
macro interrupts. The signal becomes invalid when execution starts of a block that contains M97.
While an interrupt program is being executed, the interrupt signal becomes invalid. The signal become
valid when the execution of the block that immediately follows the interrupted block in the main program
is started after control returns from the interrupt program. In type I, if the interrupt program consists of
- 327 -
only macro statements, the interrupt signal becomes valid when execution of the interrupted block is
started after control returns from the interrupt program.
- Custom macro interrupt signal UINT

There are two schemes for custom macro interrupt signal UINT input: The status-triggered scheme and
edge-triggered scheme. When the status-triggered scheme is used, the signal is valid when it is on. When
the edge triggered scheme is used, the signal becomes valid on the rising edge when it switches from off
to on status.
One of the two schemes is selected with bit 3 (TSE) of parameter No.6003.
When the status-triggered scheme is selected by this parameter, a custom macro interrupt is generated if
the interrupt signal UINT is on at the time the signal becomes valid. By keeping the interrupt signal UINT
on, the interrupt program can be executed repeatedly.
When the edge-triggered scheme is selected, the interrupt signal UINT becomes valid only on its rising
edge. Therefore, the interrupt program is executed only momentarily (in cases when the program consists
of only macro statements). When the status-triggered scheme is inappropriate, or when a custom macro
interrupt is to be performed just once for the entire program (in this case, the interrupt signal may be kept
on), the edge-triggered scheme is useful.
Except for the specific applications mentioned above, use of either scheme results in the same effects. The
time from signal input until a custom macro interrupt is executed does not vary between the two schemes.
In the example shown in Fig. 16.17.2 (c), an interrupt is executed four times when the status-triggered
scheme is used; when the edge-triggered scheme is used, the interrupt is executed just once.
1
Interrupt signal (UINT) Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt

execution execution execution Interrupt
execution
Status-triggered scheme
Interrupt execution
Edge-triggered scheme
Fig. 16.17.2 (c) Custom macro interrupt signal
- Return from a custom macro interrupt

To return control from a custom macro interrupt to the interrupted program, specify M99. A sequence
number in the interrupted program can also be specified using address P. If this is specified, the program
is searched from the beginning for the specified sequence number. Control is returned to the first
sequence number found.
- 328 -
NOTE
When an M99 block consists only of address O, N, P, L, or M, this block is
regarded as belonging to the previous block in the program. Therefore, a
single-block stop does not occur for this block. In terms of programming, the
following <1> and <2> are basically the same. (The difference is whether Gxx is
executed before M99 is recognized.)
<1> Gxx Xxxx ;
M99 ;
<2> Gxx Xxxx M99 ;
- Custom macro interrupt and modal information

A custom macro interrupt is different from a normal program call. It is initiated by an interrupt signal
UINT during program execution. In general, any modifications of modal information made by the
interrupt program should not affect the interrupted program.
For this reason, even when modal information is modified by the interrupt program, the modal
information before the interrupt is restored when control is returned to the interrupted program by M99.
When control is returned from the interrupt program to the interrupted program by M99 Pxxxxxxxx,
however, modal information can again be controlled by the program. In this case, the new continuous
information modified by the interrupt program is passed to the interrupted program.
In this case, take the following action as required:

<1> The interrupt program provides modal information to be used after control is returned to the
interrupted program.
<2> After control is returned to the interrupted program, modal information is specified again as
necessary.
{ΔΔΔΔ
M96 Pxxxxxxxx ; {xxxxxxxx ;
Interrupt signal (UINT)
Modify modal information
(Without P specification)
Modal information remains
unchanged before and after M99 (Pxxxxxxxx) ;
the interrupt.
(With P specification)
Nxxxxxxxx ;
The new modal information modified by the interrupt program is present.
Fig. 16.17.2 (d) Custom macro interrupt and modal information
Modal information when control is returned by M99

The modal information present before the interrupt becomes valid. The new modal information modified
by the interrupt program is made invalid.
- 329 -
Modal information when control is returned by M99 Pxxxxxxxx

The new modal information modified by the interrupt program remains valid even after control is
returned.
Modal information which was valid in the interrupted block

The old modal information which was valid in the interrupted block can be read using custom macro
system variables #4401 to #4530.
System variable Modal information which was valid when a custom macro interrupt was generated
#4401 G code (group 01)
: :
#4421 G code (group 21)
#4502 B code
#4507 D code
#4508 E code
#4509 F code
#4511 H code
#4513 M code
#4514 Sequence number
#4515 Program number
#4519 S code
#4520 T code
#4530 Additional workpiece coordinate system number
- System variables (position information values) for the interrupt program

Position information can be read as follows.
Macro variable Condition Position information value
#5001 or above Until the first NC statement appears Coordinates of point A
After an NC statement with no move command appears Coordinates of point A'
After an NC statement with a move command appears Coordinates of the end point of the
move command
#5021 or above Machine coordinates of point B'
#5041 or above Workpiece coordinates of point B'
Tool center path

Interrupt generated
B
A’
Offset vector
- Custom macro interrupt and custom macro modal call

When the interrupt signal UINT is input and an interrupt program is called, the custom macro modal call
is canceled (G67). However, when G66 is specified in the interrupt program, the custom macro modal call
becomes valid. When control is returned from the interrupt program by M99, the modal call is restored to
the state it was in before the interrupt was generated. When control is returned by M99 Pxxxxxxxx;, the
modal call in the interrupt program remains valid.
- 330 -
NOTE
1 Alarm PS1101, “ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT.” occurs in the following
cases:
<1> An interrupt is generated in the programmable mirror image (G51.1) mode
and another G51.1 is specified in the interrupt program.
<2> An interrupt is generated in the coordinate system rotation (G84) mode and
another G84 is specified in the interrupt program.
<3> An interrupt is generated in the scaling (G51) mode and another G51 is
specified in the interrupt program.
- 331 -
17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
17 REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO

Chapter 17, "REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO", consists of the following sections:
17.1 TYPES OF REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS ..........................................................................334

17.2 VARIABLES ....................................................................................................................................339
17.3 ARITHMETIC AND LOGICAL OPERATION ..............................................................................345
17.4 CONTROL ON REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS ...................................................................346
17.5 MACRO CALL.................................................................................................................................352
17.6 OTHERS ...........................................................................................................................................353
17.7 AXIS CONTROL COMMAND .......................................................................................................354
17.8 NOTES..............................................................................................................................................363
17.9 LIMITATION ...................................................................................................................................364
Overview
Used with an NC program, the real time custom macro function controls peripheral axes and signals.
If a macro statement is used together with an NC statement, a program using the conventional custom
macro function executes the macro statement immediately when the macro statement is read. So, the
macro statement cannot be executed independently of the NC statement.
On the other hand, the real time custom macro function enables the following control operations when a
real time macro command (RTM command) is coded in an NC program.
• A real time macro command starts operation in synchronism with the NC statement and is executed
independently. During NC program execution, a real time macro command can be executed at the
same time.
• PMC interface signals can be read and written (with a restriction). In an NC program, a motion using
a signal as a trigger can be coded.
• Variables dedicated to a real time macro command can be read and written.
• A real time macro command can exercise axis control. (The option is required.)
• Multiple real time macro commands can be executed at the same time. Multiple real time custom
macro statements can be coded in an NC program and can be controlled independently of each other.
By using a real time custom macro, control on signals and peripheral axes can be programmed.
The example below turns on and off a signal and performs operation on a peripheral axis when machining
points are passed.
Peripheral axis Y
Xa=30 Xb=50 Xc=80
X-axis machining direction

ON OFF
Signal
Fig. 17 Signal and operation on a peripheral axis during machining (example)
During movement for machining along the X-axis in the Fig. 17 :

<1> When point Xa is passed, the G99.5 signal is set to 1.
→ Real time macro command 1
<2> When point Xb is passed, positioning is started on peripheral axis Y. → Real time macro command
2
<3> When point Xc is passed, the G99.5 signal is set to 0.
- 332 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO
→ Real time macro command 3
The operation above is programmed using real time macro commands.

Program
O0001 ;
G92 X0 ;
//1 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 30. ] #IOG[99,5] = 1 ;
//2 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 50.] ZDO ;
G91 G00 Y100 ;
ZEND ;
//3 ZEDGE [#100101GE 80. ] #IOG[99,5] = 0 ;
G90 G01 X200. F150 ;
M30 ;
The timing is as follows. (‘**’ represents the satisfaction of the condition.)
X coordinate 30 50 80
Peripheral axis Y operation
G99.5 signal
NC statement (machining)
G90 G01 X200. F150
Real time macro command 1

//1 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 30.] **
#IOG[99,5] = 1 ;

//2 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 50. ]
ZDO ; **
G91 G00 Y100 ;
ZEND ;

//3 ZEDGE [#100101 GE 80. ] **
#IOG[99,5] = 0 ;
Explanation
To use the real time custom macro function, a real time macro command (RTM command) is coded in an
NC program.
- Real time macro command (RTM command)

The real time macro command (RTM command) is a macro command that starts execution in phase with
an NC statement in the program. After the execution of a real time macro command starts, the RTM
command operates independently of the NC statement.
An RTM command is a statement dedicated to the real time custom macro function.
An RTM command consists of a set of one or more real time macro statements (RTM statements).
- Real time macro statement (RTM statement)

The real time macro statement (RTM statement) is a statement included in an RTM command.
One or more RTM statements make up an RTM command.
An RTM statement consists of a macro command and axis control command dedicated to the real time
custom macro function.
The axis control command of an RTM statement is an RTM statement including an address. This
command is used to exercise axis control.
- 333 -
Example
// ZDO ;
G91 G00 X100 ;
ZEND ;
(ZDO and ZEND are reserved words required for the axis control command of an RTM statement, and
are detailed later.)
The macro command of an RTM statement is a macro statement used with an RTM statement for
arithmetic/logical operation and signal control. (In the example below, #RV[1] and #RV[2] are variables
dedicated to the real time macro command.)
Example
// #IOG[124, 5] = 1 ;
// #RV[1] = #RV[2] * 10 ;
Format
The real time macro command format is shown below.
The RTM command is a command with two slashes (//) prefixed at the start of a block.
//n <real-time-macro-statement>
or
//n ZDO ;
<real-time-macro-statement>
:
ZEND ;
n: Modal ID (1 to 10) (Omissible)
When a proper number is coded in n, a modal real time macro command is specified.
When n is omitted, a one-shot real time macro command is specified.
ZDO to ZEND are detailed later.
17.1 TYPES OF REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS
17.1.1 Modal Real Time Macro Command / One-shot Real Time

Macro Command
Explanation
A command with ‘//’ followed by an RTM statement is referred to as a one-shot real time macro
command (one-shot RTM command).
Example:
// #RV[1] = 30 ;
On the other hand, a command with ‘//’ followed by number n (1 to 10) then an RTM statement is
referred to as a modal real time macro command (modal RTM command).
Example:
//3 #RV[1] = 30 ;
A one-shot RTM command starts when the execution of the first following NC command starts. A started
one-shot RTM command is valid until the end of the NC command.
A modal RTM command starts when the execution of the first following NC command starts, as in the
case of a one-shot RTM command.
Unlike a one-shot RTM command, however, a started modal RTM command is valid until the automatic
operation is completed.
- 334 -
- Start of a real time macro command

An RTM command starts when the execution of the first following NC command starts.
Example:
When NC command (1) starts execution in the program below, macro commands (2) and (4) are
executed in succession without waiting for the end of (1).
On the other hand, RTM command (3)starts execution when NC command (5) starts execution after
the end of NC command (1).
O0001 ;
G90 G00 X30. ; (1) NC command
#100=0 ; (2) Macro command
// #RV[0]=1 ; (3) RTM command
#102=2; (4) Macro command
G90 G00 X100. ; (5) NC command
M30 ;
- End of a real time macro command

When one of the following conditions is satisfied, the RTM command is terminated.
Termination conditions common to one-shot RTM and modal RTM commands

• When RTM command processing is completed
• When a reset occurs
Termination condition specific to a one-shot RTM command

• When the execution of the NC command that started at the same time has ended
However, if the RTM statement being executed is an axis control command, the command is terminated
when the execution of the block is completed.
If the execution of the Y10. block is completed before the X100. block in the command below, and the
execution of the Y20. block starts, for example, the X100. command of the RTM statement is executed
until the end.
// ZDO ;
X100 ;
ZEND ;
Y10. ;
Y20. ;
NOTE
1 No one-shot RTM command can be specified using any of the commands
indicated below as a trigger. When using any of these commands as a trigger,
use a modal RTM command.
- Command related to reference position return
- Command related to AI contour control
- Command related to cutter compensation
- Command related to coordinate system rotation
- Command related to scaling
- Command related to programmable mirror image
- 335 -
NOTE
2 Do not restart a program auto restart that includes an RTM command.
3 When an NC statement used as a trigger for an RTM command represents an
auxiliary function, execution continues even if the FIN signal is awaited.
If the following program is executed, for example, the count-up operation of
#RV[0] continues until the FIN signal of M55 is returned:
O0001 ;
// ZWHILE [1] #RV[0] = #RV[0]+1 ;
M55 ;
G91 X200. ;
:
4 If M02 follows an RTM command, execution continues until a reset occurs, even
when the program itself is terminated.
If the following program is executed, for example, the count-up operation of
#RV[0] continues until a reset occurs:
O0001 ;
// ZWHILE [1] #RV[0] = #RV[0]+1 ;
M02 ;
- Priority of commands
If a modal RTM command and one-shot RTM command are specified at the same time, the modal RTM
command is executed first.
If multiple modal RTM commands are specified at the same time, the commands are executed in
ascending order of ID values.
No priority is applicable to one-shot RTM commands.
The order of execution is as follows:
Modal RTM command with ID value being 1 High

Modal RTM command with ID value being 2
:
:
Modal RTM command with ID value being 10
One-shot RTM command
:
One-shot RTM command Low
Example 1)
Priority of modal RTM commands
O0001 ;
//1 #RV[0]=1 ;
//3 #RV[0]=3 ;
//2 #RV[0]=2 ;
M02 ;
When the program above is executed, the RTM commands are executed in the following order:
#RV[0]=1
#RV[0]=2
#RV[0]=3
So, the value of #RV[0] is 3.
- 336 -
Example 2)
Priority of modal RTM commands and a one-shot RTM command
O0001 ;
//3 #RV[0]=3 ;
//1 #RV[0]=1 ;
// #RV[0]=10 ;
//5 #RV[0]=5 ;
M02 ;
When the program above is executed, the RTM commands are executed in the following order:
//1 #RV[0]=1
//3 #RV[0]=3
//5 #RV[0]=5
// #RV[0]=10
So, the value of #RV[0] is 10.
Example 3)
Priority of one-shot RTM commands
When the following program is executed, the value of #RV[0] is undefined, that is, 1, 2, or 3.
O0001 ;
//#RV[0]=1 ;
//#RV[0]=2 ;
//#RV[0]=3 ;
G04P10 ;
M30 ;
Even if a priority is applicable, the order of execution or the order of termination can change when an
RTM statement includes a control code, ZWHILE or ZEDGE, or axis control command.
Example 4)
The RTM command priority of #RV[0]=1 in a modal command with its ID value being 1 is higher
than the priority of #RV[1]=1 in a modal command with its ID value being 2. However, #RV[0]=1 is
executed after the end of the execution of the block specifying the axis control command G91 G00
X10., so that #RV[1]=1 is actually executed earlier than #RV[0]=1.
O0001 ;
//1 ZDO ;
G91 G00 X10. ;
#RV[0]=1 ;
ZEND ;
//2 #RV[1]=1 ;
G04 P10 ;
M30 ;
Example 5)
In the RTM command priority, ZEDGE in a modal command with its ID value being 1 is always a
false control code (detailed later). The RTM command priority of #RV[0]=1 in a modal command
with its ID value being 1 is higher than the priority of #RV[1]=1 and #RV[2]=1 in a modal
command with their ID values being 2. However, #RV[0]=1 is executed after the condition of
ZEDGE becomes true (that is, at the second time or later), so that #RV[1]=1 and #RV[2]=1 are
executed earlier than #RV[0]=1.
O0001 ;
//1 ZEDGE [ #IOG[234.0] EQ 1 ] #RV[0]=1 ;
//2 ZDO ;
#RV[1]=1 ;
#RV[2]=1 ;
- 337 -
ZEND ;
G04 P10 ;
M30 ;
- Number of real time macro commands

A program can have multiple RTM commands coded.
Up to six one-shot RTM commands can be specified.
If one-shot RTM commands more than the maximum allowable number are specified, an alarm is issued.
Up to ten modal RTM commands can be specified. When specifying modal RTM commands, ensure that
there is no duplicate ID.
If there is a duplicate ID, or an incorrect ID is specified, an alarm is issued.
In all paths, up to 16 RTM commands can be executed simultaneously.

When an axis control command is included, up to four commands can be executed simultaneously.
NOTE
1 In a block specifying an RTM statement, no NC command can be coded.
2 If the maximum specifiable number of commands or the maximum number of
simultaneously executable commands is exceeded, a PS alarm is issued.
3 If an NC statement to be used to trigger an RTM command is specified in a block
(e.g., small block) that ends in a very short time, an RTM statement programmed
to start at a different timing may be executed simultaneously. If the following is
specified, for example, #RV[0]=1 and #RV[1]=2 may be executed
simultaneously:
// #RV[0]=1 ;
G91 G01 X0.002 ; F5000
// #RV[1]=2 ;
X0.001 ;
4 When a function for reading multiple blocks in advance is used, the same ID
must not be coded in the scope of blocks read in advance. In the following
program, for example, while //1 #RV[0]=#100101 is being executed during AI
contour control, //1 #RV[1]=#100101 and //1 #RV[2]=#100101 are also read in
advance. So, an alarm may be issued.
//1 #RV[0]=#100101 ;
X#100 ;
//1 #RV[1]=#100101 ;
X#100 ;
//1 #RV[2]=#100101 ;
X#100 ;
- 338 -
NOTE
5 When a function for reading multiple blocks in advance is used, up to three
blocks among the blocks read in advance can trigger an RTM command.
For example, if the blocks up to the block of (2) are read in advance during
execution of (1) in the program below, up to three blocks can trigger an RTM
command. In the program below, the number of NC blocks that trigger an RTM
command exceeds 3, so that the RTM command of (a) must not be coded.
X30. Y50. ; .................. (1)
// Z-30. ;
// #RV[0]=#RV[0]+1 ;
X3. Y16. ; ← NC block 1 triggering an RTM command
X-23. Y4. ;
// #RV[1]=#RV[1]+1 ;
//2 Z30. ;
X-2. Y9. ; ← NC block 2 triggering an RTM command
X17. Y5. ;
// #RV[2]=#RV[2]+1 ;
X-2. Y9. ; ← NC block 3 triggering an RTM command
// #RV[3]=#RV[3]+1 ; ... (a)
X-12. Y-3. ;
X-100. Y200. ; ............. (2)
- Reserved words
The following reserved words are used with real time custom macros:
• Reserved words dedicated to real time custom macros
ZDO, ZEND, ZONCE, ZWHILE, ZEDGE
• Reserved words shared with custom macros
AND, OR, XOR, MOD, EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, LE, SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, ATN,
SQRT, SQR, ABS, BIN, BCD, ROUND, RND, FIX, FUP, LN, EXP, POW
Be sure to fully spell out the reserved words for real time custom macros. For example, ‘ZONCE’ must
not be coded as ‘ZON’ or ‘ZONC’.
17.2 VARIABLES
Overview
With real time custom macros, the following variables can be handled:
• System variables dedicated to real time custom macros
• Variables (RTM variables) dedicated to real time custom macros
• System variables for some custom macros
The RTM variables mean the variables dedicated to real time custom macros.
Table 17.2 List of usable variables

Real time custom macro Custom macro
Real time custom macro System variables Usable Unusable
variables RTM variables Usable Unusable
System variables Partially usable Usable
Custom macro variables Common variables Unusable Usable
Local variables Unusable Usable
- 339 -
The variables (system variables and RTM variables) dedicated to real time custom macros are the
variables specific to the real time custom macro function. Those variables cannot be used with the custom
macro function.
NOTE
Real time custom macros do not support <null>. Do not use it.
17.2.1 Variables Dedicated to Real Time Custom Macros

These variables are dedicated to real time custom macros. The variables are classified as system variables
and RTM variables.
17.2.1.1 System variables

System variables dedicated to real time custom macros
Format
#IOp [m, n] Bit-by-bit read/write
#IOpB [m] Byte-by-byte read/write
#IOpW [m] Word-by-word read/write
#IOpD [m] Double word-by-double word read/write
p : Signal type (X, G, F, Y, D, R)
m : Signal byte address
n : (Used for bit-by-bit read/write only) Signal address bit number (0 to 7)
PMC interface signals are read and written. Bit-by-bit and byte-by-byte read/write operations are
possible.
The following signals can be used:
Variable name Signal type Read Write
#IOX
#IOXB
X Possible Impossible
#IOXW
#IOXD
#IOG
#IOGB
G Impossible Possible
#IOGW
#IOGD
#IOF
#IOFB
F Possible Impossible
#IOFW
#IOFD
#IOY
#IOYB
Y Impossible Possible
#IOYW
#IOYD
#IOD
#IODB
D Possible Possible
#IODW
#IODD
#IOR
#IORB
R Possible Possible
#IORW
#IORD
- 340 -
For the valid signal address range, see the specifications of the PMC as well.
When writing to a signal, make the variable unprotected on the PMC signal protection screen (described
later) beforehand.
Specify an address by using m and n.

Example:
#IOF[1, 3] F1.3 bit type
#IOG[1, 5] G1.5 bit type
#IOFB[32] F32 byte type
#IOGB[12] G12 byte type
Read/write operations are performed in the same as for an ordinary macro statement.
Example:
#RV[0]=#IOFB[32] Assigns F32 to #RV[0].
#IOG[99.3] = 1 Sets G99.3 to 1.
If a signal at a nonexistent address is specified, a PS alarm is issued.
CAUTION
1 Controls handling other signals, such as a ladder or macro executor, must not
write to a signal address being written to by an RTM statement. Ensure that a
single control writes to the same byte signal address.
For example, when the G000.0 signal is written to by an RTM statement, do not
write to the G000.7 signal from a ladder.
2 Ensure that the same F signal is not read from by an RTM statement and written
to by the NC simultaneously.
3 Ensure that the same G signal is not written to by an RTM statement and read
from by the NC simultaneously.
4 For word-by-word read/write, specify an even-numbered address and for double
word-by-double word read/write, specify an address that is a multiple of four.
NOTE
The system variables described above are not supported for a multi-path PMC.
- PMC signal protection

Whether to enable a write to a signal handled by an RTM statement can be set. This function protects
against a malfunction due to incorrect coding.
On the PMC signal protection screen, set whether to enable a write to a signal.
If an RTM statement makes an attempt to write to a signal write-protected on the PMC signal protection
screen, a PS alarm is issued at the time of execution.
Set whether to enable a write to each address of Y and G on a byte-by-byte basis.

For each of addresses D and R, set a write-enabled range.
For the unwritable signals (X, F), the screen is not displayed.
Before changing an address on the PMC signal protection range specification screen, perform a clear
operation first and then input a new address.
- 341 -
- Input/output
A value set for PMC signal protection can be input/output.
- Input/output format
After outputting PMC signal protection, one file (DIDOENBL.TXT) is created.
Please execute input/output operation in EDIT mode.
The output format is as follows:
L Specification method
0: Byte specification
1: Range specification
Q Alphabetic signal address
0: G, 2: Y, 5: R, 9: D
K (for use in range specification only) Index number (0 to 9)
R Address number for byte specification
Start address number for range specification
P Protection value for byte specification
0: Not writable
1: Writable
End address number
for range specification
Example of output
%
L0Q2R0000P0
L0Q2R0001P1 Y0 to Y127 protect
: information
L0Q2R0127P1
:
L0Q0R0000P1
L0Q0R0001P1 G0 to G767 protect Byte
: information specification
L0Q0R0767P0
L0Q0R1000P1
G1000 to G1767 protect
:
information
L0Q0R1767P0
:
R2 to R14 are writable
L1Q5K0R0002P0014
(Index 0)
: Range
D32 to D127 are writable
L1Q9K9R0032P0127 specification
(Index 9)
M02
%
17.2.1.2 Real time macro variables (RTM variables)

The real time macro variables (RTM variables) are variables dedicated to real time custom macros.
The RTM variables are classified as volatile real time macro variables (volatile RTM variables) and
nonvolatile real time macro variables (nonvolatile RTM variables).
The data of a nonvolatile RTM variable is preserved even when the power is turned off.
The data of a volatile RTM variable is cleared to 0 when the power is turned off.
- 342 -
Format
#RV [ m ] Volatile RTM variable
m: Volatile RTM variable number (0 to 99)
#RVS [ n ] Nonvolatile RTM variable
n: Nonvolatile RTM variable number (0 to 31)
NOTE
1 RTM variables can be used with an RTM statement only. RTM variables cannot
be used with an NC statement and macro statement.
2 No RTM variable assumes a "null" value.
3 Volatile RTM variables are cleared to 0 by a reset. On the other hand,
nonvolatile RTM variables are not cleared to 0 by a reset.
Explanation
- Input/output
RTM variables can be input/output in a specified format.
Both nonvolatile RTM variables and volatile RTM variables can be input/output.
- Input/output format
After outputting RTM variables, one file(RTMMACRO.TXT) is created.
The output format is described below.
The value of an RTM variable is output in hexadecimal as a double-precision floating-point data bit
image.
When a nonvolatile RTM variable is output, G10L87 is followed by an RTM variable number and a
variable value.
When a volatile RTM variable is output, G10L88 is followed by an RTM variable number and a variable
value.
Example of output
%
G10L87P0(3FE0000000000000)
G10L87P1(4000000000000000)
: Nonvolatile RTM variable
G10L87P30(4010000000000000)
G10L87P31(4014000000000000)
G10L88P0(4008000000000000)
G10L88P1(3FD9999999800000)
: Volatile RTM variable
G10L88P98(3FF0000000000000)
G10L88P99(4010000000000000)
M02
%
Execute input/output operation in EDIT mode.
17.2.2 Custom Macro Variables

With real time custom macros, a part of the custom macro variables (part of the system variables) can be
handled.
- 343 -
17.2.2.1 System variables

With real time custom macros, position-related information among the system variables of the custom
macros can be handled.
- Position information #100001 to #100182 (Attribute: Read only)

Block end position #100001 to #100032
Current position (machine coordinate system) #100051 to #100082
Current position (workpiece coordinate system) #100101 to #100132
Skip position #100151 to #100182
By readying the values of system variables #100001 to #100182, the end position of the previous block,
the current positions (machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system), and skip signal
position can be found.
Variable No. Position information Coordinate system

#100001 Block end position on 1st axis
#100002 Block end position on 2nd axis
Workpiece coordinate system
: :
#100032 Block end position on 32nd axis
#100051 Current position on 1st axis
#100052 Current position on 2nd axis
: :
#100101 Current position on 1st axis
: :
#100151 Skip position on 1st axis
#100152 Skip position on 2nd axis
: :
#100182 Skip position on 32nd axis
NOTE
1 The value of a variable with a number greater than the number of controlled
axes is undefined.
2 The end position (ABSIO) of a skip (G33) block is the skip signal ON position if
the skip signal is turned on. If the skip signal is not turned on, the block end point
is undefined.
3 As block end position information #100001 to #100032, the end positions read in
advance are obtained instead of the end positions of the block currently being
executed.
- Servo positional deviation #100251 to #100282 (Attribute: Read only)

By reading the values of system variables #100251 to #100282, the servo positional deviation on each
axis can be found.
Variable No. Position information

#100251 Servo positional deviation on 1st axis
#100252 Servo positional deviation on 2nd axis
: :
#100282 Servo positional deviation on 32nd axis
- 344 -
NOTE
The value of a variable with a number greater than the number of controlled
axes is undefined.
- Remaining travel distance #100801 to #100832 (Attribute: Read only)

By reading the values of system variables #100801 to #100832, the remaining travel distance on each axis
can be read.
Variable No. Position information

#100801 Travel distance on 1st axis
#100802 Travel distance on 2nd axis
: :
#100832 Travel distance on 32nd axis
NOTE
1 The value of a variable with a number greater than the number of controlled
axes is undefined.
2 System variables not described here are unusable.
3 The name of a system variable cannot be specified.
Do not specify a command as indicated below.
//1 #RV[0]=[#_ABSOT[1]] ;
17.2.2.2 Local variables

The local variables(#1 to #33) cannot be used.
17.3 ARITHMETIC AND LOGICAL OPERATION

With the real time custom macros, the following arithmetic and logical operations can be specified:
Table 17.3 Arithmetic and logical operation

(1) Definition, substitution #i=#j Definition or substitution of a variable
(2) Additive operation #i=#j+#k Addition
#i=#j-#k Subtraction
#i=#j OR #k Logical OR (Bit by bit for 32 bits)
#i=#j XOR #k Exclusive OR (Bit by bit for 32 bits)
(3) Multiplicative operation #i=#j*#k Multiplication
#i=#j/#k Division
#i=#j AND #k Logical AND (Bit by bit for 32 bits)
#i=#j MOD #k Remainder (#j and #k are rounded to an integer to find a
remainder. When #j is negative, #i is also negative.)
- 345 -

(4) Function #i=SIN[#j] Sine (in deg)
#i=COS[#j] Cosine (in deg)
#i=TAN[#j] Tangent (in deg)
#i=ASIN[#j] Arcsine
#i=ACOS[#j] Arccosine
#i=ATAN[#j] Arctangent (1 argument). ATN is acceptable.
#i=ATAN[#j]/[#k] Arctangent (2 arguments). ATN is acceptable.
#i=ATAN[#j,#k] Ditto
#i=SQRT[#j] Square root. SQR is acceptable.
#i=ABS[#j] Absolute value
#i=BIN[#j] Binary conversion from BCD
#i=BCD[#j] BCD conversion from binary
#i=ROUND[#j] Rounding. RND is acceptable.
#i=FIX[#j] Discarding fractional digits
#i=FUP[#j] Rounding fractional digits upward to an integer
#i=LN[#j] Natural logarithm
#i=EXP[#j] Exponent with e (2.718……) used as the base
#i=POW[#j,#k] Power (#j to #k power)
- Constant specifiable in <expression>

+0.00000000001 to +999999999999
-999999999999 to -0.00000000001
Up to 12 decimal digits can be specified.
If the maximum allowable number of digits is exceeded, PS0004, “INVALID BREAK POINT OF
WORDS” alarm is issued.
NOTE
1 The ADP function is not available.
2 With an RTM statement, the external output commands (BPRNT, DPRNT,
POPEN, and PCLOS) are unavailable.
3 The FS16i compatibility specifications are not applicable. Bit 0 (F16) of
parameter No. 6008 = 1 (with the operation result precision based on the FS16i
compatibility specifications) is invalid.
4 For information on decreased precision, see "When bit 0 (F16) of parameter No.
6008 is set to 0" in "Caution concerning decreased precision" in the CUSTOM
MACRO chapter.
5 Bit 0 (NAT) of parameter No. 6004 is valid in an RTM command.
6 The setting of bit 5 (SBM) of parameter No. 6000 and bit 7 (SBV) of parameter
No. 6000 is invalid. For the single block specifications, see the separate item.
17.4 CONTROL ON REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS

Explanation
By using a reserved word for controlling statements in an RTM command, the flow of the RTM
command can be changed or multiple statements can be controlled as a set of statements. Four reserved
words are used to control an RTM command as indicated below.
Reserved word name Syntax Meaning

ZONCE // ZONCE A B If A is true, B is executed.
ZEDGE // ZEDGE A B If A becomes true, B is executed.
ZWHILE // ZWHILE A B While A is true, B is executed repeatedly.
- 346 -
Reserved word name Syntax Meaning

ZDO...ZEND // ZDO B1 B2 B3 ZEND (Multiple statements) B1, B2, and B3 are sequentially
executed.
The timing chart of an RTM command using these reserved words is indicated below. (Multi-statement
control ZDO...ZEND is excluded.)
When the condition of a each reserved word is True, it shows ‘*’.
When condition A makes transitions from True to False to True
True
False
ZONCE *
ZEDGE *
ZWHILE * * *
Time
When condition A makes transitions from False to True to False
True
False
ZONCE *
ZEDGE *
ZWHILE * * * * * * *
Time
17.4.1 Conditional Branch (ZONCE Statement)

After ZONCE, <conditional-expression> and <real-time-macro-statement> are coded.
- //(n) ZONCE [<conditional-expression>] <real-time-macro-statement>
If <conditional-expression> is true, <real-time-macro-statement> is executed. If <conditional-expression>

is false, <real-time-macro-statement> is not executed, but control exits from the ZONCE command to
terminate the execution. <conditional-expression> conforms to the custom macro specifications.
// ZONCE A B (If A is true, B is executed.)

If A is true, the command is terminated after executing B.
If A is false, the command is terminated without executing B.
If the workpiece coordinate on the first axis is greater than 30, the Y1.0 signal is output.
// ZONCE [#100101 GT 30.] #IOY[1,0] = 1 ;
If the workpiece coordinate on the first axis is greater than 30 and #RV[0] matches #RV[3], the Y1.0 signal is output.
// ZONCE[[#100101 GT 30.] AND [#RV[0] EQ #RV[3]]] #IOY[1,0]=1 ;
- 347 -
In <real-time-macro-statement>, multiple RTM statements can be coded.

In this case, code the following by using ZDO...ZEND of multi-statement structure:
// ZONCE [<conditional-expression>] ZDO ;
<real-time-macro-statement-1> ;
:
ZEND ;
If the workpiece coordinate on the second axis is equal to or less than 10, the rapid traverse override value is
changed.
// ZONCE [#100102 LE 10.] ZDO ;
#IOG[14,0]=0 ;
#IOG[14,1]=1 ;
ZEND ;
However, if <conditional-expression-1> specifies an axis control command, be sure to use ZDO...ZEND

even when a single statement is used.
If the workpiece coordinate on the first axis is greater than 30 and #RV[0] matches #RV[3], a movement on the
A-axis starts.
//1 ZONCE [[#100101 GT 30.] AND [#RV[0] EQ #RV[3]]] ZDO ;
G91 G00 A20. ;
ZEND ;
Similarly, use ZDO...ZEND for a multi-statement including an axis control command.
If the workpiece coordinate on the second axis is equal to or less than 10, a movement on the V-axis starts and the
Y1.0 signal is set to 1.
//1 ZONCE [#100102 LE 10.] ZDO ;
G91 G00 V10. ;
#IOY[1,0] = 1 ;
ZEND ;
17.4.2 Condition Transition (ZEDGE Statement)

After ZEDGE, <conditional-expression> and <real-time-macro-statement> are coded.
// ZEDGE A B (If A becomes true, B is executed.)
- //(n) ZEDGE [<conditional-expression>] <real-time-macro-statement>

When <conditional-expression> makes a transition from false to true, an RTM statement specified after
<conditional-expression> is executed. <conditional-expression> conforms to the custom macro
specifications.
With the ZEDGE command, the result of the first evaluation of <conditional-expression> is always false.
Explanation
The difference between the ZONCE command and ZEDGE command is that if <conditional-expression>
is false, the RTM statement itself is terminated in the case of ZONCE, while the evaluation of
<conditional-expression> continues until <conditional-expression> becomes true in the case of ZEDGE.
(With a one-shot real time macro command, the evaluation of <conditional-expression> continues until
the execution of the NC statement that started operation simultaneously with the command ends.)
On the rising edge of the G address signal 4.3, the workpiece coordinate on the third axis is read.
// ZEDGE [#IOG[4,3] EQ 1] #RV[0]=#100103 ;
- 348 -
In the example above, even if the [#IOG[4,3] EQ 1] is true from the beginning, #RV[0]=#100103 of the
RTM statement is not executed. #RV[0]=#100103 is executed when the result of evaluation of [#IOG[4,3]
EQ 1] changes from false to true.
As in the case of ZONCE, multiple RTM statements can be coded in <real-time-macro-statement>.

If <conditional-expression-1> specifies an axis control command, be sure to use ZDO...ZEND even when
a single statement is used.
Code the following by using ZDO...ZEND of multi-statement structure:
// ZEDGE [<conditional-expression>] ZDO ;
:
ZEND ;
On the falling edge of the X address signal, a movement on the B-axis is started and the Y1.0 signal is set to 1.
// ZEDGE [#IOX[1,3] EQ 0] ZDO ;
G91 G00 B10. ;
#IOY[1,0] = 1 ;
ZEND ;
On the rising edge of the G address signal, a movement on the U-axis is started.
// ZEDGE [#IOG[4,3] EQ 1] ZDO ;
G91 G00 U25. ;
ZEND ;
If the remaining travel distance on the second axis is equal to or less than 10, the rapid traverse override value is
changed.
// ZEDGE [#100802 LE 10.] ZDO ;
#IOG[14,0]=0 ;
#IOG[14,1]=1 ;
ZEND ;
17.4.3 Repetition (ZWHILE Statement)

After ZWHILE, a <conditional statement> is coded.
// ZWHILE A B (While A is true, B is executed repeatedly.)
- //(n) ZWHILE [<conditional-expression>] <real-time-macro-statement>

While <conditional-expression> is true, the RTM statement specified after <conditional-expression> is
executed.
If <conditional-expression> is not satisfied, the ZWHILE statement is terminated, and the next block is
processed.
ZWHILE
<conditional-expression> ZDO ;
When condition is
When <Real time macro false
condition statement>
is true
ZEND ;
:
* When the <real time macro statement> is a single statement and is not
an axis control statement, ZDO and ZEND are not required.
* When “conditional-expression” is fulfilled and “Real time macro
statement” is complete, interpolation cycle time has passed before the
next evaluation of "ZWHILE conditional-expression".
- 349 -
Explanation
While <conditional-expression> is true, the command or commands between ZDO and ZEND after
ZWHILE are executed.
If <conditional-expression> is not satisfied, the command after ZEND is processed.
The same <conditional-expression> and operators as for the ZONCE statement are used.
While the F address 234.1 signal is 1, an incremental movement on the U-axis is repeatedly performed, and #RV[0]
is incremented by 1 each time.
//1 ZWHILE [#IOF[234,1] EQ 1] ZDO ;
G91 G00 U10. ;
#RV[0] = #RV[0]+1 ;
ZEND ;
17.4.4 Multi-statement (ZDO...ZEND Statement)

- //(n) ZDO ;
<real-time-macro-statement-1> <real-time-macro-statement-2>
<real-time-macro-statement-3> …
ZEND ;
One or multiple statements enclosed in ZDO...ZEND are regarded as a one RTM statement
(multiple-statement structure).
Explanation
The maximum number of RTM statements in one multi-statement (between ZDO...ZEND) is roughly five,
but it is subject to change (Because it depends on the contents of RTM statements).
ZDO...ZEND is used in the following cases:

• When multiple <real time macro statements> are handled as a series of commands
If the workpiece coordinate on the first axis exceeds 30, the rapid traverse override value is changed.
// ZEDGE [#100101 GT 30.] ZDO ;
#IOG[14,0]=1 ;
#IOG[14,1]=0 ;
ZEND ;
• When an axis control command is specified
On the rising edge of the X signal 7.0, a movement on the V-axis is started.
// ZEDGE [#IOX[7,0] EQ 1] ZDO ;
G91 G00 V35. ;
ZEND ;
- Nesting
ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE, and ZDO...ZEND cannot be nested and overlapped.
For details, see the following:
- 350 -
1. ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE, and 3. ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE, and

ZDO...ZEND may be used any ZDO...ZEND must not be
number times. nested.
// ZWHILE […] ZDO ; // ZWHILE […] ZDO ;
:
Processing ZONCE […] ZDO ;
:
ZEND ;
ZEDGE […] ZDO ;
:
// ZONCE[…] ZDO ; Processing
Processing ZEND ;
:
ZEND ;
ZEND ;
:
:
ZEND ;
2. One ZDO...ZEND range must not
overlap another ZDO...ZEND range.
// ZONCE […] ZDO ;
Processing
// ZWHILE […] ZDO ;

:
ZEND ;
Processing
ZEND ;
- Endless loop
An endless loop is formed if the conditional expression enclosed in brackets after the ZWHILE statement
is always satisfied.
Example)
In the example below, #RV[0] is counted up unconditionally.
// ZWHILE [1] #RV[1]=#RV[1]+1 ;
Sample program
The sample program below exercises the following three control operations at the same time.
(1) A cutting operation is performed on the X-axis and Z-axis.
(2) On each rising edge of the X signal 5.2, 20 is fed on the peripheral axis A.
(3) When the workpiece coordinate on the X-axis (#100101) is equal to or less than 50, the Y signal 2.3
is set to 1.
The operation of (1) is coded in the main NC statement.

The operation of (2) is coded in the first modal RTM command (//1).
The operation of (3) is coded in the second modal RTM command (//2).
- 351 -
Signal lamp
(Address O0001 ;
Y2.3) G90 G00 X100 Z100;
Workpiece RTM command (2)
//1 ZWHILE[1] ZDO ; operation
ZEDGE [#IOX[5,2] EQ 1 ] ZDO ; (On each rising edge of
G91 G00 A20. ; X5.2, 20 is fed on peripheral
Z
ZEND ; axis A.)
50 ZEND ;
(Y signal is
turned on RTM command (3)
when tool //2 ZWHILE[1] ZDO ; operation
enters this ZEDGE [ #100101 LE 50.0 ] #IOY[2,3] = 1 ; (When X coordinate is 50 or
range.) ZEND ; less, Y signal 2.3 is set to 1.)
Signal switch #100=100 ;

X (Address X5.2) WHILE [ #100 GT 0 ]) DO1
G91 G01 Z-#100 F200. ;
Z#100. ;
Command for cutting on
#100 = #100 - 10 ;
X-axis and Z-axis
X-10. F100;
END1
M02 ;
Peripheral axis A
17.5 MACRO CALL

A series of RTM statements can be formed into a subprogram, which can be called from the main
program.
When G65 is specified in an RTM command, the real time macro specified in address P is called.
G65 P p ; P : Number of real time macro program to be called
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: :
: :
//1 G65 P9010 ; : Code real time macro
G04 P2000 ; : statements.
: :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
The execution of real time macro //1 including O9010 starts simultaneously
with the G04 block of main program O0001.
Explanation
- Calling
In address P after G65, specify the program number of a real time custom macro to be called.
NOTE
1 In argument P of G65, only a constant value can be used. No value can be
specified through a variable.
Example:
// G65 P9010 ; Correct
// G65 P#RV[0] ; Incorrect
2 The inclusion of another NC command (such as G01 X100.0 G65 Pp) is not
allowed. If another NC command is included, alarm PS0127, “DUPLICATE
NC,MACRO STATEMENT” is issued.
- 352 -
NOTE
3 The G65 block for calling a real time macro does not make a single block stop.
4 On the other hand, a real time macro program called by real time macro calling
makes a single block stop.
- Call destination real time program

In a called real time macro program, only an RTM statement can be coded.
In a called real time macro program, no additional RTM command may be executed. (The RTM
command symbol ‘//’ may not be coded.) For example, do not execute the following program:
O0001 ; O9010 ;
// G65 P9010 ; // #RV[0]=1 ;
M02 ; M99 ;
Code M99 in the last block only.

For example, do not execute the following program:
O0001 ; O9010 ;
// G65 P9010 ; ZEDGE [#RV[0] EQ 1] M99 ;
M02 ; G91 G00 X50. ;
M99 ;
When executing an RTM statement in a subprogram, code an NC statement before the M99 block for
returning to the main program.
O0001 ; O9010 ;
G65 P9010 ; // #RV[0] = 20 ; Real time macro statement
M02 ; G04 ; NC statement
M99 ;
- Format
Specify G65 at the start of a block.
- Call nesting level

Macro call nesting is not allowed.
- Differences from macro call using a custom macro

Macro call using a real time custom macro and macro call using a custom macro differs as described
below.
• In macro call using a custom macro, an argument (data to be passed to a macro) and the number of
repetitions can be specified. In macro call using a real time custom macro, such information cannot
be specified.
• With a real time custom macro, other types of macro call (macro call using G66, G66.1, G, and M
code) and subprogram call are not allowed.
17.6 OTHERS
If an axis control command is followed by a macro command in an RTM command, the execution of the
macro command starts when the axis control command is completed or deceleration starts.
If deceleration on the X-axis starts upon completion of distribution according to the axis control
command of (1), for example, the macro command of (2) is executed. If acceleration/deceleration is not
applied on the X-axis, (2) is executed upon completion of distribution on the X-axis.
- 353 -
// ZDO ;
G91 G00 X30 ; (1) Axis control command of the RTM statement
#RV[0] = 1 ; (2) Macro command of the RTM statement
ZEND ;
If an RTM command is executed in a custom macro WHILE DO to END loop, and the same RTM is
looked ahead while the RTM command is being executed, a PS alarm may be issued.
For example, if the command below is executed, a PS alarm is issued.
WHILE [1] DO1 ;

// #RV[0] = #RV[0] + 1 ;
#100=#100+1 ;
END1 ;
In this example, insert G04 ; block between a #100=#100+1; and END1;.
17.7 AXIS CONTROL COMMAND

In an RTM statement, a G code for specifying a movement can be specified. For axis control, the PMC
axis control interface is used. The specifications differ from the specifications for the G code used with an
NC statement.
Format
// ZDO ;
G_ IP _ F_ ;
:
ZEND ;
For an axis control command, ZDO...ZEND of multi-statement structure is used for coding even if a
single statement (single RTM statement) is used.
CAUTION
Do not specify an NC statement for an axis to be controlled with an RTM
statement. Moreover, do not exercise axis control with an RTM statement on an
axis to be controlled with an NC statement.
NOTE
In one block, only one axis may be specified. Do not specify two or more axes in
the same block.
Explanation
- Setting
For an axis control command in an RTM statement, the interface of a PMC axis control group set by a
parameter beforehand is used.
For an axis to be controlled with an RTM statement, set a group to be used with parameter No. 8010.
Then, set bit 0 (XRT) of parameter No. 8011 for the axis to 1.
- 354 -
NOTE
An axis for which bit 0 (XRT) of parameter No. 8011 is set to 1 is dedicated to
real time custom macros, so that such an axis cannot be used with PMC axis
control.
- Relationship with PMC axis control

Axis control based on an RTM statement uses the PMC axis control interface. So, the specifications for a
move command in each block within an RTM statement are generally equivalent to the specifications for
the PMC axis control command.
For the detailed specifications and restrictions related to axis control, refer to the specifications of PMC
axis control as well.
NOTE
1 An axis used with an RTM statement must not be specified from PMC axis
control.
2 A PMC axis control group used with an RTM statement must not be specified
from PMC axis control.
- Operation command code

The table below indicates the G codes that can be specified in an RTM statement.
The mark in the table indicates modal G codes when an RTM command starts.
Code Group Meaning
G00 Positioning
01
G01 Feed at specified feedrate
G04 Dwell
G28 00 Reference position return
G53 Machine coordinate system selection
G90 Absolute command NOTE 1
03
G91 Incremental command NOTE 2
NOTE
1 The absolute command (G90) is valid for machine coordinate system selection
(G53) only.
2 The incremental command (G91) is valid for positioning (G00), linear
interpolation (G01), and reference position return (G28) only.
- Modal information
Basically, modal information such as F and modal G codes in an RTM statement is independent in an NC
statement and each RTM statement.
Modal information in an RTM statement is initialized when the execution of the RTM statement is started
(when a block specified with // is executed).
The initial value of modal information in an RTM statement is as follows:
State of the G codes marked with in the operation command code list
F code : F0
CAUTION
With the G codes (inch input/metric input) of group 06, the same information as
the modal information of an NC statement is used in an RTM statement. Do not
change the modal information of group 06 with an NC statement in a block after
the first RTM statement coded in a program.
- 355 -
NOTE
With an RTM command, bit 0 (G01), bit 3 (G91), and bit 4 (FPM) of parameter
No. 3402 are invalid when the power is turned on or in the cleared state.
Example 1)
Modal information can be controlled independently in an NC statement and each RTM statement.
O0001 ;
G90 G01 X100. Y100. F500. ; (1)
//1 ZDO ;
Z50. ; (2)
G01 Z100. F100. ; (3)
ZEND ;
//2 ZDO ;
G01 A30. F200. ; (4)
A50. ; (5)
ZEND ;
X200. ; (6)
:
The modal information of command (2) is G00, G91, and G94, regardless of the modal information
(G90 G01 set in (1)) of the NC statement.
The modal information of command (5) is G01, G91, G94, and F200.. This modal information is not
affected by the modal information (command (1)) of the NC statement and the modal information
(commands (2) and (3)) in the RTM statement with modal ID=1.
The modal information of command (6) is not affected by the modal information (commands (2) to
(5)) in the RTM statement, so that the modal information is G01, G90, and F500..
Example 2)
Modal information is initialized when the execution of each RTM command is started. Even if the
same program includes RTM commands with the same ID, the modal information of the RTM
command executed first is not inherited by the RTM command executed next.
O0001 ;
G90 G01 X100. Y100. F500. ;
//1 ZDO ;
G01 Z100. F3000. ; (1)
ZEND ;
X200. ;
//1 ZDO ;
Z200. ; (2)
ZEND ;
X300. ;
:
The modal information of command (2) is G91 and G00, regardless of command (1).
- Single block stop

If an NC statement is placed in the single block stop state, for example, by the single block stop signal
SBK, the axis control command of an RTM statement also comes to a single block stop.
However, the automatic operation start signal STL is turned off when all conditions on the NC statement
side are satisfied, even if the axis control command of an RTM statement is not terminated.
If an RTM command consists of multiple statements and an axis control command is coded in multiple
blocks, only the block of the RTM statement that is currently executing an axis command can be brought
to a single block stop by setting the group-by-group single block stop signal (ESBKg) for PMC axis
control corresponding to the axis to “1”.
- 356 -
- Feed hold
Even when an NC statement enters the automatic operation halt state, the axis control command of an
RTM statement does not stop immediately but stops at the time of termination of the block currently
being executed. To stop also the axis control command of an RTM statement immediately when the NC
statement enters the automatic operation halt state, control the temporary stop signal (ESTPg) for PMC
axis control of the related group by monitoring the automatic operation halt in-progress signal (SPL).
- Reset
Even when the CNC is reset by an MDI reset, the external reset signal (ERS), or the reset and rewind
signal (RRW), the axis control command of an RTM statement does not stop immediately but stops at the
time of termination of the block currently being executed. When the emergency stop state is set, however,
the RTM statement also stops immediately.
During execution of the axis control command of an RTM statement, the real time macro being executed
can be stopped independently of the NC statement by setting the group-by-group reset signal (ECLRg)
for PMC axis control corresponding to the axis to “1”. To stop also the axis control command of an RTM
statement when the CNC is reset, control the reset signal (ECLRg) for PMC axis control of the related
group by monitoring the reset signal (RST).
- Alarm stop
Even when a PS alarm is issued with an NC statement, the axis control command of the RTM statement
being executed does not stop immediately but stops at the time of termination of the block currently being
executed. Moreover, even when an overtravel alarm is issued for an axis other than the axis controlled by
the RTM statement being executed, the RTM statement being executed does not stop immediately but
stops at the time of termination of the block currently being executed.
- Alarm reset
When the group-by-group alarm signal (EIALg) for PMC axis control corresponding to the axis specified
by an RTM statement is set to “1”, correct the cause of the alarm, then reset the CNC, and reset PMC axis
control with the reset signal (ECLRg) for PMC axis control of the related group.
(Tip) In the following cases, the alarm signal (EIALg) is set to “1”:
(1) When a servo alarm is issued
(2) When an overtravel alarm is issued
(3) When P/S0130 alarm is issued
(4) When P/S0139 alarm is issued
- Interlock
In an RTM statement, the interlock signal (*IT) for an NC statement, interlock signal for each axis (*ITn),
interlock signal for each axis direction (+ITn/-ITn) are invalid. Instead, the axis control temporary stop
signal (ESTPg) for PMC axis control is valid in an RTM statement. When temporarily stopping the axis
controlled by an RTM statement, control the corresponding axis control temporary stop signal (ESTPg)
for PMC axis control.
The cutting block start interlock signal *CSL (G8.1) and the block start interlock signal *BSL (G8.3) are
invalid.
- Machine lock
The same machine lock signals (all axes/each axis) as used with an NC statement are used. However, by
disabling machine lock for PMC axis control with the following parameters, machine lock can be
disabled for the axis being controlled by an RTM statement:
Bit 0 (MLE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 1 (MLS) of parameter No. 8006
- 357 -
- Dry run
With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the dry run signal (DRN) for an NC statement or
the dry run signal (EDRN) for a PMC axis can be chosen. When enabling a dry run feedrate for rapid
traverse in an RTM statement, set bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001 to 1. If a feed command specifying
a feedrate is specified when the manual rapid traverse selection signal (RT or ERT) is set to “1”, the
cutting feedrate is used as the feedrate during dry run. ("Dry run feedrate × maximum manual feedrate
override value" is not applicable.)
- In-position check
In the in-position state, the in-position signal (EINPg) is set to “1”.
When bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004 is set to 1, no in-position check is made during axis control
based on an RTM statement. The setting of bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 for an NC statement is
invalid. (However, the in-position signal (INPx) for an NC statement is affected by the value of NCI.)
- Manual absolute
The manual absolute signal (*ABSM) is invalid.
- External deceleration
By setting bit 0 (EDC) of parameter No. 8005 to 1, the external deceleration function can be used also for
the axis being controlled by an RTM statement. Note, however, that the external deceleration function is
unusable for feed with a specified feedrate (feed per revolution). For an external deceleration rate, the
external deceleration rate setting for rapid traverse (parameter No. 1427, No. 1441, and No. 1444) is valid,
regardless of the type of feed.
The external deceleration function for the axis being controlled by an RTM statement is also valid for
feed with a specified feedrate (feed per minute), regardless of the settings of bit 4 (EDP) of parameter No.
1005 and bit 5 (EDM) of parameter No. 1005. (The enabling of rapid traverse only is impossible.)
- Mirror image
At enabling mirror image for the axis being controlled by an RTM statement, set bit 0 (EMR) of
parameter No. 8008 to 1, and set either bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter No.0012 or mirror image signal MIx to
“1”.
Programmable mirror image is not available.
NOTE
1 The same group as the PMC axis control group used for axis control cannot be
executed with an RTM statement.
2 No NC statement can specify an axis being controlled by an RTM statement.
3 An alarm is issued if, during execution of an RTM statement, an attempt is made
to execute another RTM statement with the same ID. In the program below, for
example, the RTM statement of (1) operates using the NC statement of (2) as a
trigger, and the RTM statement of (3) operates using the NC statement of (4) as
a trigger. An alarm is issued if (1) is still operating when (4) is started after
completion of the interpolation of (2).
//1 ZDO ;
G91 G00 A100. ; (1) RTM statement
ZEND ;
G01 X30. Y20. ; (2) NC statement
//1 ZDO ;
G91 G00 B100. ; (3) RTM statement
ZEND ;
X40. Y50. ; (4) NC statement
- 358 -
NOTE
4 An RTM statement for performing axis control proceeds to the next command at
the end of distribution. For example, in the program below, #RV[0] counts up at
the time X50. distribution ends and deceleration starts.
// ZDO ;
G00 X50. ;
#RV[0]=#RV[0]+1 ;
ZEND ;
Command details
- Rapid traverse
A movement is made at a rapid traverse rate on an axis from the current position to the point separated by
a specified value.
Format
// ZDO ;
G91 G00 IP _ ;
ZEND ;
G91 : G code for incremental command
IP _ : Travel distance
NOTE
1 Only one axis can be specified in one block.
2 The absolute command (G90) cannot be specified.
3 The rapid traverse overlap function cannot be used.
4 When using this function, be sure to set bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 to 0.
• Rapid traverse override

With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the rapid traverse override signal (ROV)
for an NC statement or the rapid traverse override signal (EROV) dedicated to PMC axis control can
be chosen.
NOTE
Even if bit 4 (RF0) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1, rapid traverse does not
stop with a cutting feed override of 0%.
- Feed with a specified feedrate (feed per minute)

A movement is made at a feedrate specified in F on an axis from the current position to the point
separated by a specified value.
Format
// ZDO ;
G91 G01 IP _ F_ ;
ZEND ;
IP __: Travel distance
F__ : Feedrate command (mm/min or inch/min)
- 359 -
NOTE
3 The block overlap function cannot be used.
4 When IS-A is used, a feedrate below 10 mm/min is discarded.
5 The feedrate cannot be clamped to a parameter-set maximum cutting feedrate.
6 No time is added to the cumulative cutting time.
7 Even if this command is executed, the cutting in-progress signal is not output.
8 The operation between blocks for feed with a specified feedrate is performed in
the cutting mode.
9 For this command, the feedrate arrival signal SAR <G029.4> cannot be used.
• Feedrate specification range

The table below indicates the feedrate specification range.
Linear axis
Rotation axis (deg/min)
Metric input (mm/min) Inch input (inch/min)
IS-A 10. to 240000. 0.1 to 6553.5 10. to 240000.
IS-B 1. to 65535. 0.01 to 655.35 1. to 65535.
IS-C 0.1 to 6553.5 0.001 to 65.535 0.1 to 6553.5
IS-D 0.01 to 655.35 0.0001 to 6.5535 0.01 to 655.35
IS-E 0.001 to 65.535 0.00001 to 0.65535 0.001 to 65.535
NOTE
1 Be sure to set the following parameters to 0:
Bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002
Bit 4 (EFD) of parameter No. 8006
Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002
Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002
When a value other than 0 is set, the feedrate specification range changes,
depending on the set parameter.
2 A value less than the lowest feedrates indicated above is discarded.
• Feedrate override
With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the feedrate override signal (*FV) for an
NC statement or the feedrate override signal (*EFOV) dedicated to PMC axis control can be chosen.
NOTE
1 The second feedrate override function cannot be used.
2 The feedrate override function cannot be disabled using #3004.
• Override cancel
With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the feedrate override cancel signal (OVC)
for an NC statement or the feedrate override cancel signal (EOVC) dedicated to PMC axis control
can be chosen.
• Operation between blocks

If feed with a specified feedrate is performed in succession in RTM statements, no stop occurs
between blocks, but the next block is executed. With the accumulated pulse zero check signal
(ELCKZg) for PMC axis control, an accumulated pulse zero check can be made between blocks
specifying feed with a specified feedrate.
- 360 -
NOTE
1 The error detect signal (SMZ) cannot be used.
2 With the accumulated pulse zero check signal (ELCKZg) for PMC axis control,
an accumulated pulse zero check can be made between blocks specifying feed
with a specified feedrate for feed on the same axis only.
• Acceleration/deceleration time constant

For an acceleration/deceleration time constant to be used for feed with a specified feedrate in an
RTM statement when exponential acceleration/deceleration is used, whether to use the time constant
for an NC statement or the time constant dedicated to PMC axis control can be chosen using
parameter No. 8030.
NOTE
Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation cannot be used.
- Reference position return

A movement is made at the rapid traverse rate to the first reference position on a specified axis. Upon
completion of reference position return, the return completion lamp is turned on.
Format
// ZDO ;
G91 G28 IP 0 ;
ZEND ;
IP 0 : Specify an axis on which reference position return is to be performed.
Be sure to specify 0 as the travel distance.
NOTE
2 No intermediate point may be specified. (Be sure to specify 0 as the travel
distance. Otherwise, alarm PS0410 is issued.) If a movement needs to be once
made to an intermediate point, specify positioning with rapid traverse
(G00)/machine coordinate system selection (G53) then specify this command.
5 Before this command can be specified, a reference position must be established.
(With this command, do not specify an axis on which a reference position is not
established.)
6 Before specifying this command with the T series, cancel tool offset and
tool-nose radius compensation. Before specifying this command with the M
series, cancel cutter compensation, tool length compensation, and tool offset.

With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the rapid traverse override signal for an NC
statement or the rapid traverse override signal dedicated to PMC axis control can be chosen.
NOTE
- 361 -
- Machine coordinate system selection

When a position in the machine coordinate system is specified, a movement is made to the position on the
axis by rapid traverse. The G53 code for machine coordinate system selection is a one-shot G code, so
that a command in the machine coordinate system is valid in the block that specifies G53. When moving
the tool to a machine-specific position such as a tool change position, perform programming in the
machine coordinate system based on G53.
Format
// ZDO ;
G90 G53 IP _ ;
ZEND ;
G90 : G code for absolute command
IP _ : Position in machine coordinate system
NOTE
2 The incremental command (G91) cannot be specified.
4 Before this command can be specified, a reference position must be established.
(With this command, do not specify an axis on which a reference position is not
established.)
5 Before specifying this command with the T series, cancel tool offset and tool-nose
radius compensation. Before specifying this command with the M series, cancel
cutter compensation, tool length compensation, and tool offset.

With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, whether to use the rapid traverse override signal for an NC
statement or the rapid traverse override signal dedicated to PMC axis control can be chosen.
NOTE
- Dwell
By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delayed by the specified time. (Dwell per
second)
Dwell per second is executed irrespective of bit 1 (DWL) of parameter No.3405.
Format
// ZDO ;
G04 IP _ ;
ZEND ;
IP _ : Axis address where bit 0 (XRT) of parameter No. 8011 was set
- Dwell specification range

The table below indicates the dwell specification range.
- 362 -

IS-A 0.01 to 999999.99
IS-B 0.001 to 99999.999
IS-C 0.0001 to 9999.9999 s
IS-D 0.00001 to 999.99999
IS-E 0.000001 to 99.999999
When the diameter is specified, whether to specify a radius value or diameter value for dwell operation
can be specified using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No.8005.
NOTE
1 Address P cannot be specified. Only the axis address where bit 0 (XRT) of
parameter No.8011 was set to 1 can be specified.
2 When specified without the decimal point, the specification unit depends on
inch/metric.
3 When the increment system is IS-C and bit 1 (DWE) of parameter No.8002=1, the
command value becomes 1/100.
17.8 NOTES
- Address without the decimal point
In general, an NC address without the decimal point is subject to calculator-type decimal point input
when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 or bit 0 (AXDx) of parameter No. 3455 is set to 1. In other cases,
an NC address without the decimal point is regarded as a least input increment.
- Indirect axis address specification

When indirect axis address specification is used, use a direct reference argument. No indirect reference
may be used.
Example)
AX[1] Correct
AX[#RV[0]] Incorrect
- Diameter specification/radius specification
For an axis to be controlled with an RTM statement, select radius specification. (Set bit 3 (DIA) of
parameter No. 1006 to 0.)
- Alarm PS0224
If bit 0 (ZRN) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 0, and an axis control command is specified in an NC
statement before a reference position return operation is not performed even once after power-up, alarm
PS0224, “ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED.” is issued. In axis control using an RTM statement, the
alarm is not issued even when bit 0 (ZRN) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 0, unless bit 6 (EZR) of
- Axis removal
Even when axes are removed, interlock is not applied to the axis being controlled by an RTM statement.
- Stroke limit check before movement

No stroke limit check before movement is made with a block in an RTM statement.
- Others
For the axis being controlled by an RTM statement, the functions disabled for PMC axis control cannot
be used.
- 363 -
- Other disabled functions

For the axis being controlled by an RTM statement, the functions listed below as examples are disabled.
Do not specify these functions for the axis being controlled by an RTM statement.
• Auxiliary function
• Feed-forward
• Advanced preview feed-forward
• Fine acceleration/deceleration
• Automatic corner deceleration
• Scaling
• Coordinate system rotation
• Feed stop
• Positioning function based on optimal acceleration, etc.
CAUTION
In an RTM statement, do not specify an axis used with any of the following
functions:
1 Axis synchronous control
Be sure to set the axis synchronous control selection signal (SYNCn) and
axis synchronous control manual feed selection signal (SYNCJn) of the axis
to “0”.
2 AI contour control I
17.9 LIMITATION
Major general notes on RTM commands are provided below.
- Background drawing
The RTM command has no effect in background drawing. Do not specify an RTM command during
background drawing.
- Interrupt-type custom macro

In an interrupt-type custom macro, no RTM command can be coded.
- Macro executor
In a macro executor, no RTM command can be coded.
Moreover, no macro executor can be coded from an RTM command.
In a series of programs, do not code a macro executor (execution macro) and RTM command at the same
time.
In addition, observe the following:
• Do not code an RTM command in a program that uses an execution macro.
• Do not call an execution macro from a program with an RTM command coded.
• Do not code an RTM command in an execution macro.
• Do not use an execution macro as an RTM command trigger.
- Sequence number
No sequence number can be coded in an RTM command. No RTM command can be searched for a
sequence number.

Optional block skip is unusable.
- 364 -
A slash (/) that appears in the middle of <expression> (enclosed in [ ] on the right-hand side of an
arithmetic/logical expression) is regarded as a division operator; it is not regarded as an optional block
skip code.
- Single block
When an RTM command is used, a single block stop generally occurs according to an NC statement,
regardless of the values of bit 5 (SBM) of parameter No. 6000 and bit 7 (SBV) of parameter No. 6000.
However, no single block stop occurs according to G65 for real time macro call.
- Processing
If there are many RTM statements between NC statements, the command flow may break.
- DNC operation
DNC operation is disabled.
- Operation in each event

If an event such as an emergency stop or alarm occurs during execution of an RTM command, the NC
command and RTM command generally operate as indicated below.
RTM command consisting RTM command including an axis

Event NC command
of a macro command control command
PS alarm issued Operation stops The RTM command stops If the RTM statement being executed
in NC command when the block when the NC command stops. when the NC command stops is an
execution involving the PS axis control command, operation on
alarm cause starts. the axis stops when the block stops.
Alarm issued in Operation stops The RTM statement stops at The RTM statement stops at that
RTM command with the alarm. that point. Other RTM point. Other RTM commands stop
execution commands stop when the NC operation on the axis when axis control
command stops. by the RTM statement being executed
when the NC statement stops ends.
Single block (SBK Operation stops The RTM command is If the RTM statement being executed
signal) when the command suspended when the NC when the NC command stops is an
being executed command stops. axis control statement, operation on
ends. When the NC command the axis stops when the block ends.
restarts, the RTM command
restarts.
Feed hold (*SP A gradual stop The RTM command stops If the RTM statement being executed
signal) occurs. when the NC command stops. when the NC command stops is an
When the NC command axis control statement, operation on
restarts, the RTM command the axis stops when the block ends.
restarts.
NC command A gradual stop The RTM command stops If the RTM statement being executed
stopped by a occurs, and the when the NC command stops. when the NC command stops is an
reset (ERS command also axis control command, operation on
signal) ends. the axis stops when the block ends.
Emergency stop An immediate stop The command immediately Operation on the axis immediately
occurs, and the ends. stops, and the command also
command also immediately ends.
ends.
- 365 -
RTM command consisting RTM command including an axis

Event NC command
of a macro command control command
End of the NC - If the RTM command being If the one-shot RTM command being
command executed is a one-shot RTM executed when the NC command ends
command, the command is an axis control command, operation
ends. on the axis stops when the block ends.
If the RTM command being
executed is a modal RTM
command, the command
continues execution.
Machine lock The NC command The RTM command operates. The RTM command can be enabled.
(MLK signal) is valid. For details, see the description of the
axis control command.
Dry run (DRN The NC command The RTM command operates. The RTM command can be enabled.
signal) is valid. For details, see the description of the
Interlock (*IT The NC command The RTM command operates. The RTM command can be enabled.
signal) is valid. For details, see the description of the
- 366 -
18.PROGRAMMABLE
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING DATA INPUT (G10)
18 PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT (G10)

Chapter 18, "PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT (G10)", consists of the following sections:
18.1 PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT (G10)......................................................................................367

18.2 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10).........................................................................368
18.3 TOOL DATA INPUT .......................................................................................................................372
18.1 PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT (G10)

Overview
The values of workpiece origin offset, tool data, etc. can be entered in a program.
Format
- Programmable data entry
G10 L_ (data) ; Data entry
L_: Data number
Explanation
- Data number (L)
For the correspondence between the settable data and the data number (L) of programmable data input,
refer to tables below.
For the detailed specifications such as the input format of each data, refer to the reference item.
Table 18.1 (a) Programmable data input

Data
Data Reference item
number
L2 Workpiece origin offset value Changing Workpiece Coordinate System / “COORDINATE
SYSTEM” in PROGRAMMING
L11 Tool compensation value Outputting offset data / “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT” in
(Tool compensation memory A) OPERATION, TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES,
NUMBER OF COMPENSATION VALUES, AND
ENTERING VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) /
“COMPENSATION FUNCTION” in PROGRAMMING
L40 M code group number Setting an M Code Group Number Using a Program /
“AUXILIARY FUNCTION” in PROGRAMMING
L60 Periodic maintenance data Periodic Maintenance Screen / “SETTING AND
L61 Periodic maintenance item name DISPLAYING DATA” in OPERATION
Periodic Maintenance Screen (15/19-inch) Display Unit) /
“SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA” in OPERATION
NOTE
1 G10 and G11 must be specified in a block in which there is no other command.
2 Other NC statements cannot be specified during the data entry mode.
3 G10 and G11 are G codes for disabling buffering.
- 367 -
18. PROGRAMMABLE
DATA INPUT (G10) PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
18.2 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10)

Overview
The values of parameters and pitch error compensation data can be entered in a program. This function is
used for setting pitch error compensation data when attachments are changed or the maximum cutting
feedrate or cutting time constants are changed to meet changing machining conditions.
The input format of pitch error compensation data is changed depending on bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.
3602.
Format
- Parameter entry mode
G10L52 ; Parameter entry mode setting
N_(Q_)R_ ; For parameters other than the axis type
N_P_(Q_)R_ ; For axis type parameters
:
:
G11 ; Parameter entry mode cancel
N_ : Parameter number
R_ : Parameter setting value (Leading zeros can be omitted.)
(Q_) : Bit number 0 to 7 (to be set when a bit type parameter is input)
(Enabled when bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No.3454 = 1.)
P_ : Axis number 1 to maximum controlled axis number (to be specified when an axis
type parameter parameter is specified)
NOTE
G10L52 cannot be used to enter pitch error compensation data.
- Pitch error compensation data entry mode

G10L50 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode setting
N_(L1)R_ ; Pitch error compensation data entry
:
G11 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode cancel
N_ : Compensation position number for pitch errors compensation +10,000
L1 : Input format of pitch error compensation data (total value type)
R_ : Pitch error compensation data
NOTE
G10L50 cannot be used to enter parameter.
Explanation
- Parameter number(N_)
Programmable parameter input (G10L52) enables writing to a parameter for a specific path by adding that
path number to the parameter number to be specified (N_). The format for the parameter number is as
follows:
Nppxxxxxxx : Add a path number to the high-order 8th and 9th digits of a parameter number.
For pp, set a path number, and for xxxxxxx, set a parameter number. If a path number is
omitted or if 0 is set, writing to a parameter for the local path is assumed, as usual.
- 368 -
18.PROGRAMMABLE
NOTE
1 If a path number out of the range is specified, alarm PS0115 is issued.
2 Pitch error compensation data entry does not enable selection of a path.
- Setting value (R_)

Do not use a decimal point in the setting (R_) of a parameter and pitch error compensation data. To
change a bit type parameter if bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No. 3454 is 1, specify 0 or 1. If a value other than
0 and 1 is specified, alarm PS1144, "G10 FORMAT ERROR", is issued.
As the value of R, a custom macro variable can be used.
When a parameter of real type is used, set an integer value in (R_) according to the increment system of
the parameter.
- Bit number (Q_)

Bit number (Q_) is effective if bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No. 3454 is 1. To set a bit type parameter, set a
number in the range of 0 to 7.
A custom macro variable can be used as the value of Q.
- Axis number (P_)

As the axis number (P_) of parameter entry mode, specify the order of a controlled axis to be displayed
on the CNC display screen, by using an axis type parameter.
For example, specify P2 for the control axis which is displayed second.
A custom macro variable can be used as the value of P.
- Input format of pitch error compensation data (L1)

When the input format of pitch error compensation data is incremental value type (bit 0 (APE) of
parameter No. 3602 is set to 0), L1 is not to be specified.
When the input format of pitch error compensation data is total value type (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.
3602 is set to 1), L1 needs to be specified.
If the data with L1 is input when bit 0 (APE) of parameter No. 3602 is set to 0, or the data without L1 is
input when bit 0 (APE) of parameter No. 3602 is set to 1, alarm PS1300 “ILLEGAL ADDRESS” is
caused.
WARNING
1 Do not fail to perform reference position return manually after changing the pitch
error compensation data or backlash compensation data. Without this, the
machine position can deviate from the correct position.
2 If the compensation data is changed when the input format is total value type(bit
0 (APE) of parameter No. 3602 is set to 1), power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
CAUTION
Compatibility with the Series 16i/18i/21i:
This model has parameters that are not compatible with the Series 16i/18i/21i.
So, before using this function, make a check according to the Parameter Manual
(B-64490EN) of this model.
NOTE
1 G10 and G11 must be specified in a block in which there is no other command.
2 Other NC statements cannot be specified while in parameter input mode and
pitch error compensation data entry mode.
3 G10 and G11 are G codes for disabling buffering.
4 A decimal point cannot be used in the address N, L, P, Q and R.
- 369 -
18. PROGRAMMABLE
- Writing to a parameter for another path

Programmable parameter input (G10L52) enables writing to a parameter for another path by specifying
that path number in either of the following ways:
• Adding a path number to a parameter number (example 4)
• Specifying a path number using system variable #3018 (example 5)
CAUTION
If changing a parameter for another path by using this function, be sure to take appropriate
measures such as combining the function with an inter-path wait, so that the function is
executed while the axis for which to change the parameter is stopped.
[Example]
The following shows an example of changing a parameter for path 2 from path 1, using
M100 and M101 as wait M codes.
Path 1 program Path 2 program
O0100; O0200;
: :
: M100P12 ......(1)
M100P12..................(1) M101P12 ......(2)
G10L52; :
N200xxxxxP_R_ (A) :
G11; M30;
M101P12...................(2)
G10L52; (1): Waits for the start of writing to a parameter
NxxxxxP_R_ (B) from 1st path
G11; (2): Waits for the end of writing to a parameter
: from the 1st path
M30; (Subsequently, operation is performed with
the parameter changed in (A).)
(A):Change to a parameter for another path

→ Must be made after it is checked that the axis on the path for which to change the
parameter is stopped.
(B):Change to a parameter for the local path
- Writing of a power-off parameter

It is impossible to write a power-off parameter by using programmable parameter input (G10L52)
because an alarm PS1302, "ILLEGAL DATA NUMBER" is caused.
However, when a bit 2 (WPP) of parameter No.11502 is set to 1, it is possible to write a power-off
parameter. In this case, an alarm PW0000, "POWER MUST BE OFF" is caused when the parameter entry
mode cancel (G11) is specified.
NOTE
In case that a bit 2 (WPP) of parameter No.11502 is set to 1, it is possible to
write a power-off parameter by using programmable parameter input (G10L52)
even when "PARAMETER WRITE" is disabled.
- Writing of a machine unit parameter

In the writing of a machine unit parameter by using programmable parameter input (G10L52), a
parameter setting value (R_) is specified in the input unit. In case that the inch/metric conversion is
enabled, the parameter setting value (R_) is converted to the machine unit and set to the parameter.
Example)
In case that the increment system is IS-B and the input unit is inch on the metric machine:
- 370 -
18.PROGRAMMABLE
When R100000 (=10.0000inch) is specified, 254.000mm is set to the parameter.
Example
1. Set bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404 (when the bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No. 3454 is set to
0)
G10L52 ; Parameter entry mode
N3404 R 00000100 ; SBP setting
G11 ; Cancel parameter entry mode
2. Set bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404 (when the bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No. 3454 is set to
1)
N3404 Q2 R 1 ; SBP setting
3. Change the values for the Z-axis (3rd axis) and A-axis (4th axis) in axis type parameter No. 1322
(the coordinates of stored stroke limit 2 in the positive direction for each axis).
(When the increment systems for the 3rd and 4th axes are IS-B and millimeter machine,
respectively)
N1322P3R4500 ; Change the value for the Z-axis to 4.500
N1322PP4R12000 ; Change the value for the A-axis to 12.000
4. Of axis type parameter No. 01322 for the 2nd path, change the values for the 3rd and 4th axes.
(When the increment systems for the 3rd and 4th axes are IS-B and metric input, respectively)
G10L52; Parameter entry mode
N20001322P3R4500; Change the value for the 3rd axis in 2nd path to 4.500
N20001322P4R12000; Change the value for the 4th axis in 2nd path to 12.000
G11; Cancel parameter entry mode
5. Write to the 4th axis of parameter No. 01322 for the 2nd path
#3018=2; Set the path subject to parameter writing to the 2nd path
G10L52; Parameter entry mode
N1322P4R12000; Change the value for the 4th axis in 2nd path to 12.000
G11; Cancel parameter entry mode
#3018= 0 ; Return to the local path
6. Change compensation point numbers 10 and 20 of pitch error compensation. (bit 0 (APE) of
parameter No. 3602 is set to 0)
G10L50 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode
N10010R1 ; Change the compensation point number from 10 to 1
N10020R5 ; Change the compensation point number from 20 to 5
G11 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode
7. Change compensation point numbers 10 and 20 of pitch error compensation. (bit 0 (APE) of
parameter No. 3602 is set to 1)
G10L50 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode
N10010L1R1 ; Change the compensation point number from 10 to 1
N10020L1R5 ; Change the compensation point number from 20 to 5
G11 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode
- 371 -
18. PROGRAMMABLE
18.3 TOOL DATA INPUT

Format
G10L30 ; Tool data entry mode setting
N_P_R_ ; Tool data entry
:
:
N_ : Tool data No. or multiple tool data No.

The multi tool data No. is No. +200 when there is no tool data setting option.
The multi tool data No. is No. +5000 when there is tool data setting option.
R_ : Tool data setting value
P_ : Kind of tool data
・When N code is specified as tool data

P01 : Tool data No. setting
P02 : Turret position for indexing turret setting
P03 : X–axis tool offset setting
P04 : Y–axis tool offset setting
P05 : Tool change No. setting
P06 : Punch count setting
P07 : Tool life setting
P08 : Tool figure setting for graphic operation
P09 : X dimension of a tool setting for graphic operation
P10 : Y dimension of a tool setting for graphic operation
P11 : Tool angle setting for graphic operation
・When N code is specified as multiple tool data and tool data setting function is enabled
P01 : Subtool No. setting
P02 : Angle for indexing turret of multiple tool setting
P03 : Radius of multiple tool
P04 : X–axis tool offset setting
P06 : Multiple tool figure setting for graphic operation
P07 : X dimension of a multiple tool setting for graphic operation
P08 : Y dimension of a multiple tool setting for graphic operation
P09 : Multiple tool angle setting for graphic operation
・When N code is specified as multiple tool data and tool data setting function is not
enabled
P01 : Subtool No. setting
P02 : Angle for indexing turret of multiple tool setting
P04 : Multiple tool figure setting for graphic operation
P05 : X dimension of a multiple tool setting for graphic operation
P06 : Y dimension of a multiple tool setting for graphic operation
P07 : Multiple tool angle setting for graphic operation
Example
Change the value of tool number for the tool data No. 10.
G10L30 ; Tool data entry mode

N10P01R333 ; Modify tool number
- 372 -
19.HIGH-SPEED CUTTING
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS
19 HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS

Chapter 19, "HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
19.1 AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION I .......................................................................................373
19.1 AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION I

Overview
The AI contour control I function are provided for high-speed, high-precision machining. This function
enables suppression of acceleration/deceleration delays and servo delays that become larger with
increases in the feedrate and reduction of machining profile errors.
AI Contour Control I function can be used by Series 30i/31i-PB during laser mode only.
In the descriptions below concerning AI contour control I, the term "AI contour control" is used.
Format
G05.1 Q1 [R_] ; AI contour control mode on
:
G05.1 Q0 ; AI contour control mode off
The AI contour control mode can be controlled also with the formats that have been used for the
conventional advanced preview control function.
G08 P1 [R_] ; AI contour control mode on
:
G08 P0 ; AI contour control mode off
NOTE
1 Always specify G05.1 and G08 in an independent block.
（Do not specify other G codes at the same time.）
2 The AI contour control mode can also be turned off at a reset.
3 The AI contour control mode can be turned on at the start of automatic operation by setting bit 0 (SHP) of
parameter No. 1604.
4 G05.1 and G08 commands are separate commands respectively. Please turn off the AI contour control mode
by the command that turns on the AI contour control mode. AI contour control cannot be turned off by a
different command.
5 There are the following conditions when each AI contour control mode on / off is commanded in the multiple.
(1) The AI contour control mode commands are G05.1 and G08 in the order of a high-ranking command
(G05.1 > G08). It is necessary to turn on the AI contour control mode from the subordinate position
command sequentially when the multiple commands are executed.
(2) After the AI contour control mode is turned on by the G05.1Q1, if the G08 command is executed in the
mode, alarm PS5110 “IMPROPER G-CODE (AICC MODE)” occurs.
Example)
G05.1Q1 AI contour control mode on by G05.1
G08P1(P0) Alarm PS5110 occurs
(3) When the multiple commands are executed, each command that turns on/off the AI contour control mode
must be nested.
Example）
G08P1 AI contour control mode on by G08
:
G05.1Q1 AI contour control mode on by G05.1
:
G05.1Q0 AI contour control mode off by G05.1
:
G08P0 AI contour control mode off by G08
- 373 -
19. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING
FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
Valid functions
The functions listed below are valid in the AI contour control mode.
Valid functions are limited depending on the command format is used.
Refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder or contact the machine tool builder for the
function etc. that can be actually used.
Function AI contour control I
30
Number of blocks read ahead
(When G8 is specified: 1)
Speed control with feedrate difference on each axis Enabled
Speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation Enabled
Enabled
Speed control with acceleration on each axis
(When G8 is specified: Not enabled)
Explanation
- Method of determining the tangent acceleration
Acceleration/deceleration is performed with the largest tangent acceleration/deceleration that does not
exceed the acceleration set for each axis.
(Example)
X-axis permissible acceleration: 1000 mm/sec2
Y-axis permissible acceleration: 1200 mm/sec2
Acceleration change time: 20 msec
Program:
N1 G01 G91 X20. F6000 Move on the X-axis.
G04 X0.01
N2 Y20. Move on the Y-axis.
G04 X0.01
N3 X20. Y20. Move in the XY direction (at 45 degrees).
The acceleration in N3 is 1414 mm/sec2. At this point, the acceleration on the X-axis is equal to the set
value (1000 mm/sec2).
Tangent feedrate
20ms
1000mm/sec2 1200mm/sec2 1414mm/sec2

gradient gradient gradient
20ms 20ms 20ms
- Acceleration
Acceleration is performed so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of the
block.
Acceleration can be performed over several blocks.
- 374 -
Feedrate Speed control by look-ahead

acceleration/deceleration before
Programmed speed
Time
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
- Deceleration
Deceleration starts in advance so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of
the block.
Deceleration can be performed over several blocks.
Feedrate Speed control by look-ahead
Deceleration acceleration/deceleration before
start point interpolation
Programmed speed
Deceleration
start point
Time
- Deceleration based on a distance

If the total distance of the blocks read ahead becomes shorter than or equal to the deceleration distance
obtained from the current feedrate, deceleration starts.
If the total distance of the blocks read ahead during deceleration increases, acceleration is performed.
If the blocks of a small amount of travel are successively specified, deceleration and acceleration may be
performed alternately, making the feedrate inconsistent.
To avoid this, decrease the programmed feedrate.
- Function for changing time constant of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration

Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is performed using the parameter-set
acceleration and acceleration change time. If a low feedrate is specified, a linear acceleration/ deceleration
may not achieve the specified acceleration as shown:
- 375 -
Linear acceleration/deceleration not achieving

specified acceleration/deceleration
Feedrate
Specified
feedrate
Time
T1 T1
T2
T1 : Time obtained from specified feedrate and specified acceleration (specified

feedrate/acceleration (parameter No. 1660))
T2 : Acceleration change time (parameter No. 1772)
In such a case, set bit 3 (BCG) of parameter No. 7055 to 1. Then, the internal acceleration and vector time
constant of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation are changed to make the
acceleration/deceleration pattern as close as possible to the optimum bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation based on a specified acceleration/deceleration reference speed, and so
acceleration/deceleration time is reduced.
Feedrate Acceleration/deceleration curve
Specified
feedrate
T1'
T2' T2'
There are three methods for specifying the acceleration/deceleration reference speed.
(1) Specifying the speed using an F in a G05.1 Q1 block
(2) Setting the speed on parameter No.7066
When F is specified in a G05.1Q1 block, the specified feedrate is assumed to be the

acceleration/deceleration reference speed. This command can be used only in the feed per minute mode.
If no F command is specified in a G05.1Q1 block, the feedrate specified in parameter No. 7066 is
assumed to be the acceleration/deceleration reference speed. If 0 is set in parameter No. 7066, the F
command specified in the cutting start block is assumed to be the acceleration/deceleration reference
speed.
- Automatic feedrate control function

In AI contour control mode, the feedrate is automatically controlled by the reading-ahead of blocks.
The feedrate is determined using the following conditions. If the specified feedrate exceeds the
determined feedrate, acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation is performed to achieve the
determined feedrate.
<1> Feedrate changes on each axis at a corner and the permissible feedrate change that has been set
<2> Expected acceleration on each axis and the permissible acceleration that has been set
- 376 -
Specified tool path

The machining error is decreased
because of the deceleration by
Tool path assumed when
difference in feedrate.
Al contour control is not
used
Tool path assumed when Al
contour control is used
The machining error is decreased

because of the deceleration with
the acceleration.
For details, see the explanation of each function.
- Speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner

By using the speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner, if a feedrate change
occurs on an axis on each axis at a corner, the feedrate is determined so that any feedrate difference
exceeding the permissible feedrate difference on that axis that has been set for parameter No. 1783 does
not occur, and deceleration is automatically performed.
(Example)
Program
N1 G01 G91 X100. F5000
N2 Y100.
N2
N1
Tangent feedrate Tangent feedrate
The deceleration
based on the feedrate
difference is used.
X-axis feedrate X-axis feedrate
The feedrate difference

The tangent feedrate is becomes small, and the feedrate
smooth, but the feedrate on each axis becomes smooth.
on each axis is not.
N1 N2 N1 N2
Y-axis feedrate Y-axis feedrate
N1 N2 N1 N2
- 377 -
The method of deceleration based on the feedrate difference differs depending on the setting made for bit
6 (FNW) of parameter No. 19500.
If "0" is set, the largest feedrate that does not exceed the permissible feedrate difference set for parameter
No. 1783 is assumed to be the deceleration feedrate.
In this case, the deceleration feedrate differs if the travel direction differs, even if the shape is the same.
(Example)
If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0 and the
permissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min (on all axes)
Deceleration to
Deceleration to
354 mm/min
500 mm/min
If "1" is set, the feedrate is determined not only with the condition that
the permissible feedrate difference and permissible acceleration on each axis are not exceeded, but also
that the deceleration feedrate is constant regardless of the travel direction if the shape is the same.
If 1 is set for this parameter, the deceleration feedrate determined with the feedrate difference may be up
to 30% lower than that determined if 0 is set.
(Example)
If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 1 and
permissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min (on all axes)
Deceleration to
Deceleration to
354 mm/min
354 mm/min
- Speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation

When high-speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation, or helical interpolation, the actual tool
path has an error with respect to the programmed path. In circular interpolation, this error can be
approximated from the equation given below.
Y
Δr : Error
Specified path Δr : Maximum radius error (mm)

v : Feedrate (mm/sec)
Actual path r : Arc radius (mm)
a : Acceleration (mm/sec2)
T1 : Time constant of
acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation at cutting (sec)
r T2 : Time constant of servo motor (sec)
0 X
- 378 -
1 2 v2 1 2
Δr = (T1 + T22 ) = (T1 + T22 ) ⋅ a .................(Equation 1)
2 r 2
In actual machining, permissible error Δr is given, so the maximum permissible acceleration a (mm/sec2)
in equation 1 is determined.
Expression 1 is an expression when type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is exponential
acceleration/deceleration. The radius error in the case of linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is smaller than in case of exponential acceleration/deceleration by a factor of 12, excluding
any error caused by a servo motor time constant. The radius error in the case of bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is a half of linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
When a specified feedrate causes the radial error from an arc having a programmed radius to exceed the
permissible error, speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation automatically clamps the
arc-cutting feedrate by using parameter settings.
Let the permissible acceleration calculated from the permissible acceleration set for each axis be A. Then,
maximum permissible feedrate v with programmed radius r is expressed as follows:
v = A ⋅ r .............................................................(Equation 2)
If a specified feedrate exceeds feedrate v obtained from equation 2, the feedrate is clamped at feedrate v
automatically.
The permissible acceleration is specified in parameter No. 1735. If there is a difference in permissible
acceleration between two axes for circular interpolation, the lower acceleration is regarded as the
permissible acceleration.
If the radius of an arc is small, too small value can be calculated as deceleration v. In such a case, the
lower feedrate limit can be set in parameter No. 1732 to prevent the feedrate from being decreased too
much.
NOTE
Even if the AI contour control option is not specified, this function can be used by
specifying the speed control function option using the acceleration of circular
interpolation.
- Speed control with the acceleration on each axis

When consecutive small lines are used to form a curve, as in the example shown in the figure below, the
feedrate differences on each axis at the individual corners are not very large. Thus, deceleration with the
feedrate differences is not effective. Consecutive small feedrate differences, however, cause a large
acceleration on each axis, as a whole.
In such a case, deceleration can be performed to reduce the impact on the machine and the machining
error caused by too large an acceleration. The deceleration feedrate is determined to be the feedrate that
does not cause the acceleration on each axis to exceed the permissible acceleration set for parameter No.
1737.
The deceleration feedrate is determined for each corner. The actual feedrate is the smaller of the
deceleration feedrate determined at the start point of the block and that determined at the end point.
Depending on the specified figure, a very low deceleration feedrate may be calculated. In such a case, the
lower feedrate limit can be set in parameter No. 1738 to prevent the feedrate from being decreased too
much.
In the following example, the acceleration (gradient of the broken line in the feedrate graph) at too large
at corners N2 to N4 and N6 to N8 and, therefore, deceleration is performed.
- 379 -
N8
N7
N9
N6
N5
Y
N1
X N4
N3
N2
X-axis
feedrate
Y-axis
feedrate
Tangent
feedrate
N1 N5 N9 N1 N5 N9
The method of determining the feedrate with the acceleration differs depending on the setting of bit 6
(FNW) of parameter No. 19500.
If "0" is set, the highest feedrate that does not cause the permissible acceleration set for parameter No.
1737 to be exceeded is assumed to be the deceleration feedrate. In this case, the deceleration feedrate
differs depending on the travel direction even if the shape is the same, as shown in the figure below.
(Example) If a circular shape with a radius of 10 mm is specified with small
line blocks
Parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0
Permissible acceleration = 1000 mm/s2 (on all axes)
Tangent feedrate
F6000
The feedrate is
higher in these
directions.
Time
If "1" is set, the feedrate is determined with not only the condition that the permissible acceleration on
each axis is not exceeded but also the condition that the deceleration feedrate is constant regardless of the
travel direction if the shape is the same.
If 1 is set for this parameter, the deceleration feedrate determined with the feedrate difference or
acceleration may be up to 30% lower than that determined if 0 is set.
- 380 -
(Example) If a circular shape with a radius of 10 mm is specified with small

line blocks
Parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 1,
radius = 10 mm, permissible acceleration = 1000 mm/s2 (on all axes)
Tangent feedrate
F6000
The tangent
feedrate is
constant.
Time
NOTE
In circular interpolation, the tangent feedrate is constant regardless of the setting
of the parameter.
- Another example of determining the feedrate

If a specified feedrate exceeds the upper feedrate limit of AI contour control (in parameter No. 8465), the
feedrate is clamped at the upper feedrate. The upper feedrate limit is clamped at the maximum cutting
feedrate (parameter No. 1432).
Limitation
- Conditions for temporarily canceling the AI contour control mode
If one of the commands listed below is issued in the AI contour control mode, the AI contour control
mode is canceled temporarily.
If the system becomes ready for AI contour control after it is canceled, the AI contour control mode is
restored automatically.
• Positioning (rapid traverse)
• When no move command is specified
• One-shot G code other than the following:
- Cutter compensation vector retention
- Cutter compensation corner rounding
- Exact stop
- Modal G codes usable when AI contour control is specified

In a modal G code state listed below, AI contour control can be specified.
Do not specify AI contour control in modal states other than these.
G40 : Tool radius compensation cancel

G40.1 : Normal direction control cancel
G50 : Scaling cancel
G50.1 : Programmable mirror image cancel
G64 : Cutting mode cancel
G67 : Macro modal call cancel
G85 : Coordinate system rotation cancel
- Retrace
When the reverse execution is started in AI contour control mode, a reverse execution ends immediately
depending on a program then the backward movement is not possible.
- 381 -
During reverse execution and forward reexecution, the feedrate clamp function by acceleration under AI
contour control is disabled.
Notes
- About processing macro statements
In AI contour control mode, the NC statements of multiple blocks are looked ahead. Macro statements
such as arithmetic expressions and conditional branches are processed as soon as they are read into the
buffer. Therefore, the timing of the macro statement execution is not always the specified order.
In case that you need to execute the macro statement after completing the NC block just before the macro
statement, specify M code or G code that is not buffered just before the macro statement. Specially, in
case of reading/writing the system variables to control signals, coordinates, offset value, etc., it may be
different system variable data by the timing of the NC statement execution. To avoid this phenomenon,
specify such M codes or G codes before the macro statement, if necessary.
- 382 -
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS
20 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Chapter 20, "AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
20.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL...............................................................................................383

20.2 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER ........................................................................................................384
20.3 TANDEM CONTROL......................................................................................................................385
20.4 C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING).............................................................................385
20.5 T–AXIS AND C–AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL.................................................................391
20.6 RAM-AXIS CONTROL ...................................................................................................................391
20.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

When a movement is made along one axis by using multiple servo motors as in the case of a large gantry
machine, a command for one axis can drive the multiple motors by synchronizing one motor with the
other. An axis used as the reference for axis synchronous control is called a master axis (M-axis), and an
axis along which a movement is made in synchronism with the master axis is called a slave axis (S-axis).
Z
A
(Slave axis)
X
(Master axis)
Fig. 20.1 Example of machine with X and A being synchronous axes
Operation where axis synchronous control is turned on (enabled) to make a movement along the slave
axis in synchronism with the master axis is called a synchronous operation. Operation where axis
synchronous control is turned off (disabled) to move a master axis and a slave axis independently is
called a normal operation.
(Example)
Automatic operation when the master axis is the X-axis and the slave axis is the A-axis:
In synchronous operation, both the X-axis and the A-axis are moved according to the programmed
command Xxxxx for the master axis.
In normal operation, the master axis and the slave axis are moved independently as in the case of
normal CNC control. The programmed command Xxxxx makes a movement along the X-axis. The
programmed command Aaaaa makes a movement along the A-axis. The programmed command
Xxxxx Aaaaa makes movements along the X-axis and A-axis at the same time.
For details, refer to the relevant manual published by the machine tool builder.
- 383 -
20.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
Note
NOTE
1 During axis synchronous control, a movement based on automatic reference
position return (G28), or machine coordinate system selection (G53) command
is made as described below according to the setting of bit 2 (SRF) of parameter
No. 8305.
<1> When SRF = 0, the same movement as made along the master axis is
made along the slave axis.
<2> When SRF = 1, a movement is made along the slave axis to the specified
position independently of a movement made along the master axis to the
specified position.
2 A command not involving a movement along an axis such as the workpiece
coordinate system setting command (G92) and local coordinate system setting
command (G52) is set with the master axis according to the master axis
programming.
3 When switching the synchronization state in a program, be sure to specify M
codes (parameters Nos. 8337 and 8338) for turning synchronization on and off.
By switching between the input signals SYNC <Gn138> and SYNCJ <Gn140>
from the PMC with the M codes, the synchronization state can be switched in the
program.
4 If the following errors occurred during axis synchronous control, an alarm
PS0213 is issued.
<1> If the program issued the move command to the slave axis.
<2> If the manual operation (jog feed or incremental feed) is performed to the
slave axis.
<3> If the program issued the automatic reference position return command
without specifying the manual reference position return after the power was
turned on.
5 A programmed command can be specified for the slave axis when switching
between synchronous operation and normal operation is enabled (with bit 5
(SCAx) of parameter No. 8304 set to 0) and the signal SYNC/SYNCJ select
normal operation.
20.2 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER

The roll-over function of the rotary axis prevents coordinates for the rotary axis from overflowing. The
roll-over function of the rotary axis is enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1.
20.2.1 Rotary Axis Roll-over

Explanation
For an incremental programming, the tool moves the angle specified in the command. For an absolute
programming, the coordinates after the tool has moved are values set in parameter No. 1260, and rounded
by the angle corresponding to one rotation. The tool moves in the direction in which the final coordinates
are closest when bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0. Displayed values for relative coordinates
are also rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation when bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No. 1008 is
set to 1.
- 384 -
Example
Assume that axis A is the rotary axis and that the amount of movement per rotation is 360.000 (parameter
No. 1260 = 360000). When the following program is executed using the roll-over function of the rotary
axis, the axis moves as shown below.
Absolute coordinate value after
Sequence number Actual movement value
G90 A0 ; movement end
N1 G90 A-150.0 ; N1 -150 210
N2 G90 A540.0 ; N2 -30 180
N3 G90 A-620.0 ; N3 -80 100
N4 G91 A380.0 ; N4 +380 120
N5 G91 A-840.0 ; N5 -840 0
Relative
coordinate value -720° -360° -0° 360°
Absolute -0° -0° -0° -0°
coordinate value
210° (Absolute)
N1
180°
N2
100°
N3
120°
N4
N5
20.3 TANDEM CONTROL

When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by only one motor, two motors can be
used for movement along a single axis. Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The submotor is
used only to produce torque. With this tandem control function, the torque produced can be doubled.
Main motor
Table
Ball screw
Sub motor
Fig. 20.3 Example of operation
In general, the NC regards tandem control as being performed for one axis. However, for servo parameter
management and servo alarm monitoring, tandem control is regarded as being performed for two axes.
For details, refer to the relevant manual published by the machine tool builder.
CAUTION
In case the names of the master axis and slave axis are different, be sure not to
specify a programmed command for the slave axis.
20.4 C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING)

For predetermined dies (tools) on a turret, the angular position of the die can be changed with a command
from a tape, a memory or MDI.
In the past, it was necessary to use many dies when the die shape is the same but the die arrangement is
different. Even in such a case, this new function makes it possible to conduct the operations only with one
- 385 -
die since the function can freely change the angular position of the die. Further, since chamfering of four
corners of a workpiece can be performed only with one die, the time required for die change is reduced,
resulting in shorter machining time.
Further, in pattern function for a circular geometry bolt hole circle, arc pattern, and arc nibbling function,
the C axis is automatically controlled so that one side of the die always faces the center of arc at each
punching position.
NOTE
1 The punch section and the die section of the die can be controlled by the same
motors or C axis synchronously controlled by the respective servo motors.
2 Set 67(C) in parameter No.1020 as the name of the axis to control the axis under
the C axis control.
3 The C axis should be set as a rotation axis. (bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006
is set to 1)
4 Setting the following parameters of C axis allows the CNC to be compatible with
FANUC Series 16i-PB, as follows:
Setting Meaning
Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008=0 In the absolute programming, the axis rotates in the
direction in which the distance to the target is shorter.
Bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.1008=1 Relative coordinates are rounded by the amount of the
shift per one rotation
N3221 G90 G00 X110. Y160. C0. #1 to #4：Punching order in N3223

N3222 G72 X50. Y100. ：Operation of the tool
N3223 G26 I60. J90. K4 C45.
+Y
#1:(50.0,160.0)
N3221:(110.0,160.0)
C-axis = 45.0
C-axis = 0.0
C-axis moves along with

X-and Y-axes positioning
#2:(−10.0,100.0) N3222
(50.0,100.0)
C-axis = 135.0
+X
C-axis moves along with
#4:(110.0,100.0)
X-and Y-axes positioning
C-axis = 315.0
#3:(50.0,40.0)
C-axis = 225.0
Fig.20.4 Example of bolt hole circle (G26) and C command
- 386 -
CAUTION
There may be some restrictions of functions depending on the machine tools as
shown in the following. Always refer to the manual issued by machine tool
builder.
- Inhibition of simultaneous control of T and C axes in the manual mode.
- T axis can move only when C axis is at reference point (fixed position on the
machine tool where the C axis can reach by the C axis manual reference
point return.)
20.4.1 Simultaneously Controlled Axes

X, Y and T or X, Y and C when automatic operation.
20.4.2 Increment System

Least input increment IS-A : 0.01 °, IS-B : 0.001 °
Least command increment IS-A : 0.01 °, IS-B : 0.001 °
20.4.3 Maximum Programmable Dimension

IS-A : ± 999999.99 °
IS-B : ± 99999.999 °
20.4.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration

Linear acceleration/deceleration is possible in manual and automatic rapid traverse rate.
20.4.5 Manual Continuous Feed, Incremental Feed, Manual

Reference Point Return
Specifications are the same as X, Y and T axes.
20.4.6 Relationship with Absolute/Incremental Command (G90/G91)

The C-axis command is always regarded as absolute regardless of designation of absolute command
(G90) and incremental command (G91).
20.4.7 Positioning in Smaller Angle Rotating Direction

When the C-axis command is designated, it is possible to automatically position the C axis from the
present position to the commanded position in the smaller angle rotating direction. When the rotation
angle is 180 °, positioning occurs in the forward direction (CW or CCW according to the connections on
the machine side) .
20.4.8 Blocks Where C–axis Command is Possible

C axis command can be specified in the following blocks:
(1) A block where no one shot G code exists.
However, a block with U, V, W or B command is excluded:
(Example)
- 387 -
X_Y_C_;
(2) G70 command

(Example)
G70X _ Y _ C _ ;
(3) Pattern function (Including nibbling function) G26, G45, G46, G47,G68, G69, G76, G77, G78, G79,
G86, G87, G88, G89
(Example)
G26I _ J _ K _ C _ ;
(4) G01, G02 or G03 command in nibbling mode

(Example)
M12 ;
G01X _ Y _ Q _ C _ ;
X_Y_C_;
:
M13;
No C-axis command is allowed in a block other than above.

If C axis command is specified in a block other than above, no alarm will be generated. However, if a
C-axis command (excluding the nibbling mode) is specified during the linear interpolation or the circular
interpolation mode, an alarm (PS4600) in generated.
20.4.9 C–axis Command and its Operation

In 20.4.8, the blocks which C-axis command can be performed were listed. However, unless the die (tool)
which allows C-axis control has been selected, C-axis commands cannot be made. Therefore, if the die
which does not allow C-axis control is selected, it is necessary to select a die which allows C-axis control
before the C-axis command block or to select a die which allows C-axis control to the same block as the
C-axis command with the T-command. In the following description of functions, the die (tool) which
allows C-axis control is assumed to be T15. Namely, it is assumed that the axis transfer of the C-axis is
possible only when die T15 has been selected. In the case of a machine which allows axis transfer of the
T-axis only when the C-axis is located at the reference point (fixed location on the machine which can be
reached by manual reference point return of C-axis).
(a) When there was T command

After the C-axis was positioned to the reference point, execution for the T-command is started.
Namely, after the C CR; (CR: setting value of parameter No. 1250) has been executed, the program
command of the block where there was T-command is executed.
(b) G28 command (automatic reference point return)

After the C-axis has been positioned to the reference point, the X- and Y-axis reference point return
is executed by the G28 command. The following shows the program examples of the C-axis
command and its operation details:
(1) Sample program 1

:
N200 X_ Y_ T21;
N210 X_ Y_ C_ ;
In N210 block, C-axis control cannot be conducted since T15 is not selected.
(2) Sample program 2

:
- 388 -
N200 X_ Y_ T01;
N210 X_ Y_ T15C_ ;
In N210 block, C-axis motion starts when positioning of the X, Y and T axes is over and
T-command completion signal FIN is returned. Press start signal PF is sent out when positioning
of the C axis is over.
When the N210 block is programmed as follows:
N210T15C – 1;
C axis starts to move when T-axis positioning is over and T-command completion signal FIN is
returned. Press start signal PF is not sent out after positioning is finished.
Namely,
(a) Signal PF is sent out when there is the X or Y command, and
(b) Signal PF is not sent out when there are no X and Y commands.
20.4.10 Pattern Function, Nibbling Function and C–axis Command

The C-axis command in blocks of G26 (Bolt Hole Circle), G45 (Linear punch), G46/G47 (Circular
punch), G76 (Line At Angle), G77 (Arc), G78/G79 (Grid), G86 (Shear Proof), G87 (Square), G68
(Nibbling Arc), G69 (Nibbling Lin), G88 (Radius) and G89 (Cut At Angle) are described below. Of these,
the movement specifications by G26, G77, G68 and G88 concerning the circular geometry differ from
those of the other functions.
(1) G45, G76, G78, G79, G86, G87, G69, G89

:
:
N200 G72 X Y ;
N210 G76 I J K T15 C ;
In N210 block, T-axis positioning starts simultaneously when the X and Y axes start to move at the
first positioning point. When the positioning of the X, Y and T axes is finished and T-command
completion signal FIN is returned, positioning of the C axis starts.
After positioning of the C axis is over, press start signal PF is sent out, and punch operation is
performed at the first positioning point. Thereafter, the X and Y axes are sequentially positioned
following the commanded geometry without positioning of the C axis.
(2) G26, G46, G47, G77, G68, G88

:
:
N200 G72 X Y ;
N210 G26 I J K T15C ;
In N210 block, positioning to the first point is conducted in the same way as described in 19.3.10 (1).
Thereafter, X and Y axes are sequentially positioned following the commanded geometry while the
C axis positioning is conducted.
- 389 -
+Y
P1
C1
θn
θ1
+X
Cn
Pn
Pn : n-th positioning point

θn : Angle of n-th positioning point with respects to +X axis
direction
Cn : C-axis position at n-th positioning point
Cn is calculated as follows:
Cn=C1+ (θn–θ1)
In case of G68, and alarm (PS 4522) occurs if the C-axis move value between next positioning points
exceeds the parameter value (No. 16194).
20.4.11 C–axis Command in Nibbling Mode

For the C-axis commands between the M code for nibbling mode and the M code for nibbling mode
cancel, an alarm is indicated if the C-axis movement amount per block exceeds the value set with the
parameter (No. 16194).
20.4.12 T–axis Command Ignore Signal TNG and C–axis Command

The C-axis command is ignored when T command neglect signal TNG <Gn233.5> is on.
20.4.13 Compensating the Position of the C–axis

This function automatically compensates the position of the C-axis to orient each tool in the specified
direction. This simplifies mechanical adjustment such as adjusting the reference position when installing
tools. Up to 20 compensation settings are specified in parameters No. 16430 to No. 16449. Up to 20 tool
numbers are specified in parameters No. 16370 to No. 16389.
The C-axis is compensated when the tool moves around the C-axis after T commands have been
specified.
CAUTION
Tool numbers of tools must be specified with address T followed by up to four digits.
20.4.14 Compensating Backlash Along the C–axis for Each Tool

Group
This function compensates backlash along the C-axis for each tool group. Changing the backlash
compensation for each tool group enables higher-precision machining. Up to 20 compensation settings
- 390 -
are specified in parameters No. 16390 to No. 16409. Up to 20 tool numbers are specified in parameters
No. 16370 to No. 16389.
CAUTION
The tool numbers must be specified with address T followed by up to four digits.
20.5 T–AXIS AND C–AXIS SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL

Normal turret punch press machines cannot perform T–axis movement and C–axis movement at the same
time because of their machine structure limits. Therefore, if the T command and C command are issued at
the same time, a CNC executes these commands in sequence.
This function allows the machines that are free from the structure limits to perform T–axis and C–axis
simultaneous control for the reduction of the cycle time.
(Program example)
X100. Y200. T100 C90.
(Normal operation sequence) (Operation sequence in this specification)
(1) X100. Y200. C(R) X100. Y200. T100 C90.
（(R): Command for the reference point） (Simultaneous movement along all the axes)
(2) T100 (No movement to the C–axis reference point)
FIN signal
(3) C90.
20.6 RAM-AXIS CONTROL

The CNC controls press motion in the block for 1-cycle pressing by using RAM-axis control.
The CNC cannot move RAM-axis by program command. RAM-axis moves automatically at the end of
the block executing 1-cycle press by setting RAM-axis and the RAM-axis motion patterns.
20.6.1 Setting RAM-axis Motion Pattern

RAM-axis motion pattern should be set the PMC expanded non-volatile memory or C language executor
variable area. After Setting the RAM-axis motion patterns, the CNC read specified the RAM-axis motion
patterns when the punching is commanded. Using the FOCAS2 function allows writing the data into the
PMC expanded non-volatile memory. Specifying the address by the application software allows writing
the data into C language executor variable area.
PMC Expanded Nonvolatile Memory
or
C language exec utor variable area
Applic ation CNC
Write
software
（by using
FOCAS2 etc.） Read
Setting of Interpolation of
Ram Axis Ram Axis Motion
Motion Pattern
Ram Axis
Motion Pattern
Fig.20.6.1 Setting RAM-axis Motion Pattern

- 391 -
20.6.2 Press Motion by RAM-axis Control

RAM-axis moves automatically at the end of the block executing 1-cycle press by setting the RAM-axis
motion patterns.
RAM-axis
Position of 1-cycle press process

RAM-axis
The starting position
Press movement
of next block
Workpieces
Axis of X, Y
Next block
positioning
Table axis movement
図20.6.2 Press motion by RAM-axis control
20.6.3 RAM-axis Up Motion

Using the RAM-axis up signal RAMUP allows setting RAM-axis in the RAM up position specified.
After confirmed the RAM-axis up signal RAMUP = “1”, the CNC sets RAM-axis in the RAM up
position specified immediately.
The feedrate used for the RAM-axis up motion is set on the parameter No. 1420.
- 392 -
21.MUITI-PATH CONTROL
B-64504EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
21 MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION

Chapter 21, "MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
21.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................................................393

21.2 WAITING FUNCTION FOR PATHS..............................................................................................394
21.3 COMMON MEMORY BETWEEN EACH PATH ..........................................................................397
21.1 OVERVIEW
The multi-path control function is designed to enable 4 independent simultaneous machining with up to 4
paths (4-path control). This function is applicable to combined machine tools and machines which require
additional control paths such as a loader control path.
For multi-path simultaneous machining, each machining program is stored in a folder in program memory
for each path. When automatic operation is to be performed, each path is activated after selecting a
program for machining with path 1 and programs for machining with paths 2 to 4 from the programs
stored in the respective folders in program memory. Then the programs selected for the tool posts are
executed independently at the same time. When tool post 1 and tool post 2 need to wait for each other
during machining, the waiting function is available.
Other available functions specific to common memory between each path.
Just one LCD/MDI is provided for the all paths. Before operation and display on the LCD/MDI, the path
selection signal is used to switch between the paths.
Example) For a system with four paths

CNC
LCD/MDI
Program memory
Program folder for path Path 1 Path 1 Path 1 axis

1 program position control
analysis control
Programs

analysis control
Programs

analysis control
Programs
Program folder for path

Path 4 Path 4 Path 4 axis
4
program position control
analysis control
Programs
Fig. 21.1
- 393 -
21. MUITI-PATH CONTROL
FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64504EN/02
21.2 WAITING FUNCTION FOR PATHS

Overview
Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the other during machining. When an M
code for waiting is specified in a block for one path during automatic operation, the other path waits for
the same M code to be specified before staring the execution of the next block.
A range of M codes used as M codes for waiting is to be set in the parameters Nos. 8110 and 8111
beforehand. Waiting can be ignored using a signal.
Format
M m (Pp) ;
m: Number of an M code for waiting
p: (1) In the binary value specification mode, specify the sum of the binary values
corresponding to the numbers of paths which are to wait for one another.
(2) In the path number specification mode, specify the numbers of all paths that are to
wait for one another in combination.
Explanation
The following two methods for specifying paths which are to wait for one another at address P in the
same block in which an M code for waiting is specified are available and can be selected using bit 1
(MWP) of parameter No. 8103. One method is to specify the paths with the sum of their corresponding
binary values (waiting set for three or more paths specified with binary values). The other is to specify
them with their path numbers in combination (waiting specified with path numbers).
When address P is not specified, paths 1 and 2 wait for each other (waiting set for two paths). Always
specify address P in a single block.
- Waiting specified with binary values

When bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 0, the value specified at address P is assumed to be
obtained using binary values. The following table lists the path numbers and corresponding binary values.
Table 21.2 (a)

Path number Binary value (decimal number)
1 1
2 2
3 4
4 8
The bit position of each path in binary representation is shown below.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
Path 1 (2 = 1)
1
Path 2 (2 = 2)
2
Path 3 (2 = 4)
3
Path 4 (2 = 8)
Fig. 21.2 (a)
- 394 -
To make all of paths 1, 2, and 3 wait for one another, the P value is obtained as follows:
Binary value of path 1 1 (0000 0000 0000 0001)
Sum 7 (0000 0000 0000 0111)
All of the three paths can be made to wait for one another by specifying P7 together with an M code for
waiting.
To make all of paths 1 and 3 wait for one another, the P value is obtained as follows:
Sum 5 (0000 0000 0000 0101)
All of the two paths can be made to wait for one another by specifying P5 together with an M code for
waiting.
- Waiting specified with a combination of path numbers

When bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 1, the value specified at address P is assumed to be a
combination of path numbers. The following table lists the path numbers and corresponding values.
Table 21.2 (b)

Path number Value (decimal number)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
To make all of paths 1, 2, and 3 wait for one another, the P value is a number consisting of 1, 2, and 3.
Example) 123
There are no restrictions on the order in which the numeric characters are specified, and the following six
possible values can be specified:
P123, P132, P213, P231, P312, P321
Path numbers specified in combination in different orders for different paths are effective as long as the
numbers of the relevant paths are specified.
Example)
The following are treated as the same P value and these paths can be made to wait for one another:
M200P123 for path 1, M200P231 for path 2, and M200P321 for path 3
To make all of paths 1 and 3 wait for one another, the P value is a number consisting of 1 and 3.
Example) P13
Example
- When the value specified at P is obtained using binary values
Assume that the waiting ignore signal for path 2 (G1063.7 for a system with three or more paths) is set to
1 and M101 to M103 (parameter No. 8110 = 101 and parameter No. 8111 = 103) are set as M codes for
waiting. In this case, programs O100, O200, and O300 for individual paths are executed as follows:
- 395 -
Path 1 Path 2 Path 3
O0100; O0200; O0300;

G50 X Y ; G50 X Y ; G50 X Y ;
G00 X Y T0101; G00 X Y T0202; G00 X Y T0303;
M03 S1000; M03 S2000; M102 P7; ................. <2>
. M101 P3; ...................<1>
. G01 X Y F ;
M101 P3;................... <1> .
G01 X Y F ; . <<Waiting (M102)>>
. M102 P7; ...................<2>
. M103 P7; ...................<3>
M102 P7;................... <2> .
.
G00 X Y ;
M103 P7;................... <3> .
.
.
.
<<Waiting (M103)>> .
M103 P7; ...................<3>
.
G01 X Y F ; .
G00 X Y ;
. .
. . .
Fig. 21.2 (b)
<1> M101 P3; (making paths 1 and 2 wait for each other)
When the waiting ignore signal for path 2 is set to 0, paths 1 and 2 wait for each other. Because the
signal is set to 1, however, paths 1 and 2 ignore the M code for waiting and immediately execute the
next block.
<2> M102 P7; (making paths 1, 2, and 3 wait for one another)
In this example, path 3 waits for processing on paths 1 and 2 to terminate. Because the waiting
ignore signal for path 2 is set to 1, however, path 3 assumes that waiting is completed when
processing on path 1 terminates, and executes the next block.
In this example, paths 1 and 2 wait for processing on path 3 to terminate. Because the waiting ignore
signal for path 2 is set to 1, however, path 2 does not wait for processing on path 3 to terminate and
executes the next block, but path 1 waits for path 3.
- When the value specified at P is obtained using path numbers in combination

Assume that the waiting ignore signal for path 2 (G1063.7 for a system with three or more paths) is set to
1 and M101 to M103 (parameter No. 8110 = 101 and parameter No. 8111 = 103) are set as M codes for
waiting. In this case, programs O100, O200, and O300 for individual paths are executed as follows:
- 396 -
Path 1 Path 2 Path 3
O0100; O0200; O0300;

G50 X Y ; G50 X Y ; G50 X Y ;
G00 X Y T0101; G00 X Y T0202; G00 X Y T0303;
M03 S1000; M03 S2000; M102 P123; ............. <2>
. M101 P12; .................<1>
. G01 X Y F ;
M101 P12; ................ <1> .
G01 X Y F ; . <<Waiting (M102)>>
. M102 P123; ...............<2>
. M103 P123; ...............<3>
M102 P123; .............. <2> .
.
G00 X Y ;
M103 P123; .............. <3> .
.
.
.
<<Waiting (M103)>> .
M103 P123; ...............<3>
.
G01 X Y F ; .
G00 X Y ;
. .
. . .
Fig. 21.2 (c)
<1> M101 P12; (making paths 1 and 2 wait for each other)
When the waiting ignore signal for path 2 is set to 0, paths 1 and 2 wait for each other. Because the
signal is set to 1, however, paths 1 and 2 ignore the M code for waiting and immediately execute the
next block.
In this example, path 3 waits for processing on paths 1 and 2 to terminate. Because the waiting
ignore signal for path 2 is set to 1, however, path 3 assumes that waiting is completed when
processing on path 1 terminates, and executes the next block.
In this example, paths 1 and 2 wait for processing on path 3 to terminate. Because the waiting ignore
signal for path 2 is set to 1, however, path 2 does not wait for processing on path 3 to terminate and
executes the next block, but path 1 waits for path 3.
CAUTION
1 An M code for waiting must always be specified in a single block.
2 Unlike other M codes, the M code for waiting is not output to the PMC.
3 If the operation of a single path is required, the M code for waiting need not be
deleted. By using the signal to specify that waiting be ignored (NOWT for the
system with two paths, NMWT for the system with three or more paths), the M
code for waiting in a machining program can be ignored. For details, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
4 If using a waiting M code in block multiple-M code command mode, be sure to
specify it as the first M code.
21.3 COMMON MEMORY BETWEEN EACH PATH

Overview
In a multi-path system, this function enables data within the specified range to be accessed as data
common to all paths. The data includes tool compensation memory and custom macro common variables.
- 397 -
Explanation
The path common memory function enables the following operations.

Part or all of tool compensation memory for individual paths can be used as common data by setting
parameter No. 5029.
Tool offset pairs Tool offset pairs
of path 1 of path 2
Tool
compensation
number 1
No.5029=20 30 tool 50 tool

offset offset
Tool pairs pairs
compensation
number 20
Fig. 21.3 (a)
NOTE
1 The same unit for tool compensation (bits 0 to 3 of parameter No. 5042) must be
set for each of the machining center and lathe systems.
2 Set a value less than the number of tool compensation values for each path for
parameter No. 5029.
3 If the value set for parameter No. 5029 is greater than the number of tool
compensation values for each path, the minimum number of tool compensation
values for individual paths is assumed.
4 For details, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder.
- Custom macro common variables

All or part of custom macro common variables #100 to #149 (, #199, or #499) and #500 to #599 (or
#999) can be used as common data by setting parameters No. 6036 (#100 to #149 (, #199, or #499)) and
6037 (#500 to #599 (or #999)).
Macro variables Macro variables
for path 1 for path 2
Macro variable number 100
No.6036=20 50 macro 50 macro

variables variables
Macro variable number 119
Fig. 21.3 (b)
NOTE
1 If the value of parameter No. 6036 or 6037 exceeds the maximum number of macro
common variables, the maximum number of macro common variables is assumed.
2 Common variables #150 to #199, #150 to #499, and #600 to #999 are optional
functions.
- 398 -
III. OPERATION
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 1.GENERAL
1 GENERAL
Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections:
1.1 MANUAL OPERATION..................................................................................................................401

1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATIC OPERATION ...................................402
1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ...........................................................................................................403
1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM .................................................................................................................404
1.5 EDITING A PROGRAM ..................................................................................................................406
1.6 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA ...........................................................................................406
1.7 DISPLAY..........................................................................................................................................409
1.1 MANUAL OPERATION

Explanation
The CNC machine tool has a position used to determine the machine position.
This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the coordinate are set.
Ordinarily, after the power is turned on, the tool is moved to the reference position.
Manual reference position return is to move the tool to the reference position using switches and
pushbuttons located on the operator's panel. (See Section, “MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION
RETURN”.)
Fig. 1.1 (a) Manual reference position return
The tool can be moved to the reference position also with program commands.
This operation is called automatic reference position return. (See Chapter, “REFERENCE POSITION”.)
- 401 -
1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64504EN/02
- The tool movement by manual operation

Using machine operator's panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be moved along
each axis.
Machine operator's panel
Manual pulse generator
Tool
Workpiece
Fig. 1.1 (b) The tool movement by manual operation
The tool can be moved in the following ways:

(i) Jog feed (See Section, “JOG FEED (JOG)”.)
The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed.
(ii) Incremental feed (See Section, “INCREMENTAL FEED”.)
The tool moves by the predetermined distance each time a button is pressed.
(iii) Manual handle feed (See Section, “MANUAL HANDLE FEED”.)
By rotating the manual handle, the tool moves by the distance corresponding to the degree of handle
rotation.
1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATIC

OPERATION
Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the created program. It includes memory,
MDI and DNC operations. (See Chapter, “AUTOMATIC OPERATION”.)
Program
G00X_Y_T_;
X_;
Tool
Workpiece
Y
X
Fig. 1.2 (a) Tool Movement by programming
- 402 -
Explanation
- Memory operation
After the program is once registered in memory of CNC, the machine can be run according to the
program instructions. This operation is called memory operation.
CNC Machine
Memory
Fig. 1.2 (b) Memory operation
- MDI operation
After the program is entered, as a command group, from the MDI unit, the machine can be run according
to the program. This operation is called MDI operation.
CNC MDI unit Machine
Manual program
input
Fig. 1.2 (c) MDI operation
- DNC operation
In this mode of operation, the program is not registered in the CNC memory. It is read from the external
input/output devices instead. This is called DNC operation.
1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Explanation
- Program selection
Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program is prepared for one workpiece. If two
or more programs are in memory, select the program to be used, by searching the program number. (See
Section, “PROGRAM SEARCH”.)
Programs in memory
O1001
G92 Automatic
operation
Search for desired program by

M30 file name or program number.
Fig. 1.3 (a) Program selection for automatic operation
- 403 -
- Start and stop

Pressing the cycle start pushbutton causes automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed hold or reset
pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination
command in the program, the running will stop during automatic operation. When one process machining
is completed, automatic operation stops. (See Chapter, “AUTOMATIC OPERATION”.)
Cycle start Start
Feed hold Stop Automatic

Reset operation
Stop caused
by program
Program stop
Program end
Fig. 1.3 (b) Start and stop for automatic operation
- Handle interruption
While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotating
the manual handle. (See Section, “MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION”.)
Tool position
during automatic
Z
Tool position after operation
handle interruption
Programmed
amount of
movement
Depth of cut
by handle
interruption
X
Fig. 1.3 (c) Handle interruption for automatic operation
1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM

Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed.
It checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired.
This check can be accomplished by running the machine actually or viewing the position display change
(without running the machine) (See Chapter, “TEST OPERATION”.).
1.4.1 Check by Running the Machine

Explanation
- Dry run
Remove the workpiece, check only movement of the tool. Select the tool movement rate using the dial on
the operator's panel. (See Section , “DRY RUN”.)
- 404 -
Tool
Fig. 1.4.1 (a) Dry run
- Feedrate override
Check the program by changing the feedrate specified in the program. (See Section, “FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE”.)
Feedrate specified by program :

100 mm/min. Tool
Feedrate after feed rate

override (20%) : 20 mm/min.
Workpiece
Fig. 1.4.1 (b) Feedrate override

- Single block
When the cycle start pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes one operation then stops. By pressing the
cycle start again, the tool executes the next operation then stops. The program is checked in this manner.
(See Section, “SINGLE BLOCK”.)
Cycle Cycle
Cycle start start
start
Tool
Stop after Stop after

punching operation punching operation
Workpiece
Y
Fig. 1.4.1 (c) Single Block
- 405 -
1.4.2 How to View the Position Display Change without Running

the Machine
Explanation
- Machine Lock
MDI
X
Y
Tool Z
Workpiece
The tool remains stopped, and only the
positional displays of the axes change.
Fig. 1.4.2 Machine Lock
- Auxiliary function lock

When automatic running is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode during the machine lock mode,
all auxiliary functions are disabled. (See Section, “MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION
LOCK”.)
1.5 EDITING A PROGRAM

After a created program is once registered in memory, it can be corrected or modified from the MDI panel.
(See Chapter, “EDITING PROGRAMS”.)
This operation can be executed using the program edit function.
1.6 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

The operator can display or change a value stored in CNC internal memory by key operation on the MDI
screen. (See Chapter, “SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA”.)
Data setting
Data display
Screen Keys
MDI
CNC memory
Fig. 1.6 (a) Displaying and setting data
- 406 -
Explanation
- Offset value
Compensation
Setting
Tool compensation number 1 12.3
Tool compensation number 2 20.0
Tool compensation number 3 ・・・
・・・・・・・・・・
Screen Keys Display
MDI
CNC memory
Fig. 1.6 (b) Displaying and Setting Offset Values
The tool has the tool dimension (diameter). When a workpiece is machined, the tool movement value
depends on the tool dimensions.
By setting tool dimension data in CNC memory beforehand, CNC automatically generates tool routes that
permit any tool to cut the workpiece specified by the program. Tool dimension data is called the offset
value.
1st tool path

Machined
shape
2nd tool path
Offset value of the 1st tool

Offset value of the 2nd tool
Fig. 1.6 (c) Offset value
- Displaying and setting operator's setting data

Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator in operation. This data causes machine
characteristics to change.
For example, the following data can be set:
• Inch/Metric switching
• Selection of I/O devices
• Mirror image cutting on/off
The above data is called setting data. (See Subsection, “Displaying and Entering Setting Data”.)
- 407 -
Setting data
Setting Inch/Metric switching

Ì Ý
Selection of I/O device
Mirror image ON/OFF setting
:
:
Screen Keys Displaying :
MDI
CNC Memory
Operational
characteristics
Automatic Movement of
Program operation the machine
Fig. 1.6 (d) Displaying and setting operator's setting data
- Displaying and setting parameters

The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action in characteristics of various machines.
For example, CNC can specify the following:
- Rapid traverse rate of each axis
- Whether increment system is based on metric system or inch system.
- How to set command multiply/detect multiply (CMR/DMR)
Data to make the above specification is called parameters. (See Subsection, “Displaying and Setting
Parameters”.)
Parameters differ depending on machine tool.
Parameter
Setting Rapid traverse rate
Position control
Reference position return
Backlash compensation data
Pitch error compensation data
Screen Keys Display
:
:
MDI :
CNC memory
Operational
characteristics
Automatic
Program operation Movement of
the machine
Fig. 1.6 (e) Displaying and setting parameters
- 408 -
- Data protection key

A key called the data protection key can be defined. It is used to prevent part programs, offset values,
parameters, and setting data from being registered, modified, or deleted erroneously. (See Chapter,
“SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA”.)
Data Setting
Screen Keys
Data protection key
MDI
Registration / modification inhibition
Machine
operator's panel
Program
Offset value Data protection key
Parameters Signal
Setting data
CNC memory
Fig. 1.6 (f) Data protection key
1.7 DISPLAY
1.7.1 Program Display

The contents of the currently active program are displayed.
(See Subsection, “Program Contents Display”.)
Running program number

Running sequence number
Contents of program
The line currently being executed

is indicated by the cursor.
Fig. 1.7.1 (a)
A list of the programs held in the currently selected folder is displayed.
- 409 -
Fig. 1.7.1 (b)
1.7.2 Current Position Display

The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values.
Moreover, the distance from the current position to a target point can be displayed as a remaining travel
distance.
(See Subsections, “Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System”, “Position Display in the
Relative Coordinate System”, and “Overall Position Display”.)
Y
X
Workpiece X
coordinate system
Fig. 1.7.2 (a)
- 410 -
Fig. 1.7.2 (b)
1.7.3 Alarm Display

When a trouble occurs during operation, error code and alarm message are displayed on the screen. (See
Section, “ALARM DISPLA”.)
See APPENDIX G for the list of error codes and their meanings.
Fig. 1.7.3
- 411 -
1.7.4 Parts Count Display, Run Time Display

The position display screen displays a run time, cycle time, and parts count. (See Subsection, “Displaying
and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time”.)
Fig. 1.7.4
- 412 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES
As operational devices, setting and display devices attached to the CNC, and machine operator's panels
are available.
For machine operator's panels, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder.
Chapter 2, "OPERATIONAL DEVICES", consists of the following sections:
2.1 POWER ON/OFF..............................................................................................................................413

2.1 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS..................................................................................................413
2.3 EXPLANATION OF THE MDI UNIT ............................................................................................417
2.4 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ...........................................................................................419
2.5 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES..............................................................................................................428
2.1 POWER ON/OFF
2.1.1 Turning on the Power

Procedure of turning on the power
Procedure
1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal.
(For example, check that front door and rear door are closed.)
2 Turn on the power according to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
3 After the power is turned on, check that the position screen is displayed. An alarm screen is
displayed if an alarm occurs upon power-on.
Fig. 2.1.1 Position screen (for machining center system)
4 Check that the fan motor is rotating.
- 413 -
2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64504EN/02
WARNING
Until the positional or alarm screen is displayed at the power on, do not touch a
key on the MDI unit. Some keys are used for the maintenance or special
operation purpose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation may be
caused.
2.1.2 Power Disconnection

Procedure of power disconnection
Procedure
1 Check that the LED indicating the cycle start is off on the operator's panel.
2 Check that all movable parts of the CNC machine tool is stopping.
3 If an external input/output device such as the Handy File is connected to the CNC, turn off the
4 Continue to press the <POWER OFF> button for about 5 seconds.
5 Refer to the machine tool builder's manual for turning off the power to the machine.
2.2 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS

The setting and display units are shown in Subsections 2.1.1 to 2.1.8 of Part III.
8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel........................................................................................................... III-2.2.1

10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel (12.1"/15"/19" LCD CNC Display Panel)...................................... III-2.2.2
Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key)........................................................................................................ III-2.2.3
Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key) ............................................................................................... III-2.2.4
Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)............................................................................................................. III-2.2.5
2.2.1 8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel
- 414 -
2.2.2 10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel (12.1"/15"/19" LCD CNC Display
Panel)
2.2.3 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key)

Help key Reset key Address/numeric keys
Edit keys
Cancel (CAN) key
Uppercase/lowercase
switch key
Shift key Input key
AUX key
CTRL key
ALT key
TAB key
Page change keys Cursor keys Function keys

(Page key)
- 415 -
2.2.4 Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key)
Help key Function keys
Reset key
Address keys
Numeric keys
Uppercase/lowercase
switch key
AUX key
CTRL key
Shift key
ALT key Input key
TAB key
Page change keys Cursor keys Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key
(Page key)
2.2.5 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)
Address/numeric keys
Cancel (CAN) key
Input key
Function keys Shift key
Help key
Page change keys

(Page key)
Reset key
Edit keys
Cursor keys
- 416 -
2.3 EXPLANATION OF THE MDI UNIT

Table 2.3 Explanation of the MDI unit
No. Name Explanation
RESET key
1 Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc.
HELP key
Press this key to use the help function when uncertain about the operation
2
of an MDI key (help function).
The soft keys have various functions, according to the Applications. The soft key
3 Soft keys
functions are displayed on the display unit.
Address and numeric
keys
4 Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters.
...
SHIFT key Some keys have two characters on their key top. Pressing the <SHIFT> key
5 switches the characters. Special character ^ is displayed on the screen when a
character indicated at the bottom right corner on the key top can be entered.
When an address or a numerical key is pressed, the data is input to the buffer,
and it is displayed on the screen. To copy the data in the key input buffer to the
INPUT key
6 offset register, etc., press the key. This key is equivalent to the [INPUT]
key of the soft keys, and either can be pressed to produce the same result. This
key is also used to move to a folder on the program folder screen.
Press this key to delete the last character or symbol input to the key input buffer.
Example) When the key input buffer displays
CANCEL (CAN) key >N001X100Z_
7
and the cancel key is pressed, Z is canceled and
>N001X100_
is displayed.
Press these keys when editing the program.
: ALTER
Edit keys
8 : INSERT
: IDELETE
Function keys
Press theses keys to switch display screens for each function.
9
... See Section, “Function Keys” for details of the function keys.
There are four different cursor move keys.

: This key is used to move the cursor to the right or in the forward
direction. The cursor is moved in short units in the forward direction.
Cursor keys
: This key is used to move the cursor to the left or in the reverse direction.
10 The cursor is moved in short units in the reverse direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in a downward or forward direction.
The cursor is moved in large units in the forward direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in an upward or reverse direction.
The cursor is moved in large units in the reverse direction.
- 417 -
No. Name Explanation

Page change keys Two kinds of page change keys are described below.
(Page keys)
: This key is used to changeover the page on the screen in the forward
11 direction.
: This key is used to changeover the page on the screen in the reverse
direction.
Uppercase/lowercase
switch key Press this key to switch between uppercase and lowercase when entering
12
alphabetic characters.
PC function key
13 These keys are used with the personal computer functions.
Explanation
- 15” LCD/MDI soft key configuration
The 15” LCD panel has 12 soft keys horizontally and 9 soft keys vertically.
As shown below, the 8 vertical soft keys and the lowermost key are used as chapter selection soft keys.
By pressing each of these keys, the screen (chapter) belonging to each function can be selected. The
horizontal 12 soft keys are used to perform operations on the screen selected with a vertical soft key.
For an LCD display with a touch panel, touch a soft key on the screen to select it.
Vertical soft keys
Displays operations on selected chapter.
Horizontal soft keys
- 19” LCD/MDI soft key configuration

The 19” LCD panel has 12 soft keys horizontally and 12 soft keys vertically.
As shown below, the 9 lower vertical soft keys on the right side and the 12 horizontal soft keys are used
for CNC screen operations and the other soft keys are available for personal computer functions.
Use the 9 lower vertical soft keys on the right side and 12 horizontal soft keys for CNC screen operations
in the same way as for the 15” LCD panel.
- 418 -
Soft keys for personal computer functions
Vertical soft keys
Soft keys for personal computer functions
Displays operations on selected chapter.
Horizontal soft keys
In this manual, the descriptions below assume a 10.4" LCD display panel with 12 soft keys.
- MDI unit operation with multi-path control

In the multi-path control, be sure to select the tool post for which data is specified, using the path
selection switch on the machine operator's panel. Then, perform MDI unit operation, such as displaying
or specifying various data items, and editing a program.
2.4 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS

The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to be displayed. When a soft key
(section select soft key) is pressed immediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to
the selected function can be selected.
2.4.1 General Screen Operations

- Procedure
1 By pressing a function key on the MDI unit, the chapter selection soft keys that belong to the
function are displayed.
Example 1)
Operation selection key
Chapter selection soft keys Continuous menu key
2 When one of the chapter selection soft keys is pressed, the screen of the chapter is displayed. If the
soft key of a desired chapter is not displayed, press the continuous menu key.
In a chapter, a further choice may be made from multiple chapters.
- 419 -
3 When the screen of a desired chapter is displayed, press the operation selection key to display
operations to be performed.
4 Select a desired operation with the operation selection soft key.

Depending on the operation to be executed, an auxiliary menu of soft keys is displayed. Perform an
operation according to the indications on the auxiliary menu.
Example 2)
Return menu key Operation selection soft keys
Example 3)
Auxiliary menu
5 To return to the display of chapter selection soft keys, press the return menu key.
A general screen display procedure is provided above.

The actual display procedure varies from one screen to another.
For details, see each description of operation.
- Button design change depending on soft key state

The soft keys assume one of the following states, depending on the selection target:
• Chapter selection soft keys
• Operation selection soft keys
• Auxiliary menu of operation selection soft keys
Depending on the state, the button images of the soft keys change.
From the button images, which state the soft keys are assuming can be known.
Example)
• Chapter selection soft keys
• Operation selection soft keys
• Auxiliary menu of operation selection soft keys
2.4.2 Function Keys

Function keys are provided to select the type of screen to be displayed. The following function keys are
provided on the MDI unit:
- 420 -
Press this key to display the position screen.
Press this key to display the program screen.
Press this key to display the offset/setting screen.
Press this key to display the system screen.
Press this key to display the message screen.
Press this key to display the graphics screen.
Press this key to display the custom screen 1 (conversational macro screen or C Language Executor
screen).
Press this key to display the custom screen 2 (C Language Executor screen).
2.4.3 Soft Keys

By pressing a soft key after a function key, the corresponding screen of the function can be displayed.
The chapter selection soft keys of each function are described below.
The horizontal four keys on the right-hand side are assigned to chapter selection soft keys. When multiple
pages are used for chapter selection soft keys, [+] is displayed on the continuous menu key (rightmost soft
key). Press the continuous menu key to switch between chapter selection soft keys.
NOTE
1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently.
2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the option configuration.
If position indications are provided on the left half of the screen when a key other than the function key
is pressed, the left half of the soft keys is displayed as follows at all times:
- 421 -
Position display screen

The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are
described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT) +

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MONI (OPRT) +
Page 2
Table 2.4.3 (a) Position display screen

No. Chapter menu Description
(1) ABS Selects the absolute coordinate display screen.
(2) REL Selects the relative coordinate display screen.
(3) ALL Selects the overall coordinate display screen.
(4) HNDL Selects the operation screen for manual handle operation.
(6) MONI Selects the screen for displaying the servo axis load meter, serial spindle load
meter, and speedometer.
Program screen
described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PROGRA FOLDER NEXT CHECK (OPRT) +

Page 1
M
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
TIME JOG (OPRT) +

Page 2
Table 2.4.3 (b) Program

(1) PROGRAM Selects the screen for displaying a list of part programs currently registered.
(2) FOLDER Selects the screen for displaying a list of part programs currently registered.
(3) NEXT Selects the screen for displaying the command values of the block currently
executed and the next block to be executed among the command values.
(4) CHECK Selects the screen for displaying programs, position data, modal information,
and so forth simultaneously.
(6) TIME Selects the screen for displaying executed program operation time.
(7) JOG Selects the screen for executing, in the JOG mode, data specified in the
program format from the MDI.
- 422 -
Offset/setting screen
described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
OFFSET SETTING WORK (OPRT) +

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MACRO OPR (OPRT) +

Page 2
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
TOOL MULTI SAFETY (OPRT) +

Page 3
REGIST TOOL ZONE
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
LANG. PROTECT GUARD (OPRT) +

Page 4
Table 2.4.3 (c) Offset

(1) OFFSET Selects the screen for setting tool offset values.
(2) SETTING Selects the screen for setting the setting parameters.
(3) WORK Selects the screen for setting a workpiece coordinate system offset.
(6) MACRO Selects the screen for setting macro variables.
(8) OPR Selects the screen for operating some operation switches on the machine
operator's panel as soft switches.
(11) TOOL REGIST Selects the screen for setting tool data
(12) MULTI TOOL Selects the screen for setting multiple tool data
(13) SAFETY ZONE Selects the screen for setting safety zones
(17) LANG. Selects the screen for setting a display language.
(18) PROTECT Selects the screen for setting data protection.
(19) GUARD Selects the screen for setting wrong operation prevention.
- 423 -
System screen
described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PARAM DGNOS SERVO SYSTEM (OPRT) +

Page 1 GUIDEM
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MEMORY PITCH SERVO (OPRT) +

Page 2 PARAM
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)

PMC PMC PMC +
Page 3 MAINTE LADDER CONFIG
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
ALL IO ALL IO OPEHIS (OPRT) +

Page 4
(21) (22) (23) (24) (25)
COLOR MAINTE M-INFO W. DGNS (OPRT) +

Page 5
- 424 -
(26) (27) (28) (29) (30)
FSSB PRMTUN P.MATE (OPRT) +

Page 6 MGR.
(31) (32) (33) (34) (35)
EMBED PCMCIA ETHER PROFI (OPRT) +

Page 7 PORT LAN NE T MASTE R
(36) (37) (38) (39) (40)
REMOTE M CODE (OPRT) ＋

Page 8 DIA G
(41) (42) (43) (44) (45)
PROFI DEVNE T FL-net DEVNE T (OPRT) ＋

Page 9 SLAVE MASTE R SLAVE
1CH
(46) (47) (48) (49) (50)
DUAL R.TIME (OPRT) ＋

Page 10 CHE CK MACRO
(51) (52) (53) (54) (55)
ID-INF (OPRT) ＋
Page 11
(56) (57) (58) (59) (60)
CCLink ROBOT ROBOT (OPRT) ＋

Page 12 REMOTE STATUS CON.
(61) (62) (63) (64) (65)
USB FL-net (OPRT) ＋

Page 13 2CH
Table 2.4.3 (d) System

(1) PARAM Selects the screen for setting parameters.
(2) DGNOS Selects the screen for displaying CNC state.
(3) SERVO GUIDEM Selects the screen for displaying the servo guide mate.
(4) SYSTEM Selects the screen for displaying the current system status.
(6) MEMORY Selects the screen for displaying the contents of memory.
(7) PITCH Selects the screen for setting pith error compensation.
(8) SERVO PARAM Selects the screen for setting the servo-related parameters.
(11) PMC MAINTE Selects the screen related to PMC maintenance such as PMC signal state
monitoring and tracing, and PMC parameter display/editing.
(12) PMC LADDER Selects the screen related to ladder display/editing.
(13) PMC CONFIG Displays the screen for displaying/editing data other than ladders that makes
up a sequence program and for setting the PMC function.
(17) ALL IO Selects the screen for data input and output.
(RS232C interface)
- 425 -

(18) ALL IO Selects the screen for data input to and output from the memory card.
(Memory card)
(19) OPEHIS Selects the screen for displaying the history of operations performed by the
operator and issued alarms.
(21) COLOR Selects the screen for setting colors to be used on the screen.
(22) MAINTE Selects the screen for setting maintenance items to be managed periodically.
(23) M-INFO Selects the screen for displaying information about maintenance performed.
(24) W.DGNS Selects the screen for displaying data such as servo positional deviation
values, torque values, machine signals, and so forth as graphs.
(27) FSSB Selects the screen for making settings related to the high-speed serial servo
bus (FSSB: Fanuc Serial Servo Bus).
(28) PRMTUN Selects the screen for setting parameters necessary for start-up and tuning.
(31) EMBED PORT Selects the screen for making settings related to the embedded Ethernet
(embedded port).
(32) PCMCIA LAN Selects the screen for making settings related to the embedded Ethernet
(PCMCIA Ethernet card).
(33) ETHNET Selects the screen for making settings related to the fast Ethernet/fast data
server.
(34) PROFI MASTER Selects the screen for making settings related to the profibus master function.
(36) REMOTE DIAG Selects the screen for making settings related to the Machine Remote
Diagnosis.
(37) M CODE Selects the screen for setting an M code group.
(41) PROFI SLAVE Selects the screen for making settings related to the PROFIBUS slave
function.
(42) DEVNET MASTER Selects the screen for making settings related to the DeviceNet master
function.
(43) FL-net 1CH Selects the screen for making settings related to the FL-net (port 1) function.
(44) DEVNET SLAVE Selects the screen for making settings related to the DeviceNet slave function.
(51) ID-INF Selects the screen for displaying CNC ID information.
(56) CCLink REMOTE Selects the screen for making settings related to the CC-Link remote device
function.
(57) ROBOT STATUS Selects the robot status screen for the Robot connection function.
(58) ROBOT CON. Selects the screen for making settings related to the Robot connection
function.
(61) USB Selects the USB maintenance screen.
(62) FL-net 2CH Selects the screen for making settings related to the FL-net (port 2) function.
- 426 -
Message screen
described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ALARM MSG HISTRY MSGHIS +

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

EMBED PCMCIA ETHER FL-net +
Page 2 LOG LOG LOG 1CH
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)

USB FL-net +
Page 3 LOG 2CH
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)

DNET M DNET S +
Page 4 HISTRY HISTRY
Table 2.4.3 (e) Message

(1) ALARM Selects the alarm message screen.
(2) MSG Selects the operator message screen.
(3) HISTRY Selects the screen for displaying the details of alarms issued so far.
(4) MSGHIS Selects the external operator message screen.
(6) EMBED LOG Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to the embedded
Ethernet (embedded port).
(7) PCMCIA LOG Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to the embedded
Ethernet (PCMCIA Ethernet card).
(8) ETHER LOG Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to the fast
Ethernet/fast data server.
(9) FL-net 1CH Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to the FL-net (port 1)
function.
(12) USB LOG Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to the USB function.
(13) FL-net 2CH Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to the FL-net (port 2)
function.
(16) DNET M HISTRY Selects the screen for displaying communication histories related to the
DeviceNet master function.
(17) DNET S HISTRY Selects the screen for displaying communication histories related to the
DeviceNet slave function.
Graphic screen
described below.
When the graphic display function is enabled:
- 427 -
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PARAM GRAPH (OPRT) +

Page 1
Table 2.4.3 (f) Graphic

(1) PARAM Selects the screen for setting graphic parameters.
(2) GRAPH Selects the screen for graphically displaying the tool path.
2.5 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES

External I/O devices such as a memory card are available.
By using an external I/O device such as a memory card, the following data can be input or output:
1. Programs
2. Offset data
3. Parameters
4. Custom macro common variables
For how to input or output data and input data from or output it to a memory card, see Chapter, “DATA
INPUT/OUTPUT”.
- Parameter setting
Before an external input/output device can be used, parameters must be set as follows.
CNC
Main board
Channel 1 Channel 2
JA56A JA36A
RS-232-C RS-232-C
RS232C RS232C
interface interface
I/O CHANNEL=0 I/O CHANNEL=2
or
I/O CHANNEL=1
This CNC has a total of two channels of RS232C interfaces. It also has memory card interface and USB
interface. The input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel (interface) connected to
that device in setting parameter I/O CHANNEL.
The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an input/output device connected to
a specific channel must be set in parameters for that channel in advance. (These settings are not required
for the memory card interface and USB interface.)
For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output device data are provided.
The following shows the interrelation between the RS232C interface parameters for the channels.
- 428 -
0020 I/O CHANNEL Input/output channel number (parameter No.0020)

or foreground input
↓
Set channels to be used 0101 Stop bit and other data
for data input/output.
I/O CHANNEL=0 0102 Number specified for the input/output device
I/O CHANNEL (0 to 5) (Channel 1)
0103 Baud rate
=0 : Channel 1
=1 : Channel 1
=2 : Channel 2 0111 Stop bit and other data
=3 : Channel 3
:
(Channel 1)
: 0113 Baud rate
:
Input/output to and from the memory
card interface, etc. is also possible. 0121 Stop bit and other data

When IO4 is set
(Channel 2)
0123 Baud rate
0021 Foreground output
:
0022 Background input :
0023 :
Background input
I/O CHANNEL=5
The channel setting is the same as
No.0020.
- 429 -
3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64504EN/02
3 MANUAL OPERATION
MANUAL OPERATION consists of the following operations:
3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN .............................................................................430

3.2 JOG FEED (JOG) .............................................................................................................................431
3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED ...................................................................................................................432
3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.............................................................................................................433
3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON.............................................................................................................436
3.6 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ....................................................................440
3.7 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL).......................445
3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

The tool is returned to the reference position as follows :
The tool is moved in the direction specified in bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter No.1006 for each axis with the
reference position return switch on the machine operator's panel. The tool moves to the deceleration point
at the rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference position at the FL speed. The rapid traverse rate and
FL speed are specified in parameters Nos. 1424,1421, and 1425.
Four step rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse.
When the tool has returned to the reference position, the reference position return completion LED goes
on. The tool generally moves along only a single axis, but can move along three axes simultaneously
when specified so in bit 0 (JAX) of parameter No.1002.
Tool
Reference position
Deceleration point
Rapid traverse motion Decelerated motion

Rapid traverse rate FL speed
(rapid traverse
override is effective)
Fig. 3.1 (a) Manual reference position return
Procedure for manual reference position return

Procedure
1 Press the reference position return switch, one of the mode selection switches.
2 To decrease the feedrate, press a rapid traverse override switch.
3 Press the feed axis and direction selection switch corresponding to the axis and direction for
reference position return. Continue pressing the switch until the tool returns to the reference position.
The tool can be moved along three axes simultaneously when specified so in an appropriate
parameter setting. The tool moves to the deceleration point at the rapid traverse rate, then moves to
the reference position at the FL speed set in a parameter. When the tool has returned to the reference
position, the reference position return completion LED goes on.
4 Perform the same operations for other axes, if necessary.
The above is an example. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for the
actual operations.
- 430 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION
ZERO POSITION MIRRROR IMAGE

X Y Z C X2 Y2 Z2 X Y Z
PROGRAM M02/ MANU SPINDLE ATC

STOP M30 ABS ORI TAP READY NC? MC?
Fig. 3.1 (b)
Explanation
- Automatically setting the coordinate system
Bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No.1201 is used for automatically setting the coordinate system. When ZPR is
set, the coordinate system is automatically determined when manual reference position return is
performed.
When α, β and γ are set in parameter 1250, the workpiece coordinate system is determined so that
reference point on the tool holder or the position of the tip of the reference tool is X= α, Y = β, Z = γ
when reference position return is performed. This has the same effect as specifying the following
command for reference position return:
G92XαYβZγ;
However, when options of the workpiece coordinate system is selected, it is not able to use.
Limitation
- Moving the tool again
Once the reference position return completion LED lights at the completion of reference position return,
the tool does not move unless the reference position return switch is turned off.
- Reference position return completion LED

The reference position return completion LED is extinguished by either of the following operations:
• Moving from the reference position.
• Entering an emergency stop state.
- The distance to return to reference position

For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) to return the tool to the reference position, refer to the
manual issued by the machine tool builder.
3.2 JOG FEED (JOG)

In the jog mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the machine operator's panel
continuously moves the tool along the selected axis in the selected direction.
The jog feedrate is specified in a parameter No.1423.
The jog feedrate can be adjusted with the jog feedrate override dial.
Pressing the rapid traverse switch moves the tool at the rapid traverse feedrate No. 1424 regardless of the
position of the jog feedrate override dial. This function is called the manual rapid traverse.
Manual operation is allowed for one axis at a time. 3 axes can be selected at a time by bit 0 (JAX) of
parameter No.1002.
- 431 -
While a switch is pressed, the tool

moves in the direction specified by
the switch.
Tool
X Workpiece
Fig. 3.2 Jog Feed (JOG)
Procedure for JOG feed

Procedure
1 Press the jog switch, one of the mode selection switches.
2 Press the feed axis and direction selection switch corresponding to the axis and the direction where
the tool is to be moved. While the switch is pressed, the tool moves at the feedrate specified in the
parameter No. 1423. The tool stops when the switch is released.
3 The jog feedrate can be adjusted with the jog feedrate override dial.
4 Pressing the rapid traverse switch while pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch moves
the tool at the rapid traverse rate while the rapid traverse switch is pressed. Rapid traverse override
by the rapid traverse override switches is effective during rapid traverse.
actual operations.
Limitation
- Acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse
Feedrate, time constant and method of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid traverse are
the same as G00 in programmed command.
- Change of modes
Changing the mode to the jog mode while pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch does not
enable jog feed. To enable jog feed, enter the jog mode at first, then press a feed axis and direction
selection switch.
- Rapid traverse prior to reference position return

If reference position return is not performed after power-on, pushing rapid traverse button does not
actuate the rapid traverse but the remains at the JOG feedrate. This function can be disabled by setting bit
0 (RPD) of parameter No.1401.
3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED

In the incremental (INC) mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the machine
operator's panel moves the tool one step along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum
distance the tool is moved is the least input increment. Each step can be 10, 100, or 1000 times the least
input increment.
With using bit 2 (HNT) of parameter No. 7103, each step can be additionally 10 times the lest input
increment.
- 432 -
The feedrate set in parameter No. 1423 is applied.
By using the manual feedrate override signal, the feedrate can be increased or decreased.
The tool can also be moved at the rapid traverse rate by using the manual rapid traverse selection signal,
independent of the manual feedrate override signal.
Each time a switch is

pressed, the tool moves
one step in the direction
specified by the switch.
Tool
X Workpiece
Fig. 3.3 Incremental feed
Procedure for incremental feed

Procedure
1 Press the INC switch, one of the mode selection switches.
2 Select the distance to be moved for each step with the magnification dial.
3 Press the feed axis and direction selection switch corresponding to the axis and direction the tool is
to be moved. Each time a switch is pressed, the tool moves one step. The feedrate is the same as the
jog feedrate.
4 Pressing the rapid traverse switch while pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch moves
the tool at the rapid traverse rate.
Rapid traverse override by the rapid traverse override switch is effective during rapid traverse.
actual operations.
3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED

In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse generator on the
machine operator's panel. Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis
selection switches.
The minimum distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator is rotated by one graduation is
equal to the least input increment. One of four types of magnifiers selected with the manual handle feed
move distance select signal can be applied. With bit 2 (HNT) of parameter No. 7103, the minimum
distance can be further 10 times greater.
The number of manual pulse generators depends on the option as follows:
• Control on 1 manual handle: Up to 1
• Control on 2 or 3 manual handles:
Up to 3 (Up to three manual pulse generators can be moved at a time.)
• Control on 2 to 5 manual handles:
Up to 5 (Up to five manual pulse generators can be moved at a time.)
- 433 -
Tool
X Workpiece
Manual pulse generator
Fig. 3.4 (a) Manual handle feed
Procedure for manual handle feed

Procedure
1 Press the handle switch, one of the mode selection switches.
2 Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved by pressing a handle feed axis selection switch.
3 Select the magnification for the distance the tool is to be moved by pressing a handle feed
magnification switch. The minimum distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator is
rotated by one graduation is equal to the least input increment.
4 Move the tool along the selected axis by rotating the handle. Rotating the handle 360 degrees moves
the tool the distance equivalent to 100 graduations.
actual operations.
Explanation
- Availability of manual pulse generator in Jog mode (JHD)
Bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No.7100 enables or disables the manual handle feed in the JOG mode.
When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No.7100 is set 1,both manual handle feed and incremental feed are
enabled.
- When manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is specified
The amount of pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate can be saved by CNC as B. And amount of
pulses B will be output as pulses C.
A: Amount of pulses corresponds to value of

Rapid Traverse Rate.
B: Amount of pulses accumulated in CNC.
C: Amount of pulses the same as B.
B
Rapid
traverse
rate
A C
ｔ
Fig. 3.4 (b) Amount of pulses output by CNC in Manual Handle Feed
Amount of pulses B is calculated in 2 cases as following:
- 434 -
1) In case of parameter No.7117 = 0
The feedrate is clamped at the Rapid Traverse Rate and generated pulses exceeding the Rapid
Traverse Rate are ignored (B=0).
2) In case of parameter No.7117 > 0

The feedrate is clamped as the Rapid Traverse Rate, but the pulses exceeding the Rapid Traverse
Rate is not ignored. Amount of pulses accumulated in CNC is calculated as following. (Although the
rotation of manual pulse generator is stopped, if there is pulses accumulated in CNC, it will be
output and the tool will move as long as amount of it.)
Magnification set by manual handle feed selection signals MP1 and MP2 is m, value of parameter
No.7117 is n.
n < m: Clamping is set performed at value of parameter No.7117.

n ≥ m: Amount A+B, shown in Fig. 3.4 (c), which’s value is multiple of m and small than n. As a
result, clamping is performed as an integral multiple of the selected magnification.
A: Amount of pulses the same
as Rapid Traverse Rate.
A n B: Amount of pulses saved in
CNC.
B k : Integer number
ｍ
A＋B=k⋅m
Pulses over (k⋅m) will be ignored
Fig. 3.4 (c) Amount of pulses exceeding the Rapid Traverse Rate (n ≥ m)
NOTE
Due to change of mode, clamping can be performed not as an integral multiple
of the selected magnification.
The distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on the manual
pulse generator.
- Upper feedrate limit in manual handle feed

The upper feedrate limit depends on the input signal (maximum manual handle feedrate switch signal
HNDLF) from the PMC as follows:
• When HNDLF is set to 0, the feedrate is clamped to the manual rapid traverse rate (parameter No.
1424).
• When HNDLF is set to 1, the feedrate is clamped to the feedrate set in parameter No. 1434.
- Movement direction of an axis to the rotation of MPG (HNGx)

Bit 0 (HNGx) of parameter No 7102 switches the direction of MPG in which the tool moves along an axis,
corresponding to the direction in which the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated.
This parameter is valid only for the following functions:

• Manual handle feed
• Manual handle interruption
Limitation
WARNING
Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such as ×100 moves the
tool too fast. The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse feedrate.
- 435 -
NOTE
Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations per second or lower.
If the manual pulse generator is rotated at a rate higher than five rotations per
second, the tool may not stop immediately after the handle is no longer rotated
or the distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on the manual
pulse generator.
3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON

Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the coordinates can be selected
by turning the manual absolute switch on or off on the machine operator's panel. When the switch is
turned on, the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the coordinates.
Yaxis
Tool
P2 Manual operation
P1
O X axis
The coordinates values change by the
amount of manual operation.
Fig. 3.5 (a) Coordinates with the switch ON
Explanation
The following describes the relation between manual operation and coordinates when the manual absolute
switch is turned on or off, using a program example.
G01G90 X100.0Y100.0F010 ; <1>

X200.0Y150.0 ; <2>
X300.0Y200.0 ; <3>
Fig. 3.5 (b) Program example
The subsequent figures use the following notation:

Movement of the tool when the switch is on
The coordinates after manual operation include the distance the tool is moved by the manual operation.
When the switch is off, therefore, subtract the distance the tool is moved by the manual operation.
- Manual operation after the end of block

Coordinates when block <1> has been executed after manual operation (X-axis +20.0, Y-axis +100.0) at
the end of movement of block <2>.
- 436 -
(120.0 , 200.0)
Switch ON
(200.0 , 150.0)
Manual
operation
(100.0 , 100.0)
X
Fig. 3.5 (c) Manual operation after the end of block
- Manual operation after a feed hold

Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block <2> is being executed, manual operation
(Y-axis + 75.0) is performed, and the cycle start button is pressed and released.
(200.0 , 225.0)
(150.0 , 200.0) (300.0 , 200.0)

Switch ON
(200.0 , 150.0) Manual
(150.0 , 125.0) operation
Feed hold stop point
Fig. 3.5 (d) Manual operation after a feed hold
- When reset after a manual operation following a feed hold

Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block <2> is being executed, manual operation
(Y-axis +75.0) is performed, the control unit is reset with the RESET button, and block <2> is read again.
(150.0 , 200.0) (300.0 , 200.0)

Switch ON
(200.0 , 150.0) Manual
(150.0 , 125.0)
operation
Feed hold stop point
Fig. 3.5 (e) When reset after a manual operation following a feed hold
- 437 -
- When a movement command in the next block is only one axis

When there is only one axis in the following command, only the commanded axis returns.
Program
N1 G90 G01 X100. Y100. F500 ;
N2 X200.0 ;
Y
N3 Y150.0 ;
(200.0 , 150.0)
N2
(200.0 , 100.0)
Switch ON (100.0 , 100.0)
Manual N1
operation
Fig. 3.5 (f) When a movement command in the next block is only one axis
- When the next move block is an incremental

When the following commands are incremental commands, operation is the same as when the switch is
OFF.
- Manual operation during cutter radius compensation

• When the switch is ON during cutter radius compensation
Operation of the machine upon return to automatic operation after manual intervention with the
switch is ON during execution with an absolute command program in the cutter radius compensation
mode will be described. The vector created from the remaining part of the current block and the
beginning of the next block is shifted in parallel. A new vector is created based on the next block,
the block following the next block and the amount of manual movement. This also applies when
manual operation is performed during cornering.
• Manual operation performed in other than cornering

Assume that the feed hold was applied at point PH while moving from PA to PB of programmed path
PA, PB, and PC and that the tool was manually moved to PH'. The block end point PB moves to the
point PB' by the amount of manual movement, and vectors VB1 and VB2 at PB also move to VB1' and
VB2'. Vectors VC1 and VC2 between the next two blocks PB - PC and PC - PD are discarded and new
vectors VC1' and VC2' (VC2' = VC2 in this example) are produced from the relation between PB' - PC
and PC - PD. However, since VB2' is not a newly calculated vector, correct offset is not performed at
block PB' - PC. Offset is correctly performed after PC.
- 438 -
• Manual operation during cornering

This is an example when manual operation is performed during cornering. VA2', VB1', and VB2' are
vectors moved in parallel with VA2, VB1 and VB2 by the amount of manual movement. The new
vectors are calculated from VC1 and VC2. Then correct cutter radius compensation is performed for
the blocks following PC.
• Manual operation after single block stop

Manual operation was performed when execution of a block was terminated by single block stop.
Vectors VB1 and VB2 are shifted by the amount of manual operation. Sub-sequent processing is the
same as case a described above. An MDI operation can also be intervened as well as manual
operation. The movement is the same as that by manual operation.
NOTE
Only manual absolute on can be used by Series 30i/31i-PB. Manual absolute
on/off operation cannot be switched.
- 439 -
3.6 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE

Overview
The interval of each reference marks of distance coded linear scale are variable. Accordingly, if the
interval is determined, the absolute position can be determined. The CNC measures the interval of
reference marks by axis moving of short distance and determines the absolute position. Consequently the
reference position can be established without moving to reference position.
Reference mark 1 Reference mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1
10.02 10.04
20.02
20.00 20.00
Fig. 3.6 Example of distance coded linear scale
This is an optional function.
3.6.1 Procedure for Reference Position Establishment

Procedure
(1) Select the JOG mode, and set the manual reference position return selection signal ZRN to "1".
(2) Set a direction selection signal(+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,…) for a target axis.
(3) The axis is fed at a constant low speed (reference position return FL feedrate specified by parameter
No.1425 setting).
(4) When a reference mark is detected, the axis stops, then the axis is fed at a constant low speed again.
(5) Above (4) is executed repeatedly until two, three or four reference marks are detected. And absolute
position is determined and reference position establishment signal (ZRF1,ZRF2,ZRF3, …) turns to
"1". (A number of reference marks is determined by bit 2 (DC2x) and 1 (DC4x) of parameter
No.1802.)
The timing chart for this procedures is given below.
JOG
ZRN
+J1
Reference mark
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL rate FL rate FL rate
Fig. 3.6.1 Timing chart for reference position establishment
- 440 -
- Procedure for establishing a reference position through automatic operation

If an automatic reference position return (G28) is specified before a reference position is not established,
steps (3) to (5) above are performed automatically.
After the reference position is established, the automatic reference position return is performed.
- Stopping the operation for establishing a reference position

The operation for establishing a reference position is stopped if any of the following operations is
performed in steps (3) to (5), described above.
• Reset
• Setting the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, -J1, +J2, -J2, etc.) to 0
If any of the following operations is performed during the operation of automatic reference position
return (G28) before a reference position is not established, the operation for establishing a reference
position stops:
• Reset
• Performing feed hold during movement from an intermediate position
If the operation for establishing a reference position is stopped by an operation other than a reset, the
operation for establishing a reference position must be reset and resumed.
3.6.2 Reference Position Return

(1) When the reference position is not established and the axis moved by turning the feed axis direction
signal (+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,...) to "1" in REF mode, the reference position establishment procedure is
executed.
(2) When the reference position is already established and the axis is moved by turning the feed axis
direction signal (+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,...) to "1" in REF mode, the axis is moved to the reference point
without executing the reference position establishment procedure.
(3) When the reference position is not established and the reference position return command (G28) is
executed, the reference position establishment procedure is executed. The next movement the axis
depends on the setting of bit 0 (RFS) of parameter No. 1818.
(4) When the reference position is already established and the reference position command (G28) is
executed, the movement of the axis depends on the setting of bit 1 (RF2) of parameter No.1818.
3.6.3 Distance Coded Rotary Encoder

In case of setting a rotary axis, if bit 3 (DCRx) of parameter No.1815 is set, the setting axis is regarded as
being equipped with a distance coded rotary encoder.
In case of distance coded rotary encoder, the marker interval may be different from parameter setting
value. (a-b section of the following figure) When the reference point return is executed through this
section, it is not able to establish the reference point. Therefore, in case of distance coded rotary encoder,
if the reference point return is started for B point from A point of below figure, the reference point is not
established yet at B point. The reference point return is re-started for C point. The reference point return
procedure is finished at C point.
- 441 -
C
B
20.02 20.02
b
9.96
20.02 9.98 19.66
9.94
A
a
9.64
20.00 20.00
20.00
• When the reference point return procedure is executed, the coordinate value are rounded in 0 to 360
degree, even if Machine coordinate values are linear axis type.
• In case of distance coded rotary encoder, only the measurement by three points or four points is
possible. (bit 2 (DC2) of parameter No.1802 is disregarded as 0.)
3.6.4 Axis Synchronization Control

Requirements when this function is used with axis synchronization control
axes
When this function is used with axis synchronization control axes, the distance coded linear scale used for
the master axis and that used for the slave axis must have reference marks placed at identical intervals.
(Set identical values in parameters Nos. 1821 and 1882 for both the master and slave axes.)
This function does not work unless the use of this function is specified for both the master and slave axes
(bit 2 (DCL) of parameter No. 1815 is 1).
Also, in all parameters related to this function, except parameter No. 1883, 1884 (distance from the scale
zero point to reference position 1, 2), set identical values for both the master and slave axes.
If a parameter value for the master axis differs from the corresponding parameter value for the slave axis,
alarm SV1051, “ILLEGAL SYNCHRONOUS AXIS” is issued.
NOTE
When this function is used with axis synchronization control axes for which the
operation mode is switched between synchronization operation and normal
operation, this function is enabled only if the synchronization select signal
(SYNC1, SYNC2, ...) is 1. (During establishment of a reference position, the
synchronization select signal status must be maintained.)
Reference position establishment with axis synchronization control axes

With axis synchronization control axes, a reference position is established as follows. When a reference
mark for the master or slave axis is detected, a stop takes place temporarily. Then, a feed operation is
performed again at the reference position return FL feedrate. This sequence is repeated until a reference
mark is detected three or four times for both the master and slave axes. Then the absolute position is
calculated for both the master and slave axes, and the reference position establish signals ZRF1, ZRF2, ...
are set to 1.
After the reference position has been established by the above operation, a synchronization error is
corrected. (Checking for excessive synchronization error alarm 2 is made even during reference position
establishment.)
- 442 -
(Example of 3 points measurement system)
Scale end
Reference mark
Master axis
(1) (2) (3)

Start point End Point
Slave axis
(a) (b) (c)
In the above example, the following sequence is executed.

a. When the reference mark (1) of the master axis is detected, both master axis and slave axis stop.
b. Both the axes begin to move again at a reference position return FL feedrate.
c. When the reference mark (a) of the slave axis is detected, both axes stop again.
d. Both the axes begin to move again at FL feedrate.
e. Both axes repeat the operation until all point ((2) -> (b) ->(3) -> (c)) are detected.
f. When the slave axis detects the third reference mark (c), both the axes end the reference position
establishment.
NOTE
In case of this function is used with axis synchronization control axes, if the value
of parameters Nos. 1883 and 1884 for both the master and slave axes is 0, the
reference position is not established. Also, the reference position establish signals
ZRF1, ZRF2, ... are set to 0.
3.6.5 Axis Control by PMC

In PMC axis control, if the reference position return command (axis control command code 05H) is issued for
an axis having a distance coded linear scale, reference position return is performed according to the reference
position return sequence for the distance coded linear scale.
Specifically, the following operations take place:
Before reference position The reference position is established by detecting two, three or four reference marks.
establishment Movement to the reference position is not performed.
After reference position Positioning at the reference position is performed.
establishment
3.6.6 Note
(1) In the case of the actual interval of reference marks is different from parameter setting value, the
alarm DS1449, “REFERENCE MARKS ARE DIFFERENT FROM PARAMETER” occurs.
(2) This function is disabled if any of the following conditions is satisfied:

• Either parameter No.1821 (mark-1 interval) or parameter No.1882 (mark-2 interval) is set to 0.
• The setting of parameter No.1821 is greater than or equal to the setting of parameter No.1882.
• The difference between the settings made for parameters Nos. 1821 and 1882 is greater than or
equal to twice either setting.
- 443 -
• The absolute-position detection function is enabled. (Bit 5 (APCx) of parameter No.1815 is set
to 1.)
(3) A difference of parameters Nos.1821 and 1882 must be more than 4.

Example)
When the scale, which is that mark1 interval is 20.000mm and mark2 interval is 20.004mm, is
used on IS-B machine :
When the detection unit of 0.001mm is selected, parameter No.1821 and No.1882 must be set
"20000" and "20004", and the difference of them is "4".
To use such a scale, please adjust the detection unit by modification of parameters No.1820
(CMR) and Nos.2084/2085(flexible feed gear) to make the difference of parameters Nos.1821
and 1882 more than 4 as following examples.
(a) Set the detection unit=0.0001mm, and set No.1821=200000, No.1882=200040
(b) Set the detection unit=0.0005mm, and set No.1821=40000, No.1882=40008
NOTE
When the detection unit is changed, parameters relating to the detection unit
(such as the effective area and positional deviation limit) must also be changed
accordingly.
(4) In this procedure, the axis does not stop until two, three or four reference marks are detected. If this
procedure is started at the position near the scale end, CNC can not detect three or four reference
marks and the axis does not stop until over travel alarm occurs. Please care to start at the position
that has enough distance from scale end.
Scale end
Reference marks
Start point (Bad) Start point (Good)
(5) When the axis used this function, the following function can not be used.
• Absolute position detection (absolute pulse coder)
(6) If axial movement is made in the direction opposite to that of reference position return, the
movement is reversed to the direction of reference position return after three or four reference marks
have been detected. Steps (3) to (5) of the basic procedure for establishing a reference position are
carried out to establish the reference position.
(7) Straightness compensation function
When the reference point establishment of moving axis is executed after the establishment of
compensation axis, the compensation axis is moved by straightness compensation amount when the
reference point of moving axis is established.
(8) The reference point establishment is not performed during synchronous control is activated.
(9) The reference point establishment is not performed during composite control is activated.
(10) The reference point establishment is not performed during superimposed control is activated.
- 444 -
3.7 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE

MARKS (SERIAL)
Overview
By using High-resolution serial output circuit for the linear scale with distance-coded reference marks
(serial), the CNC measures the interval of referenced mark by axis moving of short distance and
determines the absolute position.
This function enables high-speed high-precision detection by using High-resolution serial output circuit.
It is available that using maximum stroke 30 meters length.
To use this function, the option of the distance coded linear scale interface is also needed.
Explanation
The linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) is combined the irregular reference marked
linear scale with the High-resolution serial output circuit, it can detect the accurate position.
Reference mark signal
10.02 10.04 10.06
0 20 40 60
The CNC measures the interval of referenced mark by axis moving of short distance and determines the
absolute position, because of the interval of each reference mark is different with regular interval.
It is not necessary that the axis is moved to the reference position for establishment of reference position.
This function enables high-speed high-precision detection by using High-resolution serial output circuit.
It is available that using maximum stroke 30 meters length.
- Connection
It is available under linear motor system and full closed system.
Linear motor system

Pole sensor
Linear motor
CNC Servo Linear Motor

Amp Position Detection
Circuit C
Max. 30m
Linear scale with distance-coded

reference marks (serial)
- 445 -
Full Closed System
CNC Servo
Amp Table
Separate High
Detector Resolution
Interface Serial Output Max. 30m
Unit Circuit C
Linear scale with distance-coded

reference marks (serial)
- Procedure for reference position establishment through manual operation

(1) Select the JOG mode, and set the manual reference position return selection signal ZRN to "1".
(2) Set a direction selection signal(+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,…) for a target axis.
(3) The axis is fed at a constant low speed (reference position return FL feedrate specified by parameter
No.1425 setting).
(4) When the absolute position of linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) is detected,
the axis stops. Then the absolute position of CNC is calculated and reference position establishment
signal (ZRF1,ZRF2,ZRF3,…) turns to "1".
The timing chart for this procedures is given below.

JOG
ZRN
+J１
Reference
mark
Feedrate FL rate
ZRF
- Procedure for reference position establishment through automatic operation

If an automatic reference position return (G28) is specified before a reference position is not established,
steps (3) to (4) above are performed automatically.
After the reference position is established, the automatic reference position return is performed by setting
of bit 0 (RFS) of parameter No. 1818.
- Stopping the operation for establishing a reference position

The operation for establishing a reference position is stopped if any of
the following operations is performed in steps (3) to (4), described above.
• Reset
• Setting the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, -J1, +J2, -J2, etc.) to 0
• Setting the Servo off signals (SVF1, SVF2, etc.) to 1
- 446 -
If any of the following operations is performed during the operation of automatic reference position
return (G28) before a reference position is not established, the operation for establishing a reference
position stops:
• Reset
• Performing feed hold during movement from an intermediate position
• Setting the Servo off signals (SVF1, SVF2, etc.) to 1
If the operation for establishing a reference position is stopped by an operation other than a reset, the
operation for establishing a reference position must be reset and resumed.
- Establishing a reference position and moving to the reference position

By following operation, establishing a reference position and moving to the reference position is
performed.
Moving through manual Moving through automatic operation by automatic

operation in REF mode reference position return (G28)
The reference Establishing the reference Firstly, moving to the intermediate position, and
position is not position establishing the reference position.
established. Secondly, whether moving to the reference position or not
is performed by setting bit 0 (RFS) of parameter No.1818.
The reference Moving to the reference position Whether moving to the intermediate position and the
position is reference position or not is performed by setting bit 1
established. (RF2) of parameter No.1818.
- Feed axis synchronization control

In case of using the axis synchronization control, please confirm the following items.
• When this function is used with axis synchronization control axes, the linear scale with
distance-coded reference marks (serial) used for the master axis and that used for the slave axis must
have reference marks placed at identical intervals.
• The master axis scale and the slave axis scale should be installed in parallel direction. (The zero
positions should be faced the same direction.)
• To the parameters, which relate to this function (except No.1883, No.1884), the same value must be
set for the master axis and for the slave axis.
• The linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) should be applied for the master axis
and the slave axis.
If either of the master axis or the slave axis is not the linear scale with distance-coded reference
marks (serial), alarm DS0018, “SERIAL DCL:MISMATCH(SSYNC CTRL)” occurs when
reference position establishment is tried.
• During operating the establishment of reference position, the state of signal (SYNCn or SYNCJn)
for selecting synchronized axis should be kept.
Procedure for reference position establishment by axis synchronization control is as follows.

• Both of axes (master axis and slave axis) are fed on the reference position return FL feedrate until
distance coded scales of both axes detect the absolute position.
• Then absolute position of both axes are calculated and Reference Position Establishment Signals
(ZRF1,ZRF2,...) turn to "1".
CAUTION
1 When the Linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) is used,
please set bit 3 (SDCx) of parameter No.1818 to 1.
- 447 -
CAUTION
2 On the Linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial), the axis does
not stop until three reference marks are detected. If this procedure is started at
the position near the scale end, CNC can not detect three reference marks and
the axis does not stop until over travel alarm occurs. Please care to start at the
position that has enough distance from scale end.
And if establishment of reference position is failed, the establishment is retried.
Then axis does not stop until still more three reference marks are detected. So
please set the maximum move amount (detection unit : parameter No.14010) not
to reach the scale end.
Scale end
Reference marks
Start point (Bad) Start point (Good)
3 Straightness compensation function

When the reference point establishment of moving axis is executed after the
establishment of compensation axis, the compensation axis is moved by
straightness compensation amount when the reference point of moving axis is
established.
4 The reference point cannot be established during twin table synchronous
operation or single operation.
- 448 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION
4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Programmed operation of a CNC machine tool is referred to as automatic operation.
This chapter explains the following types of automatic operation:
4.1 MEMORY OPERATION .................................................................................................................449
Operation by executing a program registered in CNC memory
4.2 MDI OPERATION ...........................................................................................................................451
Operation by executing a program entered from the MDI unit
4.3 DNC OPERATION...........................................................................................................................454
Function for executing a program while reading the program from an input device connected to the
RS232C interface or a memory card.
4.4 SCHEDULE OPERATION ..............................................................................................................456
Function for executing a program while reading the program from an input device connected to the
RS232C interface or a memory card according to a schedule.
4.5 EEXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198) ..............................................................................459
Function for calling and executing subprograms (files) registered in an external input/output device
during memory operation
4.6 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALLS USING THE DATA SERVER AVAILABLE IN
MULTI-PATH SYSTEMS ...............................................................................................................463
Function for enabling external subprogram call commands using the Data Server to be specified
simultaneously from multiple paths in a multi-path system
4.7 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION..........................................................................................464
Function for performing manual feed during movement executed by automatic operation
4.8 MIRROR IMAGE.............................................................................................................................470
Function for enabling mirror-image movement along an axis during automatic operation
4.9 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART ........................................................................................................472
Function for restarting a machine processing after the machine processing is interrupted.
4.10 RETRACE ........................................................................................................................................475
Function for executing a program in the reverse direction.
4.1 MEMORY OPERATION

Programs are registered in memory in advance. When one of these programs is selected and the cycle start
switch on the machine operator's panel is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start LED
goes on.
When the feed hold switch on the machine operator's panel is pressed during automatic operation,
automatic operation is stopped temporarily. When the cycle start switch is pressed again, automatic
operation is restarted.
When the key on the MDI unit is pressed, automatic operation terminates and the reset state is
entered.
For the multi-path control, the programs for the multiple paths can be executed simultaneously so the
multiple paths can operate independently at the same time.
The following procedure is given as an example. For actual operation, refer to the manual supplied by the
Memory operation
Procedure
1 Press the MEMORY mode selection switch.
2 Select a program from the registered programs. To do this, follow the steps below.
- 449 -
4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64504EN/02
2-1 Press key to display the program screen.
2-2 Press address key.

2-3 Enter a program number using the numeric keys.
2-4 Press the [O SRH] soft key.
3 For the multi-path control, select the path to be operated with the path selection switch on the
machine operator's panel.
4 Press the cycle start switch on the machine operator's panel.
Automatic operation starts, and the cycle start LED goes on. When automatic operation terminates,
the cycle start LED goes off.
5 To stop or cancel memory operation midway through, follow the steps below.
a. Stopping memory operation
Press the feed hold switch on the machine operator's panel. The feed hold LED goes on and the
cycle start LED goes off. The machine responds as follows:
(i) When the machine was moving, feed operation decelerates and stops.
(ii) When dwell was being performed, dwell is stopped.
(iii) When M, S, or T was being executed, the operation is stopped after M, S, or T is finished.
When the cycle start switch on the machine operator's panel is pressed while the feed hold LED
is on, machine operation restarts.
b. Terminating memory operation
Press the key on the MDI unit.
Automatic operation is terminated and the reset state is entered.
When a reset is applied during movement, movement decelerates then stops.
Explanation
- Memory operation
After memory operation is started, the following are executed:
(1) A one-block command is read from the specified program.
(2) The block command is decoded.
(3) The command execution is started.
(4) The command in the next block is read.
(5) Buffering is executed. That is, the command is decoded to allow immediate execution.
(6) Immediately after the preceding block is executed, execution of the next block can be started. This is
because buffering has been executed.
(7) Hereafter, memory operation can be executed by repeating the steps (4) to (6).
- Stopping and terminating memory operation

Memory operation can be stopped using one of two methods: Specify a stop command, or press a key on
the machine operator's panel.
• The stop commands include M00 (program stop), M01 (optional stop), and M02 and M30 (program
end).
• There are two keys to stop memory operation: The feed hold key and reset key.
- Program stop (M00)

Memory operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all
existing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The memory operation can
be restarted by pressing the cycle start button. Operation may vary depending on the machine tool builder.
Refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
- 450 -
- Optional stop (M01)

Similarly to M00, memory operation is stopped after a block containing M01 is executed. This code is
only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the machine operator's panel is set to ON. Operation may
vary depending on the machine tool builder. Refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
- Program end (M02, M30)

When M02 or M30 (specified at the end of the main program) is read, memory operation is terminated
and the reset state is entered.
Since it depends on machine specification whether the active line returns to top of program or not when
M02 or M30 is read, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder for details.
- Feed hold
When Feed Hold button on the operator's panel is pressed during memory operation, the tool decelerates
to a stop at a time.
- Reset
Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be made to the reset state by using key on
the MDI unit or external reset signal. When reset operation is applied to the system during a tool moving
status, the motion is slowed down then stops.

A block skip slash (/) must be specified at the beginning of a block.
Note that if a slash is placed elsewhere, the information from the slash to immediately before the EOB
code is ignored.
- Cycle start for the multi-path control

For the multi-path control, a cycle start switch is provided for each path. This allows the operator to
activate a single paths to operate them at the same time in memory operation or MDI operation. In general,
select the path to be operated with the path selection switch on the machine operator's panel and then
press the cycle start button to activate the selected path. (The procedure may vary with the machine tool
builder. Refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine tool builder.)
4.2 MDI OPERATION

In the MDI mode, a program consisting of up to 511 characters can be created in the same format as
normal programs and executed from the MDI unit.
MDI operation is used for simple test operations.
MDI Operation
Procedure
For the multi-path control, select the path for which a program is to be created with the path
selection switch. Create a separate program for each path.
2 Press the key to select the program screen. The following screen appears:
- 451 -
MDI program screen
At this time, program number “O0000” is inserted automatically.
3 Prepare a program to be executed by an operation similar to normal program editing. M99 specified
in the last block can return control to the beginning of the program after operation ends. Word
insertion, modification, deletion, word search, address search, and program search are available for
programs created in the MDI mode.
4 To entirely erase a program created in MDI mode, use one of the following methods:
a. Enter address key, then press the key.
b. Alternatively, press the key. In this case, set bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No. 3203 to 1 in
advance.
5 To execute a program, set the cursor on the head of the program.
Push Cycle Start button on the operator's panel. By this action, the prepared program will start.
(For the multi-path control, select the path to be operated with the path selection switch on the
machine operator's panel beforehand.) When the program end (M02, M30) or ER(%) is executed,
the prepared program will be automatically erased and the operation will end.
By command of M99, control returns to the head of the prepared program.
6 To stop or terminate MDI operation in midway through, follow the steps below.
a. Stopping MDI operation
Press the feed hold switch on the machine operator's panel. The feed hold LED goes on and the
cycle start LED goes off. The machine responds as follows:
(i) When the machine was moving, feed operation decelerates and stops.
(ii) When dwell was being performed, dwell is stopped.
(iii) When M, S, or T was being executed, the operation is stopped after M, S, or T is finished.
When the cycle start switch on the machine operator's panel is pressed, machine operation
restarts.
b. Terminating MDI operation
Press the key.
Automatic operation is terminated and the reset state is entered.
When a reset is applied during movement, movement decelerates then stops.
- 452 -
Explanation
The previous explanation of how to execute and stop memory operation also applies to MDI operation,
except that in MDI operation, M30 does not return control to the beginning of the program (M99
performs this function).
- Erasing the program

Programs prepared in the MDI mode will be erased in the following cases:
• In MDI operation, if M02, M30 or ER(%) is executed.
• When bit 6 (MER) of parameter No. 3203 is set to 1, and the last block of the program is executed in
single block operation
NOTE
In the two cases above, program erasure can be prevented by setting bit 6
(MKP) of parameter No. 3204 to 1.
• In MEM mode, if memory operation is performed.
• In EDIT mode, if any editing is performed.
• When the and keys are pressed.
• Upon reset when bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No.3203 is set to 1
NOTE
Upon reset when the parameter MCL = 0, the cursor moves to the end of the
program.
- Restart
If a program is not executed even once after the program is input, the program is executed from the
beginning, regardless of where the cursor is placed. However, a program is executed starting at the
beginning of the block where the cursor is place, if the program is stopped for a reason such as single
block operation after restart of an MDI operation then is restarted after an editing operation.
CAUTION
When an MDI program is restarted, the program is executed starting at the
beginning of the block where the cursor is placed, regardless of the cursor
position in the block.
(Example)
When the cursor is placed on G90
:
G91 X100.0 G90Y200.0 Z300.0 ;
:
The program is executed starting at the beginning (namely, G91) of this
block. So, the tool moves by 100.0 along the X-axis in the incremental
programming, and moves to 200.0 and 300.0 along the Y-axis and Z-axis,
respectively, in the absolute programming.
- Editing a program during MDI operation

A program can be edited during MDI operation. By setting bit 5 (MZE) of parameter No. 3203 to 1,
editing can be disabled. However, even when bit 5 (MZE) of parameter No. 3203 is set to 1, editing can
be enabled by resetting the operation.
- 453 -
- Absolute/incremental command
When bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1, the absolute/incremental programming of MDI
operation does not depend on G90/G91. In this case, the incremental programming is set when bit 5
(ABS) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 0, and the absolute programming is set when bit 5 (ABS) of
Bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401=1

Bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401=0 Bit 5 (ABS) of parameter No. Bit 5 (ABS) of parameter No.
3401=0 3401=1
Absolute mode operation with G90 Incremental mode operation at all Absolute mode operation at all
command, and incremental programming times, independent of G90/G91 times, independent of G90/G91
operation with G91 command command command
Limitation
- Program registration
Programs created in MDI mode cannot be registered.
- Number of characters in a program

A created program can consist of up to 511 characters including "O0000" automatically inserted.
- Subprogram nesting
The subprogram call command (M98) can be described in a program created in MDI mode. That is,
programs that are registered in memory through MDI operation can be called and executed. The level of
subprogram call nesting is the same as in MEM operation.
- Macro call
When the custom macro function is enabled, a macro program can be created and executed even in the
MDI mode. Moreover, a macro program can be called for execution.
NOTE
The GOTO statement, WHILE statement, and DO statement cannot be executed
in a program created in the MDI mode. An alarm PS0377, “ILLEGAL MODE
FOR GOTO/WHILE/DO” is issued.
When a program including those statements is to be executed, register the
program in the program memory then call the program for execution.
4.3 DNC OPERATION

By activating automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT), it is possible to perform
machining (DNC operation) while a program is being read in via RS232C interface. Available devices
include a memory card and Data Server.
To use the DNC operation function, it is necessary to set the parameters related to the RS232C interface
in advance.
The procedure described below is just an example. For actual operation, refer to the relevant manual of
the machine tool builder. For a Data Server, also refer to the “Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server
OPERATOR’S MANUAL”.
NOTE
DNC operation cannot be performed using a program in a USB memory.
- 454 -
DNC operation
Procedure
1 Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator's panel to enter the DNC mode.
2 Select the program to be executed.
• Selecting a DNC operation file
On the memory card (or floppy cassette) list screen, move the cursor to the file to be subjected
to DNC operation and press "DNC SET" to select the file to be subjected to DNC operation.
(The selected file is marked with "D".)
• Releasing a DNC operation file
On the memory card (or floppy cassette) list screen, move the cursor to the file for which DNC
operation is released and press "DNC CLEAR" to release the DNC operation file. (The "D"
mark for the file is removed.)
3 Press the cycle start switch to execute the selected file. For details on the REMOTE switch, refer to
the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
4 During DNC operation, executed programs are listed on the program check screen and program
screen.
Fig. 4.3 (a) PROGRAM screen
- 455 -
Fig. 4.3 (b) PROGRAM CHECK screen
NOTE
1 Before selecting a DNC operation file, be sure to release all schedule data. DNC
operation and schedule operation cannot be specified at the same time.
2 A DNC operation file cannot be released during DNC operation.
3 To switch between devices when DNC settings are made, release the settings
and then make the settings again.
Explanation
During DNC operation, subprograms and macro programs stored in memory can be called.
Limitation
- M198 (command for calling a program from within an external input/output
unit)
In DNC operation, M198 cannot be executed. If M198 is executed, alarm PS0210, “CAN NOT
COMMAND M198/M99” is issued.
- Custom macro
In DNC operation, custom macros can be specified, but no repeat instruction and branch instruction can
be programmed. If a repeat instruction or branch instruction is executed, alarm PS0123, “ILLEGAL
MODE FOR GOTO/WHILE/DO” is issued.
- M99
For returning from a subprogram or macro program to the calling program during DNC operation, the
specification of a return command (M99P...) with a sequence number specified is not allowed.
4.4 SCHEDULE OPERATION

To perform schedule operation, select files (programs) registered in a memory card and specify the
sequence of execution and the repetition count of each program.
NOTE
Schedule operation cannot be performed using a program in a USB memory.
- 456 -
Schedule operation
Procedure
1 Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator's panel to enter the DNC mode.
2 Select the program to be subjected to schedule operation.
• Setting a schedule
Move the cursor to the file to be subjected to schedule operation and press the soft key
[SCHEDUL ADD]. The files registered as schedule data are marked with "S" on the left sides
of their file names. The files are subjected to schedule operation in the order in which the files
are selected. When settings are made this way, the repetition count of execution of each file is
set to 1. To change the repetition count or execution order or check the schedule, press the soft
key [SCHEDUL LIST] to display the schedule list screen.
[SCHEDUL ADD]
Adds the file at the cursor position as schedule data.
[SCHEDUL DEL]
Deletes the file at the cursor position from schedule data when the file is registered as schedule
data.
[SCHEDUL LIST]
Lists the settings of schedule data to edit the repetition count or the like (see the next page for
details).
• Editing a schedule
To edit schedule data, press the soft key [SCHEDUL LIST] to display the schedule list screen,
on which schedule data can be edited.
- 457 -
[FILE UP] Moves the file at the cursor position up one line and moves the replaced file down
one line.
[FILE DOWN] Moves the file at the cursor position down one line and moves the replaced file up
one line.
[DELETE] Deletes the file at the cursor position and moves the files below the cursor up one
line.
[INSERT] Moves the files below the cursor down one line.
[ALL DELETE] Deletes all records.
3 Press the cycle start switch to execute the selected files. For details on the REMOTE switch, refer to
the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
NOTE
1 Before setting schedule operation, release DNC operation files in the MDI mode.
DNC operation and schedule operation cannot be specified at the same time.
2 Before starting schedule operation, confirm that schedule data is set correctly on
the schedule list screen.
3 Schedule data cannot be changed or edited during schedule operation. Before
changing schedule data, make a reset to stop operation.
Restrictions
- Repetition count
The maximum repetition count during schedule operation is 9999. When a negative value is specified, an
endless loop (LOOP display) is assumed. The file for which 0 is set is skipped and processing proceeds to
the next file.
- Number of registered files

The maximum number of programs that can be registered as schedule setting data is 20.
- Selectable files
The files to be selected as schedule setting data must be registered in the same folder. (Files in the
different folders cannot be selected.)
- 458 -
- M code
Even if a code other than M02 and M30 in the execution program is executed, the current count on the
schedule execution status screen is not increased.
- Floppy disk folder display during execution of a file

During schedule operation, folders in a floppy disk cannot be displayed in a background edit.
- Intervention during automatic operation

Intervention in schedule operation cannot be performed during automatic operation.
- During multi-path control

The scheduling function cannot be used by multiple paths at the same time.
4.5 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)

During memory operation, you can call and execute a subprogram registered in an external device (such
as a Memory Card, Handy File, or Data Server) connected to the CNC.
NOTE
A program in a USB memory cannot be called using an external subprogram call
(M198).
Format
M198 Pxxxxxxxx Lyyyyyyyy ;
↑ ↑
Pxxxxxxxx : Program number (or file number)
Lyyyyyyyy : Number of repetitive calls
• If calling with a file name

M198 <xxxx> Lyyyyyyyy ;
↑ ↑
xxxx : File name of an external subprogram
Lyyyyyyyy : Number of repetitive calls
When address L is omitted, the number of repetitive calls is assumed to be 1.

FS16 compatible command format
(The following command format is valid only when a 4-digit program number is used.)
M198 Pxxxx yyyy ;
↑ ↑
xxxx : Number of repetitive calls
yyyy : Program number (or file number)
When the number of repetitive calls is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.
Explanation
M code M198 specifies an external subprogram call. You can also call an external subprogram using an
M code set in parameter No. 6030. (When an M code other than M198 is set as an M code for calling an
external subprogram, M198 is executed as a normal M code.)
- 459 -
Specify a program number (file number) registered in an external device at address P. If the specified
program number (file number) is not registered in the connected external device, an alarm PS1079,
“PROGRAM FILE NOT FOUND” is issued.
If calling with a file name, the file name of an external subprogram must be specified immediately after
M198.
If, in an external subprogram call specified with a file name, no program is registered in the connected
external device, alarm SR1079 (alarm SR1966, “FILE NOT FOUND (MEMORY CARD)” in the case of
a memory card) is issued.
Characters that can be used in the file name of an external subprogram and the number of characters in a
file name are as described below.
• The following characters can be used in a file name:
Alphabetical characters (uppercase and lowercase letters), numeric characters, and the four symbols
below:
-+_.
Because "." and ".." are reserved file names, they cannot be used.
• The maximum number of characters that can be used in a file name in each external device, as well
as the alarms that are issued if an item out of the range (such as a character that cannot be specified)
is specified, is as given below.
External device name Number of characters Alarm issued if an item out of the range is specified
Handy File 17 SR1079
FLOPPY CASSTTE 17 SR1079
Memory Card 12 SR1968
Data Server 32 PS0311
Example 1)
If using a Data Server as the external device, specify the command for calling the external subprogram
located on the Data Server, as follows:
M198 <SMPL100> L10; Calls SAMPL100 ten times.
File name on the Data Server: SMPL100
％
<SMPL100>（Sample Program1）;
N1 G55;
N2 G90 G01 X0 Y0 F1000;
N3 G01 X0 Y0 F1000;
N4 ……;
Example 2)
If using a memory card as the external device, specify the command for calling the external subprogram
located on the memory card, as follows:
M198 <SMPL200> L20; Calls SAMPL200 twenty times.
File name on the memory card: SMPL200
%
O0200（Sample Program2）;
N1 G55;
N2 G90 G01 X0 Y0 F1000;
N3 G01 X0 Y0 F1000;
N4 ……;
- 460 -
NOTE
1 If the file name of an external subprogram differs from its program name, as in
the example below, specify the file name (SMPL200) on the Memory Card.
2 If an MS-DOS format floppy disk is used with a Handy File, a file name can be
specified as follows:
- A file name of up to 12 characters, 8 characters + "." + 3characters, can be
specified. For an external subprogram call, there are cases in which no alarm
is issued even if a call is made with a specification exceeding 12 characters,
as in the following example.
Example) M198 <ABCDEFGH>
For this command, the file with the file name, "ABCDEFGH.DAT", is the one
to be called.
Even if <ABCDEFGHＩJKLMN> is specified as a file name, the file with the
first 8 characters + "DAT", i.e., "ABCDEFGH.DAT", is the one to be called.
Example 3)
M198 P0123 L3;
This command specifies that the subprogram having external subprogram number
O0123 is to be called three times repeatedly.
The subprogram is called from the main program and executed as follows:
Main program Sub program
1 2 3
N0010 ... ; 0123 ... ;
N0020 ... ; N1020 ... ;
N0030 M198 P0123 L3 ; N1030 ... ;
N0040 ... ; N1040 ... ;
N0050 ; N0050 ... ;
N0060 ... ; N1060 ... M99 ;
- Program number call

- File name call
You can also specify a subprogram call with its program number instead of the file number by the setting
of bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404.
- Program number O8-digit

The called file name is as follows.
Table 4.5 The file name called when instructing in M198

Program number is Program number is
Device 7-digit or less. 8-digit.
(example: M198P1234567) (example: M198P12345678)
When an external device is excluding a fast “O” plus a 7-digit numeric a 8-digit numeric
data server, or is a fast data server excluding (example: O1234567) (example: 12345678)
in the storage mode.
When an external device is a fast data server “O” plus a 8-digit numeric a 8-digit numeric
in the storage mode. (example: O01234567) (example: 12345678)
- 461 -
NOTE
1 An external subprogram call can be specified during program operation in the
MEM/MDI mode. However, in case of using with MDI mode, it is necessary to
set the parameter bit 1 (MDE) of parameter No.11630 to 1.
2 An external subprogram call is available for the following external devices:
External device name Program number call File number call File name call
Handy File Available Available Available
FLOPPY CASSTTE Available Available Available
Memory Card Available Unavailable Available
Data Server Available Unavailable Available
3 To perform a subprogram call using a Memory Card as the external device, set
bit 7 (MNC) of parameter No. 138 to 1 and I/O channel (parameter No. 0020) to
4.
A program number call is always enabled regardless of the setting of bit 2 (SBP)
of parameter No. 3404.
4 To perform a file name call using a Handy File or floppy cassette as the external
device, set bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404 to 1.
5 called using another external device subprogram call. (An alarm PS1080,
“DUPLICATE DEVICE SUB PROGRAM CALL” is issued.)
Main program Sub program Sub program

(internal memory) (External device) (External device)
Can be called. Cannot be
called.
M198 M198 (Alarm)
6 A subprogram registered in internal memory can be called from a subprogram

called using an external device subprogram call. From the called subprogram in
internal memory, another external device subprogram call cannot be performed.
(An alarm (PS1080) is issued.)
Main program Sub program Sub program Sub program
(internal memory) (External (internal (External
device) memory) device)
M198
M98 M198
Can be called. Cannot be called.
Can be called. (Alarm)
7 A call using the external device subprogram call function is counted as one level
of subprogram nesting.
8 In a multi-path system, an external device subprogram call cannot be performed
simultaneously from multiple paths.
When external subprogram calls using the Data Server that are available in
multi-path systems are used, however, external subprogram call commands
using the Data Server can be specified simultaneously from multiple paths.
- 462 -
4.6 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALLS USING THE DATA

SERVER AVAILABLE IN MULTI-PATH SYSTEMS
Overview
In a multi-path system, external subprogram call commands using the Data Server can be specified
Path 1 Path 2 Path n

External subprogram External subprogram External subprogram
call command call command call command
External subprogram
call commands can
be used
simultaneously from
multiple paths.
Program for path 1 Program for path 2 Program for path n
Data Server
Fig. 4.6 (a) External subprogram calls specified simultaneously from multiple paths
Explanation
In a multi-path system, external subprogram call commands using the Data Server can be specified
・Example) Specifying an external subprogram call simultaneously from two paths

During the execution of an external subprogram command (M198) in path 1, another external subprogram
call command (M198) can be executed from path 2, as shown below.
- 463 -
Data Server
Program for path 1 Program for path 2

O1000 O2000
Path 1 Path 2
: :
N100 G01 F3000. ; O1000 ; N200 G17 G02 ;
N110 M198 P1000 ; : N210 I-10. F100. ; O2000 ;
N120 G0 X10. ; : N220 M198 P2000 ; :
N130 Y10. ; M99 ; N230 G01 ; :
: : M99 ;
In paths 1 and 2, an external subprogram call is executed simultaneously.
Fig. 4.6 (b) Specifying an external subprogram call in paths 1 and 2 simultaneously
Note
NOTE
1 This function is enabled only when the Data Server is selected as a foreground
input device.
Other devices such as a memory card cannot be used to execute an external
subprogram call command simultaneously in multiple paths.
2 DNC operation cannot be performed simultaneously in multiple paths.
3 The same external subprogram cannot be executed simultaneously in multiple
paths.
4 Before specifying an external subprogram command, set a folder for performing
an external subprogram call. For details, refer to the following manual:
”Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64014EN)”
5 To use this function, set bit 0 (ESB) of parameter No. 8107 to 1.
4.7 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION

By rotating the manual pulse generator in the automatic operation mode (manual data input, DNC
operation, or memory operation) or in the memory editing mode, handle feed can be superimposed on
movement by automatic operation. A handle interruption axis is selected using the manual handle
interruption axis selection signals HsnIA to HSnIE.
The minimum unit of travel distance per scale division is the least input increment. One of four types of
magnifiers selected with manual handle feed selection signals MP1 and MP2 can be applied. With bit 3
(HIT) of parameter No. 7103, the minimum unit of travel distance can be further 10 times greater.
- 464 -
A handle feed magnifier is selected using the manual handle feed amount selection signal. (See
"MANUAL HANDLE FEED".)
Tool position
during automatic
Z
Tool position after operation
handle interruption
Programmed
amount of
movement
Depth of cut
by handle
interruption
X
Fig. 4.7 Manual handle interruption
WARNING
The travel distance per scale division by manual handle interruption is the least
input increment as with manual handle feed. With a machine of metric input and
inch output, for example, the travel distance per 254 scale divisions is 0.01 inch.
With a machine of inch input and metric output, the travel distance per 100 scale
divisions is 0.254 mm.
Explanation
- Interruption operation
1 When the handle interruption axis selection signal for a handle interruption axis is set to 1 in the
automatic operation mode (manual data input, DNC operation, or memory operation) or in the
memory editing mode, manual handle interruption can be performed by rotating the handle of the
manual pulse generator.
NOTE
Even when the feedrate override signal sets 0%, manual handle interruption can
be accepted.
2 For the method of selecting a manual handle interruption axis, refer to the relevant manual of the
3 The feedrate during manual handle interruption is the sum of feedrate used for automatic operation
and the feedrate used for movement by manual handle interruption. However, the feedrate during
manual handle interruption is controlled so that it does not exceed the maximum allowable cutting
feedrate for the axis.
Example
Suppose that the maximum allowable cutting feedrate for an axis is 5 m/min, and
that a movement is made in the + direction at 2 m/min along the axis. In this
case, manual handle interruption can be accepted even when the manual pulse
generator is rotated up to a speed equivalent to 3 m/min. Manual handle
interruption by rotation in one direction can be accepted even when the manual
pulse generator is rotated to a speed equivalent to 7 m/min.
If the manual pulse generator is rotated to a speed beyond the upper limits,
those pulses from the manual pulse generator that correspond to the excess are
- 465 -
lost, resulting in a mismatch between the scale mark of the manual pulse
generator and the actually interrupted travel distance.
4 For a magnifier for manual handle interruption, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool
builder.
5 If the travel direction is reversed as a result of manual handle interruption, backlash compensation is
performed. Pitch error compensation is performed for the position after interruption.
6 In manual handle interruption, only acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed is enabled. By setting
bit 0 (MNJ) of parameter No. 1606 to 1, acceleration/deceleration for both of cutting feed and jog
feed can be applied to manual handle interruption.
- Manual handle interruption and coordinate system

1 The amount of manual handle interruption shifts the workpiece coordinate systems and the local
coordinate system. So, the machine moves, but the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate systems
and the local coordinate system remain unchanged.
Regardless of which coordinate system is selected, all workpiece coordinate systems and the local
coordinate system shift by the same amount.
• Absolute coordinates
→ Remain unchanged by handle interruption.
• Relative coordinates
→ Change by the amount of handle interruption.
• Machine coordinates
→ Change by the amount of handle interruption.
Programmed path
Path after
interruption
Shift by manual handle

interruption
(Workpiece coordinate system before

interruption)
(Workpiece coordinate system after

interruption)
2 Even when manual handle interruption is performed, the machine coordinate system remains
unchanged. The absolute command (G53) in the machine coordinate system is not affected by
manual handle interruption.
- 466 -
(G90G54****)
Programmed path
Path after
interruption
Shift by manual handle
interruption
(Workpiece coordinate system before

interruption)
(Workpiece coordinate system after
(G90G53****) interruption)
3 In automatic reference position return (G28), the end point (reference position) is not affected by
manual handle interruption. However, the midpoint is in the workpiece coordinate system, so that
the position shifted by the amount of interruption becomes the midpoint.
- Cancellation of the amount of interruption

Operation by which the workpiece coordinate system shifted by manual handle interruption from the
machine coordinate system is returned to the original workpiece coordinate system is referred to
cancellation of the amount of interruption.
When the amount of interruption is canceled, the workpiece coordinate system is shifted by the amount of
manual handle interruption, and the amount of interruption is reflected in the absolute coordinates.
Interruption shifts the workpiece coordinate system from the machine coordinate system.
Position before interruption
Workpiece
coordinate system
before interruption
Workpiece
origin offset
Interruption Position after
interruption
Workpiece
coordinate
system after
(Machine zero point) interruption
By cancellation, the workpiece coordinate system returns to the state present before handle interruption.
Workpiece
coordinate system
Workpiece after cancellation
Interruption amount
origin cancellation
offset Position after
cancellation
Workpiece
coordinate
system before
cancellation
(Machine zero point)
- 467 -
In the following cases, the amount of interruption is canceled:

• When a reset is made (when bit 1 (RTH) of parameter No. 7103 is set to 1)
• When emergency stop state is canceled (when bit 1 (RTH) of parameter No. 7103 is set to 1)
• When a manual reference position return operation is performed
(when G28 is specified before a reference position is established)
• When a reference position is set without dogs
• When the workpiece coordinate system is preset
NOTE
When the amount of interruption is cleared using soft keys, only the indication of
the amount of interruption becomes 0, and the workpiece coordinate system
remains unchanged.
- Clearing the amount of interruption by soft keys

Clearing of the amount of interruption means that the indication of the amount of interruption by manual
handle interruption is set to 0. The workpiece coordinate system does not change.
"Clearing all axes" or "Clearing any axis" is performed on the path for which the amount of manual
handle interruption is indicated.
When bit 3 (HLC) of parameter No. 7100 is enabled, soft key [INTRPT CANCEL], which is used for this
operation, appears. When HLC is disabled, soft key [INTRPT CANCEL] does not appear.
To select "Clearing all axes" or "Clearing any axis", follow the procedure below.
1 Press function key on the MDI unit.

2 Press function key [HANDLE].
3 Press function key [(OPRT)].
4 To prepare for "Clearing all axes" or "Clearing any axis", press soft key [INTRPT CANCEL].
To prepare for "Clearing all axes" or "Clearing any axis", perform one of the following.
• Clearing all axes

Press [INTRPT CANCEL] and then press [ALL AXIS].
• Clearing any axis

- Enter the axis name and then press [INTRPT CANCEL].
- Press [INTRPT CANCEL], enter the axis name, and press [EXEC].
If an incorrect axis name is entered, a warning message stating "FORMAT ERROR" appears.
- Relation with other functions

The following table indicates the relation between other functions and the movement by handle
interruption.
Table 4.7 (a) Relation between other functions and the movement by handle interruption
Signals Relation
Machine lock is effective. When machine lock is on, no movement is made due to
Machine lock
handle interruption.
- 468 -
Signals Relation
Interlock is effective. When interlock is on, no movement is made due to handle
Interlock
interruption.
Mirror image is not effective. Interrupt functions on the plus direction by plus direction
Mirror image
command, even if this signal turns on.
- Position display
The following table shows the relation between various position display data and the movement by
Table 4.7 (b) relation between various position display data and the movement by handle interruption
Signals Relation
Absolute coordinate value Handle interruption does not change absolute coordinates.
Relative coordinates are changed by the travel distance specified by handle
Relative coordinate value
interruption.
Machine coordinates are changed by the travel distance specified by handle
Machine coordinate value
interruption.
- Travel distance display

Press the function key , then press the chapter selection soft key [HNDL]. The move amount by the
handle interruption is displayed. The following 4 kinds of data are displayed concurrently.
(a) INPUT UNIT:

Handle interruption move amount in input unit system
Indicates the travel distance specified by handle interruption according to the least input increment.
(b) OUTPUT UNIT :
Handle interruption move amount in output unit system
Indicates the travel distance specified by handle interruption according to the least command
increment.
(c) RELATIVE:
Position in relative coordinate system
Indicates the present relative position where the amount of the handle interruption was included.
(d) DISTANCE TO GO:
The remaining travel distance in the current block has no effect on the travel distance specified by
- 469 -
The handle interruption move amount is cleared when the manual reference position return ends every
axis.
- Display for five-axis systems or better

Systems having five or more axes provide the same display as the overall position display.
Note
NOTE
1 In a manual operation mode such as the jog feed mode or manual handle feed
mode, handle interruption cannot be performed.
2 During a machine lock or interlock, handle interruption does not cause
movement.
3 Manual handle interruption is disabled for the axis in any of the following states.
- Follow-up state
- PMC axis control state
4 Manual handle interruption cannot be performed for the axis specified in the G00
mode.
4.8 MIRROR IMAGE

During automatic operation, the mirror image function can be used for movement along an axis. In this
case, the absolute coordinate is updated to the same direction as a programmed path, and the machine
coordinate and the relative coordinate are updated to the opposite direction from a programmed path.
To use this function, set the mirror image switch to ON on the machine operator's panel, or set the mirror
image setting to ON from the MDI unit.
Y Y-axis mirror image goes on.
Programmed tool
path
Tool path after the

mirror image
function is used
Tool
X
Fig. 4.8 (a) Mirror image
Procedure for mirror image

Procedure
1 Press the single block switch to stop automatic operation.
When the mirror image function is used from the beginning of operation, this step is omitted.
2 Press the mirror image switch for the target axis on the machine operator's panel.
Alternatively, turn on the mirror image setting by following the steps below:
2-1 Set the MDI mode.
2-2 Press the function key .
- 470 -
2-3 Press the [SETING] soft key for chapter selection to display the setting screen.
Fig. 4.8 (b) Setting screen
2-4 Move the cursor to the mirror image setting position, then set the target axis to 1.
3 Enter an automatic operation mode (MEM mode or MDI mode), then press the cycle start button to
start automatic operation.
Explanation
• The mirror image function can also be turned on and off by setting bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter
No.0012 to 1 or 0.
• For the mirror image switches, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
- Shifting workpiece coordinate system

When operation using mirror image is executed after the workpiece coordinate system is specified, the
workpiece coordinate system is shifted from the machine coordinate system.
This shifted amount can be cancelled by the following operation.
- Workpiece coordinate system preset (G92.1, G50.3)
- Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals WPRST1-WPRST8
- Programmable mirror image (G50.1, G51.1)

When programmable mirror image and ordinary mirror image are specified at the same time,
programmable mirror image is applied first.
- Retrace
Mirror image is enabled during reverse execution and forward reexecution of the retrace function.
Therefore, it is necessary during the reverse execution and the forward reexecution to make mirror image
in the same state as the forward execution.
Limitation
- Manual operation and automatic reference position return
Even if mirror image is applied, the following directions are not reversed.
- Direction of manual operation
- Direction of movement, from the intermediate position to the reference position during automatic
reference position return
- 471 -
In these cases, the machine coordinate and the relative coordinate are updated to the same direction as a
movement, and the absolute coordinate is updated to the opposite direction from a movement.
4.9 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART

Overview
When machine processing is interrupted (by a reset operation or a power failure, for example), this
function restarts machine processing from the interruption point.
This function is optional.
This function consists of the following two processes:

(1) Restart point return process
The tool is positioned to the restart position at the rapid traverse rate.
(2) Restart point search process
A restart program is searched for, then the program is searched for the restart point by using stored data.
During the search operation, the tool does not move, but M/S/T/B codes, the press starts signal PF and
the external operation signal EF are output in the same manner as in normal program execution.
Moreover, this function prepares the following restarting methods:

<1> Restart from the interruption block
Move to the head position or the interruption position of interruption block, then restart machine
processing from there.
<2> Restart from the first block command the processing mode
Move to the position in which commanded the processing mode that is enabled at the interruption
point, then restart machine processing from there.
Tool
Positioning at selected
restart position
Program start position Arbitrary position

Restart point
（First M code for the processing mode）
N1
N2
N5
N3 N4
Manual intervention
Restart point
Restart point (interruption point)
（Head position of the
interruption block）
Operation
(1) During normal cutting program execution, the CNC stores current execution data (such as the pointer
to the executed block and coordinate data) in nonvolatile memory.
(2) Program execution is interrupted by a reset switch and so on. Alternatively, the power to the CNC is
turned off.
(3) After the power to the CNC is turned on again, reference position return is performed for all axes.
(This operation is unnecessary if the system is equipped with absolute-position detectors.)
(4) Restart point is selected by the restart position select signal RSRSEL.
(5) The restart switch is pressed after the MEM mode is set.
(6) The CNC positions the tool to the restart point (restart point return process).
- 472 -
(7) When the search process is completed, the CNC enters the feed hold state.
(8) Press the cycle start switch.
(9) The CNC restart program execution from the restart position. (This means that when a move
command is specified during program execution, the tool moves.)
- System variables
The search processing for program auto restart can be accelerated by the system variable (#6060) for
reading the execution state of the restart function and the system variable (#6061) for stopping the
counting of the number of execution blocks.
- Variable detail
System variable # 6060 and # 6061 for the program auto restart function are the system variables for the
custom macro.
Please add 100000 to the variable number, and refer by # 106060 and # 106061 when using it by the
execution macro.
Operating state of restart function #6060 (Read only)

Value of #6060 State
0 The normal operate
1 The program auto restart
The block that need not be searched at the restart operate , the subprogram, and the execution macro can
skip because it can judge the starting state of each restart function by adding it while programming the
macro control specification that uses #6060. As a result, it is possible to search for the program auto
restart at high speed.
NOTE
Please specified M code of the buffer ring stop immediately before #6060 is
used.
Execution block number count control #6061 (Read／Write)

Value of #6061 State
0 The number of execution blocks is counted.
Other than 0 The count of the number of execution blocks is stopped.
When the values other than 0 are set to #6061, CNC stops the count of the number of execution blocks for
the program auto restart function. The range is 0 to ±99999999.
In the program auto restart, when the number of execution blocks counted at nomal operate is
corresponding to the number of blocks which the search is executed at restart, and, the coordinate value in
the block is corresponding, it is judged the block that interrupted. Therefore, because it differs from the
number of execution blocks at normal operate when the block searching by using # 6060 is skipped, it is
not possible to find the breakpoint (restart point), alarm PS2090 occurs.
Specified the stop of the count of the number of execution blocks at normal operate by using #6061, The
block not counted by the skip at search, and the number of execution blocks can be made the same. Please
also use #6061 when you use #6060.
- Sample program
[Example 1] When you skip the specification that should not be executed at restart.
It judges whether restarting by #6060 when there is an specification that should not be executed at
restart, it diverges to N999 if it is restarting, and unnecessary processing is skipped. Please specified
M code of the buffer ring stop immediately before #6060 is used.
- 473 -
Moreover, because the number of execution blocks changes by having diverged, the values other
than 0 are set to #6061, and the count of the number of execution blocks is stopped.
O 9100;
#6061=#6061+1;
M 146; M c o d e o f th e b u ffe r rin g s to p
IF [# 6 0 6 0 N E 0 ]G O T O 9 9 9 ;
: T h e e xe c u tio n
M_ ; U n n e c e s s a ry p ro c e s s in g is b lo c k is n o t
M_ ; s k ip p e d a t re s ta rt. c o u n te d .
: It d o e s n 't c o u n t.
N 999;
# 6 0 6 1 = # 6 0 6 1 -1 ;
M 99;
[Example 2] When you stop the count of the number of execution blocks in the subprogram
At the program that changes whenever the judgment of the condition branching executes it
according to the condition of the signal etc., the values other than 0 are set to #6061, and the count
of the number of execution blocks is stopped.
O 1000;
G 9 0 G 0 0 X 1 0 0 .Y 1 0 0 .;
O 9200
M 98P 9200;
:
G 00X _Y _;
#6061=#6061+1;
:
IF [# 1 0 0 0 E Q 1 ]G O T O 1 0 0 T h e e xe c u tio n
:
: b lo c k is n o t
M 30
N 1 0 0 # 6 0 6 1 = # 6 0 6 1 -1 ; c o u n te d .
:
M99;
- Notes relate to #6060 and # 6061

(1) #6060 and #6061 become 0 at reset.
(2) It is not possible to specify like updating coordinates in the block where the count of the number of
execution blocks has been stopped by using #6061. There is such an specification, When the
program auto restart is executed, alarm (PS2090) "The interruption block is not found" occurred.
NOTE
(1) During the restart search process, coordinates (machine coordinates, relative coordinates, and
absolute coordinates) and coordinate systems (external workpiece origin offset, G92, G52, G54 to
G59) are changed to stored data. Therefore, care should be taken when a cycle start is performed
without re-executing restart processing after restart processing is interrupted (by a reset, feed hold,
and so on). In such a case, restart processing must be performed again by pressing the restart switch
in the reset state.
(2) If Ram-axis control is enable, the ram axis is not program auto restart
Before program auto restart, please operate it as follows.
- The ram axis is move to the top dead center.
- Press start lock signal PFL is changed to “1”. (After program auto restart is finished, press start
lock signal PFL is changed to “0”.)
- 474 -
4.10 RETRACE
Overview
The tool can retrace the path along which the tool has moved so far (reverse execution). Furthermore,
the tool can move along the retraced path in the forward direction (forward reexecution). After forward
reexecution is performed until the tool reaches the position at which reverse execution started,
machining is continued as programmed.
Procedure
- Forward execution → reverse execution
To perform forward execution of a program, set the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel
to off, then perform a cycle start operation. If the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel is
set to on, reverse execution or the end of reverse execution results.
To perform reverse execution of a program, use one of the following three methods:
(1) Set the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel to on during forward execution of a
block.
(2) Perform a single block stop operation during forward execution, then set the “REVERSE” switch on
the machine operator’s panel to on.
(3) Perform a feed hold stop operation during forward execution, then set the “REVERSE” switch on
the machine operator’s panel to on.
When method (1) is used, reverse execution starts after the end of the block being executed (after
execution up to the single block stop position). Reverse execution does not start as soon as the
“REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel is set to on.
"REVERSE" switch = ON
Forward
Cycle start (start of forward execution) Reverse
Start of reverse execution
Fig. 4.10 (a)
When method (2) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts reverse execution from the position at
which a single block stop takes place.
Single block stop
Cycle start
Cycle start (start of forward execution) Forward

Reverse
Fig. 4.10 (b)
When method (3) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts reverse execution from the position at
which a feed hold stop takes place.
- 475 -
Feed hold stop

Cycle start
Forward
Cycle start (start of forward execution)
Reverse
Fig. 4.10 (c)
- Reverse execution → forward reexecution

To perform forward reexecution of a program, use one of the following three methods:
(1) Set the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel to off during reverse execution of
a block.
(2) Set the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel to off after a single block stop
takes place during reverse execution.
(3) Set the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel to off after a feed hold stop takes
place during reverse execution.
When method (1) is used, forward reexecution starts after the block being executed ends (after execution
up to the position at which a single block stop takes place). Forward reexecution does not start as soon as
the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel is set to off.
Cycle start (start of forward execution) Forward
Reverse
Forward
reexecution
Start of forward "REVERSE" switch = OFF

reexecution
Fig. 4.10 (d)
When method (2) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts forward reexecution from the position
at which a single block stop takes place.
Restart of forward execution
Forward
Reverse
Start of forward reexecution Forward
reexecution
Fig. 4.10 (e)
When method (3) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts forward reexecution from the position
at which a feed hold stop takes place.

Feed hold stop
"REVERSE" switch = OFF Forward
Cycle start Reverse
reexecution
Fig. 4.10 (f)
- 476 -
- Reverse execution → end of reverse execution → forward reexecution

When a block to be executed is no longer present during reverse execution (when reverse execution has
been performed up to the block where forward execution started, or when forward execution has not yet
been performed), the reverse execution end state is entered, and operation stops.
Even when a cycle start operation is performed while the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s
panel is held on, operation is not performed, and the reverse execution end state is maintained. Forward
reexecution (or forward execution) is started by setting the “REVERSE” switch on the machine
operator’s panel to off then performing a cycle start operation.
End of reverse execution

"REVERSE" switch = Forward
OFF Reverse
Cycle start Start of forward reexecution Forward
reexecution
Fig. 4.10 (g)
- Forward reexecution → forward execution

After forward reexecution is performed up to the block at which reverse execution started, forward
execution starts automatically, and commands are read from the program again and executed. No
particular operation is required.
Cycle start (start of forward execution) Start of reverse execution
Restart of forward execution
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Start of forward reexecution reexecution
Fig. 4.10 (h)
If reverse execution was performed after feed hold stop, forward reexecution ends when the feed hold
stop position is reached, then forward execution is performed. Also if single block operation was
performed, forward reexecution ends at the single block stop position.
Feed hold stop
"REVERSE" switch = OFF, cycle start
Restart of forward execution Forward

Reverse
reexecution
Fig. 4.10 (i)
Explanation
- Reverse execution and forward execution
Usually in automatic operation, a program is executed in the programmed order. This is called forward
execution. This function allows a program executed by forward execution to be executed in the reverse
direction. This is called reverse execution. Reverse execution allows the tool to retrace the path along
which the tool has moved during forward execution.
Reverse execution of a program can be performed only for blocks that have been executed by forward
execution.
- 477 -
Furthermore, in single block operation, reverse execution can also be performed on a block-by-block
basis .
- Forward reexecution
Blocks that have been executed by reverse execution can be reexecuted in the forward direction up to the
block from which reverse execution started. This is called forward reexecution. Forward reexecution
allows the tool to retrace the same tool path as in forward execution until the position at which reverse
execution started is reached.
After the block from which reverse execution started is reached, the program is executed again in the
programmed order (forward execution).
Furthermore, in single block operation, forward reexecution can also be performed on a block-by-block
basis.
- End of reverse execution

When a block to be executed is no longer present during reverse execution (when stored blocks have all
been executed during reverse execution, or when forward execution has not yet been performed),
operation stops. This is called the end of reverse execution.
- Status indication
During reverse execution, characters "RVRS" blink on the screen. During forward reexecution, characters
"RTRY" blink to indicate that forward reexecution is in progress. The "RTRY" indication is kept blinking
until the block at which reverse execution started is reached and normal operation starts (until forward
execution is restarted).
When a block to be executed is no longer present during reverse execution, or if an attempt is made to
perform reverse execution for a block that cannot be executed by reverse execution, characters "RVED"
blink, notifying the user that reverse execution can no longer be performed.
- Number of blocks that can be executed by reverse execution

Up to about 100 blocks can be executed by reverse execution. Depending on the specified program, the
maximum number of executable blocks may decrease.
- Reset
A reset operation (the RESET key on the MDI unit, the external reset signal, or the reset & rewind signal)
clears the blocks stored for reverse execution.
- Feedrate
A feedrate to be applied during reverse execution can be specified in parameter No. 1414. If this
parameter is set to 0, the feedrate in reverse execution is assumed to be the same as that in forward
execution. Rapid traverse, however, is performed always at the rapid traverse rate, regardless of the
setting of this parameter.
The feedrate in forward reexecution is always the same as that in forward execution.
In reverse execution or forward reexecution, feedrate override, rapid traverse override, and dry run are
allowed.
- Start of reverse execution or forward reexecution after the end of a block

In a block for rapid traverse (G00), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), dwelling
(G04), skip cutting (G33), or an auxiliary function in an automatic operation mode (memory operation,
part program operation, or MDI operation), reverse execution or forward reexecution can be started.
However, reverse execution and forward reexecution do not start as soon as the reverse execution signal
status is changed. When the block has ended, that is, after a movement, dwelling, or an auxiliary function
is completed, reverse execution or forward reexecution starts.
- 478 -
- Start of reverse execution or forward reexecution after feed hold stop

When a feed hold stop operation is performed during execution of rapid traverse (G00), linear
interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), or skip cutting (G33), then the reverse execution
signal status is changed and operation is restarted, reverse execution or forward reexecution can be started
immediately from the stop position. This cannot be performed when dwelling (G04) or an auxiliary
function is being executed.
Start of feed hold Start of feed hold
"REVERSE" switch = OFF "REVERSE" switch = ON
Cycle start Cycle start
Start of
reverse
execution
End of reverse execution, start of forward reexecution
Fig. 4.10 (j)
When reverse execution is started after feed hold stop operation, the part from the start point of that block
to the feed hold stop position is stored as one block. Therefore, when forward reexecution is performed
with the single block switch set to 1, a single block stop takes place as soon as the position at which
reverse execution started is reached.
- Start of reverse execution or forward reexecution after single block stop

After a single block stop takes place, reverse execution or forward reexecution can be started immediately
when the reverse execution signal status is changed and restart operation is performed.
Limitation
- Blocks that cannot be executed by reverse execution
It is impossible to perform reverse execution for blocks specifying the commands listed below. If one of
these commands appears during reverse execution, reverse execution ends immediately and "RVED" is
displayed.
Some of these commands turn a mode on and off. It is possible to start reverse execution and perform
forward reexecution in a mode set by such a command. However, if a block that turns the mode on or off
is reached during reverse execution, the reverse execution ends at that block, and "RVED" is displayed.
• Functions related AI contour control (G05.1,G08)
• HRV3 on/off (G05.4)
• Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21)
• Stored stroke check on/off (G22, G23)
• Functions related reference position return (G28)
• Floating reference position return (G30.1)
• V code for multi-piece machining
• M code for the punch and laser switch
- Manual intervention
To execute a program in the reverse direction after a feed hold stop or single block stop, when manual
intervention is performed after the stop, make a return to the original position and then turn on the reverse
signal. Movement by manual intervention is ignored during reverse execution and forward reexecution.
If manual intervention is performed during reverse execution or forward reexecution, the amount of
manual intervention is added to the coordinate system at a restart after a stop due to a feed hold or single
block during forward execution after the end of forward reexecution. Whether to add the amount of
manual intervention follows the manual absolute switch.
- 479 -
- Single block stop position

A block that is internally generated by the control unit is also treated as one block during reverse
execution.
3 4
Path after compensation
Programmed path
5
1 <2>
<1>
Fig. 4.10 (k) Path when cutter compensation is applied
In the above example, the program specifies two blocks, but in actual operation, move commands for five
blocks are generated.
In such a case, positions at which a single block stop takes place may differ between forward execution
and reverse execution.
- Positioning (G00)
When non-linear type positioning is performed (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 0), the tool
path in reverse execution and that in forward execution do not match. The tool path in forward
reexecution is the same as that in forward execution.
When linear type positioning is performed (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1), the tool path in
reverse execution is the same as that in forward execution.
Non-linear type positioning Linear type positioning
(LRP = 0) (LRP = 1)
Y Forward
Reverse
X Forward reexecution
Fig. 4.10 (l)
- Dwell command (G04)

During reverse execution or forward reexecution, the dwell command (G04) is executed in the same way
as in normal operation.
- Programmable data input (G10)

Tool compensation values, parameters, pitch error data, workpiece origin offsets, and tool life
management values set or modified by programmable data input (G10) are ignored during reverse
execution and forward reexecution.
- Skip function (G33)

The skip signal is ignored during reverse execution and forward reexecution. During reverse execution
and forward reexecution, the tool moves along the path that the tool has actually passed during forward
execution.
- 480 -
Forward Reverse
reexecution execution
Signal not applied (G31)
(Programmed path)
Forward execution Skip signal ON (G31)

(Actual path)
Fig. 4.10 (m)
- Setup of a coordinate system (G92, G54 to G59, G52, and G92.1)

When setup of a coordinate system (G92, G54 to G59, and G52) is specified during reverse execution, the
indicated current position may differ from the position indicated during forward execution. However, the
actual machine position does not differ.
- Mirror image
When a block to which a mirror image is applied by programmable mirror image (G50.1, G51.1) is
executed during reverse execution, the tool moves along the actual path resulting from the application of a
mirror image in the reverse direction.
When a mirror image is applied to a block by setting or a machine signal, the block with the mirror image
not applied is stored. Mirror image application by setting or a machine signal is enabled also during
reverse execution and forward reexecution. Therefore, during reverse execution and forward reexecution,
the mirror image by setting data or machine signal must be turned on and off so that this on/off status and
the on/off status during forward execution match.
- Changing offsets
Even when cutter compensation data or tool length offsets are changed during reverse execution or
forward reexecution, the change in compensation or offset data does not become valid until forward
reexecution ends and normal operation starts. Until then, the tool moves with the offset data that was
applied when the block was executed for the first time during forward execution.
- Feedrate clamp
During reverse execution or forward reexecution, feedrate clamp is not performed with parameter No.
1420 (rapid traverse rate) or parameters Nos. 1430 and 1432 (maximum cutting feedrate). It is executed
with parameter No. 1414 or at the feedrate assumed during forward execution.
If, for example, the parameters above are set to smaller values during reverse execution or forward
reexecution, clamp is not performed with these values, but with parameter No. 1414 or at the feedrate
assumed during forward execution.
For clamp at the feedrate assumed during backward execution or forward reexecution, change the feedrate
with the external deceleration or override signal.
- Interrupt type custom macro

Do not initiate any interrupt during reverse execution.
Do not execute an interrupted block and the interrupt program in reverse execution.
- Auxiliary functions
M, S, T, and the second auxiliary function (B function) are output directly also during reverse execution
and forward reexecution.
When specified together with a move command in the same block, M, S, T, and the second auxiliary
function (B function) are output with the move command at the same time during forward execution,
reverse execution, and forward reexecution. Therefore, the output positions of M, S, T, and the second
auxiliary function (B function) during reverse execution differ from those during forward execution and
forward reexecution.
- 481 -
- Custom macro
Custom macro operations are ignored during reverse execution and forward reexecution.
- Execution macro (macro executor)

Macro executor operations are ignored during reverse execution and forward reexecution.
- AI contour control
When the reverse execution is started in AI contour control mode, a reverse execution ends immediately
depending on a program then the backward movement is not possible.
During reverse execution and forward reexecution, the feedrate clamp function by acceleration under AI
contour control is disabled.
- Display
During reverse execution and forward reexecution, the modal display and the display of the currently
executed program are not updated; information obtained at the start of reverse execution is maintained.
- Press operation
No punch operation is performed for a backward movement for one–cycle press/nibbling. A punch
operation is performed for a re–forward movement. Refer to the applicable manual issued by the machine
tool builder.
Warning
WARNING
1 Auxiliary functions are output directly even during reverse execution and forward
reexecution. Accordingly, the execution status of an auxiliary function during
forward execution may be reversed during reverse execution.
2 To perform reverse execution after a feed hold stop or single block stop
operation, be sure to restore the original position if manual intervention has been
performed after the stop , then set the "REVERSE" switch to on. Movements
made by manual intervention are ignored during reverse execution and forward
reexecution. (The same operation as in the manual absolute off state takes
place.)
If manual intervention is performed during reverse execution or forward
reexecution, the amount of manual intervention is added to the coordinate
system at a restart after a stop due to a feed hold or single block during forward
execution after the end of forward reexecution. Whether to add the amount of
manual intervention follows the manual absolute switch.
- 482 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION
5 TEST OPERATION
The following functions are used to check before actual machining whether the machine operates as
specified by the created program.
5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK...........................................................483

5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE .................................................................................................................484
5.3 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE ....................................................................................................485
5.4 DRY RUN.........................................................................................................................................486
5.5 SINGLE BLOCK ..............................................................................................................................487
5.6 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK FUNCTION ...........................................................................488
5.7 PUNCH .............................................................................................................................................490
5.8 MANUAL PUNCH...........................................................................................................................490
5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK

To display the change in the position without moving the tool, use machine lock.
There are two types of machine lock: all-axis machine lock, which stops the movement along all axes,
and specified-axis machine lock, which stops the movement along specified axes only. In addition,
auxiliary function lock, which disables M, S, T, and B (2nd auxiliary function) commands, is available
for checking a program together with machine lock.
Display unit
X
Y
Tool
Z ・・・・・
Workpiece The tool does not move but the

position along each axis changes on
the display.
Fig. 5.1 Machine lock
5.1.1 Machine Lock

Procedure
Press the machine lock switch on the operator's panel. The tool does not move but the position along each
axis changes on the display as if the tool were moving.
Some machines have a machine lock switch for each axis. On such machines, press the machine lock
switches for the axes along which the tool is to be stopped. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by
the machine tool builder for machine lock.
WARNING
The positional relationship between the workpiece coordinates and machine
coordinates may differ before and after automatic operation using machine lock.
In such a case, specify the workpiece coordinate system by using a coordinate
setting command or by performing manual reference position return.
- 483 -
5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64504EN/02
Limitation
- Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S, T, and B commands)
Machine lock applies only to move commands along controlled axes. Updating modal G codes or setting
a coordinate system is performed normally. M, S, T, and B (2nd auxiliary function) commands are also
performed normally.
- Reference position return under machine lock

When a G28 command is issued in the machine lock state, the command is accepted but the tool does not
move to the reference position and the reference position return LED does not go on.
- Selecting a machine coordinate system (G53)

When a positioning of machine coordinate system (G53) is specified in the machine lock state, move
commands are invalid and absolute coordinates and relative coordinates are not updated.
When machine lock is applied during G53 movement, output pulses (move commands) to the servo
motors are stopped and machine coordinates are not updated. The absolute and relative coordinates are
updated.
- High-speed program check function

During the high-speed program check mode, all-axis machine lock signal MLK and each-axis machine
lock signals MLK1 to MLK8 are invalid except for PMC control axis.
5.1.2 Auxiliary Function Lock

Procedure
Press the auxiliary function lock switch on the operator's panel. M, S, T, and B codes are disabled and not
executed. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for auxiliary function
lock.
Limitation
- M codes not locked by auxiliary function lock
M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, and M198 (subprogram call function) commands are executed even in
the auxiliary function lock state. M codes for calling a subprogram (parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079) and
those for calling a custom macro (parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089) are also executed.
5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE

A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%) selected by the override dial.
This feature is used to check a program.
For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specified in the program, setting the override dial to 50%
moves the tool at 50 mm/min.
Feedrate 100 mm/min

Tool
(Specified by programmed) Check the machining by
altering the feedrate from
Feedrate 50 mm/min after the value specified in the
feedrate override program.
Workpiece
Fig. 5.2 Feedrate override

- 484 -
Feedrate override
Procedure
Set the feedrate override dial to the desired percentage (%) on the machine operator's panel, before or
during automatic operation.
On some machines, the same dial is used for the feedrate override dial and jog feedrate dial. Refer to the
appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for feedrate override.
Limitation
- Override range
The override that can be specified ranges from 0 to 254%. For individual machines, the range depends on
the specifications of the machine tool builder.
5.3 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

An override of four steps (25%，50%，75%，100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate.
Tool Tool
Rapid traverse rate Rapid traverse rate

10m/min 5m/min
Override
50%
Fig. 5.3 Rapid traverse override
Rapid traverse override

Procedure
Select one of the four feedrates with the rapid traverse override switch during rapid traverse. Refer to the
appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for rapid traverse override.
Rapid traverse override Rapid traverse rate

switch on the machine Excluding
T, C axes
operator's panel T, C axes
100 100% 100%
75 75% 100%
50 50% 50%
25 25% 50%
When the bit (G0F) of parameter No. 16050 is set to 0, the number of one digit from 1 to 4 after F code
stated allows the rapid traverse rate in automatic operation is overridden.
One-digit F feed code Override by one-digit F feed code

F1 100%
F2 75%
F3 50%
F4 25%
- 485 -
Explanation
The following types of rapid traverse are available. Rapid traverse override can be applied for each of
them.
(1) Rapid traverse by G00
(2) Rapid traverse during using pattern function (G26, G76, G77, G78, or G79)
(3) Rapid traverse during positioning first press point in nibbling mode (G68, G69, or, nibbling by M
code).
(4) Rapid traverse by positioning and no press start (G70)
(5) Rapid traverse during using automatic repositioning (G75).
(6) Rapid traverse during using automatic Reference Position Return (G28).
For the T axis, the rate is 100% of the T–axis rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override switch is
set to 100 or 75, while the rate is 50% of the T–axis rapid traverse rate when the switch is set to 50 or 25.
However, the override is always set to 100% when bit 1(OVE) of parameter No.16844 is set to 1.
CAUTION
1 For the manual rapid traverse and rapid traverse in manual reference point return, the
rapid traverse override function is ineffective.
2 The rapid traverse rates in manual and automatic operation modes are separately
settable for each axis.
3 For the rapid traverse attained to each pitch from the first punch point to the last punch
point in nibbling function, the rapid traverse override is ineffective, and it is always fixed
to 100%.
4 Since whether the rapid traverse override is effected or not is judged when data are
read from the tape reader or memory into buffer storage, the traverse rate in the block
being executed or the block already in the buffer storage remain unchanged even when
the rapid traverse override switch has been changed.
5 Rapid traverse rate by F code cannot be used together with rapid traverse override by
F1–digit command
5.4 DRY RUN

The tool is moved at the feedrate specified by a parameter regardless of the feedrate specified in the
program. This function is used for checking the movement of the tool under the state that the workpiece is
removed from the table.
Tool
Fig. 5.4 Dry run
- 486 -
Dry run
Procedure
Press the dry run switch on the machine operator's panel during automatic operation.
The tool moves at the feedrate specified in a parameter. The rapid traverse switch can also be used for
changing the feedrate.
Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for dry run.
Explanation
- Dry run feedrate
The dry run feedrate changes as shown in the Table 5.4 according to the rapid traverse switch and
parameters.
Table 5.4
Rapid traverse Program command
switch Rapid traverse Cutting feed
ON Rapid traverse rate Dry run feedrate × Jvmax(*2)
OFF Dry run feedrate × JV, or rapid traverse rate (*1) Dry run feedrate × JV(*2)
Max. cutting feedrate.................................................................... Setting by parameter No.1430
Rapid traverse rate........................................................................ Setting by parameter No.1420
Dry run feedrate ........................................................................... Setting by parameter No.1410
(*1) Dry run feedrate × JV when bit 6 (RDR) of parameter No. 1401 is 1. Rapid traverse rate when
parameter RDR is 0.
JV Jog feedrate override
(*2) Clamped to the maximum cutting feedrate
Jvmax Maximum value of jog feedrate override
5.5 SINGLE BLOCK

Pressing the single block switch starts the single block mode. When the cycle start button is pressed in the
single block mode, the tool stops after a single block in the program is executed. Check the program in
the single block mode by executing the program block by block.
Cycle Cycle
Cycle start start
start
Tool
Stop after Stop after

punching operation punching operation
Workpiece
Y
Fig. 5.5 Single block
Single block
Procedure
(1) Turn the single block switch on the machine operator’s panel on.
(2) Press the cycle start button. The machine executes one block and stops.
(3) Press the cycle start button again. The machine executes the next one block and stops.
Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for single block execution.
- 487 -
Explanation
- Single block during a pattern function
G26 I10.0 J45.0 K8 ; #1, #2,…#8：The order of punching operation
#2
#3
#1
#4 θ #8
+X
Center of circle
#5 #7
#6
When single block stop has been made in #1, #2,

#3,･･･#7 the feed hold lamp lights.
When single block stop has been made in #8, the
feed hold lamp does not light.
- Subprogram call and single block

Single block stop is not performed in a block containing M98P_;. M99; or G65.
However, single block stop is even performed in a block with M98P_ or M99 command, if the block
contains an address other than O, N, P, L.
5.6 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK FUNCTION

When the cycle start button is pressed with the high speed program check mode set to be enabled, the
program syntax and stroke limit are checked without axis movement.
A program check is performed at the maximum speed that can be specified by the CNC, regardless of the
specified speed.
High speed program check

Procedure
(1) Perform position of the machine at the start position of the machining program in advance.
Set the workpiece coordinate system or tool compensation to the same state as in actual machining.
(2) Reset the CNC and press the high speed program check switch on the machine operator's panel to
enter the high speed program check mode. In the high speed program check mode, "PRG-CHK"
blinks at the lower-left of the CNC screen.
(3) Press the cycle start button to execute the program without axis movement. The feedrate is the
maximum speed that can be specified by the CNC, regardless of the specified speed.
The program syntax and stroke limit are checked during execution of the program.
(4) Upon completion of the check, reset the CNC and release the high speed program check mode with
the switch on the machine operator's panel.
- 488 -
Explanation
- Stroke Limit Check
Following the stroke limit check is executed without axes movements during the high speed program
check mode.
• Stored stroke check 1
• Stored stroke check 2, 3
• Stroke limit check before move
If an alarm about the stroke limit occurs in the high speed program check mode, clear the alarm as
described below.
(1) Change the mode to other than MEM or DNC.
(2) Reset the CNC.
WARNING
1 If the machine coordinate system is not established, a stroke limit check is not
performed correctly. When a reference position return is completed after
power-on, perform a high speed program check.
2 When the width of the prohibited area is small in a stored stroke limit 2 and 3
check, if a command to intersect the prohibited area in one block is issued, the
stroke limit may not be detected. This means that a program not causing a
stroke check alarm in a high speed program check may cause an alarm in actual
operation.
- Program Check Feedrate

During the high speed program check mode, the feedrate of program execution becomes the maximum
feedrate of CNC system regardless of the specified feedrate.
The feedrate clamp, override and dry run are not effective.
The execution speed of circular interpolation can be selected by bit 7 (PGF) of parameter No. 1490 from
the maximum speed and dry run speed.
NOTE
1 The execution time of dwell is the same as a normal operation.
2 The alarm PS011, “FEED ZERO ( COMMAND )” occurs when there is no F
command in a normal operation. However, it is executed at maximum speed
without the alarm in the high speed program check mode even if there is no F
command.
- Workpiece Coordinate System Preset

Upon completion of the high speed program check mode, the workpiece coordinate system is
automatically preset. This enables program operation without making a reference position return upon
completion of a program check. For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
WARNING
When the coordinate system is set before the high speed program check mode
is turned on by the work coordinate system setting G92 and the local coordinate
system setting G52, their setting values are deleted by the execution of the work
coordinate system preset.
- Machine Coordinate Display for Program Check

During the high speed program check mode, it is possible to change the display of machine coordinates
from the actual machine coordinates to the machine coordinates for the program check by setting bit 7
(PGM) of parameter No.11320.
- 489 -
And it is possible to change the display of machine coordinate for each axis from the actual machine
coordinate to the machine coordinate for the program check by setting bit 4 (PGA) of parameter No.3115.
- Tool life
If tool life management command or tool management command is specified during the high speed
program check mode, tool life is not counted.
- Commands not covered by a high speed program check

Auxiliary functions and other commands are not covered by a high speed program check. For details,
refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
5.7 PUNCH
This function makes punch (including nibbling) ineffective in a block where punching is made by press
motion during the tape or memory mode operation.
Punch is ineffective･･･OFF ON･･･Punch is effective
PUNCH
Fig.5.7
5.8 MANUAL PUNCH
Manual Punch
Fig.5.8
Explanation
When depressing this button, punching is made by press motion. When depressing this button again after
releasing it once, punching is made again.
Generally, when this button is depressed, while the punch ON/OFF switch in 5.8 is being set to ON,
punching executed, while if the switch is set to OFF, punching is not executed.
CAUTION
No punching is executed by depressing this button when the cycle start lamp is
lighting or during manual axis movement. Since effective conditions of this button
depend on the machine tool builders, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual.
- 490 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS
6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS
To immediately stop the machine for safety, press the Emergency stop button. To prevent the tool from
exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravel check and Stored stroke check are available. This chapter describes
emergency stop, overtravel check, and stored stroke check.
Chapter 6, "SAFETY FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
6.1 EMERGENCY STOP .......................................................................................................................491

6.2 OVERTRAVEL ................................................................................................................................491
6.3 STORED STROKE CHECK ............................................................................................................492
6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE....................................................................................495
6.5 STROKE LIMIT AREA CHANGING FUNCTION ........................................................................497
6.6 STORED STROKE LIMIT RANGE SWITCHING FUNCTION BY SIGNAL .............................498
6.7 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS...................................................................498
6.8 SAFETY ZONE CHECK .................................................................................................................512
6.9 WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE FUNCTION ......................................518
6.10 SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENSION (EIGHT AREAS) ...............................................................522
6.1 EMERGENCY STOP

If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator's panel, the machine movement stops in a
moment.
Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Fig. 6.1 Emergency stop
This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the machine tool builder, the button can
usually be unlocked by twisting it.
Explanation
EMERGENCY STOP interrupts the current to the motor.
Causes of trouble must be removed before the button is released.
6.2 OVERTRAVEL
When the tool reaches the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, it decelerates and stops because
of working the limit switch and an OVERTRAVEL alarm is displayed.
Deceleration
and stop Y
Tool
X
Stroke end Limit
switch
Fig. 6.2 Overtravel

- 491 -
6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64504EN/02
Explanation
- Overtravel during automatic operation
When the tool touches a limit switch along an axis during automatic operation, the tool is decelerated and
stopped along all axes and an overtravel alarm is displayed.
- Overtravel during manual operation

In manual operation, the tool is decelerated and stopped only along the axis for which the tool has
touched a limit switch. The tool still moves along the other axes.
- Releasing overtravel
Press the reset button to reset the alarm after moving the tool to the safety direction by manual operation.
For details on operation, refer to the operator's manual of the machine tool builder.
Alarm
Table6.2
Alarm No. Message Description
The stroke limit switch in the positive direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke end.
+ OVERTRAVEL
OT0506 When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped during
( HARD )
automatic operation. During manual operation, only the feed of the axis
on which the alarm occurred is stopped.
The stroke limit switch in the negative direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke end.
OT0507 - OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped during
automatic operation. During manual operation, only the feed of the axis
on which the alarm occurred is stopped.
6.3 STORED STROKE CHECK

Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2,
and stored stroke check 3.
Stored stroke check 3
Stored
stroke
check 2
Stored stroke check 1
: Forbidden area for the tool
Fig. 6.3 (a) Stroke check
The following shows the areas which the tool cannot enter for each stored stroke check.
• Stored stroke check 1: Outside
• Stored stroke check 2: Outside or inside (switchable)
- 492 -
• Stored stroke check 3: Inside

When the tool moves into the forbidden area, an alarm is displayed and the tool is decelerated and
stopped.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved in the reverse
direction from which the tool came.
The stored stroke check 2 and 3 functions are optional.
Explanation
- Stored stroke check 1
Parameters (Nos. 1320, 1321 or Nos. 1326, 1327) set boundary. Outside the area of the set limits is a
forbidden area. The machine tool builder usually sets this area as the maximum stroke.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved in the reverse
direction from which the tool came.
At this time, a signal (overtravel alarm signal) can be output to the PMC if bit 6 (OTS) of parameter No.
1301 is set to 1. In addition, when the tool enters the forbidden area during manual operation, the signal
(overtravel alarm signal) can be output to the PMC without generating the alarm by setting bit 1 (NAL) of
parameter No. 1300 to 1. With this parameter setting, the alarm is generated when the tool enters the
forbidden area during automatic operation.
CAUTION
1 If the two points for specifying a forbidden area are identical, all areas are
handled as forbidden areas for stored stroke check 1.
2 The size of a forbidden area must be set carefully. If the size is set incorrectly,
the stroke becomes infinite.
- Stored stroke check 1 area expansion

Stored stroke check 1 area expansion enables definition of eight areas using parameters Nos. 1350 to
1361.
NOTE
The basic notes are the same as those of stored stroke check 1.

Parameters Nos. 1322, 1323 or commands set these boundaries. Inside or outside the area of the limit can
be set as the forbidden area. Bit 0 (OUT) of parameter No. 1300 selects either inside or outside as the
forbidden area.
In case of program command a G22 command forbids the tool to enter the forbidden area, and a G23
command permits the tool to enter the forbidden area.
Each of G22; and G23; should be commanded independently of another commands in a block.
The command in the Fig. 6.3 (b) creates or changes the forbidden area:
G22 X_Y_I_J_;
(X, Y)
(I, J)
X>I, Y>J
Fig. 6.3 (b) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a program
- 493 -
When setting the area by parameters, points A and B in the Fig. 6.3 (c) must be set.
A(X1, Y1)
B(X2, Y2)
X1>X2, Y1>Y2
Fig. 6.3 (c) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters
The values X1, Y1, X2, and Y2, which are set by parameters Nos. 1322 and 1323, must be specified by
the distance from the machine coordinate system (machine unit). The values X, Y, I, and J, which are set
by a G22 command, must be specified by the distance in the least input increment (input unit).
Values set by a program are then converted in the machine increment and the values are set as the
parameters.

Set the boundary with parameters Nos. 1324 and 1325. The area inside the boundary becomes the
forbidden area. The values X1, Y1, X2, and Y2 must be set as coordinates (machine unit) in the machine
coordinate system.
CAUTION
1 If the two points for specifying a forbidden area are identical, all areas are
handled as movable areas in case of stored stroke check 2 that the inside area
is forbidden (bit 0 (OUT) of parameter No. 1300 = 0), or stored stroke check 3.
And all areas except the specified point are handled as forbidden areas in case
of stored stroke check 2 that the outside area is forbidden (the parameter OUT =
1).
2 Even if the two points for specifying a forbidden area are erroneously set, the
rectangular parallelepiped having the points as vertices is assumed as a
boundary.
3 Since an axis without the reference position return function has no forbidden
areas, there are no alarms about forbidden areas for the axis.
- Forbidden area overlapping

Area can be set in piles.
Setting the forbidden area overlapping
Fig. 6.3 (d) Setting the forbidden area overlapping
Unnecessary limits should be set beyond the machine stroke.
- Condition under which each check is enabled

Each check becomes effective after the power is turned on and manual reference position return or
automatic reference position return by G28 has been performed.
After the power is turned on, if the reference position is in the forbidden area of each limit, an alarm is
generated immediately. (Only in G22 mode for stored stroke check 2).
- 494 -
- Releasing the alarms

If the enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved only in the backward
direction. To cancel the alarm, move the tool backward until it is outside the forbidden area and reset the
system. When the alarm is canceled, the tool can be moved both backward and forward.
- Change from G23 to G22 in a forbidden area

When G23 is switched to G22 in the forbidden area, the following results.
<1> When the forbidden area is inside, an alarm is informed in the next move.
<2> When the forbidden area is outside, an alarm is informed immediately.
- Timing for displaying an alarm

In stored stroke check 1/2/3, parameter BFA (bit 7 of No. 1300) selects whether an alarm is displayed
immediately before the tool enters the forbidden area or immediately after the tool has entered the
forbidden area.
Alarm
Number Message Description
OT0500 + OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1) A movement in the positive direction exceeded stored stroke check 1.
OT0501 - OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1) A movement in the negative direction exceeded stored stroke check 1.
6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE

During automatic operation, before the movement specified by a given block is started, whether the tool
enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 is checked by determining the position
of the end point from the current position of the machine and a specified amount of travel. If the tool is
found to enter the forbidden area defined by a stored stroke limit, the tool is stopped immediately upon
the start of movement for that block, and an alarm is displayed.
- 495 -
WARNING
Whether the coordinates of the end point, reached as a result of traversing the
distance specified in each block, are in a forbidden area is checked. In this case,
the path followed by a move command is not checked. However, if the tool
enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3, an alarm is
issued. (See the examples below.)
Example 1)
Forbidden area defined by stored stroke

check 1 or 2
End point
Start point
The tool is stopped at point a according to stored stroke

check 1 or 2.
check 1 or 2
End point
Immediately upon movement commencing from the start

point, the tool is stopped to enable a stroke limit check
before moving to be performed before movement.
Example 2)
Forbidden area defined by stored stroke End point

check 2 or 3
Start point The tool is stopped at point a according to stored

stroke check 2 or 3.

check 2 or 3
End
point
Immediately upon movement commencing from the start

point, the tool is stopped to enable a stroke limit check
before moving to be performed before movement.
Explanation
When a stroke limit check before moving is performed, whether to check the movement performed by a
G33 (skip) block can be determined using (bit 2 (NPC) of parameter No. 1301).
- 496 -
Limitation
- Machine lock
If machine lock is applied at the start of movement, no stroke limit check made before movement is
performed.
- G23
When stored stroke check 2 is disabled (G23 mode), no check is made to determine whether the tool
enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 2.
- Manual intervention following a feed hold stop

When the execution of a block is restarted after manual intervention following a feed hold stop, no alarm
is issued even if the end point following a manual intervention is within a forbidden area.
- A block consisting of multiple operations

If a block consisting of multiple operations is executed, an alarm is issued at the start point of any
operation whose end point falls within an inhibited area.
- PMC axis control

No check is made for a movement based on PMC axis control.
Alarm
Table 6.4 Alarm
The block end point was found in the + side stroke limit
OT0510 + OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) prohibition area during a stroke check before movement.
Modify the program.
The block end point was found in the - side stroke limit
OT0511 - OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) prohibition area during a stroke check before movement.
Modify the program.
6.5 STROKE LIMIT AREA CHANGING FUNCTION

Overview
This function can be used to rewrite the parameters that set the + side coordinate value and the - side
coordinate values of the stroke limits even when the axis is traveling. The new stroke limit range is
enabled immediately after the parameters are rewritten. The rewritable parameters are shown below.
• Parameter No. 1320
Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the positive direction on each axis
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negative direction on each axis
Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
- 497 -
The machining cycle time can be reduced because this function can rewrite parameters even if some axes
are moving. This function is optional.
Limitation
- Axis synchronous control
This function is disabled when the automatic slave axis parameter setting is enabled (bit 4 (SYP) of
parameter No. 8303 = 1) in feed axis synchronous control. (Writing to the parameters is allowed only
when all axes are stopped.)
Note
NOTE
If the parameters are rewritten so that the current position is included in a
forbidden area during axis movement, the axis decelerates and stops, and an
alarm is displayed. If an alarm occurs when the tool enters a forbidden area, the
tool can move only opposite to the direction from which the tool came. After
moving it outside the forbidden area in the opposite direction, release the alarm
with a reset. When the alarm is released, the tool can move in both directions.
6.6 STORED STROKE LIMIT RANGE SWITCHING FUNCTION

BY SIGNAL
Overview
The range stored stroke limit can be switched by input signal of PMC. Therefore, the range stored stroke
limit can easily be set again.
Note
NOTE
1 Stroke limit check before move also becomes effective in the switched area.
2 The range of stored stroke limit returns to the state set to the parameter at power
on.
3 Stored stroke check 1 area expansion (coordinate value III - VIII) cannot be
rewritten by this function.
4 When the range of stored stroke limit is switched by this function, even if the
parameters (No.1320-No.1327) are rewritten by the G10 instruction, the PMC
window, and the G22 instruction, it is not effective immediately.
5 Stroke limit area changing function is a function to rewrite the parameter
(No.1320-No.1327). This function is a function that switches the range of stroke
limit to the value that is set to data table (D) of PMC without rewriting the
parameter (No.1320-No.1327).
6.7 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS

An improper tool offset setting or an improper operation of the machine can result in the tool being
damaged. Also, if data is lost due to an operation mistake, it takes extra time to recover from the mistake.
The operation confirmation functions described below are meant to prevent the operator from performing
any unintended operation (hereinafter referred to as an improper operation).
1 Functions that are used when data is set
• Data check to verify that the offset data is within the valid setting range
• Incremental input operation confirmation
- 498 -
• Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key to prevent any improper absolute or
incremental input operation
• Confirmation of any operation of deleting the program or all data
• Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
2 Functions that are used when the program is executed
• Highlighting of updated modal information
• Display of the executed block status prior to the program execution
• Display of the axis status, such as the mirror image function enabled or the interlock function
enabled
• Check for starting from the middle of the program
• Data check to verify that the offset data is within the effective setting range
• Maximum incremental value check
6.7.1 Functions that are Used When Data is Set

The following functions are provided to prevent improper operations when data is set.
• Input data range check
• Confirmation of incremental input
• Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
• Confirmation of the deletion of the program
• Confirmation of the deletion of all data
Set these functions on the operation confirmation function setting screen. For the input data range check,
set a valid input data range, e.g. the upper and lower limits, for each input screen. For the other functions,
specify whether to enable or disable them.
For information about how to display the individual setting screens, how to manipulate them, and other
details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting screen” that describes the operation procedures.
6.7.1.1 Input data range check

This function allows an effective data range to be set and checks whether the input data is within the set
range.
Input data range check

Explanation
- Outline of the input data range check
This function allows an effective data range to be set for the data of each input screen listed later and
checks whether the input data is within the set range. If the input data is out of the effective data range,
the warning message "DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" is displayed and the data is rejected.
For example, assume that the effective data range for a certain tool offset number is set to -200. to 200,
and that you are going to input 100.[INPUT]. Even if you inadvertently press the 0 key one more time,
resulting in 1000.[INPUT], the input of 1000. is not accepted.
The function detects a setting mistake and prevents the program from running with invalid data.
- Input screens for which this function is effective

• Tool compensation
• Workpiece origin offset
- 499 -
- Settings
To enable this function, set an effective data range for each input screen on the operation confirmation
function setting screen. For information about how to display the individual setting screens, how to set
data ranges, and other details, see the items that describe the setting of the data ranges.
If the set data range is invalid, no data input is accepted. Correct the data range setting, and then input
data.
- Disabling the function

The input data range check is disabled if you make any of the following settings on the operation
confirmation function setting screen.
• Both the upper and lower limit values for the tool offset number or workpiece coordinate system are
0.
• The upper and lower limit values for each offset are identical.
- Messages displayed during the input data range check

When the cursor moves into an input field of an input screen, one of the messages and warning messages
in the Table 6.7.1.1 (a) or Table 6.7.1.1 (b) is displayed. No message is displayed when the input data
range check is disabled.
When the set effective data range is valid

Table 6.7.1.1 (a) List of messages displayed 1
Input data status Message Color
The data in the input field is within the range. Input range xxx - xxx Black
The data in the input field is out of the range. Input range xxx - xxx Red
xxx: Upper and lower limit values
When the set effective data range is invalid

Table 6.7.1.1 (b) List of messages displayed 2
Range check status Message Color
Tool offset number overlap NG SETTING (OFFSET NUM OVERLAP) Red
Workpiece coordinate system overlap NG SETTING (WORK COORD VAL OVERLAP) Red
Invalid upper and lower limit values NG SETTING (U-LMT AND L-LMT ILLEGAL) Red
The message "NG SETTING (U-LMT AND L-LMT ILLEGAL)" is displayed in the following cases:
• The upper and lower limit values are reversed.
• The values are not effective (e.g., more pairs of offset numbers than allowed are set).
• Either of the tool offset numbers is 0.
- Range check for data changed by G10 or system variable

If the data changed by G10 or system variable is out of the effective data range, the alarm PS0334
"OFFSET DATA OUT OF RANGE" is displayed.
6.7.1.2 Confirmation of incremental input

This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to input an incremental value by using
the [+INPUT] soft key.
Confirmation of incremental input

Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of incremental input
This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to input an incremental value by using
the [+INPUT] soft key in any of the input screens listed below. It lets you confirm whether you really
want to change data or not before making that change.
- 500 -
For example, when you set 5.[+INPUT] for 10., the message "15. INPUT OK?" is displayed.
The function prevents improper absolute or incremental input operations.
NOTE
This function cannot be used to input two or more values consecutively by
delimiting them by semicolons (;).

• Settings
• Parameter
• Pitch error compensation
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "INCREMENTAL INPUT"
box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set
the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of
the operation confirmation function.
6.7.1.3 Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key

This function prohibits the absolute input using the [INPUT] soft key.
Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key

Explanation
- Outline of the prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
This function prohibits the absolute input by the [INPUT] soft key in the input screens listed later.
It prevents improper absolute or incremental input operations by requiring that the absolute input be made
using the MDI key and that the incremental input be made using the [+INPUT] soft key.

- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "DISABLED
SOFTKEY[INPUT] IN" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the
setting screen, how to set the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting”
that describes the setting of the operation confirmation function.
6.7.1.4 Confirmation of the deletion of the program

This function displays the confirmation message "DELETE PROGRAM ?" when you attempt to delete
the program.
- 501 -
Confirmation of the deletion of the program

Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of the deletion of the program
When you attempt to delete the program, this function displays the confirmation message "DELETE
PROGRAM ?" It lets you confirm whether you really want to delete the program or not before executing
the deletion.
The function prevents the program from being deleted due to an improper operation.
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "PROGRAM DELETE" box
to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set the
function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of the
operation confirmation function.
6.7.1.5 Confirmation of the deletion of all data

This function displays the confirmation message "DELETE ALL DATA?" when you attempt to delete all
data.
Confirmation of the deletion of all data

Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of the deletion of all data
When you attempt to delete all data on the input screen described later, this function displays the
confirmation message "DELETE ALL DATA?". It lets you confirm whether you really want to delete all
data or not before executing the deletion.
The function prevents all data from being deleted due to an improper operation.

- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "ALL DATA DELETE" box
6.7.1.6 Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process

This function displays the [CAN] and [EXEC] soft keys for confirmation when you attempt to update the
data of an input screen during the data setting process.
Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process

Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
When you input data in input screen during the data setting process, this function displays the [CAN] and
[EXEC] soft keys for confirmation. It lets you confirm whether you really want to update the data or not
before executing the update.
The function prevents set values from being lost due to an improper operation.
- 502 -
If you input data using the [+INPUT] soft key when the confirmation of incremental input is enabled, a
message is displayed to confirm the incremental input.
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "INPUT IN SETTING" box
6.7.2 Functions that are Used when the Program is Executed

Overview
The following functions are provided to prevent improper operations when the program is executed.
• Display of updated modal information
• Start check signal
• Axis status display
• Confirmation of the start from a middle block
• Data range check
• Maximum incremental value check
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, specify whether to enable or disable these functions
individually.
For information about how to display the setting screen, how to manipulate it, and other details, see the
item “Operation confirmation setting screen” that describes the operation procedures.
6.7.2.1 Display of updated modal information

This function allows modal information updated by the NC command or RESET to be highlighted in the
modal information display for the current block.
Display of updated modal information

Explanation
- Outline of the display of updated modal information
This function allows modal information updated by the NC command or RESET to be highlighted in the
modal information display for the current block.
For example, when an absolute command has been changed to an incremental command or when the
workpiece coordinate system has been initialized by RESET, the function displays the changed part of the
data in an easy-to-recognize manner, in order to prevent improper operations during the execution of the
program.
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "UPDATE MODAL
HIGHLIGHT DISPLAY" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the
setting screen, how to set the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting”
that describes the setting of the operation confirmation function.
6.7.2.2 Start check signal

This function displays the remaining amount of travel and modal information of the block to be executed
and puts the program to a temporary halt before the program is executed.
- 503 -
Start check signal

Explanation
- Outline of the start check signal
When a cycle start is made with the start check signal STCHK <G0408.0> set to 1, the function displays
the remaining amount of travel and modal information of the block to be executed and puts the program
to a temporary halt. Making the cycle start again resumes the execution of the program.
The function lets you check the status of the block before executing it, thus helping to prevent improper
operations at the time of execution.
Using this function in combination with the updated modal information display function described in the
preceding subsection makes it easier to check the status of the block to be executed.
- Settings
This function does not require any setting on the operation confirmation function setting screen.
6.7.2.3 Axis status display

This function displays the axis status to the left of the axis name in the coordinate display screen.
Axis status display

Explanation
- Outline of the axis status display
This function displays the axis status to the left of the axis name in the display of the machine coordinates,
absolute coordinates, relative coordinates, and remaining travel amounts.
For example, when the mirror image function is enabled for the X1 axis, the absolute coordinates are
displayed as follows.
ABSOLUTE
M X1 10.000
Y1 10.000
C1 0.000
By displaying the axis status as shown above, the function prevents improper operations at the time of
execution.
- Axis status indication

The axis status is indicated as follows. These indications are listed in order of priority.
AXIS DETACH :D
INTERLOCK :I
MACHINE LOCK :L
SERVO OFF :S
AXIS MOVING :*
MIRROR IMAGE :M
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "AXIS STATUS DISPLAY"
box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set
the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of
the operation confirmation function.
- 504 -
6.7.2.4 Confirmation of the start from a middle block

This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to execute a memory operation with the
cursor placed on a block in the middle of the program.
Confirmation of the start from a middle block

Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of the start from a middle block
This function displays the confirmation message "START FROM MIDDLE OF PROG
(START/RESET)" when you attempt to execute a memory operation with the cursor placed on a block in
the middle of the program. It lets you confirm whether you really want to start execution from that block
or not before executing the program.
The function prevents you from inadvertently making a cycle start from a block in the middle of the
program.
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "START FROM MIDDLE
OF PROGRAM" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting
screen, how to set the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that
describes the setting of the operation confirmation function.
- Multi-path system
The operation of the reconfirmation of the start from a middle block in a multi-path system is determined
with the setting of bit 0 (MSC) of parameter No. 10335.
For example, if a cycle start is executed on two paths simultaneously in the program below, the operation
is as given in Table 6.7.2.4.
Program for path 1 Program for path 2
O1000 ; Cursor O1000 ;
G90 G28 X100.Y100. ; G90 G28 X100.Y100. ;
G91 G00 X50. ; G91 G00 X50. ;
: :
: :
: :
: :
M02 M02
Table 6.7.2.4 Operation in a multi-path system

Bit 0 (MSC) of parameter No. 10335
Memory operation Confirmation message
Path 1 Path 2
0 0
0 1 Starts on path 1 only. Displayed for both path.
1 0
1 1 Does not start on either path. Displayed for both path.
To reconfirm the start from a middle block between paths, set bit 0 (MSC) of parameter No. 10335 to 1
for each path.
- 505 -
NOTE
If bit 0 (MSC) of parameter No. 10335 for each path is 1, a cursor position check
is not performed on the path on which memory operation is in progress. For
example, in the case below, if a cycle start is executed on path 1, a cursor
position check is not performed on path 2.
Path 1: Reset state Path 2: Memory operation in progress

O1000 ; O1000 ;
Cursor
G90 G28 X100.Y100. ; G90 G28 X100.Y100. ;
G91 G00 X50. ; G91 G00 X50. ;
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
M02 M02
6.7.2.5 Data range check

This function lets you set an effective data range and check whether the data to be used for execution is
within the set range.
Data range check

Explanation
- Outline of the data range check
This function lets you set an effective data range for each data item listed later and check whether the data
to be used for execution is within the set range. If the data is out of the effective range, the alarm PS0334
"OFFSET DATA OUT OF EFFECTIVE RANGE" is displayed.
The function detects data setting mistakes and prevents the program from running with invalid data.
- Data for which this function is effective

NOTE
To use this function, you need to set each effective data range correctly. For
information about how to set the data ranges, see the item “Effective value range
for each data”.
6.7.2.6 Maximum incremental value check

This function checks the maximum incremental value specified for each axis by the NC command.
Maximum incremental value check

Explanation
- Outline of the maximum incremental value check
When the maximum incremental value is specified by the NC command described later, make sure that
the absolute value of the travel distance by the incremental command does not exceed the specified value.
If the specified value is exceeded, the alarm PS0337 "EXCESS MAXIMUM INCREMENTAL VALUE"
is displayed.
- 506 -
A maximum incremental value can be specified on a per-axis basis and remains effective until 0 is set or
the value is reset.
For example, when AI contour control is used, the function checks whether the amount of movement
between blocks is kept to the specified value or less. Through this process, it detects erroneous program
settings and prevents the program from running with invalid data.
- Format
The format of the NC command used to specify the maximum incremental value is as follows.
G91.1 IP_ ;
IP_ ; Maximum incremental value
(To cancel the maximum incremental value check, set 0.)
6.7.3 Setting Screen

This section describes how to display the operation confirmation function setting screen and how to set
the individual data items on this screen.
The operation confirmation function setting screen allows you to set the following items:
• Enabling or disabling each operation confirmation function
• Effective value range for the tool offset
• Effective value range for the workpiece origin offset
6.7.3.1 Operation confirmation function setting screen

This screen displays the enable/disable setting status of the following operation confirmation functions
and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the operation confirmation
function setting screen.)
• Confirmation of incremental input
• Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
• Confirmation of the deletion of the program
• Confirmation of the deletion of all data
• Display of updated modal information
• Axis status display
• Confirmation of the start from a middle block
Displaying and setting the operation confirmation function setting screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key at the right edge of the screen several times until the [GUARD]
soft key is displayed.
3 Press the [GUARD] soft key. The setting screen that was displayed last with relation to any
operation confirmation function is displayed (the operation confirmation function setting screen is
the first such screen that appears after the system is restarted).
4 If any screen other than the operation confirmation function setting screen is displayed, press the
[GUARD] soft key. The operation confirmation function setting screen is displayed.
- 507 -
Fig. 6.7.3.1 Operation confirmation function setting screen
5 Move the cursor to the check box of the item you want to change the setting, by pressing the ,
, , and keys.
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
7 Press the soft key [ON:1] or [OFF:0]. When you press the [ON:1] soft key, a check mark (✓)
appears in the corresponding check box, indicating that the function is enabled. When you press the
[OFF:0] soft key, the check mark disappears from the check box, indicating that the function is
disabled.
Explanation
- Items to be set
The Table 6.7.3.1 shows what is displayed for each item to be set and the corresponding functions. The
items whose column of "Default" is marked by "○" is effective automatically after memory all clear.
Table 6.7.3.1
Displayed item Default Corresponding function
INCREMENTAL INPUT ○ Confirmation of incremental input
DISABLED SOFTKEY[INPUT] IN Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key (tool offset, Y-axis
TOOL OFFSET, WORK SHIFT tool offset (lathe system), and work shift (lathe system))
DISABLED SOFTKEY[INPUT] IN Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key (workpiece origin
WORK COORDINATES offset)
PROGRAM DELETE ○ Confirmation of the deletion of the program
ALL DATA DELETE ○ Confirmation of the deletion of all data
INPUT IN SETTING Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
UPDATE MODAL HIGHLIGHT ○ Display of updated modal information
DISPLAY
AXIS STATUS DISPLAY ○ Axis status display
START FROM MIDDLE OF ○ Confirmation of the start from a middle block
PROGRAM
6.7.3.2 Tool offset range setting screen

This screen displays the setting status of tool offset effective data ranges and lets you change their
settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the tool offset range setting screen.)
- 508 -
Up to 20 pairs of numbers can be specified to identify tool offset number ranges, and an effective offset
value range can be defined for each of these 20 pairs.
Displaying and setting the tool offset range setting screen

Procedure
4 If any screen other than the tool offset range setting screen is displayed, press the [OFFSET] soft key.
The tool offset range setting screen is displayed. What is displayed in this screen differs depending
on the system configuration described later.
Fig. 6.7.3.2 Tool offset range setting screen

6 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, , ,
, and keys, or the [SWITCH] soft key.

7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press the [INPUT] soft key.
If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is
not performed normally and the input data is rejected.
• There is a tool offset number overlap.
• The values are not effective (e.g., more pairs of offset numbers than allowed are set).
• Either of the tool offset numbers is 0.
Also, the input data range check is invalidated in the following cases.
• Both the upper and lower limit values for the tool offset number are 0.
• The upper and lower offset limit values are identical.
- 509 -
Explanation
- System configuration
It is possible to set depending on the following system configurations:
• Tool offset memory A
- What to set with tool offset memory A

With tool offset memory A, an effective data range is specified using the four items in the Table 6.7.3.2.
Table 6.7.3.2
Displayed item What to set
FROM
RANGE Specify a tool offset number range.
TO
LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range in connection with a specified tool offset
-
UP-LIMIT number range.
In the case of this configuration, all the information needed to set an input data range cannot be displayed
in a single screen page. Set the information while switching pages using the [SWITCH] soft key. The
screen provides an indication that lets you know which part of the information is currently displayed.
- Example of setting an input data range

For example, suppose that the following values are set with offset memory A.
FROM : TO LOW-LIMIT : UP-LIMIT
1 : 20 0.000 : 100.000
In this case, the tool offset input screen accepts only offset values from 0.000 to 100.000 for offset
numbers 1 to 20.
If you attempt to input any other value, the warning message "DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" is displayed.
6.7.3.3 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen

This screen displays the setting status of workpiece origin offset and external workpiece origin offset
effective data ranges and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the
workpiece origin offset range setting screen.)
Up to six pairs of values can be specified to identify workpiece coordinate ranges for the workpiece
origin offset, and an effective offset value range can be defined for each of the axes of these six pairs.
As for the external workpiece origin offset, an effective offset value range can be specified for each axis.
Displaying and setting the workpiece origin offset range setting screen
Procedure
4 If any screen other than the workpiece origin offset range setting screen is displayed, press the
[WORK] soft key. The workpiece origin offset range setting screen is displayed.
- 510 -
Fig. 6.7.3.3 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen

6 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, or , ,
, and keys.
7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press the [INPUT] soft key.
If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is
not performed normally and the input data is rejected.
• There is a workpiece coordinate overlap.
• The values are not effective (e.g., an invalid workpiece coordinate system is set).
• The upper limit value is set for the workpiece coordinate system when 0 is set for the lower limit
value.
Also, the input data range check is invalidated in the following cases.
• Both the upper and lower limit values for the workpiece coordinate system are 0.
• The upper and lower limit values for each offset are identical.
Explanation
- What to set for the workpiece origin offset
For the workpiece origin offset, an effective data range is specified using the four items in the Table
6.7.3.3 (a).
Table 6.7.3.3 (a)
FROM
RANGE Specify a workpiece coordinate system range.
TO
AXIS LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid offset value range in connection with a specified workpiece
NAME UP-LIMIT coordinate system range.
- What to set for the external workpiece origin offset

For the external workpiece origin offset, an effective data range is specified using the two items in the
Table 6.7.3.3 (b).
- 511 -
Table 6.7.3.3 (b)

AXIS LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid external workpiece origin offset value range on each axis.
NAME UP-LIMIT
6.8 SAFETY ZONE CHECK

This is the safety function to set the safety zone for protecting the workpiece holder that holds the
workpiece set on the carriage, and disable punching in that area or forbid the tool to approach thereinto.
Workpiece
Tool
Tool figure area(#0)

Safety zone (#1 to #4)
Workpiece holder
Carriage
Fig.6.8 Outline
This function permits to set tool figure area (#0) and up to four safety zones (#1 - #4), as shown above.
Type A and type B of safety zone check are prepared.
6.8.1 Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area (Type

A)
The safety zone is settable in two types, punch forbidden area and approach forbidden area, that are set by
the parameter SZ1 to SZ4 (No. 16501#0 - #3) shown below.
(1) Punch forbidden area

When the tool figure area goes into the safety zone and the punching is commanded, an alarm
(DS4800 to DS4803) is given to disable punching. In the case of positioning & punching command
in the automatic operation mode, when the end point of positioning is in the punch forbidden area,
an alarm is given without moving the axis. (Previous check)
In the case of move command without punching, the tool figure area can go into the punch forbidden
area, but manual punching is impossible after going into this area.
- 512 -
Tool figure area
Safety zone(#1)
Carriage
Fig.6.8.1 (a) Punch forbidden area (Type A)
2) Approach forbidden area

The tool figure area can not go into the safety zone. When the tool figure area approaches into the
safety zone by the move command, the axis is immediately stopped and an alarm (DS4810 to
DS4817, DS4830 to DS4837) is given. This is valid in either manual or automatic operation mode.
Tool figure area (#0)
Safety zone (#2)

※Axis stops, and alarm
is given.
Carriage
Fig.6.8.1 (b) Approach forbidden area (TypeA)
6.8.2 Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area (Type

B)
Overview
By setting bit 0 (SF0) of parameter No. 16500, the type B safety zone check can be selected. With type B,
no alarm is issued even if a tool enters a safety zone; after confirming the safety of the situation, the
operator can perform a punch operation, or can position the tool to the next punching position without
performing punching.
With type B, all safety zones are handled as punch forbidden areas.
If the tool enters a safety zone, the punch–forbidden area–entered signal WDD0, used to provide
notification that the tool has entered a punch forbidden area, is set to 1 in the punch block. When
punching is to be performed in a punch–forbidden area, punch–enable signal WDC is set to 1 after the
operator confirms that punching can be performed safely. After detecting the WDC signal, the CNC sets
the PF signal to 1.
When punching is not to be performed in a punch forbidden area, the press activation lock signal PFL is
set to 1. Upon detecting the PFL signal, the CNC moves on to execute the next block.
- 513 -
Block start
YES
Press activation lock signal (PFL) = “1” ?
NO
NO Punch forbidden area–entered signal
(WDDO) = “1”?
YES
NO
Punch enable signal (WDC) = “1”?
YES
YES
Press activation wait signal (PFW) = “1” ?
NO
Press activation signal (PF) = “1”
Block end
Fig.6.8.2 Type B
CAUTION
1 If the tool enters a punch forbidden area during nibbling, the WDDO signal is set
to 1 one punching position before the tool enters punch forbidden area.
2 With type B, the setting of SZ1 to SZ4 (bits 0 to 3 of parameter No. 16501) is
ignored.
6.8.3 Setting the Safety Zone

Set the machine coordinate value when the workpiece holder is positioned at the tool center (punching
position), in the parameters 16505 - 16516 in machine units.
+Ywk +Ymcn
Punching position
X1bmcn X1amcn （ Machine zero point）
+Xmc
Safetyzone n
Y1wk Y1mcn
#1 #2 #3 #4
Origin of work X1bwk X1awk +Xwk

coordinate system
＃1 to ＃4：Safetyzone
Punching position(Machine zero point)：Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic
coordinate system setting is performed（parameter No.1250）
Fig.6.8.3 Set the value of Safety zone
Regarding #1, the safety zone is specified at both ends (X1amcn, X1bmcn) for the X–axis direction by
parameter No.16505 to 16507, and at the forward end (Y1mcn) of the workpiece holder for the Y–axis
- 514 -
direction by parameter No.16507. Farther, width of workpiece holder along the X–axis is specified by
parameter No.16540.
The specifying method is the same as for #2, #3 and #4.
6.8.4 Setting the Tool Shape Area
Punch point
Punch point (Machine zero
(Machine zero point)
point) Tool width measured
along Y-axis direction
Tool width measured radius of circle tool

along X-axis direction
Fig.6.8.4 The value of setting tool shape area
The specification of the area of tool figure sets the size in the X direction and Y direction of the tool by
the parameter (No.16517 to 16532 and No.16551 to 16558).
The setting unit is machine unit.
12 kinds of or less tool figure can be set.
Moreover, setting bit 1 (RTZ) of parameter No.16540 to 1 allows to set area of the circle tool figure.
When setting area of the circle tool figure, the size in the X direction should be set to the radius of the
circle tool, and the size in the Y direction should be set to 0.
The tool shape area can be changed by using the programmable parameter input function (G10).
Therefore, when multiple tools are used, it is possible to specify the tool shape area meeting the tool No.
(Txx).
6.8.5 Automatic Setting of the Safety Zone

The detector on the machine automatically detects the positions of the
workpiece holders mounted on the carriage. Values representing the
detected positions are then set in the safety zone parameters.
Detector
Workpiece holder(#1 to #4)
Carriage
Fig.6.8.5 (a) AUTOMATIC SAFETY–ZONE SETTING
The signal for detecting the position of the workpiece holders turns on and off as workpiece holders #1 to
#4 pass the detector as shown in Fig.6.8. The safety zone is determined from the signal. The position on
the X axis when the signal goes high is regarded as one end of a workpiece holder, and the position when
the signal goes low is regarded as the other end.
Workpiece holder detection command format
G32X x F f P p Q q ;
- 515 -
G32 is specified to detect the positions of workpiece holders. Before G32 can be specified, the workpiece
holder position detector must be activated.
Before detection is started, the X-axis move command must be specified following address X. Either the
positive or negative move direction is allowed. If a positive move command is specified, the position at
which detection starts must be in the negative side with respect to workpiece holder #1. Sufficient
distance must be kept between the position at which detection starts and workpiece holder #1 to enable
stability of speed before workpiece holder #1 is reached. Workpiece holders #1, #2, #3, and #4 are
detected in that order. If a negative move command is specified, the workpiece holders are detected in the
reverse order starting from #4. The other conditions are the same as those used for a positive move
command.
The feed rate during detection is specified with F, in the same way as for ordinary interpolation. The
position of a workpiece holder is obtained from the machine positions indicated by the rising and falling
edges of the workpiece holder detection signal. There is a difference between the indicated machine
position and actual machine position because of an error such as a lag in the servo system. This error must
be compensated with numeric values following addresses P and Q. The compensating value for the
position on the rising edge of the workpiece holder detection signal is set following address P, and the
compensating value for the position on the falling edge is set following address Q.
The lag in the servo system is obtained from the following equations:
△E=T1×F+T2×F (exponential function acceleration/deceleration)

△E=1/ 2T1×F+T2×F (linear acceleration/deceleration)
where,
△E : Lag in the servo system

T1 : Time constant for automatic acceleration/deceleration
T2 : Servo time constant
F: Feed rate
The sign of the compensating value is positive when compensation is made in the opposite direction to
the move direction specified by the detection command.
If address P/Q is omitted in the G32 block, the error between coordinates and actual machine position is
calculated by the CNC.
Actual machine position Detecting position
Workpiece holder position

detector signal
SAFZ
Workpiece holder
P Q
Fig.6.8.5 (b) Workpiece holder position detector signal SAFZ and compensation of detecting position
- 516 -
6.8.6 Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone

After safety zone values are set automatically, they can be displayed on the safety zone screen as shown
below. With this screen, the user can check whether the set values are valid.
Screen
- Type A
Fig.6.8.6 (a) Safety Zone Setting Screen Type A (10.4-inch display unit)
- Type B
Fig.6.8.6 (b) Safety Zone Setting Screen Type B (10.4-inch display unit)
NOTE
The display items of type B are as follows:
W : Workpiece holder width
X : Workpiece holder central position relative to the tool center
Y : Workpiece holder tip position relative to the tool center
- 517 -
6.9 WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE

FUNCTION
If the tool is positioned to the normal height (for punching), as Fig 6.9, the tool will interfere with the
workpiece holder when the workpiece holder moves into the turret.
By means of this function, the CNC monitors the positions of the tool and workpiece holder to avoid
interference between the workpiece holder and tool.
Tool escape status
Tool status in punching
Upper Turret
Workpiece holder
Lower Turret
Fig.6.9 Tool escape position
By setting bit 6 (ACZ) of parameter No. 16502, the user can select either
of two interference avoidance methods. Refer to the manual of machine
tool builder whether A or B:
(1) Type A: Interference is avoided by the PMC, by using the DI/DO signals. The specifications of
type A are depended on machine tool builder’s. Refer to the manual of machine tool
builder for details.
(2) Type B: Interference is automatically avoided by the CNC. This manual describes only for type B.
6.9.1 Type B
Specification
If, during automatic operation, a positioning operation may cause the tool area to interfere with the
workpiece holder area, this function first moves the tool along a non–interfering axis, which may be
either the X–axis or Y–axis, then moves the tool along the other axis, thus preventing the occurrence of
interference.
This avoidance operation is performed only when the avoid operation signal ACZEXE is set to 1. So, if
the tool does not interfere with the workpiece holder, normal positioning can be used for machining by
setting the ACZEXE signal to “0”.
- 518 -
：Usual tool path by positioning End position
：Tool path by avoidance

operation
Start position
X
Fig.6.9.1 (a) Tool path by avoidance operation
Determination of whether to perform avoidance operation

Avoidance operation is performed in all cases except those described below.
(1) When the tool does not move along the X–axis
Fig.6.9.1 (b) Determination of whether to perform avoidance operation (1)
- 519 -
(2) When the start and end points of movement along the Y–axis are above the Y area of the workpiece
holders
Fig.6.9.1 (c) Determination of whether to perform avoidance operation (2)
(3) When the tool does not cross the X area of a workpiece holder for movement along the X–axis
Fig.6.9.1 (d) Determination of whether to perform avoidance operation (3)
When both the start and end points on the Y–axis are in the Y area of the
workpiece holders, the following avoidance operation is performed:
- 520 -
：Usual tool path by positioning

B C
operation
d：Avoidance operation offset

(parameter No. 16561)
Y area of the workpiece

holders
Y
D: End position
A：Start position
Fig.6.9.1 (e) Tool path by avoidance operation
The avoidance operation modifies the positioning path from A to D to that from A to B to C to D.
1) Amount of travel between A and B on the Y–axis
= (workpiece holder position) + (tool area/2) + d – (current position A)
d: Avoidance operation offset (parameter No. 16561)
2) Amount of travel between B and C along the X–axis = (X command value)
3) Amount of travel between C and D along the Y–axis
= (Y command position D) – (current position C)
CAUTION
If feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during an avoidance operation, the tool stops
upon the completion of the avoidance operation.
6.9.2 Tool/Workpiece Holder Areas

(1) The workpiece holder area (parameter Nos. 16505 to 16516) of the safety zone function is used.
(2) The tool area (parameter Nos. 16517 to 16532, 16551 to 16558) of the safety zone function is used.
CAUTION
1 This function is optional.
2 The optional safety zone function must be specified at the same time.
3 The operation of this function is based on the safety zone function. So, see the
specification of the safety zone function.
4 If the workpiece holder area is specified as a punch forbidden area (parameter
No. 16501, SZj) according to the type B specification, a check is made before
axis movement, even when the positioning and press–off command (G70) is
specified.
- 521 -
6.10 SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENSION (EIGHT AREAS)

This function extends the above safety zone check function as follows. And, this function is valid with
workpiece, holder interference avoidance function.
(1) Extension of safety zone check areas

The number of safety zone areas is increased to a maximum of 8.
(2) Extension of safety zone tool areas
The number of tool areas for checking safety zones is increased to a maximum of 16.
(3) Addition of the interference safety zone area signal
The safety zone in which the selected tool is present is reported to the PMC.
(4) Improvement of safety zone automatic setting
For previous safety zone automatic setting, the safety zone areas are automatically set depending on
the direction of movement during detection of the work holder position. When a maximum of eight
areas are used during extension of safety zone areas, safety zone areas are automatically set so that
the mechanical position relationship indicated by #n < #(n+1) (n starts with 1) is always satisfied,
regardless of the direction of movement during detection of the work holder position.
- 522 -
7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS

FUNCTIONS
When an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm screen appears to indicate the cause of the alarm. The
causes of alarms are classified by error codes and number. Up to 60 previous alarms can be stored and
displayed on the screen (alarm history display).
The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm is displayed. In this case, the system
may be performing some processing. The state of the system can be checked using the self-diagnosis
function.
7.1 ALARM DISPLAY

Explanation
- Alarm screen
When an alarm is issued, the display changes to the alarm screen. Two alarm screens "DETAIL" and
"ALL PATH" are provided. You can choose one of the screens by pressing the corresponding soft key.
• Detail screen
Alarm information for the currently selected path is displayed.
Fig. 7.1 (a) Alarm detail screen
- 523 -
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64504EN/02
• All path screen

Alarm information for all paths is displayed sequentially from path 1.
Fig. 7.1 (b) All path screen
- Displaying an alarm screen

ALM is sometimes indicated in the bottom part of the screen display without displaying an alarm screen.
Fig. 7.1 (c) Parameter screen
In this case, display the alarm screen by following the steps below.
1 Press the function key .

2 Press the soft key [ALARM].
3 Pressing the [ALARM] soft key changes the screen display to the "DETAIL" screen (or the alarm
screen selected previously), and the [DETAIL] and [ALL PATH] soft keys appears.
• Pressing the [DETAIL] soft key displays the "DETAIL" screen.
• Pressing the [ALL PATH] soft key displays the "ALL PATH" screen.
- 524 -
If the number of paths is 1, pressing the [ALARM] soft key displays the "DETAIL" screen, but the
[ALARM] soft key indication remains unchanged.
4 You can change pages by using the page key.
- Releasing alarm
The cause of an alarm can be determined from the error code, number, and associated message. To release
the alarm, generally correct the cause, then press the reset key.
- Error code and number

The type of an alarm is indicated by an error code and number.
Example: PS0010, SV0004, etc.
For details, see Appendix G, "ALARMS".
7.2 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY

The CNC including the latest alarm are stored and displayed on the screen.
The display procedure is explained below.
NOTE
Alarms, operations, external operator messages, data change history data, etc.
are stored in the same storage area. If the storage capacity is exceeded due to
other history data, alarm history data may be erased. If, however, bit 2 (SAH) of
parameter No. 11354 is 1, up to 50 alarms can be recorded regardless of the
operation history state.
The maximum number of history data items that can be stored is as follows,
where the history data is assumed to include alarm data only:
If bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is 1, about 4000 items.
If bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is 0, modal information and coordinates
observed when an alarm is issued are also recorded, so that the maximum
number varies from system to system.
(Example: For a 5-axis system, about 280 data items; for a 10-axis system,
about 200 data items)
If bit 3 (EAH) of parameter No. 3112 is 1, however, macro and external alarm
messages are also stored, so that the maximum number further decreases.
Alarm history display

Procedure
2 Press the soft key [HISTRY].
An alarm history is displayed.
The following information is displayed:
<1> Date and time of alarm issuance
<2> Alarm type
<3> Alarm number
<4> Alarm message (sometimes not displayed depending on the alarm)
<5> Page No.
3 You can change pages by using the page key.
- 525 -
Fig. 7.2 Alarm history screen
7.3 CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm has occurred. In this case, the system
may be performing some processing. Diagnostic display can be used to check the system status.
Procedure for Diagnostic display

Procedure
2 Press the soft key [DGNOS].
3 The diagnosis screen has more than 1 pages. Select the screen by the following operation.
(1) Change the page by the page change key.
(2) Method by soft key
• Key input the number of the diagnosis data to be displayed.
• Press the soft key [NO.SRH].
- 526 -
Fig. 7.3 Diagnostic display
Diagnostic numbers 990 to 998 indicate Press condition. (See Table7.3 )
Table7.3 Press condition

No. Display Internal status when 1 is displayed
990 WAITING FOR SIGNAL PFW OFF Waiting for turning off press start wait signal PFW.
991 WAITING FOR 1–CYCLE *PE OFF Waiting for press stop to an one–cycle press
motion.
992 WAITING FOR 1–CYCLE *PFIN OFF Waiting for completion of punching to an one–cycle
press motion.
993 WAITING FOR NIBBLING *PE OFF Waiting for press stop to a nibbling motion.
994 WAITING FOR NIBBLING *NFIN OFF Waiting for completion of punching to a nibbling
motion.
995 WAITING FOR T COMMAND Press operation is not executable, because the
punch command was given before executing the T
command once after the cycle operation signal OP
has been turned from off to on.
996 MANUAL PRESS Manual press is executing.
997 WAITING FOR PF Waiting that absolute value of X and Y axis
position deviation value becomes the value of
parameter No. 16010 and below.
998 REMAINING U/V MACRO STORAGE SIZE Remaining U/V macro storage size (Kbyte).
7.4 RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN
7.4.1 Return from the Alarm Screen
When alarms are cleared or function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed
before the alarm screen appears.
To enable this function, set bit 4 (ADC) of parameter No. 11302 is set to 1.
- 527 -
Switching between screens when alarms are cleared

When all alarms are cleared on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears
again.
When the alarm screen was displayed automatically due to occurrence of an alarm, the screen displayed
immediately before the alarm appears again.
When the alarm screen was displayed by pressing function key during occurrence of an alarm, the
screen displayed immediately before the alarm appears again.
(Example)
Occurrence of
an alarm
Clearing of
alarm
PROGRAM screen ALARM screen
NOTE
Even if alarms are cleared when the alarm screen is not displayed, the current
screen is not changed.
Switching between screens by the function key
When function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen
appears. Press function key to switch to the alarm screen for checking for alarms and then press
function key to return to the previous screen.
(Example)
Function key
Function key
PROGRAM screen ALARM screen
If function key is pressed when the alarm screen was displayed automatically due to occurrence of
an alarm, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears again.
Restrictions
• Switching to the custom screen is not performed.
• The screens to which the alarm screen can be switched are only the screen selected by the chapter
selection soft key.
- 528 -
7.4.2 Relationship with Other Functions

Relationship between the screen switching function and a return from the
alarm screen during switching between paths
(1) When bit 5 (PSC) of parameter No. 3208 is set to 0, if paths are switched by the path switching
signal, the screen last selected in the path appears again.
At this time, even if a return from the alarm screen to the previous screen is performed in one path, a
return is not performed in the other path and the alarm screen remains displayed.
(Example)
<1>
Path 1
Offset Alarm
<2>
<5>
Path 2
<3>
Position Alarm
<4>
<1> When the message key is pressed on the offset screen of path 1, the alarm screen (path 1)
appears.
<2> When switching to path 2 is performed on the alarm screen of path 1, the position screen of
path 2 appears (when the screen last displayed in path 2 is the position screen).
<3> When the message key is pressed on the position screen of path 2, the alarm screen (path 2)
appears.
<4> When the alarm is cleared or the message key is pressed on the alarm screen of path 2, a return
to the position screen (path 2) is performed.
<5> When switching to path 1 is performed, the alarm screen (path 1) appears.
(2) When PSC of parameter No. 3208 is set to 1, if paths are switched by the path switching signal, the
screen displayed immediately before the path switching appears again.
At this time, if a return from the alarm screen to the previous screen is performed in one path, the
screen of the path in which a return was performed appears in the other path.
(Example)
<1>
Path 1 Offset Alarm
<4> <2>
Path 2 Position <3> Alarm
<1> When the message key is pressed on the offset screen of path 1, the alarm screen (path 1)
appears.
<2> When switching to path 2 is performed on the alarm screen of path 1, the alarm screen (path 2)
appears.
<3> When the alarm is cleared on the alarm screen of path 2, the offset screen (path 2) appears.
<4> When switching to path 1 is performed, the offset screen of path 1 appears.
- 529 -
8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64504EN/02
8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
Information stored in external I/O devices can be read into the CNC, and information can be written into
external I/O devices.
External I/O devices include memory cards and USB memory that can be mounted to the memory card
interface located on the left side of the display unit and personal computers and data servers that can be
connected via embedded Ethernet.
The following types of data in the Table 8 (a) can be input and output.
Table 8 (a)
Data type Default file name Reference item
Program ALL-PROG.TXT 8.2.1
Offset data TOOLOFST.TXT 8.2.3
Parameter CNC-PARA.TXT 8.2.2
Pitch error compensation data PITCH.TXT 8.2.4
Custom macro common variable MACRO.TXT 8.2.5
Workpiece coordinate system data EXT_WKZ.TXT 8.2.6
Operation history data OPRT_HIS.TXT 8.2.7
Tool data TOOLDATA.TXT 8.2.8
Maintenance information MAINTINF.TXT
Periodic maintenance data (periodic maintenance: status screen) MAINTENA.TXT
Real time custom macro variable RTMMACRO.TXT
System configuration data SYS-CONF.TXT
PMC signal protect DIDOENBL.TXT
Servo/spindle information SV_SP_ID.TXT
Machine system name data (periodic maintenance: machine system
MAINTEMC.TXT
screen)
Servo waveform diagnosis WAVE-DGN.TXT
P code variable PCODE.TXT
The above types of data can be input and output on the screens for displaying and setting those types of
data.
If NC data such as programs and parameters is to be written to a memory card or USB memory, and if a
file with the same name already exists, it is possible to select whether to overwrite the existing file or
cancel writing with appropriate operation.
This function is enabled by setting bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308.
The external I/O device set in NC parameter No. 0020 is selected. See the Table 8 (b) below for details.
Table 8 (b)
Correspondence between settings and input/output units
Setting Description
0,1 RS-232-C serial port 1
2 RS-232-C serial port 2
4 Memory card interface
5 Data server interface
9 Embedded Ethernet interface
17 USB memory interface
- 530 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
NOTE
1 If the external input/output device is other than a data server interface or
embedded Ethernet interface, a file name of up to 12 characters can be handled.
NC programs on the memory of the CNC can each be assigned any file name of
up to 32 characters, but the name is restricted to up to 12 characters in the
input/output to and from external I/O devices.
2 If the external input/output device is a data server interface, embedded Ethernet
interface, or USB memory interface, a file name of up to 32 characters can be
handled.
3 When a memory card or USB memory interface is used as an external I/O
device, up to 512 files can be handled.
8.1 OVERWRITING FILES ON A MEMORY CARD/USB

MEMORY
Screen display
When an attempt is made to output NC data to a memory card, and if the specified file name or the default
file name is the same as an existing file name on the memory card or USB memory, a confirmation
message "OVERWRITE?" appears. (Bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308 = 1)
Fig. 8.1 (a) Screen display example
Procedure
On the output screen for the desired function, perform the following operation.
1 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT].
2 Press the soft key [EXEC]. If a file with the same name does not exist on the memory card or USB
memory, the file is output in this step.
3 If a file with the same name exists on the memory card or USB memory, soft keys [REWRITE] and
[CAN] appear.
Pressing the soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten.
Pressing the soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled.
Example) Output from the parameter screen (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)
- 531 -
2 Press the soft key [PARAMETER].

3 Enter the EDIT mode or state emergency stop.
5 For 8.4-inch display unit, press the continuous menu key .
6 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. The soft key display switches from the one in Fig. 8.1 (b) to the one
in Fig. 8.1 (c).
7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. Because no file name is specified, the file is output with a file name of
CNC-PARA.TXT, but if a file with the same name exists on the memory card, the soft key display
switches from the one in Fig. 8.1 (c) to the one in Fig. 8.1 (d), with a confirmation message
appearing.
If a file with the same name does not exist on the memory card or USB memory, the file is output
directly.
8 Pressing the soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten.
Pressing the soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled. If wishing to output the file after changing
the file name, specify a file name after step 6, and perform step 7 again.
Fig. 8.1 (b) Soft key display before [F OUTPUT] is pressed
Fig. 8.1 (c) Soft key display after [F OUTPUT] is pressed
Fig. 8.1 (d) Soft key display after [EXEC] is pressed
Example) Output from the parameter screen (for 15/19-inch display unit)
2 Press the vertical soft key [PARAMETER].
3 Enter the EDIT mode or state emergency stop.
4 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. The horizontal soft key display switches from the one
shown in Fig. 8.1 (e) to the one in Fig. 8.1 (f).
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. Because no file name is specified, the file is output with a file
name of CNC-PARA.TXT, but if a file with the same name exists on the memory card or USB
memory, the horizontal soft key display switches from the one in Fig. 8.1 (f) to the one in Fig. 8.1
(g), with a confirmation message appearing.
If a file with the same name does not exist on the memory card or USB memory, the file is output
directly.
6 Pressing the horizontal soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten.
Pressing the horizontal soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled. If wishing to output the file
after changing the file name, specify a file name after step 4, and perform step 5 again.
Fig. 8.1 (e) Soft key display before [F OUTPUT] is pressed
Fig. 8.1 (f) Soft key display after [F OUTPUT] is pressed
Fig. 8.1 (g) Soft key display after [EXEC] is pressed
- 532 -
CAUTION
For a memory card, even if soft key [REWRITE] is pressed, warning message
“OVER WRITE FAILED” is displayed and the output is canceled in the following
cases. For a USB memory, alarm SR1925 or SR1928 is displayed and the
output is canceled.
- The file to be overwritten is for read only.
- The memory card is pulled out while the confirmation message appears.
8.2 INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN

This section explains how to input and output data of the following types to and from each operation
screen: program, parameter, offset, pitch error compensation, 3-dimensional error compensation, macro
variable, workpiece coordinate system data, operation history, and tool management.
Section 8.2, "INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN", consists of the following subsections:
8.2.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program..........................................................................................533

8.2.1.1 Inputting a program ....................................................................................................533
8.2.1.2 Outputting a program .................................................................................................535
8.2.1.3 Inputting and outputting of O8-digit ..........................................................................537
8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters.........................................................................................537
8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters ...................................................................................................537
8.2.2.2 Outputting parameters ................................................................................................538
8.2.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data........................................................................................539
8.2.3.1 Inputting offset data....................................................................................................539
8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data .................................................................................................540
8.2.4 Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data ........................................................541
8.2.4.1 Inputting pitch error compensation data.....................................................................541
8.2.4.2 Outputting pitch error compensation data ..................................................................542
8.2.4.3 Input/output format of pitch error compensation data................................................543
8.2.5 Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables...................................................545
8.2.5.1 Inputting custom macro common variables................................................................545
8.2.5.2 Outputting custom macro common variables .............................................................545
8.2.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data ...............................................547
8.2.6.1 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data ..............................................................547
8.2.6.2 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data............................................................548
8.2.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data.....................................................................549
8.2.7.1 Outputting operation history data...............................................................................549
8.2.7.2 Inputting operation history signal selection data........................................................549
8.2.7.3 Outputting operation history signal section data ........................................................550
8.2.7.4 Input/output format of operation history signal selection data...................................551
8.2.8 Inputting and Outputting Tool Data ..........................................................................................552
8.2.8.1 Inputting tool data.......................................................................................................552
8.2.8.2 Outputting tool data....................................................................................................553
8.2.8.3 Output format of tool data ..........................................................................................554
8.2.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program

8.2.1.1 Inputting a program
The following explains how to input a program from an external device to the memory of the CNC by
using the program editing screen or program folder screen.
- 533 -
Inputting a program (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading.
2 Press the function key to display the program editing screen or program folder screen.
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.
5 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F INPUT] appears.
Press the soft key [F INPUT].
6 Type the name of the file that you want to input.
Press the soft key [F SET]. To specify the program name to input, type the program name and press
the soft key [P SET].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-PROG.TXT” is assumed.
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an input file name [F SET] and an input
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.2.1.1 (a).
7 If you input the program, press the soft key [EXEC].
If you do not input the program, press the soft key [CAN]. Soft keys return to the operation selection
soft keys.
When the input operation starts, “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the
operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
If you cancel the input during the operation, press the soft key [CANCEL].
Once read, the program is registered in the currently selected foreground folder.
NOTE
1 Foreground folders are displayed on the program folder screen. For an
explanation of foreground folders, see II-12.1.3, and for how to change
foreground folders, see III-11.7.
2 When the programs and folders are inputted/outputted on the program list
screen of folder tree display, set bit 7(FLI) of parameter No.11364 to 1.
Table 8.2.1.1 (a)

[F SET] [P SET] Input file name Input program Input program name
BLANK BLANK ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in ALL-PROG.TXT File name at the time the file is saved
BLANK INPUT ALL-PROG.TXT First program in ALL-PROG.TXT Program name set with [P SET]
File name set All programs in the file specified
INPUT BLANK File name at the time the file is saved
with [F SET] with [F SET]
File name set First program in the file specified
INPUT INPUT Program name set with [P SET]
Inputting a program (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM] or [FOLDER] to display programs or a program directory.
5 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [F INPUT] appears.
Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT].
Press the horizontal soft key [F SET]. To specify the program name to input, type the program name
and press the horizontal soft key [P SET].
- 534 -
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.2.1.1 (b).
7 If you input the program, press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].
If you do not input the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. Soft keys return to the
operation selection soft keys.
When the input operation starts, “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the
operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
If you cancel the input during the operation, press the horizontal soft key [CANCEL].
Once read, the program is registered in the currently selected foreground folder.
NOTE
Table 8.2.1.1 (b)

8.2.1.2 Outputting a program

A program stored in the memory of the CNC unit is output to an external device.
Outputting a program (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output.
2 Press the function key to display the program editing screen or program folder screen.
5 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F OUTPUT] appears.
Press the soft key [F OUTPUT].
6 Type the program number to output and press the soft key [P SET]. To specify an output file name,
type the output file name and press the soft key [F SET].
If, in this step, no output file name or no program name is specified, all programs in the foreground
folders are output to "ALL-PROG.TXT".
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an output file name [F SET] and an output
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.2.1.2 (a).
7 If you output the program, press the soft key [EXEC].
If you do not output the program, press the soft key [CAN]. Soft keys return to the operation
selection soft keys.
When the output operation starts, “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the
operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
If you cancel the output during the operation, press the soft key [CANCEL].
- 535 -
NOTE
Table 8.2.1.2 (a)

[F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program
All programs in the foreground folders
BLANK BLANK or (O-9999) ALL-PROG.TXT
displayed in the program folder
BLANK INPUT Program name set with [P SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET]
INPUT BLANK or (O-9999) File name set with [F SET]
INPUT INPUT File name set with [F SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET]
Outputting a program (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM] or [FOLDER] to display programs or a program directory.
5 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT] appears.
Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].
6 Type the program number to output and press the horizontal soft key [P SET]. To specify an output
file name, type the output file name and press the horizontal soft key [F SET].
folders are output to “ALL-PROG.TXT”.
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.2.1.2 (b).
7 If you output the program, press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].
If you do not output the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. Soft keys return to the
operation selection soft keys.
When the output operation starts, “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the
operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
If you cancel the output during the operation, press the horizontal soft key [CANCEL].
NOTE
Table 8.2.1.2 (b)

- 536 -
8.2.1.3 Inputting and outputting of O8-digit

When the file name is not specified, the file name that is output and input is different according to the
digit of the program number and the external input/output device.
- Outputting program
The program is output with the following file name.
Table 8.2.1.3
Program number External input/output device File name
Excluding Fast Data Server or Fast Data Server “O” plus a 7-digit numeric
7-digit or less excluding in the storage mode (Example: O0012345)
(Example: 12345) “O” plus a 8-digit numeric
Fast Data Server in the storage mode
(Example: O00012345)
8-digit a 8-digit numeric
ALL
(Example: 12345678) (Example: 12345678)
- Inputting program
When the external input/output device is excluding Fast Data Server or Fast Data Server excluding
in the storage mode, an input file name is “O”+7-digit numeric.
When Fast Data Server in the storage mode, an input file name is “O”+8-digit numeric.
8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters

8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters
Parameters are loaded into the memory of the CNC unit from an external device. The input format is the
same as the output format. When a parameter is loaded which has the same data number as a parameter
already registered in the memory, the loaded parameter replaces the existing parameter.
Inputting parameters (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SETTING] appears.
Press the soft key [SETTING].
4 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.
5 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data.
Alarm SW0100, “PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON” appears.
7 Press the soft key [PARAMETER], then the parameter screen appears.
8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed.
12 Press the soft key [EXEC].
This starts reading the parameter, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When
- 537 -
the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.

To cancel the input of the parameter, press the soft key [CAN].
14 Press the soft key [SETTING].
17 Turn the power of the CNC on again.
Inputting parameters (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [SETTING] appears.
Press the vertical soft key [SETTING].
7 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PARAMETER] appears.
Press the vertical soft key [PARAMETER], then the parameter screen appears.
9 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT].
11 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].
To cancel the input of the parameter, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].
13 Press the vertical soft key [SETTING].
8.2.2.2 Outputting parameters

All parameters are output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device.
Outputting parameters (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the soft key [PARAMETER], then the parameter screen appears.
- 538 -
7 Type the file name that you want to output.
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the parameter, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN].
Outputting parameters (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PARAMETER] appears.
Press the vertical soft key [PARAMETER], then the parameter screen appears.
5 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].
Explanation
- Suppressing output of parameters set to 0
When bit 1 (PRM) of parameter No. 0010 is set to 1, and soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the parameters in
the Table 8.2.2.2 are not output:
Table 8.2.2.2
Other than axis type Axis type
Bit type Parameter for which all bits are set to 0. Parameter for an axis for which all bits are set to 0.
Value type Parameter whose value is 0. Parameter for an axis for which the value is 0.
8.2.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data

8.2.3.1 Inputting offset data
Offset data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same
as for offset value output. When an offset value is loaded which has the same offset number as an offset
number already registered in the memory, the loaded offset data replaces existing data.
Inputting offset data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OFFSET] appears.
Press the soft key [OFFSET].
- 539 -
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the offset data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When
To cancel the input of the offset data, press the soft key [CAN].
Inputting offset data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OFFSET] appears.
Press the vertical soft key [OFFSET].
To cancel the input of the offset data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].
8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data

All offset data is output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device.
Outputting offset data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OFFSET] appears.
Press the soft key [OFFSET].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the offset data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
Outputting offset data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
- 540 -

3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OFFSET] appears.
Explanation
- Output format
Output format is as follows:
• Tool compensation memory A
%
G10 G90 P01 R_ Q_
G10 G90 P02 R_ Q_
:
G10 G90 P_ R_
%
P_ : Tool offset number (1 to the number of tool compensation pairs)
R_ : Tool compensation data. Output with a decimal point in the input unit used at output.
8.2.4 Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data

8.2.4.1 Inputting pitch error compensation data
Pitch error compensation data are loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input
format is the same as the output format. When a pitch error compensation data is loaded which has the
corresponding data number as a pitch error compensation data already registered in the memory, the
loaded data replaces the existing data.
Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
7 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [PITCH ERROR] appears.
Press the soft key [PITCH ERROR].
- 541 -
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the pitch error compensation data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
To cancel the input of the pitch error compensation data, press the soft key [CAN].
Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
7 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR] appears.
Press the vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR].
To cancel the input of the pitch error compensation data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].
8.2.4.2 Outputting pitch error compensation data

All pitch error compensation data are output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to
an external device.
Outputting pitch error compensation data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
- 542 -

3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [PITCH ERROR] appears.
Press the soft key [PITCH ERROR].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the pitch error compensation data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right
part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
Outputting pitch error compensation data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
8.2.4.3 Input/output format of pitch error compensation data

Pitch error compensation data is input and output in the following input and output formats.
- Keywords
The following alphabets are used as keywords.
The numeric value following each keyword has the meaning listed below:
Table 8.2.4.3
Keyword Meaning of the following numeric value
N Pitch error compensation data number + 10000
Q Data identification (1 : Parameter data, 0 : Pitch error compensation data )
L Input / Output format of pitch error compensation data (Without L : Incremental value type, L1 :
Total value type)
P Pitch error compensation data value
- Format
The input / output format of pitch error compensation data is changed depending on bit 0 (APE) of
parameter No.3602.
In case of incremental value type (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 0).
N ***** Q0 P **** ;
- 543 -
In case of total value type (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 1).
N ***** Q0 L1 P **** ;
The 5-digit numeric value following N indicates a pitch error compensation data number to which a value
of 10000 is added.
If the Bi-directional pitch error compensation is valid, the 5-digit numeric value following N indicates a
pitch error compensation data number to which a value of 20000 is added.
Q0 indicates pitch error compensation data.
L1 indicates that the input / output format of pitch error compensation data is total value type. When the
input / output format is incremental type (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 0), L1 is not to be
specified. If the data with L1 is input when bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 0, or the data
without L1 is input when bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 1, alarm SR1300 “ILLEGAL
ADDRESS” is caused.
The numeric value following P indicates the value (integer value) of pitch error compensation data
between -128 and 127.
The semicolon (;) indicates the end of block (LF in the ISO code or CR in the EIA code).
Example1 (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 0)

N10001Q0P100;
Pitch error compensation data number 1
Pitch error compensation data value 100
Example2 (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 1)
N10001Q0L1P100;
Pitch error compensation data number 1
Pitch error compensation data value 100
- Beginning and end of a record

A pitch error compensation data record begins with % and ends with %.
Example
% ; ................................................................Beginning of record
N10000Q0P10;
N10001Q0P100;
:
N11279Q0P0;
% ..................................................................End of record
When parameters and pitch error compensation data are integrated into one file, % is added to the
beginning and end of the file.
WARNING
1 Do not fail to perform reference position return manually after changing the pitch
error compensation data or backlash compensation data. Without this, the
machine position can deviate from the correct position.
2 If the compensation data is changed when the input format is total value type(bit
0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 1), power must be turned off before
- 544 -
8.2.5 Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables
8.2.5.1 Inputting custom macro common variables

The value of a custom macro common variable is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external
device. The same format used to output custom macro common variables is used for input.
Inputting custom macro common variables (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MACRO] appears.
Press the soft key [MACRO].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the custom macro common variables, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
To cancel the input of the custom macro common variables, press the soft key [CAN].
Inputting custom macro common variables (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO] appears.
Press the vertical soft key [MACRO].
To cancel the input of the custom macro common variables, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].
Explanation
- Common variables
The common variables (#500 to #549) can be input and output.
(When the option for addition of common variable is specified, values from #500 to #999 can be input
and output.) #100 to #149 can be input when bit 3 (PV5) of parameter No.6001 is set to 1. (When the
option for addition of common variable is specified, values from #100 to #199 can be input and output.)
8.2.5.2 Outputting custom macro common variables

Custom macro common variables stored in the memory of the CNC can be output in a defined output
format to an external device.
- 545 -
Outputting custom macro common variables (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MACRO] appears.
Press the soft key [MACRO].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the custom macro common variables, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right
Outputting custom macro common variables (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO] appears.
Explanation
- Output format
The output format is as follows:
The values of custom macro variables are output in a bit-image hexadecimal representation of
double-precision floating-point type data.
%
G10L85P100(0000000000000000)
G10L85P101(0000000000000000)
G10L85P102(FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF)
:
G10L85P500(4024000000000000)
G10L85P501(4021000000000000)
G10L85P502(0000000000000000)
:
SETVN500[ABC]
SETVN501[DEF]
SETVN502[GHI]
:
M02
- 546 -
%
P_ : Macro variable number

SETVN_ [ _ ] : Common variable name
NOTE
The conventional custom macro statement program format cannot be used for
output.
By setting bit 0 (MCO) of parameter No.6019, it is possible to output macro variable numbers and
variable data values as comments after normally output data.
The output comments do not affect data input.
- Common variable
The common variables (#500 to #549) can be input and output.
(When the option for addition of common variable is specified, values from #500 to #999 can be input
and output.) #100 to #149 can be output when bit 3 (PV5) of parameter No.6001 is set to 1. (When the
option for addition of common variable is specified, values from #100 to #199 can be input and output.)
8.2.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System

Data
8.2.6.1 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data
Coordinate system variable data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input
format is the same as the output format. When coordinate system variable data with a data number
corresponding to existing coordinate system variable data registered in the memory is loaded, the loaded
coordinate system variable data replaces the existing coordinate system variable data.
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WORK] appears.
Press the soft key [WORK].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the workpiece coordinate system data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part
To cancel the input of the workpiece coordinate system data, press the soft key [CAN].
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
- 547 -

3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK] appears.
Press vertical soft key [WORK].
To cancel the input of the workpiece coordinate system data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].
8.2.6.2 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data

All coordinate system variable data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an
external device.
Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WORK] appears.
Press the soft key [WORK].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the workpiece coordinate system data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower
right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK] appears.
- 548 -
8.2.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data

Only output operation is permitted on operation history data.
The output data is in text format. So, to reference the output data you must use an application that can
handle text files on the personal computer.
8.2.7.1 Outputting operation history data

All operation history data is output in the output format form the memory of the CNC to an external
device.
Outputting operation history data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears.
Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OPRT_HIS.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the operation history data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the
screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
Outputting operation history data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears.
Press the vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY].
screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
8.2.7.2 Inputting operation history signal selection data

Operation history signal selection data is input from an external input/output device to the memory of the
CNC. The input format is the same as the format in which operation history signal selection data is
output.
- 549 -
Inputting operation history signal section data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
4 Press the soft key [SIGNAL SELECT].
7 Press the soft key [F INPUT].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “OHIS_SIG.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the operation history signal selection data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
To cancel the input of the operation history signal selection data, press the soft key [CAN].
Inputting operation history signal section data (for 15/19-inch display unit)
Procedure
4 Press the vertical soft key [SIGNAL SELECT].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “OHIS_SIG.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the operation history signal selection data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
To cancel the input of the operation history signal selection data, press the horizontal soft key
[CAN].
8.2.7.3 Outputting operation history signal section data

Operation history signal selection data is output in the output format form the memory of the CNC to an
external device.
Outputting operation history signal section data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
4 Press the soft key [SIGNAL SELECT].
- 550 -
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OHIS_SIG.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the operation history signal selection data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower
Outputting operation history signal section data (for 15/19-inch display unit)
Procedure
4 Press the vertical soft key [SIGNAL SELECT].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OHIS_SIG.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the operation history signal selection data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower
8.2.7.4 Input/output format of operation history signal selection data

Operation history signal selection data is input and output in the following input and output formats.
- Keywords
The following alphabets are used as keywords.
The numeric value following each keyword has the meaning listed below:
Table 8.2.7.4
Keyword Meaning of the following numeric value
N Data number
L PMC number
X,Y,G,F,P Signal address
Q Bit state
- Format
Operation history signal selection data is output in the following format:
N ** L ** X,Y,G,F,P ***** Q ******** ;
The numeric value following the N represents an operation history signal selection data number.
The numeric value following the L represents a PMC number in a multipath PMC.
The numeric value following the X, Y, G, and F represents the signal address to be recorded in operation
history. Here, P is a special keyword indicating that none is set.
The numeric value following the Q represents the bit position of the signal to be recorded in operation
history.
The semicolon (;) indicates the end of block (LF in the ISO code or CR in the EIA code).
- 551 -
Example 1
N01 L01 G00043 Q00100111;
As operation history signal selection data number 1, bits 0, 1, 2, and 5 of
G0043 of the first PMC are set.
Example 2
N02 L00 P00000 Q00000000;
For operation history signal selection data number 2, no signal selection data
is set.
- Beginning and end of a record

A operation history signal selection data record begins with % and ends with %.
Example
% ; ......................................................Beginning of record
N01 L01 G00043 Q00100111;
N02 L01 F00001 Q00000001;
:
N60 L00 P00000 Q00000000;
% ........................................................End of record
8.2.8 Inputting and Outputting Tool Data

8.2.8.1 Inputting tool data
Tool data is input from external I/O devices such as a memory card to the memory of the CNC.
Inputting tool data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
4 Press the continuous menu key , and press the chapter selection soft key [TOOL].
5 Press the continuous menu key , and press soft key [TOOL NUMBER], [PUNCH COUNT], or
[TOOL SHAPE].
7 Press the soft key [F INPUT].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLDATA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the tool data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the
read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN].
Inputting tool data（for 15/19-inch display unit）

Procedure
4 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL] appears.
- 552 -
5 Press vertical soft key [TOOL].
6 Press vertical soft key [TOOL NUMBER], [PUNCH COUNT], or [TOOL SHAPE].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLDATA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the tool data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the
8.2.8.2 Outputting tool data

Tool data is output the memory of the CNC to external I/O devices such as a memory card.
Outputting tool data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
4 Press the continuous menu key , and press the chapter selection soft key [TOOL].
5 Press the continuous menu key , and press soft key [TOOL NUMBER], [PUNCH COUNT], or
[TOOL SHAPE].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLDATA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the tool data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
Outputting tool data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
4 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL] appears.
5 Press vertical soft key [TOOL].
6 Press vertical soft key [TOOL NUMBER], [PUNCH COUNT], or [TOOL SHAPE].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLDATA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the tool data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
- 553 -
8.2.8.3 Output format of tool data

Output format of tool data is as follows.
%
N001 T M X Y S P C I J K B ;
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
N002 T M X Y S P C I J K B ; Tool data
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ;
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ;
N136 T M X Y S P C I J K B ;
N201 T A Y C I J K ;
(1) (2) (13) (5) (8) (9) (10) (11)
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ;
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ; Tool data for multiple tools
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ;
N264 T A Y C I J K ;
%
Items (1) to (13) are as follows :

(1) Tool registration number
When the optional multiple tool function is used. the tool numbers registered for multiple tools are
output with N200 to N299.
(2) Tool number
(3) Turret position
(4) X–axis offset
(5) Y–axis offset
(6) Number of a tool to be substituted
(7) Number of punch operations
(8) Tool figure for graphic operation
(9) X dimension of a tool for graphic operation
(10) Y dimension of a tool for graphic operation
(11) Tool angle for graphic operation
(12) Tool life value
(13) Angle for indexing the turret for multiple tool
- Output file name

When the floppy disk directory display function is used, the name of the output file is
“TOOLDATA.TXT”.
8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN

Just by using the ALL IO screen, you can input and output programs, parameters, offset data, pitch error
compensation data, macro variables, workpiece coordinate system data, operation history data, and tool
management data to an external I/O device.
CAUTION
While an external I/O device is being accessed, do not turn the power to the
CNC off or remove the device, or the device may be damaged.
- 554 -
NOTE
The ALL IO screen can be operated only if a memory card or USB memory is
selected as an external I/O device. Use NC parameter No.20 to select an external
I/O device.
The following explains how to display the ALL IO screen:
Displaying the ALL IO screen (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key several times.
3 Press the soft key [ALL IO] to display the ALL IO screen.
The subsequent steps to select data from the ALL IO screen will be explained for each type of data.
Displaying the ALL IO screen (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [ALL I/O] appears.
3 Press the vertical soft key [ALL I/O] to display the ALL IO screen.
The subsequent steps to select data from the ALL IO screen will be explained for each type of data.
Procedure for changing the target folder for inputting and outputting data (for
8.4/10.4-inch display unit)
The last folder displayed on the USB MEMORY FILE LIST screen is treated as the default target folder
for inputting and outputting data in a USB memory. If you want to input data from or output it to another
folder, perform the following operation.
1 Display the ALL IO screen.
- 555 -
2 Press the soft key [CHANGE FOLDER]. The USB MEMORY FILE LIST screen appears.
3 Display a folder you want to use for inputting and outputting data.
4 Press the soft key [RETURN ALL I/O]. The ALL IO screen appears again. The folder displayed on
the list screen is used as the target folder for inputting and outputting data.
Procedure for changing the target folder for inputting and outputting data (for
15/19-inch display unit)
The last folder displayed on the USB MEMORY FILE LIST screen is treated as the default target folder
for inputting and outputting data in a USB memory. If you want to input data from or output it to another
folder, perform the following operation.
1 Press the soft key [(OPRT)] on the ALL IO screen.
- 556 -
2 Press the horizontal soft key [CHANGE FOLDER]. The USB MEMORY FILE LIST screen
appears.
3 Display a folder you want to use for inputting and outputting data.
4 Press the soft key [RETURN ALL I/O]. The ALL IO screen appears again. The folder displayed on
the list screen is used as the target folder for inputting and outputting data.
Configuration of this section

Section 8.3, "INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN", consists of the following subsections:
8.3.1 Inputting/Outputting a Program ......................................................................................................557

8.3.2 Inputting and Outputting all Programs and Folders........................................................................560
8.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Parameters ..............................................................................................561
8.3.4 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data .............................................................................................563
8.3.5 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data ....................................................................564
8.3.6 Inputting/Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables...............................................................566
8.3.7 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data.....................................................567
8.3.8 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data ..........................................................................568
8.3.9 File Format and Error Messages .....................................................................................................569
8.3.1 Inputting/Outputting a Program

A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting a program (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [PROGRAM] on the ALL IO screen.
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT].
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input.
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].
See the Table 8.3.1 (a) for details.
- 557 -
6 Set the program number to be used after the input.

Type a program number, and press the soft key [P SET].
If no program number is specified here, the program number in the file is adopted as is.
This starts reading the program, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the
Table 8.3.1 (a)

with [F NAME] with [F NAME]

Inputting a program (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key
[PROGRAM] appears.
Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM].
3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT].
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME].
See the Table 8.3.1 (b) for details.
5 Set the program number to be used after the input.
Type a program number, and press the horizontal soft key [P SET].
If no program number is specified here, the program number in the file is adopted as is.
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].
Table 8.3.1 (b)

Outputting a program (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
- 558 -
5 Set the program that you want to output.
Type a program number, and press the soft key [P SET].
If O-9999 is typed, all programs in the memory are output.
If the start program number and the end program number separated by comma (,) is typed, multiple
programs in specified range are output at one time.
6 Set the file name to be output.
When no file name is set, the output file name is assumed to be “O-number” if a single program
number is specified; if O-9999 is specified, the output file name is assumed to be
“ALL-PROG.TXT”.
See the Table 8.3.1 (c) for details.
(For an explanation of foreground folders, see II-12.1.3, and for how to change foreground folders,
see III-11.7.)
This starts outputting the program, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
Table 8.3.1 (c)

Programs No.xxxx to No.yyyy that is set
BLANK Oxxxx,Oyyyy ALL-PROG.TXT
with [P SET]
INPUT BLANK or (O-9999) File name set with [F NAME]
INPUT INPUT File name set with [F NAME] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET]
INPUT Oxxxx,Oyyyy File name set with [F SET]
with [P SET]
Outputting a program (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
[PROGRAM] appears.
4 Set the program that you want to output.
Type a program number, and press the horizontal soft key [P SET].
If O-9999 is typed, all programs in the memory are output.
If the start program number and the end program number separated by comma (,) is typed, multiple
programs in specified range are output at one time.
When no file name is set, the output file name is assumed to be “O-number” if a single program
number is specified; if O-9999 is specified, the output file name is assumed to be
“ALL-PROG.TXT”.
See the Table 8.3.1 (d) for details.
see III-11.7.)
- 559 -

Table 8.3.1 (d)

BLANK Oxxxx,Oyyyy ALL-PROG.TXT
with [P SET]
INPUT BLANK or (O-9999) File name set with [F NAME]
INPUT INPUT File name set with [F NAME] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET]
INPUT Oxxxx,Oyyyy File name set with [F SET]
with [P SET]
8.3.2 Inputting/Outputting all Programs and Folders

All programs and folders can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting all programs and folders (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
Select EDIT mode for all paths.
4 Press the soft key [ALL INPUT].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-FLDR.TXT” is assumed.
Inputting all programs and folders (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
[PROGRAM] appears.
Select EDIT mode for all paths.
3 Press the horizontal soft key [ALL INPUT].
- 560 -
Outputting all programs and folders (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
4 Press the soft key [ALL OUTPUT].
Outputting all programs and folders (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
[PROGRAM] appears.
3 Press the horizontal soft key [ALL OUTPUT].
This starts outputting the program, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When
the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
8.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Parameters

Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting parameters (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
4 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. Alarm SW0100
appears.
5 Press the soft key [PARAMETER] on the ALL IO screen.
- 561 -

Inputting parameters (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
appears.
[PARAMETER] appears.
Press the vertical soft key [PARAMETER].
Outputting parameters (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [PARAMETER] on the ALL IO screen.
- 562 -
Outputting parameters (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
[PARAMETER] appears.
Press the vertical soft key [PARAMETER].
8.3.4 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data

Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting offset data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen.
Inputting offset data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OFFSET]
appears.
Outputting offset data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen.
- 563 -
Outputting offset data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OFFSET]
appears.
8.3.5 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data

Pitch error compensation data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
appears.
5 Press the soft key [PITCH] on the ALL IO screen.
- 564 -
Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
appears.
5 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PITCH
ERROR] appears.
Outputting pitch error compensation data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [PITCH] on the ALL IO screen.
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
Outputting pitch error compensation data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PITCH
ERROR] appears.
- 565 -
8.3.6 Inputting/Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables

Custom macro common variables can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting custom macro common variables (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen.
Inputting custom macro common variables (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO]
appears.
Outputting custom macro common variables (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen.
- 566 -
Outputting custom macro common variables (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO]
appears.
8.3.7 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System

Data
Workpiece coordinates system data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [WORK] on the ALL IO screen.
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK]
appears.
- 567 -

Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [WORK] on the ALL IO screen.
right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK]
appears.
right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
8.3.8 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data
Operation history data can be output on the ALL IO screen (with function key for 15/19-inch
display unit).
Only output operation is permitted for operation history data.
The output data is of text format. So, to reference the output data you must use an application that can
handle text files on the personal computer.
Outputting operation history data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] on the ALL IO screen.
- 568 -
screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
Outputting operation history data (for 15/19-inch display unit)

Procedure
2 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OPERAT
HISTRY] appears.
screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the output,
press the horizontal soft key [CAN].
8.3.9 File Format and Error Messages

Explanation
- File format
All files that are read from and written to an external device are of text format. The format is described
below.
A file starts with % or LF, followed by the actual data. A file always ends with %. In a input operation,
data between the first % and the next LF is skipped. Each block ends with an LF, not a semicolon (;).
• LF: 0A (hexadecimal) of ASCII code
• When a file containing lowercase letters, kana characters, and several special characters (such as $, \,
and !) is read, those letters and characters are ignored.
Example)
%
O0001(MEMORY CARD SAMPLE FILE)
G17 G49 G97
G92 X-11.3 Y2.33
:
:
M30
%
• ASCII code is used for input/output, regardless of the setting parameter (ISO/EIA).
• Bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 0100 can be used to specify whether the end of block code (EOB) is
output as "LF" only, or as "LF, CR, CR."
Limitation
- Memory card specification
Use memory cards that comply with PCMCIA Ver2.0 or JEIDA Ver4.1.
- 569 -
- Attribute memory
Memory cards that have no attribute memory or contain no device information in the attribute memory
cannot be used.
- Flash ROM card

Flash ROM cards can be used for input only.
8.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS
8.4.1 FTP File Transfer Function

The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below.
CAUTION
Before performing FTP communication using the Embedded Ethernet for the first
time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address
and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in
settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence
such as a communication failure on the entire network.
Be very careful about any communication failure. If the Ethernet is used on a
network involves with a communication failure, a communication failure
intermittently occurs in the Ethernet, which may cause a CNC system error.
NOTE
1 With the FTP File Transfer function (FTP client), a single CNC can connect only
one FTP server.
2 When a lot of files are registered in the host computer, the display processing of
host file list display might become slow. In this case, please divide the folder that
registers the files.
Host file list display (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

A list of the files held on the host computer is displayed.
Procedure
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. The program list screen appears. (If the soft key does not appear,
press the continuous menu key .)
4 Press the soft key [DEVICE CHANGE].
5 Press the soft key [EMB ETHER], and the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen
appears.
- 570 -
Fig. 8.4.1 (a) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen
NOTE
1 When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the
embedded Ethernet port.
The three conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file list
screen:
(1) Check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. Make a selection
in "DEVICE SELECTION" on the Ethernet setting screen.
(2) Set connection destinations on the FTP transfer screen. The FTP transfer
screen is displayed by pressing soft key [FTP TRANS] on the Ethernet setting
screen.
(3) A host computer can be selected from connection destinations 1, 2, and 3.
Make a selection according to soft key [HOST CHANGE] described later.
2 File names including 2-bytes characters cannot be displayed correctly.
6 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be switched using the page keys
.
7 Press the soft key [REFRESH] to update the screen display.
8 Press the soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display the host file list (file names only) screen. Press the soft
key [DETAIL ON] to display the host file list (detail) screen.
9 When selecting a folder with cursor and pressing the MDI key , the selected folder is changed
to the new current folder.
Host file list display (for 15/19-inch display unit)

A list of the files held on the host computer is displayed.
Procedure
2 Press the vertical soft key [FOLDER]. The program list screen appears.
3 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [DEVICE CHANGE] appears.
- 571 -
Press the horizontal soft key [DEVICE CHANGE].

4 Press the horizontal soft key [EMB ETHER], and the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST
screen appears.
Fig. 8.4.1 (b) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen
NOTE
1 When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the
embedded Ethernet port.
The three conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file list
screen:
(1) Check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. Make a selection
in "DEVICE SELECTION" on the Ethernet setting screen.
(2) Set connection destinations on the FTP transfer screen. The FTP transfer
screen is displayed by pressing soft key [FTP TRANS] on the Ethernet setting
screen.
(3) A host computer can be selected from connection destinations 1, 2, and 3.
Make a selection according to soft key [HOST CHANGE] described later.
2 File names including 2-bytes characters cannot be displayed correctly.
5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be switched using the page keys
.
6 Press the horizontal soft key [REFRESH] to update the screen display.
7 Press the horizontal soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display the host file list (file names only) screen.
Press the horizontal soft key [DETAIL ON] to display the host file list (detail) screen.
8 When selecting a folder with cursor and pressing the MDI key , the selected folder is changed
to the new current folder.
Display item (common to 8.4/10.4/15/19-inch display units)

AVAILABLE DEVICE
"EMBEDDED" or "PCMCIA" is displayed.
- 572 -
CONNECT HOST
The currently selected connection host number and host name are displayed.
REGISTERED PROGRAM
The number of files registered in the work folder of the connected host is displayed. Up to 8 digits can be
displayed.
CURRENT FOLDER
The current folder name of the connected host is displayed.
If the folder-path is long compared with the display-item, characters: “…” and only the first and last ten
letters of the folder name are displayed.
FILE LIST
There is no distinction between file names and folder names.
Although the maximum number of displayed characters is 127, characters are displayed as far as they can
be displayed in one line.
Operation list (common to 8.4/10.4/15/19-inch display units)

DETAIL ON, DETAIL OFF
The screen display can be switched between the display of file names only and the display of details.
REFRESH
Display data can be updated.
F INPUT
A file can be input from the host computer to program memory. This item is displayed only when 9 is set
as the I/O device number of the CNC.
F OUTPUT
A file can be output from program memory to the host computer. This item is displayed only when 9 is
set as the I/O device number of the CNC.
DELETE
A folder or file can be deleted from the host computer.
RENAME
A file or folder on the host computer can be renamed.
CREATE FOLDER
A folder can be created on the host computer.
HOST CHANGE
The connected host can be changed.
NC program input (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

A file (NC program) stored on the host computer can be input into program memory.
CAUTION
If bit2 (REP) of parameter No.3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the
same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in program
memory, the existing NC program is overwritten.
- 573 -
NOTE
NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output.
Procedure
1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen.
5 Position the cursor on the file to input, and press [F GET] or type the file name to input.
Press the soft key [F SET].
6 Type the program name, and press the soft key [P SET].
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.4.1 (a).
Table 8.4.1 (a)

NC program input (for 15/19-inch display unit)

A file (NC program) stored on the host computer can be input into program memory.
CAUTION
If bit2 (REP) of parameter No.3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the
same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in program
memory, the existing NC program is overwritten.
NOTE
NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output.
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [F INPUT] appears.
Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT].
4 Position the cursor on the file to input, and press [F GET] or type the file name to input.
Press the horizontal soft key [F SET].
- 574 -
5 Type the program name, and press the horizontal soft key [P SET].
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.4.1 (b).
Table 8.4.1 (b)

NC program output (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

A file (NC program) stored in program memory can be output to the host computer.
NOTE
NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input.
Procedure
5 Type the program name to output, and press the soft key [P SET]. To specify an output file name,
type the output file name and press the soft key [F SET].
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.4.1 (c).
see III-11.7)
To cancel the output of the program, press the soft key [CAN].
Table 8.4.1 (c)

- 575 -
NC program output (for 15/19-inch display unit)

A file (NC program) stored in program memory can be output to the host computer.
NOTE
NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input.
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT] appears.
Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].
4 Type the program name to output, and press the horizontal soft key [P SET]. To specify an output
file name, type the output file name and press the horizontal soft key [F SET].
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.4.1 (d).
see III-11.7)
Table 8.4.1 (d)

8.5 SCREEN HARD COPY FUNCTION

Overview
This function converts screen information displayed on the CNC into bit map format data and output it to
a memory card or USB memory. Once output, bit map format data can be displayed and edited on a
personal computer. This function can be enabled by setting bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301.
Explanation
- Start/cancellation methods
The screen hard copy function is started by pressing and holding down key for five seconds. The
function can be canceled by pressing key .
- Acquisition and output of screen data

When started, the screen hard copy function starts acquiring screen data. As soon as it has acquired it, the
function outputs bit map format data to the memory card inserted into the LCD unit. While screen data is
- 576 -
being acquired, the screen remains stationary for a few seconds. Also, while screen data is being output,
"OUTPUT" blinks in the status display.
- Screen data file names

Bit map format screen data files created by this function are assigned the names below:
In case of parameter HCN(No.3301#4) is 0, file name starts with “HDCPY000.BMP” and increments the
number to 999 as following.
"HDCPY000.BMP" (Name of a file to be first output to a memory card etc. after power-on)
"HDCPY001.BMP" (Name of a file to be second output to a memory card etc. after power-on)
:
:
"HDCPY999.BMP" (Name of a file to be 1000 output to a memory card etc. after power-on)
If the screen hard copy function is executed after a file with "HDCPY999.BMP" is output, the file name
returns to "HDCPY000.BMP". However, if a file with the same file name as the one to be output when
the screen hard copy function is executed exists on the memory card, alarm SR1973 is issued. If the
capacity of the memory card is exceeded, alarm SR1962 is issued.
In either case, screen data is not output, so that either the existing file needs to be deleted or the memory
card needs to be replaced with a new one.
In case of using a USB memory, if the name of a file to be output during execution of screen hard copy
already exists in the memory, the file is overwritten. If the capacity of the USB memory is exceeded,
alarm SR1932 is issued. In this case, please delete unnecessary files or use a new USB memory.
In case of parameter HCN is 1, file name id defined by the date and the execute number of screen hard
copy function on that day as following.
"YYMMDD00.BMP" (Name of a file to be first output to a memory card etc. on that day)
"YYMMDD01.BMP" (Name of a file to be second output to a memory card etc. on that day)
:
:
"YYMMDD99.BMP" (Name of a file to be 100 output to a memory card etc. on that day)
(YY(00~99) means the year, MM(01~12) means the month and DD(01~31) means the day)
(Example)
If screen hard copy is executed on 2013/04/17 in the first time, bit map format file is created with the
name of “13041700.BMP”.
If the screen hard copy function is executed after a file with “YYMMDD99.BMP” is output, the file name
returns to "YYMMDD00.BMP". However, if a file with the same file name as the one to be output when
the screen hard copy function is executed exists on the memory card, system searches number which does
not exist and output the file with that number. If all number files (00~99) exist on the memory card, alarm
SR1973 is issued. If the capacity of the memory card is exceeded, alarm SR1962 is issued.
In either case, screen data is not output, so that either the existing file needs to be deleted or the memory
card needs to be replaced with a new one.
In case of using a USB memory, if the name of a file to be output during execution of screen hard copy
already exists in the memory, system searches the file number which does not exist on the memory and
output the file with that number, same as memory card. If all number files (00~99) exist in the memory,
the file is overwritten. If the capacity of the USB memory is exceeded, alarm SR1932 is issued. In this
case, please delete unnecessary files or use a new USB memory.
Limitation
- Screens whose hard copies cannot be made
Hard copies of the BOOT screen, the IPL screen, and the system alarm screen cannot be made.
- Foreground I/O devices

During DNC operation, for example, screen data cannot be output while a foreground I/O device is in use.
- 577 -
- Canceling the hard copy function

If the hard copy function is canceled before a hard copy is completed, an incomplete bit map file of data
that has been output is created.
- CNC screen display function

If CNC screen display function is working, the screen hard copy function is disabled. In this case, bit map
format data can be made by screen copy function of CNC screen display function. Please refer to the
operator’s manual of CNC screen display function.
- Output folder
The screen data is output to the root folder of the memory card or the USB memory.
8.6 USB FUNCTION

Overview
Setting NC parameter No. 20 to 17 selects a USB memory as the data input/output destination.
Basic specifications of the USB function are listed below.
• The USB function is conforming to USB Ver. 1.0.

• The USB function supports the FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, and VFAT file systems.
• It can handle up to six folder levels under the root folder.
• Up to 32 ASCII code characters (alphanumeric characters) are available for a file or folder name.
WARNING
A commercially available USB memory does not have sufficient reliability in the
FA environment. When a part program, a parameter, etc. are input or output to a
USB memory, those data might be damaged and there is a possibility that a
serious accident or loss occurs.
Therefore, set bit 0 (ISU) of parameter No.11505 to input or output data to a
USB memory using ISO codes unless data is input using ASCII codes.
CAUTION
Do not turn off CNC or do not remove the USB memory during accessing the
USB memory. The USB memory may be damaged.
NOTE
1 There is a USB memory not designed for the long preservation of data.
Therefore, do not use a USB memory by the long preservation purpose of data,
and back up important data to the personal computer.
2 When empty capacity of the USB memory decreases or the number of files in
the USB memory increases, it might take time to the input or output operation.
In this case, input or output after deleting an unnecessary file in the USB
memory.
3 Any USB memory that is not physically formatted cannot be formatted on the
CNC. Format a USB memory to be used for the first time with FAT or FAT32
without specifying the Quick Format option on the personal computer.
Restrictions
There are the following restrictions on the USB function.
- 578 -
NOTE
The USB memory that has the capacity less than a hundred GB on the market
can be used. However, the operation of all USB memories on the market cannot
be guaranteed. There is a USB memory with slow access speed, and even if the
USB memories of the same model that are made by the same manufacturer are
used, the operation might be different.
Before using a USB memory, fully check its operation.
• Use a USB memory conforming to USB Ver. 1.0.

• Only one USB memory can be recognized. (No USB hub can be recognized.)
• The maximum number of files and folders in a folder is 512.
• A non-ASCII character (alphanumeric character) is not used in a file or folder name.
• DNC operation cannot be performed using a program in a USB memory.
• Schedule operation cannot be performed using a program in a USB memory.
• A program in a USB memory device cannot be called using an external subprogram call (M198).
• "Memory Card Program Operation/Editing" cannot be applied to a USB memory.
8.7 NC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION

Overview
This function outputs the following various data into memory card or USB memory by one operation.
- SRAM data
- User files (made by user such as PMC ladder)
- Text data (Parameter, program, and so on)
This function enables to back up the system data easily.

Moreover, the contents of SRAM data can be confirmed immediately because both SRAM data and text
data are output.
NC data output signal ALLO is set to “1” from the beginning to the end of outputting text data.
NOTE
1 When USB memory is used, set root folder as data output destination.
2 It takes a time to output data.
3 The output file name is a default file name. If a file with the same name already
exists in the external I/O device, the file is overwritten. It is recommended to
clear the external I/O device before using this function.
8.7.1 All Data Output Screen

This function outputs on all data output screen of ALL IO.
To display all data output screen, set bit 0 (BOP) of parameter No.313 to 1.
Fig 8.7.1 (c) All data output screen
- 579 -
Displaying all data output screen

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [ALL DATA] on the ALL IO screen.
Explanation
The following items are displayed on all data output screen
- File information of external I/O device
File number, name, size (byte) and creation date are displayed.
- Message
Confirmation message and progress bar are displayed.
- Device name
The name of I/O device (memory card or USB memory) selected by parameter (No.20) is displayed.
If the other devices are selected, “ILLEGAL” is displayed.
8.7.1.1 Output operation

For output operation of this function, cancel emergency stop state and switch to EDIT mode.
And, set the following parameters.
- Parameter (No.20) = 4 or 17 Memory card: 4, USB memory: 17
- Bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No.138 = 1 A path number is added to the extensions of input/output files.
Moreover, when bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No.110 is 1 (separate control of I/O channel numbers is
performed), set the following parameters.
- Parameter (No.20) = Parameter (No.21) and Parameter (No.22) = Parameter (No.23)
Output operation of NC data output function

Procedure
1 Display all data output screen.
The message “THIS OPERATION NEEDS POWER OFF. AND SAME NAME FILE IS
OVERWRITTEN. EXECUTE?” is displayed in message area. To cancel the output, press the soft
key [CAN].
This starts outputting text data and NC data output signal ALLO is set to “1”.
The key operation is invalid while outputting data. (Example: If the function key is pressed,
it is not switched to the program screen.)
The progress bar shows the progress report of output.
Output file name

File name is blinked.
Progress bar
Show the progress report of output.
Fig8.7.1.1 (a) Progress bar display
- 580 -
5 When output of all text data is finished, the message” POWER MUST BE OFF. TURN ON THE
POWER AGAIN TO SAVE SRAM AND USER FILE.” is displayed and NC data output signal
ALLO is set to “0”. Turn off the power then turn on the power again with external I/O device
mounted.
6 At power-up, SRAM data and user files are output. The progress report of output is displayed while
outputting.
File name Finished size (byte) File size (byte)

(hexadecimal number) (hexadecimal number)
Fig8.7.1.1 (b) Output of SRAM data and user files
7 After finishing output of SRAM data and user files, CNC starts up.
8.7.1.2 Format
Memory card and USB memory can be formatted.
When format is executed, all data in memory card or USB memory is cleared.
NOTE
It is recommended to format memory card and USB memory before executing
output operation of NC data output function.
Format operation
Procedure
1 Display all data output screen.
3 Press the soft key [FORMAT].
The message “FORMAT OK?” is displayed in message area.
To cancel the format, press the soft key [CAN].
The message “FORMAT EXECUTING” is displayed in message area.
5 After finishing format, the message “COMPLETE” is displayed.
8.7.2 Output Directory
8.7.2.1 LCD mounted type CNC

The output files by this function are output to the current directory.
8.7.2.2 Stand-alone type CNC (without personal computer function)

The output files by this function are output to the current directory.
8.7.2.3 Stand-alone type CNC (with personal computer function /

HSSB connection)
Set the following output directory before using this function.
- 581 -
The I/O directory is decided as follows:
Text data
1. The case that bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300 is set to 1
Text data is output to the I/O directory specified by CNC screen display function (PC side)
(Common to memory card and USB memory).
Setting procedure)
Start up CNC screen display function and select "data I/O" in toolbar "file".
2. The case that bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300 is set to 0

Memory card: Text data is output to a memory card on the stand-alone type unit (NC side).
USB memory: Text data is output to the I/O directory specified by CNC screen function (PC side).
SRAM data and User files

SRAM data and user files are output to the I/O directory specified by NCBOOT (PC side) (Common to
memory card and USB memory).
(Setting procedure)
Select a "Setting" in the pop-up menu in IPL monitor.
Refer to "APPENDIX F. MAINTENACE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)" in
MAINTENACE MANUAL (B-64305) for displaying IPL monitor.
Supported edition
This application is supported in the following editions.
- CNC screen display function (HSSB version): Edition 4.2 or later
- NCBOOT (HSSB version): Edition 4.6 or later
This function cannot be operated normally if one of these applications is not supported.
NOTE
1 SRAM data and user files are output to the I/O directory specified by NCBOOT
(PC side) regardless of bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300.
2 When the I/O directory specified by CNC screen display function (PC side) is
different from that specified by NCBOOT (PC side), the output directories of
"Text data" and "SRAM data and User files" differ from each other.
- 582 -
8.7.2.4 Stand-alone type CNC (with personal computer function /

Ethernet connection)
NOTE
USB function cannot be used on stand-alone type CNC with personal computer
function (Ethernet connection).
Set the following output directory before using this function.

The I/O directory is decided as follows:
Text data
Memory card:
- Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300 is set to 1
Text data is output to the I/O directory specified by CNC screen display function (PC side).
Setting procedure)
Start up CNC screen display function and select "data I/O" in toolbar "file".
- Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300 is set to 0

Text data is output to a memory card on the stand-alone type unit (NC side).
USB memory:
Not available.
SRAM data and User files

Memory card:
SRAM data and user files are output to a memory card on the stand-alone type unit (NC side).
The I/O directory specified by NCBOOTE is ignored.
USB memory:
Not available.
NOTE
SRAM data and user files are output to a memory card on the stand-alone type
unit (NC side) regardless of bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300.
- 583 -
8.7.3 List of Output Data
8.7.3.1 Text data

Text data shown in Table 8.7.3.1 (a) are output.
In case of data for each path, text data for all paths are output.
Table 8.7.3.1 (a) Text data list

Optional
Data kind File name Path
function
Tool offset TOOLOFST.TXT ○
Parameter CNC_PARA.TXT
PMC parameter PMCn_PRM.TXT (n: path number)
PMC parameter (Dual Check Safety) PMCS_PRM.TXT ○
Program ALL-FLDR.TXT
Pitch error compensation data PITCH.TXT ○
Custom macro common variable MACRO.TXT ○ ○
Workpiece coordinate system data EXT_WKZ.TXT ○ ○
M code group data MC-GROUP.TXT ○ ○
Operation history data OPRT_HIS.TXT
Maintenance information MAINTINF.TXT
Periodic maintenance data MAINTENA.TXT
Real time custom macro variable RTMMACRO.TXT ○ ○
System configuration data SYS-CONF.TXT
Servo/spindle information SV_SP_ID.TXT
Machine system name data MAINTEMC.TXT
P code variable PCODE.TXT ○ ○
CNC ID information CNCIDNUM.TXT
Operation history signal section data OHIS_SIG.TXT
Torque data (Fine torque sensing) FNTRQSNS.TXT ○
System alarm information SYS_ALM.TXT
Network setting information NETWORK.MEM
NOTE
1 The kinds of output text data are depended on the option setting.
2 The text data which is output by this function can be input on the screen of each
function. Program file “ALL-FLDR.TXT” can be input by using the operation of
inputting all programs and folders on the ALL IO screen.
In case of data for each path, the extension shown in Table 8.7.3.1 (b) is added.
Table 8.7.3.1 (b) Additional extension to path data

Path number Extension
1 TXT
2 P-2
3 P-3
4 P-4
- 584 -
8.7.3.2 SRAM data and User files

SRAM data and all data in FROM are output by this function.
The examples of the output file are as follows.
Table 8.7.3.2 User file list

File kind File name Remarks
Option information OPRM_INF.000
PMC sequence program PMCn.000 n: Path number
PMC sequence program for Dual Check PMCS.000
Safety
PMC multi-language message MnPMCMSG n: Path number
C-language executer application data CEX_nnM.000 nn: Either 05, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50,
60, 70, 80, 90 or A0
C-language executer user data file CEXnxxxx.000 n: numeric character
x: alphanumeric character
Macro executer application data PDnnxxxx.000 n: P-CODE number
xxxx: Data size
FANUC PICTURE application data FPF_20M.000
FANUC PICTURE screen data FPF0xx.000 xx: Data size (unit of 128KB, decimal number)
Machine operation menu data EXSFTKEY.000
Fine torque sensing data FINE_TRQ.000
I/O configuration IOCONF.000
Machine alarm diagnosis data TDG-DATA.000
NOTE
The kinds of output user files are depended on the option setting.
8.7.4 List of Message

8.7.4.1 Warning message
The following message is displayed, when an error occurs by an operation on all data output screen.
Table8.7.4.1 Warning message list

Warning message Description
MEMORY CARD IS NOT READY. The memory card is not mounted.
Mount the memory card.
USB MEMORY IS NOT MOUNTING The USB memory is not mounted.
Mount the USB memory.
THE MACHINE IS UNDER USE The I/O device is used by other functions.
CHANGE TO EDIT MODE Select the EDIT mode.
PLEASE RELEASE EMERGENCY STOP Cancel emergency stop state.
PARAMETER SETTING ERROR The I/O device could not be accessed.
Set the following parameters.
Parameter (No.0020) = 4 or 17
Parameter IO4(No.110#0) = 0
Parameter MDP(No.138#0) = 1
OUTPUT ERROR(PMC PARAM The error occurred while outputting PMC parameter.
FORMAT ERROR The format cannot be executed.
- 585 -
8.7.4.2 Error message

If the error occurred while outputting SRAM data or user files, the following error message is displayed
on IPL screen.
Table8.7.4.2 Error message list

Error message Description
DEVICE NOT READY The I/O device is not ready.
DEVICE FULL The capacity of the I/O device is insufficient.
DEVICE PROTECTED The I/O device is write–protected.
DEVICE NOT MOUNTED The I/O device could not be mounted.
FILE PROTECTED The file is write–protected.
CANCELED The output operation is canceled.
DIRECTORY FULL The file could not be generated in the root directory for the I/O
device.
Reduce the number of files in root directory.
8.8 INPUT/OUTPUT FILE NAME FOR MULTI-PATH SYSTEM

This function is used to add the path number to the extension of the input/output file.
This function can manage the files easily for each path.
This function is available when bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No.138 is set to 1.
NOTE
This function is available only when input/output is executed by not specifying
the file name but using default file name.
If the file name is specified, this function is unavailable. In that case, the
specified file name is used for input/output and the path number is not added.
Explanation
- About extension
When bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No.138 is set to 1, the path number is added to the extension of the
default file name.
The extension of each path is as follows.
Table 8.8 (a) Extension of default file name

1 TXT
2 P-2
3 P-3
4 P-4
Example) In case of offset data, the default file name is as follows.
Table 8.8 (b) Input/output filename of offset data

Default file name
Path number
Parameter MDP=0 Parameter MDP=1
1 TOOLOFST.TXT TOOLOFST.TXT
2 TOOLOFST.TXT TOOLOFST.P-2
- 586 -
- Target data
This function is available only for path individual data. The path number is not added for path common
data by this function.
- Part program
This function is available for the part program.
The extension of each path is as follows.
Table 8.8 (c) Extension of part program

1 Nothing
2 P-2
3 P-3
4 P-4
Example) When the part program “O0001” is input/output, the file name is as follows.
Table 8.8 (d) Input/output file name of part program

File name
Path number
Parameter MDP=0 Parameter MDP=1
1 O0001 O0001
2 O0001 O0001.P-2
3 O0001 O0001.P-3
4 O0001 O0001.P-4
NOTE
If the file name is specified, the path number is not added.
For example, when “O0001” is output by using [F SET] on second path, the
output file name is “O0001”. It is not “O0001.P-2”.
- 587 -
9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64504EN/02
9 CREATING PROGRAMS
This chapter explains how to create programs by MDI of the CNC.
This chapter also explains automatic insertion of sequence numbers and how to create programs in
TEACH IN mode.
Creation/registration
Program creation Creating programs using MDI panel...................... See III-9.1

Automatic insertion of sequence numbers ............ See III-9.2
Creating programs in TEACH IN mode ................. See III-9.3
Program Registration from external input..........................See III-8.2.1

registration
Editing
Management
Output Execution
9.1 CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI PANEL

Programs can be created in the EDIT mode using the program editing functions described in III-10.
Procedure for Creating Programs Using the MDI Panel
1 Enter the EDIT mode.

2 Press the key.
3 Press address key and enter the program number.
4 Press the key.

5 Create a program using the program editing functions described in III-10.
- 588 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS
Explanation
- Comments in a program
Comments can be written in a program using the control in/out codes.
Example) O0001 (TEST PROGRAM) ;
M08 (COOLANT ON) ;
• When the key is pressed after the control-out code "(", comments, and control-in code ")"
have been typed, the typed comments are registered.
• When the key is pressed midway through comments, to enter the rest of comments later, the
data typed before the key is pressed may not be correctly registered (not entered, modified, or
lost) because the data is subject to an entry check which is performed in normal editing.
• Control-out code "(" or Control-in code ")" cannot be registered by itself.
9.2 AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS

Sequence numbers can be automatically inserted in each block when a program is created using the MDI
keys in the EDIT mode.
Set the increment for sequence numbers in parameter No. 3216.
Procedure for automatic insertion of sequence numbers

Procedure
1 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for "SEQUENCE NO." in setting data. (see III-12.3.1).
2 Enter the EDIT mode.
3 Press key to display the program screen.
4 Search for or register the number of a program to be edited and move the cursor to the EOB (;) of the
block after which automatic insertion of sequence numbers is started.
When a program number is registered and an EOB (;) is entered with the key, sequence
numbers are automatically inserted starting with 0. Change the initial value, if required, according to
step 10, then skip to step 7.
5 Press address key and enter the initial value of N.
6 Press key.
7 Enter each word of a block.
8 Press key.
9 Press key. The EOB is registered in memory and sequence numbers are automatically
inserted. For example, if the initial value of N is 10 and the parameter for the increment is set to 2,
N12 inserted and displayed below the line where a new block is specified.
- 589 -
Fig. 9.2
10 In the example above, if N12 is not necessary in the next block, pressing the key after N12 is
displayed deletes N12.
If wishing to insert N100, not N12, into the next block, type N100 immediately after N12 is
displayed, and press . This causes N100 to be registered and the initial value to be changed to
100.
9.3 CREATING PROGRAMS IN TEACH IN MODE

(PLAYBACK)
In the TEACH IN JOG or TEACH IN HANDLE mode, you can create a program while inserting the
coordinate of the current position along each axis in the absolute coordinate system when the tool is
moved by manual operation into the program.
You can input the words other than axis names in the same way as in the EDIT mode.
Program screen in the TEACH IN JOG mode

Displayed items
In the TEACH IN JOG or TEACH IN HANDLE MODE, the following program screen is displayed.
On the left of the screen, the coordinates of the current position in the absolute and relative coordinate
systems are displayed; on the right of the screen, the contents of a program are displayed. You can create
a program while checking the current position by manual operation.
- 590 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS
Fig. 9.3 (a) Program screen in the TEACH IN JOG mode
Inputting the coordinates of the current position

You can use the following procedure to insert the coordinate of the current position along each axis in the
absolute coordinate system:
1 Select the TEACH IN JOG mode or TEACH IN HANDLE mode.

2 Press key to display the program screen. Search for or register the number of a program to be
edited and move the cursor to the position where the current position along each axis is to be
inserted.
3 Move the tool to the desired position with jog or handle.
4 Key in the axis name of an axis along which you want to insert the coordinate of the current
position.
5 Press the editing key or . Then, the coordinate of the current position along the
specified axis is inserted in the program.
(Example) X10.521 Coordinate of the current position
X10521 Data inserted in the program
Example
O1234 ; Y
(3.025, 23.72 3)
G92 X1 0000 Y 0 ;
G00 G 90 X30 25 Y 23723 ; P1
M02 ;
P0
X
(10.0, 0)
Fig. 9.3 (b)
1 Select the TEACH IN HANDLE mode.

2 Make positioning at position P0 by the manual pulse generator.
3 Select the program screen.
- 591 -
4 Enter program number O1234 as follows:

O 1 2 3 4
This operation input program number O1234 in memory.
Next, press the following keys:
An EOB (;) is entered after program number O1234.

5 Enter the P0 machine position for data of the first block as follows:
G 9 2 X Y
This operation registers G92X10000Y0; in program.
6 Position the tool at P1 with the manual pulse generator.
7 Enter the P1 machine position for data of the second block as follows:
G 0 0 G 9 0 X Y
This operation input G00G90X3025Y23723; in program.
8 Input M02; in program as follows:
M 0 2
This completes the registration of the sample program.
Explanation
- Registering a position with compensation
When an axis name and a numeric value are keyed in and the editing key or is pressed, the
value keyed in is added to the absolute coordinate of the current position and the coordinate is inserted.
This operation allows insertion of a corrected value for the absolute coordinate position.
When an extended axis name is used and the name ends with a numeric value, insert an equal sign (=)
between the axis name and numeric value.
- Registering commands other than position commands

Commands to be entered before and after a position command must be entered before and after the
machine position is registered, by using the same operation as program editing in EDIT mode.
- Calculator-type input
When the calculator-type input format is disabled (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 0), the
coordinate of the current position is inserted into the program in least input increments. When the
calculator-type input format is enabled (the bit is set to 1), the coordinate is inserted with a decimal point.
(Example)
Coordinate of the current position X10.521
At this time, the X-axis coordinate is inserted into the program as follows:
When the calculator-type input format is disabled X10521
When the calculator-type input format is enabled X10.521
- 592 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS
10 EDITING PROGRAMS
This chapter describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing includes the insertion,
modification, and deletion of words. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program and automatic
insertion of sequence numbers. In addition, PC-like program text copy and move operations are possible.
This chapter also describes program search, sequence number search, word search, and address search,
which are performed before editing the program.
Creation and
registration
Editing
1) Program search.................................................................See III-10.5.

Search for part 2) Sequence number search .................................................See III-10.6.
of program to be 3) Word search ...................................................................See III-10.2.1.
edited 4) Address search...............................................................See III-10.2.1.
1) Inserting, altering, and deleting a word ...........See III-10.2.3 to 10.2.5.

2) Replacing word or address................................................See III-10.3.
Editing and 2) Deleting blocks ..................................................................See III-10.4.
deleting programs 3) Deleting programs ........................................................... See III-10.7.
4) Editing characters............................................................See III-10.10.
Management
Output Execution
10.1 EDIT DISABLE ATTRIBUTE AND DISPLAY DISABLE

ATTRIBUTE
Before a program can be edited, the edit disable attribute and display disable attribute must be removed.
The edit disable attribute and display disable attribute can be set for each program and folder.
Programs with the edit disable attribute or display disable attribute, and programs in folders with the edit
disable attribute or display disable attribute cannot be edited.
Procedure for removing the edit disable attribute

1 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
5 Press the soft key [DETAIL ON].
- 593 -
10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64504EN/02
6 Move the cursor to the program or folder from which you want to remove the edit disable attribute.
7 Press the soft key [CHANGE ATTR].
8 Press the soft key [EDIT ENABLE].
9 Press the soft key [END].
CAUTION
1 After completing editing, set the edit disable attribute as necessary.
2 To set the edit disable attribute, follow the same procedure as for removing the
attribute.
In the step 8, press the soft key [EDIT DISABL].
Procedure for removing the display disable attribute

1 Select MDI mode.
2 Set the same value as the password (parameter No. 3210 (PSW)) in parameter No. 3211 (KEY) to
release protection of programs.
3 Select EDIT mode.
7 Press the soft key [DETAIL ON].
8 Move the cursor to the program or folder from which you want to remove the display disable
attribute.
10 Press the soft key [DISP ENABLE].
11 Press the soft key [END].
CAUTION
1 After completing editing, set the display disable attribute as necessary.
2 To set the display disable attribute, perform steps 1 to 9 of the procedure for
removing the attribute and press soft key [DISP DISABL] in step 10. Then, set
parameter No. 3210 (PSW) to a value other than 0 that is not the value set in
parameter No. 3211 (KEY). The program or folder is not displayed in any list
screen.
10.2 INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD

This section outlines the procedure for inserting, altering, and deleting a word in a program registered in
memory.
Procedure for inserting, altering and deleting a word

1 Select EDIT mode.
3 Select a program to be edited.
If a program to be edited is selected, perform the operation 4.
If a program to be edited is not selected, search for the program number.
4 Move the cursor to the position to be edited, with one of the methods below.
• Scan method
• Word search method
• Address search method
- 594 -
For each method, refer to III-10.2.1.
5 Perform an operation such as altering, inserting, or deleting a word.
Explanation
- Concept of word and editing unit
A word is an address followed by a number. With a custom macro, the concept of word is ambiguous.
So the editing unit is considered here.
The editing unit is a unit subject to alteration or deletion in one operation. In one scan operation, the
cursor indicates the start of an editing unit.
An insertion is made after an editing unit.
Definition of editing unit
• Program portion from an address to immediately before the next address
• An address is an alphabet, IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO=, or ; (EOB).
According to this definition, a word is an editing unit.
The word "word," when used in the description of editing, means an editing unit according to the precise
definition.
WARNING
When a change, insertion, or deletion was performed on data of a program by
pausing machining with the single block stop, feed hold, or other operations
during execution of a program, be sure to return the cursor to the original position
before restarting the program. To execute the program with the cursor positioned
at another position, be sure to make a reset.
Otherwise, the program may not be executed as expected from the program
shown on the screen after machining restarts.
10.2.1 Word Search

A word can be searched for by merely moving the cursor through the text (scanning), by word search, or
by address search.
Procedure for scanning a program
1 Press the cursor key .

The cursor moves forward word by word; the cursor is displayed at a selected word.
The cursor moves backward word by word; the cursor is displayed at a selected word.
Example: Scanning X100.
Fig. 10.2.1 (a)
3 Holding down the cursor key or scans words continuously.
4 The first word of the next block is searched for when the cursor key is pressed.
- 595 -
5 The first word of the previous block is searched for when the cursor key is pressed.
6 Holding down the cursor key or moves the cursor to the head of a block continuously.
7 Pressing the page key displays the next page and searches for the first word of the page.
8 Pressing the page key displays the previous page and searches for the first word of the page.
9 Holding down the page key or displays one page after another.
Procedure for searching a word

Example of searching for S12
N01234 is being searched

for/scanned currently.
S12 is searched for.
Fig. 10.2.1 (b)
1 Press soft key [SEARCH].

2 Key in address S .
3 Key in 1 2 .
• S12 cannot be searched for if only S1 is keyed in.
• S09 cannot be searched for by keying in only S9.
To search for S09, be sure to key in S09.
4 Pressing soft key [↓ SEARCH] starts searching forward from the cursor position. Pressing [↑
SEARCH] starts searching backward.
5 To search for the same word successively, press [↓ SEARCH] or [↑ SEARCH].
Procedure for searching an address

Example of searching for M03
N01234 is being searched

for/scanned currently.
M03 is searched for.
Fig. 10.2.1 (c)
1 Pressing the [SEARCH] key

2 Key in address M .
3 Pressing soft key [↓ SEARCH] starts searching forward from the cursor position. Pressing [↑
SEARCH] starts searching backward.
4 To search for the same word successively, press [↓ SEARCH] or [↑ SEARCH].
- 596 -
10.2.2 Heading a Program

The cursor can be jumped to the top of a program. This function is called heading the program pointer.
This section describes the four methods for heading the program pointer.
Procedure for heading a program

Method 1
1 Press key when the program screen is selected in EDIT mode. When the cursor has
returned to the start of the program, the contents of the program are displayed from its start on
the screen.
Method 2 Search for the program number.

1 When the program screen is selected in MEMORY or EDIT mode, enter a program number or
program name.
When entering a program number, press address key O then type the program number.
2 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH].
Method 3
1 Select the program screen or program check screen in MEMORY mode.
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
3 Press soft key [REWIND].
Method 4
1 Select the program screen in EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [LINE SEARCH].
4 Press soft key [TOP].
10.2.3 Inserting a Word

Procedure for inserting a word
1 Search for or scan the word immediately before a word to be inserted.
2 Key in an address to be inserted.
3 Key in data.
4 Press the key.
Example of Inserting T15

1 Search for or scan X100.
X100.0 is searched
for/scanned.
Fig. 10.2.3 (a)
2 Key in T 1 5 .
- 597 -
3 Press the key.
T15 is inserted.
Fig. 10.2.3 (b)
10.2.4 Altering a Word

Procedure for altering a word
1 Search for or scan a word to be altered.
2 Key in an address to be inserted.
3 Key in data.
4 Press the key.
Example of changing T15 to M15

1 Search for or scan T15.
T15 is searched for/scanned.
Fig. 10.2.4 (a)
2 Key in M 1 5 .
3 Press the key.
T15 is changed to M15.
Fig. 10.2.4 (b)
10.2.5 Deleting a Word

Procedure for deleting a word
1 Search for or scan a word to be deleted.
2 Press the key.
- 598 -
Example of deleting X100.0

1 Search for or scan X100.0.
X100.0 is searched
for/scanned.
Fig. 10.2.5 (a)
2 Press the key.
X100.0 is deleted.
Fig. 10.2.5 (b)
10.3 REPLACING A WORD OR ADDRESS

Replace the specified word or address in a program at a time.
The following methods are available: Replacement after checking each found character string and batch
replacement without checking any found character string.
Procedure for replacing a word or address

- Replacing a word or address after checking each found character string
1 Move the cursor to the position from which to start replacement.
2 Press soft key [REPLCE].
3 Enter a word or address before replacement.
4 Press soft key [BEFORE].
5 Enter a word or address after replacement.
6 Press soft key [AFTER].
7 Press soft key [↑ SEARCH] or [↓ SEARCH]. The word or address is searched for in the direction of
the arrow.
8 Press soft key [REPLCE] to replace the character string at the cursor and search for the match.
If you want to search for the next match without replacing the character string at the cursor, press
soft key [↑ SEARCH] or [↓ SEARCH].
9 Repeat step 8 until required replacement is terminated.
To terminate replacement during operation, press soft key [END].
- Replacing a word or address without checking any found character string

1 Move the cursor to the position from which to start replacement.
3 Enter a word or address before replacement.
4 Press soft key [BEFORE].
5 Enter a word or address after replacement.
6 Press soft key [AFTER].
- 599 -
7 Press soft key [↑ SEARCH] or [↓ SEARCH]. The word or address is searched for in the direction of
the arrow.
8 Press soft key [REPLCE ALL].
9 To cancel replace all operation, press soft key [NO].
To execute replace all operation, press soft key [YES]. The word or address is searched for from the
cursor position in the direction of the arrow in the soft key pressed in step 7 and all found character
strings are replaced at a time. Replace all operation is performed to the beginning of the program for
upward replacement or to the end of the program for downward replacement.
NOTE
1 Any character string containing EOB cannot be specified as the character string
before or after replacement.
2 Pressing soft key [REPLCE ALL] during replacement with checking each found
character string allows replacement without checking the following found
character strings to start.
10.4 DELETING BLOCKS

A block or blocks can be deleted in a program.
10.4.1 Deleting a Block

The portion from the current word position to the next EOB is deleted. The cursor is then placed in the
word next to the deleted EOB.
Procedure for deleting a block

1 Search for or scan address N for a block to be deleted.
2 Press the key.
3 Press the editing key .
Example of deleting a block of N01234

1 Search for or scan N01234.
N01234 is searched
for/scanned.
Fig. 10.4.1 (a)
2 Press the key.
- 600 -
Block containing N01234

has been deleted.
Fig. 10.4.1 (b)
10.4.2 Deleting Multiple Blocks

The several blocks in the forward direction from the current word position up to the EOB of the farthest
of those blocks are deleted. The cursor is then placed in the word next to the deleted EOB.
Procedure for deleting blocks

1 Search for or scan a word in the first block of a portion to be deleted.
2 Press the key as many times as the number of blocks that you want to delete.
Example of deleting blocks from N01234 to the EOB of a block which is two blocks
ahead
1 Search for or scan N01234.
N01234 is searched
for/scanned.
Fig. 10.4.2 (a)
2 Press .
Blocks from N01234 to

the EOB of a block
which is two blocks
ahead are deleted.
Fig. 10.4.2 (b)
10.5 PROGRAM SEARCH

When memory holds multiple programs, a program can be searched for. There are four methods as
follows.
Procedure for program search

Method 1 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode.
2 Press function key to display the program screen.
- 601 -
3 Enter a program number or program name. When entering a program number, press
address key then type the program number.
4 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH]. Alternatively, press the cursor key or
.
5 Upon completion of search operation, the program number searched for is displayed in
the upper-right corner of the screen
If the program is not found, alarm PS0071 occurs.
Method 2 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode.

4 Then, press soft key [PREV PROGRM] or [NEXT PROGRM].
Pressing [PREV PROGRM] searches for the previous program on the folder, and pressing
[NEXT PROGRM] searches for the next program.
Method 3 This method searches for the program number (0001 to 0031) corresponding to a signal
on the machine tool side to start automatic operation. Refer to the relevant manual
prepared by the machine tool builder for detailed information on operation.
1 Select MEMORY mode.
2 Set the reset state.
• The reset state is the state where the LED for indicating that automatic operation is in
progress is off. (Refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder.)
3 Set the program number selection signal on the machine tool side to a number from 01 to
31.
4 Press the cycle start button.
• When the signal on the machine tool side represents 00, program number search
operation is not performed.
• If the program corresponding to a signal on the machine tool side is not registered,
alarm DS0059 is raised.
Method 4 When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 1, search for an O number program by
specifying digits only.
1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode.
3 Enter the digits of a program number. Address key need not be pressed before the
digits.
4 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH]. Alternatively, press the cursor key or
Example
• When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 1
Specify "1000" → Search for program O1000.
Specify "ABC" → Search for program ABC.
• When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 0
Specify "1000" → Search for program 1000.
Specify "ABC" → Search for program ABC.
- 602 -
When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 1, it is not possible to search for a program
with any name consisting of digits only.
10.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH

Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for a sequence number in the middle of a
program so that execution can be started or restarted at the block of the sequence number.
Example) Sequence number 02346 in a program (O0002) is searched for.

PROGRAM
O0001 ;
N01234 X100.0 Y100.0 ;
S12 ;
:
Selected program O0002 ;
This section is searched
N02345 X20.0 Y20.0 ;
starting at the beginning.
N02346 X10.0 Y10.0 ;
Target sequence (Search operation is
:
number is found. performed only within a
O0003 ;
program.)
:
Fig. 10.6 (a)
Procedure for sequence number search

Procedure
1 Select MEMORY mode.
2 Press function key .
3 If the program contains a sequence number to be searched for, perform the operations 4 to 7 below.
If the program does not contain a sequence number to be searched for, select the program number of
the program that contains the sequence number to be searched for.
4 Press address key .
5 Key in a sequence number to be searched for.
6 Press soft key [N SRH].
7 Upon completion of search operation, the sequence number searched for is displayed in the
upper-right corner of the screen.
If the specified sequence number is not found in the program currently selected, alarm PS0060
occurs.
Explanation
- Operation during Search
Those blocks that are skipped do not affect the CNC. This means that the data in the skipped blocks such
as coordinates and M, S, and T codes does not alter the CNC coordinates and modal values.
So, in the first block where execution is to be started or restarted by using a sequence number search
command, be sure to enter required M, S, and T codes and coordinates. A block searched for by sequence
number search usually represents a point of shifting from one process to another. When a block in the
middle of a process must be searched for to restart execution at the block, specify M, S, and T codes, G
codes, coordinates, and so forth as required from the MDI after closely checking the machine tool and NC
states at that point.
- Checking during search

During search operation, the following checks are made:
• Optional block skip
- 603 -
Limitation
- Searching in sub-program
During sequence number search operation, M98Pxxxx (subprogram call) is not executed. So an alarm
PS0060 is raised if an attempt is made to search for a sequence number in a subprogram called by the
program currently selected.
O1234 O5678
: :
: N88888
M98 P5678 ; :
: M99 ;
: :
If an attempt is made to search for N8888 in the example above, an alarm occurs.
Fig. 10.6 (b)
10.7 DELETING PROGRAMS

Programs registered in memory can be deleted, either one program by one program or all at once.
10.7.1 Deleting One Program

A single program in the folder containing the program currently being edited can be deleted.
Procedure for deleting one program

1 Select the EDIT mode.

4 Key in a desired program number.
5 Press the editing key . The program with the entered program number is deleted.
10.7.2 Deleting All Programs

All programs in the folder containing the program currently being edited can be deleted.
Procedure for deleting all programs

1 Select the EDIT mode.

4 Key in -9999.
5 Press editing key to delete all programs.
10.8 EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS

Unlike ordinary programs, custom macro programs are modified, inserted, or deleted based on editing
units.
Custom macro words can be entered in abbreviated form.
- 604 -
Comments can be entered in a program.
Refer to the III-9.1 for the comments of a program.
Explanation
- Editing unit
When editing a custom macro already entered, the user can move the cursor to each editing unit that starts
with any of the following characters and symbols:
(a) Address
(b) # located at the start of the left side of a substitution statement
(c) /, (,=, and ;
(d) First character of IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, POPEN, BPRNT, DPRNT and PCLOS
On the screen, a blank is placed before each of the above characters and symbols.
Example) Head positions where the cursor is placed
N001 X-#100 ;
#1 =123 ;
N002 /2 X[12/#3] ;
N003 X-SQRT[#3/3*[#4+1]] ;
N004 X-#2 Z#1 ;
N005 #5 =1+2-#10 ;
IF[#1NE0] GOTO10 ;
WHILE[#2LE5] DO1 ;
#[200+#2] =#2*10 ;
#2 =#2+1 ;
END1 ;
- Abbreviations of custom macro word

When a custom macro word is altered or inserted, the first two characters or more can replace the entire
word.
Namely,
WHILE → WH GOTO → GO XOR → XO AND → AN SIN → SI ASIN → AS
COS → CO ACOS → AC TAN → TA ATAN → AT SQRT → SQ ABS → AB
BCD → BC BIN → BI FIX → FI FUP → FU ROUND → RO END → EN
POPEN → PO BPRNT → BP DPRNT → DP PCLOS → PC EXP → EX THEN → TH
Example) Keying in
WH [AB [#2 ] LE RO [#3 ] ] has the same effect as
WHILE [ABS [#2 ] LE ROUND [#3 ] ]
The program is also displayed in this way.
10.9 CURSOR MOVEMENT LIMITATIONS ON PROGRAM

EDITING
If a program is to be edited while it is stopped or halted, limitations are imposed so that already executed
blocks and buffered blocks cannot be edited. Modifiable blocks are those at and below the cursor position
at the time the system switches to the edit mode (EDIT). In the remainder of this manual, the area of
editable blocks is called the edit-enabled area, while the area of executed blocks and buffered blocks is
called the edit-disabled area.
These limitations are applied when the automatic operation status signal <F0000.7> is ON and when a
single block execution of MDI operation is edited, and are also applied to TEACH IN HNDL or TEACH
IN JOG mode when the playback option is enabled.
This function is enabled when bit 3 (FPD) of parameter No. 11308 is 1.
- 605 -
Explanation
- States where cursor movement limitations are imposed
• EDIT mode while automatic operation is stopped or halted
• MDI mode and when a single block is set
• TEACH IN HNDL or TEACH IN JOG mode (only when the playback function is enabled)
- Cursor movement
Operations that cause the cursor to move to blocks above the edit mode start position are ignored.
• ↑
• ←
• PAGE UP
• CAN (character editing)
- Search and replacement

Operations that cause the cursor to move to the edit-disabled area are disabled.
• Top line search: Results in a search of the top line of the edit-enabled block.
• Specified-line search (character editing): Made through the edit-enabled area.
If, however, an attempt is made to search through the edit-disabled area, warning "PROGRAM IN
OPERATION" is issued, and the operation is disabled.
• Upward search: Made through the edit-enabled area.
If attempted at the beginning of the edit-enabled block, this operation is ignored.
• Upward search (replacement): Made through the edit-enabled area.
• Upward candidate search: Made through the edit-enabled area.
• Character string + ↑ (search): Typing the character string to search for and pressing the ↑ key
searches for the character string.
This search is made through the edit-enabled area. If attempted at the beginning of the edit-enabled
block, this operation is ignored.
• Replace all: This operation is disabled.
- Reset
The program execution status is canceled, and the cursor movement limitations are also canceled.
- Program search
Program search operations are disabled in following screens.
• Program Editing screen(Word editing/Character editing/Program contents display/Playback)
• Program Check screen
Warning "PROGRAM IN OPERATION" is issued, and the operation is disabled.
• Program List screen
When bit 5 (PES) of parameter No. 11302 is 1, only the cursor movement to selected program is
executed. Setting to the main program and changing to editing screen are not executed.
- Time insertion
When the machining time stamp function is enabled, soft key [INSERT TIME] does not appear in the
state in which the cursor movement limitations are imposed.
10.10 PASSWORD FUNCTION

The password function locks bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202, which protects programs with program
Nos. O9000 to O9999 and programs and folders having the edit/display disable attribute, according to the
settings in two parameters, PASSWORD (parameter No. 3210) and KEYWD (parameter No. 3211). In
- 606 -
the locked state, parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0. In this case, the protection of programs with program
Nos. O9000 to O9999 and programs and folders having the edit/display disable attribute cannot be
released unless a correct keyword is set.
A locked state means that the value set in the parameter PASSWD differs from the value set in the
parameter KEYWD. The values set in these parameters are not displayed. The locked state is released
when the value already set in the parameter PASSWD is also set in parameter KEYWD. When 0 is
displayed in parameter PASSWD, parameter PASSWD is not set.
Procedure for locking and unlocking

Locking
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Enable parameter writing (III-12.3.1). At this time, alarm PS0100 is issued on the CNC.
3 Set parameter No. 3210 (PASSWD). At this time, the locked state is set.
4 Disable parameter writing.
5 Press the key to release the alarm state.
Unlocking
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Enable parameter writing (III-12.3.1). At this time, alarm SW0100 is issued on the CNC.
3 In parameter No. 3211 (KEYWD), set the same value as set in parameter No. 3210 (PASSWD) for
locking. At this time, the locked state is released.
4 Set bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No.3202 to 0.
5 Disable parameter writing.
6 Press the key to release the alarm state.
7 Subprograms from program Nos. 9000 to 9999 can now be edited.
Explanation
- Setting parameter PASSWD
The locked state is set when a value is set in the parameter PASSWD. However, note that parameter
PASSWD can be set only when the locked state is not set (when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD = KEYWD).
If an attempt is made to set parameter PASSWD in other cases, a warning is given to indicate that writing
is disabled. When the locked state is set (when PASSWD ≠ 0 and PASSWD ≠ KEYWD), parameter NE9
is automatically set to 1. If an attempt is made to set NE9 to 0, a warning is given to indicate that writing
is disabled.
- Changing parameter PASSWD

Parameter PASSWD can be changed when the locked state is released (when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD
= KEYWD). After step 3 in the procedure for unlocking, a new value can be set in the parameter
PASSWD. From that time on, this new value must be set in parameter KEYWD to release the locked
state.
- Setting 0 in parameter PASSWD

When 0 is set in the parameter PASSWD, the number 0 is displayed, and the password function is
disabled. In other words, the password function can be disabled by either not setting parameter PASSWD
at all, or by setting 0 in parameter PASSWD after step 3 of the procedure for unlocking. To ensure that
the locked state is not entered, care must be taken not to set a value other than 0 in parameter PASSWD.
- Re-locking
After the locked state has been released, it can be set again by setting a different value in parameter
PASSWD, or by turning the power to the NC off then on again to reset parameter KEYWD.
- 607 -
CAUTION
1 Once the locked state is set, parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0 and parameter
PASSWD cannot be changed until the locked state is released or the memory
all-clear operation is performed. Special care must be taken in setting parameter
PASSWD.
2 The edit/display disable attribute cannot be set unless parameter PASSWD is
set.
3 In the locked state, programs with the edit/display disable attribute are treated as
follows:
• The presence of the programs is hidden. This means that these programs are
not displayed on screens such as the program folder screen. These programs
cannot be edited either.
• These programs cannot be selected as a main program. They can be called
as subprograms.
4 In the unlocked state, programs with the edit/display disable attribute are treated
in the same manner as ordinary programs.
5 The programs in a folder having the edit/display disable attribute are also treated
as described in Caution 3 and 4 above.
6 In the locked state, the folders in a folder having the edit/display disable attribute
are treated as follows:
• The presence of the folders is hidden. This means that these folders are not
displayed on screens such as the program folder screen.
7 In the unlocked state, the folders in a folder having the edit/display disable
attribute are treated in the same manner as ordinary folders.
10.11 EDITING PROGRAM CHARACTERS

This section describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC.
Editing operations include character insertion, modification, deletion, and replacement.
While program word editing is performed by recognizing program words, program character editing is
performed on a character-by-character basis.
Fig. 10.11 Character editing
- 608 -
Explanation
- Edit unit
Character editing is performed on a character-by-character basis. Select between character editing and
word editing according to what to edit.
- Line
A range delimited by an EOB is specified as a line.
In character editing, edited data is saved on a line-by-line basis.
When one program line contains many characters, it extends over multiple lines on the screen, but these
lines are counted as one program line.
- Line splitting
When the cursor is on a line during line editing, pressing edit key causes the line to be split into
two, one before the cursor and the other after the cursor.
Pressing edit key immediately after the line is split causes the lines to return to a single one.
Alternatively, moving the cursor to the EOB of the first line resulting from the split and pressing edit key
causes the lines to return to a single one.
- Line merging
If the EOB of a line is deleted, the line is combined with the next line to form a single line.
- Maximum number of characters in one line

One line can consist of up to 140 characters.
- Line number
The number of lines are counted starting with the starting line of a program, which is counted as the first
line. Even when a line wraps around to the next and subsequent lines, these lines are counted as a single
line.
- Clipboard
The clipboard is an area to store characters when a cut or copy operation is performed. The area has a
capacity for holding approximately 4000 characters.
The characters that are cut or copied by one cut or copy operation are stored. The most recently stored
character string can be used by the paste function.
The information stored by the paste operation is kept unchanged until another cut or copy operation is
performed.
The characters stored in the clipboard are maintained until the power to the CNC is turned off unless the
clipboard is updated again.
- Undo function
The function for undoing operations performed in program editing undoes operations sequentially,
starting with the one performed last. It can undo only those operations that update character strings.
A single undo operation undoes a single input or deletion operation.
If data updated with replace operations is to be undone, a single undo operation undoes the replacement
of a single item.
Operations of the cursor keys and the page keys cannot be undone
with this function because they do not update character strings.
- Example of the undo function

1 Suppose that the following character string is present before modifications:
- 609 -
N110AX[#AXIS3]=100.0;
2 Edit key is pressed five times.
X[#AXIS3]=100.0;
3 Soft key [UNDO] is pressed five times. Then, the original character string is restored as follows:
AX[#AXIS3]=100.0;
0AX[#AXIS3]=100.0;
10AX[#AXIS3]=100.0;
110AX[#AXIS3]=100.0;
N110AX[#AXIS3]=100.0;
- Input modes for editing

Input modes for program editing include insert mode and overwrite mode.
To switch between the input modes, press soft key [INPUT MODE].
Initially, insert mode is set.
• Insert mode
In insert mode, an entered character is inserted between the current cursor position and the preceding
character position.
1234567890
When the cursor is placed at 6, and X is entered, the following results:
12345X67890
• Overwrite mode
In overwrite mode, the character at the cursor position is replaced by an entered character.
1234567890
When the cursor is placed at 6, and X is entered, the following results:
12345X7890
- Restrictions on editing
O numbers and file names cannot be edited.
EOR (%) cannot be deleted.
- Line editing and automatic saving

When a line is edited, the line is displayed in the update color, blue (which can be changed with color
settings), to indicate that the line has been edited. When the line is displayed in the update color, the edit
has not yet been saved.
When the cursor is moved to a line preceding or succeeding the edited line, the edit is automatically saved,
and the line display changes from the update color to the normal color.
Alternatively, pressing soft key [SAVE] enables the edit to be saved.
- Function for automatically saving an edited line vs. function for undoing
editing operations (UNDO function)
When an edit operation is undone, the line is displayed in the update color, and the edit is not saved any
longer. If the cursor moves to another line when the operation is undone, the edit is automatically saved.
10.11.1 Available Keys

The available keys are as follows:
- Cursor keys
Cursor keys , , , and move the cursor.
- 610 -
- Editing key
Deletes the character at the cursor position.
- Editing key
Deletes the character immediately before the cursor position.
When the cursor is at the beginning of a line, the character at the end of the previous line is deleted.
- Editing key
Causes a line change.
- Page change keys

Pages are changed using page key or
Page key moves to the next page.
When page key is pressed on the last page, the cursor moves to the last character position of the
last line (the % position).
Page key moves to the previous page.
When page key is pressed on the first page, the cursor moves to the first character position of the
first line.
- Character keys
Characters are entered using these keys.
10.11.2 Input Mode

Input modes include insert mode and overwrite mode.
Changing input mode

To switch between the input modes, use soft key [INPUT MODE].
Pressing soft key [INPUT MODE] causes insert mode and overwrite mode to be selected alternately.
The current mode is indicated in the lower right part of the editing screen.
10.11.3 Line Number Display

This function is used to display a program with line numbers. Pressing soft key [LINE NUMBER]
displays a program with line numbers. Pressing soft key [LINE NUMBER] again causes the line numbers
to disappear.
10.11.4 Search
A program is searched for a character string.
Search
Procedure
1 Press soft key [SEARCH].
- 611 -
2 A search character string input area is displayed. Enter the character string to search for. To cancel
the search, press soft key [CANCEL].
3 Upward search operation
Pressing soft key [UP] causes the program to be searched in the upward direction (toward the top),
starting at the current cursor position.
When a search character string is found, the cursor moves to the character string.
Pressing soft key [UP] again causes the program to be searched for the next candidate.
4 Downward search operation
Pressing soft key [DOWN] causes the program to be searched in the downward direction (toward the
bottom), starting at the current cursor position.
Pressing soft key [DOWN] again causes the program to be searched for the next candidate.
10.11.5 Replacement
A character string in a program is replaced with a specified character string.
Replacement
Procedure
2 Search and replacement character string input areas are displayed. Enter a search character string
(character string to be replaced) and a replacement character string (character string to replace the
former character string).
To move between the search character string input area and the replacement character string input
area, use the cursor keys and .
If a search character string is input, but no replacement character string is input, the former character
string will be deleted.
To cancel the replacement, press soft key [CANCEL].
3 Replacement operations
Replacement operations include an operation for searching for a search character string and an
operation for actually replacing it.
To perform an operation for searching for a search string, use soft key [↑ SEARCH] or [↓
SEARCH].
To perform an operation for actually replacing it, use [REPLCE] or [REPLCE ALL].
• Soft key [↑ SEARCH]
Searches the program in the upward direction (toward the top), starting at the current cursor
position.
Pressing soft key [↑ SEARCH] again causes the program to be searched for the next candidate.
• Soft key [↓ SEARCH]
Searches the program in the downward direction (toward the bottom), starting at the current
cursor position.
Pressing soft key [↓ SEARCH] again causes the program to be searched for the next candidate.
• Soft key [REPLCE]
Replaces the character string found with a search operation with a replacement character string.
• Soft key [REPLCE ALL]
Replace all instances of the search character string in the program text with the replacement
character string.
Pressing this soft key causes message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO EXECUTE?" to
appear and also soft key [YES] and soft key [NO] to appear. Pressing soft key [YES] causes all
replacements to be executed.
- 612 -
Pressing soft key [NO] cancels the replacement operation, without executing the replacements.
10.11.6 Reversing Edit Operations (Undo Function)

Edit operations performed on a program can be undone sequentially starting with the one performed last.
Reversing edit operations (undo function)

Procedure
1 Pressing soft key [UNDO] once undoes a single operation.
When there are no longer any operation to be undone, pressing this soft key has no effect.
10.11.7 Copy
A selected character string can be copied to the clipboard.
Copying
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to the beginning of the character string to select.
2 Press soft key [SELECT].
3 Using the cursor keys and the page keys , move the cursor to the
end of the character string to select.
At this time, the background of the selected character string is displayed in the selection color
(cursor color).
4 Press soft key [COPY] to copy the selected character string to the clipboard.
To cancel the copying, press soft key [CANCEL].
10.11.8 Cut
A selected character string can be deleted.
When deleted, the character string is copied to the clipboard.
Cut
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to the beginning of the character string to select.
2 Press soft key [SELECT].
3 Using the cursor keys and the page keys , move the cursor to the
end of the character string to select.
At this time, the background of the selected character string is displayed in the selection color
(cursor color).
4 Press soft key [CUT] to delete the selected character string.
To cancel the deletion, pres soft key [CANCEL].
10.11.9 Paste
The character string stored in the clipboard can be inserted at the current cursor position.
After pasted, the character string remains stored in the clipboard, so that the character string can be pasted
as many times as necessary.
- 613 -
Paste
Procedure
1 Move the cursor to the position at which you want to paste a character string.
2 Press the soft key [PASTE].
10.11.10 Saving
Moving the cursor to a line preceding or succeeding the edited line causes the edit to be automatically
saved, but it is possible to save the edit by pressing soft key [SAVE], if necessary. For a program
consisting of only a single line, in particular, it is necessary to press soft key [SAVE] to save the edit.
Saving
Procedure
1 Press the soft key [SAVE].
10.11.11 Creation
A new program can be created.
Creation
Procedure
1 Press soft key [NEW PROGRM].
2 A program name input area appears.
3 Enter the name of a program to be created.
4 Press the soft key [EXECUTE]. This creates a new program and displays the editing screen.
To cancel the creation of a new program, press soft key [CANCEL].
10.11.12 Line Search

The cursor can be moved to a specified line.
The cursor can be moved to a line with a specified line number, to the first line of the program, and to the
last line of the program.
Line search
Procedure
Movement to a line with a specified line number
2 A line number input area appears.
3 Enter a line number. The first line is regarded as having a line number of 1.
4 Press soft key [LINE NUMBER], and the cursor moves to the specified line.
Movement to the first line

2 Press soft key [TOP], and the cursor moves to the first line of the program.
Movement to the last line

2 Press soft key [BOTTOM], and the cursor moves to the last line of the program.
- 614 -
10.12 KEYS AND PROGRAM ENCRYPTION

Overview
Program contents can be protected by setting parameters for encryption and for the program security
range.
Explanation
1 Security with a password and a security range
When the password and security range parameters are specified, the display, editing, and
input/output operations are disabled for the programs within the security range.
This prevents the custom macro programs created by the machine tool builder from being
accidentally changed or deleted by the end user. This also provides security because the contents of
the programs are not displayed.
2 Input/output of encrypted programs
The programs in the security range can be encrypted before being output. Once encrypted, the
programs cannot be decrypted. In addition, encrypted programs can be input directly.
- Locking/unlocking
When the programs in the security range are secured, the program memory is said to be locked.
If they are not secured, the program memory is said to be unlocked.
- Parameter
• Parameter PASSWORD (No.3220)
Set the password required to lock the program memory. A password other than 0 can be set. The
password is not displayed. A password can be set when no password is set (PASSWORD = 0) or the
program memory is unlocked.
• Parameter KEY (No.3221)
When KEY is set equal to PASSWORD, the program memory is unlocked. The value set for the
parameter is never displayed. Each time the CNC is started, 0 is set for the parameter. This means
that whenever the CNC is started, a lock is provided if a password is set (PASSWORD ≠ 0).
• Minimum value (in parameter No. 3222) and maximum value (in parameter No. 3223) of the
program security range
Set the desired security range. The value set for MINIMUM must not be greater than that set for
MAXIMUM. The programs in the range of MINIMUM to MAXIMUM are secured. If MINIMUM
is set to 0, it is regarded as being 9000. If MAXIMUM is set to 0, it is regarded as being 9999.
A range can be set when no password is set or the program memory is unlocked.
NOTE
1 For security, the values set for PASSWORD and KEY are not displayed. For the
same reason, PASSWORD, MINIMUM, and MAXIMUM can be specified only
when no password is set or the program memory is unlocked. Set a password,
taking great care to avoid a situation where the program memory cannot be
unlocked because a password is set incorrectly.
2 The [+INPUT] key used to specify PASSWORD and KEY behave in the same
way as the [INPUT] soft key.
Example: When 99 is set for KEY, pressing 1 and [+INPUT] changes the
value to.
3 These four parameters cannot be output externally. Also, even when these
parameters are input by the parameter read operation, they are ignored.
- 615 -
- Inputting/outputting and collating programs

When a program is encrypted, a password is output. The password is used to load the program.
The following output operations are enabled for programs outside the security range if the locked state is
present or for programs within the security range if the unlocked state is present:
Outputting all programs

Table 10.12 (a)
Locked/unlocked Results
Locked All the programs outside the security range are output in the normal way.
Unlocked All the programs within the security range are encrypted and output.
Password not set All the programs in the program memory are output in the normal way.
Outputting a single program

Table 10.12 (b)
Locked If a program is outside the security range, it is output in the normal way.
If it is within the security range, a warning "PROTECTED" is issued.
Unlocked If a program is outside the security range, it is output in the normal way.
If it is within the security range, it is encrypted and output.
Password not set The program is output in a normal way.
Outputting specified multiple programs

Table 10.12 (c)
Locked When all of the specified programs fall outside the protected range, they are
output as usual.
When all of the specified programs are within the security range, warning
message "PROTECTED" is issued.
When some of the specified program numbers are outside the security range, and
the others are within the security range, only the programs outside the security
range are output normally.
When the programs to be output are not within the specified range, warning
message "THE WRONG DATA IS USED" is issued.
Unlocked When all of the specified programs fall outside the protected range, they are
output as usual.
When all the specified programs fall within the protected range, they are output as
encoded programs.
When some of the specified program numbers are outside the security range, and
the others are within the security range, only the programs within the security
range are encoded and output.
When the programs to be output are not within the specified range, warning
message "THE WRONG DATA IS USED" is issued.
Password not set The program is output in a normal way.
Inputting an un-encrypted program

Table 10.12 (d)
Locked When the program to be read is outside the security range, it is input normally.
When the program to be read is within the security range, warning message
"PROTECTED" is issued.
Unlocked, or password The program is input.
not set
- 616 -
Inputting an encrypted program

Table 10.12 (e)
Password set in the system
Results
and password of the program
Password set in the system Warning “WRITE PROTECT” is issued.
Password for the program When the program is within the security range, it is input normally.
When the program is outside the security range, warning message "WRITE
PROTECTED" is issued.
Password not set in the system The program is input.
The PSW in the file is set for parameter No. 3220.
This applies if the program is in the security range.
If the program is outside the security range, warning message "PROTECTED" is
issued.
Collating a program with an encrypted program

In the unlocked state, the following takes place:
Table 10.12 (f)
Password set in the system Results
and password of the program
Password set in the system Alarm SR0075 “PROTECT” is issued.
Password set in the system = The program is collated.
Password of the program, or
password not set in the system
In the locked state, program collation cannot be performed.
NOTE
To encrypt programs, set parameter ISO (bit 1 of No.0000) to 1 (to specify that
the output code is ISO).
- Program display
1 On the program folder screen, all program numbers are displayed together with comments.
2 In the locked state, the programs within the security range are not displayed on the program screen.
In the unlocked state, the programs within the security range are displayed in the same way as
normal programs.
NOTE
Immediately after switched from the unlocked state to the locked state or from the
locked state to the unlocked state, programs are displayed in the previous state.
They are displayed in the new state when a program search or other operation is
performed.
- Editing and deleting programs

When the program memory is locked, the programs within the security range cannot be edited or deleted.
When the program memory is locked, an attempt to delete all programs results in only those programs
outside the security range being deleted.
In the locked state, the programs in the security range cannot be selected as a main program. If an attempt
is made to select such a program on the program folder screen as a main program, warning message
"SETTING A MAIN PROGRAM FAILED" is issued.
- Searching for programs

In the locked state, a program search is performed within the protected range as described below.
1 When no program number is specified, programs within the protected range are skipped.
- 617 -
2 When an attempt is made to search for a program within the security range by specifying a program
number, the search operation is ignored, resulting in warning message "Program is protected".
10.13 SIMULTANEOUS EDITING OF MULTIPATH PROGRAMS

Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs enables simultaneous editing of programs for multiple paths
on a single screen.
This function is enabled when bit 0 (DHD) of parameter No. 3106 is 1.
Explanation
- Procedure
1 Set the paths subject to simultaneous editing, with multi-path simultaneous display parameters Nos.
13131 and 13132.
(For details of the parameters, refer to the Parameter Manual (B-64490EN).)
2 Place the paths subject to simultaneous editing in EDIT mode.
4 Press soft key [PROGRAM] to display the program editing screen.
- Screen display
Fig. 10.13 (a) and Fig. 10.13 (b) show examples of performing simultaneous editing of multi-path
programs.
Above each program is a status line on which three items of information are displayed: the program name,
"FG-EDIT", which indicates that the program is being edited in the foreground, and the path name.
For the program currently being edited, its status line is displayed in reverse video.
Target of
editing
Fig. 10.13 (a) Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 618 -
Fig. 10.13 (b) Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs screen (15-inch display unit)
- Modes
When the paths to be displayed simultaneously are in either EDIT or MEM mode, the multi-path
programs are displayed simultaneously on the program screen. Selecting the path for which EDIT mode is
selected enables program editing to be performed.
Fig. 10.14 (c) shows an example in which both EDIT and MEM modes are selected.
For path 1, MEM mode (execution status screen) is selected, and for path 2, EDIT mode (editing screen)
is selected.
Soft keys are switched according to the mode for the currently selected path.
Fig. 10.13 (c) Screen on which both MEM and EDIT modes are selected
- Switching the path subject to editing

The path selected with the path selection signal is subject to editing.
- Maximum number of paths that can be subject to editing simultaneously

The maximum number of paths that can be subject to editing simultaneously on each display unit is as
given in the Table 10.13 .
- 619 -
Table 10.13
Maximum number of paths that can be subject to
Display unit size
editing simultaneously
8.4 or 10.4-inch 3
15 or 19-inch 4
- Conditions under which simultaneous editing is not usable

Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs is disabled in the following cases:
• The program screen is selected as a small screen.
• The paths to be displayed simultaneously include a path for which a mode other than EDIT and
MEM modes is selected.
• The virtual MDI key function is enabled.
If, in the state of simultaneous editing of multi-path programs, background editing is started, background
editing is performed on all screens. Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs and background editing
cannot be used at the same time.
- Simultaneous editing on 8.4-inch display unit

When simultaneous editing is performed on 8.4-inch display unit, the characters get smaller.
The number of characters per path in the editing area is as follows:
• Display of 38 columns and 10 rows for non-simultaneous display
• Display of 74 columns and 15 rows for 1-path simultaneous display
10.14 MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION
10.14.1 Overview
When the program of the path to be edited is scrolled in the simultaneous editing of multi-path programs
screen, other path programs that are displayed on the same screen can be scrolled simultaneously.
Object to be edited
Scrolled simultaneously.
Fig. 10.14.1 Synchronous scroll function
- 620 -
This function provides the simultaneous scroll mode in which all programs being edited simultaneously
are scrolled and the single scroll mode in which only the program to be edited is scrolled. It is possible to
switch between these modes easily through soft key operation.
In the simultaneous scroll mode, when a waiting M-code comes due to a scroll, waiting is performed by
stopping the scroll of the path until the arrival of the same waiting M-code of other paths. It is, therefore,
possible to edit the program while confirming the waiting of each path.
Moreover, the waiting search function enables the cursor positions of all paths being edited
simultaneously to be moved to specified waiting M-code simultaneously.
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
10.14.2 Details
Switching between simultaneous and single scroll modes
The following conditions are necessary for switching between simultaneous scroll mode and single scroll
mode on the program editing screen.
• Bit 0 (DHD) of parameter No. 3106 for enabling the simultaneous multi-path program editing
function is 1.
• There are two or more paths in the simultaneous editing mode.
• All paths being edited simultaneously are in EDIT mode.
• All program editing screens for simultaneous editing are in word editor mode.
NOTE
1 The single scroll mode is selected when the power is turn on.
2 If the above conditions are not satisfied, the scroll mode is automatically
switched to single scroll mode.
Procedure for switching to the simultaneous scroll mode

The procedure for switching to the simultaneous scroll mode is as described below.
4 Press continuous menu key [+] several times until oft key [SYNC SCROLL] appears.
5 Press soft key [SYNC SCROLL].
6 The screen changes to the simultaneous scroll mode. At this time, the display of the soft key [SYNC
SCROLL] changes to [SINGLE SCROLL].
- 621 -
Fig. 10.14.2 (a) Multi-path editing screen
Procedure for switching to the single scroll mode

The procedure for switching to the single scroll mode is as described below.
4 Press continuous menu key [+] several times until oft key [SINGLE SCROLL] appears.
5 Press soft key [SINGLE SCROLL].
6. The screen changes to the single scroll mode. At this time, the display of the soft key [SINGLE
SCROLL] changes to [SYNC SCROLL].
Automatic simultaneous scroll mode change

When the parameter DAS (No.11349#5) is set to 1, the scroll mode is simultaneous scroll mode after
power in turn on. The scroll mode becomes a single scroll mode in the following situations. It
automatically returns to the simultaneous scroll mode when the following situations are canceled.
• There are no two paths or more in the simultaneous editing mode.
• One or more paths are not EDIT modes.
• One or more programs of simultaneous editing are in character editing mode.
• During background editing mode.
Cursor movement operations

In the simultaneous scroll mode, pressing the cursor movement keys causes the cursors to
move up and down in all programs being edited simultaneously.
If the cursor movement keys are pressed to move within the same block, the cursors for the
paths other than the one to be edited do not move.
If the cursor movement keys are pressed to move the cursor to the previous and next blocks,
the cursors for the paths not to be edited also move.
Those programs for paths that are not displayed on the screen do not scroll simultaneously.
- 622 -
Page change operation

In the simultaneous scroll mode, pressing the page change keys causes the page to change
in all programs being edited simultaneously.
Scroll waiting with a waiting M-code

In the simultaneous scroll mode, if the cursor moves to a block that contains a waiting M-code, the
system enters the scroll waiting state.
In the scroll waiting state, the cursor cannot be moved in the direction in which the cursor has moved to
the block that contains a waiting M-code until the cursors of all programs subject to waiting move to the
same waiting M-code.
In the scroll waiting state, the cursor color changes to blue as shown in Fig. 10.14.2 (b).
NOTE
A waiting M code is not ignored due to the waiting ignore signal.
Example:
The cursor cannot be moved in the down direction if pressing the cursor key causes the
system to enter the scroll waiting state. The cursor can move in the up direction.
Fig. 10.14.2 (b) Waiting caused by pressing the cursor key
Similarly, if the cursor is moved to a block that contains a waiting M-code by pressing a page change key,
the system enters the scroll waiting state in the block that contains a waiting M-code.
- 623 -
Fig. 10.14.2 (c) Scroll waiting caused by pressing a page change key
Completion of scroll waiting

When the cursors move to the same waiting M-code in all programs subject to waiting, scroll waiting is
completed, so that scrolling can be continued.
Fig. 10.14.2 (d) All programs displayed simultaneously are in the scroll waiting state
Release of scroll waiting

If, in the scroll waiting state, the cursor for the program for another path is moved to the beginning or end
of the program, a confirmation message and soft keys are displayed as shown in Fig. 10.14.2 (e).
To release the scroll waiting state, press the soft key [EXEC].
To cancel the release of the scroll waiting state, press the soft key [CAN].
- 624 -
Fig. 10.14.2 (e) Display of the confirmation message for the release of the scroll waiting state
Waiting M-code search

By doing a waiting M-code search, it is possible to simultaneously move the cursors to the blocks that
contain specified waiting-M code in all programs being edited simultaneously.
To do a waiting M-code search, press the soft key [SYNC SEARCH] in the simultaneous scroll mode.
The soft keys shown in Fig. 10.14.2 (f) are displayed.
Fig. 10.14.2 (f) Soft keys for doing a waiting M-code search
[PREVI SYNC] Searches for a waiting M-code in the up direction, starting at the cursor position
in the program to be edited.
The cursors of the paths specified for waiting move to the same waiting M-code.
[NEXT SYNC] Searches for a waiting M-code in the down direction, starting at the cursor
position in the program to be edited.
The cursors of the paths specified for waiting move to the same waiting M-code.
[MCODE NUMBER] Searches for a specified waiting M-code. Only an M-code or an M-code number
can be specified. The cursors move to the specified waiting M-code in all
programs being edited simultaneously.
[TOP] In all programs being edited simultaneously, moves the cursors to the beginning
of the programs.
[BOTTOM] In all programs being edited simultaneously, moves the cursors to the end of the
programs.
If, as a result of a waiting M-code search, no waiting M-code is found, the cursor moves to the end of the
program. In this case, the warning, "SYNC POINT IS NOT FOUND.", is displayed.
Restrictions
The simultaneous scroll function cannot be used in character editing or in background editing.
- 625 -
11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64504EN/02
11 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
Program management functions are classified into the following two types:
• Functions for folders
• Functions for programs
Functions for folders include creation, deletion, change of names and attributes, and so on.
Functions for programs include main program selection, deletion, change of names and attributes, and so
on.
About program management, refer to "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in PROGRAMMING

additionally.
Creation and registration
Editing
Management
Selecting a device...............................See III-11.1.

Management of Creating a folder .................................See |||-11.2.
Renaming a folder...............................See |||-11.3.
devices and Changing current folder ......................See |||-11.4.
folders Changing folder attributes...................See |||-11.5.
Deleting a folder..................................See |||-11.6.
Selecting a default folder.....................See |||-11.7.
Folder management............................See III-11.14
Renaming a file...................................See III-11.8.

Deleting a file......................................See III-11.9
Program Changing file attributes.......................See III-11.10
management Selecting a main program...................See III-11.11
Program and folder copy/move...........See III-11.13
Program verification............................See III-11.15
High-speed program management .....See III-11.16
Output Execution
- 626 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
11.1 SELECTING A DEVICE

When the fast data server function (option) is provided, a program storage device can be selected. This
section explains the selection procedure.
Procedure for selecting a device

4 Press the soft key [DEVICECHANGE].
5 Press the soft key for the desired device.
Devices that can be selected are listed below (Table 11.1):
Table11.1
Soft key Device name
CNC MEM CNC part program storage memory
MEM CARD Program storage file (named "FANUCPRG.BIN")
EMB ETHER Embedded Ethernet
DTSVR Data Server
DTSVR HOST Data Server Host
MEMORY CARD Memory card
FLOPPY Floppy cassette (Handy File)
USB MEM USB memory
11.1.1 Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device

Overview
By selecting a memory card including a program storage file (named "FANUCPRG.BIN") as a device,
memory operation can be performed with the program in the program storage file selected as the main
program.
In addition, the content of a program storage file can be displayed on the program list screen or a program
in a program storage file can be edited on the program edit screen.
A program storage file can be created using a memory card program tool (A08B-9010-J700#ZZ11) on a
commercially available personal computer. To be used, the program storage file must be written to a
memory card formatted in FAT16 format.
(A program held in a program storage file is hereinafter referred to as a memory card program. Moreover,
a memory card storing a program storage file is referred to as a program storage memory card.)
NOTE
Any program in a USB memory cannot be selected or edited.

5 Press the soft key [MEMCARD].
- 627 -
NOTE
1 A FAT16-formatted memory card containing the program storage file
FANUCPRG.BIN is recognized as a program storage memory card.
2 For a program storage memory card containing more than 63 folders and
programs, the option for extending the number of memory card program
registrations is required. The option for extending the number of memory card
program registrations is applicable to a program storage memory card containing
a maximum of 1000 folders and programs.
Procedure for removing a device

When a program storage memory card is replaced or a memory card is used for normal usage such as data
input/output, clear the recognition of the program storage memory card with removal operation.

5 Press the soft key [DETACH].
NOTE
1 This soft key appears when the CNC recognizes a program storage memory
card during device change operation.
2 This operation is enabled only in EDIT mode or MEM mode.
When a memory card program is selected in the main programs of multiple
paths in a multi-path control system, set the modes of all paths to EDIT mode or
MEM mode.
3 When the default folder is a folder in a program storage file, it is changed to
"//CNC_MEM/" by a removal operation.
4 When the main program is a memory card program, the main program enters
the unselected state by a removal operation.
Explanation
- About operation
A memory card program can be selected as a main program to perform memory operation.
Memory operation has the following features:
• Subprogram call nesting is allowed.
• Macro program call nesting is allowed.
• In a custom macro, a control command using a GOTO statement/WHILE statement can be specified.
NOTE
To use the functions for calling macros, and using custom macros, the options
corresponding to the respective functions are required.
- Selection as a main program

As a main program to be automatically executed in the MEM mode, a memory card program can be
selected.
- 628 -
- Sub program (call using M98/G72.1/G72.2)

- Macro program (call using G65/G66/G66.1/M96)
The following subprogram/macro program held in the same folder as containing the main program is
called:
• Sub program call (M98)
• Macro call (Simple macro call G65 / Modal call G66, G66.1)
• Macro interrupt (M96)
• Figure copying (G72.1, G72.2)
If the program cannot be found in the same folder as the main program, the following folder is searched:
• Common program folder on the CNC_MEM device (CNC program storage memory)
NOTE
To use the functions for macro call, macro interrupt, and figure copying, the
options corresponding to the respective functions are required.
- Sub program (call using M code/S code/T code/particular address/the second

auxiliary function)
- Macro program (call using G code/M code)
The following subprogram/macro program calls a program from the CNC_MEM device (CNC program
storage memory):
• Subprogram call using M code/S code/T code/particular addresses/the second auxiliary function
• Macro call using G code/M code
The folders set as search targets are searched in the following order, and the first found program is called:
1 Common program folder among the initial folders
2 MTB-dedicated folder 2 among the initial folders
3 MTB-dedicated folder 1 among the initial folders
4 System folder among the initial folders
Search target folders are set in parameter No. 3457.
NOTE
For a memory card program, subprogram call using M code/S code/T
code/particular addresses/the second auxiliary function or macro call using G
code/M code can be specified. However, a program on the CNC_MEM device
(CNC program storage memory) is called.
- External program number search / External workpiece number search

A program on a program storage memory card can be searched for with the external program number
search function or external workpiece number search function.
Limitation
For a memory card program, M198 cannot be specified. Moreover, no memory card program can be
called from a program on the CNC_MEM device (CNC program storage memory) by specifying M198.
When a setting is made to enable an external device subprogram call from a memory card (M198) or
DNC operation from a memory card (bit 7 (MNC) of parameter No. 0138 = 1), the content of program
storage file cannot be displayed during automatic operation.
When a program storage memory card is selected, the memory card cannot be used for the ordinary
purposes listed below. To use a memory card in such a case, perform a "removal" operation to cancel the
recognition of the program storage memory card.
- 629 -
• ALL I/O screen

Display of the contents of a memory card, and input/output data to and from a memory card
• PMC data I/O screen
Display of the contents of a memory card, and input/output to and from a memory card
• Program directory screen
Input/output program data to and from a memory card
• External device subprogram call (M198) operation
Subprogram call (M198) with a memory card set as an external device
• DNC operation
DNC operation from a memory card
CAUTION
1 Do not remove the memory card when a program that specifies a write to the
memory card is being edited. The data can be destructed.
2 If an editing operation is completed, the results of editing are preserved even
when the power to the CNC is turned off.
3 When removing the memory card, be sure to perform a "removal" operation. If the
memory card is removed without performing a "removal" operation and an
attempt is made to access the memory card, the alarm (SR1964) or alarm
(IO1030) is issued.
If the card is removed inadvertently, insert the card again and perform a "removal"
operation.
When an alarm is issued, perform the following operation:
- When the alarm (SR1964) is issued
Reset the alarm after performing a "removal" operation.
- When the alarm (IO1030) is issued
The alarm can be reset only by turning off the power to the CNC.
4 There are cases in which when a memory card is replaced with another, the CNC
cannot detect the replacement. Thus, it is risky to replace a memory card without
performing a "removal" operation, and this should never be attempted.
- Operation of creation, edition, and management of a program

When “memory card program as a device” is selected, operation of creation, edition, and management of
a program is below (Table 11.1.1):
Table 11.1.1
Item Usable
Creation of a program Unusable
Edition prohibition attribute Unusable
Inserting, alteration, and deletion a Word Usable
Deletion of a block Usable
Program search Usable
Sequence number search Usable
Deletion of a program Unusable
Editing a custom macro Usable
Password function Unusable
Editing a program character Usable
Program and folder copy/move function Usable
Key and program encryption Unusable
Selecting a device Usable
Creation of a folder Unusable
Renaming of a folder Unusable
Changing the attribute of a folder Unusable
- 630 -
Item Usable
Deletion of a folder Unusable
Selecting a default folder Usable
Renaming of a file Unusable
Deletion of a file Unusable
Changing the attribute of a file Unusable
Selecting a main program Usable
Making a program compact Unusable
Input/output of program Unusable
NOTE
In memory card program device, programs are copied from memory card
program device to CNC built-in memory device or to data server device, or
copied from CNC built-in memory device or from data server device to memory
card program device.
11.1.2 Selecting a From Cassette as a Device

The Handy File can be connected to the NC to display a list of programs in a floppy cassette.

1 Set the relevant parameters so that communication with the Handy File is enabled.
6 Press the soft key [FLOPPY].
Limitation
- Floppy disk directory display during schedule operation
During schedule operation, directories in a floppy disk cannot be displayed in a background edit.

When “floppy cassette as a device” is selected, operation of creation, edition, and management of a
program is below (Table 11.1.2):
Table 11.1.2
Item Usable
Inserting, alteration, and deletion a Word Unusable
Deletion of a block Unusable
Sequence number search Unusable
Deletion of a program Usable
Editing a custom macro Unusable
Editing a program character Unusable
Program and folder copy/move function Unusable
Creation of a folder Unusable
- 631 -
Item Usable
Renaming of a folder Unusable
Deletion of a folder Unusable
Selecting a default folder Unusable
Renaming of a file Unusable
Deletion of a file Usable
Selecting a main program Unusable
Input/output of program Usable
11.1.3 Selecting a USB Memory as a Device

When a commercially available USB memory is inserted into the USB memory interface of the CNC, the
CNC recognizes the USB memory as an external input/output device.
The following operations can be performed for a USB memory:

• Listing the files and folders in the USB memory
• Renaming and creating a file or folder in the USB memory
• Inputting and outputting an NC program between the CNC part program storage memory and USB
memory

5 Press the soft key [USB MEM].
Limitation
There are the following restrictions on the USB function.
(1) Only one USB memory can be recognized. (No USB hub can be recognized.)
(2) Up to 32 characters can be used for a file or folder name.
If a file or folder name is longer than 32 characters, the 32nd character is replaced with a tilde (~)
and the subsequent characters are omitted when displayed. All operations including management
operation and input/output cannot be performed for a file or folder whose name is omitted with a
tilde (~).
(3) The maximum number of folder levels is 6 (excluding the root folder).
(4) The maximum number of files and folders in a folder is 512.
(5) If a non-ASCII character (alphanumeric character) is used in a file or folder name, it cannot be
displayed correctly.
For detailed specifications of and restrictions on a USB memory, see the section related to the USB
function.
NOTE
Remove a USB memory only when “REMOVE OK” is displayed as the USB
memory status, or data may be damaged.
- 632 -

When “USB memory as a device” is selected, operation of creation, edition, and management of a
program is below (Table 11.1.3):
Table 11.1.3
Item Usable
Inserting, alteration, and deletion a Word Unusable
Deletion of a block Unusable
Sequence number search Unusable
Deletion of a program Usable
Editing a custom macro Unusable
Editing a program character Unusable
Program and folder copy/move function Usable
Creation of a folder Usable
Renaming of a folder Usable
Deletion of a folder Usable
Selecting a default folder Unusable
Renaming of a file Usable
Deletion of a file Usable
Selecting a main program Unusable
Input/output of program Usable
NOTE
In USB device, programs are copied from USB device to CNC built-in memory
device or from CNC built-in memory device to USB device.
11.2 CREATING A FOLDER

This section explains the procedure for creating a folder.
Procedure for creating a folder

1 Select EDIT mode.
3 Move to the folder in which you want to create a folder.
Use the cursor keys and to move among folders. After selecting the folder, press the
key.
5 Type folder name.
6 Press the soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
- 633 -
NOTE
1 Each folder name must be unique within the same folder.
2 Each time a folder is created, the number of programs that can be registered
decreases by one.
3 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a folder cannot
sometimes be created.
11.3 RENAMING A FOLDER

This section explains the procedure for renaming a folder.
Procedure for renaming a folder

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Select the folder that you want to rename.
To select a folder, use the cursor keys and .
6 Type new folder name.
7 Press the soft key [RENAME].
NOTE
1 You cannot rename the initial folders.
2 Each folder name must be unique within the same folder.
sometimes be renamed.
11.4 CHANGING CURRENT FOLDER

Current folder is selected folder in program contents display and program folder screen.
Procedure for changing current folder in folder screen
Changing to the upper folder

3 Move the cursor to “RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER”.
4 Press the MDI key .
Changing to the under folder

3 Move the cursor to the folder to select.
4 Press the MDI key .
- 634 -
Procedure for changing current folder in folder tree display.

In folder tree display, current folder is changed by moving cursor on the tree.
Changing to the upper folder

4 Press the soft key [TREE LIST].
Fig.11.4 (a)
Changing to the under folder

4 Press the soft key [TREE LIST].
Fig.11.4 (b)
Changing to the next folder

4 Press the soft key [TREE LSIT].
5 Press the cursor key or .
- 635 -
Fig.11.4 (c)
11.5 CHANGING FOLDER ATTRIBUTES

This section explains the procedure for changing the attribute of a folder (edit disable or edit/display
disable).
Procedure for changing folder attributes

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Select the folder of which attribute is to be changed.
6 Press the soft key [DETAILON].
• To disable editing, press the soft key [EDIT DISABL].
• To enable editing, press the soft key [EDIT ENABLE].
• To disable editing and display, press the soft key [DISP DISABL].
• To enable editing and display, press the soft key [DISP ENABLE].
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, the attribute of a folder
cannot sometimes be changed.
2 When the edit disable attribute is set for a folder, editing of folders and files in
that folder is disabled.
3 When the edit/display disable attribute is set for a folder, editing and display of
folders and files in that folder is disabled, and these folders and files are not
displayed.
4 The items that can be set vary depending on the status of parameters and so on.
11.6 DELETING A FOLDER

This section explains the procedure for deleting a folder.
Procedure for deleting a folder

1 Select EDIT mode.
- 636 -

4 Select the folder that you want to delete.
6 Press the soft key [DELETE].
• To perform the deletion, press the soft key [EXEC].
• To cancel the deletion, press the soft key [CANCEL].
NOTE
1 You cannot delete the initial folders.
2 A folder cannot be deleted unless the folder is empty.
(An empty folder means that the folder contains neither folders nor files.)
3 If a folder contains a folder or file having the edit/display disable attribute, the
folder may seem to be empty when displayed, but the folder is not actually
empty, so it cannot be deleted.
sometimes be deleted.
11.7 SELECTING A DEFAULT FOLDER

This section explains the procedure for selecting a foreground or background default folder.
What is a default folder is described in "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in PROGGRAMMING.
Procedure for selecting a default folder

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Move to the folder that you want to select as the default folder.
key.
6 • To select the foreground, press the soft key [FORE CHANGE].
• To select the background, press the soft key [BACK CHANGE].
NOTE
1 When the foreground or background default folder is not set, the path folder,
which is an initial folder, is assumed.
2 The settings for the foreground and background default folders are stored in the
default folder setting file.
3 When a program file, program folder, or program folder management file is
cleared, the default folder setting file is also cleared at the same time.
- 637 -
11.8 RENAMING A FILE

This section explains the procedure for renaming a file.
Procedure for renaming a file

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Move to the folder containing the file that you want to rename.
key.
5 Select the file that you want to rename.
To select a file, use the cursor keys and .
7 Type new file name.
8 Press the soft key [RENAME].
NOTE
1 Each file name must be unique within the same file.
2 When the assigned file name cannot be treated as a program number, the
program in the file is restricted as follows:
• Specification by program number is impossible.
(Such as a subprogram call)
• Information output by program number is impossible.
3 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a file cannot
sometimes be renamed.
11.9 DELETING A FILE

This section explains the procedure for deleting a file.
Procedure for deleting a file

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Move to the folder containing the file that you want to delete.
key.
5 Select the file that you want to delete.
7 Press the soft key [DELETE].
• To perform the deletion, press the soft key [EXEC].
- 638 -
• To cancel the deletion, press the soft key [CANCEL].
NOTE
Depending on the operation status and protection status, a file cannot
11.10 CHANGING FILE ATTRIBUTES

This section explains the procedure for changing the attribute of a file (edit disable, edit/display disable,
encoding, or protection of data at eight levels).
Procedure for selecting the attribute of a file

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Move to the folder containing the file of which attribute is to be changed.
key.
5 Select the file of which attribute is to be changed.
7 Press the soft key [DETAILON].
8 Press the continuous menu key until the desired soft key appears.
9 • To disable editing, press the soft key [EDIT DISABL].
• To enable editing, press the soft key [EDIT ENABLE].
• To disable editing and display, press the soft key [DISP DISABL].
• To enable editing/display, press the soft key [DISP ENABLE].
• To set encoding, press the soft key [ENCODESET].
• To cancel encoding, press the soft key [ENCODE RESET].
• To change the change protection level, type a change protection level, then press the soft key
[CHANGELEVEL].
• To change the output protection level, type an output protection level, then press soft key [OUT
LEVEL].
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a file cannot
2 The items that can be set vary depending on the status of options, parameters,
and so on.
3 To change the display disable attribute, release protection of programs in
advance. Set the same value as the password (parameter No. 3210 (PSW)) in
parameter No. 3211 (KEY) to release the protection.
- 639 -
11.11 SELECTING A MAIN PROGRAM

This section explains the procedure for selecting a main program.
Procedure for selecting a main program

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Move to the folder containing the file that you want to use as a main program.
key.
5 Select the file that you want to use as the main program.
7 Press the soft key [MAIN PROGRM].
"@" is displayed at the left of the program that has been selected as the main program.
(Fig.11.11)
Fig.11.11 Selecting a main program (Program folder screen)
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, the main program
cannot sometimes be selected.
2 In the multi-path system, "*" is displayed at the left of the program that has been
selected as the main program in other path. (Fig.11.11)
- 640 -
11.12 MAKING A PROGRAM COMPACT

This section explains the procedure for making a program compact.
Procedure for making a program compact

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Move to the folder containing the file of the program that you want to make compact.
key.
5 Select the file of the program that you want to make compact.
7 Press the soft key [PROGRM CNDENS].
When a program is made compact, the program size is updated.
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a program cannot
sometimes be made compact.
2 only programs on the CNC_MEM device can be made compact.
3 If bit 2 (CND) of parameter No. 3202 is set to 1, soft key [PROGRM CNDENS] is
displayed.
11.13 PROGRAM AND FOLDER COPY/MOVE FUNCTION
Overview
Programs and folders can be copied or moved from folder to folder.
Procedure for copying a program or a folder
1. Press the function key .

2. Press the chapter selection soft key [FOLDER].
The program folder screen in Fig. 11.13 appears:
- 641 -
Fig.11.13 Program folder screen
3. Display the folder from which you want to copy or move the program or the folder. Move the cursor
to the folder on the screen and press the key to move to the folder. Move the cursor to
“RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER” on the screen and press the key to move the upper folder.
4. Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
5. Press the continuous menu key until the soft key [COPY] appears.
6. Move the cursor to the program or the folder that you want to select.
7. Press the soft key [COPY]. The program or folder is selected, and the background color becomes
selected color (default: blue). If you want to move the program or the folder, press the soft key
[CUT].
8. Display the folder to which you want to copy or move the program or folder.
9. Press the soft key [PASTE]. If you want to rename the program or folder, type new name before
pressing [PASTE].
Procedure for copying some programs and folders

Selection by range
3. Display the folder from which you want to copy or move the program or the folder. Move the cursor
to the folder on the screen and press the key to move to the folder. Move the cursor to
“RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER” on the screen and press the key to move the upper folder.
5. Press the continuous menu key until the soft key [SELECT] appears.
6. Press the soft key [SELECT].
7. Press the soft key [RANGE SELECT]. In addition, move the cursor up and down to select the
programs and the folders. The background color of selected programs and folders becomes selected
color (default: blue).
8. If the selected range is determined, press the soft key [COPY]. If you want to move the program or
folder, press the soft key [CUT].
9. Change the current folder to the destination folder.
- 642 -
10. Press the soft key [PASTE].
Selection by each program or folder

4. Press the continuous menu key until the soft key [COPY] appears.
6. Move the cursor to program or folder to be copied.
8. Repeat 6th and 7th operation until select is ended.
9. When selected programs or folders are determined, press the soft key [COPY]. If you want to move
the program or folder, press the soft key [CUT].
10. Change the current folder to the destination folder.
11. Press the soft key [PASTE].
NOTE
Programs or folders up to 10 can be selected.
About same name programs and folders

When the same name of program or folder exists at the move destinations, confirmation message
“OVERWRITE? (program or folder name)” is displayed.
- When the soft key [YES] is pressed, the program/folder is overwritten. If the same name
programs/folders appear again, the confirmation message is displayed.
- When the soft key [NO] is pressed, copying or moving operation of the program/folder is skipped. If
the same name programs/folders appear again, the confirmation message is displayed.
- When the soft key [YES ALL] is pressed, the program/folder is overwritten. Even if the same name
programs/folders appear again, they are also overwritten.
- When soft key [NO ALL] is pressed, copying or moving operation of program/folder is skipped. If
the same name programs/folders appear again, they are also skipped.
- When the soft key [CANCEL] or [<] is pressed, copying or moving operation is canceled.
During the overwrite confirmation is displayed and the screen is changed, the move operation is canceled.
Deselecting programs/folders
When the following operations is performed, the selection state of program/folder is released.
- Pressing of soft key [CANCEL] after performing a selecting operation.
- Change of the source folder before the selection state is fixed.
Restrictions
If the following conditions are corresponded, copy and move operation is invalid.
- The program data protection is enable.(The memory protect signal KEY3 is OFF)
- The top of the origin folder of copy/move or destination folder of copy/move has the edit disable
attribute.
- The copy and move operation is performed to sub-folder of the copy/move origin folder.
- The copy destination program storage capacity is insufficient.
Programs and folders, which correspond to the following conditions, cannot be copied and moved.
- The copy/move origin or destinations programs/folders are protected by the edit disable attribute.
- 643 -
- The copy/move origin or destinations programs/folders are protected by 8 level data protection
function.
- The copy/Move destinations program is selected as a main program.
- The depth of the path is exceeded 6 classes after the folders are copied/moved.
11.13.1 Copy and movement between different devices

Overview
It is enable to copy and move the files between different devices.
The files can be copied/moved in a same way.
Restrictions
About file operation restrictions on each device
A copy or movement between the following devices is possible.
Table11.13.1 Copy and movement between different devices

Destination
CNC built-in memory Data server Memory card USB
CNC built-in memory A A B B
Data server A A C C
Origin
Memory card program A A C C
Memory card B C C C
USB B C C C
A : Programs and folders can be copied and moved
B : Programs can be copied and moved. Folders cannot be copied and moved.
(NOTICE: Memory card program device can be only copied.)
C : Programs and folders cannot be copied and moved.
NOTE
1 Memory card program device has following restrictions.
(i) Programs cannot be moved in memory card program device.
(ii) Memory card program device cannot be used with memory card device.
2 Memory card device has following restrictions.
(i) Memory card device cannot be used with memory card program device.
(ii) When the programs are copied, place all paths in the EDIT mode.
(iii) When the programs are copied from CNC built-in memory device to memory
card device, the behavior follows the setting of bit 1 (COW) of parameter
No.11308.
(iv)When the programs are copied from memory card device to CNC built-in
memory device, the behavior follows the setting of bit 2 (REP) of parameter
No.3201.
3 USB device has following restrictions.
(i) When the programs are copied, place all paths in the EDIT mode.
Copy of file including some programs

When the file including some program is copied, don’t input the file name to the key input buffer.
When some programs are included in the file of the copy origin, if the character string is input to the key
input buffer, only the program of the head in the file is read to CNC MEM with program name input to
the key input buffer.
- 644 -
File name on memory card

When the program with 8 character or more name of the program in the program memory on CNC is
output, it is output on the memory card as follows.
For eight digits O numbers ('O'+ numeric parts)

- The numeric parts are 8 digits or more :
The file name is changed to eight numerical value digits except first 'O'.
Example) O12345678 → 12345678
- The numeric parts are less than 8 digits :
One digit is deleted '0' and program name is changed to seven digits of 'O' + numerical value.
Example) O00012345 → O0012345
For arbitrary program name (9 characters or more)

- Program name is changed to the file name that rounds down since the ninth character.
Example) 123456789 → 12345678
The file name output on the memory card might overlap by the above operation. In this case, it is output
according to the setting of bit 1 (COW) of parameter No.11308.
11.14 FOLDER MANAGEMENT

This function restricts the folder operation in program management. As a result, operator can manage the
program without the complex folder operation. Following two specifications can be selected by the
parameter.
1) The folders under the path folders can be used for program management.
2) Only the path folders can be used for program management.
Path folders are the one of the initial folders. The folder exists under //CNC_MEM/USER, and the
number is same to the system path. Please refer to USER’S MANUAL (B-64484EN, II 12 PROGRAM
MANAGEMENT) for details.
- 645 -
//CNC_MEM
SYSTEM/
MTB1/
MTB2/
1)
USER/
PATH1/
CYLINDER/
2)
PISTON/
PATH2/
GEAR1/
GEAR2/
LIBRARY/
User created folder
Fig. 11.14 Folder that can be used by each setting
11.14.1 Program Management under the Path Folder

If parameter FPF (No.11302#6) is set to “1”, the operation on the program folder screen becomes as
follows. At this time, it is necessary to set parameter CFP (No.11304#7) to “0”.
Table 11.14.1 Restriction of operation

Operation Working
Under the path folder Possible
Moving of the folder
Upper from the path folder Impossible
Creating of user folder Possible
Changing of foreground default folder Possible
Changing of background default folder Possible
- 646 -
Display on program folder screen

Only the folder under the path folder corresponding to selected path can be displayed.
Warning message “CAN’T MOVE TO FOLDER” is displayed and cannot move when the folder is
operated to move upper from the path folder.
Setting of foreground/background default folder

Only the folder under the path folder corresponding to selected path can be set to foreground/background
default folder.
11.14.2 Program Management only in the Path Folder

If parameter CFP (No.11304#7) is set to 1, the operation on the program folder screen becomes as follows.
At this time, the setting of parameter FPF (No.11302#6) is invalid.
Table 11.14.2 Restriction of operation

Operation Working
Under the path folder Impossible
Moving of the folder
Upper from the path folder Impossible
Creating of user folder Impossible
Changing of foreground default folder Impossible
Changing of background default folder Impossible
Display on program folder screen

Only the path folder corresponding to selected path can be displayed. “RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER”
is not displayed. (Refer to “1)” in Fig. 11.14.2 (a) and Fig. 11.14.2 (b).)
The subfolder that has already been made under the path folder before the parameter CFP(No.11304#7) is
made effective can be displayed. But it is impossible to move to the subfolder.
3) 2)
1)
Fig. 11.14.2 (a) Program folder screen (parameter CFP(No.11304#7)=0)
- 647 -
3)
2)
1)
Fig. 11.14.2 (b) Program folder screen (parameter CFP(No.11304#7)=1)
Display of device name and current folder

The current folder name is not displayed though the device name is displayed so far. (Refer to “2)” in Fig.
11.14.2 (a) and Fig. 11.14.2 (b).)
Display and setting of foreground/background default folder

Foreground/background default folders are not displayed. (Refer to “3)” in Fig. 11.14.2 (a) and Fig.
11.14.2 (b).)
Moreover, foreground/background default folders cannot be set.
NOTE
Set foreground/background default folder to each path folder before the
parameter CFP(No.11304#7) is made effective.
Soft key that is not displayed

The following soft key is not displayed, and cannot be operated.
- CREATE FOLDER 1)
- FORE CHANGE 2)
- BACK CHANGE 3)
1)
2) 3)
Fig11.14.2 (c) Soft key display for CNC_MEM device
11.14.3 Folder for Subprogram/Macro Calls

In the following subprogram call/macro call, the folder /USER/LIBRARY, /MTB12, /MTB2 and
/SYSTEM are searched before the folder where there is the main program are searched.
- 648 -
There is a possibility being executed for the subprogram that the operator doesn't intend if the subprogram
is registered to the above-mentioned folder even if the display and the operation are limited by this
function.
-Subprogram call based on an M code

-Subprogram call based on a particular address
-Subprogram call based on a second auxiliary function code
-Macro call based on a S code
-Macro call based on a G code
-Macro call based on an M code
-Macro call based on a T code
-One-touch macro call
By setting 1 to the parameter SCC (No.3457#6), the folder where there is the main program is added to
the top of search order.
1) Folder where the main program is stored. ← Added.
2) Common program folder of initial folder
3) MTB-dedicated folder 2 of initial folder
4) MTB-dedicated folder 1 of initial folder
5) System folder of initial folder
The folders of 2) though 5) can be excluded from search target folders by setting the parameters
LIB(No.3457#0), MC2(No.3457#1), MC1(No.3457 #2), and SYS(No.3457#3).
11.15 PROGRAM VERIFICATION

This function enables to verify the differences of the programs in the I/O device and the programs in the
CNC built-in memory.
Sequence of program verification

1. Make sure the I/O device is ready for input and output.
2. Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.
3. The program data protection is enabled on the machine operator’s panel.(Turn off the memory protect
signal KEY3)
4. Press the function key and display the program list screen.
6. Press the continuous menu key [+].
7. Press the soft key [F INPUT].
8. Set the file name in the I/O devices.
Input the file name and press the soft key [F NAME].
If the file name is not set, “ALL-PROG.TXT” is set.
9. Set the program name in the NC memory.
Input program name and press the soft key [P SET].
If the program name is not specified, the program names in the file which is set in above ‘8’ are set.
10. Press the soft key [EXEC].
Program verification is started and the “COMPARE” is blinked in lower right. When verification
finishes, “COMPARE” disappears.
If the program in the I/O device and the program in the CNC built-in memory are same, the message
“PROGRAM HAS BEEN VERIFIED” is displayed.
If they are different, the alarm (PS0079) “PROGRAM NOT MATCH” is issued
- 649 -
NOTE
If 8LV data protection function is valid, this function cannot be used.
Explanation
When one program is registered in a file

If one program is registered in the file, the program in the file and the program that is specified by [P
SET] are verified.
If the program in the CNC built-in memory is not specified by [P SET], the program whose program
name is same as program in the file are verified.
When some programs are registered in a file

Each program in the file which is specified by [F SET] and the program whose program name is same as
the program name in the file are verified. When all verifications succeed, the message “PROGRAM HAS
BEEN VERIFIED” is displayed.
NOTE
When the program is specified by [P SET], the alarm (PS0079) is issued as long
as all of programs in the file are same as the program which is set by [P SET].
11.16 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

When many kinds of machining is arranged, this function can achieve the short processing time when
many programs are registered collectively or all programs are deleted. The program is not saved
automatically to nonvolatile memory at registration, modification, or deletion of program.
If the power supply is turned off without saving, the changed programs data is not saved. Please execute
following sequence of program save when the programs are saved.
Sequence of program save

1. The program edit screen or the program folder screen is displayed.
2. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and the continuous menu key several times. Soft key [ALL SAVE] appears.
[Program edit screen]
[Program folder screen]
3. Press soft key [ALL SAVE]. The following softkey is displayed.
4. When the soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the saving program is begun. When the soft key [CAN] is
pressed, the saving program is discontinued.
- 650 -
NOTE
1 There are no changes about the method of displaying programs and the editing
programs.
2 In cases that this function is enabled, if the power supply is turned off without
saving, the changed programs data is not saved.
The program selection by the following operation also is not saved.
- MDI operation
- External workpiece number search
- External program number search
Please perform saving operation by program edit screen, program folder
screen, signal or the application by FOCAS2/ C Language Library, if it is
necessary to preserve the changed programs data/ the program selection after
the power supply is turned off.
3 When the automatic operation is executing in any path, the save operation is
not executed.
4 If the power supply is turned off during saving the programs, all programs are
deleted. In this case, an alarm PS0519 occurs when the power supply is turned
on next.
5 This function is effective only on CNC program storage memory (CNC_MEM
device).
- 651 -
12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64504EN/02
12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

To operate a CNC machine tool, various data must be set on the MDI unit for the CNC. The operator can
monitor the state of operation with data displayed during operation.
This chapter describes how to display and set data for each function.
Chapter 12, "SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA", consists of the following sections:
12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................................................................668

12.6 SWITCHING BETWEEN MULTI-PATH DISPLAY AND SINGLE-PATH DISPLAY FUNCTION
..........................................................................................................................................874
12.7 FIVE AXES DISPLAY IN ONE SCREEN FOR THE 8.4-INCH DISPLAY UNIT .......................877
12.8 PATH NAME EXPANSION DISPLAY FUNCTION .....................................................................881
12.9 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION ........883
12.10 LOAD METER SCREEN.........................................................................................................885
12.11 DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER/NAME, SEQUENCE NUMBER, AND STATUS,
AND WARNING MESSAGES FOR DATA SETTING OR INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION ......887
12.12 CALCULATION KEY FUNCTION........................................................................................894
Explanation
- Screen transition chart
The screen transition for when each function key on the MDI unit is pressed is shown below. The
subsections referenced for each screen are also shown. See the appropriate subsection for details of each
screen and the setting procedure on the screen. See other chapters for screens not described in this
chapter.
See Chapter 7 for the screen that appears when function key is pressed. In general, function key
or is prepared by the machine tool builder and used for macros. Refer to the manual issued
by the machine tool builder for the screen that appears when function key or is pressed.
- Data protection key

The machine may have a data protection key to protect part programs, tool compensation values, setting
data, and custom macro variables. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for where the
data protection key is located and how to use it.
- 652 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 8.4/10.4-inch

display unit)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT) +

Page 1
Ø Ø Ø Ø
Position Position Position Manual
display in display in display in handle
the the the interruption
workpiece workpiece workpiece ⇒ See III-4.7
coordinate coordinate coordinate
system system system
⇒ See III-12.1.1 ⇒ See III-12.1.1 ⇒ See III-12.1.1
Actual Actual Actual

feedrate feedrate feedrate
display display display
Display of Display of Display of

run time run time run time
and parts and parts and parts
count count count
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MONI (OPRT) +
Page 2
Ø
Operating
monitor
display
⇒ See III-12.1.8
- 653 -
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15/19-inch

display unit)
Page 1
Overall position Actual feedrate Display of run

display display time and parts
(1) ALL ⇒ ⇒ See III-12.1.9 ⇒ See count
III-12.1.11 ⇒ See III-12.1.12
Manual handle
interruption
(2) HANDLE ⇒ ⇒ See III-4.7
Operating
MONITO
(3) ⇒ monitor display
R ⇒ See III-12.1.14
(4)
(5)
ABSOLU
(6)
TE
RELATI
(7)
VE
- 654 -

display unit)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

PROGRA FOLDER NEXT CHECK (OPRT) +
Page 1 M
Ø Ø Ø
Editing Current Program
programs block check
⇒ See III-10 display screen
screen ⇒ See III-12.2.6
⇒ See III-12.2.5
Next block
display
screen
⇒ See III-12.2.5
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
TIME JOG ROBOT (OPRT) +

Page 2
SELECT
Ø
Robot
connection
function
⇒ See Robot and
Machine Tool
Integration
Function
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL
- 655 -

display unit)
Page 1
Editing Programs
(1) PROGRM ⇒ ⇒ See III-10
Program folder
screen
(2) FOLDER ⇒ ⇒ See III-12.2.12
Program check
(3) CHECK ⇒ screen
⇒ See III-12.2.14
Current block Next block display

display screen screen
(4) NEXT ⇒
⇒ See III-12.2.13 ⇒ See III-12.2.13
Stamping the
(5) TIME ⇒ machining time
⇒ See III-12.2.16
(6) JOG
(7)
- 656 -
Page 2
Robot connection
function
ROBOT ⇒ See Robot and
(8) ⇒ Machine Tool
SELECT Integration Function
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
- 657 -

display unit)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
OFFSET SETTIN WORK (OPRT) +

Page 1 G
Ø Ø Ø
Setting and Displaying Displaying
displaying the and entering and setting
tool offset setting data the workpiece
value ⇒ See III-12.3.2 origin offset
⇒ See III-12.3.1 value
⇒ See III-12.3.5
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MACRO OPR (OPRT) +

Page 2
Ø Ø
Displaying Displaying
and setting and setting
custom macro the software
common operator's
variables panel
⇒ See III-12.3.7 ⇒ See III-12.3.9
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
TOOL MULTI SAFETY (OPRT) +

Page 3
REGIST TOOL ZONE
Ø Ø Ø
Displaying Displaying Displaying
and setting and setting and setting
items on the items on the items on the
tool tool number safety zone
registration registration setting screen
screens screen for ⇒See Ⅲ-12.3.15
⇒See Ⅲ-12.3.12 multiple tools
⇒SeeⅢ-12.3.13
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
LANG. PROTECT GUARD (OPRT) +

Page 4
Ø Ø Ø
Displaying Protection of Operation
and switching data at eight confirmation
the display levels functions
language ⇒ See III-12.3.11 ⇒ See III-6.6
⇒ See III-12.3.10
- 658 -
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 15/19-inch display
unit)
Page 1 Page 2
Setting and Displaying and

displaying the tool SAFETY setting items on the
(1) OFFSET ⇒ offset value (8) ⇒ safety zone setting
⇒ See III-8.3.16 ZONE screen
⇒See Ⅲ-12.3.30
Displaying and
SETTIN entering setting data
(2) ⇒ ⇒ See III-12.3.17 (9)
G
Displaying and
setting the
(3) WORK ⇒ workpiece origin (10)
offset value
⇒ See III-12.3.20
Displaying and
setting custom
(4) MACRO ⇒ macro common (11)
variables
⇒ See III-12.3.22
Displaying and Displaying and

OPERAT setting the software LANGUA switching the
(5) ⇒ operator’s panel (12) ⇒ display language
PANEL GE
⇒ See III-12.3.24 ⇒ See III-12.3.25
Displaying and Protection of data

TOOL setting items on PROTEC at eight levels
(6) ⇒ the tool registration (13) ⇒ ⇒ See III-12.3.26
REGIST screens T
⇒See Ⅲ-12.3.27
Displaying and Operation

setting items on confirmation
MULTI the tool number functions
(7) ⇒ (14) GUARD ⇒
TOOL registration screen
for multiple tools ⇒ See III-6.6
⇒SeeⅢ-12.3.28
NEXT NEXT
PAGE PAGE
- 659 -

display unit)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

PARAME DIAGNO SERVO SYSTEM (OPRT) +
Page 1 TER SIS GUIDE
Ø Ø Ø
Displaying Checking by SERVO
and setting self-diagnosis GUIDE Mate
parameters screen ⇒ See
⇒ See III-12.4.1 ⇒ See III-7.3 Maintenance
Manual(B-64485
EN)
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MEMORY PITCH SERVO (OPRT) +

Page 2 ERROR PARAM
Ø Ø Ø
Displaying Displaying Servo
memory and setting parameters
⇒ See III-12.4.6 pitch error ⇒ See III-12.4.3
compensation
data
⇒ See III-12.4.2
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)

PMC PMC PMC (OPRT) +
Page 3 MAINTE LADDER CONFIG
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
ALL IO ALL IO OPERAT (OPRT) +

Page 4 HISTRY
Ø Ø
Input/ output Input/ output
on the all IO on the all IO
screen screen
⇒ See III-8.3 ⇒ See III-8.3
- 660 -
(21) (22) (23) (24) (25)
COLOR PERIOD MAINTE WAVE (OPRT) +

Page 5 MAINTE INFO DIAG
Ø
Color setting
screen
⇒ See III-12.4.5
(26) (27) (28) (29) (30)
FSSB PARAM P.MATE (OPRT) +

Page 6 TUNING MGR.
Ø Ø
FSSB data Machining
display and parameter
setting screen tuning
⇒ See ⇒ See III-12.4.7
Maintenance
Manual
(B-64485JA)
(31) (32) (33) (34) (35)
EMBED PCMCIA ETHER PROFI (OPRT) +

Page 7 PORT LAN NE T BUS MST
Ø Ø Ø Ø
Embedded Embedded Ethernet PROFIBUS
Ethernet Ethernet function -DP Master
function function ⇒ See function
⇒ See ⇒ See Fast Ethernet / ⇒ See
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE Fast Data Server PROFIBUS-DP
MANUAL MANUAL OPERATOR’S Board
MANUAL CONNECTION
MANUAL
(36) (37) (38) (39) (40)
REMOTE M CODE (OPRT) +

Page 8 DIAG
Ø Ø
Machine M code
Remote grouping
Diagnosis function
function ⇒Ⅱ-11.3
⇒ See
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
- 661 -
(41) (42) (43) (44) (45)

PROFI DEVNET FL-net DEVNET (OPRT) +
Page 9 SLAVE MASTER 1CH SLAVE
Ø Ø Ø Ø
PROFIBUS DeviceNet FL-net DeviceNet
-DP Slave Master function Slave
function function ⇒ See function
⇒ See ⇒ See FL-net Board ⇒ See
PROFIBUS-DP DeviceNet Board CONNECTION DeviceNet Board
Board CONNECTION MANUAL CONNECTION
CONNECTION MANUAL MANUAL
MANUAL
(46) (47) (48) (49) (50)
DUAL R.TIME (OPRT) +

Page 10 CHECK MACRO
Ø Ø
Dual Check Real time
Safety custom macro
diagnosis ⇒Ⅱ-12.3.8
data
⇒ Dual Check
Safety
CONNECTION
MANUAL
(B-64003EN)
(51) (52) (53) (54) (55)
ID-INF (OPRT) +
Page 11
(56) (57) (58) (59) (60)
CCLink ROBOT ROBOT (OPRT) +

Page 12 REMOTE STATUS CON.
Ø Ø Ø
CC-Link Robot Robot
function connection connection
⇒ See function function
CC-Link Board ⇒ See Robot and ⇒ See Robot and
CONNECTION Machine Tool Machine Tool
MANUAL Integration Integration
Function Function
OPERATOR'S OPERATOR'S
MANUAL MANUAL
- 662 -
(61) (62) (63) (64) (65)
USB FL-net (OPRT) +

Page 13 2CH
Ø Ø
USB FL-net
function function
⇒ See ⇒ See
MAINTENANCE FL-net Board
MANUAL CONNECTION
MANUAL
- 663 -

display unit)
Page 1 Page 2
Displaying and
PARAME PMC
(1) ⇒ setting parameters (8)
TER ⇒ See III-12.4.10 MAINTE
Checking by
DIAGNO self-diagnosis
(2) ⇒ screen (9) LADDER
SIS
⇒ See III-7.3
SERVO GUIDE
SERVO Mate PMC
(3) ⇒ ⇒ See Maintenance (10)
GUIDE CONFIG
Manual
Displaying memory
data
(4) MEMORY ⇒ (11)
⇒ See III-12.4.15
Displaying and Color setting

PITCH setting pitch error screen
(5) ⇒ compensation data (12) COLOR ⇒
ERROR
⇒ See III-12.4.11 ⇒ See III-12.4.14
Servo parameters
SERVO ⇒ See III-12.4.12 PERIOD
(6) ⇒ (13)
PARAM MAINTE
MAINTE
(7) (14)
INFO
NEXT NEXT
PAGE PAGE
- 664 -
Page 3 Page 4
FSSB data display M code grouping

and setting screen function
M CODE
(15) FSSB ⇒ ⇒ See (22) ⇒ ⇒ See II-11.3
Maintenance GROUP
Manual
Embedded
Ethernet function
EMBED
(16) (23) ⇒ ⇒ See
PORT MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
Embedded
Ethernet function
WAVE PCMCIA
(17) (24) ⇒ ⇒ See
DIAG LAN MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
Ethernet function
⇒ See Fast
OPERAT ETHER Ethernet / Fast
(18) (25) ⇒ Data Server
HISTRY NET
OPERATOR’S
MANUAL
Input/ output on PROFIBUS-DP

the all IO screen Master function
⇒ See III-8.3 PROFI ⇒ See
(19) ALL IO ⇒ (26) ⇒ PROFIBUS-DP
MASTER Board
CONNECTION
MANUAL
Input/ output on PROFIBUS-DP

the all IO screen Slave function
⇒ See III-8.3 PROFI ⇒ See
(20) ALL IO ⇒ (27) ⇒ PROFIBUS-DP
SLAVE Board
CONNECTION
MANUAL
Parameter tuning
PARAM ⇒ See III-12.4.18
(21) ⇒ (28)
TUNING
NEXT NEXT
PAGE PAGE
- 665 -
Page 5 Page 6
P.MATE
(29) (36)
MGR.
DeviceNet Master
function
DEVNET ⇒ See DeviceNet
(30) SYSTEM (37) ⇒ Board
MASTER
CONNECTION
MANUAL
Machine Remote FL-net function

Diagnosis function ⇒ See FL-net
REMOTE ⇒ See Fast Ethernet FL-net Board
(31) ⇒ / Fast Data Server (38) ⇒ CONNECTION
DIAG 1CH
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MANUAL
Dual Check Safety DeviceNet Slave

diagnosis data function
DUAL ⇒ See Dual Check DEVNET ⇒ See DeviceNet
(32) ⇒ Safety (39) ⇒ Board
CHECK CONNECTION SLAVE CONNECTION
MANUAL MANUAL
(B-64483EN-2)
Displaying and
R.TIME setting real time
(33) ⇒ (40)
MACRO custom macro data
⇒ See III-12.3.23
(34) (41)
(35) (42)
NEXT NEXT
PAGE PAGE
- 666 -
Page 7 Page 8
CC-Link function
CCLink ⇒ See CC-Link
(43) ID-INF (50) ⇒ Board
REMOTE CONNECTION
MANUAL
(44) (51)
Robot connection
function
⇒ See Robot and
ROBOT Machine Tool
(45) (52) ⇒ Integration
STATUS
Function
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL
Robot connection
function
⇒ See Robot and
ROBOT Machine Tool
(46) (53) ⇒ Integration
CON.
Function
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL
(47) (54)
USB function
⇒ See
(48) (55) USB ⇒ MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
FL-net function
⇒ See FL-net
FL-net
(49) (56) ⇒ Board
2CH CONNECTION
MANUAL
NEXT NEXT
PAGE PAGE
- 667 -
12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
Section 12.1, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following
subsections:
------ Screens of a 8.4/10.4-inch display unit ------

12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System...............................................................668
12.1.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System...................................................................669
12.1.3 Overall Position Display..............................................................................................................671
12.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset .........................................................................................672
12.1.5 Actual Feedrate Display ..............................................................................................................673
12.1.6 Display of Run Time and Parts Count.........................................................................................675
12.1.7 Setting the Floating Reference Position ......................................................................................676
12.1.8 Operating Monitor Display..........................................................................................................676
------ Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit ------
12.1.9Overall Position Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) ......................................................................677
12.1.10Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (15/19-inch Display Unit) ................................................679
12.1.11Actual Feedrate Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) .....................................................................680
12.1.12Display of Run Time and Parts Count (15/19-inch Display Unit)................................................681
12.1.13Setting the Floating Reference Position (15/19-inch Display Unit) .............................................683
12.1.14Operating Monitor Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) ................................................................683
Screens of a 8.4/10.4-inch display unit
Press function key to display the current position of the tool.

The following three screens are used to display the current position of the tool:
• Current position display screen for the workpiece coordinate system.
• Current position display screen for the relative coordinate system.
• Current overall position display screen.
The above screens can also display the feedrate, run time, and the number of parts. In addition, a floating
reference position can be set on these screens.
Function key can also be used to display the load on the servo motor and spindle motor and the
rotation speed of the spindle motor (operating monitor display).
Function key can also be used to display the screen for displaying the distance moved by handle
interruption. See Section, “MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION” for details on this screen.
On any of the position display screens, the status (such as D, I, L, S, *, or M) of an axis is indicated on
the left of the axis name to prevent wrong operations. See "Axis status display" in III-6.5, "WRONG
OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS" for details.
12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System

Displays the current position of the tool in the workpiece coordinate system. The current position changes
as the tool moves. The least input increment is used as the unit for numeric values. The title at the top of
the screen indicates that absolute coordinates are used.
Display procedure for the current position screen in the workpiece coordinate
Procedure
- 668 -
2 Press soft key [ABSOLUTE].

3 Press soft key [ABSOLUTE] again. The sixth and subsequent axes are displayed.
Fig. 12.1.1 Current position (absolute) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Display including compensation values
Bits 6 (DAL) and 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether the displayed values
include tool length compensation and cutter compensation.
12.1.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System

Displays the current position of the tool in a relative coordinate system based on the coordinates (see
Explanation) set by the operator. The current position changes as the tool moves. The increment system is
used as the unit for numeric values.
The title at the top of the screen indicates that relative coordinates are used.
Display procedure for the current position screen with the relative coordinate
system
Procedure
2 Press soft key [RELATIVE].
3 Press soft key [RELATIVE] again. The sixth and subsequent axes are displayed.
- 669 -
Fig. 12.1.2 Current position (relative) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
See Explanation for the procedure for setting the coordinates.
Explanation
- Setting the relative coordinates
The current position of the tool in the relative coordinate system can be reset to 0 or preset to a specified
value as follows:
Normal decimal point input and Pocket calculator type decimal point input can be selected by bit 0 (DPI)
of parameter.No.3401.
Resetting relative coordinates to 0

When all axes are reset to 0
2 Press chapter selection key [RELATIVE] to display the relative coordinate screen.
4 Press soft key [ORIGIN].
5 Press soft key [ALL AXIS].

The relative coordinates of all axes are reset to 0.
When a specified axis is reset to 0

4 Press soft key [ORIGIN].
- 670 -
5 Input the axis name of the resetting axis.

The axis name blinks.
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
The relative coordinate is reset to 0.
Presetting relative coordinates

Procedure
4 Input the axis name of the presetting axis.

5 Input the coordinates value, and press soft key [PRESET].
The relative coordinate is preset by input coordinate value.
NOTE
1 When the preset of the specified axis is done in the following states, warning is
displayed.
• When only the numerical value is input or the character that is not the axis
name is input
Waning massage: “THERE IS NO SPECIFIED NAME OF AXIS”
• When input form is except for “axis name + numerical value” is done
Waning massage: ”FORMAT ERROR”
2 When axis name display is changed by parameter No.3132, specify the changed
axis name.

Bits 4 (DRL) and 5 (DRC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether the displayed values
include tool length compensation and cutter compensation.
- Presetting by setting a coordinate system

Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to specify whether the position indication values in the
absolute coordinate system are preset as those in the relative coordinate system during coordinate system
setting or manual reference position return by the G92 command.
If parameter bit PPD is set to 0, by setting bit 5 (PWR) of parameter No. 11277 to 1, it is possible to
preset the relative coordinates at power-on in the machine coordinate system.
12.1.3 Overall Position Display

Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of the tool in the workpiece coordinate
system, relative coordinate system, and machine coordinate system, and the remaining distance.
The relative coordinates can also be set on this screen. See Subsection, “Position Display in the Relative
Coordinate System” for the procedure.
- 671 -
Procedure for displaying overall position display screen

Procedure
2 Press soft key [ALL].
3 Press soft key [ALL] again. The sixth and subsequent axes are displayed.
Fig. 12.1.3 Current position (overall) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Coordinate display
The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time:
• Current position in the relative coordinate system (relative coordinate)
• Current position in the workpiece coordinate system (absolute coordinate)
• Current position in the machine coordinate system (machine coordinate)
• Distance to go (distance to go)
- Distance to go
The distance remaining is displayed in the MEM or MDI mode.
The distance the tool is yet to be moved in the current block is displayed.
- Machine coordinate system

The least command increment is used as the unit for values displayed in the machine coordinate system.
However, the least input increment can be used by setting bit 0 (MCN) of parameter No. 3104.
- Resetting the relative coordinates

The total position display screen also supports the resetting of the relative coordinates to 0 or presetting of
them to specified values. See the procedure for resetting the relative coordinates described in See
Subsection, “Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System”.
12.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset

If a workpiece coordinate system has been shifted with manual intervention or any other operation, an
MDI operation can be performed to preset the system to a workpiece coordinate system that is offset by a
- 672 -
workpiece origin offset, from the machine zero point that has been set before the shifting.
A command (G92.1) can be programmed to preset a workpiece coordinate system. (See II-7.2.4.)
Procedure for the workpiece coordinate system preset

Procedure
When all axes are performed to preset
2 Press soft key [ALL] or [ABSOLUTE].
4 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WK COORD] appears.
5 Press soft key [WK COORD].
When a specified axis is performed to preset

2 Press soft key [ALL] or [ABSOLUTE].
4 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WK COORD] appears.
6 Enter the axis name ( , , ...) and zero ( ).

Explanation
- Operation mode
This function can be executed when the reset state or automatic operation stop state is entered, regardless
of the operation mode.
- Presetting relative coordinates

As with absolute coordinates, bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 is used to specify whether to preset
relative coordinates (RELATIVE).
12.1.5 Actual Feedrate Display

The actual feedrate on the machine (per minute) can be displayed on a current position display screen or
program check screen.
On the 12 soft keys display unit, the actual feedrate is always displayed.
- 673 -
Display procedure for the actual feedrate on the current position display screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key to display a current position display screen. At the location indicated
by , an actual feedrate is displayed.
Fig. 12.1.5 Current position (absolute) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (depending on the specified least
input increment) under the display of the current position.
Explanation
- Actual feedrate value
The actual rate is calculated by the following expression:
n n : Number of axes
Fact＝ ∑
i =1
(fi) 2 fi : Cutting feed rate in the tangential direction of each axis or rapid traverse rate
Fact : Actual feedrate displayed
The display unit:
mm/min (metric input).
inch/min (Inch input, two digits below the decimal point are displayed.)
- Actual feedrate display of rotary axis

In the case of movement of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of deg/min but is displayed on the
screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the rotary axis moves at 50 deg/min, the
following is displayed: 50 mm/min (in metric input) or 0.50 inch/min (in inch input).
- Actual feedrate display on the other screen

The program check screen also displays the actual feedrate.
- Number of decimal places

The number of decimal places of feed per minute is set by the parameter No.3135.
- 674 -
12.1.6 Display of Run Time and Parts Count

The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayed on the current position display
screens.
Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display
screen
Procedure
by , a run time and parts count are displayed.
Fig. 12.1.6 Current position (relative) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The number of machined parts (PART COUNT), run time (RUN TIME), and cycle time (CYCLE TIME)
are displayed under the current position.
Explanation
- PART COUNT
Indicates the number of machined parts. The number is incremented each time M02, M30, or an M code
specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
- RUN TIME
Indicates the total run time during automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time.
- CYCLE TIME
Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is
automatically preset to 0 when a cycle start is performed at reset state. It is preset to 0 even when power is
removed.
- Display on the other screen

Details of the run time and the number of machined parts are displayed on the setting screen. See
III-12.3.3.
- 675 -
- Parameter setting
The number of machined parts and run time cannot be set on current position display screens.
The number of machined parts and run time cannot be set on current position display screens. They can
be set by parameters Nos. 6711, 6751, and 6752 or on the setting screen.
- Incrementing the number of machined parts

Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is used to specify whether the number of machined parts is
incremented each time M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed, or only
each time an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
12.1.7 Setting the Floating Reference Position

To perform floating reference position return with a G30.1 command, the floating reference position must
be set beforehand.
Procedure for setting the floating reference position

Procedure
1 Press function key to display a screen used for displaying the current position.
2 Move the tool to the floating reference position by jogging.
4 Press soft key [SET FRP].
5 To register the floating reference positions for all axes, press soft key [ALL AXIS].
To register the floating reference position of a specific axis, enter the name of the axis ( , ,
etc.), then press soft key [AXIS NAME]. Two or more names can be entered consecutively
(e.g., ) [AXIS NAME]).
The above operation stores the floating reference position. It can be checked with parameter No.
1244.
6 In step 4, the floating reference position along a specified axis can also be stored by entering the axis
name (such as or ) and pressing soft key [SET FRP].
Explanation
- Presetting the relative coordinate system
When bit 3 (FPC) of parameter No. 1201 is set to 1, the floating reference position can be registered,
while the relative position display can be preset to 0.
12.1.8 Operating Monitor Display

The load meter for a servo axis can be displayed. Also, the load meter and speed meter for a serial spindle
can be displayed.
To enable this function, bit 5 (OPM) of parameter No. 3111 must be set to 1.
Procedure for displaying the operating monitor

Procedure
2 Press continuous menu key .
3 Press soft key [MONITOR].
- 676 -
Fig. 12.1.8 Operating monitor (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Display of the servo axes
Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled axes of the path can be displayed.
One screen displays load meters for up to five axes at a time. By pressing the soft key [MONITOR], load
meters for the 6th axis and up are displayed.
- Unit of graph
The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200% (only a value is displayed for load exceeding
200%).
The bar graph for the speedometer shows the ratio of the current spindle speed to the maximum spindle
speed (100%).
- Load meter
The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter No. 2086.
- Color of graph
If the value of a load meter exceeds 100%, the bar graph turns purple.
12.1.9 Overall Position Display (15/19-inch Display Unit)

Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of the tool in the workpiece coordinate
system, relative coordinate system, and machine coordinate system, and the remaining distance.
The relative coordinates can also be set on this screen. (Refer to Explanation.)
Procedure for displaying overall position display screen

Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [ALL].
- 677 -
Fig. 12.1.9 Current position screen (15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Coordinate display
The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time:
• Current position in the relative coordinate system (relative coordinate)
• Current position in the work coordinate system (absolute coordinate)
• Current position in the machine coordinate system (machine coordinate)
• Distance to go (distance to go)
- Distance to go
The distance remaining is displayed in the MEM or MDI mode.
The distance the tool is yet to be moved in the current block is displayed.
- Machine coordinate system

The least command increment is used as the unit for values displayed in the machine coordinate system.
However, the least input increment can be used by setting bit 0 (MCN) of parameter No. 3104.
- Setting the relative coordinates

The current position of the tool in the relative coordinate system can be reset to 0 or preset to a specified
value as follows:
Normal decimal point input and Pocket calculator type decimal point input can be selected by bit 0 (DPI)
of parameter.No.3401.
Resetting relative coordinates to 0

When all axes are reset to 0
2 Press horizontal soft key [ORIGIN].
3 Press horizontal soft key [ALL AXIS].

The relative coordinates of all axes are reset to 0.
- 678 -
When a specified axis is reset to 0

2 Press horizontal soft key [ORIGIN].
3 Input the axis name of the resetting axis.

4 Press horizontal soft key [EXEC].
The relative coordinate is reset to 0.
Presetting relative coordinates

Procedure
2 Input the axis name of the presetting axis.

3 Input the coordinates value, and press horizontal soft key [PRESET].
The relative coordinate is preset by input coordinate value.
NOTE
1 When the preset of the specified axis is done in the following states, warning is
displayed.
- When only the numerical value is input or the character that is not the axis
name is input
Waning massage: “THERE IS NO SPECIFIED NAME OF AXIS”
- When input form is except for “axis name + numerical value” is done
Waning massage: “FORMAT ERROR”
2 When axis name display is changed by parameter No.3132, specify the changed
axis name.

The following parameters can be used to determine whether the displayed values include and cutter
compensation.
• Workpiece coordinate system: Bits 6 (DAL) and 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 3104
• Relative coordinate system: Bits 4 (DRL) and 5 (DRC) of parameter No. 3104
- Presetting by setting a coordinate system

Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to specify whether the position indication values in the
absolute coordinate system are preset as those in the relative coordinate system during coordinate system
setting or manual reference position return by the G92 command.
12.1.10 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (15/19-inch Display

Unit)
If a workpiece coordinate system has been shifted with manual intervention or any other operation, an
MDI operation can be performed to preset the system to a workpiece coordinate system that is offset by a
workpiece origin offset, from the machine zero point that has been set before the shifting.
- 679 -
A command (G92.1) can be programmed to preset a workpiece coordinate system. (See II-7.2.4.)
Procedure for the workpiece coordinate system preset

Procedure
When all axes are performed to preset
When a specified axis is performed to preset

4 Enter the axis name ( , , ...) and zero ( ).

Explanation
- Operation mode
This function can be executed when the reset state or automatic operation stop state is entered, regardless
of the operation mode.
- Presetting relative coordinates

As with absolute coordinates, bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 is used to specify whether to preset
relative coordinates (RELATIVE).
12.1.11 Actual Feedrate Display (15/19-inch Display Unit)

The actual feedrate on the machine (per minute) can be displayed on a current position display screen or
program check screen.
Display procedure for the actual feedrate on the current position display screen
Procedure
by , an actual feedrate is displayed.
- 680 -
The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (depending on the specified
least input increment) under the display of the current position.
Explanation
- Actual feedrate value
The actual rate is calculated by the following expression:
n n : Number of axes
Fact＝ ∑
i =1
(fi) 2 fi : Cutting feed rate in the tangential direction of each axis or rapid traverse rate
Fact : Actual feedrate displayed
The display unit:
mm/min (metric input).
inch/min (Inch input, two digits below the decimal point are displayed.)
- Actual feedrate display of rotary axis

In the case of movement of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of deg/min but is displayed on the
screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the rotary axis moves at 50 deg/min, the
following is displayed: 50 mm/min (in metric input) or 0.50 inch/min (in inch input).
- Actual feedrate display on the other screen

The program check screen also displays the actual feedrate.
12.1.12 Display of Run Time and Parts Count (15/19-inch Display

Unit)
The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayed on the current position display
screens.
- 681 -
Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display
screen
Procedure
by , a run time and parts count are displayed.
The number of machined parts (PART COUNT), run time (RUN TIME), and cycle time (CYCLE TIME)
are displayed under the current position.
Explanation
- PART COUNT
Indicates the number of machined parts. The number is incremented each time M02, M30, or an M code
- RUN TIME
- CYCLE TIME
removed.
- Display on the other screen

Details of the run time and the number of machined parts are displayed on the setting screen. See
III-12.3.20.
- Parameter setting
The number of machined parts and run time cannot be set on current position display screens.
The number of machined parts and run time cannot be set on current position display screens. They can
be set by parameters Nos. 6711, 6751, and 6752 or on the setting screen.
- 682 -
- Incrementing the number of machined parts

Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is used to specify whether the number of machined parts is
incremented each time M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed, or only
each time an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
12.1.13 Setting the Floating Reference Position (15/19-inch Display

Unit)
To perform floating reference position return with a G30.1 command, the floating reference position must
be set beforehand.
Procedure for setting the floating reference position

Procedure
1 Press function key to display a screen used for displaying the current position.
2 Move the tool to the floating reference position by jogging.
3 Press horizontal soft key [SET FRP].
4 To register the floating reference positions for all axes, press soft key [ALL AXIS].
To register the floating reference position of a specific axis, enter the name of the axis ( , ,
etc.), then press horizontal soft key [AXIS NAME]. Two or more names can be entered
consecutively (e.g., ) [AXIS NAME]).
The above operation stores the floating reference position. It can be checked with parameter No.
1244.
5 In step 3, the floating reference position along a specified axis can also be stored by entering the axis
name (such as or ) and pressing horizontal soft key [SET FRP].
Explanation
- Presetting the relative coordinate system
When bit 3 (FPC) of parameter No. 1201 is set to 1, the floating reference position can be registered,
while the relative position display can be preset to 0.
12.1.14 Operating Monitor Display (15/19-inch Display Unit)

The load meter for each servo axis can be displayed. Also, the load meter and speed meter for a serial
spindle can be displayed.
To enable this function, bit 5 (OPM) of parameter No. 3111 must be set to 1.
Procedure for displaying the operating monitor

Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [MONITOR].
- 683 -
Fig. 12.1.14 Operating monitor (15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Display of the servo axes
Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled axes of the path can be displayed.
One screen displays load meters for up to five axes at a time. By pressing the vertical soft key
[MONITOR], load meters for the 6th axis and up are displayed.
- Unit of graph
The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200% (only a value is displayed for load exceeding
200%).
The bar graph for the speedometer shows the ratio of the current spindle speed to the maximum spindle
speed (100%).
- Load meter
The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter No. 2086 and spindle parameter No. 4127.
- Color of graph
If the value of a load meter exceeds 100%, the bar graph turns red.
- 684 -
subsections:
――――― Screens of a 8.4/10.4-inch display unit

12.2.1 Program Contents Display...........................................................................................................685
12.2.2 Editing a Program........................................................................................................................694
12.2.3 Program Screen for MDI Operation ............................................................................................696
12.2.4 Program Folder Screen ................................................................................................................696
12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen .........................................................................................................703
12.2.6 Program Check Screen ................................................................................................................703
12.2.7 Background Editing.....................................................................................................................704
12.2.8 Stamping the Machining Time ....................................................................................................709
――――― Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit

12.2.9 Program Contents Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) ................................................................717
12.2.10 Editing a Program (15/19-inch Display Unit) .............................................................................723
12.2.11 Program Screen for MDI Operation (15/19-inch Display Unit)..................................................725
12.2.12 Program Folder Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)......................................................................725
12.2.13 Next Block Display Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...............................................................730
12.2.14 Program Check Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)......................................................................731
12.2.15 Background Editing (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..........................................................................732
12.2.16 Stamping the Machining Time (15/19-inch Display Unit)..........................................................737
This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key . The screens include a
program editing screen, program folder list display screen, and screens for displaying the command states
of the program currently being executed.
1. Program screen
2. Program folder screen
3. Next block display screen
4. Program check screen
On the program screen, you edit the program that is currently selected, and display the block that is
currently executed during program operation. In MDI mode, you also edit an MDI operation program,
and display the block that is currently executed.
12.2.1 Program Contents Display

Displays the program currently being executed in MEM mode.
Displaying the program being executed

Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PROGRAM].
The cursor is positioned at the block currently being executed.
- 685 -
Fig. 12.2.1 Screen for displaying the program being executed (10.4-inch display unit)
12.2.1.1 Displaying the executed block

Overview
When the program being executed is displayed, one executed block can be displayed. This function can
be enabled by setting bit 3 (FPD) of parameter No. 11308.
The program screen shows the following:

• Executed block
• Block being executed
• Look-ahead block(*)
• Non-look-ahead block
(*) For details on look-ahead, see the explanation "Program look-ahead" below.
The executed block is displayed on the top of the screen, and ">" is shown in front of the block being
executed, across which the cursor is placed. Below the block being executed, look-ahead blocks are
displayed. Below them, non-look-ahead blocks are displayed.
There is a dividing line between the look-ahead blocks and the non-look-ahead blocks.
- 686 -
Dividing line
Executed block
Block being executed
Look-ahead block
Non-look-ahead
block
Fig. 12.2.1.1 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed (MDI mode)
Fig. 12.2.1.1 (b) Screen for displaying the program being executed (MEM mode)
Explanation
- Program look-ahead
When an automatic operation cycle starts, a program is executed as described below.
<1> The command of one block is read from the specified program.
<2> The read command is analyzed and converted to executable data.
<3> The command of the block is executed.
During execution of the command, steps <1> and <2> are performed for the next block in advance. Upon
completion of the current block, execution of the next block can be started immediately. This processing
is referred to as look-ahead or buffering.
The number of look-ahead blocks depends on the processing status or parameters.
- 687 -
12.2.1.2 Text display

Overview
Setting bit 1 (APD) of parameter No. 11350 can select whether to display the contents of the running NC
program in the look-ahead or text mode.
In the look-ahead mode (APD = 0):
Displays look-ahead blocks and non-look-ahead blocks in the running NC program.
In the text mode (APD = 1):
Displays blocks in the running NC program that is in the program memory. The displayed blocks
include the block just before the block being executed.
(Example)
Fig. 12.2.1.2 (a) shows the display in the look-ahead mode and Fig. 12.2.1.2 (b) shows the display in
the text mode when block N4 in program O0099 shown below is being executed.
O0099
N1 G91 G00 X100.
N2 Y150.
N3 #501 = 100.
N4 Y-100.
IF[#1 GT 10] GOTO 7
N5 Y#501 (COMMENT)
N6 M98 P9100
N7 G90 X100
N8 G300
N9 G00 X0Y0
N10 M30
Running program
A decimal point is added to the numeric value.
The macro statement
is not displayed. Look-ahead blocks
The macro variable

number is replaced
with a numeric value. The comment is not
displayed.
Fig. 12.2.1.2 (a) Display when block N4 is being executed (look-ahead mode)
The macro statement is

displayed.
The macro variable

The comment is displayed.
number is displayed
as is.
Fig. 12.2.1.2 (b) Display when block N4 is being executed (text mode)
- 688 -
External subprogram call

Setting bit 7 (DPD) of parameter No. 11356 can select whether to display the contents of the running
external subprogram by DNC operation or M198 in the look-ahead or text mode.
However, text mode is effective when the number of look-ahead blocks is only less than 5.
When the number of look-ahead blocks is 5 or more, look-ahead mode is effective.
12.2.1.3 Call stack display

Overview
In the call stack display, the program name and nest level of subprogram from main program to current
executing subprogram is displayed. When the device to which program is stored is a CNC build-in
memory, the program comment is displayed in addition to a program name and a nest level. Moreover,
the folder name where the program is stored is displayed in the active program now.
Call stack display

Procedure
2 Press the soft key [CHECK].
4 Press the soft key until soft key [CALL STK ON] appears.
Fig.12.2.1.3 (a) Program check screen (10.4-inch) (Non call stack display)
5 Press the soft key [CALL STK ON].
- 689 -
Call stack display
Fig.12.2.1.3 (b) Program check screen (10.4-inch) (Call stack display)
A part of the program check screen changes into the call stack.
Moreover, softkey [CALL STK ON] changes into softkey [CALL STKOFF].
6 The screen returns to Fig.12.2.1.3(a) by pressing the soft key [CALL STKOFF].
Explanation
In the call stack, nest level and program name and program comment of subprogram from main program
to program being executed is displayed. Moreover, about the program being executed, in addition to
program name and program comment, the folder information is displayed.
The following items are displayed on the screen.
Table12.2.1.3 Item of call stack display

Content of display Explanation
NEST LEVEL Level of subprogram calling from main program to program being executed is displayed
by the number.
The main program is displayed in the line of nest level 01.
PROGRAM NAME The name of subprogram called from the main program is displayed.
And when all calling program cannot be displayed within the area, it is displayed from
the one with large number of nest level.
Moreover, the folder where the program is stored is displayed for the active program.
The head of the folder is a device name.
PROGRAM COMMENT In case of CNC build-in memory, Program comment is displayed in parentheses at the
right of program name.
- 690 -
Example of screen
When the block of the cursor position is executed by the subprogram call from the main program that
exists in the figure below,
<MAIN_PROG>(MAIN PROGRAM) <SUB_PROG_1>(SUB1 PROGRAM) <SUB_PROG_2>(SUB2 PROGRAM)

⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
M98 <SUB_PROG_1> M98 <SUB_PROG_2> G01 X100. Z50. ;
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
M30 M99 M99
Fig.12.2.1.3 (c) Example of subprogram call
The call stack is displayed as shown in the figure below.
NEST LEVEL PROGRAM NAME PROGRAM COMMENT
Fig.12.2.1.3 (d) Call stack display
NOTE
1 When the storing number of program name and program comment and the
folder information exceed display area, the exceed part is displayed by the “…”.
2 As for MDI program, the program name is displayed as O0000 in the call stack.
3 As for External program, the folder where the program is stored is not displayed
and the top of program path name is displayed as “//DNC” in the call stack.
4 The programs of external subprogram call (M198) and execution macro are not
displayed in the call stack.
5 When this function is used in 8.4-inch display unit, the screen is displayed with
the same layout as 10.4-inch display unit and screen size is reduced.
The feature of “layout of 10.4-inch display unit and reduction” is as follows.
- The designs are the same as 10.4-inch display unit. However, the number of
soft key is the same as 8.4-inch display unit.
- Font size becomes small.
6 In the multi-path system simultaneous display, the call stack display can not be
performed on the same screen. However, if single-path display mode is set (bit 3
(MTS) of parameter No.11355#3 is 1), the call stack can be displayed.
12.2.1.4 Display interpreted and original programs on the same

screen
Overview
The input custom macro programs before conversion (original) and after conversion (interpreted) are
displayed on the program check screen at the same time.
If bit 5 (EPC) of parameter No.11356 is set to 1, this function becomes effective.
- 691 -
Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen

Procedure
2 Press the soft key [CHECK].
4 Press the soft key until soft key [INTERPRETED] appears.
Fig.12.2.1.4 (a) Program check screen (10.4-inch)

(Non display interpreted and original programs on the same screen)
5 Press the soft key [INTERPRETED].

The original program display is switched to the simultaneous display of interpreted program and
original program.
And the soft key [INTERPRETED] is changed to [ORIGINAL].
Fig.12.2.1.4 (b) Program check screen (10.4-inch)

(Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen)
- 692 -
6 The screen returns to Fig.12.2.1.4(a) by pressing the soft key [ORIGINAL].
Explanation
- For interpreted program
The program after the custom macro program is calculated is displayed.
Both the block being executed now and the block executed next to the executing block are displayed.
When the block executed next is a call command of the subprogram such as M98, called program is
displayed.
- For original program

The program before the custom macro program is calculated is displayed.
The blocks displayed before and after the active block are displayed in the order of registration in the
memory.
The block is not necessarily a block executed last time, or, the block is not necessarily a block that will be
executed next time either.
The difference point of the original program and the interpreted program is as follows.
Table12.2.1.4 The difference point of the original program and the interpreted program
Comment Macro program Macro Variable Decimal Point Subprogram call
Interpreted Not displayed Not displayed Value stored in Least increment Not displayed
Program macro variable system
(Example) G01 (Not displayed) G01 X123.456 ; G01 X1.000 ; (Not displayed)
Original Displayed Displayed Macro variable The decimal point Displayed

Program position is the
same as the
input.
(Example) G01 (COMMENT) IF [#1 GT 10] G01 X#100 ; G01 X1. ; M98P1000;
GOTO 20
Example of screen
Executing block
Interpreted program
Next executing block
Previous block
Executing block
Original program
Next block
Fig.12.2.1.4 (c) Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen
- 693 -
NOTE
1 In case of the program stored in internal memory (CNC MEM) and the program
in memory card program device (MEMCARD), the interpreted and original
programs are displayed on the same screen.
2 Protected programs and execution macro programs are not displayed.
3 The interpreted program is displayed in the area of the original program display
during DNC operation.
4 In operating of single block, the cursor shows the executed block. The cursor
doesn’t move to the next block.
5 When this function is used in 8.4-inch display unit, the screen is displayed with
the same layout as 10.4-inch display unit and screen size is reduced.
The feature of “layout of 10.4-inch display unit and reduction” is as follows.
- The designs are the same as 10.4-inch display unit. However, the number of
soft key is the same as 8.4-inch display unit.
- Font size becomes small.
6 In the multi-path system simultaneous display, the display interpreted and
original programs can not be performed on the same screen.
Restrictions
This function cannot be used at the same time with the following optional functions.
- Retrace
12.2.2 Editing a Program

A program can be edited in the EDIT mode.
Two modes of editing are available. One mode is word editing, which performs word-by-word editing.
The other is character editing, which performs character-by-character editing.
For program creation and editing operation, see Chapter III-9, “CREATING PROGRAMS” and Chapter
III-10, “EDITING PROGRAMS”.
Displaying the program editing screen

Procedure
- Word editing
Editing operations such as text insertion, modification, and deletion, and cursor movements are performed
on a word-by-word basis.
- 694 -
Fig. 12.2.2 (a) Program word editing screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- Character editing
Program editing operations and cursor movements are performed on a character-by-character basis as
with a general text editor.
Text is input directly to the cursor position instead of using the key input buffer.
Fig. 12.2.2 (b) Program character editing screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Switching between program editing modes

You can switch between word editing and character editing with soft keys.
Procedure
3 Press operation soft key [(OPRT)].
- 695 -
4 Pressing operation soft key [CHANGE EDITOR] switches the editing mode between word editing
and character editing.
12.2.3 Program Screen for MDI Operation

During MDI operation or editing of an MDI operation program in the MDI mode, the program currently
being executed mode is displayed.
For MDI operation, see Section III-4.2, “MDI Operation”.
Procedure for displaying the program screen for MDI operation

Procedure
The program input from the MDI is displayed.
Fig. 12.2.3 MDI operation program screen (10.4-inch display unit)
12.2.4 Program Folder Screen

A list of programs registered in the program memory is displayed.
For the program folder screen, see Chapter III-11, “PROGRAM MANAGEMENT”.
Displaying the program folder screen

Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [FOLDER].
- 696 -
Fig. 12.2.4 (a) Program folder screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Displaying comments on the program folder screen

The comments of the first block of the program are displayed by setting bit 1 (COL) of parameter No.
11351 to 1.
Fig.12.2.4 (b) Displaying comments on the program folder screen
12.2.4.1 Split display on the program folder screen

Overview
On the program folder screen, the folder information display can be split into two folder information
views, upper and lower, as shown in the Fig. 12.2.4.1 (a). This function is enabled by setting bit 1 (MLD)
of parameter No. 11318 to 1.
- 697 -
Fig. 12.2.4.1 (a) Program folder screen (split-display screen)(10.4-inch display unit)
On the split folder display, file information about different sets of devices or folders can be shown in
different views at the same time, so you can copy or move files easily.
Example of copying a file from the CNC MEM to the Data Server
<2>
<1>
<3> <4>
Procedure
<1> Change to a destination folder on the Data Server.
<2> Change to a folder on the CNC_MEM that contains a file you want to copy.
<3> Select the file.
<4> Copy the file.
- 698 -
Procedure for switching to split display

Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program folder screen.
3 Press continuous menu key twice.
Soft key [MULTI LIST] appears.
Fig. 12.2.4.1 (b) Program folder screen (normal screen)(10.4-inch display unit)
4 Press soft key [MULTI LIST].

The folder information display is split into two folder views, upper and lower, which show the same
folder information. Immediately after the splitting, the upper folder view becomes active for
operations. At the same time, soft key [SINGLE LIST] appears.
Fig. 12.2.4.1 (c) Program folder screen (split-display screen)(10.4-inch display unit)
- 699 -
5 Pressing soft key [SINGLE LIST] takes you back to the original program folder display.
Then, the folders are shown which have been selected in the active view for operations on the split
display.
Procedure for switching between active folder views for file operations on the split
display
On the split folder display, you can switch between active folder views for file operations as described
below.
In the active folder view for file operations, the cursor is displayed on the file list.
Procedure
1 When the upper folder view is active for file operations and you press MDI key and cursor
key , the lower folder view becomes active for file operations.
2 When the lower folder view is active for file operations and you press MDI key and cursor
key , the upper folder view becomes active for file operations.
NOTE
1 In step 1, even if you press MDI key and cursor key when the upper
folder view is active for file operations, the lower folder view becomes active for
file operations.
2 In step 2, even if you press MDI key and cursor key when the lower
folder view is active for file operations, the upper folder view becomes active for
file operations.
Explanation
- File operations on the split display
The following operations are allowed on the split display.
<1> You can select and display devices or folders individually in each folder view.
<2> You can copy or move files between folders selected in different folder views.
(For details, see the section on operations of copying/moving between devices.)
In the selected folder view, you can perform the same operations as on the normal screen.
- Path switching
When path switching is performed while the split display is provided for a multi-path system, the folder
view in which the CNC MEM is selected as a device is changed to a view of the last selected folder for
each path on the CNC MEM.
- Device information display

The device information as shown in the normal program folder screen (portion in a dotted box in the Fig.
12.2.4.1 (d)) is not shown on the split display (Fig. 12.2.4.1 (c)).
- 700 -
Fig. 12.2.4.1 (d) Program folder screen (normal screen)(10.4-inch display unit)
You should see the device information on the normal screen.
Limitation
- Device that can be selected in both views at the same time on the split display
The same device of any of the following types can be selected in both views at the same time on the split
display.
• CNC MEM
• MEM CARD(binary format)
• Data Server
For other types, the same device cannot be selected for display in the folder views at the same time.
If any other type of device is selected when split display starts, the upper and lower folder views cannot
show the same sets of folders due to the above limitation. Therefore, the lower folder view shows the
folder selected as a foreground folder.
- Display units that support the split display

The split display is supported on 10.4-inch, 15-inch, and 19-inch display units.
12.2.4.2 Folder tree display

Overview
The folder tree can be displayed on program folder screen. By using this function, it is easy to manage
programs of each folder.
The folder tree is available in the program memory device (CNC_MEM), the USB device, the memory
card program device (MEMCARD), and the data server device.
Explanation
The folder tree is displayed the left side of the screen, and the list of folders and programs is displayed the
right side on the screen.
On the folder tree screen, current folder rank and selected folder are displayed.
On the program list screen, programs and folder of selected folder are displayed.
- 701 -
The programs and

folders in the
selected folder is
displayed
Fig.12.2.4.2 (a) Program folder tree display
Procedure for displaying folder tree
1. Press function key .

2. Press chapter selection soft key [FOLDER].
4. Press the soft key [TREE LIST].
5. The folder tree like the above is displayed.
6. If the press the soft key [LIST], the program list screen without folder tree is displayed.
Procedure for changing folder

In the folder tree screen, a folder is changed by moving the cursor.
Selecting upper folder: Press the cursor key .
Fig.12.2.4.2 (b)
Select under folder: Press the cursor key .
Fig.12.2.4.2 (c)
Select next or back folder: Press the cursor key or .
- 702 -
Fig.12.2.4.2 (d)
Limitation
The folder tree is not supported on 7.2/8.4-inch display units.
12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen

Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed next.
Procedure for displaying the next block display screen

Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [NEXT].
The G codes, addresses, command values specified in the block currently being executed and the
next block are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.5 Next block display screen (10.4-inch display unit)
12.2.6 Program Check Screen

Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data.
- 703 -
Procedure for displaying the program check screen

Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [CHECK].
The program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.6 Program check screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Program display
The program currently being executed is displayed.
The block being executed is displayed in reverse video.
- Current position display

The current position in the relative coordinate system, workpiece coordinate system, and machine
coordinate system, and the remaining amount of travel are displayed.
- Modal G codes
Up to 24 modal G codes are displayed.
12.2.7 Background Editing

Editing one program during execution of another program is referred to as background editing. You can
perform the same edit operations in the background as those in normal editing (foreground editing).
On a 10.4-inch or 15-inch display, you can perform background editing for the programs displayed in
multiple tiled windows. You can switch from a program displayed in one of the tiled windows to another
to perform copy, paste, and other edit operations, which allows you to edit programs efficiently.
You can edit one program simultaneously on a 8.4-inch display or three programs on a 10.4-inch display.
- 704 -
Function
- Background editing
A program other than the currently selected program can be edited. Background editing can be performed
in any mode.
- EDIT mode and reference mode

When background editing is started in the EDIT mode, the program can be edited. When background
editing is started in the reference mode, the program is opened in the read-only mode and cannot be
edited.
While a program opened in the EDIT mode cannot be run, a program opened in the reference mode can
be run.
- Program selected in the foreground

If the program selected in the foreground is specified as a program to be edited in the background,
background editing is started in the read-only mode. The text at an arbitrary position of the program
currently being executed can be checked.
- Switching from the program directory screen to the editing screen

By selecting a program from the program folder screen, background editing can be started.
On the program folder screen, move the cursor to a program to be edited in the background, then press the
MDI key . The screen display switches to the background editing screen.
Background editing can be started without entering a program name.
- Background editing on a multi-path system

Background editing does not depend on the path.
Even if the path to be operated is changed using the path selection signal, the background editing
currently being executed is just continued.
NOTE
The following programs cannot be edited in the background. They can be
opened only in the read-only mode.
- Running program
- Main program
- Program with the edit disable attribute
Display
When background editing starts, the ordinary program editing screen switches to the background editing
screen.
When two or more programs are edited in the background, the screen is split to display these programs.
For a 10.4-inch display, you can edit two programs simultaneously; for a 10.4-inch display, you can edit
three programs simultaneously.
- Word editing
Fig.12.2.7 (a)shows background word editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and left
programs). On the status line at the top of the window for each program, the program name and
“BG-EDIT” (indicating background editing in progress) are displayed.
The status line of the program being edited is displayed in reverse video.
- 705 -
Fig.12.2.7 (a) Background editing screen (word editing) (10.4-inch display unit)
- Character editing
Fig.12.2.7 (b) shows background character editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and
left programs). Similarly to word editing, at the top of the window for each program, the status line is
displayed. In addition, the current input mode (INSERT MODE or OVERWRITE MODE) is displayed at
the upper right of the screen for character editing.
Fig.12.2.7 (b) Background editing screen (character editing) (10.4-inch display unit)
- 706 -
- Editing status
The following items are displayed on the status line and program editing area according to the
background editing status.
Editing status Displayed items

(BG-EDIT)
No program selected
“NO PROGRAM” is displayed in the editing area.
Program opened program-name + (BG-EDIT)
program-name + (BG:READ ONLY)
Read-only program opened
The contents of the program are displayed in green.
Starting background editing from the editing screen

Procedure (word editing)
Method 1
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM].
3 Enter a program name.
4 Press soft key [BG EDIT].
NOTE
1 Background editing is performed in the EDIT mode.
2 If a nonexistent program is specified, a new program is created.
Method 2
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG EDIT].
5 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC]
to start background editing in the reference mode.
NOTE
If a nonexistent program is specified,
- Pressing soft key [EDIT EXEC] causes a new program to be created.
- Pressing soft key [REF EXEC] causes the warning message “SPECIFIED
PROGRAM NOT FOUND” to appear. A new program is not created.
Method 3
to start background editing in the reference mode. At this time, “NO PROGRAM” is displayed on
the screen.
NOTE
If a nonexistent program is specified, the warning message “SPECIFIED
PROGRAM NOT FOUND” is displayed. A new program is not created.
- 707 -
Procedure (character editing)

Method 1
NOTE
Method 2
the screen.
7 Press soft key [PROGRM NAME].
NOTE
When background editing has already started and editing start operation is performed again, the program
being edited and newly specified program are edited simultaneously.
Starting background editing from the program folder screen

By selecting a program from the program folder screen, background editing can be started. The cursor is
used to select a program. You do not need to enter a program name.
Procedure
2 Press soft key [FOLDER].
3 Move the cursor to a program to be edited.
4 Press the MDI key . The screen display is switched to the background editing screen.
- 708 -
NOTE
When background editing is started from the program folder screen, the EDIT
mode is set.
For the following programs, the reference mode is set, however:
- Running program
- Main program
Background editing operation

- Editing operation
The same editing operations as performed in the foreground can be performed.
- Switching from a program to another for editing

To switch from a program to another for editing when editing multiple programs simultaneously in the
background, press key, then or .
- Editing operation in the read-only mode

Cursor movement and page switching are possible. However, program editing is disabled.
- Copying and pasting text between programs

Text in a program selected and copied during program editing is kept held after the program to be edited
is changed. You can paste text in a program onto another program.
Background editing end operation

Background editing can be ended using the procedure described below.
The procedure for ending background editing of one program and that for ending all background editing
of multiple programs are shown below.
- Ending editing of one program

3 Select a program for which to end editing.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG END].
- Ending editing of all programs

3 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG ALL END].
To return to ordinary foreground editing, end all background editing. If at least one program is being
edited in the background, you cannot return to foreground editing.
12.2.8 Stamping the Machining Time

The execution times of the most recently executed ten programs can be displayed in hours, minutes, and
seconds.
The calculated machining time can be inserted as a comment of the program to check the machining time
on the program folder screen.
- 709 -
Procedure for stamping the machining time

Procedure
- Displaying the machining time
2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [TIME].
3 Press soft key [TIME]. The machining time display screen appears.
Fig. 12.2.8 (a) Machining time display screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- Calculating the machining time

1 Select the memory operation mode, then press the key.
2 Select the program screen, then select a program of which machining time you want to calculate.
3 Execute the program to perform actual machining.
4 When the key is pressed or, M02 or M30 is executed, the machining time count operation
stops. When the machining time display screen is selected, the program number of the stopped main
program and its machining time are displayed.
5 The Fig. 12.2.8 (b) shows the screen when the machining times of the ten main programs O0020,
O0040, …, and O0200 are displayed and the screen when the machining time of O0220 is newly
calculated after that.
- 710 -
Fig. 12.2.8 (b) Stamping the machining time (10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure for inserting the machining time on the program screen

Procedure
You can display the machining time of a program as a comment of the program. The procedure is shown
below:
1 To insert the calculated machining time of a program as a comment, the machining time of the
program must be displayed on the machining time display screen. Before stamping the machining
time of the program, check that the program number is displayed on the machining time display
screen.
2 Set the edit mode or background editing state and select the program screen. Then, select a program
of which machining time you want to insert.
3 Suppose that the machining time of O0100 is displayed on the machining time display screen.
- 711 -
Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display the operation soft keys. Then, press the continuous menu key
several times to display soft key [INSERT TIME]. Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. The
beginning of the program is displayed and the machining time of the program is inserted after the
program name.
Press soft key [INSERT TIME].
Fig. 12.2.8 (c) Program screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 If a comment is written in the block containing the program number of a program of which
machining time is to be inserted, the machining time is inserted after the comment.
- 712 -
Fig. 12.2.8 (d) Program screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Display on the program folder screen

The machining time of a program inserted in the program as a comment is displayed after the existing
comment of the program on the program folder screen.
- 713 -
Fig. 12.2.8 (e) Program folder screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Machining time
The machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode to the
next reset. If a reset is not performed during operation, the machining time is counted from the start to
M02 or M30. The time during which operation is held is not counted, but the time used to wait for the
completion of the M, S, T, and/or B functions is counted, however.
- Stamping the machining time

You can insert (stamp) the displayed machining time in a program stored in memory as a comment. The
machining time is inserted as a comment after the program number.
- Program folder
You can display the machining time inserted after a program number on the program folder screen. This
operation lets you know the machining time of each program to use the time as useful reference data
when planning processes on site.
Limitation
- Alarm
The execution of a program may be held by an alarm during the machining time count operation. In this
case, the machining time is counted until the alarm is released by a reset.
- M02
It may be specified that M02 does not reset the CNC, but returns completion signal FIN to the CNC to
restart the program from the beginning successively (bit 5 (M02) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 0). In
this case, when M02 returns completion signal FIN, the machining time count operation stops.

When an attempt is made to stamp the machining time of a program in the program, the machining time
of the program may not be displayed on the machining time display screen. In this case, the machining
time cannot be inserted in the program even if soft key [INSERT TIME] is pressed.
- 714 -
- Correcting the machining time

If an incorrect machining time is calculated (such as when a reset is made during the execution of a
program), reexecute the program to calculate the correct machining time. The same program number may
be displayed in two or more lines on the machining time display screen. In this case, the latest calculated
machining time is inserted in the program.
- States of the stamped machining time

In the following states, the stamped machining time is displayed on the program folder screen as shown
below.
1 When the comment of a program is longer than 16 characters

The 17th and subsequent characters of the comment are discarded and the machining time display
field is left blank.
Fig. 12.2.8 (f) 1. When the comment of a program is longer than 16 characters (10.4-inch display unit)
- 715 -
2 When two or more machining times are stamped

The first machining time is displayed.
Fig. 12.2.8 (g) When two or more machining times are stamped (10.4-inch display unit)
3 When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit
number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order)
The machining time display field is left blank.
- 716 -
Fig. 12.2.8 (h) When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit
number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order) (10.4-inch display unit)
12.2.9 Program Contents Display (15/19-inch Display Unit)

Displays the program currently being executed in MEM mode.
Displaying the program being executed

Procedure

2 Press vertical soft key [PROGRAM].
The cursor is positioned at the block currently being executed.
- 717 -
Fig. 12.2.9 Screen for displaying the program being executed (15-inch display unit)
12.2.9.1 Displaying the executed block

For an explanation of how to display the executed block, see Subsection 12.2.1.1, "Displaying the
executed block".
12.2.9.2 Call stack display (15/19-inch display unit)

Overview
In the call stack display, the program name and nest level of subprogram from main program to current
executing subprogram is displayed. When the device to which program is stored is a CNC build-in
memory, the program comment is displayed in addition to a program name and a nest level. Moreover,
the folder name where the program is stored is displayed in the active program now.
Call stack display

Procedure
2 Press the vertical soft key [CHECK].
- 718 -
Fig.12.2.9.2 (a) Program check screen (15-inch) (Non call stack display)
3 Press the horizontal soft key [CALL STK ON].

The call stack is displayed on the program check screen.
And the display of the horizontal soft key changes into [CALL STKOFF].
Call stack display
Fig.12.2.9.2 (b) Program check screen (15-inch) (Call stack display)
4 The screen returns to Fig.12.2.10.2(a) by pressing the horizontal soft key [CALL STKOFF].
Explanation
In the call stack, nest level and program name and program comment of subprogram from main program
to program being executed is displayed. Moreover, about the program being executed, in addition to
program name and program comment, the folder information is displayed.
The following items are displayed on the screen.
- 719 -
Table12.2.9.2 Item of call stack display

Content of display Explanation
NEST LEVEL Level of subprogram calling from main program to program being executed is displayed
by the number.
The main program is displayed in the line of nest level 01.
PROGRAM NAME The name of subprogram called from the main program is displayed.
And when all calling program cannot be displayed within the area, it is displayed from the
one with large number of nest level.
Moreover, the folder where the program is stored is displayed for the active program.
The head of the folder is a device name.
PROGRAM COMMENT In case of CNC build-in memory, Program comment is displayed in parentheses at the
right of program name.
Example of screen
When the block of the cursor position is executed by the subprogram call from the main program that
exists in the figure below,
<MAIN_PROG>(MAIN PROGRAM) <SUB_PROG_1>(SUB1 PROGRAM) <SUB_PROG_2>(SUB2 PROGRAM)

⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
M98 <SUB_PROG_1> M98 <SUB_PROG_2> G01 X100. Z50. ;
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅ ⋅ ⋅
M30 M99 M99
Fig.12.2.9.2 (c) Example of subprogram call
The call stack is displayed as shown in the figure below.
NEST LEVEL PROGRAM NAME PROGRAM COMMENT
Fig.12.2.9.2 (d) Call stack display
NOTE
1 When the storing number of program name and program comment and the folder
information exceed display area, the exceed part is displayed by the “…”.
2 As for MDI program, the program name is displayed as O0000 in the call stack.
3 As for External program, the folder where the program is stored is not displayed
and the top of program path name is displayed as “//DNC” in the call stack.
4 The programs of external subprogram call (M198) and execution macro are not
displayed in the call stack.
5 In the multi-path system simultaneous display, the call stack display can not be
performed on the same screen. However, if single-path display mode is set (bit 3
(MTS) of parameter No.11355#3 is 1), the call stack can be displayed.
- 720 -
12.2.9.3 Display interpreted and original programs on the same

screen (15/19-inch display unit)
Overview
The input custom macro programs before conversion (original) and after conversion (interpreted) are
displayed on the program check screen at the same time.
If bit 5 (EPC) of parameter No.11356 is set to 1, this function becomes effective.
Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen

Procedure
2 Press the vertical soft key [CHECK].
Fig.12.2.9.3 (a) Program check screen (15-inch)

(Non display interpreted and original programs on the same screen)
3 Press the horizontal soft key [INTERPRETED].

The original program display is switched to the simultaneous display of interpreted program and
original program. And the horizontal soft key [INTERPRETED] is changed to [ORIGINAL].
- 721 -
Fig.12.2.9.3 (b) Program check screen (15-inch)

(Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen)
4 The screen returns to Fig.12.2.10.3(a) by pressing the horizontal soft key [ORIGINAL].
Explanation
- For interpreted program
The program after the custom macro program is calculated is displayed.
Both the block being executed now and the block executed next to the executing block are displayed.
When the block executed next is a call command of the subprogram such as M98, called program is
displayed.
- For original program

The program before the custom macro program is calculated is displayed.
The blocks displayed before and after the active block are displayed in the order of registration in the
memory.
The block is not necessarily a block executed last time, or, the block is not necessarily a block that will be
executed next time either.
The difference point of the original program and the interpreted program is as follows.
Table12.2.9.3 The difference point of the original program and the interpreted program
Comment Macro program Macro Variable Decimal Point Subprogram call
Interpreted Not displayed Not displayed Value stored in Least increment Not displayed
Program macro variable system
(Example) G01 (Not displayed) G01 X123.456 ; G01 X1.000 ; (Not displayed)
Original Displayed Displayed Macro variable The decimal point Displayed

Program position is the
same as the
input.
(Example) G01 (COMMENT) IF [#1 GT 10] G01 X#100 ; G01 X1. ; M98P1000;
GOTO 20
- 722 -
Example of screen
Executing block
Interpreted program
Next executing block
Previous block
Executing block
Original program
Next block
Fig.12.2.9.3 (c) Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen
NOTE
1 In case of the program stored in internal memory (CNC MEM) and the program
in memory card program device (MEMCARD), the interpreted and original
programs are displayed on the same screen.
2 Protected programs and execution macro programs are not displayed.
3 The interpreted program is displayed in the area of the original program display
during DNC operation.
4 In operating of single block, the cursor shows the executed block. The cursor
doesn’t move to the next block.
5 In the multi-path system simultaneous display, the display interpreted and
original programs can not be performed on the same screen.
Restrictions
This function cannot be used at the same time with the following optional functions.
- Retrace
12.2.10 Editing a Program (15/19-inch Display Unit)

A program can be edited in the EDIT mode.
Two modes of editing are available. One mode is word editing, which performs word-by-word editing.
The other is character editing, which performs character-by-character editing.
For program creation and editing operation, see Chapter III-9, “CREATING PROGRAMS “ and Chapter
III-10, “EDITING PROGRAMS”.
Displaying the program editing screen

Procedure
- Word editing
Editing operations such as text insertion, modification, and deletion, and cursor movements are performed
on a word-by-word basis.
- 723 -
Fig. 12.2.10 (a) Program word editing screen (15-inch display unit)
- Character editing
Program editing operations and cursor movements are performed on a character-by-character basis as
with a general text editor.
Text is input directly to the cursor position instead of using the key input buffer.
Fig. 12.2.10 (b) Program character editing screen (15-inch display unit)
Switching between program editing modes

You can switch between word editing and character editing with horizontal soft keys.
Procedure

- 724 -
3 Press continuous menu key to display horizontal soft key [CHANGE EDITOR].
4 Pressing horizontal soft key [CHANGE EDITOR] switches the editing mode between word editing
and character editing.
12.2.11 Program Screen for MDI Operation (15/19-inch Display Unit)

During MDI operation or editing of an MDI operation program in the MDI mode, the program currently
being executed mode is displayed.
For MDI operation, see Section III-4.2, “MDI Operation”.
Procedure for displaying the program screen for MDI operation

Procedure
The program input from the MDI is displayed.
Fig. 12.2.11 MDI operation program screen (15-inch display unit)
12.2.12 Program Folder Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)

A list of programs registered in the program memory is displayed.
For the program folder screen, see Chapter, “PROGRAM MANAGEMENT”.
Displaying the program folder screen

Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [FOLDER].
- 725 -
Fig. 12.2.12 (a) Program folder screen (15-inch display unit)
Displaying comments on the program folder screen

The comments of the first block of the program are displayed by setting bit 1 (COL) of parameter No.
11351 to 1.
Fig.12.2.12 (b) Displaying comments on the program folder screen
12.2.12.1 Split display on the program folder screen

Overview
On the program folder screen, the folder information display can be split into two folder information
views, upper and lower, as shown in the Fig. 12.2.12.1 (a).
- 726 -
Fig. 12.2.12.1 (a) Program folder screen (split-display screen)(15-inch display unit)
On the split folder display, file information about different sets of devices or folders can be shown in
different views at the same time, so you can copy or move files easily.
Example of copying a file from the CNC MEM to the Data Server
<2>
<1>
<3> <4>
Procedure
<1> Change to a destination folder on the Data Server.
<2> Change to a folder on the CNC_MEM that contains a file you want to copy.
<3> Select the file.
<4> Copy the file.
- 727 -
Procedure for switching to split display

Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program folder screen.
2 Press horizontal soft key [(OPRT)].
3 Press continuous menu key twice.
Horizontal soft key [MULTI LIST] appears.
Fig. 12.2.12.1 (b) Program folder screen normal screen)(15-inch display unit)
4 Press horizontal soft key [MULTI LIST].

The folder information display is split into two folder views, upper and lower, which show the same
folder information. Immediately after the splitting, the upper folder view becomes active for
operations. At the same time, horizontal soft key [SINGLE LIST] appears.
Fig.12.2.12.1 (c) Program folder screen (split-display screen)(15-inch display unit)
- 728 -
5 Pressing horizontal soft key [SINGLE LIST] takes you back to the original program folder display.
Then, the folders are shown which have been selected in the active view for operations on the split
display.
Procedure for switching between active folder views for file operations on the split
display
On the split folder display, you can switch between active folder views for file operations as described
below.
In the active folder view for file operations, the cursor is displayed on the file list.
Procedure
1 When the upper folder view is active for file operations and you press MDI key and cursor
key , the lower folder view becomes active for file operations.
2 When the lower folder view is active for file operations and you press MDI key and cursor
key , the upper folder view becomes active for file operations.
NOTE
1 In step 1, even if you press MDI key and cursor key when the upper
folder view is active for file operations, the lower folder view becomes active for
file operations.
2 In step 2, even if you press MDI key and cursor key when the lower
folder view is active for file operations, the upper folder view becomes active for
file operations.
Explanation
- File operations on the split display
The following operations are allowed on the split display.
<1> You can select and display devices or folders individually in each folder view.
<2> You can copy or move files between folders selected in different folder views.
(For details, see the section on operations of copying/moving between devices.)
In the selected folder view, you can perform the same operations as on the normal screen.
- Path switching
When path switching is performed while the split display is provided for a multi-path system, the folder
view in which the CNC MEM is selected as a device is changed to a view of the last selected folder for
each path on the CNC MEM.
- Device information display

The device information as shown in the normal program folder screen (portion in a dotted box in the
Fig.12.2.12.1 (d)) is not shown on the split display (Fig.12.2.12.1 (c)).
- 729 -
Fig.12.2.12.1 (d) Program folder screen (normal screen)(15-inch display unit)
You should see the device information on the normal screen.
Limitation
- Device that can be selected in both views at the same time on the split display
The same device of any of the following types can be selected in both views at the same time on the split
display.
• CNC MEM
• MEM CARD(binary format)
• Data Server
For other types, the same device cannot be selected for display in the folder views at the same time.
If any other type of device is selected when split display starts, the upper and lower folder views cannot
show the same sets of folders due to the above limitation. Therefore, the lower folder view shows the
folder selected as a foreground folder.
- Display units that support the split display

The split display is supported on 10.4-inch, 15-inch, and 19-inch display units.
12.2.12.2 Folder tree display (15/19-inch display unit)

This is same as the 10.4-inch display units. Refer to Subsection, “Folder tree display”.
12.2.13 Next Block Display Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)

Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed next.
Procedure for displaying the next block display screen

Procedure
- 730 -
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT].

The G codes, addresses, command values specified in the block currently being executed and the
next block are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.13 Next block display screen (15-inch display unit)
12.2.14 Program Check Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)

Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data.
Procedure for displaying the program check screen

Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [CHECK].
The program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.14 Program check screen (15-inch display unit)

- 731 -
Explanation
- Program display
The program currently being executed is displayed.
The block being executed is displayed in reverse video.
- Current position display

The current position in the relative coordinate system, workpiece coordinate system, and machine
coordinate system, and the remaining amount of travel are displayed.
- Modal G codes
Up to 24 modal G codes are displayed.
12.2.15 Background Editing (15/19-inch Display Unit)

Editing one program during execution of another program is referred to as background editing. You can
perform the same edit operations in the background as those in normal editing (foreground editing).
On a 15-inch or 19-inch display, you can perform background editing for the programs displayed in
multiple tiled windows. You can switch from a program displayed in one of the tiled windows to another
to perform copy, paste, and other edit operations, which allows you to edit programs efficiently.
You can edit four programs simultaneously.
Function
- Background editing
A program other than the currently selected program can be edited. Background editing can be performed
in any mode.
- EDIT mode and reference mode

When background editing is started in the EDIT mode, the program can be edited. When background
editing is started in the reference mode, the program is opened in the read-only mode and cannot be
edited.
While a program opened in the EDIT mode cannot be run, a program opened in the reference mode can
be run.
- Program selected in the foreground

If the program selected in the foreground is specified as a program to be edited in the background,
background editing is started in the read-only mode. The text at an arbitrary position of the program
currently being executed can be checked.
- Switching from the program directory screen to the editing screen

By selecting a program from the program folder screen, background editing can be started.
On the program folder screen, move the cursor to a program to be edited in the background, then press the
MDI key . The screen display switches to the background editing screen.
Background editing can be started without entering a program name.
- Background editing on a multi-path system

Background editing does not depend on the path.
Even if the path to be operated is changed using the path selection signal, the background editing
currently being executed is just continued.
- 732 -
NOTE
The following programs cannot be edited in the background. They can be
opened only in the read-only mode.
- Running program
- Main program
Display
When background editing starts, the ordinary program editing screen switches to the background editing
screen.
When two or more programs are edited in the background, the screen is split to display these programs.
For a 15-inch or 19-inch display unit, you can edit four programs simultaneously.
- Word editing
Fig.12.2.15 (a) shows background word editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and
left programs). On the status line at the top of the window for each program, the program name and
“BG-EDIT” (indicating background editing in progress) are displayed.
Fig.12.2.15 (a) Background editing screen (word editing) (15-inch display unit)
- Character editing
Fig.12.2.15 (b) shows background character editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right
and left programs). Similarly to word editing, at the top of the window for each program, the status line is
displayed. In addition, the current input mode (INSERT MODE or OVERWRITE MODE) is displayed at
the upper right of the screen for character editing.
- 733 -
Fig.12.2.15 (b) Background editing screen (character editing) (15-inch display unit)
- Editing status
The following items are displayed on the status line and program editing area according to the
background editing status.
Editing status Displayed items

(BG-EDIT)
No program selected
“NO PROGRAM” is displayed in the editing area.
Program opened program-name + (BG-EDIT)
program-name + (BG:READ ONLY)
Read-only program opened
The contents of the program are displayed in green.
Starting background editing from the editing screen

Procedure (word editing)
Method 1
NOTE
1 Background editing is performed in the EDIT mode.
2 If a nonexistent program is specified, a new program is created.
Method 2
- 734 -
NOTE
Method 3
the screen.
NOTE
Procedure (character editing)

Method 1
NOTE
・ Pressing soft key [EDIT EXEC] causes a new program to be created.
・ Pressing soft key [REF EXEC] causes the warning message “SPECIFIED
Method 2
the screen.
7 Press soft key [PROGRM NAME].
NOTE
- 735 -
Starting background editing from the program folder screen

By selecting a program from the program folder screen, background editing can be started. The cursor is
used to select a program. You do not need to enter a program name.
Procedure
3 Move the cursor to a program to be edited.
4 Press the MDI key . The screen display is switched to the background editing screen.
NOTE
When background editing is started from the program folder screen, the EDIT
mode is set.
For the following programs, the reference mode is set, however:
- Running program
- Main program
Background editing operation

- Editing operation
The same editing operations as performed in the foreground can be performed.
- Switching from a program to another for editing

To switch from a program to another for editing when editing multiple programs simultaneously in the
background, press key, then or .
- Editing operation in the read-only mode

Cursor movement and page switching are possible. However, program editing is disabled.
- Copying and pasting text between programs

Text in a program selected and copied during program editing is kept held after the program to be edited
is changed. You can paste text in a program onto another program.
Background editing end operation

Background editing can be ended using the procedure described below.
The procedure for ending background editing of one program and that for ending all background editing
of multiple programs are shown below.
- Ending editing of one program

- 736 -
3 Select a program for which to end editing.

4 Press horizontal soft key [BG END].
- Ending editing of all programs

3 Press horizontal soft key [BG ALL END].
To return to ordinary foreground editing, end all background editing. If at least one program is being
edited in the background, you cannot return to foreground editing.
12.2.16 Stamping the Machining Time (15/19-inch Display Unit)

The execution times of the most recently executed ten programs can be displayed in hours, minutes, and
seconds.
The calculated machining time can be inserted as a comment of the program to check the machining time
on the program folder screen.
Procedure for stamping the machining time

Procedure
- Displaying the machining time
2 Press vertical soft key [TIME]. The machining time display screen appears.
Fig. 12.2.16 (a) Machining time display screen (15-inch display unit)
- Calculating the machining time

1 Select the memory operation mode, then press the key.
2 Select the program screen, then select a program of which machining time you want to calculate.
3 Execute the program to perform actual machining.
- 737 -
4 When the key is pressed or, M02 or M30 is executed, the machining time count operation
stops. When the machining time display screen is selected, the program number of the stopped main
program and its machining time are displayed.
5 The Fig. 12.2.16 (b) shows the screen when the machining times of the ten main programs O0020,
O0040, …, and O0200 are displayed and the screen when the machining time of O0220 is newly
calculated after that.
Fig. 12.2.16 (b) Stamping the machining time (15-inch display unit)
Procedure for inserting the machining time on the program screen

Procedure
You can display the machining time of a program as a comment of the program. The procedure is shown
below:
- 738 -
1 To insert the calculated machining time of a program as a comment, the machining time of the
program must be displayed on the machining time display screen. Before stamping the machining
time of the program, check that the program number is displayed on the machining time display
screen.
2 Set the edit mode or background editing state and select the program screen. Then, select a program
of which machining time you want to insert.
3 For example, the machining time of O0100 is displayed on the machining time display screen. Press
continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [INSERT TIME] appears. When horizontal soft
key [INSERT TIME] is pressed, the start of the program is located, and the machining time of the
program is inserted after the program name.
Fig. 12.2.16 (c) Program screen (15-inch display unit)
4 If a comment is written in the block containing the program number of a program of which
machining time is to be inserted, the machining time is inserted after the comment.
- 739 -
Fig. 12.2.16 (d) Program screen (15-inch display unit)
Display on the program folder screen

The machining time of a program inserted in the program as a comment is displayed after the existing
comment of the program on the program folder screen.
- 740 -
Fig. 12.2.16 (e) Program folder screen (15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Machining time
The machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode to the
next reset. If a reset is not performed during operation, the machining time is counted from the start to
M02 or M30. The time during which operation is held is not counted, but the time used to wait for the
completion of the M, S, T, and/or B functions is counted, however.

You can insert (stamp) the displayed machining time in a program stored in memory as a comment. The
machining time is inserted as a comment after the program number.
- Program folder
You can display the machining time inserted after a program number on the program folder screen. This
operation lets you know the machining time of each program to use the time as useful reference data
when planning processes on site.
Limitation
- Alarm
The execution of a program may be held by an alarm during the machining time count operation. In this
case, the machining time is counted until the alarm is released by a reset.
- M02
It may be specified that M02 does not reset the CNC, but returns completion signal FIN to the CNC to
restart the program from the beginning successively (bit 5 (M02) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 0). In
this case, when M02 returns completion signal FIN, the machining time count operation stops.

When an attempt is made to stamp the machining time of a program in the program, the machining time
of the program may not be displayed on the machining time display screen. In this case, the machining
time cannot be inserted in the program even if horizontal soft key [INSERT TIME] is pressed.
- 741 -
- Correcting the machining time

If an incorrect machining time is calculated (such as when a reset is made during the execution of a
program), reexecute the program to calculate the correct machining time. The same program number may
be displayed in two or more lines on the machining time display screen. In this case, the latest calculated
machining time is inserted in the program.
- States of the stamped machining time

In the following states, the stamped machining time is displayed on the program folder screen as shown
below.
1 When the comment of a program is longer than 16 characters

The 17th and subsequent characters of the comment are discarded and the machining time display
field is left blank.
Fig. 12.2.16 (f) When the comment of a program is longer than 16 characters (15-inch display unit)
- 742 -
2 When two or more machining times are stamped

The first machining time is displayed.
Fig. 12.2.16 (g) When two or more machining times are stamped (15-inch display unit)
- 743 -
3 When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit
number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order)
The machining time display field is left blank.
Fig. 12.2.16 (h) When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit
number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order) (15-inch display unit)
- 744 -
Section 12.3, “SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY “, consists of the following

subsections:
12.3.1 Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value ..............................................................747
12.3.2 Displaying and Entering Setting Data........................................................................................747
12.3.3 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop...................................................................................749
12.3.4 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time ........................................................751
12.3.5 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value......................................................753
12.3.6 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured........................................................754
12.3.7 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables ......................................................755
12.3.8 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data ............................................................756
12.3.9 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel..............................................................758
12.3.10 Displaying and Switching the Display Language ......................................................................761
12.3.11 Protection of Data at Eight Levels .............................................................................................762
12.3.12 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screens................................................768
12.3 13 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screen for Multiple Tools...................775
12.3.14 Tool Data Setting Function........................................................................................................779
12.3.15 Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen..............................................781
――――― Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit

12.3.16 Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...................785
12.3.17 Displaying and Entering Setting Data (15/19-inch Display Unit) .............................................786
12.3.18 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop (15/19-inch Display Unit) ........................................788
12.3.19 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time (15/19-inch Display Unit)..............790
12.3.20 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...........792
12.3.21 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured (15/19-inch Display Unit) .............793
12.3.22 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables (15/19-inch Display Unit)............794
12.3.23 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data (15/19-inch Display Unit) .................796
12.3.24 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...................797
12.3.25 Displaying and Switching the Display Language (15/19-inch Display Unit)............................800
12.3.26 Protection of Data at Eight Levels (15/19-inch Display Unit)...................................................801
12.3.27 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screens (15/19-inch Display Unit) .....807
12.3.28 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Number Registration Screen for Multiple Tools
(15/19-inch Display Unit) ..........................................................................................................814
12.3.29 Tool Data Setting Function (15/19-inch Display Unit) .............................................................817
12.3.30 Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...819
Press function key to display or set tool compensation values and other data.
This section describes how to display or set the following data:
1. Tool Compensation Value
2. Settings
3. Sequence number comparison and stop
4. Run time and part count
5. Workpiece origin offset value
6. Custom macro common variables
7. Software operator’s panel
8. Display language switching
9. Protection of data at eight levels
- 745 -
10. Tool data

11. Safety zone
The software operator’s panel, and display language switching depend on the specifications of the
machine tool builder. See the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
12.3.1 Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value

Tool offset values are specified by D codes in a program. Compensation values corresponding to D codes
are displayed or set on the screen.
Procedure for setting and displaying the tool compensation value

Procedure
For the two-path control, select the path for which tool compensation values are to be displayed with
the tool post selection switch.
2 Press chapter selection soft key [OFFSET] or press function key several times until the tool
compensation screen is displayed.
The screen varies according to the type of tool compensation memory.
Fig. 12.3.1 Tool compensation memory A (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to the compensation value to be set or changed using page keys and cursor keys, or
enter the compensation number for the compensation value to be set or changed and press soft key
[NO.SRH].
4 To set a compensation value, enter a value and press soft key [INPUT].
To change the compensation value, enter a value to add to the current value (a negative value to
reduce the current value) and press soft key [+INPUT]. Or, enter a new value and press soft key
[INPUT].
Explanation
- Decimal point input
A decimal point can be used when entering a compensation value.
- 746 -
- Other setting method

An external input/output device can be used to input or output a tool offset value. See Chapter III-8 in
OPERATOR’S MANUAL.

There are tool compensation memories A as follows:
Tool compensation memory A
in the compensation memory.
- Disabling entry of compensation values

The entry of compensation values may be disabled by setting bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290.
And then, the input of tool compensation values from the MDI can be inhibited for a specified range of
offset numbers. The first offset number for which the input of a value is inhibited is set in parameter No.
3294. The number of offset numbers, starting from the specified first number, for which the input of a
value is inhibited is set in parameter No. 3295.
Consecutive input values are set as follows:
1) When compensation values are input consecutively from offset numbers for which the input of
values is enabled to offset numbers for which the input of values is inhibited, a warning is issued,
but the compensation values in the range of the offset numbers for which the input of values is
enabled are set.
values is inhibited to offset numbers for which the input of values is enabled, a warning is issued and
the compensation values are not set.
12.3.2 Displaying and Entering Setting Data

Data such as the TV check flag and output code is set on the setting data screen. On this screen, the
operator can also enable/disable parameter writing, enable/disable the automatic insertion of sequence
numbers in program editing, and perform settings for the sequence number comparison and stop function.
See III-9.2 for automatic insertion of sequence numbers.
See III-12.3.2 for the sequence number comparison and stop function. This subsection describes how to
set data.
Procedure for setting the setting data

Procedure
3 Press soft key [SETTING] to display the setting data screen.
This screen consists of several pages.
Press page key or until the desired screen is displayed.
An example of the setting data screen is shown below.
- 747 -
Fig. 12.3.2 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.2 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys .
5 Enter a new value and press soft key [INPUT].
Explanation
- PARAMETER WRITE
Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
- 748 -
- TV CHECK
Setting to perform TV check.
0 : No TV check
1 : Perform TV check
- OUTPUT CODE
Setting code when data is output through RS232C interface.
0 : EIA code output
1 : ISO code output
- INPUT UNIT
Setting a program input unit, inch or metric system
0 : Metric
1 : Inch
- I/O CHANNEL
Using channel of RS232C interface.
0 : Channel 0
1 : Channel 1
2 : Channel 2
- SEQUENCE NO.
Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence number or not at program edit in the
EDIT mode.
0 : Does not perform automatic sequence number insertion.
1 : Perform automatic sequence number insertion.
- PROGRAM FORMAT
Setting of whether to use the Series 15 format.
0: Uses the standard format.
1: Uses the Series 15 format.
For the Series 15 format, refer to Chapter II-6 in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL (T series) or Chapter II-7
of Part II in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL (M series).
- SEQUENCE STOP
Setting the sequence number with which the operation stops for the sequence number comparison and
stop function and the number of the program to which the sequence number belongs
- MIRROR IMAGE
Setting of mirror image ON/OFF for each axes.
0 : Mirror image off
1 : Mirror image on
- Others
Page key or can also be pressed to display the SETTING (TIMER) screen. See
“Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time” for this screen.
12.3.3 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop

If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program being executed, operation
enters single block mode after the block is executed.
- 749 -
Procedure for sequence number comparison and stop

Procedure
3 Press chapter selection soft key [SETTING].
4 Press page key or several times until the following screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.3 SETTING (HANDY) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 Enter in (PROGRAM NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP the number (1 to 99999999) of the program
containing the sequence number with which operation stops.
6 Enter in (SEQUENCE NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP (with eight or less digits) the sequence number
with which operation is stopped.
7 When automatic operation is executed, operation enters single block mode at the block containing
the sequence number which has been set.
Explanation
- Sequence number after the program is executed
After the specified sequence number is found during the execution of the program, the sequence number
setting for sequence number compensation and stop becomes “-1”.
- Exceptional blocks
If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block in which all commands are those to be
processed within the CNC control unit, the execution does not stop at that block.
[Example] N1 #1=1 ;
N2 IF[#1 EQ 1]GOTO 08 ;
N3 GOTO 09 ;
N4 M98 P1000 ;
N5 M99 ;
In the example shown above, if the predetermined sequence number is found, the execution of the
program does not stop.
- 750 -
- Stop in the canned cycle

If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block which has a canned cycle command, the
execution of the program stops after the return operation is completed.
- When the same sequence number is found several times in the program
If the predetermined sequence number appears twice or more in a program, the execution of the program
stops after the block in which the predetermined sequence number is found for the first time is executed.
- Block to be repeated a specified number of times

If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block which is to be executed repeatedly, the
execution of the program stops after the block is executed specified times.
12.3.4 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time
Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts required, and number of machined
parts can be displayed.
This data can be set by parameters or on this screen (except for the total number of machined parts and
the time during which the power is on, which can be set only by parameters).
This screen can also display the clock time. The time can be set on the screen.
Procedure for Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count and Time
Procedure
3 Press chapter selection soft key [SETTING].
4 Press page key or several times until the following screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.4 SETTING (TIMER) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 To set the number of parts required, move the cursor to PARTS REQUIRED and enter the number
of parts to be machined.
6 To set the clock, move the cursor to DATE or TIME, enter a new date or time, then press soft key
[INPUT].
- 751 -
Explanation
- PARTS TOTAL
This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is
executed. This value cannot be set on this screen. Set the value in parameter No. 6712.
- PARTS REQUIRED
It is used for setting the number of machined parts required.
When the “0” is set to it, there is no limitation to the number of parts.
Also, its setting can be made by the parameter No 6713.
- PARTS COUNT
executed. The value can also be set by parameter No. 6711. In general, this value is reset when it reaches
the number of parts required. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
- POWER ON
Displays the total time which the power is on. This value cannot be set on this screen but can be preset in
parameter No. 6750.
- RUN TIME
This value can be preset in parameter No. 6751 or No. 6752.
- CUTTING TIME
Displays the total time taken by cutting that involves cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and
circular interpolation (G02 or G03). This value can be preset in parameter No. 6753 or No. 6754.
- FREE PURPOSE
This value can be used, for example, as the total time during which coolant flows. Refer to the manual
- CYCLE TIME
removed.
- DATA and TIME

Displays the current date and time. The date and time can be set on this screen.
- Usage
When the command of M02 or M30 is executed, the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts are incremented by one. Therefore, create the program so that M02 or M30 is executed
every time the processing of one part is completed. Furthermore, if an M code set to the parameter No.
6710 is executed, counting is made in the similar manner. Also, it is possible to disable counting even if
M02 or M30 is executed (bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1). For details, see the manual
issued by machine tool builders.
Limitation
- Run time and part count settings
Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of “M” and “S” of run time is valid from 0 to 59.
Negative value may not be set to the total number of machined parts.
- 752 -
- Time settings
Neither negative value nor the value exceeding the value in the following table can be set.
Table 12.3.4
Item Maximum value Item Maximum value
Year 2096 Hour 23
Month 12 Minute 59
Day 31 Second 59
12.3.5 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value

Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) and external
workpiece origin offset.
The workpiece origin offset value and external workpiece origin offset value can be set on this screen.
Procedure for displaying and setting the workpiece origin offset value
Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [WORK].
The workpiece coordinate system setting screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.5 WORK COORDINATES screen (10.4-inch display unit)
3 The screen for displaying the workpiece origin offset values consists of two or more pages.
Display a desired page in either of the following two ways:
• Press the page key or .
• Enter the workpiece coordinate system number (0 : external workpiece origin offset, 1 to 6:
workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59) and press operation selection soft key [NO.SRH].
4 Turn off the data protection key to enable writing.
5 Move the cursor to the workpiece origin offset to be changed.
6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press soft key [INPUT]. The entered value is
specified in the workpiece origin offset value. Or, by entering a desired value with numeric keys and
pressing soft key [+INPUT], the entered value can be added to the previous offset value.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other offset values.
8 Turn on the data protection key to disable writing.
- 753 -
NOTE
When the axis name set in parameter No.1020 is not valid, the workpiece origin
offset value of the axis should be set to 0.
12.3.6 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured

This function is used to compensate for the difference between the programmed workpiece coordinate
system and the actual workpiece coordinate system. The measured offset for the origin of the workpiece
coordinate system can be input on the screen such that the command values match the actual dimensions.
Selecting the new coordinate system matches the programmed coordinate system with the actual
coordinate system.
Procedure for direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured

Procedure
Y y
Surface A
Programmed workpiece
origin α
Surface B
O'
X
New offset
x
O β
Origin
Previous offset
1 When the workpiece is shaped as shown above, position the reference tool manually until it touches
surface A of the workpiece.
2 Retract the tool without changing the Y coordinate.
3 Measure distance α between surface A and the programmed origin of the workpiece coordinate
system as shown above.
5 To display the WORK COORDINATES screen, press the chapter selection soft key [WORK].
- 754 -
Fig. 12.3.6 WORK COORDINATES screen (10.4-inch display unit)
6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set.

7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set (Y-axis in this example).
8 Enter the measured value (α) then press soft key [MEASUR].
9 Move the reference tool manually until it touches surface B of the workpiece.
10 Retract the tool without changing the X coordinate.
11 Enter the measured value of distance (β) to surface B as an X value as with steps 7 and 8.
Limitation
- Consecutive input
Offsets for two or more axes cannot be input at the same time.
- During program execution

This function cannot be used while a program is being executed.
12.3.7 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables

Displays common variables (#100 to #149 or #100 to #199, and #500 to #531 or #500 to #999) on the
screen.
The values for variables can be set on this screen.
Relative coordinates can also be set to variables.
Procedure for displaying and setting custom macro common variables

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key , chapter selection soft key [MACRO], and soft key [(OPRT)] in
the stated order.
The following screen is displayed.
- 755 -
Fig. 12.3.7 CUSTOM MACRO screen (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the following methods:
• Enter the variable number and press soft key [NO.SRH].
• Move the cursor to the variable number to set by pressing page keys and/or and
cursor keys , , , and/or .

4 Enter data with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT].
5 To set a relative coordinate in a variable, press address key , , or , then press soft
key [INP.C.].
6 To set a blank in a variable, just press soft key [INPUT]. The value field for the variable becomes
blank.
Explanation
If the value of a variable produced by an operation is not displayable, an indication below is provided.
When the significant number of digits is 12 (with bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 set to 0):
Variable value range Variable value indication
0 < Variable value < +0.00000000001 +Underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.00000000001 -Underflow
Variable value > 999999999999 +Overflow
Variable value < -999999999999 -Overflow
12.3.8 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data

Real time macro variables (RTM variables) are dedicated to real time custom macros.
RTM variables are divided into temporary real time macro variables (temporary RTM variables) and
permanent real time macro variables (permanent RTM variables).
The values of permanent RTM variables are kept stored after the power is turned off.
- 756 -
Temporary RTM variables are cleared to 0 when the power is turned off.
System variables (DI/DO variables) dedicated to real time custom macros are used to read and write PMC
interface signals. Data can be read and written in bit and byte units. Before writing a signal, release the
protection of the corresponding variable on the PMC signal protect screen.
Displaying and setting real time custom macro variables

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key several times, then press chapter selection soft key [R.TIME
MACRO]. The following screen appears:
Fig. 12.3.8 (a) REAL TIME MACRO screen (10.4-inch display unit)
3 To display or set real time custom macro variables of which values are not stored at power-off, press
soft key [TEMP. DATA].
4 To display or set real time custom macro variables of which values are stored at power-off, press soft
key [PERM. DATA].
5 Move the cursor to the number of a real time custom macro variable you want to set using either of
the following methods:
• Enter the number of a real time custom macro variable and press soft key [NO. SRH].
• Move the cursor to the number of a real time custom macro variable you want to set by
pressing page keys and/or and cursor keys , , , and/or .
6 Enter data.
Displaying and setting DI/DO variables

Procedure
For setting in byte units:
2 Press the continuous menu key several times, then press chapter selection soft key [R.TIME
MACRO]. The following screen appears:
3 Press soft key [BYTE SELECT]. The following screen appears:
- 757 -
Fig. 12.3.8 (b) BYTE SELECT screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the number of a DI/DO variable you want to set using either of the following
methods:
• Enter the number and press soft key [NO. SRH].
• Move the cursor to a desired number by pressing page keys and/or and cursor
keys , , , and/or .
5 Enter data.
12.3.9 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel

Operations on the MDI unit can substitute for the functions of switches on the machine operator’s panel.
This means that a mode selection, jog feed override selection, and so forth can be made with operations
on the MDI unit, eliminating the need to use the corresponding switches on the machine operator’s panel.
Jog feed can be performed using numeric keys.
Procedure for displaying and setting the software operator’s panel

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft key [OPR].
3 The screen consists of several pages. Press page key or until the desired screen is
displayed.
- 758 -
Fig. 12.3.9 (a) Page 1 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (without the manual handle feed function)
(10.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.9 (b) Page 1 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (with the manual handle feed function)
(10.4-inch display unit)
- 759 -
Fig. 12.3.9 (c) Page 2 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or .
5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary position and set the
desired condition.
6 Press one of the following arrow keys to perform jog feed. Press the key together with an
arrow key to perform jog rapid traverse.
Fig. 12.3.9 (d) MDI arrow keys
Explanation
- Valid operations
The valid operations on the software operator’s panel are shown below. Whether to use each group can be
chosen using parameter No. 7200. Those groups that are not used are not displayed on the software
operator’s panel.
Group1 : Mode selection
Group2 : Selection of jog feed axis, Manual rapid traverse
Group3 : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of manual pulse magnification
Group4 : Jog federate, federate override, rapid traverse override
Group5 : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 : Protect key
Group7 : Feed hold
- Screens on which jog feed is valid

When the LCD indicates other than the software operator’s panel screen and self-diagnosis screen, jog
feed is not conducted even if the arrow key is pushed.
- 760 -
- Jog feed and arrow keys

The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters Nos. 7210 to
7217.
- General purpose switches

For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
12.3.10 Displaying and Switching the Display Language

The language used for display can be switched to another language.
A display language can be set using a parameter. However, by modifying the setting of the display
language on this screen, the display language can be switched without turning off then on the power.
Displaying and setting the display language

Procedure
3 Press soft key [LANGUAGE] to display the language screen.
Fig. 12.3.10 LANGUAGE screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Press page key or , then press cursor keys , to move the cursor to a
desired display language.
5 Press operation soft key [APPLY]. The display language is switched to the selected language. The
language specified on this screen continues to be used if the power is turned off then back on.
Explanation
- Language switching
The language screen can be displayed if bit 0 (NLC) of parameter No. 3280 is set to 0.
- Selectable languages
The display languages selectable on this screen are as follows:
1. English
2. Japanese
- 761 -
3. German
4. French
5. Chinese (Traditional)
6. Chinese (Simplified)
7. Italian
8. Korean
9. Spanish
10. Dutch
11. Danish
12. Portuguese
13. Polish
14. Hungarian
15. Swedish
16. Czech
17. Russian
18. Turkish
Among the languages listed above, English and other usable languages are displayed on the screen as a
list of switchable languages.
Limitation
- Language parameter modification on the parameter screen
Which language to use for display is specified with parameter No. 3281. This parameter can be modified
using the parameter screen as well. However, if a modification is made on the parameter screen, the new
setting is not reflected until “APPLY” operation is performed on the language screen or the power is
turned on again. If an invalid value is set in parameter No. 3281 on the parameter screen, the screen is
displayed in English after the power is turned on again.
12.3.11 Protection of Data at Eight Levels

You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels and one of eight protection levels for each type of CNC
and PMC data.
When an attempt is made to change CNC and PMC data or output it to an external unit, the operation
level is compared with the protection level to determine whether to allow the change or external output.
12.3.11.1 Operation level setting

You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels.
Displaying and setting the operation level setting screen

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [PROTECT] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [PROTECT].
The operation level setting screen shown below is displayed.
- 762 -
Fig. 12.3.11.1 Operation level setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Key in the password for an operation level to be set/modified, then press soft key [INPUT
PASSWD].
5 To return the operation level to 0, 1, 2, or 3, press soft key [CANCEL PASSWD].
Explanation
- Operation level setting
To select operation level 0 to 3, use the corresponding memory protection key signal.
To select operation level 4 to 7, use the corresponding password.
Table 12.3.11.1 Operation level setting
Operation level Setting Sample grouping
7 (high) Password -
6 Password MTB
5 Password Dealer and integrator
4 Password End user
3 Memory protection key signal User level (level 1)
0 (low) Memory protection key signal User level (level 4)
When operation level 4 to 7 is set, the operation level remains unchanged until the password is cleared.
(The operation level also remains unchanged if the power is turned off.)
Operation level 7 is reserved for CNC and PMC maintenance.
NOTE
When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each
entered character.
12.3.11.2 Password modification

The current operation level is displayed.
The password for each of operation levels 4 to 7 can be modified.
- 763 -
Displaying and setting the password modification screen

Procedure
4 Press soft key [PASSWORD].
The PASSWORD CHANGE screen shown below is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.11.2 PASSWORD CHANGE screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 Key in an operation level whose password is to be modified, then press soft key [INPUT].
6 Key in the current password for the operation level whose password is to be modified, then press
soft key [INPUT].
7 Key in a new password, then press soft key [INPUT].
8 Key in the new password again for confirmation, then press soft key [INPUT].
9 Press soft key [PASSWDCHANGE].
10 To clear the password, press soft key [PASSWDCLEAR].
Explanation
Up to eight characters (only uppercase alphabetic characters and numeric characters) can be input.
NOTE
1 For a password, consisting of three to eight characters, the following characters are
available:
• Uppercase alphabetic characters
• Numeric characters
2 When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each entered
character.
3 Whether a password can be changed at the current operation level is determined as
follows:
• Password of an operation level higher than the current operation level
Cannot be changed.
• Password of the current operation level
Can be changed.
• Password of an operation level lower than the current operation level
Can be changed (only to the initial password).
- 764 -
NOTE
4 The set password is not displayed.
Be careful not to forget the password.
12.3.11.3 Protection level setting

The change protection level and output protection level of each data item are displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each data item can be changed.
Confirmation based on protection level setting

Procedure
4 Press soft key [DATA LEVEL] to change the protection level of CNC data or press soft key [PMC
LEVEL] to change the protection level of PMC data.
The following protection level change screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.11.3 Protection level change screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 Move the cursor to the change level or output level of a desired data item.
6 Key in a new desired level, then press soft key [INPUT].
NOTE
When the protection level of PMC data is set, soft key [SWITCH PMC] is used to
switch between PMC paths to be set, for multi-path PMC.
Explanation
When the protection level of a data item is higher than the current operation level, the protection level of
the data item cannot be changed.
The protection level of a data item cannot be changed to a protection level higher than the current
operation level.
- 765 -
For each of the following types of data, you can set a data protection level. There are the following two
types of data protection levels:
• Change protection level
Sets the protection level used when data is changed.
• Output protection level
Sets the protection level used when data is output to an external unit.
As a protection level, you can set a value of 0 (low) to 7 (high).
Table 12.3.11.3 (a) Protection level of each type of data

Initial protection level
Type of data
Change Output
Custom macro variable data <CUSTOM MACRO>
0 0
(including variable data dedicated to the macro executor)
Periodical maintenance data <PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE DATA> 0 0
Tool offset data <TOOL OFFSET DATA> 0 0
Clock data <TIME> 0 0
Workpiece origin shift amount data <WORK ZERO SHIFT> 0 0
Workpiece origin offset data <WORK ZERO OFFSET> 0 0
Ethernet setting data <ETHER NET SETTING> 0 0
Parameter data <PARAMETER DATA> 4 0
Settings <SETTING DATA> 0 0
Pitch error compensation data <PITCH ERROR DATA> 4 0
Parameter data for Power Mate CNC manager function
0 0
<PARAMETER DATA FOR POWER MATE CNC MANAGER>
Each part program <PROGRAMS FOR EACH PARTS> 0 0
Part program editing operation <CHANGE PROGRAMS FOR EACH PARTS> 0 0
Absolute coordinate preset operation <PRESET OF ABSOLUTE AXIS DATA> 0 0
Table 12.3.11.3 (b) Protection level of PMC data

Type of data
Change Output
Composition parameter 0 0
Setting (online) 0 0
Setting (each path) 0 0
Sequence program 0 0
PMC parameter 0 0
Timer 0 0
Counter 0 0
Keep relay 0 0
Keep relay (system) 0 0
Data table 0 0
Data table control 0 0
PMC memory 0 0
I/O configuration 0 0
I/O Link group selection 0 0
Registration of I/O device 0 0
NOTE
1 For some types of data, the output function is not provided.
2 When the protection level of data is higher than the current operation level, the
protection level cannot be changed.
3 The protection level of data cannot be changed to a level higher than the current
operation level.
- 766 -
NOTE
4 Settable types of data increase or decrease, depending on the option
configuration.
5 For details on the protection level of PMC data, refer to “PMC Programming
Manual (B-64513EN)”.
6 The type of tool offset data put in effect varies depending on the tool
compensation value memory used.
7 To change the protection level for each part program, do so on the PROGRAM
FOLDER screen rather than on the PROTECT LEVEL screen.
8 Part program editing includes program editing for the MDI mode.
9 Presetting absolute coordinates causes preset workpiece coordinate system
values to be protected.
10 During tool offset data input/output, if any tool offset data type is not allowed to
be changed or output to the outside, it is processed as follows:
- Input : Any data type other than those whose change is not allowed is
changed.
- Output : Any data type other than those whose change is not allowed is output.
12.3.11.4 Setting the change protection level and output protection

level of a program
The display/operations indicated below can be performed from the directory screen.
The change protection level and output protection level of each part program are displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each part program can be changed.
Setting the change protection level and output protection level of a program
Procedure
2 Press soft key [FOLDER].
The program folder screen shown below is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.11.4 Program folder screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 767 -

4 Press soft key [DETAIL ON]. The screen display switches to the detail display screen.
5 Move the cursor to a desired program.
6 Press the continuous menu key several times until [CHANGE ATTR] is displayed.
7 Press soft key [CHANGE ATTR].
8 Key in a new desired level, then press soft key [CHANGE LEVEL].
9 To change the output protection level, key in a new desired level, then press soft key [OUT
LEVEL].
Explanation
The change protection level (0 to 7) and output protection level (0 to 7) are displayed as “CHANGE
PROTECTION LEVEL VALUE/OUTPUT PROTECTION LEVEL”.
NOTE
operation level.
3 A protection level can be set only for those part programs that are held on the
“CNC_MEM” device.
12.3.12 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration

Screens
Items concerning tools, such as the number of a tool to be used in machining, the position at which the
turret is indexed for a tool, and tool position compensation, can be displayed or specified on the tool
registration screens. Refer to the manual prepared by the machine tool builder for details, as the builder
sets these items first.
12.3.12.1 Displaying and setting items on the initial tool registration

screen
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [TOOL] appears.
4 Press the [TOOL] soft key to display the initial tool registration screen.
6 Type the number of the tool management data you wan to set or modify, and press soft key [INPUT].
To modify the data, type the data to increase or decrease, then press soft key [+INPUT].
Alternatively, type the data to modify, then press soft key [+INPUT].
- 768 -
Fig.12.3.12.1 Initial Tool Registration Screen
Explanation
- Number of tools to be used
Specify the total number of tools to be used.
This data corresponds to parameter No. 16265.
- Number of tools for which the turret is indexed

Number of tools for which the turret is indexed (parameter No. 16266). When T-axis control is specified
(TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260, is set to 1), specify the total number of tools for which the turret is
indexed. The setting must not be greater than the number of tools to be used.
- Number of a tool to be initially selected

Specify the number of the tool to be selected when reference position return is completed.
This data corresponds to parameter No. No. 16267.
- Number of pulses sent to the turret per rotation

When T-axis is set as a rotation axis and T-axis control is specified (TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260,
is set to 1), specify the number of pulses sent to the turret per rotation.
This data corresponds to parameter No.1260.
- Number of punch operations

Specify the number of punch operations for the tool used.
Display and preset the total number of punch operation of all tool.
This data corresponds to parameter No.16269 or No.16270.
NOTE
If the memory protect signal KEY1 is set to “1”, the number of punch operations
is writable although parameter writing is disabled (bit 0 (PWE) of parameter
No.8900 is set to 0).
- 769 -
12.3.12.2 Displaying and setting items on the tool number registration

screen
Procedure
4 Press the [TOOL] soft key to display the initial tool registration screen the initial tool registration
screen.
5 Press the menu key . Then press the [TOOL NUMBER] soft key to display the tool number
registration screen.
6 Move the cursor to the tool number to be changed.
• Enter the registration number of the tool for which data is to be changed, then press the
[NO.SRH] soft key.
• Move the cursor to the tool number to be changed with the page keys and cursor
keys .
7 To move the cursor to the tool number to be changed, press the cursor keys .
8 Type the data you wan to set or modify, and press soft key [INPUT].
Fig.12.3.12.2 (a) Tool number registration screen 1/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
- 770 -
Fig.12.3.12.2 (b) Tool number registration screen 2/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
Tool registration number. This number is a serial number corresponding to the registered tool.
- Tool number
Specify the numbers of tools to be used.
- Turret position
When T-axis control is specified (TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260, is set to 1), specify the positions at
which the turret is indexed for tools.
- Change tool Number

Specify the numbers of tools for exchange.
These numbers are limited to the tool numbers registered on the tool number registration screen
- X-axis offset
When the tool position compensation function is used (TOF, bit 2 of parameter No. 16263 is set to 1),
specify X-axis offset for tool positions.
- Y-axis offset
specify Y-axis offset for tool positions in the machine coordinate system.
12.3.12.3 Displaying and setting items on the screen for the number of
press operations
Procedure
- 771 -
screen.
5 Press the menu key . Then press the [PUNCH COUNT] soft key to display the screen for the
number of press operations.
[NO.SRH] soft key.
keys .
Fig.12.3.12.3 Screen for the Number of Punch Operations(10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
- Punch count number

Display and preset the total number of punch operation by each tool registered on the tool registration
screens.
- Tool life
Specify the maximum number of punch operation by each tool registered on the tool registration screens.
- 772 -
NOTE
1 If the memory protect signal KEY1 is set to “1”, the punch count number and the
tool life are writable although parameter writing is disabled (bit 0 (PWE) of
parameter No.8900 is set to 0).
2 Tool life management option is required to specify the tool life
12.3.12.4 Displaying and setting items on the tool figure registration

screen (for drawing figures)
Procedure
screen.
5 Press the menu key . Then press the [TOOL SHAPE] soft key to display the screen for the
number of press operations.
[NO.SRH] soft key.
keys .
Fig.12.3.12.4 (a) Tool figure registration screen 1/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
- 773 -
Fig.12.3.12.4 (b) Tool figure registration screen 2/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
- Tool shape
Specify the tool shape for graphic operation.
The upper digit of the tool figure specifies the color of a line drawing and the lower digit specifies the
figure.
Upper digit Lower digit
0: Green 0: Asterisk
1: Red 1: Circle (line drawing)
2: Green 2: Quadrangle (line drawing)
3: Yellow 3: ellipse (line drawing)
4: Blue 4: Circle (filled–in drawing)
5: Pink 5: Quadrangle (filled–in drawing)
6: Sky blue 6: ellipse (filled–in drawing)
7: White
8: Gray
For details, refer toTable12.3.12.4 (a).
- Tool size (I)

Specify the tool size for graphic operation.
- Tool size(J)
- Tool angle(K)
- 774 -
Table12.3.12.4 (a) tool shape data
Shape I (Size) J(Size) K (Angle)
I
01
Circle I ： 0~999999.999
04
(Input unit：When the
increment system is IS-B)
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Square, 02 J
K ： 0~399.999
rectangle 05
K (Input unit：When the
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Elongated 03 J
K ： 0~399.999
hole 06
I I ： 25.4mm(1inch)
Others 00
Fixed value
NOTE
Graphic operation option is required to use the tool figure registration screen.
12.3.13 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screen

for Multiple Tools
Items concerning multiple tools, such as the number of a sub-tool for multiple tools, the position at which
the turret is indexed for a sub-tool, and sub-tool position compensation, can be displayed or specified on
the tool registration screens for multiple tools. Refer to the manual prepared by the machine tool builder
for details, as the builder sets these items first.
NOTE
Multiple-tool control option is required to use the tool registration screen for
multiple tools

screen for multiple tools
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MULTI TOOL] appears.
4 Press the [MULTI TOOL] soft key to display the initial tool registration screen the tool number
registration screen for multiple tools
[NO.SRH] soft key.
- 775 -
• Move the cursor to the registration number of the tool to be changed with the page keys
and cursor keys .

6 To move the cursor to the tool data to be changed, press the cursor keys .
Fig.12.3.13.1 Tool Number Registration Screen for Multiple Tools (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
Sub-tool registration number for multiple tools. This number is a serial number corresponding to the
registered sub-tool.
- Sub-tool number
Specify sub-tool numbers used for controlling multiple tools.
- Angle
Specify angles used for indexing the turret for sub-tools.
- Y-axis offset
specify tool position compensation for sub-tools along the Y-axis in the machine coordinate system.
NOTE
Multiple-tool control option is required to use the tool number registration screen
for multiple tools

screen for multiple tools (for drawing figures)
Procedure
- 776 -
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MULTI TOOL] appears.
4 Press the [MULTI TOOL] soft key to display the initial tool registration screen for multiple tools.
5 Press the menu key . Then press the [MULTI SHAPE] soft key to display the tool figure
registration screen for multiple tools.
[NO.SRH] soft key.
keys .
Fig.12.3.13.2 (a) Tool figure registration screen for multiple tools 1/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
Fig.12.3.13.2 (b) Tool figure registration screen for multiple tools 2/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
- 777 -
Explanation
- Number
- Tool shape
Specify the sub-tool shape for graphic operation.
The upper digit of the tool shape specifies the color of a line drawing and the lower digit specifies the
shape.

7: White
8: Gray
For details, refer to Table 12.3.13.2.
- Tool size (I)

Specify the sub-tool size for graphic operation.
- Tool size(J)
- Tool angle(K)
- 778 -
Table 12.3.13.2 Tool shape data
I
01
Circle I ： 0~999999.999
04
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Square, 02 J
K ： 0~399.999
rectangle 05
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Elongated 03 J
K ： 0~399.999
hole 06
Others 00
Fixed value
NOTE
Multiple-tool control option and graphic function are required to use the tool
figure registration screen for multiple tools
12.3.14 Tool Data Setting Function

This function makes the area used for registering tool numbers, tool position compensation, punch count,
and other tool data available to the user. This enables the user to customize the registered tool data. This
allows the conventional tool data setting method to be changed and the number of tools that can be
registered to be increased considerably.
Explanation
- Registration area
A memory area consisting of 32KB (32×1024 bytes) is provided for the tool data setting function.
- Type and size of tool data

Tool data can be customized, as listed below, by specifying parameters. Individual tools cannot have
more than one setting. All registered tools will have the same setting.
Table12.3.14 (a) Tool Registration Screen : kind of tool data and memory size
Size
Tool data item Tool data setting function option Tool data setting function option
none provided
Can be expanded to up to 9999 by
Number of tools 136
the parameter setting condition.
Can be selected 2(byte) or 4(byte).
2 (byte)
Tool number When 4(byte) is Selected,
(Tool number having up to 4 digits)
tool number having up to 8 digits.
Tool position
8 (byte) Can be selected not used or 8(byte)
compensation X
Tool position
compensation Y
T–axis machine position 8 (byte) Can be selected not used or 8(byte)
- 779 -
Size
none provided
Can be selected not used or 2(byte)
Punch count 4 (byte)
or 4(byte)
Can be selected not used, 2(byte), or
2 (byte)
Tool number for changing 4(byte)
(Tool number for changing tools
tools When used, memory size is same to
having up to 4 digits)
the memory size for tool number.
Tool figure for graphics
(*1)
When used, memory size is same to
Tool life management (*2) 4 (byte)
the memory size for punch count.
*1 : The graphic function option is necessary.
*2 : The tool life management function option is necessary.
Table12.3.14 (b) Tool Registration Screen for multiple tools : kind of tool data and memory size
Size
none provided
Number of subtool 64
2 (byte) 2 (byte)
Multitool subtool number (Multitool subtool number having up (Multitool subtool number having up
to 2 digits) to 4 digits)
Multitool angle 8 (byte) 8 (byte)
Not used
Multitool tool position
(There is no displayed item Can be selected not used or 8(byte)
compensation X
corresponding to this condition)
compensation Y
Tool figure for multitool
graphics (*1)
*1 : The graphic function is necessary.
- Tool number
When specifying up to four digits with a T command, select 2 bytes. When specifying five or more digits
with a T command, select 4 bytes. If the 4–byte option is selected, T–axis control is possible with a T
command having five or more digits.
- X–axis and Y–axis tool position compensation
Enable or disable tool position compensation. A range of 8 bytes thus enabling compensation values to be
set in the corresponding range, in output increments.
- T–axis machine position

Set this when T–axis control is used.
- Punch count
Select whether to use individual punch counts. A range of either two or four bytes can be selected. This
item must be set when the tool life management function is used.
- Tool change tool number

Set this when using the tool change function. The data agrees with that of the tool number.
- Tool figure
Select this when drawing a tool using the graphic function. Each tool requires 13 bytes of data.
Figure data : 1 byte
Vertical dimension data : 4 bytes
- 780 -
Horizontal dimension data : 4 bytes

Angle data : 4 bytes
- Tool life management

Select this when using the tool life management function. The data agrees with that of the punch count.
- Multitool subtool number

Select this when using multitool control. Up to four digits can be specified for a subtool number when the
corresponding number of digits is registered.
This item can also be used to specify whether a magazine number and subtool number are registered
together or separately. When separately registering the magazine number and subtool number, the number
of subtools to be registered must be set as a parameter.
- Multitool angle
Set a subtool indexing angle when using multitool control. If the magazine number and subtool number
are registered together, the angle for tools other than the multitool must be set to 0.
- Multitool tool position compensation

Set this when executing multitool tool position compensation in the X and Y directions.
12.3.15 Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting

Screen
The safety zone can be displayed and changed.
By setting SF0, bit 0 of parameter No. 16500, the layout of the safety zone setting screen can be changed
to type A or type B.
Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type A)
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SAFTY ZONE] appears.
4 Press the [SAFTY ZONE] soft key to display the safety zone setting screen.
5 The safety zone is displayed in the absolute coordinate system. By setting MDP, bit 0 of parameter
No. 16502 to 1, the zone can be displayed in the machine coordinate system.
6 Usually, setting data is not enabled on the safety zone setting screen. However, Setting bit 4 (SZI) of
parameter No.16502 to 1 allows setting data.
7 To move the cursor to the data of safety zone to be changed, press the page keys and
the cursor keys .

- 781 -
Fig.12.3.15 (a) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type A), Absolute position display (10.4-inch display unit)
Fig.12.3.15 (b) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type A), Machine position display (10.4-inch display unit)
NOTE
1 When the safety zone area extension function is specified and bit 4 (SF8) is set,
safety zone setting screen is composed of two pages and the safety zone 5, 6,
7, or 8 can be set up.
2 Tools displayed in tool position is selected by selection signals for tool area of
safety zone STZS0 - STZS3.
3 Please set unnecessary safety zone to the tool coordinates used for reference
position return.
- At displaying in absolute coordinate :
Setting value = Coordinate by automatic coordinate system setting (parameter
No.1250) － workpiece coordinate system offset amount
- At displaying in machine coordinate : Setting 0.
Explanation
- Safety zone #n (n: 1 to 8)
X1
Specify the coordinate of safety zone along the positive X direction.
X2
Specify the coordinate of safety zone along the minus X direction
- 782 -
Y
Specify the coordinate of safety zone along the Y direction
- Tool position
X
Specify the dimensions of a tool along the X-axes. If the circle tool area is set, please set radius
of the tool area.
Y
Specify the dimensions of a tool along the Y-axes. If the circle tool area is set, please set 0.
- Zone number
Specified the number of safety zone detected when automatic safety-zone setting by external signal.
Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type B)
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SAFTY ZONE] appears.
4 Press the [SAFTY ZONE] soft key to display the safety zone setting screen.
the cursor keys .

Fig.12.3.15 (c) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type B), Machine position display (10.4-inch display unit)
- 783 -
Fig.12.3.15 (d) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type B), Machine position display (10.4-inch display unit)
NOTE
safety zone setting screen is composed of two pages and the safety zone 5, 6,
7, or 8 can be set up.
position return.
W is set to 0.
Setting value for X, Y = Coordinate by automatic coordinate system setting
(parameter No.1250) － workpiece coordinate system offset amount
Explanation
- Safety zone (#1 - #8)
W
Specify the width of the safety zone along the X-axes.
X
Specify the center coordinate of the safety zone along the X-axes.
Y
Specify the coordinate of the safety zone along the Y-axes.
- Tool position
X
of the tool area.
Y
- Zone number
Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit
- 784 -
12.3.16 Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value

Tool offset values are specified by D codes in a program. Compensation values corresponding to D codes
are displayed or set on the screen.
Procedure for setting and displaying the tool compensation value

Procedure
For the two-path control, select the path for which tool compensation values are to be displayed with
the tool post selection switch.
2 Press the chapter selection key, vertical soft key [OFFSET].
Or, press function key several times until the tool compensation screen is displayed.
The screen varies according to the type of tool compensation memory.
Fig.12.3.16 Tool compensation memory A (15-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to the compensation value to be set or changed using page keys and cursor keys, or
enter the compensation number for the compensation value to be set or changed and press horizontal
soft key [NO.SRH].
4 To set a compensation value, enter a value and press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
To change the compensation value, enter a value to add to the current value (a negative value to
reduce the current value) and press horizontal soft key [+INPUT]. Or, enter a new value and press
horizontal soft key [INPUT].
Explanation
- Decimal point input
A decimal point can be used when entering a compensation value.
- Other setting method

An external input/output device can be used to input or output a tool offset value. See Chapter III-8 in
OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
- 785 -

There are tool compensation memories A as follows:
Tool compensation memory A
in the compensation memory.
- Disabling entry of compensation values

The entry of compensation values may be disabled by setting bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290.
And then, the input of tool compensation values from the MDI can be inhibited for a specified range of
offset numbers. The first offset number for which the input of a value is inhibited is set in parameter No.
3294. The number of offset numbers, starting from the specified first number, for which the input of a
value is inhibited is set in parameter No. 3295.
Consecutive input values are set as follows:
values is enabled to offset numbers for which the input of values is inhibited, a warning is issued,
but the compensation values in the range of the offset numbers for which the input of values is
enabled are set.
values is inhibited to offset numbers for which the input of values is enabled, a warning is issued and
the compensation values are not set.
12.3.17 Displaying and Entering Setting Data (15/19-inch Display

Unit)
Data such as the TV check flag and output code is set on the setting data screen. On this screen, the
operator can also enable/disable parameter writing, enable/disable the automatic insertion of sequence
numbers in program editing, and perform settings for the sequence number comparison and stop function.
See Section, “AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS” for automatic insertion of
sequence numbers.
See Subsection, “Sequence Number Comparison and Stop” for the sequence number comparison and stop
function. This subsection describes how to set data.
Procedure for setting the setting data

Procedure
3 Press vertical soft key [SETTING] to display the setting data screen.
This screen consists of several pages.
Press page key or until the desired screen is displayed.
An example of the setting data screen is shown below.
- 786 -
Fig. 12.3.17 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (15-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.17 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (15-inch display unit)
5 Enter a new value and press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
Explanation
- PARAMETER WRITE
Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
- TV CHECK
Setting to perform TV check.
0 : No TV check
- 787 -
1 : Perform TV check
- OUTPUT CODE
Setting code when data is output through RS232C interface.
0 : EIA code output
1 : ISO code output
- INPUT UNIT
Setting a program input unit, inch or metric system
0 : Metric
1 : Inch
- I/O CHANNEL
Using channel of RS232C interface.
0 : Channel 0
1 : Channel 1
2 : Channel 2
- SEQUENCE NO.
Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence number or not at program edit in the
EDIT mode.
0 : Does not perform automatic sequence number insertion.
1 : Perform automatic sequence number insertion.
- PROGRAM FORMAT
Setting of whether to use the Series 15 format.
0: Uses the standard format.
1: Uses the Series 15 format.
For the Series 15 format, refer to Chapter, “MEMORY OPERATION USING Series 15 FORMAT” in the
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (T series) or Chapter, “MEMORY OPERATION USING Series 15
FORMAT” in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL (M series).
- SEQUENCE STOP
Setting the sequence number with which the operation stops for the sequence number comparison and
stop function and the number of the program to which the sequence number belongs.
- MIRROR IMAGE
Setting of mirror image ON/OFF for each axes.
0 : Mirror image off
1 : Mirror image on
- Others
Page key or can also be pressed to display the SETTING (TIMER) screen. See Subsection,
“Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time (15/19-inch Display Unit)” for this screen.
12.3.18 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop (15/19-inch Display

Unit)
If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program being executed, operation
enters single block mode after the block is executed.
- 788 -
Procedure for sequence number comparison and stop

Procedure
3 Press vertical soft key [SETTING].
4 Press page key or several times until the screen in the Fig. 12.3.18 SETTING
(HANDY) screen (15-inch display unit) is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.18 SETTING (HANDY) screen (15-inch display unit)
5 Enter in (PROGRAM NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP the number (1 to 99999999) of the program
containing the sequence number with which operation stops.
6 Enter in (SEQUENCE NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP (with eight or less digits) the sequence number
with which operation is stopped.
7 When automatic operation is executed, operation enters single block mode at the block containing
the sequence number which has been set.
Explanation
- Sequence number after the program is executed
After the specified sequence number is found during the execution of the program, the sequence number
set for sequence number compensation and stop is decremented by one.
- Exceptional blocks
If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block in which all commands are those to be
processed within the CNC control unit, the execution does not stop at that block.
[Example] N1 #1=1 ;
N2 IF[#1 EQ 1]GOTO 08 ;
N3 GOTO 09 ;
N4 M98 P1000 ;
N5 M99 ;
In the example shown above, if the predetermined sequence number is found, the execution of the
program does not stop.
- 789 -
- When the same sequence number is found several times in the program
If the predetermined sequence number appears twice or more in a program, the execution of the program
stops after the block in which the predetermined sequence number is found for the first time is executed.
- Block to be repeated a specified number of times

If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block which is to be executed repeatedly, the
execution of the program stops after the block is executed specified times.
12.3.19 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time
(15/19-inch Display Unit)
Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts required, and number of machined
parts can be displayed.
This data can be set by parameters or on this screen (except for the total number of machined parts and
the time during which the power is on, which can be set only by parameters).
This screen can also display the clock time. The time can be set on the screen.
Procedure for Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count and Time
Procedure
3 Press vertical soft key [SETTING].
4 Press page key or several times until the screen in the Fig. 12.3.19
SETTING (TIMER) screen (15-inch display unit) is displayed.
Fig.12.3.19 SETTING (TIMER) screen (15-inch display unit)
5 To set the number of parts required, move the cursor to PARTS REQUIRED and enter the number
of parts to be machined.
6 To set the clock, move the cursor to DATE or TIME, enter a new date or time, then press horizontal
soft key [INPUT].
- 790 -
Explanation
- PARTS TOTAL
executed. This value cannot be set on this screen. Set the value in parameter No. 6712.
- PARTS REQUIRED
It is used for setting the number of machined parts required.
When the "0" is set to it, there is no limitation to the number of parts.
Also, its setting can be made by the parameter No 6713.
- PARTS COUNT
executed. The value can also be set by parameter No. 6711. In general, this value is reset when it reaches
the number of parts required. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
- POWER ON
Displays the total time which the power is on. This value cannot be set on this screen but can be preset in
parameter No. 6750.
- RUN TIME
This value can be preset in parameter No. 6751 or No. 6752.
- CUTTING TIME
Displays the total time taken by cutting that involves cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and
circular interpolation (G02 or G03). This value can be preset in parameter No. 6753 or No. 6754.
- FREE PURPOSE
This value can be used, for example, as the total time during which coolant flows. Refer to the manual
- CYCLE TIME
removed.
- DATA and TIME

Displays the current date and time. The date and time can be set on this screen.
- Usage
When the command of M02 or M30 is executed, the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts are incremented by one. Therefore, create the program so that M02 or M30 is executed
every time the processing of one part is completed. Furthermore, if an M code set to the parameter No.
6710 is executed, counting is made in the similar manner. Also, it is possible to disable counting even if
M02 or M30 is executed (bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1). For details, see the manual
issued by machine tool builders.
Limitation
- Run time and part count settings
Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of "M" and "S" of run time is valid from 0 to 59.
Negative value may not be set to the total number of machined parts.
- 791 -
- Time settings
Neither negative value nor the value exceeding the value in the following table can be set.
Table 12.3.19
Item Maximum value Item Maximum value
Year 2096 Hour 23
Month 12 Minute 59
Day 31 Second 59
12.3.20 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value

Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) and external
workpiece origin offset.
The workpiece origin offset value and external workpiece origin offset value can be set on this screen.
Procedure for displaying and setting the workpiece origin offset value
Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [WORK].
The workpiece coordinate system setting screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.20 WORK COORDINATES screen (15-inch display unit)
3 The screen for displaying the workpiece origin offset values consists of two or more pages.
Display a desired page in either of the following two ways:
• Press the page key or .
• Enter the workpiece coordinate system number (0 : external workpiece origin offset, 1 to 6:
workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59) and press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH].
4 Turn off the data protection key to enable writing.
5 Move the cursor to the workpiece origin offset to be changed.
- 792 -
6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. The entered
value is specified in the workpiece origin offset value. Or, by entering a desired value with numeric
keys and pressing horizontal soft key [+INPUT], the entered value can be added to the previous
offset value.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other offset values.
8 Turn on the data protection key to disable writing.
12.3.21 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured

This function is used to compensate for the difference between the programmed workpiece coordinate
system and the actual workpiece coordinate system. The measured offset for the origin of the workpiece
coordinate system can be input on the screen such that the command values match the actual dimensions.
Selecting the new coordinate system matches the programmed coordinate system with the actual
coordinate system.
Procedure for direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured

Procedure
Y y
Surface A
Programmed workpiece
origin α
Surface B
O'
X
New offset
x
O β
Origin
Previous offset
Fig. 12.3.21 (a)
1 When the workpiece is shaped as shown Fig. 12.3.21 (a), position the reference tool manually until it
touches surface A of the workpiece.
2 Retract the tool without changing the Y coordinate.
3 Measure distance α between surface A and the programmed origin of the workpiece coordinate
system as shown Fig. 12.3.21 (a).
5 To display the WORK COORDINATES screen, press vertical soft key [WORK].
- 793 -
Fig. 12.3.21 (b) WORK COORDINATES screen (15-inch display unit)
6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set.

7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set (Y-axis in this example).
8 Enter the measured value (α) then press horizontal soft key [MEASUR].
9 Move the reference tool manually until it touches surface B of the workpiece.
10 Retract the tool without changing the X coordinate.
11 Enter the measured value of distance (β) to surface B as an X value as with steps 7 and 8.
Limitation
- Consecutive input
Offsets for two or more axes cannot be input at the same time.
- During program execution

This function cannot be used while a program is being executed.
12.3.22 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables

Displays common variables (#100 to #149 or #100 to #199, and #500 to #531 or #500 to #999) on the
screen.
The values for variables can be set on this screen.
Relative coordinates can also be set to variables.
Procedure for displaying and setting custom macro common variables

Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [MACRO].
The screen in the Fig. 12.3.22 is displayed.
- 794 -
Fig. 12.3.22 CUSTOM MACRO screen (15-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the following methods:
• Enter the variable number and press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH].
• Move the cursor to the variable number to set by pressing page keys and/or and

4 Enter data with numeric keys and press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
5 To set a relative coordinate in a variable, press address key , , or , then press
horizontal soft key [INP.C.].
6 To set a blank in a variable, just press horizontal soft key [INPUT]. The value field for the variable
becomes blank.
Explanation
If the value of a variable produced by an operation is not displayable, an indication below is provided.
- 795 -
12.3.23 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data

Real time macro variables (RTM variables) are dedicated to real time custom macros.
RTM variables are divided into temporary real time macro variables (temporary RTM variables) and
permanent real time macro variables (permanent RTM variables).
The values of permanent RTM variables are kept stored after the power is turned off.
Temporary RTM variables are cleared to 0 when the power is turned off.
System variables (DI/DO variables) dedicated to real time custom macros are used to read and write PMC
interface signals. Data can be read and written in bit and byte units. Before writing a signal, release the
protection of the corresponding variable on the PMC signal protect screen.
Displaying and setting real time custom macro variables

Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [R.TIME MACRO].
The screen shown below appears.
Fig. 12.3.23 (a) REAL TIME MACRO screen (15-inch display unit)
3 To display or set real time custom macro variables of which values are not stored at power-off, press
vertical soft key [TEMP. DATA].
4 To display or set real time custom macro variables of which values are stored at power-off, press
vertical soft key [PERM. DATA].
5 Move the cursor to the number of a real time custom macro variable you want to set using either of
the following methods:
• Enter the number of a real time custom macro variable and press horizontal soft key [NO.
SRH].
• Move the cursor to the number of a real time custom macro variable you want to set by
pressing page keys and/or and cursor keys , , , and/or .
6 Enter data.
- 796 -
Displaying and setting DI/DO variables

Procedure
For setting in byte units:
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times and then vertical soft key [R.TIME MACRO].
3 Press vertical soft key [BYTE SELECT]. The following screen appears:
Fig. 12.3.23 (b) BYTE SELECT screen (15-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the number of a DI/DO variable you want to set using either of the following
methods:
• Enter the number and press horizontal soft key [NO. SRH].
• Move the cursor to a desired number by pressing page keys and/or and cursor
keys , , , and/or .
5 Enter data.
12.3.24 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel

Operations on the MDI unit can substitute for the functions of switches on the machine operator’s panel.
This means that a mode selection, jog feed override selection, and so forth can be made with operations
on the MDI unit, eliminating the need to use the corresponding switches on the machine operator’s panel.
Jog feed can be performed using numeric keys.
Procedure for displaying and setting the software operator’s panel

Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] and then vertical soft key [OPERAT PANEL].
3 The screen consists of several pages. Press page key or until the desired screen is
displayed.
- 797 -
Fig. 12.3.24 (a) Without the manual handle feed function (15-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.24 (b) With the manual handle feed function (15-inch display unit)
- 798 -
Fig. 12.3.24 (c) (15-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or .
5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary position and set the
desired condition.
6 Press one of the following arrow keys (Fig. 12.3.24 (d)) to perform jog feed. Press the key
together with an arrow key to perform jog rapid traverse.
Fig. 12.3.24 (d) MDI arrow keys
Explanation
- Valid operations
The valid operations on the software operator's panel are shown below. Whether to use each group can be
chosen using parameter No. 7200. Those groups that are not used are not displayed on the software
operator's panel.
Group1 : Mode selection
Group2 : Selection of jog feed axis, Manual rapid traverse
Group3 : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of manual pulse magnification
Group4 : Jog federate, federate override, rapid traverse override
Group5 : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 : Protect key
Group7 : Feed hold
- Screens on which jog feed is valid

When the LCD indicates other than the software operator's panel screen and self-diagnosis screen, jog
feed is not conducted even if the arrow key is pushed.
- 799 -
- Jog feed and arrow keys

The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters (Nos. 7210 to
7217).
- General purpose switches

For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
12.3.25 Displaying and Switching the Display Language (15/19-inch

Display Unit)
The language used for display can be switched to another language.
A display language can be set using a parameter. However, by modifying the setting of the display
language on this screen, the display language can be switched without turning off then on the power.
Displaying and setting the display language

Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display soft key [LANGUAGE].
3 Press vertical soft key [LANGUAGE] to display the language screen.
Fig. 12.3.25 LANGUAGE screen (15-inch display unit)
4 Press page key or , then press cursor key or to move the cursor to a
desired display language.
5 Press horizontal soft key [APPLY]. The display language is switched to the selected language. The
language specified on this screen continues to be used if the power is turned off then back on.
Explanation
- Language switching
The language screen can be displayed if bit 0 (NLC) of parameter No. 3280 is set to 0.
- Selectable languages
The display languages selectable on this screen are as follows:
- 800 -
1. English
2. Japanese
3. German
4. French
5. Chinese (Traditional)
6. Chinese (Simplified)
7. Italian
8. Korean
9. Spanish
10. Dutch
11. Danish
12. Portuguese
13. Polish
14. Hungarian
15. Swedish
16. Czech
17. Russian
18. Turkish
Among the languages listed above, English and other usable languages are displayed on the screen as a
list of switchable languages.
Limitation
- Language parameter modification on the parameter screen
Which language to be used for display is specified with parameter No. 3281. This parameter can be
modified using the parameter screen as well. However, if a modification is made on the parameter screen,
the new setting is not reflected until "APPLY" operation is performed on the language screen or the
power is turned on again. If an invalid value is set in parameter No. 3281 on the parameter screen, the
screen is displayed in English after the power is turned on again.
12.3.26 Protection of Data at Eight Levels (15/19-inch Display Unit)

You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels and one of eight protection levels for each type of CNC
and PMC data.
When an attempt is made to change CNC and PMC data or output it to an external unit, the operation
level is compared with the protection level to determine whether to allow the change or external output.
12.3.26.1 Operation level setting (15-inch display unit)

You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels.
Displaying and setting the operation level setting screen

Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display soft key [PROTECT].
3 Press vertical soft key [PROTECT].
The operation level setting screen (Fig. 12.3.26.1) shown below is displayed.
- 801 -
Fig.12.3.26.1 Operation level setting screen (15-inch display unit)
4 Key in the password for an operation level to be set/modified, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT
PASSWD].
5 To return the operation level to 0, 1, 2, or 3, press horizontal soft key [CANCEL PASSWD].
Explanation
- Operation level setting
To select operation level 0 to 3, use the corresponding memory protection key signal.
To select operation level 4 to 7, use the corresponding password.
Table 12.3.26.1 Operation level setting

Operation level Setting Sample grouping
7 (high) Password -
6 Password MTB
5 Password Dealer and integrator
4 Password End user
0 (low) Memory protection key signal User level (level 4)
When operation level 4 to 7 is set, the operation level remains unchanged until the password is cleared.
(The operation level also remains unchanged if the power is turned off.)
Operation level 7 is reserved for CNC and PMC maintenance.
NOTE
When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each
entered character.
- 802 -
12.3.26.2 Password modification (15-inch display unit)

The password for each of operation levels 4 to 7 can be modified.
Displaying and setting the password modification screen

Procedure
4 Press vertical soft key [PASSWORD].
The PASSWORD CHANGE screen (Fig. 12.3.26.2)shown below is displayed.
Fig.12.3.26.2 PASSWORD CHANGE screen (15-inch display unit)
5 Key in an operation level whose password is to be modified, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
6 Key in the current password for the operation level whose password is to be modified, then press
horizontal soft key [INPUT].
7 Key in a new password, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
8 Key in the new password again for confirmation, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
9 Press horizontal soft key [PASSWD CHANGE].
10 To clear the password, press horizontal soft key [PASSWD CLEAR].
Explanation
Up to eight characters (only uppercase alphabetic characters and numeric characters) can be input.
NOTE
1 For a password, consisting of three to eight characters, the following characters
are available:
• Uppercase alphabetic characters
• Numeric characters
2 When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each
entered character.
- 803 -
NOTE
3 Whether a password can be changed at the current operation level is
determined as follows:
• Password of an operation level higher than the current operation level
Cannot be changed.
• Password of the current operation level
Can be changed.
• Password of an operation level lower than the current operation level
Can be changed (only to the initial password).
4 The set password is not displayed.
Be careful not to forget the password.
12.3.26.3 Protection level setting (15-inch display unit)

The change protection level and output protection level of each data item are displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each data item can be changed.
Confirmation based on protection level setting

Procedure
4 Press vertical soft key [DATA LEVEL] to change the protection level of CNC data or press vertical
soft key [PMC LEVEL] to change the protection level of PMC data.
The following protection level change screen (Fig. 12.3.26.3) is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.26.3 Protection level change screen (15-inch display unit)
5 Move the cursor to the change level or output level of a desired data item.
6 Key in a new desired level, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
- 804 -
NOTE
When the protection level of PMC data is set, soft key [SWITCH PMC] is used to
switch between PMC paths to be set, for multi-path PMC.
Explanation
When the protection level of a data item is higher than the current operation level, the protection level of
the data item cannot be changed.
The protection level of a data item cannot be changed to a protection level higher than the current
operation level.
For each of the following types of data, you can set a data protection level. There are the following two
types of data protection levels:
• Change protection level
Sets the protection level used when data is changed.
• Output protection level
Sets the protection level used when data is output to an external unit.
As a protection level, you can set a value of 0 (low) to 7 (high).
Table 12.3.26.3 (a) Protection level of each type of data

Type of data
Change Output
Custom macro variable data <CUSTOM MACRO>
0 0
(including variable data dedicated to the macro executor)
Periodical maintenance data <PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE DATA> 0 0
Tool offset data <TOOL OFFSET DATA> 0 0
Clock data <TIME> 0 0
Workpiece origin shift amount data <WORK ZERO SHIFT> 0 0
Workpiece origin offset data <WORK ZERO OFFSET> 0 0
Ethernet setting data <ETHER NET SETTING> 0 0
Parameter data <PARAMETER DATA> 4 0
Settings <SETTING DATA> 0 0
Pitch error compensation data <PITCH ERROR DATA> 4 0
Parameter data for Power Mate CNC manager function
0 0
<PARAMETER DATA FOR POWER MATE CNC MANAGER>
Each part program <PROGRAMS FOR EACH PARTS> 0 0
Part program editing operation <CHANGE PROGRAMS FOR EACH PARTS> 0 0
Absolute coordinate preset operation <PRESET OF ABSOLUTE AXIS DATA> 0 0
Fig.12.3.26 (b) Protection level of PMC data

Type of data
Change Output
Composition parameter 0 0
Setting (online) 0 0
Setting (each path) 0 0
Sequence program 0 0
PMC parameter 0 0
Timer 0 0
Counter 0 0
Keep relay 0 0
Keep relay (system) 0 0
Data table 0 0
Data table control 0 0
PMC memory 0 0
I/O configuration 0 0
I/O Link group selection 0 0
Registration of I/O device 0 0
- 805 -
NOTE
1 For some types of data, the output function is not provided.
operation level.
4 Settable types of data increase or decrease, depending on the option
configuration.
5 For details on the protection level of PMC data, refer to “PMC Programming
Manual (B-64513EN)”.
6 The type of tool offset data put in effect varies depending on the tool
compensation value memory used.
7 To change the protection level for each part program, do so on the PROGRAM
FOLDER screen rather than on the PROTECT LEVEL screen.
8 Part program editing includes program editing for the MDI mode.
9 Presetting absolute coordinates causes preset workpiece coordinate system
values to be protected.
10 During tool offset data input/output, if any tool offset data type is not allowed to
be changed or output to the outside, it is processed as follows:
- Input : Any data type other than those whose change is not allowed is
changed.
- Output : Any data type other than those whose change is not allowed is output.
12.3.26.4 Setting the change protection level and output protection

level of a program (15-inch display unit)
The display/operations indicated below can be performed from the directory screen.
The change protection level and output protection level of each part program are displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each part program can be changed.
Setting the change protection level and output protection level of a program
Procedure
- 806 -
Fig. 12.3.26.4 Program directory screen (15-inch display unit)
3 Press horizontal soft key [DETAIL ON] to switch to detail displays.

4 Move the cursor to a desired program.
5 Press the continuous menu key to display horizontal soft key [CHANGE ATTR].
6 Press horizontal soft key [CHANGE ATTR].
7 Key in a new desired level, then press horizontal soft key [CHANGE LEVEL].
8 To change the output protection level, key in a new desired level, then press horizontal soft key
[OUT LEVEL].
Explanation
The change protection level (0 to 7) and output protection level (0 to 7) are displayed as "CHANGE
PROTECTION LEVEL VALUE/OUTPUT PROTECTION LEVEL".
NOTE
operation level.
3 A protection level can be set only for those part programs that are held on the
"CNC_MEM" device.
12.3.27 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration

Screens (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Items concerning tools, such as the number of a tool to be used in machining, the position at which the
turret is indexed for a tool, and tool position compensation, can be displayed or specified on the tool
registration screens. Refer to the manual prepared by the machine tool builder for details, as the builder
sets these items first.
- 807 -
12.3.27.1 Displaying and setting items on the initial tool registration

screen
Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until the vertical soft key [TOOL] appears.
4 Press the vertical soft key [TOOL] to display the initial tool registration screen.
6 Type the number of the tool management data you wan to set or modify, and press soft key [INPUT].
Fig.12.3.27.1 Initial Tool Registration Screen (15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number of tools to be used
Specify the total number of tools to be used.
- Number of tools for which the turret is indexed

Number of tools for which the turret is indexed (parameter No. 16266). When T-axis control is specified
(TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260, is set to 1), specify the total number of tools for which the turret is
indexed. The setting must not be greater than the number of tools to be used.
- Number of a tool to be initially selected

Specify the number of the tool to be selected when reference position return is completed.
This data corresponds to parameter No. No. 16267.
- Number of pulses sent to the turret per rotation

When T-axis is set as a rotation axis and T-axis control is specified (TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260,
is set to 1), specify the number of pulses sent to the turret per rotation.
This data corresponds to parameter No.1260.
- 808 -
- Number of punch operations

Specify the number of punch operations for the tool used.
Display and preset the total number of punch operation of all tool.
This data corresponds to parameter No.16269 or No.16270.
NOTE
If the memory protect signal KEY1 is set to “1”, the number of punch operations
is writable although parameter writing is disabled (bit 0 (PWE) of parameter
No.8900 is set to 0).

screen
Procedure
4 Press the vertical soft key [TOOL] to display the initial tool registration screen the initial tool
5 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE]. Then press the vertical soft key [TOOL NUMBER] to
display the tool number registration screen.
• Enter the registration number of the tool for which data is to be changed, then press the soft key
[NO. SRH].
keys .
8 Type the data you wan to set or modify, and press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
To modify the data, type the data to increase or decrease, then press horizontal soft key [+INPUT].
Alternatively, type the data to modify, then press horizontal soft key [+INPUT].
- 809 -
Fig.12.3.27.2 Tool number registration screen (15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
- Tool number
Specify the numbers of tools to be used.
- Turret position
When T-axis control is specified (TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260, is set to 1), specify the positions at
which the turret is indexed for tools.
- Change tool Number

Specify the numbers of tools for exchange.
These numbers are limited to the tool numbers registered on the tool number registration screen
- X-axis offset
specify X-axis offset for tool positions.
- Y-axis offset
specify Y-axis offset for tool positions in the machine coordinate system.
12.3.27.3 Displaying and setting items on the screen for the number of
press operations
Procedure
- 810 -
5 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE]. Then press the vertical soft key [PUNCH COUNT] to
display the screen for the number of press operations.
horizontal soft key [NO. SRH].
keys .
Fig.12.3.27.3 Screen for the Number of Punch Operations(15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
- Punch count number

Display and preset the total number of punch operation by each tool registered on the tool registration
screens.
- Tool life
Specify the maximum number of punch operation by each tool registered on the tool registration screens.
NOTE
1 If the memory protect signal KEY1 is set to “1”, the punch count number and the
tool life are writable although parameter writing is disabled (bit 0 (PWE) of
parameter No.8900 is set to 0).
2 Tool life management option is required to specify the tool life
- 811 -

screen (for drawing figures)
Procedure
5 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE]. Then press the vertical soft key [TOOL SHAPE] to
display the screen for the number of press operations.
horizontal soft key [NO.SRH].
keys .
Fig.12.3.27.4 Tool figure registration screen (15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
- Tool shape
Specify the tool shape for graphic operation.
figure.
- 812 -

7: White
8: Gray
For details, refer to Table12.3.27.4.
- Tool size (I)

- Tool size(J)
- Tool angle(K)
Table12.3.27.4 tool figure data
Figure I (Dimension) J(Dimension) K (Angle)
I
01
Circle I ： 0~999999.999
04
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Square, 02 J
K ： 0~399.999
rectangle 05
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Elongated 03 J
K ： 0~399.999
hole 06
Others 00
Fixed value
NOTE
Graphic operation option is required to use the tool figure registration screen.
- 813 -
12.3.28 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Number

Registration Screen for Multiple Tools (15/19-inch Display
Unit)
Items concerning multiple tools, such as the number of a sub-tool for multiple tools, the position at which
the turret is indexed for a sub-tool, and sub-tool position compensation, can be displayed or specified on
the tool registration screens for multiple tools. Refer to the manual prepared by the machine tool builder
for details, as the builder sets these items first.
NOTE
Multiple-tool control option is required to use the tool registration screen for
multiple tools

screen for multiple tools
Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until the vertical soft key [MULTI TOOL] appears.
4 Press the vertical soft key [MULTI TOOL] to display the initial tool registration screen the tool
number registration screen for multiple tools

・ Enter the registration number of the tool for which data is to be changed, then press the
・ Move the cursor to the registration number of the tool to be changed with the page keys
and cursor keys .
- 814 -
Fig.12.3.28.1 Tool Number Registration Screen for Multiple Tools (15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
- Sub-tool number
Specify sub-tool numbers used for controlling multiple tools.
- Angle
Specify angles used for indexing the turret for sub-tools.
- Y-axis offset
specify tool position compensation for sub-tools along the Y-axis in the machine coordinate system.
NOTE
Multiple-tool control option is required to use the tool number registration screen
for multiple tools

screen for multiple tools (for drawing figures)
Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until the vertical soft key [MULTI TOOL] appears.
4 Press the vertical soft key[MULTI TOOL] to display the initial tool registration screen for multiple
tools.
- 815 -
5 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE]. Then press the vertical soft key [MULTI SHAPE] to
display the tool figure registration screen for multiple tools.

・ Enter the registration number of the tool for which data is to be changed, then press the
・ Move the cursor to the tool number to be changed with the page keys and cursor
keys .
Fig.12.3.28.2 Tool figure registration screen for multiple tools (15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
- Tool shape
Specify the sub-tool shape for graphic operation.
figure.

- 816 -

7: White
8: Gray
- Tool size (I)

- Tool size(J)
- Tool angle(K)
Table 12.3.28.2 Tool shape data
I
01
Circle I ： 0~999999.999
04
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Square, 02 J
K ： 0~399.999
rectangle 05
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Elongated 03 J
K ： 0~399.999
hole 06
Others 00
Fixed value
NOTE
Multiple-tool control option and graphic function are required to use the tool
figure registration screen for multiple tools
12.3.29 Tool Data Setting Function (15/19-inch Display Unit)

This function makes the area used for registering tool numbers, tool position compensation, punch count,
and other tool data available to the user. This enables the user to customize the registered tool data. This
allows the conventional tool data setting method to be changed and the number of tools that can be
registered to be increased considerably.
- 817 -
Explanation
- Registration area
A memory area consisting of 32KB (32×1024 bytes) is provided for the tool data setting function.
- Type and size of tool data

Tool data can be customized, as listed below, by specifying parameters. Individual tools cannot have
more than one setting. All registered tools will have the same setting.
Table12.3.29 (a) Tool Registration Screen : kind of tool data and memory size
Size
none provided
Number of tools 136
Can be selected 2(byte) or 4(byte).
2 (byte)
Tool number When 4(byte) is Selected,
(Tool number having up to 4 digits)
tool number having up to 8 digits.
Tool position
compensation X
Tool position
compensation Y
T–axis machine position 8 (byte) Can be selected not used or 8(byte)
Can be selected not used or 2(byte)
Punch count 4 (byte)
or 4(byte)
Can be selected not used, 2(byte), or
2 (byte)
Tool number for changing 4(byte)
(Tool number for changing tools
tools When used, memory size is same to
having up to 4 digits)
the memory size for tool number.
Tool figure for graphics
(*1)
When used, memory size is same to
Tool life management (*2) 4 (byte)
the memory size for punch count.
*1 : The graphic function option is necessary.
*2 : The tool life management function option is necessary.
Table12.3.29 (b) Tool Registration Screen for multiple tools : kind of tool data and memory size
Size
none provided
Number of subtool 64
2 (byte) 2 (byte)
Multitool subtool number (Multitool subtool number having up (Multitool subtool number having up
to 2 digits) to 4 digits)
Multitool angle 8 (byte) 8 (byte)
Not used
(There is no displayed item Can be selected not used or 8(byte)
compensation X
corresponding to this condition)
compensation Y
Tool figure for multitool
graphics (*1)
*1 : The graphic function is necessary.
- Tool number
When specifying up to four digits with a T command, select 2 bytes. When specifying five or more digits
with a T command, select 4 bytes. If the 4–byte option is selected, T–axis control is possible with a T
command having five or more digits.
- 818 -
- X–axis and Y–axis tool position compensation

Enable or disable tool position compensation. A range of 8 bytes thus enabling compensation values to be
set in the corresponding range, in output increments.
- T–axis machine position

Set this when T–axis control is used.
- Punch count
Select whether to use individual punch counts. A range of either two or four bytes can be selected. This
item must be set when the tool life management function is used.
- Tool change tool number

Set this when using the tool change function. The data agrees with that of the tool number.
- Tool figure
Select this when drawing a tool using the graphic function. Each tool requires 13 bytes of data.
Figure data : 1 byte
Vertical dimension data : 4 bytes
Horizontal dimension data : 4 bytes
Angle data : 4 bytes
- Tool life management

Select this when using the tool life management function. The data agrees with that of the punch count.
- Multitool subtool number

Select this when using multitool control. Up to four digits can be specified for a subtool number when the
corresponding number of digits is registered.
This item can also be used to specify whether a magazine number and subtool number are registered
together or separately. When separately registering the magazine number and subtool number, the number
of subtools to be registered must be set as a parameter.
- Multitool angle
Set a subtool indexing angle when using multitool control. If the magazine number and subtool number
are registered together, the angle for tools other than the multitool must be set to 0.
- Multitool tool position compensation

Set this when executing multitool tool position compensation in the X and Y directions.
12.3.30 Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting

Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The safety zone can be displayed and changed.
By setting SF0, bit 0 of parameter No. 16500, the layout of the safety zone setting screen can be changed
to type A or type B.
Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type A)
Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until the vertical soft key [SAFTY ZONE] appears.
4 Press the vertical soft key [SAFTY ZONE] to display the safety zone setting screen.
- 819 -
7 To move the cursor to the data of safety zone to be changed the cursor keys .
Fig.12.3.30 (a) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type A), Absolute position display (15-inch display unit)
Fig.12.3.30 (b) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type A), Machine position display (15-inch display unit)
- 820 -
NOTE
the safety zone 5, 6, 7, or 8 can be set up.
safety zone STZS0～STZS3.
position return.
Setting value = Coordinate by automatic coordinate system setting (parameter
No.1250) － workpiece coordinate system offset amount
Explanation
- Safety zone #n (n: 1 to 8)
X1
Specify the coordinate of safety zone along the positive X direction.
X2
Specify the coordinate of safety zone along the minus X direction
Y
Specify the coordinate of safety zone along the Y direction
- Tool position
X
of the tool area.
Y
- Zone number
Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type B)
Procedure
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until the vertical soft key [SAFTY ZONE] appears.
4 Press the vertical soft key [SAFTY ZONE] to display the safety zone setting screen.
the cursor keys .

- 821 -
Fig.12.3.30 (c) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type B), Machine position display (15-inch display unit)
Fig.12.3.30 (d) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type B), Machine position display (15-inch display unit)
NOTE
the safety zone 5, 6, 7, or 8 can be set up.
position return.
W is set to 0.
Setting value for X, Y = Coordinate by automatic coordinate system setting
(parameter No.1250) － workpiece coordinate system offset amount
- 822 -
Explanation
- Safety zone (#1 - #8)
W
Specify the width of the safety zone along the X-axes.
X
Specify the center coordinate of the safety zone along the X-axes.
Y
Specify the coordinate of the safety zone along the Y-axes.
- Tool position
X
of the tool area.
Y
- Zone number
- 823 -

When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to determine the specifications and
functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor or other parts.
This chapter describes how to set parameters on the MDI unit. Parameters can also be set with external
input/output devices such as the memory card (see Chapter, “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT”).
In addition, pitch error compensation data used for improving the precision in positioning with the ball
screw on the machine can be set or displayed by the operations under function key .
See Chapter, “ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS” for the diagnosis screens displayed by
pressing function key .
subsections:

12.4.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters ............................................................................................824
12.4.2 Servo Parameters .......................................................................................................................826
12.4.3 Servo Tuning..............................................................................................................................827
12.4.4 Color Setting Screen ..................................................................................................................828
12.4.5 Displaying Memory Data...........................................................................................................829
12.4.6 Parameter Tuning Screen ...........................................................................................................831
12.4.7 Periodic Maintenance Screen.....................................................................................................838
12.4.8 System Configuration Screen ....................................................................................................845
――――― Screens of a 15-inch display unit
12.4.9 Displaying and Setting Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit)..................................................847
12.4.10 Servo Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit) .............................................................................849
12.4.11 Servo Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...................................................................................850
12.4.12 Color Setting Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)........................................................................851
12.4.13 Displaying Memory Data (15/19-inch Display Unit) ................................................................852
12.4.14 Parameter Tuning Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit).................................................................854
12.4.15 Periodic Maintenance Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..........................................................861
12.4.16 System Configuration Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..........................................................869
12.4.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters

When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to determine the specifications and
functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor. The setting of
parameters depends on the machine. Refer to the parameter list prepared by the machine tool builder.
Normally, the user need not change parameter setting.
Procedure for displaying and setting parameters

Procedure
1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WRITE to enable writing. See the procedure for enabling/disabling
parameter writing described below.
3 Press chapter selection soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter screen.
- 824 -
Fig. 12.4.1 (a) PARAMETER screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in either of the following ways:
• Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] .
• Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys, and , and cursor
keys, , , , and .
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT]. The
parameter is set to the entered value and the value is displayed.
6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing.
Procedure for enabling/displaying parameter writing

Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode or enter state emergency stop.
3 Press soft key [SETTING] to display the setting screen.
Fig. 12.4.1 (b) SETTING screen (10.4-inch display unit)

- 825 -
4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys.

5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press [ON:1] to enable parameter writing.
At this time, the CNC enters the alarm state SW0100.
6 After setting parameters, return to the setting screen. Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and
press soft key [(OPRT)] , then press [OFF:0].
7 Press the key to release the alarm condition.
When an alarm PW0000 occurred, however, it is not released unless the power is turned off and
back on.
Explanation
- Setting parameters with external input/output devices
See Chapter, “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT” for setting parameters with external input/output devices such as
the memory card.
- Parameters that require turning off the power

Some parameters are not effective until the power is turned off and on again after they are set. Setting
such parameters causes alarm PW0000. In this case, turn off the power, then turn it on again.
- Parameter list
Refer to the Parameter Manual (B-64490EN) for the parameter list.
- Setting data
Some parameters can be set on the setting screen if the parameter list indicates "Setting entry is
acceptable". Setting 1 for PARAMETER WRITE is not necessary when these parameters are set on the
setting screen.
12.4.2 Servo Parameters

This subsection describes the initialization of digital servo parameters performed, for example, at the time
of field tuning of the machine tool.
Procedure for servo parameter setting

Procedure
1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.
2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display servo setting and tuning screens.
3 Press function key , continuous menu key , then soft key [SERVO PARAM].
4 Press soft key [SERVO PARAM] to select the servo parameter screen.
The following screen (Fig. 12.4.2) appears:
- 826 -
Fig. 12.4.2 Servo parameter setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 With the page keys and cursor keys, move the cursor to the position of data to be set or modified.
6 Key in a desired value then press soft key [INPUT].
12.4.3 Servo Tuning

Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set.
Procedure for servo tuning

Procedure
3 Press function key , continuous menu key , then soft key [SERVO PARAM].
4 Press soft key [SERVO TUNE] to select the servo tuning screen.
5 Use the cursor and page keys to enter necessary data for initial setting. The following screen (Fig.
12.4.3) appears:
Fig. 12.4.3 Servo tuning screen (10.4-inch display unit)

- 827 -
6 With the page keys and cursor keys, move the cursor to the position of data to be set or modified.
7 Key in a desired value then press soft key [INPUT].
12.4.4 Color Setting Screen

Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen.
Displaying the color setting screen

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [COLOR].
3 Press soft key [COLOR] to display the color setting screen.
Fig. 12.4.4 Color setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure for operating the color setting screen

- Modifying the color (color palette values)
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The soft key display changes to the following operation soft keys:
2 Move the cursor to a color number whose color palette values are to be modified.
The current color palette value set for each primary color is displayed.
3 Select a primary color whose setting is to be modified, with the corresponding operation soft key
[RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
More than one primary color can be selected at the same time.
Each time operation soft key [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] is pressed, the operation soft key toggles
between selection and deselection.
(When operation soft keys [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] are not displayed, press the rightmost soft
key to display the operation soft keys.)
4 Select operation soft key [BRIGHT] or [DARK] to modify the brightness of the selected prime
color(s).
- 828 -
- Storing the color (color palette values)

The set color palette values can be stored.
1 Press operation soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area.
(When operation soft keys [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] are not displayed, press the
rightmost soft key to display the operation soft keys.)
COLOR1 Standard color data parameters Nos. 6581 to 6595

COLOR2 Parameters Nos. 10421 to 10435
COLOR3 Parameters Nos. 10461 to 10475
2 Press operation soft key [MEMORY]. The operation soft key display switches to the following:
3 Pressing operation soft key [EXEC] stores the current color palette settings in the selected area.
Pressing operation soft key [CAN] or the leftmost key does not store the current color palette
settings in the selected area.
- Calling the color (color palette values)

1 Press operation soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area where color
palette values are stored.
(When operation soft keys [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] are not displayed, press the
rightmost soft key to display the operation soft keys.)
2 Press operation soft key [RECALL]. The operation soft key display switches to the following:
3 Pressing operation soft key [EXEC] calls the color palette values from the selected area to enable the
color to be modified. This operation is invalid if no color palette values are stored.
Pressing operation soft key [CAN] or the leftmost key does not call the color palette values from the
selected area.
NOTE
1 Immediately after the power is turned on, the settings of COLOR1 (parameters)
are used for display. If nothing is stored for COLOR1, the default colors are used
for display.
2 Do not modify the color setting data parameters directly by MDI key input. When
modifying the standard color data, be sure to perform a storage operation on the
color setting screen.
12.4.5 Displaying Memory Data

The contents of the CNC memory can be displayed starting at a specified address.
Displaying memory data

Procedure
1 Set bit 0 (MEM) of parameter No. 8950 to 1 to display the memory contents display screen.
3 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft key [MEMORY].
The following screen (Fig. 12.4.5) appears:
- 829 -
Fig. 12.4.5 Memory contents display screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Key in a desired address (hexadecimal) then press soft key [ADDRES SEARCH]. Starting at the
specified address, 256-byte data is displayed.
(Example: When you input 100000 then press [ADDRES SEARCH], data is displayed starting at
100000H.)
5 Display data can be switched by using page keys and and cursor keys , ,
, and/or .
6 By pressing soft key [BYTE], [WORD], [LONG], or [DOUBLE], select a data type to be displayed.
Explanation
A memory data display format can be selected from the following four options:
Byte display (1 byte in hexadecimal)

Word display (2 bytes in hexadecimal)
Long display (4 bytes in hexadecimal)
Double display (8 bytes in decimal: Double precision floating-point display)
One screen displays 256-byte memory data.

NOTE
1 When an address is input, "H" for representing "hexadecimal" need not be specified at
the end of the address. If H is added, a warning is displayed to indicate that the format
is invalid.
2 When word display is selected as the display format, an input address is rounded to a
multiple of 2 bytes. When long display or double display is selected, an input address is
rounded to a multiple of 4 bytes.
WARNING
1 If a memory address that must not be accessed in address search is input, a system
alarm is issued.
When making an address search, check that the address is accessible and that the
address is input correctly.
2 This function is designed for maintenance, and must not be used by general users.
- 830 -
12.4.6 Parameter Tuning Screen

The parameter tuning screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the
following:
1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine is started up are collectively
displayed to facilitate start-up of the machine.
2 The servo tuning screen is displayed for smooth tuning.
The parameter tuning screen consists of a menu screen and several setting screens.
12.4.6.1Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item

The parameter tuning menu screen displays the following items:
[START UP]
• SYSTEM SETTING
• AXIS SETTING
• FSSB (SV AMP)
• FSSB (SP AMP)
• SERVO SETTING
• MISCELLANY
[TUNING]
• SERVO TUNING
On the parameter tuning menu screen, one of the displayed items can be selected to display the
corresponding screen. From each setting screen, you can return to the menu screen by performing a soft
key operation.
NOTE
1 Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.
2 When bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 is set to 0, "SERVO SETTING" and
"SERVO TUNING" are not displayed.
Displaying the menu screen and selecting a setting screen

Procedure
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "ENABLED". For details, see the procedure for
"PARAMETER WRITE" in Subsection, “Displaying and Setting Parameters”.
5 Press soft key [PARAM TUNING] to display the menu screen for parameter tuning .
- 831 -
Fig. 12.4.6.1 (a) Menu screen for parameter tuning (10.4-inch display unit)
6 Move the cursor to a desired item by pressing cursor key or .

7 Press soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the selected screen.
Returning to the menu screen

Procedure
1 Press soft key [SELECT] on the parameter tuning menu screen described in Subsection, “Displaying
the menu screen and selecting a menu item”. The screen and soft keys shown below (Fig. 12.4.6.1
(b) are displayed. (The screen below (Fig. 12.4.6.1 (b) is displayed when "AXIS SETTING" is
selected.)
Fig. 12.4.6.1 (b) Axis setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 832 -
3 Press soft key [MENU].

The screen display returns to the parameter tuning menu screen.
4 Upon completion of parameter setting, switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to
"DISABLED".
NOTE
Some setting screens can also be displayed by a chapter selection soft key. If a
screen is selected using a chapter selection soft key, however, you cannot return
to the parameter tuning menu screen.
Explanation
- Items displayed with [START UP]
The items of [START UP] indicate the screens for setting the minimum required parameters for starting
up the machine.
Table 12.4.6.1 (a) Items displayed with [START UP]

Display item Description
SYSTEM SETTING Screen for setting CNC parameters related to the entire system configuration
Screen for setting CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and
AXIS SETTING
acceleration/deceleration
FSSB (SV AMP) FSSB servo amplifier setting screen
FSSB (SP AMP) FSSB spindle amplifier setting screen
SERVO SETTING Servo setting screen
Screen for setting parameters related to the allowable number of M code digits
MISCELLANY
and whether to display the servo setting and spindle tuning screens
NOTE
Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.
- Items displayed with [TUNING]

The items of [TUNING] indicate the screens for servo.
Fig. 12.4.6.1 (b) Items displayed with [TUNING]

SERVO TUNING Servo tuning screen
NOTE
12.4.6.2Parameter tuning screen (system setting)

This screen enables the parameters related to the entire system configuration to be displayed and modified.
The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by FANUC).
Display and setting

Procedure
1 Move the cursor to [SYSTEM SETTING] by pressing cursor key or on the parameter
tuning menu screen described in Subsection, “Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu
- 833 -
item”.
2 Press soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the screen and soft keys shown below (Fig.
12.4.6.2).
Fig. 12.4.6.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to a parameter number to be set or displayed, according to one of the methods
below.
• Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] .
• Move the cursor to the desired parameter number by pressing page key or , and

A brief description of the parameter where the cursor is placed is provided at the bottom of the
screen. However, no description is provided when the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit
parameters.
4 Input desired data then press the key on the MDI unit to set the parameter.
5 Press soft key [INIT]. The standard value (recommended by FANUC) for the item selected by the
cursor is displayed in the key input buffer. Pressing soft key [EXEC] in this state initializes the item
to the standard value.
6 Press soft key [G_INIT]. A message asking whether to set the group standard values is displayed on
the screen. Pressing soft key [EXEC] in this state inputs all of the standard values of the group.
NOTE
1 If the cursor is placed on a parameter that has no standard value assigned, no
standard value is input even when [INIT] is pressed.
2 When the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit parameters, the multiple bits
can be input simultaneously. When [INIT] is pressed in this state, the key input
buffer displays the standard values for the bits where the cursor is placed. If a bit
has no standard value assigned, "*" is displayed for the bit, and no value is input
for the bit.
3 When [G_INIT] is pressed, those parameters that have no standard values
assigned are not initialized.
- 834 -
12.4.6.3Parameter tuning screen (axis setting)

This screen enables the CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and
acceleration/deceleration to be displayed and set. The parameters displayed can be divided into four
groups:
(Basic) group : The parameters related to basic settings are displayed.
(Coordinate) group : The parameters related to coordinates are displayed.
(Feedrate) group : The parameters related to feedrate are displayed.
(Acceleration/deceleration) group : The parameters related to acceleration/deceleration are displayed.
The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by FANUC). For the display and
setting procedure, see the Subsection, “Parameter tuning screen (system setting)”.
Fig. 12.4.6.3 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) (10.4-inch display unit)
12.4.6.4Displaying and setting the FSSB servo amplifier setting

screen
From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details
of the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen, see the description of the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen
in Subsection, “FSSB Setting” in the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64483EN-1).
Fig. 12.4.6.4 FSSB servo amplifier setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 835 -
12.4.6.5Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen

From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB
axis setting screen, see the description of the FSSB axis setting screen in Subsection, “FSSB Setting” in
the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64483EN-1).
Fig. 12.4.6.5 FSSB axis setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
12.4.6.6Displaying and setting the servo setting screen

From the parameter tuning screen, the servo setting screen can be displayed. For details of the servo
setting screen, see the Subsection, “Servo Parameters”.
Fig. 12.4.6.6 Servo setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 836 -
12.4.6.7Parameter tuning screen (miscellaneous settings)

The parameters related to the allowable number of M code digits and whether to display the servo setting
and spindle tuning screens can be displayed and modified. Moreover, the parameters can be initialized to
the standard values (recommended by FANUC).
For the display and setting procedure, see the Subsection, “Parameter tuning screen (system setting)”.
Fig. 12.4.6.7 Parameter tuning screen (Miscellaneous setting) (10.4-inch display unit)
12.4.6.8Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen

From the parameter tuning screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo
tuning screen, see the Subsection, “Servo Tuning”.
Fig. 12.4.6.8 Servo tuning screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 837 -
12.4.7 Periodic Maintenance Screen

Periodic maintenance screens are used for managing consumables (such as the backlight of a LCD unit
and backup batteries). By setting the name of a consumable, its life time, and the method for counting
down the life time, the life of the consumable can be counted down in the appropriate method set for the
consumable, and the remaining life time can be displayed.
With these screens, the user can easily manage consumables that require periodic replacement.
The total number of item that can be managed is 10 in all path.
Explanation
There are four periodic maintenance screens: the status screen, the setting screen, the machine menu
screen, and the NC menu screen.
Status screen : Item names, remaining times, and count statuses are displayed, and item names
are set.
Setting screen : Life times, remaining times, count types (count-down method), and path number
(in case of multi-path system) are set.
Machine menu screen : The names of consumables in the machine can be registered.
NC menu screen : The names of consumables in the NC are already registered.
Using periodic maintenance screens

<1> Referencing a periodic maintenance screen
Display the status screen. For the meanings of items on the status screen, see Item, “Status screen”.
<2> Adding the name of a new consumable item to a periodic maintenance screen or editing an existing
consumable item on the screen
The name of a consumable item can be added or edited on the machine menu screen. For details, see
Item, “Machine menu screen”.
<3> Adding or editing a life time, remaining time, and a method of counting down the remaining time for
a consumable on a periodic maintenance screen
A life time and remaining time can be added or edited on the setting screen. For details, see Item,
“Setting screen”.
<4> Newly displaying the item name and remaining time of a consumable on a periodic maintenance
screen.
1 Setting an item name
Select the item name of a consumable to be displayed from the machine menu screen or NC
menu screen, or enter the name using the MDI keys. For the procedure, see Item, “Item name”
in “Status screen”.
2 Setting a life time, remaining time, and count type
Select the life time, remaining time, and count type of a consumable to be displayed from the
setting screen. For the procedure, see Item, “Remaining time” in “Status screen”.
Procedure for displaying a periodic maintenance screen

2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display [PERIOD MAINTE].
3 Press soft key [PERIOD MAINTE] to display the periodic maintenance screen.
Status screen
When soft key [STATUS] is pressed, the status screen is displayed. The status screen shows the item
names, count statuses, and remaining times of managed consumables.
- 838 -
Fig. 12.4.7 (a) Status screen
- Item name
As the item name, set the name of a consumable to be managed by periodic maintenance. To set an item
name, select a name from the machine menu screen or NC menu screen, or directly enter the name using
the MDI keys.
Setting an item name from a menu screen

1 On the status screen, move the cursor to a target item name, press soft key [(OPRT)], then press soft
key [ENTRY].
2 Press soft key [MACHINE] or [NC] to display the machine menu screen or NC menu screen.
3 Move the cursor to an existing item name on the menu screen, press soft key [(OPRT)], and press
soft key [SELECT] then [EXEC] successively.
4 The screen display returns to the status screen, and the item name selected on the menu screen is
added to the status screen.
Initially, there is no item name set on the machine menu screen, so item names must be registered in
advance. For the registration method, see the description of the procedure for registering item names on
the machine menu screen.
Setting an item name using the MDI keys

2 Type the alphanumeric characters to be input, then press soft key [INPUT].
3 The entered item name is registered on the status screen.
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed instead of soft key [INPUT], the entered characters can be added to
an existing item name.
When typing 2-byte characters, type "*" before and after the character codes. The 2-byte character codes
must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE".)
An item name to be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters
only; or it must be up to 12 characters long if it consists of 2-byte characters only.
Example: To register "LCD バックライト", enter the following:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE*_
- 839 -
NOTE
1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In
addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names.
2 When an item name consisting of both alphanumeric characters and 2-byte
characters is registered, the warning "DATA OUT OF RANGE" may be output.
Deleting an item name

To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press soft key [ERASE], then press
soft key [EXEC].
When an item name is deleted, its life time, remaining time, and count type are deleted at the same time.
- Remaining time
As the remaining time, the period of time left until the time for replacement is reached by count down
operation is displayed.
If the percentage of the remaining time to the life time has reached to the value (%) specified by
parameter No. 8911, or smaller, the remaining time is displayed in red.
Even after the life time has expired, count down operation continues.
Setting the remaining time

1 On the status screen, place the cursor on an item for which the remaining time is to be set (the item
name must have been set in advance).
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press soft key [CHANGE].
3 The screen display changes to the setting screen.
4 Set the life time, remaining time, and count type. For the setting method and other information, see
Item, “Setting screen”.
NOTE
On the status screen, the remaining time and life time cannot be set.
These items must be set on the setting screen.
- Count status
The count status is indicated on the left side of the item number as follows:
Indication Count status

Blank Counting stopped
@ Counting in progress
* Life expired
- 840 -
Setting screen
On the setting screen, the life time, remaining time, count type, and path number of a managed
consumable are set.
Fig. 12.4.7 (b) Setting screen
Display procedure
1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [CHANGE].
- Life time
Set the life time of a consumable.
Move the cursor to an existing item, type a life time, then press soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The
life time is then set, and the same value is set also as the remaining time.
At this time, "------" is indicated in the count type field.
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added to the life time already set. The same
value as the added value is added also to the remaining time.
A value ranging from 0 to 65535 (in hours) can be set.
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name is not registered, the
warning "EDIT REJECTED" is issued.
2 If a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning "DATA IS OUT OF
RANGE" is issued.
3 If soft key [ERASE] or [TYPE] is pressed, the warning "EDIT REJECTED" is
issued.
- Remaining time
The period of time left until the time for replacement is reached by count down operation is indicated.
If the percentage of the remaining time to the life time has reached the value (%) specified by parameter
No. 8911, or smaller, the remaining time is displayed in red.
Move the cursor to the remaining time of a target registered number, type a remaining time, then press
soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The remaining time is then set.
- 841 -
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added to the remaining time already set.
A value ranging from 0 to (life time) can be set.
When soft key [ERASE] then soft key [EXEC] are pressed, the same value as the life time is set.
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or life time is not
registered, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
2 When a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning “DATA IS OUT
OF RANGE” is issued.
3 If horizontal soft key [TYPE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is
issued.
- Count type
As the count type, select the way of counting.
Place the cursor on the count type of a target registration number, then press soft key [TYPE]. Count
types are displayed as soft keys as shown below. Select one of these soft keys, then press soft key
[EXEC].
Soft key Meaning Indication

[NO CNT] Counting is not performed (stopped) ——————
[ALL] Counting is performed at all times All times
[POWER ON] Counting is performed when power is on. When power is on
[RUN] Counting is performed when operation is in progress. When operation is in progress
[CUT] Counting is performed when cutting is being performed. When cutting is being performed
NOTE
2 Soft keys [INPUT] and [+INPUT] have no effect.
3 When counting is performed at all times, a 24-hour error is generated in leap
year.
4 If soft key [ERASE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
- Path number
When [RUN] or [CUT] is set to the count type in multi path, path number can be set.
Make the cursor to the count type of a target registration number, then input path number and press soft
key [INPUT].
The setting range is 0-(max path number).
When the specified path is operating or cutting, counting is performed.
If 0 is set, when either of path is operating or cutting, counting is perfomed.
NOTE
1 If [NO CNT], [ALL] or [POWER ON] is set to count type, “--” is displayed. In this
case, if the setting is operated, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
2 If the setting is beyond the valid data range, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF
RANGE” is issued.
3 If soft key [TYPE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
4 If soft key [ERASE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued. The
soft key [+INPUT] is invalid.
- 842 -
Registration from a program

The item name, life time, remaining time, count type and path number can be registered in the status
screen and the setting screen by executing the program of the following format.
Format
G10 L60 Px [n] Aa Rr Qpt

X : Registration number
n : Item name, format: [alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters]
a : life time
r : remaining time
p : path number
t : count type
The meaning of the value of the count type is as follow.
0 : NO COUNT
1 : ALL TIMES
2 : POWER ON
3 : RUNNING
4 : CUTTING
The range of the path number is 0 – (max path number).
EX.)
Q24 : The path number is 2, and the count type is “CUTTING”
Q103 : The path number is 10, and the count type is “RUNNING”
Machine menu screen

On the machine menu screen, the names of consumables of the machine are registered. From this screen,
item names can be added to the status screen. For the method of addition to the status screen, see the
description of the status screen.
Fig. 12.4.7 (c) Machine menu screen
- Displaying the screen

1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [MACHINE].
- 843 -
On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two methods:
• Registration from a program
• Registration using the MDI keys
- Registration from a program

By executing a program having the following format, an item name can be registered in the menu of the
machine:
Format
G10 L61 Px [n]

X Registration number
n Item name, format: [alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters]
- Registration using the MDI keys

An item name can be registered on the menu screen of the machine by typing the item name in the format
shown below on the machine menu screen, then pressing soft key [INPUT] (or the key).
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the typed characters can be added to an already registered item
name.
Format
Alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters
Two-byte character codes must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE
CHARACTER CODE TABLE".)
When typing 2-byte characters, type an asterisk "*" before and after the character codes. An item name to
be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters only; or it must be
up to 12 characters long if it consists of 2-byte characters only.
Example:
To register "LCD バックライト", enter the following:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE*_
NOTE
characters is registered, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” may be output.
3 When a blank item name is selected on the machine screen, the warning “EDIT
REJECTED” is issued.
To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press soft key [ERASE], then press
soft key [EXEC].
NC menu screen
From this screen, an item name can be registered on the status screen. For the method of registration to
the status screen, see the description of the status screen.
- 844 -
Fig. 12.4.7 (d) NC menu screen

1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [NC].
NOTE
On the NC screen, the registration, deletion, and I/O of item names cannot be
performed.
When a blank item name is selected, a blank is set.
12.4.8 System Configuration Screen

The system configuration screen provides information about the types of installed hardware and software.
Procedure for displaying the screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key to display a screen that shows parameters and other information.
2 Press soft key [SYSTEM]. The system configuration screen is displayed.
There are two types of system configuration screens: the hardware configuration screen and the software
configuration screen. The screen display can switch between these screens by using and .
When soft key [SERVO INFO] or [SPINDLE INFO] is pressed, information about the connected servo
system or spindles is displayed.
- 845 -
Fig. 12.4.8 (a) System configuration screen
Hardware configuration screen

This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC.
Fig. 12.4.8 (b) Hardware configuration screen
Software configuration screen

This screen shows the names and series/editions of the software used by the NC.
Fig. 12.4.8 (c) Software configuration screen

- 846 -
Servo information screen

When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID information of the connected servo devices (servo
motors and servo amplifiers) can be displayed on the NC.
Displaying the screen

1 When the system configuration screen is displayed, press soft key [SERVO INFO].
2 The servo information screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.4.8 (d) Servo information screen
12.4.9 Displaying and Setting Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit)

When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to determine the specifications and
functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor. The setting of
parameters depends on the machine. Refer to the parameter list prepared by the machine tool builder.
Normally, the user need not change parameter setting.
Procedure for displaying and setting parameters

Procedure
1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WRITE to enable writing. See the procedure for enabling/disabling
parameter writing described below.
3 Press vertical soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter screen.
- 847 -
Fig. 12.4.9 (a) PARAMETER screen (15-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in either of the following ways:
• Enter the parameter number and press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH] .
• Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys, and , and cursor
keys, , , , and .
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
The parameter is set to the entered value and the value is displayed.
6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing.
Procedure for enabling/displaying parameter writing

Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode or enter state emergency stop.
3 Press vertical soft key [SETTING] to display the setting screen.
Fig. 12.4.9 (b) SETTING screen (15-inch display unit)

- 848 -
4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys.

5 Press horizontal soft key [ON:1] to enable parameter writing.
At this time, the CNC enters the alarm state SW0100.
6 After completing parameter setting, move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE on the setting screen
again, and press horizontal soft key [OFF:0].
7 Depress the key to release the alarm condition.
When an alarm PW0000 occurred, however, it is not released unless the power is turned off and
back on.
Explanation
- Setting parameters with external input/output devices
See Chapter, “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT” for setting parameters with external input/output devices such as
the memory card.
- Parameters that require turning off the power

Some parameters are not effective until the power is turned off and on again after they are set. Setting
such parameters causes alarm PW0000. In this case, turn off the power, then turn it on again.
- Parameter list
Refer to the Parameter Manual (B-64490EN) for the parameter list.
- Setting data
Some parameters can be set on the setting screen if the parameter list indicates "Setting entry is
acceptable". Setting 1 for PARAMETER WRITE is not necessary when three parameters are set on the
setting screen.
12.4.10 Servo Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit)

This subsection describes the initialization of digital servo parameters performed, for example, at the time
of field tuning of the machine tool.
Procedure for servo parameter setting

Procedure
3 Press function key then vertical soft key [SERVO PARAM]. The following screen appears:
- 849 -
Fig. 12.4.10 Servo parameter setting screen (15-inch display unit)
4 With the page keys and cursor keys , move the cursor to the
position of data to be set or modified.
5 Key in a desired value then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
12.4.11 Servo Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit)

Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set.
Procedure for servo tuning

Procedure
3 Press function key then vertical soft key [SERVO PARAM].
4 Press vertical soft key [SERVO TUNE] to select the servo tuning screen. The servo tuning screen
appears:
Fig. 12.4.11 Servo tuning screen (15-inch display unit)

- 850 -
5 With the page keys and cursor keys , move the cursor to the
position of data to be set or modified.
6 Key in a desired value then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
12.4.12 Color Setting Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)

Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen.
Displaying the color setting screen

Procedure
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display vertical soft key [COLOR].
3 Press vertical soft key [COLOR] to display the color setting screen.
Fig. 12.4.12 Color setting screen (15-inch display unit)
Procedure for operating the color setting screen

- Modifying the color (color palette values)
1 The following horizontal soft keys are displayed:
2 Move the cursor to a color number whose color palette values are to be modified.
The current color palette value set for each primary color is displayed.
3 Select a primary color whose setting is to be modified, with the corresponding horizontal soft key
[RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
More than one primary color can be selected at the same time.
Each time horizontal soft key [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] is pressed, the operation soft key
toggles between selection and deselection.
4 Select horizontal soft key [BRIGHT] or [DARK] to modify the brightness of the selected prime
color(s).
- 851 -
- Storing the color (color palette values)

The set color palette values can be stored.
1 Press horizontal soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area.
COLOR1 Standard color data parameters (Nos. 6581 to 6595)

COLOR2 Parameters (Nos. 10421 to 10435)
COLOR3 Parameters (Nos. 10461 to 10475)
2 Press horizontal soft key [MEMORY]. The horizontal soft key display switches to the following:
3 Pressing horizontal soft key [EXEC] stores the current color palette settings in the selected area.
Pressing horizontal soft key [CAN] or the leftmost key does not store the current color palette
settings in the selected area.
- Calling the color (color palette values)

1 Press horizontal soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area where color
palette values are stored.
2 Press horizontal soft key [RECALL]. The horizontal soft key display switches to the following:
3 Pressing horizontal soft key [EXEC] calls the color palette values from the selected area to enable
the color to be modified. This operation is invalid if no color palette values are stored.
Pressing horizontal soft key [CAN] or the leftmost key does not call the color palette values from the
selected area.
NOTE
1 Immediately after the power is turned on, the settings of COLOR1 (parameters)
are used for display. If nothing is stored for COLOR1, the default colors are used
for display.
2 Do not modify the color setting data parameters directly by MDI key input. When
modifying the standard color data, be sure to perform a storage operation on the
color setting screen.
12.4.13 Displaying Memory Data (15/19-inch Display Unit)

The contents of the CNC memory can be displayed starting at a specified address.
Displaying memory data

Procedure
1 Set bit 0 (MEM) of parameter No. 8950 to 1 to display the memory contents display screen.
3 Press vertical soft key [MEMORY].
The following screen appears:
- 852 -
Fig. 12.4.13 Memory contents display screen (15-inch display unit)
4 Key in a desired address (hexadecimal) then press horizontal soft key [ADDRES SEARCH].
Starting at the specified address, 256-byte data is displayed.
(Example: When you input 100000 then press [ADDRES SEARCH], data is displayed starting at
100000H.)
5 Display data can be switched by using page keys and and cursor keys , ,
, and/or .
6 By pressing horizontal soft key [BYTE], [WORD], [LONG], or [DOUBLE], select a data type to be
displayed.
Explanation
A memory data display format can be selected from the following four options:
Byte display (1 byte in hexadecimal)

Word display (2 bytes in hexadecimal)
Long display (4 bytes in hexadecimal)
Double display (8 bytes in decimal: Double precision floating-point display)
One screen displays 256-byte memory data.
NOTE
1 When an address is input, "H" for representing "hexadecimal" need not be
specified at the end of the address. If H is added, a warning is displayed to
indicate that the format is invalid.
2 When word display is selected as the display format, an input address is
rounded to a multiple of 2 bytes. When long display or double display is selected,
an input address is rounded to a multiple of 4 bytes.
- 853 -
WARNING
1 If a memory address that must not be accessed in address search is input, a
system alarm is issued.
When making an address search, check that the address is accessible and that
the address is input correctly.
2 This function is designed for maintenance, and must not be used by general
users.
12.4.14 Parameter Tuning Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)

The parameter tuning screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the
following:
1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine is started up are collectively
displayed to facilitate start-up of the machine.
2 The servo tuning screen is displayed for smooth tuning.
The parameter tuning screen consists of a menu screen and several setting screens.
12.4.14.1 Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item

(15/19-inch display unit)
The parameter tuning menu screen displays the following items:
[START UP]
• SYSTEM SETTING
• AXIS SETTING
• FSSB (SV AMP)
• FSSB (SP AMP)
• FSSB (AXIS)
• SERVO SETTING
• MISCELLANY
[TUNING]
• SERVO TUNING
On the parameter tuning menu screen, one of the displayed items can be selected to display the
corresponding screen. From each setting screen, you can return to the menu screen by performing a
horizontal soft key operation.
NOTE
Displaying the menu screen and selecting a setting screen

Procedure
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "ENABLED". For details, see the procedure for
"PARAMETER WRITE" in Subsection, “Displaying and Setting Parameters (15/19-inch Display
Unit)”.
- 854 -
4 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times then press vertical soft key [PARAM TUNING].
The following screen appears:
Fig. 12.4.14.1 (a) Parameter tuning menu screen (15-inch display unit)
5 Move the cursor to a desired item by pressing cursor key or .

6 Press horizontal soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the selected screen.
Returning to the menu screen

Procedure
1 Press horizontal soft key [SELECT] on the parameter tuning menu screen. The screen and soft keys
shown below (Fig. 12.4.14.1 (b)) are displayed. (The screen below (Fig. 12.4.14.1 (b)) is displayed
when "AXIS SETTING" is selected.)
Fig. 12.4.14.1 (b) Axis setting screen (15-inch display unit)
- 855 -
2 Press horizontal soft key [MENU].

The screen display returns to the parameter tuning menu screen.
3 Upon completion of parameter setting, switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to
"DISABLED".
NOTE
Part of the setting screens can be displayed also by using a vertical soft key for
chapter selection. When these screens are displayed using the vertical soft key
for chapter selection, it becomes impossible to return to the parameter tuning
menu screen.
Explanation
- Items displayed with [START UP]
The items of [START UP] indicate the screens for setting the minimum required parameters for starting
up the machine.
Table 12.4.14.1 (a) Items displayed with [START UP]
SYSTEM SETTING Screen for setting CNC parameters related to the entire system configuration
Screen for setting CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and
AXIS SETTING
FSSB (SV AMP) FSSB servo amplifier setting screen
FSSB (AXIS) FSSB axis setting screen
SERVO SETTING Servo setting screen
Screen for setting parameters related to the allowable number of M code digits
MISCELLANY
and whether to display the servo setting and spindle tuning screens
NOTE
Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.
- Items displayed with [TUNING]

The items of [TUNING] indicate the screens for servo, spindle, and high-speed high-precision machining
tuning.
Table 12.4.14.1 (b) Items displayed with [TUNING]

SERVO TUNING Servo tuning screen
NOTE
- 856 -
12.4.14.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15/19-inch

display unit)
This screen enables the parameters related to the entire system configuration to be displayed and modified.
The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by FANUC).
Display and setting

Procedure
1 Move the cursor to [SYSTEM SETTING] by pressing cursor key or on the parameter
tuning menu screen described in Subsection, “Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item
(15/19-inch display unit)”.
2 Press horizontal soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the screen and horizontal soft
keys shown below.
Fig. 12.4.14.2 Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to a parameter number to be set or displayed, according to one of the methods
below.
• Input the desired parameter number, then press horizontal soft key [NO.SRH].
• Move the cursor to the desired parameter number by pressing page key or , and

A brief description of the parameter where the cursor is placed is provided at the bottom of the
screen. However, no description is provided when the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit
parameters.
4 Input desired data then press the key on the MDI unit to set the parameter.
5 Press horizontal soft key [INIT]. The standard value (recommended by FANUC) for the item
selected by the cursor is displayed in the key input buffer. Pressing horizontal soft key [EXEC] in
this state initializes the item to the standard value.
6 Press horizontal soft key [GROUP INIT]. A message asking whether to set the group standard values
is displayed on the screen. Pressing horizontal soft key [EXEC] in this state inputs all of the standard
values of the group.
- 857 -
NOTE
1 If the cursor is placed on a parameter that has no standard value assigned, no
standard value is input even when [INIT] is pressed.
2 When the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit parameters, the multiple bits
can be input simultaneously. When [INIT] is pressed in this state, the key input
buffer displays the standard values for the bits where the cursor is placed. If a bit
has no standard value assigned, "*" is displayed for the bit, and no value is input
for the bit.
3 When [GROUP INIT] is pressed, those parameters that have no standard values
assigned are not initialized.
12.4.14.3 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) (15/19-inch display

unit)
This screen enables the CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and
acceleration/deceleration to be displayed and set. The parameters displayed can be divided into four
groups:
(Basic) group : The parameters related to basic settings are displayed.
(Coordinate) group : The parameters related to coordinates are displayed.
(Feedrate) group : The parameters related to feedrate are displayed.
(Acceleration/deceleration) group : The parameters related to acceleration/deceleration are displayed.
The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by FANUC). For the display and
setting procedure, see the description of the parameter tuning screen (axis setting) in Subsection,
“Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15/19-inch display unit)”.
Fig. 12.4.14.3 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) (15-inch display unit)
- 858 -
12.4.14.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB servo amplifier setting

screen (15/19-inch display unit)
From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details
of the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen, see the description of the FSSB servo amplifier setting screen
in Subsection, “FSSB Setting” in the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64483EN-1).
Fig. 12.4.14.4 FSSB servo amplifier setting screen (15-inch display unit)
12.4.14.5 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen

From the parameter tuning screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB
axis setting screen, see the description of the FSSB axis setting screen in Subsection, “FSSB Setting” in
the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64483EN-1).
Fig. 12.4.14.5 FSSB axis setting screen (15-inch display unit)

- 859 -
12.4.14.6 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen (15/19-inch

display unit)
From the parameter tuning screen, the servo setting screen can be displayed. For details of the servo
setting screen, see the Subsection, “Servo Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit)”.
Fig. 12.4.14.6 Servo setting screen (15-inch display unit)
12.4.14.7 Parameter tuning screen (miscellaneous settings)

The parameters related to the allowable number of M code digits and whether to display the servo setting
and spindle tuning screens can be displayed and modified. Moreover, the parameters can be initialized to
the standard values (recommended by FANUC).
For the display and setting procedure, see the Subsection, “Parameter tuning screen (system setting)
(15/19-inch display unit)”.
Fig. 12.4.14.7 Parameter tuning screen (Miscellaneous setting) (15-inch display unit)
- 860 -
12.4.14.8 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen (15/19-inch

display unit)
From the parameter tuning screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo
tuning screen, see the Subsection, “Servo Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit)”.
Fig. 12.4.14.8 Servo tuning screen (15-inch display unit)
12.4.15 Periodic Maintenance Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)

Periodic maintenance screens are used for managing consumables (such as the backlight of a LCD unit
and backup batteries). By setting the name of a consumable, its life time, and the method for counting
down the life time, the life of the consumable can be counted down in the appropriate method set for the
consumable, and the remaining life time can be displayed.
With these screens, the user can easily manage consumables that require periodic replacement.
The total number of item that can be managed is 10 in all path.
Explanation
There are four periodic maintenance screens: the status screen, the setting screen, the machine menu
screen, and the NC menu screen.
Status screen : Item names, remaining times, and count statuses are displayed, and item names
are set.
Setting screen : Life times, remaining times, count types (count-down method), and path number
(in case of multi-path system) are set.
Machine menu screen : The names of consumables in the machine can be registered.
NC menu screen : The names of consumables in the NC are already registered.
Using periodic maintenance screens

<1> Referencing a periodic maintenance screen
Display the status screen. For the meanings of items on the status screen, see Item, “Status screen”.
<2> Adding the name of a new consumable item to a periodic maintenance screen or editing an existing
consumable item on the screen
The name of a consumable item can be added or edited on the machine menu screen. For details, see
Item, “Machine menu screen”.
- 861 -
<3> Adding or editing a life time, remaining time, and a method of counting down the remaining time for
a consumable on a periodic maintenance screen
A life time and remaining time can be added or edited on the setting screen. For details, see Item,
“Setting screen”.
<4> Newly displaying the item name and remaining time of a consumable on a periodic maintenance
screen.
1 Setting an item name
Select the item name of a consumable to be displayed from the machine menu screen or NC
menu screen, or enter the name using the MDI keys. For the procedure, see Item, “Item name”
in “Status screen”.
2 Setting a life time, remaining time, and count type
Select the life time, remaining time, and count type of a consumable to be displayed from the
setting screen. For the procedure, see Item, “Remaining time” in “Status screen”.
Procedure for displaying a periodic maintenance screen

2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times to display [PERIOD MAINTE].
3 Press vertical soft key [PERIOD MAINTE] to display the periodic maintenance screen.
Status screen
When vertical soft key [STATUS] is pressed, the status screen is displayed. The status screen shows the
item names, count statuses, and remaining times of managed consumables.
Fig. 12.4.15 (a) Status screen (15-inch display unit)
- Item name
As the item name, set the name of a consumable to be managed by periodic maintenance. To set an item
name, select a name from the machine menu screen or NC menu screen, or directly enter the name using
the MDI keys.
Setting an item name from a menu screen

1 On the status screen, move the cursor to the name of the item to be set, and press horizontal soft key
[ENTRY].
2 Press vertical soft key [MACHINE] or [NC] to display the machine menu screen or NC menu
screen.
- 862 -
3 Move the cursor to an item name registered on the menu screen, and press horizontal soft key
[SELECT] then [EXEC] successively.
4 The screen display returns to the status screen, and the item name selected on the menu screen is
added to the status screen.
Initially, there is no item name set on the machine menu screen, so item names must be registered in
advance. For the registration method, see the description of the procedure for registering item names on
the machine menu screen.
Setting an item name using the MDI keys

1 Type the alphanumeric characters to be input, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT].
2 The entered item name is registered on the status screen.
When horizontal soft key [+INPUT] is pressed instead of horizontal soft key [INPUT], the entered
characters can be added to an existing item name.
When typing 2-byte characters, type "*" before and after the character codes. The 2-byte character codes
must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE".)
An item name to be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters
only; or it must be up to 12 characters long if it consists of 2-byte characters only.
Example: To register "LCD バックライト", enter the following:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE*_
NOTE
characters is registered, the warning "DATA OUT OF RANGE" may be output.
Deleting an item name

To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press horizontal soft key [ERASE],
then press horizontal soft key [EXEC].
When an item name is deleted, its life time, remaining time, and count type are deleted at the same time.
- Remaining time
As the remaining time, the period of time left until the time for replacement is reached by count down
operation is displayed.
If the percentage of the remaining time to the life time has reached to the value (%) specified by
parameter No. 8911, or smaller, the remaining time is displayed in red.
Setting the remaining time

1 On the status screen, place the cursor on an item for which the remaining time is to be set (the item
name must have been set in advance).
2 Press horizontal soft key [CHANGE].
3 The screen display changes to the setting screen.
4 Set the life time, remaining time, and count type. For the setting method and other information, see
Item, “Setting screen”.
NOTE
On the status screen, the remaining time and life time cannot be set.
These items must be set on the setting screen.
- Count status
The count status is indicated on the left side of the item number as follows:
- 863 -
Indication Count status

Blank Counting stopped
@ Counting in progress
* Life expired
Setting screen
On the setting screen, the life time, remaining time, count type, and path number of a managed
consumable are set.
Fig. 12.4.15 (b) Setting screen (15-inch display unit)
Display procedure
1 Press horizontal soft key [CHANGE].
- Life time
Set the life time of a consumable.
Move the cursor to an existing item, type a life time, then press horizontal soft key [INPUT] (or the
key). The life time is then set, and the same value is set also as the remaining time.
At this time, "------" is indicated in the count type field.
When horizontal soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added to the life time already set.
The same value as the added value is added also to the remaining time.
A value ranging from 0 to 65535 (in hours) can be set.
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name is not registered, the
warning "EDIT REJECTED" is issued.
2 If a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning "DATA IS OUT OF
RANGE" is issued.
3 If horizontal soft keys [ERASE] and [TYPE] is pressed, the warning "EDIT
REJECTED" is issued.
- Remaining time
The period of time left until the time for replacement is reached by count down operation is indicated.
- 864 -
If the percentage of the remaining time to the life time has reached the value (%) specified by parameter
No. 8911, or smaller, the remaining time is displayed in red.
Move the cursor to the remaining time of a target registered number, type a remaining time, then press
horizontal soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The remaining time is then set.
When horizontal soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added to the remaining time
already set.
A value ranging from 0 to (life time) can be set.
When horizontal soft key [ERASE] then horizontal soft key [EXEC] are pressed, the same value as the
life time is set.
NOTE
2 When a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning “DATA IS OUT
OF RANGE” is issued.
3 If horizontal soft key [TYPE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is
issued.
- Count type
As the count type, select the way of counting.
Place the cursor on the count type of a target registration number, then press horizontal soft key [TYPE].
Count types are displayed as horizontal soft keys as shown below. Select one of these horizontal soft keys,
Horizontal soft key Meaning Indication
[NO CNT] Counting is not performed (stopped) ——————
[ALL] Counting is performed at all times All times
[POWER ON] Counting is performed when power is on. When power is on
[RUN] Counting is performed when operation is in progress. When operation is in progress
[CUT] Counting is performed when cutting is being performed. When cutting is being performed
NOTE
2 Horizontal soft keys [INPUT] and [+INPUT] have no effect.
3 When counting is performed at all times, a 24-hour error is generated in leap
year.
4 If horizontal soft key [ERASE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is
issued.
- Path number
When [RUN] or [CUT] is set to the count type in multi path, path number can be set.
Make the cursor to the count type of a target registration number, then input path number and press soft
key [INPUT].
The setting range is 0-(max path number).
When the specified path is operating or cutting, counting is performed.
If 0 is set, when either of path is operating or cutting, counting is perfomed.
- 865 -
NOTE
1 If [NO CNT], [ALL] or [POWER ON] is set to count type, “--” is displayed. In this
case, if the setting is operated, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
2 If the setting is beyond the valid data range, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF
RANGE” is issued.
3 If soft key [TYPE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
4 If soft key [ERASE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued. The
soft key [+INPUT] is invalid.
Registration from a program

The item name, life time, remaining time, count type and path number can be registered in the status
screen and the setting screen by executing the program of the following format.
Format
G10 L60 Px [n] Aa Rr Qpt

X : Registration number
n : Item name, format: [alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters]
a : life time
r : remaining time
p : path number
t : count type
The meaning of the value of the count type is as follow.
0 : NO COUNT
1 : ALL TIMES
2 : POWER ON
3 : RUNNING
4 : CUTTING
The range of the path number is 0 – (max path number).
EX.)
Q24 : The path number is 2, and the count type is “CUTTING”
Q103 : The path number is 10, and the count type is “RUNNING”
- 866 -
Machine menu screen

On the machine menu screen, the names of consumables of the machine are registered. From this screen,
item names can be added to the status screen. For the method of addition to the status screen, see the
description of the status screen.
Fig. 12.4.15 (c) Machine menu screen (15-inch display unit)

1 When the status screen is displayed, press vertical soft key [MACHINE].
On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two methods:
• Registration from a program
• Registration using the MDI keys
- Registration from a program

By executing a program having the following format, an item name can be registered in the menu of the
machine:
Format
G10 L61 Px [n]

X Registration number
n Item name, format: [alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters]
- Registration using the MDI keys

An item name can be registered on the menu screen of the machine by typing the item name in the format
shown below on the machine menu screen, then pressing horizontal soft key [INPUT] (or the key).
When horizontal soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the typed characters can be added to an already registered
item name.
Format
Alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters
- 867 -
Two-byte codes must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE CHARACTER
CODE TABLE".)
When typing 2-byte characters, type an asterisk "*" before and after the character codes. An item name to
be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters only; or it must be
up to 12 characters long if it consists of 2-byte characters only.
Example:
To register "LCD バックライト", enter the following:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE*_
NOTE
characters is registered, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” may be output.
3 When a blank item name is selected on the machine screen, the warning “EDIT
REJECTED” is issued.
To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press horizontal soft key [ERASE],
NC menu screen
From this screen, an item name can be registered on the status screen. For the method of registration to
the status screen, see the description of the status screen.
Fig. 12.4.15 (d) NC menu screen (15-inch display unit)

1 When the status screen is displayed, press vertical soft key [NC].
NOTE
On the NC screen, the registration, deletion, and I/O of item names cannot be
performed.
When a blank item name is selected, a blank is set.
- 868 -
12.4.16 System Configuration Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)

The system configuration screen provides information about the types of installed hardware and software.
Procedure for displaying the screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key , then press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times until vertical
soft key [SYSTEM] is displayed.
2 Press vertical soft key [SYSTEM]. The system configuration screen is displayed.
There are two types of system configuration screens: the hardware configuration screen and the software
configuration screen. The screen display can switch between these screens by using and .
When vertical soft key [SERVO INFO] is pressed, information about the connected servo system is
displayed.
Fig. 12.4.16 (a) System configuration screen (15-inch display unit)
Hardware configuration screen

This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC.
Fig. 12.4.16 (b) Hardware configuration screen

- 869 -
Software configuration screen

This screen shows the names and series/editions of the software used by the NC.
Fig. 12.4.16 (c) Software configuration screen
Servo information screen

When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID information of the connected servo devices (servo
motors and servo amplifiers) can be displayed on the NC.
Displaying the screen

1 When the system configuration screen is displayed, press vertical soft key [SERVO INFO].
2 The servo information screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.4.16 (d) Servo information screen
- 870 -
By pressing the function key , data such as alarms, alarm history, external operator message, and
external operator message history data can be displayed.
For details of alarms and alarm history, see Sections, “ALARM DISPLAY” and “ALARM HISTORY
DISPLAY”. Refer to the machine tool builder's manual for the external message display.
12.5.1 External Operator Message History

External operator message can be stored as history. And, stored history can be seen on the external
operator message history screen.
Screen display
To display the external operator message history screen, set bit 2 (OMH) of parameter No. 3112 to 1.
Procedure
2 Press soft key [MESSAGE HISTRY]. The external operator message history screen is displayed.
3 The screen display can be changed to the previous page and the next page by using page keys
and .
Erasing history data from the external operator message history screen
Procedure
1 Display the external operator message history screen.
3 Press soft key [CLEAR]. The external operator message history data is then erased.
- 871 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OMH
[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit
#2 OMH The external operator message history screen is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 HMC

[Data type] Bit
#0 HMC The contents of the external operator message history:

0: Cannot be erased.
1: Can be erased.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354 is
set to 1.
#6 MS0
#7 MS1 Set the combination of the number of characters and the number of messages to be
preserved in the external operator message history.
Parameter Maximum number of characters Number of messages

MS0=0 MS1=0 255 8
MS0=1 MS1=0 200 10
MS0=0 MS1=1 100 18
MS0=1 MS1=1 50 32
NOTE
1 Although up to 255 characters can be specified for each external
operator message, you can use the combination of bits 6 (MS0)
and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113 to limit the number of
characters and select the number of messages to be preserved in
the external operator message history.
2 The settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113
take effect the next time the power is turned on. The external
operator message history is erased at that time.
3 Even though you change the settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1)
of parameter No. 3113, the alarm PW0000, "POWER MUST BE
OFF" is not issued. You must however turn on the power again
before the new settings can take effect.
- 872 -
NOTE
4 If text (such as single-byte katakana or kanji characters) is entered
in character code, the number of characters recorded in the
external operator message history may be smaller than the
maximum number of characters set by bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of
parameter No. 3113.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3196 HOM

[Data type] Bit
#6 HOM A history of external operator messages and macro messages #3006 is:
0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11354 SOH SAH

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#2 SAH When the storage capacity for history data is exceeded due to non-alarm history, alarm
history will be:
0: Erased.
1: Erased, except the most recent 50 items of history data.
#3 SOH When the storage capacity for history data is exceeded due to data other than external
operator message history, external operator message history will be:
0: Erased.
1: Retained.
When this parameter is set to 1, the number of retained external operator message history
is determined by the settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113.
NOTE
1 The settings of bit 2 (SAH) of parameter No. 11354 and bit 3 (SOH) of
parameter No. 11354 will be effective the next time the power is turned
on. At this time, all history data (operation history, alarm history, and
external operator message history) will be erased.
2 With the settings of bit 2 (SAH) of parameter No. 11354 and bit 3 (SOH)
of parameter No. 11354, the number of history data items that can be
retained varies. The number of history data items that can be recorded as
follows:
SAH=0, SOH=0 . . . Approx. 8000 items
(*) The numbers of items above are those if only key operation history is
recorded.
- 873 -
12.6 SWITCHING BETWEEN MULTI-PATH DISPLAY AND

SINGLE-PATH DISPLAY FUNCTION
Overview
In a multi-path system, the screen can be switched between simultaneous multi-path display and
single-path display by soft key operation.
This function allows easy switching between the single-path display which contains much information
and the simultaneous multi-path display which enables multiple path information to be checked at a time.
Details
The screen can be switched between the simultaneous multi-path display and single-path display by soft
key operation.
In the single-path display, the screen for the path selected by the path selection signal is displayed.
In the simultaneous multi-path display, the screen for the simultaneous display path group including the
path selected by the path selection signal is displayed.
This function is enabled with the following screens which can display information of multiple paths
simultaneously when bit 3 (MTS) of parameter No. 11355.
• Actual position display screen

(Absolute position display screen, relative position display screen, overall position display screen)
• Program check screen
• Tool path graphic screen
• Program edit screen
NOTE
For the setting of the simultaneous multi-path display, refer to the description of
parameters Nos. 13131 and 13132 in the Parameter Manual (B-64490EN).
Procedure (8.4/10.4-inch display unit)

The procedure is explained using the current position display screen as an example.
Actual position screen (multi-path simultaneous display) appears.
3 Press continuous menu key until soft key [SINGLE PATH] appears.
- 874 -
4 Press soft key [SINGLE PATH].

The single-path display appears as shown below:
5 Press soft key [MULTI PATHS]. The multi-path display appears.
Procedure (15/19-inch display unit)

The procedure is explained using the current position display screen as an example.
Actual position screen (multi-path simultaneous display) appears.
- 875 -
2 Press horizontal soft key [SINGLE PATH].

The single-path display appears as shown below:
3 Press horizontal soft key [MULTI PATHS]. The multi-path display appears.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11355 MTS

[Data type] Bit
#3 MTS The function for switching between simultaneous multi-path display and single-path
display is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 876 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11304 PGR

[Data type] Bit
#0 PGR When the path select signal is changed, the screen of the multi path simultaneous display
group:
0: Is not switched.
1: Is switched to the display group including the selected path.
13131 Group number for simultaneous display of multiple paths

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 10
This parameter sets a group for simultaneous display on one screen in a multi-path
system.
The paths set to belong to the same group are displayed on one screen.
If the values for all paths are set to 0, the simultaneous multi-path display function is
disabled.
NOTE
When specifying groups, specify group numbers not less than 1
successively.
On 8.4-inch and 10.4-inch display units, up to three paths can be
specified for simultaneous display.
On a 15-inch and 19-inch display units, up to four paths can be
13132 Simultaneous multi-path display order number

[Valid data range] 1 to number of paths included in a simultaneous multi-path display group
This parameter sets the display order of a path defined to belong to a simultaneous
multi-path display group.
Set the order, using numbers ranging from 1 to the number of paths included in the
simultaneous multi-path display group.
NOTE
Specify successive order numbers not less than 1 for the paths
defined to belong to a group.
12.7 FIVE AXES DISPLAY IN ONE SCREEN FOR THE 8.4-INCH

DISPLAY UNIT
The positions for up to five axes can be displayed simultaneously on one screen on a 8.4-inch display unit.
This function is enabled when bit 4 (9DE) of parameter No. 11350 is set to 1.
This function is enabled with the following screens:
• Absolute position display screen
• Relative position display screen
- 877 -
• Overall position display screen

• Handle interruption screen
• Operating monitor screen
• Program check screen
• Offset screen
• Macro screen
• Software operator's panel screen
• 4th/5th axis offset screen
Screen display
As shown in Fig. 12.7 (a), the coordinates for five axes are displayed on one screen on a 8.4-inch display
unit.
Fig. 12.7 (a) Absolute position display screen
When this function is enabled with the overall position display screen and handle interruption screen, the
number of types of coordinates displayed on one screen decreases. The types of displayed coordinates can
be changed by pressing MDI key and function key [ALL] or [HANDLE].
Fig. 12.7 (b) and Fig. 12.7 (c) show the displayed screens.
- 878 -
Overall position display screen
Fig. 12.7 (b) Overall position display screen
- 879 -
Handle interruption screen
Fig. 12.7 (c) Handle interruption screen
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11350 9DE

[Data type] Bit
#4 9DE On 8.4-inch display unit, the maximum number of axes that can be displayed on a single
screen is:
0: 4.
1: 5.
- 880 -
12.8 PATH NAME EXPANSION DISPLAY FUNCTION

The path name expansion display function enlarges the path name displayed at the upper right of the
screen, which makes easy to check the currently selected path.
Explanation
When this function is enabled, the items on the screen are displayed as follows:
• The path name displayed in the status area is enlarged and displayed at the upper right of the screen.
Only the alphanumeric characters in an arbitrary path name are displayed when enlarged (see (1) in
Fig. 12.8 (a)). For the display colors, see the following paragraph.
• The O and N numbers are always displayed in small characters as shown in (2) in Fig. 12.8 (a).
The displayed program names consist of the following number of characters:
10.4-inch display unit: 17 characters (When a program number consists of more than 17 characters,
the first 16 characters and a tilde (~) are displayed.)
15-inch display unit: 32 characters (Maximum number of characters of an arbitrary program name)
• The path name displayed in the status area is displayed as usual (see (3) in Fig. 12.8 (a)).
This function is enabled by setting bit 2 (PNE) of parameter No. 11350.

With all screens other than those for the C Language Executor and macro executor (conversational
macro), this function is available.
(2) (1)
(3)
Fig. 12.8 (a) Sample screen when the path name expansion display function is enabled (offset screen)
Display character color

The following colors specified on the color setting screen are used for the enlarged display characters:
Character color: No. 3 color (title color)

Background color: No. 10 color (title background color)
The path name can be displayed in reverse video by setting bit 0 (PNI) of parameter No. 11352.
- 881 -
Table 12.8 (a) Enlarged display character colors and parameters

Character color Background color
Bit 0 (PNI) of parameter 0: A normal display No. 3 color No. 10 color
No. 11352 1: A reverse display No. 10 color No. 3 color
No. 3 color No. 10 color
Fig. 12.8 (b) Character color numbers for the path name expansion display function
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11350 PNE

[Data type] Bit
#2 PNE Path name expansion display function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
2 This parameter is invalid if the number of paths is 1.
3 It is effective to 10.4/15/19-inch display units.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11352 PNI

[Data type] Bit path
#0 PNI The display by the path name enlarged display function is:
0: A normal display.
1: A reverse display.
- 882 -
NOTE
This parameter is effective to 10.4/15/19-inch display units.
3141 Path name (1st character)
3142 Path name (2nd character)
3143 Path name (3rd character)
3144 Path name (4th character)

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] See the character-code correspondence table.
Specify a path name with codes.
Any character string consisting of alphanumeric characters, katakana characters, and
special characters with a maximum length of seven characters can be displayed as a series
name.
NOTE
1 For characters and codes, see Appendix, “CHARACTER CODE
LIST”.
2 When 0 is set in parameter No. 3141, PATH1(,PATH2...) are
displayed as path names.
3 When optional path name display is enlarged (with bit 2 (PNE) of
parameter No. 11350 set to 1), only alphanumeric characters are
displayed. If any other type of characters are set, spaces are
displayed instead.
12.9 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC

SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION
Overview
Keeping the same characters displayed in the same positions on the screen for a long time will shorten the
life of the LCD.
To prevent this, the CNC screen can be erased. The screen erasure function allows the user to perform a
key operation to erase the screen. The automatic screen erasure function erases the screen automatically
when there has been no key operation for a parameter-set period of time.
Screen erasure function

When 0 is set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen can be erased by pressing the key and any
function key (such as or ) at the same time. The CNC screen can be displayed again by
pressing any function key.
- 883 -
Automatic screen erasure function

When there has been no key operation for a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen
is erased automatically. The CNC screen is displayed again by pressing a key.
- Screen erasure by the automatic screen erasure function

If the following conditions are all satisfied for the time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC
screen is erased.
Conditions for automatically erasing the CNC screen
• Parameter No. 3123 ≠ 0
• None of the following key operations is performed.
MDI keys
Soft keys
External key input
• No alarm is issued.
- Redisplay of the screen by the automatic screen erasure function

If one of the following conditions is satisfied when the CNC screen is off, the CNC screen is displayed
again:
Conditions for redisplaying the CNC screen
• One of the following key operations is performed.
MDI keys
Soft keys
External key input
• An alarm is issued.
- Screen erasure by using the key + function key

When a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 3123, the screen is not erased with the key and a
function key.
- Set time
Only the time set in parameter No. 3123 for path 1 is valid.
- Alarm in another path

When an alarm is issued in any of the paths, the screen is not erased.
Parameter
3123 Time required before a screen saver is activated
[Input type] Setting input

[Unit of data] min
After a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123 passes without key operation, the NC
screen is erased automatically. Pressing a key causes the NC screen to reappear.
NOTE
1 Setting 0 disables automatic screen erasure.
2 This function cannot be used together with manual screen erasure.
If 1 or a larger value is set in this parameter, manual screen
erasure is disabled.
- 884 -
12.10 LOAD METER SCREEN

Overview
The servo load meters can be displayed in place of the modal code display part and the remaining travel
distance part of the current position display on the program check screen.
This function is enabled only when the 10.4-inch display unit is used.
12.10.1 Single-path Display

Screen layout
In the single-path display mode, the servo load meter is displayed in place of the remaining travel
distance display of the total position display.
Fig. 12.10.1 Servo load meter
Screen switching
The servo load meter is displayed by pressing soft key [MONITOR] on the left side of the screen.
- 885 -
12.10.2 Two-path Display and Three-path Display

Screen layout
In the two- or three-path display mode, the modal information display part on the program check screen
can be replaced by the servo load meter.
Fig. 12.10.2 Servo load meter screen
Screen switching
By pressing soft key [LOAD METER], the screen display can be switched among the modal information
display and servo load meter display.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3192 PLD

[Data type] Bit
#7 PLD When the current position is indicated for a path, and when the program check screen is
displayed in a two- or three-path system, the function for displaying servo load meters
and spindle load meters is :
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 886 -
12.11 DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER/NAME,

SEQUENCE NUMBER, AND STATUS, AND WARNING
MESSAGES FOR DATA SETTING OR INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATION
The program number, program name, sequence number, and current CNC status are always displayed on
the screen except when the power is turned on, a system alarm occurs.
If data setting or the input/output operation is incorrect, the CNC does not accept the operation and
displays a warning message.
This section describes the display of the program number, sequence number, and status, and warning
messages displayed for incorrect data setting or input/output operation.
Screens of a 10.4-inch display unit
12.11.1 Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and

Sequence Number
The number and name of the program currently selected or currently executed and the current sequence
number are indicated in the upper right part as shown below.
Program number Sequence number
Fig. 12.11.1 (a) Program number and sequence number (10.4-inch display unit)
In the EDIT mode, the number and name of the program currently edited in the foreground are indicated.
When 10.4-inch display unit is used, the program number that is displayed in the upper right of the screen
is changed according to the digit of the program number.
When the program number is 4-digit or less, “O” plus a 4-digit numeric is displayed.
Fig. 12.11.1 (b) Program number is 4-digit or less
When the program number is 5-digit or more, “O” plus a 8-digit numeric is displayed.
- 887 -
Fig. 12.11.1 (c) Program number is 5-digit or more
12.11.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or

Input/Output Operation
The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program editing state are displayed on the
next to last line on the screen allowing the operator to readily understand the operation condition of the
system. If data setting or the input/output operation is incorrect, the CNC does not accept the operation
and a warning message is displayed on the next to last line of the screen. This prevents invalid data
setting and input/output errors.
Explanation
- Description of each display
(9)
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE
(1)
(2) (3) (4) (6) (7) (8)

(5) : (10) :
(5) is displayed in the (10) is displayed at the position
area for (3) and (4). where (8) is now displayed.
Fig. 12.11.2 Positions of status indications

(1) Current mode
MDI : Manual data input, MDI operation
MEM : Automatic operation (memory operation)
RMT : Automatic operation (DNC operation, or such like)
EDIT : Memory editing
HND : Manual handle feed
JOG : Jog feed
INC : Manual incremental feed
REF : Manual reference position return
**** : Indicates a mode other than the above.
(2) Automatic operation status

**** : Reset (When the power is turned on or the state in which program execution has
terminated and automatic operation has terminated.)
STOP : Automatic operation stop (The state in which one block has been executed and
automatic operation is stopped.)
HOLD : Feed hold (The state in which execution of one block has been interrupted and
STRT : Automatic operation start-up (The state in which the system operates automatically)
(3) Axis moving status/dwell status

MTN : Indicates that the axis is moving.
DWL : Indicates the dwell state.
*** : Indicates a state other than the above.
- 888 -
(4) State in which an auxiliary function is being executed

FIN : Indicates the state in which an auxiliary function is being executed. (Waiting for the
complete signal from the PMC)
(5) Emergency stop or reset status

--EMG-- : Indicates emergency stop.(Blinks in reversed display.)
-RESET- : Indicates that the reset signal is being received.
(6) Alarm status

ALM : Indicates that an alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)
APC : Indicates that the voltage of the backup battery of the absolute pulse coder has
decreased. (Blinks in reversed display.)
BAT : Indicates that the voltage of the lithium battery (the backup battery of the CNC) has
FAN : Indicates that the rotation speed of the fan has decreased. (Blinks in reversed display.)
PMC : Indicates that a PMC alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)
MSG : Indicates that an operator message is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)
FSB : Indicates that FSSB cable has been degraded. (Blinks in reversed display.)
LKG : Indicates that the insulation resistance value of the motor or the power line has
decreased.. (Blinks in reversed display.)
ENC : Indicates that a detector has been in abnormal status. (Blinks in reversed display.)
MNT : Indicates that a life warning of periodic maintenance function has been occurred.
(Blinks in reversed display.)
Space : Indicates a state other than the above.
(7) Current time

hh : mm : ss - Hours, minutes, and seconds
(8) Program editing status

INPUT : Indicates that data is being input.
OUTPUT : Indicates that data is being output.
SEARCH : Indicates that a search is being performed.
EDIT : Indicates that another editing operation is being performed (insertion,
modification, etc.)
LSK : Indicates that labels are skipped when data is input.
RSTR : Indicates that the program is being restarted
COMPARE : Indicates that a data comparison is being made.
WOFS : Indicates that the workpiece origin offset amount measurement mode is set.
AICC1 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control I mode.
MEM-CHK : Indicates that a program memory check is being made.
Space : Indicates that no editing operation is being performed.
(9) Warning for data setting or input/output operation

When invalid data is entered (wrong format, value out of range, etc.), when input is disabled
(wrong mode, write disabled, etc.), or when input/output operation is incorrect (wrong
mode, etc.), a warning message is displayed. When the RS232-C communication port
is being used, “CANNOT USE I/O DEVICE” is displayed. In this case, the CNC does
not accept the setting or input/output operation (retry the operation according to the
message).
Example 1)
When a parameter is entered
- 889 -
Example 2)
Example 3)
When a parameter is output to an external input/output device
(10) Tool post name

The number of a path whose status is indicated is displayed.
PATH1 : Indicates that the status being indicated is for path 1.
Other names can be used depending on the settings of parameters 3141 to 3147. The
tool post name is displayed at the position where (8) is now displayed. While the
program is edited, (8) is displayed.
- 890 -
12.11.3 Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and

Sequence Number (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The number and name of the program currently selected or currently executed and the current sequence
number are indicated in the upper right part as shown below.
Sequence number
Program number
Fig. 12.11.3 Program number and sequence number (15-inch display unit)
In the EDIT mode, the number and name of the program currently edited in the foreground are indicated.
12.11.4 Displaying the Program Name

When bit 4 (DPC) of parameter No. 11354 is set to 0, the program name (comment) of main program is
displayed between the screen title and O number.
Program name
Fig. 12.11.4 (a) Program name (15inch)

- 891 -
A program name consisting of up to 18 characters can be displayed.

If a program name is longer than 18 characters, the first 17 characters are displayed. A tilde (~) is
displayed as the 18th character, which indicates that the program name is abbreviated.
Fig. 12.11.4 (b) Program name longer than 18 characters
12.11.5 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or

Input/Output Operation (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program editing state are displayed on the
next to last line on the screen allowing the operator to readily understand the operation condition of the
system. If data setting or the input/output operation is incorrect, the CNC does not accept the operation
and a warning message is displayed on the next to last line of the screen. This prevents invalid data
setting and input/output errors.
Explanation
- Description of each display
(9)
(1)
(2) (3) (4) (6) (7) (8)
(5) : (10) :
(5) is displayed in the (10) is displayed at the position
area for (3) and (4). where (8) is now displayed.
Fig. 12.11.5 Positions of status indications
(1) Current mode

MDI : Manual data input, MDI operation
MEM : Automatic operation (memory operation)
RMT : Automatic operation (DNC operation, or such like)
EDIT : Memory editing
HND : Manual handle feed
JOG : Jog feed
INC : Manual incremental feed
REF : Manual reference position return
**** : Indicates a mode other than the above.
- 892 -
(2) Automatic operation status

**** : Reset (When the power is turned on or the state in which program execution has
terminated and automatic operation has terminated.)
STOP : Automatic operation stop (The state in which one block has been executed and
HOLD : Feed hold (The state in which execution of one block has been interrupted and
STRT : Automatic operation start-up (The state in which the system operates automatically)
(3) Axis moving status/dwell status

MTN : Indicates that the axis is moving.
DWL : Indicates the dwell state.
(4) State in which an auxiliary function is being executed

FIN : Indicates the state in which an auxiliary function is being executed. (Waiting for the
complete signal from the PMC)
(5) Emergency stop or reset status

--EMG-- : Indicates emergency stop.(Blinks in reversed display.)
-RESET- : Indicates that the reset signal is being received.
(6) Alarm status

ALM : Indicates that an alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)
APC : Indicates that the voltage of the backup battery of the absolute pulse coder has
BAT : Indicates that the voltage of the lithium battery (the backup battery of the CNC) has
FAN : Indicates that the rotation speed of the fan has decreased. (Blinks in reversed display.)
PMC : Indicates that a PMC alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)
MSG : Indicates that an operator message is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)
FSB : Indicates that FSSB cable has been degraded. (Blinks in reversed display.)
LKG : Indicates that the insulation resistance value of the motor or the power line has
ENC : Indicates that a detector has been in abnormal status. (Blinks in reversed display.)
MNT : Indicates that a life warning of periodic maintenance function has been occurred.
(Blinks in reversed display.)
Space : Indicates a state other than the above.
(7) Current time

hh : mm : ss - Hours, minutes, and seconds
(8) Program editing status

INPUT :
Indicates that data is being input.
OUTPUT :
Indicates that data is being output.
SEARCH :
Indicates that a search is being performed.
EDIT :
Indicates that another editing operation is being performed (insertion,
modification, etc.)
LSK : Indicates that labels are skipped when data is input.
RSTR : Indicates that the program is being restarted
COMPARE : Indicates that a data comparison is being made.
- 893 -
OFST : Indicates that the tool length compensation amount measurement mode is set
(for the machining center system) or that the tool length compensation amount
write mode is set (for the lathe system).
WOFS : Indicates that the workpiece origin offset amount measurement mode is set.
AICC1 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control I mode.
MEM-CHK : Indicates that a program memory check is being made.
Space : Indicates that no editing operation is being performed.
(9) Warning for data setting or input/output operation

When invalid data is entered (wrong format, value out of range, etc.), when input is disabled
(wrong mode, write disabled, etc.), or when input/output operation is incorrect (wrong
mode, etc.), a warning message is displayed. When the RS232-C communication port
is being used, “CANNOT USE I/O DEVICE” is displayed. In this case, the CNC does
not accept the setting or input/output operation (retry the operation according to the
message).
Example 1)
Example 2)
Example 3)
When a parameter is output to an external input/output device
(10) Tool post name

The number of a path whose status is indicated is displayed.
PATH1: Indicates that the status being indicated is for path 1.
Other names can be used depending on the settings of parameters 3141 to 3147. The
tool post name is displayed at the position where (8) is now displayed. While the
program is edited, (8) is displayed.
12.12 CALCULATION KEY FUNCTION
12.12.1 Overview
Calculating formula input to key-in buffer is calculated by pressing calculation key + .
- 894 -
12.12.2 Operation
- Calculation of one calculating formula
(1) Calculating formula input to key-in buffer.
(2) Calculation key + is pressed.
(3) Calculation result becomes the content of the key-in buffer.
- Calculation of two or more calculating formulas

Two or more calculating formulas can be input by delimiting calculating formula with EOB, and each
calculating formula is calculated.
Moreover, the same operation as EOB is performed when delimiting calculating formula with an alphabet
or special characters other than the function name.
(Example)
100.0/2;200.0/2;300.0/2_ → 50.0;100.0;150.0_
X350.0*3Y120.0/5;X20.0*3.5;_ → X1050.0Y24.0;X70.0;_
12.12.3 Details
- Type of numerical value
There are two about the integer type and the real number type.
(1) Integer type: Only the numerical value from 0 to 9.
(Example) 10735
(2) Real number type: Numerical value that contains decimal point.
(Example) 10.23
- Calculation result
(1) Calculation result of the integer type and the real number type becomes a real number type.
(2) Calculation result is converted into the character string within the following ranges. In case of real
number type, a value that is smaller than minimum value is rounded off.
Integer type: -999999999 to 999999999
Real number type: -999999999.0 to -0.000000001
0.0
0.000000001 to 999999999.0
- Calculating formula that can be used

(1) Arithmetic operator +, -, *, /
(2) Parentheses [ , ]
(3) Function
Table 12.12.3 Function that can be used by calculation function

Function name Type Explanation
SIN Real number type Sine（degree）
COS Real number type Cosine（degree）
TAN Real number type Tangent（degree）
ASIN Real number type Arc sine
ACOS Real number type Arc cosine
ATAN Real number type Arc tangent（two arguments）
- 895 -
SQRT Real number type Square root

ABS Real number type Absolute value
LN Real number type Natural logarithm
EXP Real number type Exponent using base e (2.718...)
Arc tangent
ATAN is described as follows.
ATAN[formula 1]/[formula 2]
Y=formula 1
X=formula 2
(Example)
ATAN[0]/[1] → 0.0
ATAN[1]/[0] → 90.0
ATAN[1]/[1] → 45.0
ATAN[-1]/[-1] → 1350.0
- Priority of calculation
(1) Function ＞ Multiplication type calculation ＞ addition type calculation
(2) The priority of calculation can be changed by parentheses.
(Example)
SIN [ [ [ 10 + 15 ] * 0.1 + 0.5 ] * 10 ]
(1)
(2) Calculation sequence
(3)
(4)
The result of (4) becomes the argument of SIN.
- Warning
The following warning messages are displayed, when an error occurs by operating calculation key
function.
Warning message Cause

FORMAT ERROR The format of the calculation formula is not correct.
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE The calculation result is out of range.
- Limitation
Calculation function cannot be used on the following screen.
- Conversational macro
- C Language Executor
- FANUC PICTURE
- 896 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION
13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION
Chapter 13, "GRAPHIC FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
13.1 OPERATION ....................................................................................................................................898

13.2 REGISTERING THE TOOL FIGURE.............................................................................................898
13.3 SPECIFYING DRAWING PARAMETERS ....................................................................................899
13.4 GRAPHIC DISPLAY SCREEN AND DRAWING .........................................................................902
13.5 EXAMPLE........................................................................................................................................905
When programming is completed, the optional graphic function can be used to check whether machining
will be performed as desired without operating the machine by drawing the programmed tool path and
machining profile on the graphic display screen. After checking the profile, perform machining.
The function has the following features to simplify locating an error in the machining program:
(i) Can draw a blank figure (workpiece).
(ii) Can draw the figure of a tool used at the position where punching is performed.
A circle, a rectangle, and a capsule can be used for drawing the tool figure. The figures of other tools
are drawn using asterisks.
(iii) Can draw a workpiece holder that holds a blank.

The operator can check whether punching is performed at the position of the workpiece holder. This
is used to ensure that the workpiece holder is not punched during machining.
(iv) Can draw a tool path.

The tool path is drawn using a dashed line for rapid traverse and a solid line for cutting feed.
(v) Can specify a drawing plane.

A drawing plane can be selected from four types. Drawing can be performed as if a blank is set in
the machine.
(vi) Checks the format of the program.

The format of the program, stored stroke limit 1, and the safety zone are checked during drawing.
- 897 -
13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64504EN/02
13.1 OPERATION
The following flowchart shows an example of drawing a programmed figure on the screen. Refer to the
flowchart if you forget the procedure.
Start
Manual reference position return is

Machine ready for machining
completed.
Record the program. Register the program in the EDIT mode.
Register the tool figure on the tool

Register the tool figure.
Specify the drawing Press the function key<GRAPH>

parameters. Then, specify the drawing range, blank
Specify the drawing length, and other necessary parameters.
parameters again if they
are incorrect.
Enter the memory mode, then press the
Execute drawing. soft key [DRAW].
Press the soft keys [(OPR)] and [START]
in that order.
Check the machining
Correct Correct
program?
Start actual machining.
Incorrect Change the screen

to a screen other
than the drawing
Correct the program. screen and press the
CYCLE START
Enter the EDIT button in the
mode and correct machine.
the program.
End
13.2 REGISTERING THE TOOL FIGURE

To draw a machining profile, register the dimensions of the tool on the tool figure registration screen.
(See “Displaying and setting items on the tool figure registration screen (for drawing figures)”.)
- 898 -
13.3 SPECIFYING DRAWING PARAMETERS

Specify the parameters for graphic drawing.
Explanation
Procedure
1 Press the function key . The graphic parameter setting screen appears. If it does not appear,
press the soft key [PARAMETER].
- 899 -
2 Move the cursor to the parameter to be changed by pressing the cursor keys.
3 Enter new data and press the key.
(a) Graphic coordinates

This parameter specifies a plane for drawing.
P=0 P=1 P=2 P=3
Y X X Y
Y Y X
X
(b) Range (Max and Min)

This parameter specifies the desired drawing range for each axis using the maximum and
minimum values. Specifying these values automatically determines the magnification for a
screen so that the drawing can be made using the whole drawing range. The center of the
drawing range matches that of the screen during drawing.
(c) Scale
This parameter specifies the screen magnification. The magnification refers to the
magnification to the center of the screen.
Specifying the drawing range in (b) automatically determines the effective magnification. To
magnify part of a figure, specify another magnification based on the automatically specified
value.
(d) Graphic center

This parameter specifies the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system whose origin
matches the center of the screen.
Specifying the drawing range in (b) automatically determines the coordinates. To magnify part
of the figure, specify other coordinates based on the automatically specified coordinates.
- 900 -
(e) Program stop
To display part of the programmed figure, specify the sequence number of the end block. Once
the figure is drawn, the sequence number is automatically canceled.
(f) Auto erase

1 : Previously drawn figures are automatically deleted when automatic operation is started in
the reset state.
0 : Previously drawn figures are not automatically deleted.
(g) Start point

When a coordinate system command, G92, is not specified in a drawing program, this
parameter specifies the drawing start position using the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate
system.
(h) Work length

This parameter specifies the blank length along the X-axis and Y-axis.
Setting this parameter draws a blank figure when the drawing screen is selected or when the
drawing soft key [ERASE] is pressed.
The end of the blank figure in the “Graphic coordinates” described in (a) is used as the origin of
the workpiece coordinate system.
(i) Rapid path

1 : A tool path for rapid traverse is drawn as a dotted line.
0 : No tool path for a rapid traverse is drawn.
(j) Holder position

This parameter specifies the position of a workpiece holder in the workpiece coordinate system.
- 901 -
Workpiece
coordinate
system
(X , Y) = (0, 0)
X1
X2
(k) Holder length

This parameter specifies the horizontal length and vertical length of a workpiece holder.
X
Workpiece
coordinate
system Y
(X , Y) = (0, 0)
NOTE
When an optional safety zone check function is provided, data items (j) and (k) for the
workpiece holder cannot be specified. Specifying the safety zone displays the figure of
the workpiece holder (That is set for #1 to #4.).
13.4 GRAPHIC DISPLAY SCREEN AND DRAWING

Explanation
Drawing screen
Press [GRAPH] key after pressing key, the following graphic display screen appears.
Be selecting this screen, tool paths and holes figures are drawable for checking NC programs.
- 902 -
Software keys, status display for drawing, and ruler

(1) Soft keys are used for drawing.
[START]key : Drawing start key
[STOP]key : Drawing stop key
[ERASE]key : Graphic display erasing key
[SEQ]key : Continuous drawing mode key
[SBK] key: Single block drawing mode key
(2) Ruler
The ruler is displayed at the lower right part of the screen. The value below shows the
length to the line (Input unit).
Drawing operation
(1) Select either MEMORY mode.
(This is the preparation for automatic operation, such as heading of a program, etc.)
(2) Depress [ERASE] key.

Depress this key when the previous graphic display is not required.
After erasing graphic display, the work sheet figure and work holder mark are drawn as shown in the
following figure.
(3) Depress [SEQ] and [START] keys (continuous drawing).

Drawing is started and continued up to the end of the NC program.
(4) Depress [SBK] and [*SEQ] keys (Single block drawing).

Operation stops after drawing one block.
Drawing is done every block each time [START] key is depressed hereafter.
(5) Depress [STOP] key

The system enters the feed hold state.
Pressing the [STOP] key during continuous drawing changes the operation to single-block drawing,
causing the system to enter the feed hold state.
To perform continuous drawing again, press the [SEQ] key, then press the [START] key.
- 903 -
Relation between drawing mode and machining operation mode

The drawing mode means a condition which is not the drawing end condition (that is, drawing in progress
or single block drawing stop condition), while the machining operation mode means the drawing end
condition.
The relation between the drawing mode and the machining operation mode is illustrated below.
Machining operation mode
In case of (1) In case of (2)
When [START] key is depressed in the Drawing terminates and the

MEMORY mode on the drawing drawing mode is switched to the
(1) (2) machining operation mode in the
screen, the mode is swtiched to the
drawing mode, and then, drawing following cases.
is started. · Reset button or external reset
button was depressed.
· M02 or M30 was commanded on
Drawing mode an NC program.
Since drawing is done under such a condition as MACHINE LOCK, the modal information, absolute
coordinate value, etc. are updated.
When the mode is switched from the machining operation mode to the drawing mode, the following
information is stored.
1) Relative coordinate value

2) Work coordinate system value
3) Machine coordinate system value
4) T code
5) Tool position offset
6) Repositioning coordinate
After drawing, the stored information is restored as before, and the mode is switched to the machining
operation mode after heading of the drawn program.
NOTE
None of the execution of dwell (G04), sending of M, S, T codes, and sending of the
press start signal is done.
NOTE
1 Output signals OP, STL, SPL, AL are sent to the machine tool even during drawing in
the same way as in normal machining operation.
2 Input signals ERS, *SP, *ESP, ST, etc. of the machine tool are effective even during
drawing. Don’t operate these switches, accordingly. (The single block switch SBK is
ineffective.)
3 If manual reference point return function is provided, the stored stroke limit 1 is checked
even during drawing. Thus, the machine tool position must coincide with actual
machining start position before drawing start.
4 The tool profile is drawn at the end point in a block where positioning is done even in
the punch off mode using M function or under the turned-on condition of the punch off
switch on the machine tool side.
5 If the tool profile code of the designated T code is 00, mark (*) is drawn.
6 Machining operation is not executed in the drawing mode. Drawing is not attempted
halfway during machining operation.
7 It is impossible to draw a helically interpolated figure.
- 904 -
13.5 EXAMPLE
Set drawing parameters for drawing the following NC program as follows.
650 mm
1100 mm
:O00002;(NC program)
G92X1270.Y1270.; G76I40.J90.K8T02 ; G72X800.Y400. ;

G90G00X15.Y15.T02; G72X1050.Y200. ; G77I150.J90.P-5.K18 ;
X1085.Y15. ; G76I40.J90.K8 ; G90X550.Y325.T04 ;
X1085.Y635. ; G90X375.Y80.T04 ; M24 ;
X15.Y635. ; X745.Y80.; G01X500.Y325.F3000 ;
G72X150.Y80.; X230.Y250.T05 ; X500.Y300. ;
G76I40.J0K4T03 ; G26I50.J45.K4T06 ; G03X550.Y250.I50. ;
G72X400.Y80. ; X230.Y400.T05 ; G01X750.Y250. ;
G76I40.J0K7; G26I50.J45.K4T06 ; G03X800.Y300.J50. ;
G72X770.Y80. ; G72X500.Y400. ; G01X800.Y350. ;
G76I40.J0K4 ; G77I150.J180.P-5.K18T04 ; G03X750.Y400.I-50. ;
G72X50.Y200. ; G76I15.J0K20 ; G01X550.Y400. ;
G03X500.Y350.J-50. ;
G01X500.Y325. ;
M25;
G00G90X1270.Y1270.M02 ;
- 905 -
- 906 -
Tool figure data

T02 : Rectangle, X dimension = 50 mm, Y dimension = 50 mm
T03 : Rectangle, X dimension = 50 mm, Y dimension = 20 mm
T04 : Circle, diameter = 15.5 mm
T05 : Circle, diameter = 30 mm
T06 : Circle, diameter = 5 mm
The following figures show the programmed figure.
- 907 -
14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-64504EN/02
14 VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION

Chapter 14, "VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY .......................................................................................................................908
14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY

Overview
This function is used to perform program editing and changing of various data using the keyboard
displayed on the LCD with a touch panel.
Screen on which a CNC screen is displayed in the upper left 1/4 area
Explanation
A CNC screen equivalent to that displayed on 8.4-inch display unit is displayed in the upper left area of
the screen, and the keyboard is displayed in the remaining area.
Fig. 14.1 (a) Screen on which a CNC screen is displayed in the upper left area
Operation
- Input key
The display "INPUT" on the virtual MDI keyboard is equivalent to the input key.
- Cancel key
The displays "BACK SPACE" and "CAN" on the virtual MDI keyboard are equivalent to the cancel key.
- Shift key
The display "SHIFT" ↑ on the virtual MDI keyboard is equivalent to the shift key.
Pressing the "SHIFT" key once places the system in the shift state, and pressing the "SHIFT" key again or
another key releases the system from the state.
Pressing a key in the shift state causes the character indicated in the upper left corner of the key to be
entered.
- 908 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION
- Simultaneous pressing of two keys

The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CAN" and "RESET"
keys to erase alarm PS100, is as follows:
(1) Press the "SPCL" key. The "SPCL" key is held down, and places the system in SPCL mode.
(2) Press the keys to be pressed simultaneously, one at a time.
(3) Press the "INPUT" key. Of the keys pressed in SPCL mode, the last two are assumed to have been
pressed simultaneously. The system is released from SPCL mode, and the SPCL key, which has
been held down, returns to the normal state.
Example: "SPCL" → "CAN" → "RESET" → "INPUT"
NOTE
1 In SPCL mode, other keys are disabled until the "SPCL" or "INPUT" key is
pressed.
2 Pressing the "SPCL" key in "SPCL" mode causes all keys pressed in SPCL
mode to be disabled. The system is released from SPCL mode, and the SPCL
key, which has been held down, returns to the normal state.
Screen on which a CNC screen is displayed in the entire area

Explanation
A CNC screen equivalent to that displayed on 8.4-inch display unit is displayed in the entire area.
Function keys and the ON/OFF button for virtual keys are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Fig. 14.1 (b) Screen on which a CNC screen is displayed in the entire area
- 909 -
14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-64504EN/02
Operation
- Function key page switching
Pressing "MENU" located near the lower right corner of the screen switches the screen to page 1, page 2,
page 3, and back to page 1 in this order.
Function keys on page 1
- Display of virtual keys

Pressing "KEY ON" located at the lower right corner of the screen displays virtual MDI keys. The
character string on the key top changes to "KEYOFF".
Pressing "KEYOFF" hides virtual MDI keys.
Fig. 14.1 (c) State in which virtual keys are ON
- Input key
The display "INPUT" on the virtual MDI keyboard is equivalent to the input key.
- Cancel key
The displays "BS" and "CAN" on the virtual MDI keyboard are equivalent to the cancel key.
- Shift key
The display "SHIFT" on the virtual MDI keyboard is equivalent to the shift key.
The characters on the key tops change to those that can be entered in the shift state.
- 910 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION
Fig. 14.1 (d) Key tops in the shift state
- Simultaneous pressing of two keys

The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CAN" and "RESET"
keys to erase alarm PS100, is as follows:
(1) Press the "SPCL" key. The "SPCL" key is held down, and places the system in SPCL mode.
(2) Press the keys to be pressed simultaneously, one at a time.
(3) Press the "INPUT" key.
Example: "SPCL" → "CAN" → "RESET" → "INPUT"
NOTE
1 In SPCL mode, other keys are disabled until the "SPCL" or "INPUT" key is
pressed.
2 Pressing the "SPCL" key in "SPCL" mode causes all keys pressed in SPCL
mode to be disabled. The system is released from SPCL mode, and the SPCL
key, which has been held down, returns to the normal state.
- Operation history
The operation of virtual MDI key performed by the operator is recorded. The recorded contents are the
same as the contents when operating a normal MDI unit.
When the original key "SPCL", "MENU", "KEY ON", "KEY OFF" of virtual MDI key is pressed, the
following character string is displayed on the operation history screen and the operation history data
(OPRT_HIS.TXT).
Table 14.1 Operation history of original key

Original key Operation history screen Operation history data
"SPCL" {SPCL} {SPCL}
”MENU” {MENU} {MENU}
”KEY ON”, ”KEY OFF” {KEY} {KEY ON/OFF}
Moreover, in SPCL mode, not two keys just before pressing "INPUT" key but all operated keys are
recorded.
For example)
When the keys of "SPCL", "A", "CAN", "RESET", and "INPUT" are operated in this order, the operation
of "A" is not input actually but is recorded.
14.1.1 Limitations
- Display of VGA windows on the C Language Executor
This function uses one VGA window, so that the number of VGA windows that can be used on the C
Language Executor is reduced by one.
- Display unit
Display unit on which this function can be used are 10.4 display unit with a touch panel.
- 911 -
15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION OPERATION B-64504EN/02
15 TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION

15.1 TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION
Overview
This function is used to manage machining programs, offsets, parameters and so on in folders, as batches.
(Such a folder and the data in it are collectively called machining data in the remainder of this manual.)
It can also be used to create templates of machining data in the template folder in advance, so that when
new machining data is to be created, it can be created based on the templates. This makes it possible to
create similar machining data efficiently.
NOTE
This function requires the 8-level data protection function.
15.1.1 Details
Initial folders
If this function is enabled, two folders are created as initial ones:
• Template folder : SYSTEM/TEMPLATE
• WORKS folder : USER/WORKS
The template folder and the WORKS folder are common to all paths. These folders cannot be deleted.
//CNC_MEM
SYSTEM/ TEMPLATE/
MTB1/ TMP1/
MTB2/ TMPn/
USER/
PATH1/
xxxx/
yyyy/
PATH2/
xxxx/
yyyy/
WORKS/ SP_WORK1/
SP_WORKn/
LIBRARY/
Fig. 15.1.1 Initial folder configuration
- 912 -
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION 15.TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION
NOTE
TMP1, TMPn, SP_WORK1, and SP_WORKn are examples of user-created
folders (machining data).
If this function is enabled, but the default foreground and background folders have not been set, it is
assumed that the WORKS folder (USER/WORKS) is set.
If this function is enabled, the number of files that the user can register is reduced by 2, as given in Table
15.1.1.
Table 15.1.1
Program memory Number of registered Number of registered Number of registered
capacity programs programs (expansion 1) programs (expansion 2)
64Kbyte 61 123 -
128Kbyte 61 248 -
256Kbyte 61 498 -
512Kbyte 61 998 -
1Mbyte 61 998 1998
2Mbyte 61 998 3998
4Mbyte 61 998 3998
8Mbyte 61 998 3998
Template folder
The template folder is for templates of machining data. Folders created here and the programs in the
folders are handled as templates of machining data.
When new machining data is to be created, it is possible to create programs efficiently by creating them
based on the templates in the template folder, while avoiding mistakes.
More than one template can be created.
The template folder is protected with the 8-level data protection function.
The template folder is not displayed to those operators whose operation level is lower than 6.
It is not possible to create subfolders in a template.
NOTE
1 Setting a data protection level of the 8-level data protection function to a
program in the template folder has no effect. (Objects under the template folder
are always regarded to be at level 6.)
2 If the display prohibition attribute is set for a program in the template folder, the
program will not be copied when machining data is created.
3 If the operation level is reduced below 6 while a program in the template folder is
being subject to background editing, the background editing state can no longer
be released. Before changing the operation level, cancel background editing.
WORKS folder
The WORKS folder is used by the user to create machining data.
If an operation for creating a new folder is performed in this folder, machining data will be created based
on a template. For details, see “Creating new machining data” in the section on operations.
If a folder is created in a folder other than the WORKS folder, the folder is simply created in the same
way as that if the template program function is not used.
Format of machining data

In the machining data folder, main programs and subprograms can be stored. There are no limitations to
the program names that can be used, but no subfolders can be created.
- 913 -
Other various data necessary for machining, such as tool offsets, workpiece origin offsets, and custom
macro variables, can also be stored as programs written in the G10 format. To set each data item, execute
a G10 format program, using an M98 subprogram call.
The G10 format is as described below. For details, refer to the related item in the operator's manual.
Setting the workpiece coordinate system

G10 L2 Pp IP_ ;
G11 ;
p=0 : Specify an external workpiece origin offset.
p=1 to 6 : Specify the workpiece origin offset for one of the workpiece coordinate systems
1 to 6.
IP_ : In the case of an absolute command, the workpiece origin offset for each axis.
In the case of an incremental command, the value to be added to the workpiece
origin offset for each axis that is set. (The addition result is the workpiece origin
offset.)
Setting the custom macro variables

#500=0.0 ;
#501=0.0 ;
#502=0.0 ;
:
:
SETVN500[ABC,DEF]
SETVN501[GHI,JKL]
SETVN502[MNO,PQR]
:
Template format
The format is the same as that of machining data, but has the functions described below.
1. MAIN.TEMPL Main program

If the name of a main program is set to MAIN.TEMPL, the MAIN part will be renamed to the name
specified when machining data is created.
2. ****.TEMPL Program other than a main program

If the name of a program is set to ****.TEMPL (where **** is any character string), it is prohibited
to rename and delete the program under the machining data folder. This prevents the inability to
make a subprogram call specified with a template due to the unintentional renaming or deletion by
the end user.
Storing data
At present, data that is set with the CNC can be stored as G10 format programs.
Storage folders are folders that are set in the foreground.
The following data can be stored:
• Tool compensation data

• Workpiece coordinate system data
• Macro variable data
- 914 -
15.1.2 Operation
Creating a template
A template can be created by only those operators whose operation level is 6 or higher.
1. Display the program folder screen.

2. Move to the template folder.
3. Enter a folder name and press the soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
4. In the folder created, create a program named MAIN.TEMPL. This will be a main program.
5. Create offset data and so on as G10 format programs. Create the necessary M98 calls in
MAIN.TEMPL.
NOTE
1 Subprograms can also be used. Create them, if necessary.
2 For any lines that operators whose operation levels are lower than 6 may not
change, insert (R) at the beginning of each of these lines.
3 Another way is to copy machining data and rename the main program to
MAIN.TEMPL.
Creating new machining data

If a folder is to be created under the WORKS folder, machining data can be created based on the template
folder. If bit 0 (FSB) of parameter No. 11364 is 1, the created folder will be automatically set as a
foreground folder and a background folder.

2. Move to the WORKS folder (USER/WORKS).
3. Enter machining data name, and press the soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
4. A list of templates (list of folders in the template folder) is displayed. Using the up and down cursor
keys, select a template, and press the soft key [SELECT].
It is possible to search for a template by entering the name of the template to search for and pressing
the soft key [SEARCH].
- 915 -
5. In the WORKS folder, new machining data is created based on the selected template.
NOTE
If an error occurs, such as not enough free space, while machining data is being
created, the data being created will be deleted, and the system will return to the
state before the start of creation.
Selecting machining data

3. Move the cursor to the machining data to select.
4. Press soft key [MAIN PROGRM].
When machining data is selected, the program in the folder that is named "machining-data-name.TEMPL"
is selected as a program for automatic operation.
The selected machining data folder is set as a foreground folder and a background folder.
- 916 -
NOTE
1 If setting a main program fails, a warning message is displayed. The foreground
folder setting and the background folder setting do not change.
2 If setting a foreground folder or a background folder fails, a warning message is
displayed.
3 Even if setting a folder fails, the main program of machining data is selected as a
program for automatic operation.
Deleting machining data

A machining data file can be deleted from the folder.
3. Move the cursor to the machining data to delete.
4. Press soft key [DELETE].
5. The message, "DELETE FOLDER?" is displayed. Press the soft key [EXEC].
NOTE
Deletion may fail for reasons such as that an attempt is made to delete
machining data selected as a main program and that the machining data
contains programs that may not be edited. If this happens, the
deletion-in-progress state remains. Cancel the condition that prevents the file
from deletion, and delete it again.
Editing machining data

Basically, machining data can be edited in the same way as normal programs. There are, however, some
cases in which editing is prohibited. For details, see Subsection, "Protection Function".
Inputting and outputting machining data

It is possible to output and input machining data to and from an external device.
Storing data
Data that is currently set with the CNC can be stored as G10 format programs. Select the data to store,
using a soft key.
If the soft key [ALL] is pressed, the data given in Table 15.1.2 (a) is stored as a batch.
The data is stored in the folder that is set in the foreground.

2. If the folder in which to store the data is not a foreground folder, move to the folder in which to store
the data and press the soft key [CHANGE FORE].
3. Press soft key [DATA SAVE].
4. Press the soft key of the data to store or the soft key [ALL].
5. Press soft key [EXEC].

If not saving it, press [CAN].
- 917 -
NOTE
1 Once data storage is executed, no other CNC operations can be performed until
the storage is completed. Data storage cannot be interrupted while a file is being
stored.
2 The data that can be stored with the soft key [ALL] is the data for the selected
path.
3 If the soft key [STOP] is pressed while overwrite storage is being checked with
the soft key [ALL], the storage of subsequent data can be interrupted.
4 If the screen is switched to another while data is being stored as a batch, data
storage may be interrupted.
5 The soft key [WORK SHIFT] is displayed on lathe system machines only.
Storage file name

The name entered in the key-in buffer before pressing [EXEC] in step 5 of the above procedure will be
the storage file name.
Up to 32 characters can be specified as a storage file name.
If no storage file name is specified, a default file name is assigned according to the data.
For details of default file names, see Table 15.1.2 (a), below.
For storage with the soft key [ALL], the storage data will have a default file name.
Table 15.1.2 (a) Default file names

Data Default file names
Tool compensation data TOOLOFST
Workpiece coordinate system data EXT_WKZ
Macro variable data MACRO
If bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No. 138 is 1, a path number is added at the end of a default file name.
Example) For offset data, the file name is as given in Table 15.1.2 (b).
Table 15.1.2 (b) Offset data file names

Bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No. 0138
Selected path number
0 1
1 TOOLOFST TOOLOFST.P-1
2 TOOLOFST TOOLOFST.P-2
Overwrite saving of data

When bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308 is set to 1, if a file with the same name already exists in the
machining data folder, data can be saved.

2. If the folder in which to store the data is not a foreground folder, move to the folder in which to store
the data and press the soft key [CHANGE FORE].
3. Press soft key [DATA SAVE].
4. Press the soft key of the data to store or the soft key [ALL].
5. Press soft key [EXEC].
6. If the folder contains a file with the same name, an overwrite conformation message, "***
OVERWRITE?", is displayed (where *** is the file name).
7. To overwrite the file with the file name, press the soft key [REWRITE].
If not overwrite it, press the soft key [CAN].
- 918 -
NOTE
1 If data is stored as a batch, pressing the soft key [CAN] cancels the present
output operation, and continues the storage of the next file.
2 If data is stored as a batch, pressing the soft key [STOP] interrupts the storage
of the data subsequent to the data that has been stored.
15.1.3 Protection Function

Protecting the template folder
The template folder is protected with the 8-level data protection function.
The template folder is not displayed to those operators whose operation level is lower than 6. Those
operators cannot output or input the template folder.
NOTE
Setting a data protection level of the 8-level data protection function to a
program in the template folder has no effect. (Objects under the template folder
are always regarded to be at level 6.)
Protecting template programs

(Protection in program units)
Those operators whose operation level is lower than 6 cannot perform the following operations on those
programs that have program names ending with the six characters ".TEMPL".
• New create
• Delete
• Rename
• Copy
• Move
Protecting template programs

(Protection in line units)
By adding (R) at the beginning of a block in a template in advance, it is possible to prohibit those
operators whose operation level is lower than 6 from editing machining data on a line-by-line basis.
If adding other comments, enclose them in another set of parentheses, as in (R) (comment data).
- 919 -
• It is not possible to make insertions into, make changes to, and make deletions from a block that has
(R) at the beginning.
• It is not possible to make insertions, changes, deletions, and replacements that will cause (R) to
appear at the beginning of a block as a result of editing.
• It is not possible to copy, cut, and paste a character string containing (R).
• It is not possible to insert a program containing (R).
Template
<MAIN.TEMPL>; SET_OFS;
Edit-disabled block
specification (R) M98 <SET_OFS>;
(R) G28X0Y0;
#100 = 10.; O0003;
(R) G01 X#100;
M98 P3;
M30; O0004;
Creation of new data
Machining data
Edit-disabled settings <SP_WORKS2>; SET_OFS;

are inherited from the
(R) M98 <SET_OFS>;
template.
(R) G28X0Y0;
#100=250.;
(R) G01 X#100; O0003;
M98 P3;
M30;
O0004;
Fig. 15.1.3 Protection of machining data in line units
- 920 -
15.1.4 Limitations
• This function cannot be used together with the limitations of folder manipulation due to bit 6 (FPF)
of parameter No. 11302 and bit 7 (CFP) of parameter No. 11304. The settings of FPF and CFP of
these parameters are not effective.
When this function is enabled/disabled, file clearing is performed. Create backups of programs before
switching the function between enabled and disabled states.
- 921 -
16. MULTI-PATH PROGRAM
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION OPERATION B-64504EN/02
16 MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

FUNCTION
16.1 MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
Overview
In this function, multi-path programs, offset data, and parameters, etc. for one part machining are
managed together by a folder. Moreover, this improvement easily does making, the selection, the edit,
and the I/O of the programs.
NOTE
1 This function is an optional.
2 This function requires the Multi-path editing function option.
3 This function cannot be used with the Template program function at the same
time.
16.1.1 Details
Programs for each path, which are necessary for one machining, can be edited simultaneously. Selection,
I/O, and renaming of these programs are possible. These operations can be done to the programs in the
Multi-path program folder.
Please refer to the following "Individual program input and editing" when the program is handled
individually.
16.1.1.1 Multi-path program folder

The folder, in which the main programs and the subprograms of each path necessary for the machining, is
called the "Multi-path program folder".
Moreover, various data necessary for machining such as the tool offset, the work offset, and the custom
macro variable, etc. can be stored in Multi-path program folder as a program of G10 format.
16.1.1.2 Making of machining programs

The program, for each path can be created by the following operations.
1 Select “all paths EDIT mode”.

3 Press soft key [FOLDER] to display the program folder screen.
4 Select the WORKS folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/WORKS/).
5 Enter Multi-path program folder name, and press the soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
- 922 -
16.MULTI-PATH PROGRAM
B-64504EN/02 OPERATION MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
6 New Multi-path program folder is created in the WORKS folder. The main program in each path is
automatically created in the Multi-path program folder at the same time.
Example) When the Multi-path program folder named SHAFT (Three paths system) is created.
Main program (SHAFT.P-1, SHAFT.P-2, SHAFT.P-3) in each path is automatically created.
WORKS folder Multi-path folder

SHAFT
WORKS/
Programs created automatically
SHAFT.P-1 Path 1 The first path program
SHAFT.P-2 Path 2 The second path program
SHAFT.P-3 Path 3 The third path program
NOTE
1 The Multi-path program folder can be created only in the WORKS folder.
2 The subfolder cannot be created in the Multi-path program folder.
3 If an alarm such as not enough free space of memory occurs, while Multi-path
program folder is being created, the data being created will be deleted, and the
system will return to the state before the start of creation.
4 When the program of the path need not be created automatically, set the
parameter bit 3(MPC) of parameter No.11352.
WORKS folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/WORKS/)

The Multi-path program folder can be created only in the WORKS folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/W
ORKS/). When this function is effective, the WORKS folder is automatically created.
When a new folder is created in WORKS folder, this folder is created as the Multi-path program folder.
And, the main programs of all paths are created in that folder simultaneously. The name of the programs
that are created by the batch making are named "name of Multi-path program folder. P-n". (n is path
number)
- 923 -
NOTE
1 WORKS folder cannot be deleted, and cannot be renamed.
2 When this function is effective and the foreground or background default folder is
not set, WORKS folder is assumed as a default folder.
Program number
When this function is effective, the number of files that can be registered decreases by one.
Part program Number of registerable Number of registerable Number of registerable
storage size programs programs expansion 1 programs expansion 2
64Kbyte 62 124 -
128Kbyte 62 249 -
256Kbyte 62 499 -
512Kbyte 62 999 -
1Mbyte 62 999 1999
2Mbyte 62 999 3999
4Mbyte 62 999 3999
8Mbyte 62 999 3999
16.1.1.3 Edit of multi-path program

By following procedures, main programs can be displayed and edited at the same time by arranging on
one screen. Programs of up to three paths can be displayed simultaneously.
1 Perform "Making of machining programs" or "Selection of machining program".

2 Select “all paths EDIT mode“.
4 Press soft key [program] to display the program editing screen and edit the program.
Please refer to the chapter of "MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION" of OPERATOR'S MANUAL

(Common to Lathe System / Machining Center System) for a detailed operating instruction.
When programs other than the main program such as subprograms or offset data program are edited, refer
to the chapter "Individual program input and editing".
The first The second The third

path path path
Program editing screen
- 924 -
NOTE
It is necessary to set the parameter of multi path simultaneous display function
and simultaneous multi path program editing function to the batch edit. For the
details, refer to "MULTI PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT" of CONNECTION MANUAL
(FUNCTION).
16.1.1.4 Selection of machining program

The main program of each path can be selected by the following operations simultaneously.
1 Select “all paths MEM mode”.

5 Select the Multi-path program folder by cursor key.
6 Press the soft key [MAIN PROGRAM].
By above operation, the main program of each path is selected simultaneously. By pushing the cycle start
the machining is started.
NOTE
1 If the main program does not exist even in one path, warning message "MAIN
PROG OF NUM OF PATH IS DEFICIENT" is displayed, and it is not possible to
select the Multi-path program. If there is a path not used for the machining,
please prepare the dummy program or set the bit 3 (MPC) of parameter No.
11352 for the path. As for the dummy program, fill M02; or M30; as follows.
（Example of dummy program ）
O0123;
M30;
%
2 The main programs of the path whose bit 3 (MPC) of parameter No. 11352 is set
‘1’ is not automatically changed when the Multi-path folder is selected.
3 In the Multi-path program folder, it is not possible to create, change or search the
main program on the edit screen or the program check screen. It is necessary to
invalidate the setting of "CAN NOT ENTER MULTIPATH PROG FOLDER" on
the operation confirmation function setting screen. Please refer to the chapter
"Individual program input and editing" for further details.
16.1.1.5 Input/output of Multi-path program

The main program for each path for a machining can be output to external I/O device (memory card etc.)
simultaneously. And, the Multi-path program folder and the programs in it can be input from one program
file simultaneously.
- 925 -
Example) Inputting or outputting of multi-path program folder SHAFT (input or output as one file)
Program file : SHAFT.TXT

%
& F=/SHAFT/ WORKS folder Multi-path program folder
<SHAFT.P-1>;
SHAFT
#100=[#4115/1000.]; Path 1 WORKS/
;
<SHAFT.P-2>; Path 2 SHAFT.P-1
G0X250;
; SHAFT.P-2
<SHAFT.P-3>; INPUT
M98P6781; Path 3 SHAFT.P-3
;
SUBPRO
<SUBPRO>;
M99; Sub program
OUTPUT
%
CNC program memory
Memory card
Output operation
6 Press the soft key [PUNCH]. The following softkey is displayed.
8 Press the soft key [P GET] or type the name of Multi-path program folder.
9 Press the soft key [FOLDER SET].
- 926 -
The folder name is set.
10 Press the soft key [P GET] or type the output file name.
11 Press the soft key [F SET].
When the output file name is not specified, 'PARTFLDR.TXT' is assumed as an output file name
automatically.
12 Press the soft key [EXEC], and output is started.
Input operation
5 Press the soft key [READ].
6 Type the input file name, and press the soft key [F SET].
When the input file name is not specified, 'PARTFLDR.TXT' is assumed as becomes an output file
name automatically.
The file is input and the Multi-path program folder is created automatically, and then programs of
each path are input.
Format of I/O
The format of I/O is the following form.
Example) Outputting Multi-path program folder SHAFT (3 paths system)
- 927 -
%
& F=//CNC_MEM/USER/WORKS/ WORKS folder
＆F=/SHAFT/ Multi-path program folder
<SHAFT.P-1>
Main program of path 1
M30
<SHAFT.P-2>
M30
<SHAFT.P-3>
M30
<SUBPRO> Subprogram
M99
％
NOTE
1 The bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No. 138 that adds the path number to the
extension of the output file is invalid.
2 The bit 7 (FLI) of parameter No. 11364 that select “the FG/BG folder is targeted”
or “current folder is targeted” is invalid in the WORKS folder. Input and output
operation is performed for a current folder.
16.1.1.6 Name change of the Multi-path program folder

The name of Multi-path program folder and main programs in the folder can be changed simultaneously.

6 Type the changed name, and press the soft key [RENAME].
7 The folder name and the name of the main program in the folder are changed.
Example) /USER/WORKS/WORK/ is changed to /USER/WORKS/SHAFT/ . (3 paths system)

WORK
SHAFT
WORK.P-1 SHAFT.P-1
WORK.P-2 SHAFT.P-2
WORK.P-3 SHAFT.P-3
SUBPRO SUBPRO
OFFSET.TXT OFFSET.TXT
NOTE
The names of the main programs under the selection cannot be renamed.
- 928 -
16.1.2 Operation of Inputting and Editing for Each Program

The inputting, outputting and editing of sub program and the offset data, etc. can be performed by the
following method.
Procedure
1 Select MDI mode.
3 Press the continuous menu key several times until the [GUARD] is appeared.
4 Press the [GUARD] soft key. The setting screen that was displayed the last and belongs to the
operation confirmation function and was displayed.(the operation confirmation function setting
screen is the first such screen that appears after the system is restarted).
5 If any screen other than the operation confirmation function setting screen is displayed, press the
[GUARD] soft key. The operation confirmation function setting screen is displayed
6 Move the cursor to the check box of "CAN NOT ENTER MULTIPATH PROG FOLDER", by
pressing the key.
8 Press the soft key [OFF:0].
By this operation it becomes possible to select the Multi-path program folder on the program folder
screen. And the individual operation for each multi-path program is permitted.
11 Select EDIT mode.
12 Move to the folder where the program to be edited is placed. Perform the operating of Edit or
inputting and outputting the program.
13 After editing ends move to the WORKS folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/WORKS/) in the program
folder screen.
14 Operate ‘1’ to ‘7’, and move the cursor to the check box of "CAN NOT ENTER MULTIPATH
PROG FOLDER".
15 Press the soft key [ON:1]. Then, an individual operation of multi-path program is prohibited.
- 929 -
"CAN NOT ENTER MULTIPATH PROG FOLDER"

When this item is effective, it is not possible to move in the Multi-path program folder. Therefore,
individual selection, individual input/output, and individual deletion are impossible. Please remove
the check on this item when an individual operation is required for each file in the Multi-path
program folder in case editing the subprogram.
NOTE
1 When the check mark is put in this item while displaying the folder in the
Multi-path program folder on the program folder screen, the protection function
doesn't become effective for the folder under the display. Please put the check
mark in this item after the cursor is moved out of the Multi-path program folder.
2 Please do not put the check mark in this item when the Multi-path program folder
is set to the foreground folder. This setting doesn't become effective to the
Multi-path program folder set to the foreground folder after the next power-on.
Please put the check mark in this item after changing the foreground folder other
than the Multi-path program folder.
3 When the Protection of Data at Eight Levels function is effective, the protection
level that can change the parameter data should be selected.
16.1.3 Limitations
When the Multi-path program management function is effective, even if the following parameters are set
to 1, those parameters are invalid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11302 FPF

[Data type] Bit
#6 FPF Folders that can be used by program management are:

0: Not limited.
1: Limited to other than the path folder corresponding to a selected path.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11304 CFP

[Data type] Bit
#7 CFP Folders that can be used by program management are:

0: Not limited.
1: Limited to the path folder corresponding to a selected path.
- 930 -
IV. MAINTENANCE
B-64504EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
This chapter describes routine maintenance work that the operator can perform when using the CNC.
WARNING
Only those persons who have been educated for maintenance and safety may
perform maintenance work not described in this chapter.
Chapter 1, "ROUTINE MAINTENANCE", consists of the following sections:
1.1 ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURRED .....................................................934

1.2 BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS.......................................................................................935
1.3 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY.........................................................................................937
- 933 -
1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64504EN/02
1.1 ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURRED

If an unexpected operation occurs or an alarm or warning is output when the CNC and machine are used,
the problem needs to be solved quickly. For this purpose, the status of the problem must be identified
correctly, and a proper action must be taken.
The procedure for taking an action for a problem is shown below.
Problem!
Dangerous? Dangerous
Danger to you and others Take action to avoid danger.
- Stop machine immediately.
- Refuge to safe place immediately.
Not dangerous Confirm and secure safety.

Check and identify problem. - Confirm current safety.
- Warning - Check machine and circumstances.
- Alarm - Turn off power to machine.
- Abnormal operation
- Wrong operation, etc.
Check status and how problem If recovery is impossible,

occurred.
- Time and place of problem immediately notify sales agent or
occurrence supplier of problem details for
- Operation procedure action.
Investigate cause and take action.

- Check and correct machining program and set data items.
- Review and modify operation procedure.
- Check and repair machine operation sections.
Recovery work
- Action by you or machine tool builder
- Check operation after recovery.
For details of investigation and action on problems arising from the CNC, refer to
"TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE" in the Maintenance Manual (B-64485EN) issued by FANUC.
- 934 -
1.2 BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS

With the CNC, various data items such as offset data and system parameters are stored in the SRAM of
the control unit and are protected by a backup battery. However, an accident can erase the data. By
storing the data at another location (outside the CNC), the data, when lost, can be restored.
So, when the machine is started up or data is updated, for example, the data should be backed up (stored
outside the CNC).
- Data backup operation

The data items listed below should be backed up. For the method of data output operation, see the chapter
of "DATA INPUT/OUTPUT" in this manual.
<1> System parameters

→ See Subsection, “Inputting and Outputting Parameters”.
<2> Machining programs
→ See Subsection, “Inputting and Outputting a Program”.
<3> Tool offset data
→ See Subsection, “Inputting and Outputting Offset Data”.
<4> PMC data
→ See PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64513EN).
<5> Pitch error compensation data (when the pitch error compensation function is selected.)
→ See Subsection, “Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data”.
<6> Custom macro variables (when the custom macro function is selected.)
→ See Subsection, “Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables”.
<7> Workpiece coordinate system setting data (when the workpiece coordinate system function is
selected.)
→ See Subsection, “Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data”.
<8> Tool data (when the tool function is selected.)
→ See Subsection, “Inputting and Outputting Tool Data”.
It is recommended that recording media (such as floppy disks and memory cards) daily used with the
machine be used to store data. Stored data should be managed properly so that the data can be restored
quickly if a problem occurs.
- Data restoration work

In order to restore lost data to the state of the stored data, input the data backed up according to the
previous item into the CNC. For the method of data input operation, see the chapter of "DATA
INPUT/OUTPUT" in this manual.
WARNING
After inputting stored data, do not start an operation immediately. Instead, check
that the data is input correctly and that settings are made to meet a desired
operation.
If an operation is executed without making this check, the machine and
workpiece can be damaged and personal injury can occur due to an unexpected
machine movement. Use sufficient care.
- 935 -
CAUTION
Before recovery of the following data items, consult with the machine tool builder
of the machine used:
• System parameters
• PMC data
• Macro programs and custom macro variables
• Pitch error compensation values
NOTE
The method of recovery described in this section is intended just to restore the
state of the backed up data, and does not guarantee recovery of the state that
was present when the data was lost.
- 936 -
1.3 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY

This chapter describes how to replace the control unit backup battery and absolute Pulsecoder battery.
This section consists of the following subsections:
1.3.1 Replacing Battery for Control Unit.................................................................................................938

1.3.2 Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC)....................................................................................................923
1.3.3 Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders...................................................................................924
Battery for memory backup

Such as Offset data and system parameters are stored in SRAM in the control unit. The power to the
SRAM is backed up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. Therefore, the
above data is not lost even if the main power is turned off.
When the battery voltage falls, alarm message "BAT" blinks on the LCD screen and the battery alarm
signal is output to the PMC. When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible. In
general, the battery can be replaced within one or two weeks of the alarm first being issued. This,
however, depends on the system configuration.
If the battery voltage subsequently drops further, backup of memory can no longer be provided. Turning
on the power to the control unit in this state causes system alarm to be issued because the contents of
memory are lost. Replace the battery, clear the entire memory, then reenter the data.
For this reason, FANUC recommends that the battery be replaced once per year regardless of whether a
battery alarm is issued.
The type of battery to be replaced differs depending on the control unit. In some control units, a dedicated
lithium battery to be purchased from FANUC is used. In other control units, alkaline dry cells (size D) are
used in an external battery case.
NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the factory. This battery can provide
backup for the memory contents for about a year.
When discarding a battery, observe the applicable ordinances or other rules of
your local government. Also, cover the terminals of the battery with vinyl tape or
the like to prevent a short-circuit.
- 937 -
1.3.1 Replacing Battery for Control Unit

When using a lithium battery (for LCD-mounted type control unit)
Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0323-K102).
<1> Turn the power to the machine (control unit) on. After about 30 seconds, turn the power off.
<2> Pull out the lithium battery on the back of the control unit. (While holding the latch of the lithium
battery to remove the catch in the case, pull the battery up and out.)
While holding this section, pull out the battery.
<3> Mount a new lithium battery you get ready beforehand. (Push the battery until the catch is latched
with the case.) Confirm that the catch has been latched securely.
Push the battery until the

catch is latched with the
case.
WARNING
Using other than the recommended lithium battery may result in the battery
exploding. Replace the battery only with the specified lithium battery
(A02B-0323-K102).
- 938 -
CAUTION
Steps <1> to <3> should be completed within 30 minutes.
Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified
period. Otherwise, the contents of SRAM may be lost.
If steps <1> to <3> may not be completed within 30 minutes, save all contents of
the SRAM to the memory card or USB memory beforehand. Thus, if the contents
of the SRAM are lost, the contents can be restored easily.
For the methods of saving all contents and restoring them, refer to the
maintenance manual (B-64485EN).
When using a lithium battery (for stand-alone type control unit)

Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0200-K102).
<1> Turn the power to the machine (control unit) on. After about 30 seconds, turn the power off.
<2> Remove the lithium battery on the upper section of the control unit.
First, unplug the connector by yanking the battery cable, then take the battery out of its case.
The battery case is located in the upper section of the face plate of the main board.
<3> Insert a new lithium battery and reconnect the connector.
Battery case
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Connector
WARNING
Using other than the recommended battery may result in the battery exploding.
Replace the battery only with the specified battery (A02B-0200-K102).
CAUTION
Steps <1> to <3> should be completed within 30 minutes.
Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified
period. Otherwise, the contents of SRAM may be lost.
If steps <1> to <3> may not be completed within 30 minutes, save all contents of
the SRAM to the memory card or USB memory beforehand. Thus, if the contents
of the SRAM are lost, the contents can be restored easily.
For the methods of saving all contents and restoring them, refer to the
maintenance manual (B-64485EN).
When using commercial D-size alkaline dry cells

<1> Have commercial D-size alkaline dry cells handy.
<2> Turn the power to the machine (control unit) on for about 30 seconds.
<3> Remove the cover from the battery case.
<4> Replace the old dry cells with new ones. Mount the dry cells in a correct orientation.
- 939 -
<5> Reinstall the cover onto the battery case.
CAUTION
In the power-off state, the battery should be replaced as in the case of the
lithium battery, which is descried above.
2 dry cells
Cover
Connection terminal
on the back 4 mounting
holes
Case
- 940 -
1.3.2 Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC)

A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the PANEL i. This battery is factory-set in the PANEL i.
This battery has sufficient capacity to retain BIOS data for one year.
When the battery voltage becomes low, the following message appears on the self test screen displayed at
turn-on, and the self test pauses.
CMOS Battery Failure
If this message appears, replace the battery as soon as possible (within one week). FANUC recommends
that the battery be replaced once per year regardless of whether a battery alarm is issued.
- Replacing the battery

(1) To guard against the possible loss or destruction of BIOS parameters, write down the BIOS
parameter values.
(2) Obtain a new lithium battery (A02B-0200-K102).
(3) After power has been supplied for at least five seconds, turn off the power to PANEL i. Remove the
intelligent terminal from the panel so that replacement work can be done from the rear of the
intelligent terminal.
(4) Detach the connector of the lithium battery, and remove the battery from the battery holder.
(5) Attach the connector, and place the battery in the battery holder.
(6) Install PANEL i again.
(7) Turn on the power, and check that the BIOS parameters are maintained (BIOS setup is not activated
forcibly).
Between removing an old battery and inserting new battery, no more than five minutes must be allowed
to elapse.
Connector
(BAT1)
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Fig. 1.3.2 Lithium battery connection for PANEL i
- 941 -
1.3.3 Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders
1.3.3.1 Overview
• When the voltage of the batteries for absolute Pulsecoders becomes low, alarm 307 or 306 occurs,
with the following indication in the CNC state display at the bottom of the CNC screen.
Alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery becomes low) :
The indication "APC" blinks in reversed display.
Alarm 306 (battery zero alarm) :
The indication "ALM" blinks in reversed display.
• When alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery becomes low) occurs, replace the
battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery should be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the number of Pulsecoders used.
• When alarm 306 (battery zero alarm) occurs, Pulsecoders are reset to the initial state, in which
absolute positions are not held. Alarm 300 (reference position return request alarm) also occurs,
indicating that reference position return is required.
• In general, replace the batteries periodically within the service life listed below.
- A06B-6050-K061 or D-size alkaline dry cells (LR20) : Two years (for each six-axis
configuration)
- A06B-6073-K001 : Two years (for each three-axis configuration)
- A06B-6114-K504 : One year (for each three-axis configuration)
NOTE
The above values indicate the estimated service life of batteries used with
FANUC absolute Pulsecoders. The actual battery service life depends on the
machine configuration based on, for example, detector types. For details, contact
the machine tool builder.
1.3.3.2 Replacing batteries

To prevent absolute position information in absolute Pulsecoders from being lost, turn on the machine
power before replacing the battery. The replacement procedure is described below.
<1> Ensure that the power to the servo amplifier is turned on.
<2> Ensure that the machine is in the emergency stop state (the motor is inactive).
<3> Ensure that the DC link charge LED of the servo amplifier is off.
<4> Detach the old batteries and attach new ones.
The replacement of the batteries in a separate battery case and the replacement of the battery built into the
servo amplifier are described below in detail.
- 942 -
WARNING
• The absolute Pulsecoder of each of the αi/αi S series servo motors and the βi S
series servo motors (βi S0.4 to βi S22) has a built-in backup capacitor.
Therefore, even when the power to the servo amplifier is off and the batteries
are replaced, reference position return is not required if the replacement
completes within less than 10 minutes. Turn the power on and replace the
batteries if the replacement will take 10 minutes or more.
• To prevent electric shock, be careful not to touch metal parts in the power
magnetics cabinet when replacing the batteries.
• Because the servo amplifier uses a large-capacitance electrolytic capacitor
internally, the servo amplifier remains charged for a while even after the power is
turned off. Before touching the servo amplifier for maintenance or other
purposes, ensure your safety by measuring the residual voltage in the DC link
with a tester and confirming that the charge indication LED (red) is off.
• Be sure to replace the batteries with specified ones. Pay attention to the battery
polarity. If a wrong type of battery is used or a battery is installed with incorrect
polarity, the battery may overheat, blow out, or catch fire, or the absolute
position information in the absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
• Ensure that the battery connector is inserted in the correct position.
1.3.3.3 Replacing the batteries in a separate battery case

Use the following procedure to replace the batteries in the battery case.
<1> Loosen the screws on the battery case and detach the cover.
<2> Replace the batteries in the case (pay attention to the polarity).
<3> Attach the cover to the battery case.
Battery case (with a cover)

A06B-6050-K060
Batteries
Four A06B-6050-K061 batteries or
D-size alkaline dry cells
CAUTION
• Four D-size alkaline dry cells (LR20) that are commercially available can be
used as batteries. A set of four A06B-6050-K061 batteries is optionally available
from FANUC.
• Replace all the four batteries with new ones. If old and new batteries are mixed,
the absolute position information in the absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
1.3.3.4 Replacing the battery built into the servo amplifier

Use the following procedure to replace the special lithium battery.
<1> Detach the battery cover.
<2> Replace the special lithium battery.
<3> Attach the battery cover.
- 943 -
CAUTION
• Purchase the battery from FANUC because it is not commercially available. It is
therefore recommended that you have a backup battery.
• When the built-in battery is used, do not connect BATL (B3) of connector
CXA2A/CXA2B. Also, do not connect two or more batteries to the same BATL
(B3) line. These connections are dangerous because battery output voltages
may be short-circuited, causing the batteries to overheat.
• Install the battery in the servo amplifier in a direction that allows slack in the
cable. If the battery cable is under tension, a bad connection may occur.
• If the +6 V pin and 0 V pin are short-circuited, the battery may overheat, blow
out, or catch fire, or the absolute position information in the absolute
Pulsecoders may be lost.
• When inserting the connector, align it to the connector pins.
[Connecting the battery]

The battery for the βiSV4 and βiSV20 series amplifiers is mounted in the battery case on the underside of
each of the amplifiers.
The battery for the other βi series amplifiers and the αi series amplifiers is mounted at the front of each of
the amplifiers.
[αi series][βi series βi SV40, βi SV80] [βi series βi SV4, βi SV 20]
Insertion direction Cable side Insertion direction

Cable side
Red: +6 V Red: +6 V
Connector Black: 0 V Connector Black: 0 V
CX5X CX5X
Battery
+6 V Battery case +6 V
0V Battery 0V
Battery case
[Battery sets and outlines]

Battery case
Battery ordering Manufacturer
Applicable servo amplifier ordering drawing Outline
drawing number model number
number
BR-2/3AGCT4A αi series 60/90 mm width A06B-6114-K505
A06B-6114-K504
(Panasonic) αi series 150/300 mm width A06B-6114-K506
(Note)
βi series βi SV (two-axis model) A06B-6114-K505
BR-AGCF2W βi series βiSV4, βiSV20 A06B-6093-K002
A06B-6093-K001
(Panasonic) βi series βiSV40, βiSV80 A06B-6093-K002
NOTE
When an old type BR-CCF2TH battery is used, order a battery case that
accommodates battery A06B-6114-K504.
Used batteries
Old batteries should be disposed as "INDUSTRIAL WASTES" according to the regulations of the
country or autonomy where your machine has been installed.
- 944 -
APPENDIX
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS
A PARAMETERS
This manual describes all parameters indicated in this manual.
For those parameters that are not indicated in this manual and other parameters, refer to the parameter
manual.
A.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO TVC

#0 TVC TV check
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#1 ISO Code used for data output

0: EIA code
1: ISO code
NOTE
1 The I/O setting of a memory card is made by bit 0 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0139.
2 The I/O setting of an USB memory is made by bit 0 (ISU) of
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 FCV

#1 FCV Program format

0: Series 16 standard format
1: Series 15 format
NOTE
1 Programs created in the Series 15 program format can be used for
operation on the following functions:
1 Subprogram call M98
2 When the program format used in the Series 15 is used for this
CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the Operator’s Manual.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 PRM

- 947 -
A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
#1 PRM When parameters are output, the parameters whose values are 0 are:
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 MIRx

[Data type] Bit axis
#0 MIRx Mirror image for each axis

0: Mirror image is off. (Normal)
1: Mirror image is on. (Mirror)
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device

[Data type] Byte
The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and from an external
input/output device and the host computer:
Input/output device interface (RS-232-C serial ports 1 and 2)
Memory card interface
Data server interface
Embedded Ethernet interface
USB memory interface
By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can be controlled
separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is performed using the channel set in
parameter No. 0020. When IO4 is set, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground
input, foreground output, background input, and background output.
In these parameters, specify the interface connected to each input/output device to and
from which data is to be transferred. See the table below for these settings.
Correspondence between settings and input/output devices

Setting Description
0,1 RS-232-C serial port 1
2 RS-232-C serial port 2
4 Memory card interface
5 Data server interface
9 Embedded Ethernet interface
17 USB memory interface
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 NCR CTV

[Data type] Bit
#1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.

0: Performed
1: Not performed
#3 NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code

0: LF, CR, CR are output.
1: Only LF is output.
- 948 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0138 MNC

[Data type] Bit
#7 MNC DNC operation from the memory card and external device subprogram call from the
memory card are:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0139 ISO

[Data type] Bit
#0 ISO When a memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using
0: ASCII codes.
1: ISO codes.
NOTE
See Appendix K, "ISO/ASCII code conversion tool" for conversion
between ISO and ASCII code.
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity
information is not included and a data error during the data
input/output is not detected.
3 DNC operation from a memory card also must set the parameter to
1, and execute DNC operation by ISO code. ASCII codes is
dangerous because parity information is not included and a data
error during the data input is not detected.
0983 Path control type of each path
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before

Set the path control type of each path.
The following two path control types are available:
T series (lathe system) :0
M series (machining system) : 1
- 949 -
NOTE
This bit must be set 1 with FANUC Series 30 i /31 i –PB.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0984 LCP

NOTE
#0 LCP Set whether the path is a loader control path.

0: The path is not a loader control path.
1: The path is a loader control path.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM

NOTE
#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis

0: In mm (metric system machine)
1: In inches (inch system machine)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 IDG XIK AZR JAX

#0 JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in jog feed, manual rapid traverse and manual
reference position return
0: 1 axis
1: 3 axes
#3 AZR When no reference position is set, the G28 command causes:

0: Reference position return using deceleration dogs (as during manual reference
position return) to be executed.
1: Alarm PS0304, "G28 IS COMMANDED WITHOUT ZERO RETURN" to be
displayed.
NOTE
When reference position return without dogs is specified, (when bit 1
(DLZ) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 1) the G28 command specified
before a reference position is set causes an alarm PS0304 to be
issued, regardless of the setting of AZR.
- 950 -
#4 XIK When bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 0, namely, when positioning is
performed using non-linear type positioning, if an interlock is applied to the machine
along one of axes in positioning,
0: The machine stops moving along the axis for which the interlock is applied and
continues to move along the other axes.
1: The machine stops moving along all the axes.
#7 IDG When the reference position is set without dogs, automatic setting of the bit 0 (IDGx) of
parameter No. 1012 to prevent the reference position from being set again is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, bit 0 (IDGx) of parameter No. 1012
is invalid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1004 IPR

#7 IPR When a number with no decimal point is specified, the least input increment of each axis
is:
0: Not 10 times greater than the least command increment
1: 10 times greater than the least command increment
When the increment system is IS-A, and bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1
(pocket calculator type decimal point programming), the least input increment cannot be
10 times greater than the least command increment.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 EDMx EDPx ZRNx

#0 ZRNx If a move command other than G28 is specified by automatic operation when no
reference position return is performed yet after the power is turned on:
0: The alarm PS0224, "PERFORM REFERENCE POSITION RETURN." is issued.
1: Operation is performed without issuing an alarm.
NOTE
1 The state in which a reference position has not been established
refers to the following state:
- When an absolute position detector is not used and reference
position return has not been performed even once after power-up
- When an absolute position detector is used and the association of
the machine position with the position detected with the absolute
position detector has not been completed (See the description of
bit 4 (APZx) of parameter No. 1815.)
#4 EDPx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the + direction for each axis is:
0: Invalid
1: Valid
- 951 -
#5 EDMx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the - direction for each axis is:
0: Invalid
1: Valid
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx DIAx ROSx ROTx

NOTE
#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotary axis.

#1 ROSx Setting linear or rotary axis.
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.
3624)
0 1 Rotary axis (A type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute coordinate
values are rounded or not rounded by bits 0 (ROAx) and 2 (RRLx) of
parameter No. 1008.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter
No. 3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference
position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one
rotation.
1 1 Rotary axis (B type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.
3624)
(4) Cannot be used with the rotary axis roll-over function
Except for the Setting is invalid (unused)
above.
#3 DIAx The move command for each axis is based on:

0: Radius specification
1: Diameter specification
#5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference position return is:

0: + direction
1: - direction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1008 RRLx RABx ROAx

- 952 -
NOTE
#0 ROAx The rotary axis roll-over is

0: Invalid
1: Valid
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotary axis (for which bit 0
(ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1)
#1 RABx In the absolute programming, the axis rotates in the direction

0: In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1: Specified by the sign of command value.
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
#2 RRLx Relative coordinates are

0: Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
1: Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter No.
1260.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1013 ISEx ISDx ISCx ISAx

NOTE
#0 ISAx
#1 ISCx
#2 ISDx
#3 ISEx Increment system of each axis
Increment system Bit 3 (ISE) Bit 2 (ISD) Bit 1 (ISC) Bit 0 (ISA)
IS-A 0 0 0 1
IS-B 0 0 0 0
IS-C 0 0 1 0
IS-D 0 1 0 0
IS-E 1 0 0 0
- 953 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1015 DWT

#7 DWT When time for dwell per second is specified by P, the increment system:
0: Depends on the increment system
1: Does not depend on the increment system (1 ms)
1020 Program axis name for each axis

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 65 to 67, 85 to 90
An axis name (axis name 1: parameter No. 1020) can be arbitrarily selected from A, B, C,
U, V, W, X, Y, and Z. (When G code system A is used with the lathe system, however, U,
V, and W are not selectable.) When bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is set to 1, the
length of an axis name can be extended to three characters by setting axis name 2
(parameter No. 1025) and axis name 3 (parameter No. 1026) (extended axis name).
For axis names 2 and 3, a character from 0 to 9 and A to Z of ASCII code can be
arbitrarily selected. However, the setting of axis name 3 for each axis is invalid if axis
name 2 is not set. Moreover, if a character from 0 to 9 is set as axis name 2, do not use a
character from A to Z as axis name 3.
(Tip) ASCII code

Axis name X Y Z A B C U V W
Setting 88 89 90 65 66 67 85 86 87
NOTE
1 When the setting value is out of range, it can not be recognized as
an axis name.
2 When the custom macro function is enabled, the same extended
axis name as a reserved word cannot be used. Such an extended
axis name is regarded as a reserved word.
Because of reserved words of custom macros, extended axis
names that start with the following two characters cannot be used:
AB, AC, AD, AN, AS, AT, AX, BC, BI, BP, CA, CL, CO, US, WH,
WR, XO, ZD, ZE, ZO, ZW
3 In a macro call, no extended axis name can be used as an
argument.
1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system

To determine a plane for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and so forth (G17:
Xp-Yp plane, G18: Zp-Xp plane and G19: Yp-Zp plane), specify which of the basic three
axes (X, Y, and Z) is used for each control axis, or a parallel axis of which basic axis is
used for each control axis.
A basic axis (X, Y, or Z) can be specified only for one control axis.
Two or more control axes can be set as parallel axes for the same basic axis.
- 954 -
Setting Meaning
0 Rotary axis (Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis )
1 X axis of the basic three axes
2 Y axis of the basic three axes
3 Z axis of the basic three axes
5 Axis parallel to the X axis
6 Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 Axis parallel to the Z axis
In general, the increment system of an axis set as a parallel axis are to be set in the same
way as for the basic three axes.
1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis
NOTE

This parameter associates each control axis with a specific servo axis. Specify values
1+8n, 2+8n, 3+8n, 4+8n, 5+8n, and 6+8n (n = 0, 1, 2, …, 9) like 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, …, 77, and
78.
The control axis number is the order number that is used for setting the axis-type
parameters or axis-type machine signals
• For tandem controlled axes two axes need to be specified as one pair. So, make a
setting as described below.
Tandem axis: For a master axis, set an odd (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, ...) servo axis number. For a
slave axis to be paired, set a value obtained by adding 1 to the value
set for the master axis.
1025 Program axis name 2 for each axis
1026 Program axis name 3 for each axis

When axis name extension is enabled (when bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is set to
1), the length of an axis name can be extended to a maximum of three characters by
setting axis name 2 and axis name 3. For axis names 2 and 3, a character from '0' to '9'
and 'A' to 'Z' of ASCII code can be arbitrarily selected. However, the setting of axis name
3 for each axis is invalid if axis name 2 is not set. Moreover, if a character from '0' to '9' is
set as axis name 2, do not use a character from 'A' to 'Z' as axis name 3.
1031 Reference axis

[Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes
- 955 -
The unit of some parameters common to all axes such as those for dry run feedrate may
vary according to the increment system. An increment system can be selected by a
parameter on an axis-by-axis basis. So, the unit of those parameters is to match the
increment system of a reference axis. Set which axis to use as a reference axis.
Among the basic three axes, the axis with the finest increment system is generally
selected as a reference axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 FPC ZCL ZPR

#0 ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0: Not set automatically
1: Set automatically
NOTE
ZPR is valid while a workpiece coordinate system function is not
provided. If a workpiece coordinate system function is provided,
making a manual reference position return always causes the
workpiece coordinate system to be established on the basis of the
workpiece zero point offset (parameters Nos. 1220 to 1226),
irrespective of this parameter setting.
#2 ZCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is performed
0: The local coordinate system is not canceled.
1: The local coordinate system is canceled.
NOTE
ZCL is valid when the workpiece coordinate system option is
specified. In order to use the local coordinate system (G52), the
workpiece coordinate system option is required.
#3 FPC When a floating reference position is set with a soft key, the relative position indication
is:
0: Not preset to 0 (The relative position indication remains unchanged.)
1: Preset to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1202 G92

#2 G92 When the CNC has commands G52 to G59 specifying workpiece coordinate systems
(optional function), if the G command for setting a coordinate system (G92 for M series,
G50 for T series (or the G92 command in G command system B or C)) is specified,
0: G command is executed and no alarm is issued.
1: G command is not executed and an alarm PS0010, “IMPROPER G-CODE” is
issued.
- 956 -
1240 Coordinate value of the reference position in the machine coordinate system
NOTE

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate values of the reference position in the machine coordinate system.
1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position in the machine coordinate system
1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position in the machine coordinate system
1243 Coordinate value of the fourth reference position in the machine coordinate system

Set the coordinate values of the second to fourth reference positions in the machine
coordinate system.
1244 Coordinate value of the floating reference position in the machine coordinate system

Set the coordinate values of the floating reference position in the machine coordinate
system.
Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is
1250
performed

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
Set the coordinate system of the reference position on each axis to be used for performing
automatic coordinate system setting.
- 957 -
1260 The shift amount per one rotation of a rotary axis
NOTE

[Unit of data] Degree
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the shift amount per one rotation of a rotary axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 BFA LMS NAL OUT

#0 OUT The area inside or outside of the stored stroke check 2 is set as an inhibition area
0: Inside
1: Outside
#1 NAL When the tool enters the inhibition area of stored stroke limit 1:
0: The overtravel alarm signal is not output.
1: The overtravel alarm signal is output, and the tool is decelerated to a stop.
If manual operation is in progress at this time, the alarm is not output.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, the alarm is issued if the tool
enters stored stroke limit 1 during automatic operation.
#2 LMS The stored stroke check 1 select signal (EXLM3, EXLM2, or EXLM when stored stroke
check 1 area expansion is used) for switching stored stroke check
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NOTE
When bit 0 (DLM) of parameter No. 1301 is set to 1, the stored
stroke check 1 select signal EXLM <Gn007.6> (EXLM3
<Gn531.7>, EXLM2 <Gn531.6>, or EXLM <Gn007.6> when stored
stroke check 1 area expansion is used) is made invalid.
#7 BFA When the stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm is issued, an interference alarm is issued
with the inter-path interference check function (T series), or a chuck/tail stock barrier (T
series) alarm is issued:
0: The tool stops after entering the prohibited area.
1: The tool stops before the prohibited area.
- 958 -
NOTE
1. This parameter is valid even in AI contour control.
2. This parameter is invalid for the slave axis under axis synchronous
control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1301 OTS NPC

#2 NPC As part of the stroke limit check performed before movement, the movement specified in
G31 (skip) and G37 (automatic tool length measurement) blocks is:
0: Checked
1: Not checked
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the option for stroke limit check
before movement is selected.
#6 OTS When the overtravel alarm is issued:

0: The overtravel alarm signal is not output to the PMC.
1: The overtravel alarm signal is output to the PMC.
1320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis

Set the coordinate value of stored stroke check 1 on each axis in the + or - direction in the
machine coordinate system.
NOTE
1 Specify diameter values for any axes for which diameter
programming is specified.
2 The area outside the area set by parameters Nos. 1320 and 1321
is a prohibited area.
1322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis
1323 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis

- 959 -
NOTE
2 Whether the inside area or outside area is a prohibited area is set
using bit 0 (OUT) of parameter No. 1300.
1324 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the positive direction on each axis
1325 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negative direction on each axis

NOTE
2 The area inside the area set by parameters Nos. 1324 and 1325 is
a prohibited area.
1326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
1350 Coordinate value III of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1351 Coordinate value III of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
1352 Coordinate value IV of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1353 Coordinate value IV of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
1354 Coordinate value V of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1355 Coordinate value V of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
1356 Coordinate value VI of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1357 Coordinate value VI of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
1358 Coordinate value VII of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1359 Coordinate value VII of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
1360 Coordinate value VIII of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1361 Coordinate value VIII of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis

- 960 -
The stored stroke check 1 select signal (EXLM3, EXLM2, EXLM) and the stroke
parameter to be selected have the following relationships:
EXLM3 EXLM2 EXLM Stroke parameter to be selected

0 0 0 Coordinate value I (No. 1320 / No. 1321)
0 0 1 Coordinate value II (No. 1326 / No. 1327)
0 1 0 Coordinate value III (No. 1350 / No. 1351)
0 1 1 Coordinate value IV (No. 1352 / No. 1353)
1 0 0 Coordinate value V (No. 1354 / No. 1355)
1 0 1 Coordinate value VI (No. 1356 / No. 1357)
1 1 0 Coordinate value VII (No. 1358 / No. 1359)
1 1 1 Coordinate value VIII (No. 1360 / No. 1361)
NOTE
2 The outside of the area set with each parameter is treated as the
inhibition area.
3 The stored stroke check 1 select signal (EXLM3, EXLM2, EXLM) is
valid only when bit 2 (LMS) of parameter No. 1300 is 1.
4 When axis direction dependent stored stroke check 1 is enabled
(with bit 0 (DLM) of parameter No. 1301 set to 1), stroke parameter
switching by the stored stroke check 1 select signal (EXLM3,
EXLM2, EXLM) is disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RF0 LRP RPD

#0 RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power-on time to the completion of the
reference position return.
0: Disabled (Jog feed is performed.)
1: Enabled
#1 LRP Positioning (G00)

0: Positioning is performed with non-linear type positioning so that the tool moves
along each axis independently at rapid traverse.
1: Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool moves in a straight
line.
#4 RF0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,

0: The machine tool does not stop moving.
1: The machine tool stops moving.
- 961 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV

#4 JRV Jog feed or incremental feed is

0: Performed at feed per minute.
1: Performed at feed per rotation.
NOTE
1 Specify a feedrate in parameter No. 1423.
2 This bit must be set 0 with FANUC Series 30i/31i–PB.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1403 HTG

#5 HTG The feedrate for helical interpolation is:

0: Specified using the feedrate along the tangent to an arc
1: Specified using the feedrate along axes including a linear axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1404 FC0

#7 FC0 Specifies the behavior of the machine tool when a block (G01, G02, G03, etc.) containing
a feedrate command (F command) that is 0 is issued during automatic operation, as
follows:
0: An alarm PS0011, “FEED ZERO (COMMAND)” occurs.
1: An alarm PS0011 does not occur, and the block is executed.
NOTE
1 In inverse time feed (G93) mode, the alarm PS1202, "NO F
COMMAND AT G93" is issued irrespective of the setting of this
parameter.
2 This parameter is set from 1 to 0, if a bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.
3402 is 1, reset the CNC. Or if CLR is 0, turn off and on the CNC.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1408 RFDx

#0 RFDx Feedrate control on a rotary axis is exercised using:

0: Conventional method
1: Method that specifies a feedrate on the virtual circle of the rotary axis
- 962 -
1410 Dry run rate

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
Set the dry run rate at the 100% position on the jog feedrate specification dial. The unit of
data depends on the increment system of the reference axis.
1411 Cutting feedrate
NOTE

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit)
A cutting feedrate can be specified with this parameter for a machine which does not have
to change the cutting feedrate frequently during machining. This eliminates the need to
specify a cutting feedrate (F code) in the NC program.
1414 Feedrate for retrace

Set a cutting feedrate for retrace operation. When 0 is set, a retrace operation is performed
at a programmed feedrate.
NOTE
This parameter has no effect on blocks that are in rapid traverse
mode during reverse execution.
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis

Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each axis.
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis
- 963 -

Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis

(1) When bit 4 (JRV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 0 (feed per minute), specify a jog
feedrate (feed per minute) under an override of 100%.
(2) When bit 4 (JRV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1 (feed per revolution), specify a
jog feedrate (feed per revolution) under an override of 100%.
NOTE
This parameter is clamped to the axis-by-axis manual rapid traverse
rate (parameter No. 1424).
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each
axis.
NOTE
1 If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter No. 1420 (rapid traverse rate for
each axis) is assumed.
2 When manual rapid traverse is selected (bit 0 (RPD) of parameter
No. 1401 is set to 1), manual feed is performed at the feedrate set in
this parameter, regardless of the setting of bit 4 (JRV) of parameter
No. 1402.
1425 FL rate of the reference position return for each axis

- 964 -
Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position return is performed
for each axis.
1427 External deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis

Set the external deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis.
1428 Reference position return feedrate for each axis

This parameter sets a rapid traverse rate for reference position return operation using
deceleration dogs, or for reference position return operation before a reference position is
set.
This parameter is also used to set a feedrate for the rapid traverse command (G00) in
automatic operation before a reference position is set.
NOTE
1 To this feedrate setting 100%, a rapid traverse override (F0, 25, 50, or
100%) is applicable.
2 For automatic return after completion of reference position return and
machine coordinate system establishment, the normal rapid traverse rate is
used.
3 As a manual rapid traverse rate before machine coordinate system
establishment by reference position return, the jog feedrate or manual
rapid traverse rate can be selected with bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 1401.
Before coordinate After coordinate
system establishment system establishment
Automatic reference position return (G28) No. 1428 No. 1420
Automatic rapid traverse (G00) No. 1428 No. 1420
Manual reference position return *1 No. 1428 No. 1428 *3
Manual rapid traverse No. 1423 *2 No. 1424
4 When parameter No. 1428 is set to 0, the following parameter-set
feedrates are applied.
Before coordinate After coordinate
system establishment system establishment
Automatic reference position return (G28) No. 1420 No. 1420
Automatic rapid traverse (G00) No. 1420 No. 1420
Manual reference position return *1 No. 1424 No. 1424 *3
Manual rapid traverse No. 1423 *2 No. 1424
- 965 -
NOTE
No. 1420: Rapid traverse rate
No. 1423: Jog feedrate
No. 1424: Manual rapid traverse rate
*1 : By using bit 2 (JZR) of parameter No. 1401, the jog feedrate can be
used for manual reference position return at all times.
*2 : When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1, the setting of
parameter No. 1424 is used.
*3 : When rapid traverse is used for reference position setting without dogs
or manual reference position return after reference position
establishment, regardless of the deceleration dog, the feedrate for
manual reference position return based on these functions is used (the
setting of bit 1 (DLF) of parameter No. 1404 is followed).
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis

Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

Set a maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation mode such as AI contour control. When the acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation mode is not set, the maximum cutting feedrate set in parameter No. 1430 is
used.
1434 Maximum manual handle feedrate for each axis

Set a maximum manual handle feedrate for each axis in case of maximum manual handle
feedrate switch signal HNDLF<Gn023.3>=”1”.
1441 External deceleration rate setting 2 for each axis in rapid traverse

- 966 -
Set external deceleration rate 2 for each axis in rapid traverse.
1444 External deceleration rate setting 3 for each axis in rapid traverse

Set external deceleration rate 3 for each axis in rapid traverse.
1445 Maximum manual handle feedrate setting 3 for each axis

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit)
Set a maximum manual handle feedrate 3 for each axis.
1450 Change of feedrate for one graduation on the manual pulse generator during one-digit F feed code

Set the constant that determines the change in feedrate as the manual pulse generator is
rotated one graduation during one-digit F feed code.
F max i
ΔF = (where, i=1 or 2)
100n
In the above equation, set n. That is, the number of revolutions
of the manual pulse generator, required to reach feedrate Fmaxi is obtained. Fmaxi refers
to the upper limit of the feedrate for a one-digit F code feed command, and set it in
parameter No. 1460 or 1461.
Fmax1: Upper limit of the feedrate for F1 to F4 (parameter No. 1460)
Fmax2: Upper limit of the feedrate for F5 to F9 (parameter No. 1461)
1451 Feedrate for F1

to to
1459 Feedrate for F9

These parameters set the feedrates for one-digit F code feed commands F1 to F9. When a
one-digit F code feed command is specified, and the feedrate is changed by turning the
manual pulse generator, the parameter-set value also changes accordingly.
- 967 -
1460
Upper limit of feedrate for F1 to F4
1461
Upper limit of feedrate for F5 to F9

Set the upper limit of feedrate for the one-digit F code feed command.
As the feedrate increases by turning the manual pulse generator, the feedrate is clamped
when it reaches the upper limit set. If a one-digit F feed command F1 to F4 is executed,
the upper limit is that set in parameter No. 1460. If a one-digit F code feed command F5
to F9 is executed, the upper limit is that set in parameter No. 1461.
1465 Radius of a virtual circle when a feedrate is specified on the virtual circle of a rotary axis

[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (B)
Set the radius of a virtual circle when a feedrate on the virtual circle of a rotary axis is
specified.
If 0 is set for a rotary axis, the axis is excluded from feedrate calculation.
If the input unit is the inch, enter a value in inches.
The data is then converted to a millimeter value and displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1490 PGF

#7 PGF The feedrate specified for circular interpolation in the high-speed program check mode is:
0: The dry run feedrate.
At this time, manual feedrate override signals *JV0 to *JV15 <Gn010 to Gn011>
can be used.
1: The maximum feedrate specified by the CNC.
CAUTION
If this parameter is set to 1, feedrate clamp, override, and dry run
for circular interpolation are disabled. If a movement around a
stroke limit is specified, therefore, a stroke limit check cannot
sometimes be made correctly.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 NCI

- 968 -
#5 NCI An in-position check:
0: Confirms that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the acceleration/deceleration delay
becomes 0) at deceleration time and that the machine position has reached a
specified position (the servo positional deviation is within the in-position width set
by parameter No. 1826).
1: Confirms only that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the acceleration/deceleration
delay becomes 0) at deceleration time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1606 MNJx

#0 MNJx In manual handle interrupt or automatic manual simultaneous operation (interrupt type):
0: Only cutting feed acceleration/deceleration is enabled, and jog feed
acceleration/deceleration is disabled.
1: Both cutting feed acceleration/deceleration and jog feed acceleration/deceleration
are applied.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 CTBx CTLx

#0 CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
#1 CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/ deceleration is applied.
(depending on the setting in bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610)
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is applied.
Time constant T or T1 used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped

1620
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
Specify a time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.
[Example]
For linear acceleration/deceleration
Speed
Rapid traverse rate
(Parameter No. 1420)
T T
Time
- 969 -
T : Setting of parameter No. 1620
For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
Speed Rapid traverse rate

(Parameter No. 1420)
T2 T2 T2 T2
Time
T1 T1
T1 : Setting of parameter No. 1620

T2 : Setting of parameter No. 1621
(However, T1 ≥ T2 must be satisfied.)
Total acceleration (deceleration) time : T1 + T2
Time for linear portion : T1‐T2
Time for curve portion : T2 × 2
1622 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed,
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Which type to
use is selected with bits 1 (CTBx) and 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610. Except for
special applications, the same time constant must be set for all axes in this parameter. If
the time constants set for the axes differ from each other, proper straight lines and arcs
cannot be obtained.
1624 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis.

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis.
1660 Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for each axis

[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation for each axis.
- 970 -
If a value greater than 100000.0 is set, the value is clamped to 100000.0.
If 0 is set, the specification of 100000.0 is assumed. If 0 is set for all axes, however,
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not performed.
If a maximum allowable acceleration rate set for one axis is greater than a maximum
allowable acceleration rate set for another axis by a factor or 2 or more, the feedrate at a
corner where the direction of travel abruptly changes can decrease temporarily.
Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear rapid
1671 traverse for each axis, or maximum allowable reference acceleration rate in optimum torque

(1) Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation for linear rapid traverse.
If a value greater than 100000.0, the value is clamped to 100000.0.
If 0 is set, the specification of the following is assumed:
1000.0 mm/sec2
100.0 inch/sec2
100.0 degrees/sec2
If 0 is specified for all axes, however, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
is not performed.
(2) Maximum allowable reference acceleration rate in optimum torque
Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear rapid
1672 traverse, or acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in optimum torque

[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
(1) Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration for linear
rapid traverse (time for changing from the state of constant feedrate (A) to the state
of constant acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate calculated from the
acceleration rate set in parameter No. 1671: time of (B) in the figure below).
(2) Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration in optimum
torque acceleration/deceleration (time for changing from the state of constant
feedrate (A) to the state of acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate
calculated from optimum torque acceleration/deceleration: time of (B) in the figure).
- 971 -
F ee d ra te in ta n g e nt d ire ctio n
M axim u m a c ce le ra tio n ra te n ot e xc e ed in g
m a xim u m a llow a b le a c ce le ra tion rate s e t b y
p a ra m e te r N o . 1 6 7 1 fo r e a ch a xis is
a u to m atic a lly c a lc ula te d .
(A ) (B ) (C ) (B ) (A ) (B ) (C ) (B ) (A )
T im e se t b y p a ra m e te r N o . 1 6 7 2
Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for inner circular cutting feedrate change by automatic corner
1710
override

[Unit of data] %
Set a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for an inner circular cutting feedrate change by
automatic corner override.
In the case of circular cutting offset inward, the actual feedrate is determined by a
specified feedrate (F) as follows:
Rc
F× Rc: Radius of tool center path
Rp Rp: Programmed radius
Thus, the feedrate along the programmed path satisfies the specified value of F.
Programmed path
Rc
Tool center path
Rp
However, if Rc is too small when compared with Rp, Rc/Rp 0 results to stop the tool.
So, a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is set, and the feedrate of the tool is set to
F×(MDR) when Rc/Rp ≤ MDR.
When this parameter is 0, the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is 100%.
1711 Inner determination angle (θp) for inner corner override

[Unit of data] deg
Set an inner determination angle for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.
- 972 -
1712 Override value for inner corner override

[Unit of data] %
Set an inner corner override value in automatic corner overriding.
1713 Start distance (Le) for inner corner override

Set a start distance for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.
1714 End distance (Ls) for inner corner override

Set an end distance for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.
When θ ≤ θp, an inner corner is assumed. (Parameter No. 1711 is used to set θp.)
When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, an override is applied to the feedrate
in the range of Le in the previous block from the intersection of the corner and in the
range of Ls in the next block from the intersection of the corner.
Distances Le and Ls represent linear distances from the intersection of a corner to points
on the tool center path.
Le and Ls are set in parameters Nos. 1713 and 1714.
Programmed path
Tool center path
An override is applied to the range from point a to point b.
Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular
1732
interpolation

- 973 -
With the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular interpolation, an optimum
feedrate is automatically calculated so that acceleration produced by changing the move
direction in circular interpolation does not exceed the maximum allowable acceleration
rate specified in parameter No. 1735.
If the radius of an arc is very small, a calculated feedrate may become too low.
In such a case, the feedrate is prevented from decreasing below the value specified in this
parameter.
Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular
1735
interpolation for each axis

Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on
acceleration in circular interpolation.
Feedrate is controlled so that acceleration produced by changing the move direction in
circular interpolation does not exceed the value specified in this parameter.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the deceleration function based on acceleration is
disabled.
If a different value is set in this parameter for each axis, a feedrate is determined from the
smaller of the acceleration rates specified for the two circular axes.
Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI contour
1737
control for each axis

Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate produced by changing the tool move
direction.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the deceleration function based on acceleration is
disabled. If 0 is set for all axes, the deceleration function based on acceleration is not
performed.
In circular interpolation, however, the deceleration function based on feedrate control
using acceleration in circular interpolation (parameter No. 1735) is enabled.
1738 Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI contour control

- 974 -
With the deceleration function based on acceleration in AI contour control, a feedrate
most suitable for a desired figure is automatically calculated.
Depending on the figure, however, the calculated feedrate may become too low.
In such a case, the feedrate is prevented from decreasing below the value specified in this
parameter.
If overriding using the deceleration function based on cutting load is enabled, a feedrate
lower than the minimum allowable feedrate may be used.
Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in the

1769
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode

[Unit of data] msec
In the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode as in AI contour control, not
the ordinary time constant (parameter No. 1622) but the value of this parameter is used.
Be sure to specify the same time constant value for all axes except for a special
application. If different values are set, correct linear and circular figures cannot be
obtained.
1772 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

[Unit of data] msec
Set an acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration before
interpolation (time for changing from the state of constant feedrate (A) to the state of
constant acceleration/deceleration (C) at the acceleration rate calculated from the
acceleration rate set in parameter No. 1660: time of (B) in the figure).
Feedrate in tangent direction
Optimum inclination is automatically

calculated from the setting of parameter
No. 1660.
(A) (B) (C) (B) (A) (B) (C) (B) (A)
Time set by parameter No. 1772
1783 Maximum allowable feedrate difference for feedrate determination based on corner feedrate difference

- 975 -
If a feedrate component change for each axis exceeding the value set in this parameter
occurs at the joint of blocks, the feedrate determination function based on corner feedrate
difference finds a feedrate not exceeding the set value and performs deceleration by using
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Thus, a shock to the machine and
machining error at a corner can be reduced.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1802 DC2x DC4x

#1 DC4x When the reference position is established on the linear scale with reference marks:
0: An absolute position is established by detecting three reference marks.
1: An absolute position is established by detecting four reference marks.
#2 DC2x Reference position establishment operation for a linear scale with reference marks is
performed as follows:
0: The setting of bit 1 (DC4) of parameter No. 1802 is followed.
1: An absolute position is established by detecting two reference marks.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set to 1, specify the direction of the scale
zero point by setting bit 4 (SCP) of parameter No. 1817.
2 When a rotary encoder with absolute address reference marks is
used, this parameter is invalid. Even when this parameter is set to
1, the setting of bit 1 (DC4) of parameter No. 1802 is followed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCx APZx DCRx OPTx

NOTE
#1 OPTx Position detector

0: A separate Pulsecoder is not used.
1: A separate Pulsecoder is used.
NOTE
Set this parameter to 1 when using a linear scale with reference
marks or a linear scale with an absolute address zero point
(full-closed system).
#3 DCRx As a scale with absolute address reference marks:

0: A rotary encoder with absolute address reference marks is not used.
1: A rotary encoder with absolute address reference marks is used.
- 976 -
NOTE
When using a rotary encoder with absolute address reference
marks, set also bit 2 (DCLx) of parameter No. 1815 to 1.
#4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position
detector is used
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment is performed or after
the absolute position detector is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0, power must be
turned off and on, then manual reference position return must be performed. This
completes the positional correspondence between the machine position and the position
on the absolute position detector, and sets this parameter to 1 automatically.
#5 APCx Position detector

0: Other than absolute position detector
1: Absolute position detector (absolute Pulsecoder)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1817 TANx

NOTE
#6 TANx Tandem control

0: Not used
1: Used
NOTE
Set this parameter to both master axis and slave axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1818 SDC RF2x RFSx

#0 RFSx If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is not established (ZRF
<Fn120>= “0”) when a linear scale with an absolute address zero point or a linear scale
with absolute address reference marks is used:
0: A movement is made to the reference position after reference position establishment
operation.
1: No movement is made after reference position establishment operation, but the
NOTE
This parameter disables movement based on the G28 command to
a reference position. So, use this parameter only in special cases.
- 977 -
#1 RF2x If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is not established (reference
position establishment signal ZRF = 0) when a linear scale with an absolute address zero
point or a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used:
0: A movement is made to the reference position.
1: No movement is made to the intermediate position and reference position, but the
NOTE
This parameter disables movement based on the G28 command to
a reference position. So, use this parameter only in special cases.
#3 SDCx A linear scale with an absolute address zero point is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1819 DATx

#2 DATx When a linear scale with an absolute address zero point or a linear scale with absolute
address reference marks is used, the automatic setting of parameters Nos. 1883 and 1884
at manual reference position return time is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
The automatic setting procedure is as follows:

<1> Set an appropriate value in parameters Nos. 1815, 1821, and 1882.
<2> Position the machine at the reference position by manual operation.
<3> Set this parameter to 1.
<4> Perform a manual reference position return operation. Upon completion of manual
reference position return operation, parameters Nos. 1883 and 1884 are set, and this
parameter is automatically set to 0.
1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR)
NOTE

[Valid data range] See below :
Set a command multiplier indicating the ratio of the least command increment to the
detection unit for each axis.
Least command increment = detection unit × command multiplier
Relationship between the increment system and the least command increment
- 978 -
Increment Least input increment and least command increment

system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 mm
Millimeter input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 deg
Setting command multiply (CMR), detection multiply (DMR), and the capacity of the
reference counter
Command pulse
+ DA To
×CMR Error counter
Converter
least velocity
command - control
increment
Position
Reference counter ×DMR detector
Detection Feedback
unit pulse
Set CMR and DMR so that the pulse weight of + input (command from the CNC) into the
error counter matches the pulse weight of -input (feedback from the position detector).
[Least command increment]/CMR=[Detection unit]=
[Feedback pulse unit]/DMR
[Least command increment]
Minimum unit of commands issued from the CNC to the machine
[Detection unit]
Minimum unit for machine position detection
The unit of feedback pulses varies, depending on the type of detector.

[Feedback pulse unit]=
[Amount of travel per rotation of the Pulsecoder]/
[Number of pulses per rotation of the Pulsecoder]
As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the reference position
return in the grid method.
[Size of the reference counter]=[Grid interval]/[Detection unit]
[Grid interval]=[Amount of travel per rotation of the Pulsecoder]
The setting of a command multiplier is as follows:

(1) When command multiplier is 1 to 1/27
Set value = 1 / command multiplier + 100
Valid data range : 101 to 127
(2) When command multiply is 0.5 to 48
Set value = 2 × command multiplier
Valid data range : 1 to 96
NOTE
If a feedrate exceeding the feedrate found by the expression below
is used, an incorrect travel amount may result or a servo alarm may
be issued. Be sure to use a feedrate not exceeding the feedrate
found by the following expression:
Fmax[mm/min] = 196602 × 104 × least command increment / CMR
- 979 -
1821 Reference counter size for each axis
NOTE

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
Set a reference counter size.
As a reference counter size, specify a grid interval for reference position return based on
the grid method.
When a value less than 0 is set, the specification of 10000 is assumed.
When a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used, set the interval of
mark 1.
1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement

Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit during movement, a
servo alarm SV0411, “EXCESS ERROR (MOVING)” is generated, and operation is
stopped immediately (as in emergency stop).
Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus some margin in this
parameter.
1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state

Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis.
If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit
set for stopped state, a servo alarm SV0410, “EXCESS ERROR (STOP)” is generated,
and operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency stop).
1838 Position deviation limit for each axis in moving during safety check
NOTE

Position deviation limit for each axis during moving for safety check of Dual Check
Safety function is specified.
- 980 -
If position deviation of a moving axis exceeds position deviation limit while Safety
Check is carried out (Safety Monitoring Request “*VLDVx” =0), a servo alarm SV0475,
“EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:SV)” or SV1071, “EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:CNC)” is
generated and axes are stopped immediately like emergency stop state..
In Dual Check Safety function, positin deviation is always checked by CNC and Servo. In
case that Safety Check is carried out (Safety Monitoring Request “*VLDVx” =0), the
servo alarm SV0475 or SV1071 is generated when each CPU finds out that the deviation
exceeds position deviation limit in moving state.
Position deviation limit of each axis in moving state during other than Dual Check Safety monitoring
1841
(for Dual Check Safety Function)
NOTE

[Data type] 2 word axis
Set the positioning deviation limit in moving state for each axis for Dual Check Safety
function, in case that Safety Check is not carried out (Safety Monitoring Request
“*VLDVx”=1).
In case that Safety Check is not carried out (Safety Monitoring Request “*VLDVx” =1),
servo alarm SV0475, “EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:SV)” or SV1071, “EXCESS
ERROR(MOVE:CNC)” is generated and operation is stopped immediately (as in
emergency stop), when each CPU finds out that the deviation exceeds position deviation
limit in moving state.
If the value of this parameter is “0”, the parameter No.1828 is used for the value of
deviation limit in moving state.
In case that Safety Check is carried out (Safety Monitoring Request “*VLDVx” =0), the
parameter No.1838 is used for the value of deviation limit in moving state.
1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis

[Valid data range] -9999 to 9999
Set the backlash compensating value for each axis.
When the machine moves in a direction opposite to the reference position return direction
after the power is turned on, the first backlash compensation is performed.
1882 Interval of mark 2 of a linear scale with absolute address reference marks
NOTE

Set the interval of mark 2 of a linear scale with absolute address reference marks.
- 981 -
Distance 1 from the scale zero point to reference position (linear scale with absolute address reference
1883 marks) or distance 1 from the base point to reference position (linear scale with an absolute address
zero point)
NOTE

Distance 2 from the scale zero point to reference position (linear scale with absolute address reference
1884 marks) or distance 2 from the base point to reference position (linear scale with an absolute address
zero point)
NOTE

When a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used, set the distance from
the scale zero point to reference position in parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884).
Distance from the zero point to the reference position of a linear scale
= No. 1884 × 1,000,000,000 + No. 1883
The scale zero point represents a point where mark 1 and mark 2 match. Usually, this
point is a virtual point that does not physically exist on the scale. (See the Fig. A.1 (a).)
If the reference position is placed in the + direction when viewed from the scale zero
point, set a positive value. If the reference position is placed in the - direction when
viewed from the scale zero point, set a negative value.
Reference position
Zero point of encoder Encoder end
Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2

Mark 1 = mark 2
……..
8.0 42.0 8.2 41.8
PRM.1821
PRM.1882
PRM.1884 × 1,000,000,000 + PRM.1883
Fig. A.1 (a)
- 982 -
[Example of parameter settings]
When an encoder as shown Fig. A.1 (b) is used with an IS-B, millimeter machine:
Scale zero point + direction Reference position - direction
A B
Mark 1 = mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1
20.000 19.980 9.940 10.060 9.960 10.040 9.980 10.020
5.000 20.000mm
-[9960/(20020-20000)*20000+5000] = -9965000 20.020mm
Parameters
No.1821 (interval of mark 1) = 20000
No.1882 (interval of mark 2) = 20020
No.1883 (reference position) = position of point A + 5.000
= distance between A and B/(mark 2 − mark 1) × mark 1 + 5000
= 9960/(20020-20000) × 20000 + 5000
= 9965000
= -9965000 (the reference position is on the negative side)
Fig. A.1 (b)
[Setting parameter No. 1883]

When it is difficult to measure the distance from the scale zero point to the reference
position (parameter No. 1883), the method described below can be used to find the
distance.
<1> Set parameter No. 1815 to enable this function.

Set an appropriate value in parameter No. 1821 and No. 1882.
Set 0 in parameter No. 1240.
Set 0 in parameter No. 1883 and No. 1884.
<2> At an appropriate position, establish a reference position.
(As a result, the machine coordinate represents the distance from the scale zero point
to the current position.)
<3> By jog feed or handle feed, place the machine at the accurate reference position.
<4> In parameter No. 1883, set the machine coordinate of that time converted to the
detection unit (machine coordinate × CMR).
<5> If necessary, set parameter No. 1240.
When a linear scale with an absolute address zero point is used, set the distance from the
base point to the reference position in parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884. The base point is a
point at a scale end as shown Fig. A.1 (c).
- 983 -
Base point Reference position
Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1
10.020 9.980 10.040 9.960 10.060 9.940
20.000
20.020
Fig. A.1 (c)
If the reference position is located in the positive direction when viewed from the base
point, set a positive value; if the reference position is located in the negative direction, set
a negative value. Set the value by following the steps explained below.
<1> Set bit 1 (OPT) of parameter No. 1815 , bit 2 (DCL) of parameter No. 1815, and bit
3 (SDC) of parameter No. 1818 to enable this function.
Set 0 in parameter No. 1240.
Set 0 in parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884.
<2> At an appropriate position, establish a reference position.
(Consequently, the machine coordinate value indicates the distance from the base
point to current position.)
<3> By jog feed or handle feed, place the machine at the accurate reference position.
<4> In parameters Nos. 1883 and 1884, set the machine coordinate of that time converted
to the detection unit (machine coordinate × CMR).
If necessary, set parameter No. 1240.
NOTE
1 Set parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884 so that the distance from the
scale zero point (for a linear scale with absolute address reference
marks) or the base point (for a linear scale with an absolute
address zero point) to the reference position is within the range
from -999,999,999,999 to +999,999,999,999. If a value beyond this
range is set, an alarm DS0016 or DS1448 is issued.
2 The scale area on the scale cannot be extended across the scale
zero point or base point. Make parameter settings not to cause the
scale area to extend beyond the scale zero point or base point.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1902 ASE FMD

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
- 984 -
#0 FMD The FSSB setting mode is:
0: Automatic setting mode.
(When the relationship between an axis and amplifier is defined on the FSSB setting
screen, parameters Nos. 1023, 2013#0, 2014#0, 3717, 11802#4, 24000 to 24103 are
automatically set.
1: Manual setting 2 mode.
(Parameters Nos. 1023, 2013#0, 2014#0, 3717, 11802#4, 24000 to 24103 are to be
manually set.)
#1 ASE When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the bit 0 (FMD)
parameter No. 1902 is set to 0), automatic setting is:
0: Not completed.
1: Completed.
This bit is automatically set to 1 upon the completion of automatic setting.
Parameters Nos. 2000 to 2999 are for digital servo, The following parameters are not explained in this
manual. Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65270EN)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2011 XIAx

#7 XIAx Temporary absolute coordinate setting is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
1 When temporary absolute coordinate setting is used, bit 1 (OPTx)
of parameter No. 1815, bit 5 (APCx) of parameter No. 1815,
parameter No. 1874, and parameter No. 1875 must be set.
2 The setting of this parameter becomes effective after the power is
turned off then back on.
2031 Torque command difference threshold of torque difference alarm

If the absolute value of the torque command difference between two axes exceeds the
value set in this parameter, an alarm is issued.
Set the same value for two axes that are placed under axis synchronous control.
The servo axis numbers of the synchronized master axis and slave axis must be assigned
so that an odd number is assigned to the master axis and the next axis number is assigned
to the slave axis. Examples are (1,2) and (3,4).
- 985 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG
NOTE

#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is:

0: Fixed at the address.
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 3013, No. 3014,
No. 3012, and No. 3019. If parameter No. 3013 and No. 3014 are
not set, the deceleration signal for reference position return is
assigned to bit 0 of <X0000>. If parameter No. 3012 and No. 3019
are not set, the skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the
measurement position arrival signal, the manual feed interlock
signal for each axis direction, and the tool compensation value
write signal are assigned to <X0000>.
3012 Skip signal assignment address
NOTE

Set an X address to which the skip signal SKIPn is to be assigned.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually
usable X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
3013 X address to which the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned
NOTE

- 986 -
Set an address to which the deceleration signal *DECn for reference position return for
each axis is to be assigned.
NOTE
set to 1.
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signal, and tool offset
3019
write signals are assigned
NOTE

Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, measurement position
arrival signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE), and tool offset write signals are to be assigned.
Example 1. When parameter No. 3012 is set to 5 and parameter No. 3019 is set to 6
When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, and
measurement position arrival signal are allocated to X0006 and the skip signal is
allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0005 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0006 ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE
Example 2. When parameter No. 3012 is set to 5 and parameter No. 3019 is set to 5
When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal,
measurement position arrival signal, and skip signal are allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0005 ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
NOTE
set to 1.
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
3021 Address to which an axis signal is assigned
- 987 -
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 10 to 17, 20 to 27, ... , 90 to 97
For each axis of the CNC, set a PMC interface address.
Set a value according to the tables below.
Value of parameter No. 3021 (the second digit)
Setting value Input signal address Output signal address
0 G0000 to G0767 F0000 to F0767
1 G1000 to G1767 F1000 to F1767
:
9 G9000 to G9767 F9000 to F9767
Value of parameter No. 3021 (the first digit)

Setting value Input signal address Output signal address
0 0 0
1 1 1
:
7 7 7
[Example of setting]
Axis number No. 3021 Signal allocation
1 0 +J1<G0100.0>, -J1<G0102.0>, ZP1<F0090.0>, ...
2 1 +J2<G0100.1>, -J2<G0102.1>, ZP2<F0090.1>, ...
3 2 +J3<G0100.2>, -J3<G0102.2>, ZP3<F0090.2>, ...
4 10 +J4<G1100.0>, -J4<G1102.0>, ZP4<F1090.0>, ...
5 11 +J5<G1100.1>, -J5<G1102.1>, ZP5<F1090.1>, ...
If eight or less axes are used per path, the following signal allocation results when 0 is set
for all axes:
Axis 1 of path 1 = Setting equivalent to 0
:
:
NOTE
Set this parameter when more than eight axes are used per path.
The valid data range varies, depending on the system software.
3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M, S, and T codes.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.
- 988 -
3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code (second auxiliary function)

Set the allowable number of digits for the second auxiliary function.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.
To enable a decimal point to be specified, bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No. 3450 must be set
to 1. In this case, the allowable number of digits set in this parameter includes the number
of decimal places.
If a value exceeding the allowable number of digits is specified, the alarm PS0003, “TOO
MANY DIGIT” is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 DAC DRC PPD MCN

#0 MCN Machine position

0: Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is
displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for inch machines.
1: When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm, and when
input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in inches accordingly.
#3 PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set

0: Not preset
1: Preset
NOTE
If any of the following is executed when PPD is set to 1, the relative
position display is preset to the same value as the absolute position
display:
(1) Manual reference position return
(2) Coordinate system setting based on G92
(3) Workpiece coordinate system presetting based on G92.1
#5 DRC When relative positions are displayed:
0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool
nose radius compensation are displayed.
1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose
radius compensation (programmed positions) are displayed.
#7 DAC When an absolute position are displayed:

0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool
nose radius compensation are displayed.
1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose
radius compensation (programmed positions) are displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 OPM SVS

- 989 -
#0 SVS Servo setting screen and servo tuning screen

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
#5 OPM Operating monitor

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3115 NDAx NDPx

#0 NDPx The current position is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
#1 NDAx The current position and the amount of the movement to be made in absolute and relative
coordinates are:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
3131 Subscript of axis name

In order to distinguish axes under parallel operation, synchronization control, and tandem
control, specify a subscript for each axis name.
Setting value Meaning
Each axis is set as an axis other than a parallel axis, synchronization control
0
axis, and tandem control axis.
1 to 9 A set value is used as a subscript.
65 to 90 A set letter (ASCII code) is used as a subscript.
[Example] When the axis name is X, a subscript is added as indicated below.

Setting value Axis name displayed on a screen such as the position display screen
0 X
1 X1
77 XM
83 XS
If a multi-path system is used, no extended axis name is used within a path, and no
subscript is set for the axis names, then the path number is automatically used as the
subscript for the axis names. To disable the display of axis name subscripts, set a blank
(32) of ASCII code in the parameter for specifying an axis name subscript.
NOTE
If even one axis in a path uses an extended axis name when bit 2
(EAS) of parameter No. 11308 is set to 0, subscripts cannot be
used for axis names in the path.
3141 Path name (1st character)
- 990 -
3142 Path name (2nd character)
3143 Path name (3rd character)

[Valid data range] See the character-code correspondence table.
Specify a path name with codes.
Any character string consisting of alphanumeric characters, katakana characters, and
special characters with a maximum length of seven characters can be displayed as a series
name.
NOTE
1 For characters and codes, see Appendix A, “CHARACTER CODE
LIST”.
2 When 0 is set in parameter No. 3141, PATH1(,PATH2...) are
displayed as path names.
3 When optional path name display is enlarged (with bit 2 (PNE) of
parameter No. 11350 set to 1), only alphanumeric characters are
displayed. If any other type of characters are set, spaces are
displayed instead.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE

#6 NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8

#0 NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999

0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
- 991 -
(5) Program registration

(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs
NOTE
This parameter setting does not affect the following programs:
(1) Programs on the Data Server
(2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a
memory card
#4 NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999

0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs
NOTE
This parameter setting does not affect the following programs:
(1) Programs on the Data Server
(2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a
memory card
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3203 MCL MER MZE

#5 MZE After MDI operation is started, program editing during operation is:
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
#6 MER When the last block of a program has been executed at single block operation in the MDI
mode, the executed block is:
0: Not deleted
1: Deleted
NOTE
When MER is set to 0, the program is deleted if the end-of-record
mark (%) is read and executed. (The mark % is automatically
inserted at the end of a program.)
#7 MCL Whether a program prepared in the MDI mode is cleared by reset

0: Not deleted
1: Deleted
- 992 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3204 MKP

#6 MKP When M02, M30, or EOR(%) is executed during MDI operation, the created MDI
program is:
0: Erased automatically.
1: Not erased automatically.
NOTE
If the bit 6 (MER) of parameter No. 3203 is set to 1, executing the
last block provides a choice of whether to automatically erase a
created program.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3207 VRN

[Data type] Bit
#5 VRN On the custom macro variable screen, the variable names of common variables #500 to
#549 are:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
3210 Program protection (PSW)

[Data type] 2-word
This parameter sets a password for protecting program Nos. 9000 to 9999. When a value
other than zero is set in this parameter and this value differs from the keyword set in
parameter No. 3211, bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202 for protecting program Nos. 9000
to 9999 is automatically set to 1.
This disables the editing of program Nos. 9000 to 9999. Until the value set as the
password is set as a keyword, NE9 cannot be set to 0 and the password cannot be
modified.
NOTE
1 The state where password ≠ 0 and password ≠ keyword is referred
to as the locked state. When an attempt is made to modify the
password by MDI input operation in this state, the warning
message "WRITE PROTECTED" is displayed to indicate that the
password cannot be modified. When an attempt is made to modify
the password with G10 (programmable parameter input), alarm
PS0231, “ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 L52” is issued.
2 When the value of the password is not 0, the parameter screen
does not display the password. Care must be taken in setting a
password.
- 993 -
3211 Program protection key (KEY)

[Data type] 2-word
When the value set as the password (set in parameter No. 3210) is set in this parameter,
the locked state is released and the user can now modify the password and the value set in
bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202.
NOTE
The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When the power is
turned off, this parameter is set to 0.
3220 Password (PSW)
[Input type] Locked parameter

[Data type] 2-word
This parameter sets a password (PSW). When a value other than 0 is set, a password is set.
When a password is set, a blank is displayed in this parameter, and the state (locked state)
where an operation such as program editing is locked is set. When password (PSW) = 0,
namely, in the normal state, or when password (PSW) = keyword (KEY), namely, in the
unlock state, this parameter can be set.
3221 Keyword (KEY)

[Data type] 2-word
When the same value as the password (PSW) is set in this parameter, the lock is released
(unlock state). The value set in this parameter is not displayed.
The value of this parameter is initialized to 0 automatically when the power is turned on.
So, if the power is turned off in the unlock state then is turned on again, the lock state is
automatically set.
3222 Program protection range (minimum value) (PMIN)
3223 Program protection range (maximum value) (PMAX)

[Data type] 2-word
The programs in a range set here can be locked. Set the minimum program number and
maximum program number of a desired range.
Set these parameters to satisfy PMAX > PMIN.
These parameters can be set when password (PSW) = 0, namely, in the normal state, or
when password (PSW) = keyword (KEY), namely in the unlock state.
[Example] Parameter No. 3222 = 7000
Parameter No. 3223 = 8499
When the values above are set, the programs from O7000 to O8499 can be locked.
When PMIN = 0, the specification of PMIN = 9000 is assumed. When PMAX = 0, the
specification of PMAX = 9999 is assumed. So, when these parameters are set to the
defaults, the programs from O9000 to O9999 are locked.
- 994 -
NOTE
1 Parameters Nos. 3220 to 3223 are neither outputted nor read.
2 Parameters Nos. 3220 to 3223 are not cleared even when a
parameter file clear operation is performed in the IPL state.
3 The values of a password (PSW) and keyword (KEY) are not
displayed. When password (PSW) = 0, 0 is displayed in parameter
No. 3220 to indicate that the normal state is set.
4 When a password (PSW) or keyword (KEY) is set, [+INPUT] has
the same effect as [INPUT]. For example, if the input operation
"1[+INPUT]" is performed when 99 is set in the keyword (KEY)
parameter, 1 is set.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3233 PDM PCE

[Data type] Bit
#0 PCE Program editing is:

0: Performed in the word edit mode.
1: Performed in the character edit mode.
#1 PDM On the Data Server file list screen:

0: M198 operation folders and DNC operation files can be set.
1: Folders in the Data Server can be set as the foreground folder and background
folder.
NOTE
When an M198 external subprogram call or DNC operation is
performed on the Data Server, set this bit to 0.
For the foreground and background folders, refer to Chapter,
"PROGRAM MANAGEMENT".
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3280 NLC

[Data type] Bit
#0 NLC Dynamic display language switching is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
When dynamic display language switching is disabled, the language setting screen is not
displayed. In this case, change the setting of parameter No. 3281 on the parameter screen
then turn on the power again to switch the display language.
3281 Display language

[Data type] Byte
Select a display language from the following:
0 : English
- 995 -
1 : Japanese
2 : German
3 : French
4 : Chinese(traditional characters)
5 : Italian
6 : Korean
7 : Spanish
8 : Dutch
9 : Danish
10 : Portuguese
11 : Polish
12 : Hungarian
13 : Swedish
14 : Czech
15 : Chinese(simplified characters)
16 : Russian
17 : Turkish
If a number not indicated above is set, English is selected.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3400 MGC

#1 MGC When a single block specifies multiple M commands, an M code group check is:
0: Made.
1: Not made.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 ABS MAB DPI

#0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point
0: The least input increment is assumed. (Normal decimal point input)
1: The unit of mm, inches, degree, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point input)
#4 MAB Switching between the absolute and incremental programming in MDI operation
0: Performed by G90 or G91
1: Depending on the setting of bit 5 (ABS) of parameter No. 3401
NOTE
When G code system A of the lathe system is used, this parameter
is invalid.
#5 ABS Program command in MDI operation

0: Assumed as an incremental programming
1: Assumed as an absolute programming
- 996 -
NOTE
ABS is valid when bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1.
When G code system A of the lathe system is used, this parameter
is invalid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3402 G23 CLR G91 G19 G18 G01

#0 G01 G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)
#1 G18 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G17 mode (plane XY)
1: G18 mode (plane ZX)
#2 G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: The setting of bit 1 (G18) of parameter No. 3402 is followed.
1: G19 mode (plane YZ)
When this bit is set to 1, set bit 1 (G18) of parameter No. 3402 to 0.
#3 G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared

0: G90 mode (absolute programming)
1: G91 mode (incremental programming)
#6 CLR key on the MDI unit, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, and emergency
stop signal
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.
For the reset and clear states, refer to Appendix in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
#7 G23 When the power is turned on

0: G22 mode (stored stroke check on)
1: G23 mode (stored stroke check off)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3403 ADB

#6 ADB When the same address two or more times are specified in one block:
0: The address specified last is valid.
1: It is treated as a program error and the alarm PS5074, "ADDRESS DUPLICATION
ERROR" is issued.
- 997 -
NOTE
The following notes apply when this parameter is set to 1:
1 When two or more M codes are acceptable to one block, up to three
M codes can be specified in the same block. Specifying more than
three results in the alarm PS5074.
2 You can specify any number of G codes in the same block as long as
they belong to different groups. Specifying G codes belonging to the
same group causes the alarm PS5074. You can however specify any
number of G90 and G91 codes in the same block as they cause no
alarm.
3 The alarm is not caused by blocks which call a custom macro or
execution macro.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M3B M02 M30 SBP POL

#1 POL When a command is specified with a decimal point omitted in an address that can include
a decimal point:
0: The command is assumed to be valid as it is.
1: A program error is assumed and the alarm PS5073, "NO DECIMAL POINT" is
issued.
NOTE
The following notes apply when this parameter is set to 1:
1 G codes with a decimal point omitted do not cause the alarm PS5073.
2 Commands using a macro variable or numerical expression are
treated as commands with a decimal point. Accordingly, they do not
cause the alarm PS5073.
3 Argument specification I/II of a custom macro/execution macro does
not cause the alarm PS5073.
4 Omitting a decimal point from a command of an extended axis name
causes the alarm PS5073.
5 Omitting a decimal point from a command in an execution macro also
causes the alarm PS5073.
6 Address R indicating setting data for programmable parameter input
(G10L52) does not cause the alarm PS5073.
#2 SBP In an external device subprogram call, the address P format is based on:
0: File number specification
1: Program number specification
NOTE
In memory card operation, the program number specification
format is used, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
#4 M30 When M30 is specified in a memory operation:

0: M30 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched
for. So, when the ready signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind
operation is not performed, the program is executed, starting from the beginning.
1: M30 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched for. (The
head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind signal.)
- 998 -
#5 M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation
0: M02 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched
for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind
operation is not performed, the program is executed, starting from the beginning.
1: M02 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched for. (The
head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind signal.)
#7 M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block

0: One
1: Up to three
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 DWL AUX

#0 AUX When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the multiplication factor for a value output (onto the code
signal) relative to a specified value is such that:
0: The same multiplication factor is used for both of metric input and inch input.
1: A multiplication factor used for inch input is 10 times greater than that used for
metric input.
When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the value output onto the code signal is a specified value
multiplied by a value indicated below.
Increment system Parameter AUX=0 Parameter AUX=1
IS-A for reference axis 100 times 100 times
Metric IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 1000 times
input IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 10000 times
system IS-D for reference axis 100000 times 100000 times
IS-E for reference axis 1000000 times 1000000 times
IS-A for reference axis 100 times 1000 times
IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 10000 times
Inch input
IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 100000 times
system
IS-D for reference axis 100000 times 1000000 times
IS-E for reference axis 1000000 times 10000000 times
#1 DWL The dwell time (G04) is:

0: Always dwell per second.
1: Dwell per second in the feed per minute mode.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3406 C07 C06 C05 C04 C03 C02 C01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3407 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C09 C08
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3408 C23 C22 C20 C19 C18 C17 C16
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3409 C30 C29 C28 C27 C26 C25 C24

[Data type] Bit
- 999 -
C01 to C30 If bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1, set a group of G codes to be placed in the
cleared state when the CNC is reset by the key of the MDI unit, the external reset
signal, the reset and rewind signal, or the emergency stop signal.
The table below indicates the correspondence between bits and G code groups
The setting of a bit has the following meaning:
0: Places the G code group in the cleared state.
1: Does not place G code group in the cleared state.
Parameter G code group

C01 01
C02 02
C03 03
: :
C30 30
3410 Tolerance of arc radius

(B))
When a circular interpolation command is executed, the tolerance for the radius between
the start point and the end point is set.
3411 M code preventing buffering 1

to to

Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing directed by an M
code must be performed by the machine without buffering the following block, specify
the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they are not specified in
these parameters.
3421 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)
3422 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)
- 1000 -

When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameters Nos. 3421 and
3422, 3423 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429 and 3430, or 3431 and 3432,
buffering for the next block is not performed until the execution of the block is
completed.
NOTE
M00, M01, M02, and M30 are M codes that do not perform
buffering, regardless of parameter setting.
M98, M99, M codes for calling subprograms, and M codes for
calling custom macros are M codes that performs buffering,
regardless of parameter setting.
3441 Start number of M codes for which an M code group can be set (1)

[Valid data range] 0, 100to99999999
Code numbers 0 to 99 on the M code group setting screen correspond to M00 to M99.
When adding M codes after the first 100 M codes, specify a start M code number in these
parameters. Thus, up to 400 M codes can be added to the M code group setting screen in
groups of 100 M codes starting with the set value. When 0 is set, no M codes are added to
the M code group setting screen.
When setting these parameters, follow the setting condition described below. If the
condition is not satisfied, no M codes are added to the M code group setting screen as in
the case where 0 is set.
(Setting condition)
The settings of parameters (1) to (4) (excluding the setting of 0) must satisfy:
99 < (1), (1)+99 < (2), (2)+99 < (3), (3) +99 < (4)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3450 BDX AUP

#0 AUP The second auxiliary function specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format,
with a decimal point, or with a negative value is:
- 1001 -
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
If the second auxiliary function is specified after setting this bit to 0, the following
operation results:
1. When a value is specified without a decimal point
A specified value is output onto the code signal without modification, regardless of
the setting of the calculator-type decimal point input format (with bit 0 (DPI) of
parameter No. 3401).
2. When a value is specified with a decimal point
The alarm PS0007, “ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT” is issued.
3. When a negative value is specified
The alarm PS0006, “ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN” is issued.
#7 BDX When ASCII code is called using the same address as the address for the second auxiliary
function (specified by parameter No. 3460), this parameter prevents the argument unit
used when the option for the second auxiliary function is selected from differing from the
argument unit used when the same option is not selected.
0: When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No. 3450 is set to 1, the argument unit differs,
depending on whether the option for the second auxiliary function is selected or not.
1: The same argument unit is used. (The unit applied when the option for the second
auxiliary function is selected is used.)
[Example]
A setting is made so that address B is used to call O9004, and the program O1 below
is executed with parameter No. 3460 = 66.
O1 O9004
B2 #500 = #146
M30 M99
When the increment system is IS-B, and metric input is used, #500 assumes a value
indicated in the table below.
Bit 0 (DPI) of Bit 0 (AUP) of BDX=0

parameter parameter Without the second With the second auxiliary BDX=1
No. 3401 No. 3450 auxiliary function option function option
0 2.000 2.000 2.000
0
1 2.000 0.002 0.002
0 2.000 2.000 2.000
1
1 2.000 2.000 2.000
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3452 EAP
#7 EAP When bit 0 (ADX) of parameter No. 3455 is set to 1, calculator-type decimal point input
at a macro calling argument address is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 is
set to 0.
- 1002 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3454 G1B

#4 G1B In programmable parameter input, specifying a change to a specific bit parameter is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (A bit number is specified with Q_.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3455 AXDx

#0 AXDx If a decimal point is omitted for an axis address with which a decimal point can be used,
the value is determined:
0: In accordance with the least input increment. (Normal decimal point input)
1: In millimeters, inches, degrees, or seconds. (calculator-type decimal point input)
NOTE
This parameter specifies the calculator-type decimal point input
function for each axis.
For the same axis name, be sure to make the same setting.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3457 SCF SCC SYS MC1 MC2 LIB

NOTE
1 The parameters LIB, MC2, MC1, and SYS are used to set a search
folder for the following subprogram/macro calls:
• Subprogram call based on an M code
• Subprogram call based on a particular address
• Subprogram call based on a second auxiliary function code
• Macro call based on a G code
• Macro call based on an M code
• Macro call based on a T code
• One-touch macro call
2 The parameter SCF is used to set whether to add a search folder
for the following subprogram/macro calls:
• Subprogram call based on M98
• Macro call based on G65/G66/G66.1
• Macro interrupt based on M96
#0 LIB The common program directory "//CNC_MEM/USER/LIBRARY/" of the initial

directories is:
0: Set as a search directory.
1: Not set as a search directory.
- 1003 -
#1 MC2 MTB dedicated directory 2 "//CNC_MEM/MTB2/" of the initial directories is:

#2 MC1 MTB dedicated directory 1 "//CNC_MEM/MTB1/" of the initial directories is:

#3 SYS The system directory "//CNC_MEM/SYSTEM/" of the initial directories is:

#6 SCC The same folder as the main program is added to the top of the search order as a search
folder for the following each subprogram call and macro call.
• Subprogram call by M code
• Subprogram call by ASCII code
• Subprogram call by the second auxiliary function code
• Macro call by S code
• Macro call by T code
• Macro call by G code
• Macro call by M code
• One-touch macro call
The same folder as the main program is:

0: Not added in the search order.
1: Added in the search order.
When a search folder is added, a search is made in the following order:
0) Folder only for embedded macro (With the embedded macro-function.)
1) Folder where the main program is stored
2) Common program folder, which is an initial folder (LIBRARY)
3) MTB-dedicated folder 2, which is an initial folder (MTB2)
5) System folder, which is an initial folder (SYSTEM)
The folders of 2) through 5) can be excluded from search target folders by setting the bits
0 (LIB), 1 (MC2), 2 (MC1), and 3 (SYS) of parameter No. 3457.
#7 SCF A search folder is:

0: Not added.
1: Added.
When a search folder is added, a search is made in the following order:

0) Folder only for embedded macro (With the embedded macro-function.)
1) Folder where the main program is stored
2) Common program folder, which is an initial folder (LIBRARY)
5) System folder, which is an initial folder (SYSTEM)
The folders of 3) through 5) can be excluded from search target folders by setting the bits
1 (MC2), 2 (MC1), and 3 (SYS) of parameter No. 3457.
- 1004 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3459 ESL

NOTE
#0 ESL When an NC program contains lowercase alphabetic characters:

0: An alarm is issued.
1: The lowercase characters are converted into their uppercase equivalents.
This parameter specifies how to handle lowercase alphabetic characters included in an

NC program, except in its comment part, program name, and folder name, when the
program is registered from an external device into CNC built-in memory or compared.
The parameter setting also applies to M198 operation or DNC operation as automatic
operation.
[Example] G90G01X100y50;
When ESL is 1, the program is assumed to be G90G01X100Y50;.
When ESL is 0, the alarm SR1090, "PROGRAM FORMAT ERROR" is displayed upon
registration or comparison. During operation, the alarm PS1090, "PROGRAM FORMAT
ERROR" is issued.
NOTE
1 Program transfer by the program batch input/output function is
excluded.
2 Program transfer by the FTP file transfer function is excluded.
3460 Second auxiliary function specification address

[Valid data range] 65to67, 85to87
Specify which of A, B, C, U, V, and W is to be used as the address for specifying the
second auxiliary function. If an address used as an axis name is specified, the second
auxiliary function is disabled.
Name A B C U V W
Setting value 65 66 67 85 86 87
Address B is assumed when a value other than the above is set.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3605 BDPx

NOTE
- 1005 -
#0 BDPx Both-direction pitch error compensation is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
3620 Number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position for each axis
NOTE

Set the number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position for
each axis.
3621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each axis
NOTE

Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely negative
position for each axis.
3622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each axis
NOTE

Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely positive position
for each axis.
This value must be larger than set value of parameter No. 3620.
3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis
NOTE

Set the magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis.
If the magnification is set to 1, the same unit as the detection unit is used for the
compensation data.
- 1006 -
If 0 is set, compensation is not performed.
3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis
NOTE
[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Real axis
[Unit of data]
mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data]
Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range]
See the description below.
The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with equal spacing. The space
between two adjacent positions is set for each axis. The minimum interval between pitch
error compensation positions is limited and obtained from the following equation:
Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions = maximum feedrate/7500
Unit : mm, inch, deg or mm/min, inch/min, deg/min
[Example] When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, the minimum interval between pitch error
compensation positions is 2 mm.
3625 Travel distance per revolution in pitch error compensation of rotation axis type
NOTE

[Valid data range] See the description below.
If the pitch error compensation of rotation axis type is performed (bit 1 (ROSx) of
parameter No. 1006 is set to 0 and bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1), set the
travel distance per revolution. The travel distance per revolution does not have to be 360
degrees, and a cycle of pitch error compensation of rotation axis type can be set.
However, the travel distance per revolution, compensation interval, and number of
compensation points must satisfy the following condition:
(Travel distance per revolution)
= (Compensation interval) × (Number of compensation points)
The compensation at each compensation point must be set so that the total compensation
per revolution equals 0.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the travel distance per revolution becomes 360 degrees.
Number of the both-direction pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position (for
3626
movement in the negative direction)
NOTE
- 1007 -

When using both-direction pitch error compensation, set the number of compensation
point at the farthest end in the negative direction for a movement in the negative
direction.
NOTE
1 For a movement in the positive direction, set the compensation point
number at the farthest end in the negative direction in parameter No.
3621.
2 A set of compensation data items for a single axis should not be set
to lie astride 1023 to 3000.
Pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement to the reference position is made
3627
from the direction opposite to the direction of reference position return
NOTE

Set the absolute value of pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement
to the reference position is made from the negative direction if the direction of reference
position return (bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter No. 1006) is positive or from the positive
direction if the direction of reference position return is negative.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003 SUV SUP

#0 SUP
#1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of tool radius compensation.
0 0 Type A compensation vector perpendicular to the block next to the startup block or
A the block preceding the cancellation block is output.
Tool center path
G41
Programmed path
N2
N1
- 1008 -

0 1 Type A compensation vector perpendicular to the startup block or cancellation block
B and an intersection vector are output.
Intersection point
Tool center path
G41 Programmed path

N2
N1
1 0 Type When the startup block or cancellation block specifies no movement operation,
1 C the tool is shifted by the cutter compensation amount in a direction
perpendicular to the block next to the startup or the block before cancellation
block.
Intersection point Tool center path
Programmed path
N3
Shift
G41 N2
When the block specifies movement operation, the type is set according to the
SUP setting; if SUP is 0, type A is set, and if SUP is 1, type B is set.
NOTE
When SUV,SUP = 0,1 (type B), an operation equivalent to that of
FS16i-T is performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5004 ODI

#2 ODI The setting of a tool radius compensation value is corrected as:

0: Radius value
1: Diameter value
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5008 MCR

#4 MCR If G41/G42 (tool radius - tool nose radius compensation) is specified in the MDI mode,
an alarm is:
0: Not raised.
1: Raised. (alarm PS5257, “G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI MODE”)
5029 Number of tool compensation value memories common to paths
- 1009 -
NOTE

[Data type] Word
When using memories common to paths, set the number of common tool compensation
values in this parameter.
Ensure that the setting of this parameter does not exceed the number of tool compensation
values set for each path (parameter No. 5024).
[Example 1] When parameter No. 5029 = 10, parameter No. 5024 (path 1) = 15, and parameter No.
5024 (path 2) = 30 in a 2-path system, tool compensation numbers 1 to 10 of all paths are
made common.
[Example 2] When parameter No. 5029 = 20 and the other conditions are the same as for Example 1,
tool compensation numbers 1 to 15 are made common.
NOTE
1 When a multi-path system is used, memories are made common in
each system.
2 The same unit of tool compensation values needs to be used.
3 Ensure that the setting of parameter No. 5029 does not exceed the
number of tool compensation values for each path (parameter No.
5024). If the setting of parameter No. 5029 exceeds the number of
compensation values of a path, the least of the numbers of
compensation values in all paths is made common.
4 When 0 or a negative value is set, memories common to paths are
not used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5042 OFE OFD OFC OFA

NOTE
#0 OFA
#1 OFC
#2 OFD
#3 OFE These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data range of a tool offset
value.
For metric input
OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit Valid data range
0 0 0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0 0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
0 0 1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm
0 1 0 0 0.00001mm ±9999.99999mm
1 0 0 0 0.000001mm ±999.999999mm
- 1010 -
For inch input
OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit Valid data range
0 0 0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0 0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
0 0 1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch
0 1 0 0 0.000001inch ±999.999999inch
1 0 0 0 0.0000001inch ±99.9999999inch
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5400 SCR XSC

#6 XSC The setting of a scaling magnification (axis-by-axis scaling) is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 SCR Scaling (G51) magnification unit:

0: 0.00001 times (1/100,000)
1: 0.001 times
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5401 SCLx

#0 SCLx Scaling on this axis:

0: Invalidated
1: Validated
5411 Scaling (G51) magnification

[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400)
[Valid data range] 1to999999999
This parameter sets a scaling magnification when axis-by-axis scaling is disabled (with
bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 0). If no scaling magnification (P) is specified in
the program, the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification.
NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data
range is 1 to 9999999.
5421 Scaling magnification for each axis

[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400)
[Valid data range] -999999999 to -1, 1 to 999999999
- 1011 -
This parameter sets a scaling magnification for each axis when axis-by-axis scaling is
enabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 1). For the first spindle to the
third spindle (X-axis to Z-axis), the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling
magnification if scaling magnifications (I, J, K) are not specified in the program.
NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data
ranges are -9999999 to -1 and 1 to 9999999.
5481
Feedrate of rotation of the normal direction controlled axis

[Unit of data] deg/min
This parameter sets the feedrate of the movement along the normal direction controlled
axis that is inserted at the start point of a block during normal direction control.
5483 Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal direction angle of a preceding block

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (B)
N2 For straight line
Tool center path When the travel distance of N2 in the figure
on the left does not exceed the setting, block
N3 N2 is machined with the tool being normal to
N1 block N1.
Travel
distance
Programmed path
N2 For arc
Tool center path When the arc diameter of N2 in the figure on
Programmed path the left does not exceed the setting, arc N2
is machined with the tool being normal to
N3 block N1. A normal direction axis is not
controlled to move in the normal direction
according to the arc movement.
N1
Diameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6000 SBV SBM HGO V15 MGO G67

#0 G67 If the macro modal call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro modal call
mode (G66/G66.1) is not set:
0: Alarm PS1100, “CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL” is issued.
1: The specification of G67 is ignored.
- 1012 -
#1 MGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed, a high-speed
branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from the start of the program is:
0: A high-speed branch is not caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the
executed program.
1: A high-speed branch is caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the program.
#3 V15 As system variable numbers for tool offset:

0 : The standard system variable numbers for the Series 16 are used.
1 : The same system variable numbers as those used for the Series 15 are used.
The tables indicate the system variables for tool offset numbers 1 to 400. The values for
tool offset numbers 1 to 200 can be read from or assigned to the system variables in
parentheses.
(1) Tool offset memory A
System variable number
V15 = 0 V15 = 1
#10001 to #10400 #10001 to #10400
Wear offset value
(#2001 to #2200) (#2001 to #2200)
#4 HGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed, a branch to 30
sequence numbers just before the GOTO statement or to up to 10 sequence numbers
saved by a sequence number search previously made with a GOTO statement is:
0: Not made at high speed.
1: Made at high speed.
#5 SBM Custom macro statement

0: Not stop the single block
1: Stops the single block
If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable
#3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1, the single blocks in custom
macro statements cannot be disabled using system variable #3003. To control single
blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, use bit 7 (SBV) of
parameter No. 6000.
#7 SBV Custom macro statement

0: Not stop the single block
1: Enable/disable single block stop with system variable #3003
Bit 5 (SBM) of parameter No. 6000
0 1
0 Disables single block stop. Enables single block stop. (With
Bit 7 (SBV) of
Enables single block stop. (With variable #3003, single block stop
parameter No.
1 variable #3003, single block stop cannot be enabled/disabled. Single
6000
can be enabled/disabled.) block stop is enabled at all times.)
- 1013 -
NOTE
1 In the cutter radius compensation mode, the block look-ahead
operation is performed even in single-block operation to calculate a
path intersection after offsetting. So, a macro statement is also
executed when read in advance. Therefore, turn off the cutter
radius compensation mode, when the single block operation is
enabled for custom macro statements by SBM=1 or SBV=1.
2 When the single block operation is enabled for custom macro
statements by SBM=1 or SBV=1, a custom macro statement block
is assumed to be an NC statement block that does not involve
movement. Therefore, the motion may differ between the normal
operation and the single block operation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6001 CCV TCS CRO PV5 PRT MIF

#0 MIF The custom macro interface signals are based on:

0: Standard specification.
(The signals UI000 to UI015, UO000 to UO015, and UO100 to UO131 are used.)
1: Extended specification.
(The signals UI000 to UI031, UI100 to UI131, UI200 to UI231, UI300 to UI331,
UO000 to UO031, UO100 to UO131, UO200 to UO231, and UO300 to UO331 are
used.)
#1 PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command

0: Outputs a space
1: Outputs no data
#3 PV5 Custom macro common variables:

0: #500 to #549 are output. (Note)
1: #100 to #149 and #500 to 549 are output. (Note)
NOTE
Output variables are as the table according to the combination of
added options.
When the parameter PV5=0

Option “Addition of custom macro common variables”
Non Yes
Option Non #500 to #549 #500 to #999
“Embedded macro” Yes #500 to #549 #500 to #999
When the parameter PV5=1

Non Yes
#100 to #149 and #100 to #199 and
Non
Option #500 to #549 #500 to #999
“Embedded macro” #100 to #149, #200 to #499 #100 to #199, #200 to #499
Yes
and #500 to #549 and #500 to #999
- 1014 -
#4 CRO ISO code in BPRWT or DPRNT command
0: Outputs only “LF” after data is output
1: Outputs “LF” and “CR” after data is output
#5 TCS Custom macro (subprogram)

0: Not called using a T code
1: Called using a T code
#6 CCV Common variables #100 to #149(NOTE) cleared by power-off are:

0: Cleared to <null> by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
NOTE
Cleared variables are as the table according to the combination of
added options.

Non Yes
Non #100 to #149 #100 to #199
Option
#100 to #149 and #100 to #199 and
“Embedded macro” Yes
#200 to #499 #200 to #499
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6003 MSB MPR TSE MIN

NOTE
#2 MIN Custom macro interrupt

0: Performed by interrupting an in-execution block (Custom macro interrupt type I)
1: Performed after an in-execution block is completed (Custom macro interrupt type II)
#3 TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT

0: Edge trigger method (Rising edge)
1: Status trigger method
#4 MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code

0: M96/M97
1: M code set using parameters Nos. 6033 and 6034
#5 MSB Interrupt program

0: Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro-type interrupt)
1: Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram- type interrupt)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6004 NAT

- 1015 -
#0 NAT The results of the custom macro functions ATAN (with 2 arguments) and ASIN are
specified as follows:
0: The result of ATAN is 0 to 360.0.
The result of ASIN is 270.0 to 0 to 90.0.
1: The result of ATAN is -180.0 to 0 to 180.0.
The result of ASIN is -90.0 to 0 to 90.0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6005 SQC

#0 SQC In the subprogram call function, a subprogram sequence number call is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6007 SKM CVA MGE BCS SCS DPG

#0 DPG Specifies whether to allow G codes with a decimal point to be called.

0: Do not allow.
1: Allow.
#1 SCS Specifies whether to call subprograms with S codes.

0: Do not call with S codes.
1: Call with S codes.
#2 BCS Specifies whether to call subprograms with the second auxiliary function codes.
0: Do not call with the second auxiliary function codes.
1: Call with the second auxiliary function codes.
#3 MGE Specifies whether a G code modal call is made after movement or for each block.
0: Make a call for each block (equivalent to G66.1).
1: Make a call after movement (equivalent to G66).
#4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows:

0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications.
1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed.
[Example]
When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local variable #24 in the calling
program is set as follows:
Command CVA=0 CVA=1
#24 0.01 0.01
ADP[#24] 10.0 0.01
NOTE
External operations are the same unless the ADP function is used.
- 1016 -
#7 SKM After skip operation, with the workpiece coordinate system setting command (G92) or
select command (G54 to G59), the values of macro variables #100151 to #100200 (#5061
to #5080) holding the skip position:
0: Change. (The workpiece coordinate system at the time of reading is reflected.)
1: Do not change.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6008 IJK GMP ISO MCA F16

#0 F16 The precision of operation is based on:

0: New specification.
1: FS16i compatible specification.
#1 MCA A macro alarm specification based on system variable #3000 is selected as follows:
0: An alarm number obtained by adding 3000 to a value assigned to variable #3000 and
the corresponding message are displayed. (A value from 0 to 200 can be assigned to
variable #3000.)
1: A value assigned to variable #3000 and the corresponding message are displayed. (A
value from 0 to 4095 can be assigned to variable #3000.)
[Example]
Execution of #3000=1 (ALARM MESSAGE);
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0:
The alarm screen displays "MC 3001 ALARM MESSAGE".
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1:
The alarm screen displays "MC0001 ALARM MESSAGE".
#4 ISO 0: When the EIA code is used, the bit patterns of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *,
=, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018.
1: When the ISO/ASCII code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #,
*, =, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018.
#6 GMP The calling of M, S, T, a second auxiliary function code, or a particular code during the
calling of a G code, and the calling of a G code during the calling of M, S, T, a second
auxiliary function code, or particular code are:
0: Not allowed. (They are executed as an ordinary G, M, S, T, second auxiliary
function code, and NC address.)
1: Allowed.
#7 IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments:

0: Argument specification I or II is automatically determined.
1: Argument specification I is always used.
- 1017 -
Example
When K_J_I_ is specified:
• When this parameter is set to 0:
Argument specification II is used and K=#6, J=#8, and I=#10
are specified.
• When this parameter is set to1:
Argument specification I is used and I=#4, J=#5, and K=#6 are
specified regardless of the specification order.
(Argument specification II cannot be used.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6009 MSM

#0 MSM When a Macro Call using M code or a Macro Call using M code (Specification of 3 Sets)
are not at the beginning of the block:
0: Alarm PS0127, “DUPLICATE NC,MACRO STATEMENT” is issued.
1: The Macro Call using M code is executed. All addresses specified in the same block
are used as arguments.
NOTE
1 When MSM is set to 1 and an M code specified for a macro call is
not at the beginning of the block, argument specification II cannot
be used.
2 When MSM is set to 1 and an M code specified for a macro call is
not at the beginning of the block, the number of repetitions (L)
cannot be used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6015 ?7 ?6 ?5 ?4 ?3 ?2 ?1 ?0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6016 @7 @6 @5 @4 @3 @2 @1 @0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6017 &7 &6 &5 &4 &3 &2 &1 &0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6018 _7 _6 _5 _4 _3 _2 _1 _0

*0 to *7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set.
- 1018 -
=0 to =7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set.
#0 to #7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is set.
[0 to [7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating [ is set.
]0 to ]7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ] is set.
?0 to ?7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ? is set.
@0 to @7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating @ is set.
&0 to &7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating & is set.
_0 to _7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating _ is set.
0: A corresponding bit is 0.
1: A corresponding bit is 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6019 EDP OFN MCO

[Data type] Bit
#0 MCO When data is output, the decimal number value of the macro variable data is
0: Not output as a comment.
1: Output at the same time as a comment.
After the number, data, and the variable name of the macro variable are output when data
output operation is performed the variable number and the value of the macro variable
data in decimal number are output as a comment.
NOTE
1 Output data by this parameter is "Comment", and this is ignored at
the time of reading.
2 Accuracy of the output data of the comment is up to 15 digits. The
range of output data are nine digits above decimal point and eight
digits below decimal point. "± OVER FLOW" is output instead of a
value when the total digits number is more than 16 and the digit
number above the decimal point is ten or more. When the number
of digits below the decimal point becomes nine digits or more, the
ninth place of the decimal point is rounded off and output.
Moreover, the seventh place or the eighth place of the decimal
point is rounded off and output when the total digits number is more
than 16 and the digit number above decimal point is nine or eight.
3 The output becomes "EMPTY" when displayed, the macro variable
data is "DATA EMPTY".
#3 OFN The format of the name of a file output by the external output command (DPRNT or
BPRNT) is:
0: PRNTxxxx.DAT (xxxx: 0000 to 9999).
1: MCR_PRNT.TXT (fixed).
#5 EDP Precision setting for macro relational operators is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 1019 -
NOTE
Parameter No. 6100 is used to set the number of significant digits
after the decimal point.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6020 IFR NC2 NC1

NOTE
When this parameters is set, the power must be turned off before
#0 NC1 The setting of the number of custom macro variables common to paths for #100 to #199
(#499) (parameter No. 6036) is:
0: Valid.
As many custom macro variables #100 to #199 (or #100 to #499) set for this path as
the number set in parameter No. 6036 are used as custom macro variables common
to tool paths.
1: Invalid.
Custom macro variables #100 to #199 (or #100 to #499) set for this path are all used
as variables for the path.
NOTE
For path 1, be sure to set this parameter to 0.
Example
In a 4-path system, when parameters are set as listed below,
custom macro variables for paths 1 to 3 are used as variables
common to these paths, but for path 4, custom macro variables for
the path are used.
Path number No. 6036 NC1 Used custom macro variables

1 0 Custom macro variables #100 to #119 are used as variables
2 0 common to these paths, and other custom macro variables
20
3 0 are used independently for the relevant path.
4 1 Custom macro variables for path 4 are all used independently.
#1 NC2 The setting of the number of custom macro variables common to paths for #500 to #999
(parameter No. 6037) is:
0: Valid.
As many custom macro variables #500 to #999 set for this path as the number set in
parameter No. 6037 are used as custom macro variables common to tool paths.
1: Invalid.
Custom macro variables #500 to #999 set for this path are all used as variables for
the path.
NOTE
For path 1, be sure to set this parameter to 0.
- 1020 -
Example
In a 4-path system, when parameters are set as listed below,
custom macro variables for paths 1 to 3 are used as variables
common to these paths, but for path 4, custom macro variables for
the path are used.
Path number No. 6037 NC2 Used custom macro variables

1 0 Custom macro variables #500 to #549 are used as variables
2 0 common to these paths, and other custom macro variables
50
3 0 are used independently for the relevant path.
4 1 Custom macro variables for path 4 are all used independently.
#2 IFR The custom macro interface signal R address is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
6030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls

Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used.
M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram
calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used
to execute external device subprogram calls.
6031 Start number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)
6032 End number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)

Among the common variables #500 to #999, the range of common variables specified by
this parameter can be protected (by setting their attributes to read-only). If a write attempt
(on the left side) is made, an alarm is issued.
NOTE
Set 0 in both parameter No. 6031 and No. 6032 not to protect
common variables.
6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt
6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt

[Valid data range] 03 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
These parameters can be used when bit 4 (MPR) of parameter No. 6003 is 1. M96 is used
as a valid M code and M97 is used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of
the state of this parameter.
- 1021 -
6036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199 (#499))

[Data type] Word
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #100 to #199 (up to #499 in a system with the embedded macro
option) may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of usable macro common
variables is not exceeded.
Example
When 20 is set in parameter No. 6036
#100 to #119: Shared by all paths
#120 to #149: Used by each path independently
NOTE
1 To use up to #199, the option for adding custom macro common
variables is required.
2 To use up to #499, the embedded macro option is required.
3 When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.
4 When the option for embedded macro is effective and the option for
addition of custom macro common variables is not effective, #150
to #199 can not be used but this parameter should be set the
number which includes #150 to #199.
6037 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #500 to #999)

[Data type] Word
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #500 to #999 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of
usable macro common variables is not exceeded.
Example
When 50 is set in parameter No. 6037
#500 to #549: Shared by all paths
#550 to #599: Used by each path independently
NOTE
1 To use up to #999, the option for adding custom macro common
variables is required.
2 When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.
6038 Start G code used to call a custom macro

- 1022 -
6039 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code

6040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros

Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes at a time. With G
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6040 starting with the G code set in
parameter No. 6038, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6040 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6039 can be
called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6040 to disable this mode of calling.
If a negative value is set in parameter No. 6038, the modal call mode is entered. Whether
the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No.
6007.
[Example] When parameter No. 6038 = 900, parameter No. 6039 = 1000, and parameter No. 6040 =
100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
G900 → O1000
G901 → O1001
G902 → O1002
:
G999 → O1099
When the setting of parameter No. 6038 is changed to -900, the same set of custom macro
calls (modal calls) is defined.
NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these
parameters are disabled:
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each
parameter
2) (Value of parameter No. 6039 + value of parameter No. 6040 - 1) >
9999
2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and modal calls is not
allowed.
3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters duplicate G codes
specified in parameters Nos. 6050 to 6059, the calls specified by
parameters Nos. 6050 to 6059 are made preferentially.
6041 Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom macro

6042 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code with a decimal point

- 1023 -
6043 Number of G codes with a decimal point used to call custom macros

Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes with a decimal
point at a time. With G codes with a decimal point as many as the value set in parameter
No. 6043 starting with the G code with a decimal point set in parameter No. 6041, the
custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in parameter No. 6043
starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6042 can be called. Set 0 in
parameter No. 6043 to disable this mode of calling.
If a negative value is set in parameter No. 6041, the modal call mode is entered. Whether
the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No.
6007.
[Example] When parameter No. 6041 = 900, parameter No. 6042 = 2000, and parameter No. 6043 =
100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
G90.0 → O2000
G90.1 → O2001
G90.2 → O2002
:
G99.9 → O2099
When the setting of parameter No. 6041 is changed to -900, the same set of custom macro
calls (modal calls) is defined.
NOTE
parameter
2) (Value of parameter No. 6042 + value of parameter No. 6043 -
1) > 9999
3) When bit 0 (DPG) of parameter No. 6007 = 0 (to disable calls
using G codes with a decimal point)
2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and modal calls is not
allowed.
3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters duplicate G codes
specified in parameters Nos. 6060 to 6069, the calls specified by
parameters Nos. 6060 to 6069 are made preferentially.
6044 Start M code used to call a subprogram

6045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code

- 1024 -
6046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms called by M codes)

Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes at a time. With M
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the M code set in
parameter No. 6044, the subprograms of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6046 starting with the program number set in 6045 can be called. Set 0 in
parameter No. 6046 to disable this mode of calling.
[Example] When parameter No. 6044 = 80000000, parameter No. 6045 = 3000, and parameter No.
6046 = 100 are set, a set of 100 subprogram calls is defined as follows:
M80000000 → O3000
M80000001 → O3001
M80000002 → O3002
:
M80000099 → O3099
NOTE
parameter
1) > 9999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes
specified in parameter No. 6071 to No. 6079, the calls specified by
parameter No. 6071 to 6079 are made preferentially.
6047 Start M code used to call a custom macro

6048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M code

6049 Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number of custom macros called by M codes)

Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using M codes at a time. With M
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6049 starting with the M code set in
parameter No. 6047, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6049 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6048 can be
called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6049 to disable this mode of calling.
- 1025 -
[Example] When parameter No. 6047 = 90000000, parameter No. 6048 = 4000, and parameter No.
6049 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
M90000000 → O4000
M90000001 → O4001
M90000002 → O4002
:
M90000099 → O4099
NOTE
parameter
1) > 9999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes
specified in parameter No. 6080 through No. 6089, the calls
specified by parameter No. 6080 through 6089 are made
preferentially.
6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010

[Valid data range] (-9999 to 9999 : excluding 0, 5, 65, 66 and 67)
Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9010 to 9019.
However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call.
For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11.
Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of
parameter No. 6007.
6060 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9040
- 1026 -

Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9040 to 9049.
However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call.
For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11.
Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of
parameter No. 6007. Set G codes in the format Gm.n. The value expressed by (m×10+n)
is set in the parameter. The values m and n must satisfy the following relationships: 0 ≤m
≤99, 0 ≤n ≤9.
NOTE
Parameter Nos. 6060 to 6069 are valid when bit 0 (DPG) of
6071 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9001

These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program numbers 9001 to
9009.
NOTE
If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number
is called preferentially. For example, if 100 is set in parameter No.
6071 and 6072, and programs O9001 and O9002 both exist,
O9001 is called when M100 is specified.
6080 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020
- 1027 -

Set the M codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9020 to 9029. The
simple call mode is set.
NOTE
1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number
is called preferentially. For example, if 200 is set in parameter No.
6081 and No. 6082, and programs O9021 and O9022 both exist,
O9021 is called when M200 is specified.
2 If the same M code is set in a parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079 used
to call subprograms and in a parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089 used
to call custom macros, a custom macro is called preferentially. For
example, if 300 is set in parameters Nos. 6071 and 6081, and
programs O9001 and O9021 both exist, O9021 is called when
M300 is specified.
6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004
6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005

[Valid data range] 65(A:41H) to 90(Z:5AH)
These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal.
The settable addresses are indicated below.
Address Parameter setting value 30i/31i-PB

A 65 O
B 66 O
D 68 O
F 70 O
H 72 O
I 73 O
J 74 O
K 75 O
L 76 O
M 77 O
- 1028 -
Address Parameter setting value 30i/31i-PB
P 80 O
Q 81 O
R 82 O
S 83 O
T 84 O
V 86 O
X 88 O
Y 89 O
Z 90 O
NOTE
1 When address L is set, the number of repeats cannot be specified.
2 Set 0 when no subprogram is called.
6093 Top address of custom macro interface signal R address (input signal)
6094 Top address of custom macro interface signal R address (output signal)
NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before

[Valid data range] 0 to maximum address (multiple of 4. 0, 4, 8, ...)
Set the top address of custom macro interface signal R address. 128 signals starting at the
top address are allocated.
[Example]
Parameter System variable number Signal to use Attribute
No.6093=1000 #1068 R1000 to R1003 R
#1069 R1004 to R1007
#1070 R1008 to R1011
#1071 R1012 to R1015
No.6094=1100 #1168 R1100 to R1103 R/W
#1169 R1104 to R1107
#1170 R1108 to R1111
#1171 R1112 to R1115
*) The R and R/W attributes of variables represent, respectively, read-only and
read/write enabled.
- 1029 -
NOTE
1 Each value specified with this parameter must be a multiple of 4 (0,
4, 8, …). Otherwise, this function is disabled.
2 If a non-existent R address or system relay address is set, the
corresponding system variable becomes invalid. The effective R
address area varies depending on the PMC used and its memory.
Be sure to specify a usable range by checking the specification of
the PMC in use.
3 When setting the parameter, make sure that the input signal
addresses do not overlap with the output signal addresses.
6100 Precision setting for relational operators

[Data type] Byte
This parameter sets the number of digits after the decimal point in two values to be
compared using the custom macro relational operator. The two values are rounded off to
the specified number of digits before comparison.
NOTE
1 This function is enabled by setting bit 5 (EDP) of parameter No.
6019 to 1.
2 This function is disabled if parameter No. 6100 is set to a value out
of the valid data range.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF SRE SLS HSS SK0 GSK

#0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is:

0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip
signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8.
0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1.
1: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 0.
#4 HSS 0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
(The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
#5 SLS 0: The multi-step skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals
are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The multi-step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are
input.
- 1030 -
NOTE
The skip signals (SKIP and SKIP2 to SKIP8) are valid regardless of
the setting of this parameter. They can also be disabled using bit 4
(IGX) of parameter No. 6201.
If you want to use high-speed skip signals when the multi-step skip
function option is used, set this parameter to 1.
#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal or high-speed measurement position arrival signal is used:
0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close).
1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open).
#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G33 skip command
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SKPXE CSE IGX TSE SEB

#1 SEB When a skip signal goes on while the skip function is used, the accumulated pulses and
positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are:
0: Ignored.
1: Considered and compensated.
The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration
when the skip signal goes on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is
input.
#2 TSE When the torque limit skip function (G33 P98/99) is used, the skip position held in a
system variable (#5061 to #5080 (#100151 to #100182 when 21-axes-or-more-system is
used)) is:
0: Position that is offset considering the delay (positional deviation) incurred by the
servo system.
1: Position that does not reflect the delay incurred by the servo system.
Position during skip operation
Current position of CNC
Machine position Error amount
Origin of the coordinate system Stop point
Position in consideration of delay
Position without consideration of delay
#4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are:
0: Enabled as skip signals.
1: Disabled as skip signals.
#5 CSE For the continuous high-speed skip command, high-speed skip signals are:
- 1031 -
0: Effective at either a rising or falling edge (depending on the setting of bit 6 (SRE) of
parameter No. 6200).
1: Effective at both the rising and falling edges.
#7 SKPXE For the skip function (G33), the skip signal SKIP is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled

Bit 4 (IGX) of Bit 0 (GSK) Bit 7 (SKPXE) Skip Skip Multistage skip
Parameter parameter of parameter of parameter signal signal signals
No. 6201 No. 6200 No .6201 SKIPP SKIP SKIP2-SKIP8
0 0 0 Disabled Enabled Enabled
0 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled
0 0 1 Disabled Disabled Enabled
0 1 1 Enabled Disabled Enabled
Setting
1 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 is valid for the skip function using high-speed skip
signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1) or for the multistage skip
function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to
1).
To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1

1S1 to 1S8 These parameters specify whether to enable or disable each high-speed skip signal when
the G33 skip command is issued.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and
commands.
The settings of the bits have the following meaning :
0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is disabled.
1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.
Parameter High-speed skip signals Parameter High-speed skip signals
1S1 HDI0 1S5 HDI4
1S2 HDI1 1S6 HDI5
1S3 HDI2 1S7 HDI6
1S4 HDI3 1S8 HDI7
NOTE
Do not specify the same signal simultaneously for different paths.
- 1032 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6206 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1

1S1to1S8, 2S1to2S8, 3S1to3S8, 4S1to4S8, DS1toDS8

Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G33, or G33P1 to G33P4)
and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are issued with the multi-step skip
function.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and
commands.
The setting of the bits have the following meaning :
0: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is invalid.
1: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.
Multi-step skip function

Command G33
Input G34P1 G33P2 G33P3 G33P4 G04
signal G04Q1 G04Q2 G04Q3 G04Q4
SKIP/HDI0 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 DS1
SKIP2/HDI1 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 DS2
NOTE
HDI0 to HDI7 are high-speed skip signals. Do not specify the same
signal simultaneously for different paths.
When bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1, commands to be skipped can be
selected by setting the following parameter:
Commands skipped by SKIPP signal <G006.6>

Parameter Command skipped
When bit 0 (1S1) of parameter No. 6202 is set to 1 G33P1,G04Q1
When bit 0 (DS1) of parameter No. 6206 is set to 1 G04,G04Q1,G04Q2,G04Q3,G04Q4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 SFN SFP

- 1033 -
#1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G33) is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.
NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207.
#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4
(HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.
NOTE
For not the multistage skip function, but the skip function using no
high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is
set to 0), see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6208 9S8 9S7 9S6 9S5 9S4 9S3 9S2 9S1

9S1 to 9S8 Specify which high-speed skip signal is enabled for the continuous high-speed skip
command G33P90.
The settings of each bit have the following meaning:
0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to the bit is disabled.
1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to the bit is enabled.
The bits correspond to signals as follows:
Parameter High-speed skip signal Parameter High-speed skip signal
9S1 HDI0 9S5 HDI4
9S2 HDI1 9S6 HDI5
9S3 HDI2 9S7 HDI6
9S4 HDI3 9S8 HDI7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6210 DSK

#2 DSK Skip position reading (system variables #5421 to #5440, #100701 to #100750) by the
detection unit is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
6220 Period during which skip signal input is ignored for the continuous high-speed skip function

[Unit of data] 8msec
[Valid data range] 3 to 127(× 8msec)
- 1034 -
This parameter specifies the period from when a high-speed skip signal is input to when
the next high-speed skip signal can be input for the continuous high-speed skip function.
This parameter is used to ignore chattering in skip signals.
If a value that falls outside the valid range is specified, the setting is assumed to be 24
msec.
Signal ignoring period (parameter No. 6220)
High-speed skip signal

This signal is ignored.
When high-speed skip signals are used and bit 5 (CSE) of parameter No. 6201 is set to 1,
signals are handled as follows:
Signal ignoring period (parameter No. 6220)
High-speed skip
These signals
signals
are ignored.
6221 Torque limit dead zone time for a torque limit skip command

[Unit of data] 2msec
The torque limit skip arrival signal is ignored for a set period of time.
If G33P98 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the
torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1.
If G33P99 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the
torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1.
However, if a skip signal is input, skip operation is performed, regardless of the period of
time set in this parameter.
6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G33)

This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when
bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.
- 1035 -
6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G33, G33 P1)
6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G33 P2)

Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These parameters
are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
6287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip

This parameter sets a positional deviation limit for each axis imposed when torque limit
skip is specified. When the actual positional deviation exceeds the positional deviation
limit, the alarm SV0004, “EXCESS ERROR (G31)” is issued and an immediate stop
takes place.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6400 HMP MC8 MC5 FWD RPO

#0 RPO With the manual handle retrace function, the rapid traverse rate is clamped, assuming
that:
0: An override of 10% is used.
1: An override of 100% is used.
#1 FWD With the manual handle retrace function, program execution can be performed:
0: In both forward and backward directions.
1: In the forward direction only. Execution in the backward direction is not permitted.
#2 MC5
#3 MC8 These parameters set the number of M code groups and the number of M codes per group.
(See explanations of parameters Nos. 6411 to 6490.)
MC5 MC8 M code group setting

0 0 Standard (20 groups of four)
1 0 16 groups of five
0 1 10 groups of eight
When 16 groups of five are used, the meanings of parameters are changed as follows:
Group A No. 6411(1) to No. 6415(5)
Group B No. 6416(1) to No. 6420(5)
:
Group P No. 6486(1) to No. 6490(5)
- 1036 -
When 10 groups of eight are used, they are changed as follows:
Group A No. 6411(1) to No. 6418(8)
Group B No. 6419(1) to No. 6426(8)
:
Group J No. 6483(1) to No. 6490(8)
#4 HMP When inversion or backward movement is inhibited in other paths:

0: Inversion or backward movement is not inhibited for the currently executed path.
1: Inversion or backward movement is inhibited also for the currently executed path.
6410 Travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulse generator
[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Word path
[Unit of data]
%
[Valid data range]
0 to 100
Set the travel distance per pulse generated from the manual pulse generator in terms of
the override value.
The distance traveled by the machine when the manual handle is actually turned can be
found by the following expression:
[Specified speed] × [Handle magnification] × ([Setting of this parameter]/100) ×
(8/60000) (mm or inch)
[Example] When a specified feedrate is 30mm/min, the manual handle magnification is 100, and
parameter No. 6410 is set to 1, the travel distance per pulse generated from the manual
pulse generator is calculated as follows:
[Travel distance per pulse]=30[mm/min] × 100 × (1/100) × (8/60000)[min]= 0.004mm
6581 RGB value of color palette 1

to to
6595 RGB value of color palette 15

[Data type] 2-word
Each of these parameters sets the RGB value of each color palette by specifying a 6-digit
number as described below.
rrggbb: 6-digit number (rr: red data, gg: green data, bb: blue data)
The valid data range of each color is 0 to 15 (same as the tone levels on the color setting
screen). When a number equal to or greater than 16 is specified, the specification of 15 is
assumed.
[Example] When the tone level of a color is: red:1 green:2, blue:3, set 10203 in the parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6700 PCM

#0 PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts
0: M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710
1: Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710
6710 M code that counts the number of machined parts

- 1037 -

The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted (+1)
when the M code set is executed.
NOTE
The setting of 0 is invalid (no count operation is performed with
M00.) Moreover, M98, M99, M198 (external device subprogram
calling), and M codes used for subprogram calling and macro
calling cannot be set as M codes for count-up operation. (Even
when such an M code is set, count-up operation is not performed,
ignoring the M code.)
6711 Number of machined parts

The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of
machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is
executed.
NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30 when bit 0 (PCM)
of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6712 Total number of machined parts

This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or an M code
NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30, when bit 0
(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6713 Number of required parts

This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.
Required parts finish signal PRTSF <F0062.7> is output to PMC when the number of
machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of parts is regarded as
infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The PRTSF signal is then not output.
6750 Integrated value of power-on period

- 1038 -
[Unit of data] min
This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.
6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 1

[Unit of data] msec
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6752.
6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 2

[Unit of data] min
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic operation (neither
stop nor hold time included).
The actual time accumulated during operation is the sum of this parameters Nos. 6751
and 6752.
6753 Integrated value of cutting time 1

[Unit of data] msec
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6754.
6754 Integrated value of cutting time 2

[Unit of data] min
This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is performed in cutting
feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 or G03).
The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of this parameters Nos. 6753 and
6754.
- 1039 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7055 BCG

#3 BCG The pre-interpolation bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant change function

is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Acceleration/deceleration reference speed for the time constant change function of bell-shaped
7066
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

This parameter is used when the time constant change function of bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 HCL THD JHD

#0 JHD Manual handle feed in JOG feed mode or incremental feed in the manual handle feed is:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#3 HCL The clearing of handle interruption amount display by soft key [CAN] operation is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNGx

#0 HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator
0: Same in direction
1: Reverse in direction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7103 HIT HNT RTH

- 1040 -
#1 RTH By a reset or emergency stop, the amount of manual handle interruption is:
0: Not canceled.
1: Canceled.
#2 HNT When compared with the travel distance magnification selected by the manual handle
feed travel distance selection signals (incremental feed signals) (MP1, MP2 <Gn019.4,
Gn019.5>), the travel distance magnification for incremental feed/manual handle feed is:
0: Same.
1: 10 times greater.
#3 HIT When compared with the travel distance magnification selected by the manual handle
feed travel distance selection signals (incremental feed signals (MP1, MP2 <Gn019.4,
Gn019.5>), the travel distance magnification for manual handle interrupt is:
0: Same.
7117 Allowable number of pulses that can be accumulated during manual handle feed

[Unit of data] Pulse
This parameter sets the number of pulses from the manual pulse generator that exceed the
rapid traverse rate and can be accumulated without being discarded if manual handle feed
faster than the rapid traverse rate is specified.
0:
The feedrate is clamped to the rapid traverse rate. Those handle pulses that exceed
the rapid traverse rate are ignored. (The scale reading of the manual pulse generator
may not match the travel distance.)
Other than 0:
The feedrate is clamped to the rapid traverse rate. However, those handle pulses
that exceed the rapid traverse rate are not ignored. In connection with the manual
handle feed travel distance selection signals MP1 and MP2 <Gn019.4, Gn019.5>,
the incremental feed amount is determined as described below. (Even if the rotation
of the manual pulse generator is stopped, the tool stops after moving by the number
of pulses accumulated in the CNC.)
Magnification set by manual handle feed amount selection signals MP1，MP2 <Gn019.4,
Gn019.5> is m, value of parameter No.7117 is n.
n < m: Clamping is set performed at value of parameter No.7117.
n ≥ m: Amount A+B, showed in figure, which’s value is multiple of m and small than n.
As a result, clamping is performed as an integral multiple of the selected magnification.
7160 Approach handle clamp feedrate

[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis。
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (C)
Approach handle clamp feedrate is set.
7161 Guidance handle clamp feedrate
- 1041 -

[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis。
[Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter setting table (C)
Guidance handle clamp feedrate is set.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1

NOTE
#0 OP1 Mode selection on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed
#1 OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse select on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#2 OP3 Manual pulse generator's axis select and manual pulse generator's magnification select on
software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#3 OP4 JOG feedrate override select, feedrate override select, and rapid traverse override select
on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#4 OP5 Optional block skip select, single block select, machine lock select, and dry run select on
software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#5 OP6 Protect key on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed
#6 OP7 Feed hold on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed
7210 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↑”
7211 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↓”
7212 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “→”
7213 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “←”
- 1042 -
7214 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”

On software operator's panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow key on the MDI
unit when jog feed is performed.
Setting value Feed axis and direction Arrow keys on MDI unit
0 Not moved
1 First axis, positive direction
2 First axis, negative direction
3 Second axis, positive direction
4 Second axis, negative direction
5 Third axis, positive direction
6 Third axis, negative direction
7 Fourth axis, positive direction
8 Fourth axis, negative direction
[Example] Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the direction
specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. <8↑> to the positive
direction of the Z axis, <2↓> to the negative direction of the Z axis, <6→> to the positive
direction of the X axis <4←> to the negative direction of the X axis, <1 > to the
positive direction of the Y axis, <9 > to the negative direction of the Y axis
Parameter No.7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7216 = 0 (Not used)
Parameter No.7217 = 0 (Not used)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 RDE OVE MLE

#0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK <Gn108> is valid for PMC-controlled axes
0: Valid
1: Invalid
The axis-by-axis machine lock signal MLKx depends on the setting of bit 1 of parameter
No. 8006.
- 1043 -
#2 OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control
0: Same signals as those used for the CNC
1: Signals specific to the PMC
The signals used depend on the settings of these parameter bits as indicated below.
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter

Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No.
No. 8001 = 0
Signals 8001 = 1
(same signals as those
(signals specific to the PMC)
used for the CNC)
Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 <G012> *EFOV0 to *EFOV7 <G151>
Override cancellation signal OVC <G006.4> EOVC <G150.5>
ROV1,2 <G014.0,1> EROV1,2 <G150.0,1>

Rapid traverse override signals or
*EROV0 to *EROV7 <G151>
Dry run signal DRN <G046.7> EDRN <G150.7>
Rapid traverse selection signal RT <G019.7> ERT <G150.6>
(The listed signal addresses when PMC signals are selected are for the 1st group. Actual
addresses differs depending on the used group.)
#3 RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control
0: Invalid
1: Valid
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8002 PF2 PF1 F10 RPD

#0 RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC-controlled axes

0: Feedrate specified with parameter No. 1420
1: Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command by PMC
#3 F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axis control
The following settings are applied when bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0 and
bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0.
F10 IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Millimeter input 0 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001
(mm/min) 1 100 10 1 0.1 0.01
Inch input 0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
(inch/min) 1 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
#4 PF1
#5 PF2 Set the feedrate unit of cutting feedrate (feed per minute) for an axis controlled by the
PMC.
Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No.
Feedrate unit
8002 8002
0 0 1/1
0 1 1 / 10
1 0 1 / 100
1 1 1 / 1000
- 1044 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8004 NCI

#6 NCI In axis control by the PMC, a position check at the time of deceleration is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8005 EDC

#0 EDC In axis control by the PMC, an external deceleration function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8006 EZR EFD MLS

#1 MLS When bit 0 (MLE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 (to disable the all axis machine lock
signal) in PMC axis control, axis-by-axis machine lock is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#4 EFD When cutting feed (feed per minute) is used in PMC axis control, the specification unit of
feedrate data is:
0: Unchanged (1 times).
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002
is invalid.
#6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is:
0: Invalid.
With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm PS0224, “ZERO RETURN NOT
FINISHED” is not issued.
1: Valid.
A reference position return state check is made on a PMC controlled axis as with an
NC axis according to the setting of bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8008 EMRx

- 1045 -
#0 EMRx When a PMC axis control command is issued in mirror image state, the mirror image is:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.
This parameter is valid in the mirror image mode set with the mirror image signals MI1 to
MI8 <G106.0 to .7> set to “1” or bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter No. 12 set to 1.
If a movement is made along the same axis by doubly specifying a command with the
CNC and PMC axis control when this parameter is set to 0, and the mirror image mode is
set, a coordinate shift can occur afterwards. So, do not attempt to make such a movement.
8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC

Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each PMC-controlled axis.
For addresses of the fifth group and up, 1000 is added in steps of 4 groups.
For example:
The start address of the 10th group is G2154.
The start address of the 25th axis is G6142.
P8010 Description
1 DI/DO 1st group <G142 to G153> is used.
2 DI/DO 2nd group <G154 to G165> is used.
3 DI/DO 3rd group <G166 to G177> is used.
4 DI/DO 4th group <G178 to G189> is used.
: :
: :
21 DI/DO 21st group <G5142toG5153> is used.
: :
29 DI/DO 29th group <G7142toG7153> is used.
: :
NOTE
When a value other than the above is set, the axis is not controlled
by the PMC.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8011 XRT

- 1046 -
#0 XRT The axis that uses the group specified by parameter No. 8010 is:
0: Not controlled by the real time custom macro.
1: Controlled by the real time custom macro.
NOTE
1 This parameter is invalid for the axis for which 0 or a value outside
the range is set by parameter No. 8010
2 When multiple axes are assigned to the same group by parameter
No. 8010, these axes cannot be controlled by the real time custom
macro. When multiple axes are assigned to the same group, be
sure to set this bit to 0.
3 When this parameter No. 8011 is all 0s, the axis is used for PMC
axis control.
Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC
8030
axis control

[Unit of data] msec
For each axis, this parameter sets a time constant for exponential
acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No.
1622 is used.
The value set in parameter No. 1622 is used also for linear
acceleration/deceleration after cutting interpolation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8103 MWP MWT

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 MWT As the signal interface for the waiting M code:

0: The path individual signal interface is used.
1: The path common signal interface is used.
This parameter can be selected only when 2-path control is used.
#1 MWP To specify a P command for the waiting M code:

0: A binary value is used as conventionally done.
1: A path number combination is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8107 ESB

- 1047 -
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 ESB External subprogram calls on the data server:

0: Do not support multi-path operations.
1: Support multi-path operations.
NOTE
To use multi-path operations with external subprogram calls on the
data server, set parameter No. 20 to 5.
8110 Waiting M code range (minimum value)
8111 Waiting M code range (maximum value)

[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 0 ,100to99999999
A range of M code values can be set by specifying a minimum waiting M code value
(parameter No. 8110) and a maximum waiting M code value (parameter No. 8111).
(parameter No. 8110) ≤ (waiting M code) ≤ (parameter No. 8111)
Set 0 in these parameters when the waiting M code is not used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8162 PKUx

#2 PKUx In the parking state,

0: The absolute, relative, and machine coordinates are not updated.
1: The absolute and relative coordinates are updated. The machine coordinates are not
updated.
NOTE
With an axis that is set to function as a synchronous master axis
and synchronous slave axis at the same time (with bit 1 (SYWx) of
parameter No. 8167), set this parameter to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8303 SYPx

NOTE
- 1048 -
#4 SYPx In axis synchronous control, some parameters must be set to the same value for the master
and slave axes. When a value is set in such a parameter for the master axis:
0: The same value is not automatically set in the parameter for the slave axis.
1: The same value is automatically set in the parameter for the slave axis.
NOTE
1 For the parameters that can be set automatically, refer to
Subsection 1.6.10, "Automatic Setting of Parameters for Slave
Axes", in Connection Manual (Function) (B-64483EN-1).
2 Set this parameter to the same value for both the master and slave
axes.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8304 SCAx

#5 SCAx In axis synchronous control:

0: Synchronous operation is performed when the axis synchronous control manual feed
selection signal SYNCJ <G0140> or the axis synchronous control selection signal
SYNC <G0138> for slave axes is set to 1.
1: Synchronous operation is performed at all times.
The setting for the slave axis is available.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8305 SRF

#2 SRF In axis synchronous control, G28, G30, and G53:

0: Make the same movement along the slave axis as a movement along the master axis.
1: Make movements along the slave axis and master axis independently to specified
positions.
8314 Maximum allowable error in synchronization error check based on machine coordinates

(B))
This parameter sets a maximum allowable error in a synchronization error check based on
machine coordinates. When the error between the master and slave axes in machine
coordinates exceeds the value set in this parameter, the machine stops with the servo
alarm SV0005, “SYNC EXCESS ERROR (MCN)”.
NOTE
Set 0 in this parameter when a synchronization error check is not
made.
- 1049 -
8323 Limit in positional deviation check in axis synchronous control

This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference between the master axis and slave
axis position deviations. When the absolute value of a positional deviation difference
exceeds the value set in this parameter in axis synchronous control, the alarm DS0001,
“SYNC EXCESS ERROR (POS DEV)” is issued.
The setting for the slave axis is available. If 0 is specified in this parameter, no position
deviation difference check is made.
8325 Maximum compensation value in synchronization establishment based on machine coordinates

(B))
This parameter sets the maximum compensation value for synchronization. When a
compensation value exceeding the value set in this parameter is detected, the servo alarm
SV0001, “SYNC ALIGNMENT ERROR” is issued, and the synchronization
establishment is not performed.
The setting for the slave axis is available. To enable this parameter, set the bit 7 (SOF) of
parameter No. 8303 to 1. When 0 is set in this parameter, synchronization establishment
is not performed.
8330 Multiplier for a maximum allowable synchronization error immediately after power-up
NOTE

Until synchronization establishment is completed immediately after power-up,
synchronization error excessive alarm 2 is checked using the maximum allowable error
(parameter No. 8332) multiplied by the value set in this parameter.
If the result produced by multiplying the value of parameter No. 8332 by the value of this
parameter exceeds 32767, the value is clamped to 32767.
8331 Maximum allowable synchronization error for synchronization error excessive alarm 1

This parameter sets a maximum allowable synchronization error for synchronization error
excessive alarm 1.
- 1050 -
8332 Maximum allowable synchronization error for synchronization error excessive alarm 2
NOTE

This parameter sets a maximum allowable synchronization error for synchronization error
excessive alarm 2.
8337 M code for turning off synchronization in axis synchronous control

This parameter specifies an M code for switching from synchronous operation to normal
operation.
The M code set in this parameter is not buffered.
8338 M code for turning on synchronization in axis synchronous control

This parameter specifies an M code for switching from normal operation to synchronous
operation.
The M code set in this parameter is not buffered.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8451 NOF ZAG

#4 ZAG The deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control (deceleration based
on Z-axis fall angle) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
When this parameter is set to 1, be sure to set parameter Nos. 8456, 8457, and 8458.
#7 NOF In AI contour control, an F command is:

0: Not ignored.
1: Ignored.
When this parameter is set to 1, the specification of the maximum allowable feedrate set
in parameter No. 8465 is assumed.
- 1051 -
Override for range 2 that is applied during deceleration according to the cutting load in AI contour
8456
control
8457
control
8458
control

[Unit of data] %
For the function of decelerating according to the cutting load in AI contour control, the
override set in a parameter can be applied according to the angle at which the tool moves
downward along the Z-axis. The feedrate obtained according to other conditions is
multiplied by the override for the range containing angle θ at which the tool moves
downward.
However, when bit 1 (ZG2) of parameter No. 19515 is set to 0, no parameter is available
to range 1, and 100% is applied at all times. When bit 1 (ZG2) of parameter No. 19515 is
set to 1, set an override value for range 1 in parameter No. 19516.
Range 1 0°≤θ<30°
Range 2 30°≤θ<45°
Range 3 45°≤θ<60°
Range 4 60°≤θ≤90°
8465 Maximum allowable feedrate for AI contour control

This parameter sets the maximum allowable feedrate for contour control.
If a feedrate higher than the setting of this parameter is specified in the AI contour control
mode, the feedrate is clamped to that set in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, no clamping is performed.
When bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No. 8451 is set to 1, the tool moves, assuming that the
feedrate set in this parameter is specified. If 0 is set in this parameter at this time, a
movement is made at the specified feedrate.
8466 Maximum allowable feedrate for AI contour control (when a rotation axis is singly specified)

This parameter sets the maximum allowable feedrate for AI contour control when a
rotation axis is singly specified.
If a feedrate higher than the setting of this parameter is specified in the AI contour control
mode, the feedrate is clamped to that set in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, the feedrate is clamped to that set in parameter No. 8465.
- 1052 -
When bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No. 8451 is set to 1 and a rotation axis is singly specified,
the tool moves, assuming that the feedrate set in this parameter is specified. If 0 is set in
this parameter at this time, the tool moves at the feedrate specified in parameter No. 8465.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8900 PWE

[Data type] Bit
#0 PWE The setting, from an external device and MDI panel, of those parameters that cannot be
set by setting input is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10335 MSC

#0 MSC The reconfirming of midway block start of operator error prevent function is:
0: Enabled independently for each path.
1: Enabled for the local path and those paths for this parameter is set to 1.
10461 RGB value of color palette 1 for text for color set 3
to to

[Data type] 2-word
Each of these parameters sets the RGB value of each color palette for text by specifying a
6-digit number as described below.
rrggbb: 6-digit number (rr: red data, gg: green data, bb: blue data)
The valid data range of each color is 0 to 15 (same as the tone levels on the color setting
screen). When a number equal to or greater than 16 is specified, the specification of 15 is
assumed.
[Example] When the tone level of a color is: red:1 green:2, blue:3, set 10203 in the parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11222 IMG CIM NIM

#0 NIM Automatic conversion of a coordinate system by an inch/metric conversion command

(G20 or G21) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#1 CIM When an inch/metric conversion command (G20 or G21) is specified, if the workpiece
coordinate system is shifted by the shift amount as described below:
- 1053 -
0: An alarm PS1298, “ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC CONVERSION” is issued.

1: Clearing is performed.
If bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 is set to 1, or if bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000
is set to 1, this parameter clears the following:
• Manual intervention made when the manual absolute signal is off
• Issuance of a move command with the machine locked
• Movement by handle interrupt
• Operation with a mirror image
• Shifting of a workpiece coordinate system when a local coordinate system or
workpiece coordinate system is set up
#2 IMG Inch/metric changeover is:

0: Performed with the G20/G21.
1: Not performed with the G20/G21.
NOTE
If bit 2 of parameter No. 11222 is 1 (inch/metric changeover with
G20/G21 is disabled), only bit 2 of parameter No. 0 can be used to
perform inch/metric changeover. If bit 2 of parameter No.0 = 0, the
metric system is used. If bit 2 of parameter No.0 = 1, the inch
system is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11240 FAE

#0 FAE During positioning when the AI contour control mode is canceled, the optimum torque
acceleration/deceleration is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

to to

Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing directed by an M
code must be performed by the machine without buffering the following block, specify
the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they are not specified in
these parameters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11304 GGD

[Data type] Bit
- 1054 -
NOTE
#1 GGD The G code guidance screen is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
11305 Maximum number of simultaneously displayed axes
NOTE

By setting this parameter, the maximum number of simultaneously displayed axes at the
current position can be changed. A value set in this parameter corresponds to the
maximum number of simultaneously displayed axis as follows:
Max. number of simultaneously displayed axes 5 10 20

Setting 0 1 2
A value other than 1 and 2 is assumed to be 0.
11307 Display sequence of the coordinates in current position display
NOTE

This parameter sets the display sequence of the coordinates of a position displayed on the
following screens:
10.4-, 15-, and 19-inch display units
• Total position display screen
• Total position display on each screen
8.4-inch display unit
• Total position display screen
When the maximum number of simultaneously displayed axes is set to 20 (when 2 is set
in parameter No. 11305), two sets of coordinates are displayed simultaneously as the
current position display on each screen.
When the first set is displayed, switching to the second set can be made by pressing
then pressing the chapter selection soft key being selected.
When the above operation is performed again, the displayed set changes to the first set.
The display sequence of coordinates corresponds to the parameter setting as follows:
- 1055 -
Display sequence of
coordinates 1 2 3 4
Setting
Relative Absolute Machine Remaining
0 coordinates coordinates coordinates travel distance
Relative Machine Absolute Remaining
Relative Remaining Absolute Machine
2 coordinates travel distance coordinates coordinates
Absolute Machine Relative Remaining
Absolute Remaining Relative Machine
Machine Remaining Relative Absolute
If the setting is beyond the valid data range, 0 is assumed.

When the multi-path simultaneous display function is enabled (parameter No. 13131 is
set to a nonzero value, and parameter No. 13132 is set to 1 or a greater value), this
parameter becomes invalid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11308 COW
[Input type] parameter input

[Data type] Bit
#1 COW When the file of specified name already exists on memory card,
0: It is not overwritten
Alarm SR1973, “FILE ALREADY EXIST” is generated.
1: It is overwritten.
Because the confirmation message is displayed before overwriting even if COW is 1,
overwriting can be canceled.
NOTE
When the overwritten file is read only attribute, it is not possible to
overwrite even if bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308 = 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11350 9DE PNE

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#2 PNE Path name expansion display function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
This parameter is invalid if the number of paths is 1.
It is effective to 10.4-, 15-inch, and 19-inch display units.
- 1056 -
#4 9DE On 8.4-inch display unit, the maximum number of axes that can be displayed on a single
screen is:
0: 4.
1: 5.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11352 PNI

#0 PNI The display by the path name enlarged display function is:
0: A normal display.
1: A reverse display.
NOTE
This parameter is effective to 10.4-, 15-, and 19-inch display units.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11353 SEK

[Data type] Bit
#0 SEK When the power is turned on, or when the clear state is present, sequence numbers are:
0: Not maintained.
1: Maintained.
NOTE
During a subprogram call, the sequence number of the subprogram
is maintained.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11354 DPC CRS

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#1 CRS While data transmission is awaited using the DPRNT/BPRNT of the custom macro or
macro executor, screen switching is:
0: Not possible.
1: Possible.
#4 DPC In the screen title, program comments corresponding to O-numbers are:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
- 1057 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11502 IPW CTC WPP

[Data type] Bit
#2 WPP Programmable parameter input (G10)-based parameter re-setting that requires power-off
is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
Setting bit 2 (WPP) of parameter No. 11502 to 1 enables
programmable parameter input (G10)-based parameter re-setting
that requires power-off even when "PARAMETER WRITE " is
disabled.
#6 CTC During axis moving, the time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration
for each axis (parameter No. 1620) is:
0: Write-disabled.
1: Write-enabled.
#7 IPW The advanced preview feed-forward coefficient (parameter No. 2092) and bit 0 (SMR) of
parameter No. 8162 for specifying whether to apply a mirror image during
synchronization control are:
0: Write-disabled during axis moving.
1: Write-enabled if the corresponding axis is stopped.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11505 ISU

[Data type] Bit
#0 ISU When an USB memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed
using
0: ASCII codes.
1: ISO codes.
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity
information is not included and a data error during the data
input/output is not detected.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11506 PCU

[Data type] Bit
- 1058 -
#0 PCU If there is a USB memory interface on the CNC side, the USB memory interface used
when the CNC screen display function is started is on the:
0: NC side.
1: PC side.
NOTE
1 With the PC function, a USB memory interface on the PC side is
used regardless of the setting of this parameter if there is no USB
memory interface on the CNC main unit side.
2 This parameter is valid only when the CNC screen display function
is active.
3 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11630 FRD

#0 FRD The minimum command unit of the rotation angles of coordinate rotation is:
0: 0.001 degree.
1: 0.00001 degree. (1/100,000)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11651 DCO

#7 DCO During dry run, the cutting time is:

0: Not counted.
1: Counted.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11802 KSVx

NOTE
#4 KSVx Servo axis is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
NOTE
This setting is effective regardless of the value of parameter No.
1023.
- 1059 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11850 IFH CMI

#0 CMI If, in PMC axis control, a rapid traverse rate is specified with the axis control block data
signal, with bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 being set to 1, the rapid traverse rate is:
0: Always treated as being in millimeters.
1: Dependent on the setting of bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 1001.
#7 IFH When bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 in PMC axis control, the 1% rapid
traverse override signals *EROVs are:
0: On a path-by-path basis. (The first groups in the individual paths (first, fifth,
ninth, ..., 33rd, and 37th groups) are used.)
1: On a group-by-group basis.
States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt
12310
and table-based vertical direction handle feed/interrupt are performed

This parameter sets the states of the manual handle feed axis selection signal (HS1A to
HS1E <Gn018.0 to Gn018.3, Gn411.0> for the first manual handle) or the manual handle
interrupt axis selection signal (HS1IA to HS1IE <Gn041.0 to Gn041.3, Gn411.4> for the
first manual handle) to perform tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt and table-based
vertical direction handle feed/interrupt.
The handle for which the signal states are set is determined by parameter No. 12323.
<Table of correspondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals>
If parameter No. 12323 is set to 1, the states of the manual handle feed axis selection
signals or manual handle interrupt axis selection signals for the first manual handle in the
3-dimensional manual feed (handle feed) mode and corresponding parameter settings are
listed in the table below. When the first manual handle pulse generator is turned after
setting the signals corresponding to the value set in the parameter, operation is performed
in the specified mode.
HS1E HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A Parameter
(HS1IE) (HS1ID) (HS1IC) (HS1IB) (HS1IA) (No. 12310)
0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 0 2
0 0 0 1 1 3
0 0 1 0 0 4
0 0 1 0 1 5
0 0 1 1 0 6
0 0 1 1 1 7
0 1 0 0 0 8
0 1 0 0 1 9
0 1 0 1 0 10
0 1 0 1 1 11
0 1 1 0 0 12
0 1 1 0 1 13
0 1 1 1 0 14
0 1 1 1 1 15
1 0 0 0 0 16
- 1060 -
HS1E HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A Parameter

(HS1IE) (HS1ID) (HS1IC) (HS1IB) (HS1IA) (No. 12310)
1 0 0 0 1 17
1 0 0 1 0 18
1 0 0 1 1 19
1 0 1 0 0 20
1 0 1 0 1 21
1 0 1 1 0 22
1 0 1 1 1 23
1 1 0 0 0 24
If parameter No. 12323 is set to 2 to 5, replace 1 in HS1A to HS1E and HS1IA to HS1IE
above with 2 to 5.
States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when a movement is made in the first axis
12311 direction in tool axis normal direction handle feed/interrupt and table-based horizontal direction handle
feed/interrupt

This parameter sets the states of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to
interrupt axis selection signal (HS1IA to HS1IE <Gn041.0 to Gn041.3, Gn411.4> for the
first manual handle) when a movement is made in the first axis direction. (For settings,
see "Table of correspondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals" in the
description of parameter No. 12310.)
The table below indicates the relationships of tool axis directions, first axis directions,
and second axis directions.
Second axis
Parameter No. 19697 Tool axis directions First axis directions
directions
1 X Y Z
2 Y Z X
3 Z X Y
Note, however, that the table above indicates the directions applicable when the angles of
all rotation axes are set to 0.
In tool axis direction/tool axis normal direction feed (not table-based), the directions
indicated above assume that 0 is set in parameter No. 19698 and No. 19699. When a
rotation axis has made a turn or a nonzero value is set in these parameters in tool axis
direction/tool axis normal direction feed, the relevant directions are inclined accordingly.
States of the manual handle feed axis selection signals when a movement is made in the second axis
12312 direction in tool axis normal direction handle feed/interrupt and table-based horizontal direction handle
feed/interrupt

This parameter sets the states of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to
interrupt axis selection signals (HS1IA to HS1IE <Gn041.0 to Gn041.3, Gn411.4> for the
first manual handle) when a movement is made in the second axis direction. (For settings,
see "Table of correspondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals" in the
description of parameter No. 12310.)
- 1061 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12320 EM4

#7 EM4 Manual handle feed amount selection signal (incremental feed signal) MP4 <Gn019.6>
is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
13131 Group number for simultaneous display of multiple paths

This parameter sets a group for simultaneous display on one screen in a multi-path
system.
The paths set to belong to the same group are displayed on one screen.
If the values for all paths are set to 0, the simultaneous multi-path display function is
disabled.
NOTE
When specifying groups, specify group numbers not less than 1
successively.
On 8.4-inch and 10.4-inch display units, up to three paths can be
On a 15-inch and 19-inch display units, up to four paths can be
13132 Simultaneous multi-path display order number

[Valid data range] 1 to number of paths included in a simultaneous multi-path display group
This parameter sets the display order of a path defined to belong to a simultaneous
multi-path display group.
Set the order, using numbers ranging from 1 to the number of paths included in the
simultaneous multi-path display group.
- 1062 -
[Example] Setting of simultaneous display group numbers and simultaneous display order numbers
Number of Intra-group Screen display
Display group
paths of Path number
display order (Numbers represent displayed path
CNC number numbers.)
One path Path 1 1 1 1
Path 1 1 1
Path 2 1 2 1 2 3
Path 3 1 3
Path 1 1 1
Three path Path 2 2 1 1 2 3
Path 3 3 1
Path 1 1 2
Path 2 1 1 2 1 3
Path 3 2 1
NOTE
Specify successive order numbers not less than 1 for the paths
defined to belong to a group.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14000 IRFx

#2 IRFx An inch-metric switch command (G20, G21) at the reference position is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When this function is enabled for an axis, if an attempt to switch between the inch and
metric unit is made although the tool is not at the reference position on that axis, an alarm
PS5362, “CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS” is issued, and switching between the
inch and metric unit is canceled.
Be sure to move the tool to the reference position by, for example, specifying G28 before
switching between the inch and metric unit.
Maximum allowable travel distance when the reference position is established for a linear scale with an
14010
absolute address reference position

This parameter sets the maximum allowable travel distance at the FL rate when the
reference position is established for a linear scale with an absolute address reference
position. When the travel distance exceeds the setting of this parameter, the alarm
DS0017, “SERIAL DCL:REF-POS ESTABLISH ERR” is issued. When this parameter is
set to 0, the maximum allowable travel distance is not checked.
- 1063 -
NOTE
To establish the reference position with axis synchronous control,
set the parameter for both master and slave axes.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16001 CPF

#7 CPF At the end of the 01 group containing the G01, G02, or G03 code, the PF signal to start
pressing is:
0: Not set to “1”.
1: Set to “1”.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16003 TCF

#5 TCF After the OP signal indicating that automatic operation is in progress is set from “0” to
“1”, the PF signal to start pressing is set to “1”:
0: Only when a T command is found.
This status is the same as the status in which the PFW signal to wait for the start of
pressing is set to “1”.
1: Even if no T commands are found.
16010 Upper limit of the position deviation at which PF is set to “1”

For each axis, parameter No. 16010 sets the upper limit of the positional deviation at
which the PF signal to start pressing is set to “1”. When the absolute value of the
positional deviation does not exceed this highest limit, PF is set to “1”.
Parameter No.16010 is validated when parameter PFE (No. 16001, #1) is set to 1.
NOTE
The parameter can only be set for the X, Y, and C axes.
16032 Time interval by which setting of PF to “1” follows positioning in the forming mode

[Unit of data] msec
Parameter No. 16032 sets the time interval by which setting the PF signal to start pressing
to “1” follows positioning in the forming mode (except for nibbling).
Time interval by which the start of the next block follows setting of *PFIN to
16033
“0” in the forming mode

- 1064 -
[Unit of data] msec
Parameter No. 16033 sets the time interval by which the start of the next block follows
setting the contact of the *PFIN signal to complete punching for single–cycle pressing to
“0” in the forming mode.
Positionin Next block
Time set in
parameter
16032
PF
Time set in
parameter
16033
*PFIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16050 G0F
NOTE

#0 G0F For a rapid traverse command (G00), the X–axis or Y–axis rapid traverse feedrate is set to
the value:
0: Specified in the parameter.
1: Specified by the F code.
The maximum feedrate of the F command is limited to the rapid traverse feedrate in the
parameter. OADx(No.6131, #0) and ILG(No.6132, #0) are valid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16181 NSP NMG

#0 NMG When the M code for canceling the nibbling mode (No. 16184) is specified, the G code in
the 01 group is:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed to G00 (rapid traverse).
#2 NSP When the *SP signal to halt automatic operation is set to “0” in nibbling, automatic
operation is:
0: Decelerated and halted immediately.
1: Halted after positioning for a nibbling pitch completes.
- 1065 -
16183 M code for setting the nibbling mode

Parameter No.16183 sets the M code for setting the nibbling mode.
16184 M code for canceling the nibbling mode

Parameter 16183 sets the M code for canceling the nibbling mode.
Maximum pitch that can be specified with G01, G02, or G03 for nibbling
16186
by G68 or G69 or by an M code

[Unit of data] mm, inch（input unit）
[Valid data range] Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data
Parameter No. 16186 specifies the maximum pitch that can be specified with G01, G02,
or G03 for nibbling by G68 or G69 or by an M code.
16188 Maximum pitch of the G00 command for nibbling by the M code

[Unit of data] mm, inch（input unit）
Parameter No. 16188 specifies the maximum pitch of the G00 command for nibbling by
the M code.
16194 Maximum distance traveled along C–axis in nibbling

[Unit of data] degree（input unit）
The parameter sets the maximum distance traveled along the C–axis for the nibbling
mode.
- 1066 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16200 UVC
NOTE

#0 UVC In the reset status, the macro stored under a U or V macro number is:
0: Deleted.
1: Not deleted.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16202 AIP

#0 AIP Specifies the condition for the share–proof command (G86).

0: Alarm (PS4506) is issued when I < 1.5P.
1: Alarm (PS4506) is issued when I < P.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16205 SZR

#0 SZR Automatic reference position return (G28) commands:

0: The axis returns directly to the reference position without passing through any
intermediate points.
1: The axis returns to the reference position via the specified intermediate point.
16209 Clearance and amount of return for the Y axis in automatic repositioning

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data
Each of the parameters sets the clearance and amount of return for the Y–axis in
automatic repositioning (G75).
- 1067 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16240 RLM
NOTE

#5 RLM When the power is turned on or in the clear status, the machine is set in the:
0: Punch mode.
1: Laser mode.
NOTE
The parameter ALA for FANUC Series 30i/31i–PB is placed in bit 0
of the parameter No. 16242, though the parameter ALA for FANUC
Series 16i/18i–PB is placed in bit 0 of the parameter No.16240.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16242 ALA
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 ALA Switching between the punch mode and laser mode is:
0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
16244 M code for setting the punch mode
16245 M code for setting te laser mode

Each of the parameters set the M code for setting the punch mode or laser mode.
The parameters are validated when parameter ALA (No. 16242, #0) is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16260 TNM TCL
NOTE

- 1068 -
#4 TCL The T axis is:

0: Not controlled by the CNC machine.
1: Controlled the CNC machine.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set to 1, the T axis should be set as a
rotation axis. (bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1)
2 When this parameter is set to 1, setting the following parameters
allows the CNC to be compatible with FANUC Series 16i-PB, as
follows:
Setting Meaning
Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008=0 The axis rotates in the direction in which
the distance to the target is shorter.
Bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.1008=1 Relative coordinates are rounded by the
amount of the shift per one rotation
#5 TNM When machine lock signal MLK and the TNG signal for ignoring a T command are on,
whether the number following address T is cataloged as a tool number is:
0: Not checked.
1: Checked.
NOTE
Generally, the tool number is not checked when the TNG signal is
set to “1”.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16263 NDA TOF

#2 TOF The function for compensating the tool position is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
Specify a tool position compensation value on the tool input screen.
#7 NDA If a T command is specified in normal direction mode:

0: An alarm is issued (alarm PS 4606).
1: An alarm is not issued.
If a multi–tool command is specified, however, an alarm is issued.
16265 Total number of tools to be used

- 1069 -
This parameter specifies the total number of tools to be used by the tool function. If
T–axis control is selected (TCL bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 16260) is set to 1), the total
number should include the number of tools for which T–axis control (turret index) is not
executed. This parameter can be specified on the tool input screen. The tool numbers to
be used should be specified on the tool input screen.
16266 Number of tools for which T–axis control is executed

This parameter specifies the number of tools for which T–axis control (turret index) is
executed. The parameter can be specified on the tool input screen.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the TCL bit (bit 4 of parameter No.
16260) is set to 1.
16267 Reference–position tool number under T–axis control

This parameter specifies the tool number to be selected upon reference position return for
the T–axis. The parameter can be specified on the tool input screen.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the TCL bit (bit 4 of parameter No.
16260) is set to 1.
16269 Punching count for all tools (low–order)
16270 Punching count for all tools (high–order)

These parameters preset the punching count for all tools to be used.
Parameter No. 16269 and No. 16270 can be preset on the tool input screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16360 CIP
NOTE

#5 CIP In G01, G02, and G03 modes, a C–axis command is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
- 1070 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16362 CRM

#5 CRM According to a T command, the machine is:

0: Moved along the C–axis to the reference point.
1: Not moved along the C–axis to the reference point.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16363 G91

#0 G91 For C-axis control, a G91 command is:

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
16370 Number of tool 1 for which C–axis control can be executed
- 1071 -

Each of the parameters set the number of a tool for which C–axis control can be executed.
C–axis control can be effective for the tool set to this parameter.
16390 C-axis backlash 1
- 1072 -
Each of these parameters specifies a C–axis backlash for each tool for which C–axis
control can be executed (C1–axis backlash under C–axis synchronous control).
The parameter values correspond to the tool numbers specified in parameter Nos. 16370
to 16389, respectively.
NOTE
The parameters are valid when the CBR bit (bit 7 of parameter
16360) is set to 1. When these parameters are valid, the C–axis
backlash specified in parameter 1852 is invalid.
16430 C–axis position compensation 1
- 1073 -

[Unit of data] degree (machine unit)
Each of these parameters specifies a C–axis position compensation compensation value

(C1–axis backlash under C–axis synchronous control).
These compensated values correspond to the tool numbers set in parameter Nos. 16370 to
16389.
NOTE
The values validated when parameter MAI (No. 16360, #2) is set to
1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16500 SF0
NOTE

#0 SF0 The safety zone of type:

0: A is used.
1: B is used.
NOTE
When type B is used, punching is inhibited in punching mode and
entry is inhibited in laser mode.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16501 SZ4 SZ3 SZ2 SZ1

#0 to 3 SFj When a safety zone check is executed, in the #j (j=1 to 4) area,

0: An entry is inhibited.
1: Punching is inhibited.
NOTE
When type B of safety zone check is used, this parameter is
disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16502 ACZ SZI MDP

- 1074 -
#0 MDP On the safety zone setting display,

0: The workpiece coordinate system is indicated.
1: The machine coordinate system is indicated.
#4 SZI Data set on the safety zone setting display is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
#6 ACZ The function used to prevent interference between workpiece holders of:
0: Type A is used.
1: Type B is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16503 SF8

#4 SF8 The number of safety zones to be used is:

0: Up to 4.
1: Up to 8.
NOTE
This parameter is valid if the safety zone area extension function is
specified.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16504 RTZ

#1 RTZ In the safety zone check, setting area of the circle tool figure is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
16505 Positive X coordinate for safety zone 1
16506 Negative X coordinate for safety zone 1
16507 Y coordinate for safety zone 1
- 1075 -

[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
Each set of the parameters specify safety zone 1, 2, 3, or 4.
NOTE
1 Set four safety zones to be arranged sequentially in the order of #1,
#2, #3 and #4 from the origin to positive of the X–axis.
2 Zeros must be specified for zones which need not be specified.
16517 Size of tool area 1 in the X direction
16518 Size of tool area 1 in the Y direction

- 1076 -
[Valid data range] 0 or Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
In the safety zone check, each set of the parameters specify tool area 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,or
8.
Tool area 9, 10, 11, or 12 are specified by setting each set of the parameters among
Nos.16551 to 16558.
NOTE
A tool area is selected by signals SZTS0 to SZTS3 input from a
PMC machine.
16540 Width of workpiece holder 1 along the X–axis for automatic setting of a safety zone

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
Each of the parameters specifies the width of a workpiece holder along the X–axis for the
automatic setting of a safety zone by an external signal.
The parameter values correspond to safety zones 1 to 4, specified in parameter Nos.
16505 to 16516, respectively.
NOTE
When automatic setting is executed, these parameters must be set.
16551 X dimension of tool area 9
16552 Y dimension of tool area 9
- 1077 -

[Valid data range] 0 or Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
In the safety zone check, each set of the parameters specifies tool area 9, 10, 11, or 12.
Tool area 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,or 8 are specified by setting each set of the parameters among
Nos.16517 to 16532.
NOTE
A tool area is selected by signals SZTS0 to SZTS3 input from a PMC
machine.
Compensation value used by the function used to prevent interference

16561
between workpiece holders

This parameter specifies a compensation value for retraction along the Y–axis when the
function used to prevent interference between workpiece holders of type B is used.

operation
d：Setting value
workpiece
holder End position
Start position
16610 M code 1 for canceling the Y–axis crack
- 1078 -
Set an M code for Y-axis crack cancel.

The cancel M–code must be specified in these parameters by different from M–code used
for another function. But M02 and M30 are possible.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16844 OVE

#1 OVE Rapid traverse override is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled. (The override is fixed to 100% at all times.)
18060 M code that prohibits backward movement

When an M code that prohibits backward movement is specified during backward
movement, backward movement of blocks before the M code is prohibited. In this case,
backward movement prohibition signal MRVSP<Fn091.2> is output.
The M code that prohibits backward movement is not output to the PMC as an M code.
As the M code that prohibits backward movement, set an M code that is not used by
auxiliary functions and macros.
18065 M code 1 that prohibits backward movement and is output as an M code

18066 M code 2 that prohibits backward movement and is output as an M code

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19500 FNW

- 1079 -
#6 FNW When the feedrate is determined according to the feedrate difference and acceleration in
AI contour control:
0: The maximum feedrate at which the allowable feedrate difference and acceleration
for each axis are not exceeded is used.
1: A feedrate is determined to satisfy the condition that the allowable feedrate
difference and allowable acceleration rate of each axis are not exceeded, and also to
ensure that a constant deceleration rate is applied to the same figure regardless of the
direction of movement.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19501 FRP

#5 FRP Linear rapid traverse is:

0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for each axis in parameter No. 1671.
When using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, set an
acceleration rate change time in parameter No. 1672.
When this parameter is set to 1, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is also

applied to rapid traverse if all conditions below are satisfied. At this time,
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is not applied.
• Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1: Linear interpolation type positioning
• A value other than 0 is set in parameter No. 1671 for an axis.
• The AI contour control mode is set.
If all of these conditions are not satisfied, acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is
applied.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19503 ZOL HPF

#0 HPF When a feedrate is determined based on acceleration in AI contour control, smooth

feedrate control is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#4 ZOL The deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control (deceleration based
on Z-axis fall angle) is:
0: Enabled for all commands.
1: Enabled for linear interpolation commands only.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19515 ZG2

- 1080 -
#1 ZG2 When the deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control (deceleration
based on Z-axis fall angle) is used:
0: Stepwise override values are applied.
1: Inclined override values are applied.
This parameter is valid only when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is set to 1.
When this parameter is set to 1, be sure to set parameter Nos. 19516, 8456, 8457, and
8458.
19516 Override for area 1 in deceleration based on cutting load in AI contour control

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets an override value for area 1 when the deceleration function based on
cutting load in AI contour control is used.
This parameter is valid only when bit 1 (ZG2) of parameter No. 19515 is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19540 FAP

#0 FAP Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the linear positioning parameters, namely bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 and
bit 0 (FAP) of parameter No. 19540, are set to 1, and a value other than 0 is set in
reference acceleration parameter No. 1671 for an axis, the acceleration/deceleration for
rapid traverse becomes optimal torque acceleration/deceleration in the mode for
acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation (or the AI contour control
mode). Optimal torque acceleration/ deceleration is controlled according to parameter-set
restricted acceleration curve data.
Setting an acceleration pattern

A ccelera tion
P1 P2 A cceleration pa ttern
Aa P3
P0
P4 P5
Ab
Spe ed
Fa Fb
- 1081 -
Set the speed at each of the acceleration setting points (P0 to P5) in a corresponding
parameter, then in parameters for each axis, set acceleration rates applicable in the
following four cases at these speeds: when a movement in the positive direction is
accelerated, when a movement in the positive direction is decelerated, when a movement
in the negative direction is accelerated, and when a movement in the negative direction is
decelerated.
The line connecting the acceleration setting points is the acceleration pattern.
The acceleration rate for each axis is calculated. For example, between speeds Fa to Fb in
the above figure, the acceleration rates corresponding to these speeds, Aa to Ab, are used
for calculation.
The tangent acceleration is controlled so that it does not exceed the calculated
acceleration rate for each axis.
CAUTION
When an acceleration pattern is set, setting a high acceleration rate
immediately after a speed of 0 can cause an impact on the
machine, so it is not desirable. Therefore, be sure to apply a
relatively low acceleration rate at a speed of 0 as shown in the
above figure.
19541 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (speed at P1)

[Unit of data] 0.01%
The speeds at acceleration setting points P1 to P4 are to be set with speed parameters Nos.
19541 to 19544 as ratios to the rapid traverse speed (parameter No. 1420). The speed at
P0 is 0, and the speed at P5 is the rapid traverse rate specified with parameter No. 1420.
Any acceleration setting point for which the speed parameter (one of Nos. 19541 to
19544) is set to 0 will be skipped.
Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P0 during movement in + direction and

19545
acceleration)

19546
acceleration)

19547
acceleration)

19548
acceleration)

19549
acceleration)

19550
acceleration)
Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P0 during movement in - direction and

19551
acceleration)
- 1082 -
19552
acceleration)

19553
acceleration)

19554
acceleration)

19555
acceleration)

19556
acceleration)

19557
deceleration)

19558
deceleration)

19559
deceleration)

19560
deceleration)

19561
deceleration)

19562
deceleration)

19563
deceleration)

19564
deceleration)

19565
deceleration)

19566
deceleration)

19567
deceleration)

19568
deceleration)

[Unit of data] 0.01%
For each travel direction and each acceleration/deceleration operation, set the allowable
acceleration rate at each of the acceleration setting points (P0 to P5). As an allowable
acceleration rate, set a ratio to the value set in the reference acceleration parameter No.
1671. When 0 is set, the specification of 100% is assumed.
- 1083 -
24000 ATR value corresponding to slave 01 on first FSSB line

to to
NOTE

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1001 to 1046, 2001 to 2016, 3001 to 3004, 1000
Each of these parameters sets the value (ATR value) of the address translation table
corresponding to each of slave 1 to slave 32 on first FSSB line (first optical connector).
The slave is a generic term for servo amplifiers, spindle amplifiers and separate detector
interface units connected via an FSSB optical cable to the CNC. Numbers 1 to 32 are
assigned to slaves, with younger numbers sequentially assigned to slaves closer to the
CNC.
A 2-axis amplifier consists of two slaves, and a 3-axis amplifier consists of three slaves.
In each of these parameters, set a value as described below, depending on whether the
slave is an amplifier, separate detector interface unit, or nonexistent.
• When the slave is a servo amplifier:
Set the axis number of a servo amplifier to allocate (value set with parameter No.
1023) plus 1000.
• When the slave is a separate detector interface unit:
Set 3001, 3002, 3003, and 3004, respectively, for the first (one connected nearest to
the CNC), second, third, and fourth separate detector interface units.
• When the slave is nonexistent:
Set 1000.
NOTE
When the FSSB is set to the automatic setting mode (when the bit
0 (FMD) of parameter No. 1902 is set to 0), parameter Nos. 24000
to 24031 are automatically set as data is input on the FSSB setting
screen. When the manual setting 2 mode is set (when the bit 0
(FMD) of parameter No. 1902 is set to 1), be sure to directly set
values in parameter Nos. 24000 to 24031.
- 1084 -
Example of axis configuration and parameter settings

- Example 1 Typical setting
CNC
Slave ATR
Controlled Program Servo number No.24000 Axis
axis axis name axis -24031
number No.1020 No.1023
1 X 1 SV(1 axis) 1 1001 X
2 Y 3 2 1002 A
SV(2 axes)
3 Z 4 3 1003 Y
4 A 2 4 1004 Z
SV(2 axes)
5 B 5 5 1005 B
6 C 6 M1 6 3001 (M1)
SV(1 axis) 7 1006 C
M2 8 3002 (M2)
9 to 32 1000 (None)
CNC
Slave ATR
Controlled Program Servo number No.24000 Axis
axis axis name axis -24031
number No.1020 No.1023
SV(1 axis) 1 1001 X
1 X 1
2 Y 3 2 1003 Y
SV(2 axes)
3 Z 4 3 1004 Z
4 A 2 4 1002 A
SV(2 axes)
5 B 5 5 1005 B
6 C 6 M1 6 3001 (M1)
SV(1 axis) 7 1006 C
M2 8 3002 (M2)
9 to 32 1000 (None)
SV: Servo amplifier

M1/M2: First/second separate detector interface units
24032 ATR value corresponding to slave 01 on second FSSB line

to to
- 1085 -
NOTE

[Data type] Word
corresponding to each of slave 1 to slave 32 on second FSSB line (second optical
connector). Set these parameters only when a servo axis control card with two optical
connectors (FSSB lines) is used.
To specify these parameters, follow the same procedure as for the first FSSB line
(parameters Nos. 24000 to 24031). Note, however, that the valid data range varies
depending on the separate detector interface unit used.
24064 ATR value corresponding to slave 01 on third FSSB line

to to
NOTE

[Data type] Word
corresponding to each of slave 1 to slave 32 on third FSSB line. Set these parameters only
when an additional axis board is used.
To specify these parameters, follow the same procedure as for the first FSSB line
(parameters Nos. 24000 to 24031). Note, however, that the valid data range varies.
24096 Connector number for the first or ninth separate detector interface unit
24097 Connector number for the second or tenth separate detector interface unit
24098 Connector number for the third or eleventh separate detector interface unit
24099 Connector number for the fourth or twelfth separate detector interface unit
24100 Connector number for the fifth separate detector interface unit
24101 Connector number for the sixth separate detector interface unit
24102 Connector number for the seventh separate detector interface unit
- 1086 -
24103 Connector number for the eighth separate detector interface unit
NOTE

Set a connector number for the connector to which a separate detector interface unit is
attached if the separate detector interface unit is to be used. The following table lists the
necessary settings. Be sure to specify 0 for connectors not in use.
Correspondence between connectors and connector numbers

Connector Connector number
JF101 1
JF102 2
JF103 3
JF104 4
JF105 5
JF106 6
JF107 7
JF108 8
(Setting example)
Connector to which each separate
Parameter setting
Controlled detector interface unit is attached
axis 1st 2nd 5th 6th No. No. No. No.
connector connector connector connector 24096 24097 24100 24101
X1 JF101 －－－ 1 0 0 0
Y1 － JF102 －－ 0 2 0 0
Z1 －－ JF102 － 0 0 2 0
X2 － JF101 －－ 0 1 0 0
Y2 －－－ JF101 0 0 0 1
Z2 －－－－ 0 0 0 0
A1 －－ JF101 － 0 0 1 0
B1 －－－ JF102 0 0 0 2
C1 － JF104 －－ 0 4 0 0
A2 JF102 －－－ 2 0 0 0
B2 － JF103 －－ 0 3 0 0
C2 －－－ JF103 0 0 0 3
NOTE
1 Specify these parameters when separate detector interface units
are used.
2 Parameters Nos. 24096 to 24103 are specified automatically when
data is entered on the FSSB setting screen if the FSSB setting mode
in use is the automatic setting mode (bit 0 (FMD) of parameter No.
1902 = “0”). If the manual setting 2 mode (bit 0 (FMD) of parameter
No. 1902) = “1”), specify the parameters directly.
- 1087 -
A.2 DATA TYPE

Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
Bit machine group
0 or 1
Bit path
Bit axis
Byte
-128 to 127
Byte machine group Some parameters handle these types of
0 to 255
Byte path data as unsigned data.
Byte axis
Word
Word machine group -32768 to 32767 Some parameters handle these types of
Word path 0 to 65535 data as unsigned data.
Word axis
2-word
2-word machine group Some parameters handle these types of
0 to ±999999999
2-word path data as unsigned data.
2-word axis
Real
Real machine group See the standard parameter
Real path setting tables.
Real axis
NOTE
1 Each of the parameters of the bit, bit machine group, bit path, and bit axis types
consists of 8 bits for one data number (parameters with eight different
meanings).
2 For machine group types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
machine groups are present, so that independent data can be set for each
machine group.
3 For path types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of paths are
present, so that independent data can be set for each path.
4 For axis types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of control
axes are present, so that independent data can be set for each control axis.
5 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The range
varies according to the parameters. For the valid data range of a specific
parameter, see the explanation of the parameter.
- 1088 -
A.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES

This section defines the standard minimum data units and valid data ranges of the CNC parameters of the
real type, real machine group type, real path type, and real axis type. The data type and unit of data of
each parameter conform to the specifications of each function.
NOTE
1 Values are rounded up or down to the nearest multiples of the minimum data
unit.
2 A valid data range means data input limits, and may differ from values
representing actual performance.
3 For information on the ranges of commands to the CNC, refer to Appendix D,
"Range of Command Value."
(A) Length and angle parameters (type 1)

Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
IS-A 0.01 -999999.99 to +999999.99
IS-B 0.001 -999999.999 to +999999.999
mm
IS-C 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
deg.
IS-D 0.00001 -9999.99999 to +9999.99999
IS-E 0.000001 -999.999999 to +999.999999
IS-A 0.001 -99999.999 to +99999.999
IS-B 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
inch IS-C 0.00001 -9999.99999 to +9999.99999
IS-D 0.000001 -999.999999 to +999.999999
IS-E 0.0000001 -99.9999999 to +99.9999999
(B) Length and angle parameters (type 2)

IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
mm
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
deg.
IS-D 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
IS-E 0.000001 0.000000 to +999.999999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
inch IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
IS-D 0.000001 0.000000 to +999.999999
IS-E 0.0000001 0.0000000 to +99.9999999
(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters

IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999000.00
IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999000.000
mm/min
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
degree/min
IS-D 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
IS-E 0.000001 0.000000 to +999.999999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +96000.000
IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +9600.0000
inch/min IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +4000.00000
IS-D 0.000001 0.000000 to +400.000000
IS-E 0.0000001 0.0000000 to +40.0000000
- 1089 -
(D) Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters

IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
2 IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
mm/sec
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
deg./sec2
IS-D 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
IS-E 0.000001 0.000000 to +999.999999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
inch/sec2 IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
IS-D 0.000001 0.000000 to +999.999999
IS-E 0.0000001 0.0000000 to +99.9999999
- 1090 -
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX B.PROGRAM CODE LIST
B PROGRAM CODE LIST

ISO code EIA code Custom macro
Usable as
Character name Code Code Without With
Character Character file name
(hexadecimal) (hexadecimal) custom custom
macro macro
Number 0 0 30 0 20 *
Number 1 1 B1 1 01 *
Number 2 2 B2 2 02 *
Number 3 3 33 3 13 *
Number 4 4 B4 4 04 *
Number 5 5 35 5 15 *
Number 6 6 36 6 16 *
Number 7 7 B7 7 07 *
Number 8 8 B8 8 08 *
Number 9 9 39 9 19 *
Address A A 41 a 61 *
Address B B 42 b 62 *
Address C C C3 c 73 *
Address D D 44 d 64 *
Address E E C5 e 75 *
Address F F C6 f 76 *
Address G G 47 g 67 *
Address H H 48 h 68 *
Address I I C9 i 79 *
Address J J CA j 51 *
Address K K 4B k 52 *
Address L L CC l 43 *
Address M M 4D m 54 *
Address N N 4E n 45 *
Address O O CF o 46 *
Address P P 50 p 57 *
Address Q Q D1 q 58 *
Address R R D2 r 49 *
Address S S 53 s 32 *
Address T T D4 t 23 *
Address U U 55 u 34 *
Address V V 56 v 25 *
Address W W D7 w 26 *
Address X X D8 x 37 *
Address Y Y 59 y 38 *
Address Z Z 5A z 29 *
Delete DEL FF Del 7F
Back space BS 88 BS 2A
Tabulator HT 09 Tab 2E
End of block LF or NL 0A CR or EOB 80
Carriage return CR 8D
Space SP A0 SP 10
Absolute rewind stop % A5 ER 0B
Control out (start of
( 28 (2-4-5) 1A
comment)
Control in (end of
) A9 (2-4-7) 4A
comment)
- 1091 -
B.PROGRAM CODE LIST APPENDIX B-64504EN/02

Usable as
macro macro
Plus sign + 2B + 70 *
Minus sign - 2D - 40 *
Colon (address O) : 3A
Optional block skip / AF / 31
Period (decimal point) . 2E . 6B *
Parameter
Sharp # A3
(No.6012)
Dollar sign $ 24
Ampersand & A6 & 0E
Apostrophe ‘ 27
Parameter
Asterisk * AA
(No.6010)
Comma , AC , 3B
Semicolon ; FB
Left angle bracket < 2C
Parameter
Equal sign = BD
(No.6011)
Right angle bracket > BE
Question mark ? 3F
Commercial at mark @ C0
Quotation mark “ 22
Parameter
Left square bracket [ DB
(No.6013)
Parameter
Right square bracket ] DD
(No.6014)
Parameter
Underscore _ 6F *
(No.6018)
Lowercase letter a a E1 *
Lowercase letter b b E2 *
Lowercase letter c c 63 *
Lowercase letter d d E4 *
Lowercase letter e e 65 *
Lowercase letter f f 66 *
Lowercase letter g g E7 *
Lowercase letter h h E8 *
Lowercase letter i i 69 *
Lowercase letter j j 6A *
Lowercase letter k k EB *
Lowercase letter l l 6C *
Lowercase letter m m ED *
Lowercase letter n n EE *
Lowercase letter o o 6F *
Lowercase letter p p F0 *
Lowercase letter q q 71 *
Lowercase letter r r 72 *
Lowercase letter s s F3 *
Lowercase letter t t 74 *
Lowercase letter u u F5 *
Lowercase letter v v F6 *
Lowercase letter w w 77 *
Lowercase letter x x 78 *
- 1092 -
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX B.PROGRAM CODE LIST
Usable as
macro macro
Lowercase letter y y F9 *
Lowercase letter z z FA *
NOTE
1 The symbols used in the "Custom macro" column have the following meanings.
(Space) : The character will be registered in memory and has a specific meaning.
It is used incorrectly in a statement other than a comment, an alarm
occurs.
: The character will not be registered in memory and will be ignored.
: The character will be registered in memory, but will be ignored during
program execution. The character that has "*" in its "Usable as file name"
field and is used as a file name is not ignored. Lowercase alphabetic
characters in an NC program follow the setting of bit 0 (ESL) of parameter
No. 3459.
: The character will be registered in memory. If it is used in a statement other
than a comment, an alarm occurs.
: If it is used in a statement other than a comment, the character will not be
registered in memory. If it is used in a comment, it will be registered in
memory.
2 The symbol used in the column "Usable as file name" has the following meaning:
* : Capable of being coded between "<" and ">" as a file name.
3 Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is correct.
4 Codes with incorrect parity cause the TH alarm. But they are ignored without
generating the TH alarm when they are in the comment section.
- 1093 -
C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND
PROGRAM FORMAT APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
C LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM

FORMAT
Some functions cannot be added as options depending on the model.
For details of command formats, see the relevant sections or subsections.
In the list, the following symbols are used:

x : 1st basic axis (X),
y : 2nd basic axis (Y),
coded using G code system A

• IP_ : presents a combination of arbitrary axis addresses using X,Y,Z,A,B and C (such as X_ Y_ Z_).
Functions Illustration Program format

Positioning IP G00 IP_ ;
(G00)
Start point
Linear interpolation IP G01 IP_ F_;
(G01)
Start point
Circular interpolation G02 R_
(G02, G03) Start point G17 X_ Y_ F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
G02 R_
R G02 G18 X_ Z_ F_ ;
J G03 I_ K_
I
(x, y) G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 G03 J_ K_
(x, y)
R
J
I
Start point
Helical interpolation z G02 R_
(G02, G03) G17 X_ Y_ α_ F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ α_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
Start
point (xyz)
G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ α_ F_ ;
(x, y) G03 J_ K_
In case of G03 on X-Y plane α: Arbitrary address except the circular

interpolation axis
Dwell X_
G04 ;
(G04) P_
AI contour control G05.1 Q1 ; AI contour control mode on
(G05.1) G05.1 Q0 ; AI contour control mode off
AI contour control (Advanced
G08 P1 ; AI contour control mode on
preview control)
G08 P0 ; AI contour control mode off
(G08)
- 1094 -
C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX PROGRAM FORMAT

Exact stop Speed
(G09)
G01
G09 G02 IP_ ;
Time
G03
In-position check
Programmable data input Tool compensation memory A

(G10) G10 L01 P_ R_ ;
Tool data input

G10L30 ; Tool data entry mode
setting
N_P_R_ ; Tool data entry
G11 ; : Tool data entry mode cancel
Plane selection G17 ; Xp Yp-plane selection
(G17, G18, G19) G18 ; Zp Xp-plane selection
G19 ; Yp Zp-plane selection
Inch/metric conversion Inch input G20 ;
(G20, G21) Metric input G21 ;
Stored stroke check (XYZ) G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
(G22, 23) G23 ; Cancel
(IJK)
Reference position return Reference position(G28) G28 ; :
(G28) Return to the reference position without passing
Intermediate point through the intermediate point
IP G28 IP_ ; :
Start point
Return to the reference position via the
intermediate point
Pattern function Please refer to the chapter G26_ ;
(G26, G76, G77, G78, G79, “PATTERN FUNCTION”. G76_ ;
G86, G87, G88, G89) G77_ ;
G78_ ;
G79_ ;
G86_ ;
G87_ ;
G88_ ;
G89_ ;
Floating reference position Floating reference position G30.1 IP_ ;
return
Intermediate point
(G30.1)
IP Start
point
Skip function IP G33 IP_ F_ ;

(G33)
Start point Skip signal
Bending compensation Please refer to the chapter G38 I_ J_ K_ P_ Q_ R_ ; :
(G38,G39) "BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, Bending compensation for X axis direction：
G39)". G39 I_ J_ K_ P_ Q_ R_ ; :
Bending compensation for Y axis direction
- 1095 -

Tool radius/tool nose radius G41 G17
G18 G41 D_ ;
compensation, 3-dimensional G42
G19
cutter compensation
(G38, G39, G40 to G42) D : Tool compensation number
G42 G40 : Cancel
G40
Normal direction control G41.1 (G151); Normal direction control on : left
(G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) G42.1(G152) ; Normal direction control on :
(G150, G151, G152) right
G40.1 (G150); Normal direction control cancel
Linear punching command Please refer to the chapter "LINEAR G45 X_ Y_ P_ Q_ R_ D_ ;
(G45) PUNCHING COMMAND (G45) ".
Circular punching commands Please refer to the chapter G46 X_ Y_ R_ P_ Q_ ;
(G46,47) "CIRCULAR PUNCHING G47 X_ Y_ R_ P_ Q_ ;
COMMANDS (G46, G47)".
Scaling P4 P3 G51 X_ Y_ Z_ P_
(G50, G51) I_ J_ K_ ;
P4' P3'
IP
P, I, J, K : Scaling magnification
X, Y, Z : Control position of scaling
P1' P2' G50 : Cancel
P1 P2
Programmable mirror image Mirror G51.1 IP_ ;
(G50.1, G51.1) G50.1 ; . . . Cancel
IP
Local coordinate system Local coordinate G52 IP_ ;
setting system
x
(G52)
IP Workpiece
y coordinate system
Command in machine G53 IP_ ;

coordinate system
(G53)
Selection of workpiece G54
IP :
coordinate system Workpiece : IP_ ;
origin G59
(G54 to G59) offset
Cutting mode (G64) G64_ ; Cutting mode

v
Exact stop mode (G61) G61_ ; Exact stop mode
G64
t
Automatic corner override G62_ ; Automatic corner override
v
(G62)
G61
t
- 1096 -
C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX PROGRAM FORMAT

Custom macro • One-shot call
(G65, G66, G66.1, G67) G65 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
P : Program number
Macro
L : Number of repetition
G65 P_L_ ;
O_ ; • Modal call
M99 ; G66 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
Call after the move command
G66.1 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
Each block call
G67 ; Cancel
Circular nibbling #n G68 I r J θ K Δθ P d Q p ;
(G68) d
#2
r
#1
Δθ p
θ
Linear nibbling d G69 I l J θ P d Q p ;

(G69) l
#n
p
θ
#1 #2
Nibbling by M function M## ←M code of nibbling mode

‥‥‥‥‥ The route and the pitch are
‥‥‥‥‥ specified according to these
‥‥‥‥‥ command
M$$ ←M code of nibbling mode cancel
## : Set value of parameter No.16183

$$ : Set value of parameter No.16184
Coordinate system rotation Y G17 X_ Y_
(G84, G85) G84 G18 Z_ X_ R α ;
α G19 Y_ Z_
(x y) G85；: cancel
X
In case of X-Y plane
Positioning and no press start G70 X_ Y_ C_ ;
signal
(G70) (X,Y)
Start point
Base point command G72 X_ Y_ ;

(G72)
(X,Y)
Multiple-piece machining Please refer to the chapter G73

(G73, G74, G98) “MULTIPLE-PIECE MACHINING” W_ Q_ ;
G74
W : Macro number
G98 X_ Y_ I_ P_ J_ K_ ;
- 1097 -

Automatic repositioning G75 X_ ;
(G75)
Absolute/incremental G90_ ; Absolute programming

programming G91_ ; Incremental programming
(G90/G91) :
G90_ G91_ ; Programming in both modes
Maximum incremental command G91.1 IP_ ;
value check (G91.1) IP_ ; Maximum incremental value
Set 0 to cancel maximum incremental value
check.
Change of workpiece G92 IP_ ; Change of workpiece coordinate
coordinate system (G92) IP system
Workpiece coordinate system G92.1 IP 0 ;

preset (G92.1)
Feed per minute, mm/min inch/min F_ ; Feed per minute
mm/rev inch/rev
- 1098 -
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
D RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

Linear axis
- In case of millimeter input, feed screw is millimeter
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Least command increment
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
(mm)
Max. programmable
±999,999.99 ±999,999.999 ±99,999.9999 ±9,999.99999 ±999.999999
dimension (mm)
Max. rapid traverse
*1 999,000 999,000 100,000 10,000 1,000
(mm/min)
*1
Feedrate range (mm/min) 0.01 to 999,000 0.01 to 999,000 0.0001 to 100,000 0.00001 to 10,000 0.000001 to 1,000
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
Incremental feed (mm/step)
1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
10.0 1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001
Tool compensation amount
*2 0 to ±9,999.99 0 to ±9,999.999 0 to ±9,999.9999 0 to ±9,999.99999 0 to ±999.999999
(mm)
Backlash compensation
*3 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
amount (pulses)
*4
Dwell (sec) 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999 0 to 99,999.9999 0 to 9,999.99999 0 to 999.999999
- In case of inch input, feed screw is millimeter

Increment system
Least input increment (inch) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
(inch)
Max. programmable
±39,370.078 ±39,370.0787 ±3,937.00787 ±393.700787 ±39.3700787
dimension (inch)
Max. rapid traverse
*1 999,000 999,000 100,000 10,000 1,000
(mm/min)
*1
Feedrate range (inch/min) 0.001 to 96,000 0.0001 to 9,600 0.00001 to 4,000 0.000001 to 400 0.0000001 to 40
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Incremental feed (inch/step)
0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
*2 0 to ±999.999 0 to ±999.9999 0 to ±999.99999 0 to ±999.999999 0 to ±99.9999999
(inch)
*3 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
amount (pulses)
*4
- 1099 -
D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
- In case of inch input, feed screw is inch

Increment system
Least input increment (inch) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
(inch)
Max. programmable
±99,999.999 ±99,999.9999 ±9,999.99999 ±999.999999 ±99.9999999
dimension (inch)
Max. rapid traverse
*1 96,000 9,600 4,000 400 40
(inch/min)
*1
Feedrate range (inch/min) 0.001 to 96,000 0.0001 to 9,600 0.00001 to 4,000 0.000001 to 400 0.0000001 to 40
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Incremental feed (inch/step)
0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
*4 0 to ±999.999 0 to ±999.9999 0 to ±999.99999 0 to ±999.999999 0 to ±99.9999999
(inch)
*3 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
amount (pulses)
*4
- In case of millimeter input, feed screw is inch

Increment system
Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
(mm)
Max. programmable
±999,999.99 ±999,999.999 ±99,999.9999 ±9,999.99999 ±999.999999
dimension (mm)
Max. rapid traverse
*1 96,000 9,600 4,000 400 40
(inch/min)
*1
Feedrate range (mm/min) 0.01 to 999,000 0.001 to 999,000 0.0001 to 100,000 0.00001 to 10,000 0.000001 to 1,000
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
Incremental feed (mm/step)
1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
10.0 1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001
*2 0 to ±9,999.99 0 to ±9,999.999 0 to ±9,999.9999 0 to ±9,999.99999 0 to ±999.999999
(mm)
*3 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
amount (pulses)
*4
- 1100 -
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
- Rotary axis
Increment system
Least input increment (deg) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
(deg)
Max. programmable
±999,999.99 ±999,999.999 ±99,999.9999 ±9,999.99999 ±999.999999
dimension (deg)
Max. rapid traverse
*1 999,000 999,000 100,000 10,000 1,000
(deg/min)
*1
Feedrate range (deg/min) 0.01 to 999,000 0.001 to 999,000 0.0001 to 100,000 0.00001 to 10,000 0.000001 to 1,000
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
Incremental feed (deg/step)
1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
10.0 1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001
*2 0 to ±9,999.99 0 to ±9,999.999 0 to ±9,999.9999 0 to ±9,999.99999 0 to ±999.999999
(deg)
*3 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
amount (pulses)
*4
NOTE
*1 The feedrate range shown above are limitations depending on CNC interpolation
capacity. As a whole system, limitations depending on servo system must also
be considered.
*2 If the mode of input is switched between inch input and metric input, the
maximum compensation value that can be set at inch input time is (maximum
compensation value) × 1/25.4. If a value exceeding this value is specified at inch
input time, the compensation value is not converted to a metric value correctly
when the mode of input is switched to metric input.
*3 The unit is the detection unit.
*4 Depends on the increment system of the axis at in address X.
- 1101 -
E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
E NOMOGRAPHS
Appendix E, "NOMOGRAPHS", consists of the following sections:
E.1 TOOL PATH AT CORNER ...........................................................................................................1102

E.2 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING .............................................................1105
E.1 TOOL PATH AT CORNER

When servo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting or caused by the
positioning system when a servo motor is used) is accompanied by cornering, a slight deviation is
produced between the tool path (tool center path) and the programmed path as shown in Fig. E.1 (a).
Time constant T1 of the exponential acceleration/deceleration is fixed to 0.
θ
V2
Programmed path
Tool path
V1
Fig. E.1 (a) Slight deviation between the tool path and the programmed path
This tool path is determined by the following parameters:

• Feedrate (V1, V2)
• Corner angle (θ)
• Exponential acceleration / deceleration time constant (T1) at cutting (T1 = 0)
• Presence or absence of buffer register.
The above parameters are used to theoretically analyze the tool path and above tool path is drawn with the
parameter which is set as an example.
When actually programming, the above items must be considered and programming must be performed
carefully so that the shape of the workpiece is within the desired precision.
In other words, when the shape of the workpiece is not within the theoretical precision, the commands of
the next block must not be read until the specified feedrate becomes zero. The dwell function is then used
to stop the machine for the appropriate period.
Explanation
- Analysis
The tool path shown in Fig. E.1 (b) is analyzed based on the following conditions:
• Feedrate is constant at both blocks before and after cornering.
• The controller has a buffer register. (The error differs with the reading speed of the tape reader,
number of characters of the next block, etc.)
- 1102 -
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS
V
VY2 φ2
VX2
θ
V
Z
VY1
φ2
VX1 0 X
Fig. E.1 (b) Example of tool path
- Description of conditions and symbols

VX1 = Vcos φ1
VY1 = Vsin φ1
VX2 = Vcos φ2
VY2 = Vsin φ2
V : Feedrate at both blocks before and after cornering

VX1 : X-axis component of feedrate of preceding block
VY1 : Y-axis component of feedrate of preceding block
VX2 : X-axis component of feedrate of following block
VY2 : Y-axis component of feedrate of following block
θ : Corner angle
φ1 : Angle formed by specified path direction of preceding block and X-axis
φ2 : Angle formed by specified path direction of following block and X-axis
- Initial value calculation
Y0
V
X0
Fig. E.1 (c) Initial value
The initial value when cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinates at the end of command
distribution by the controller, is determined by the feedrate and the positioning system time constant of
the servo motor.
- 1103 -
E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
X 0 = VX1( T1 + T2 )
Y0 = VY1( T1 + T2 )
T1 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant. (T=0)

T2 : Time constant of positioning system (Inverse of position loop gain)
- Analysis of corner tool path

The equations below represent the feedrate for the corner section in X-axis direction and Y-axis direction.
(t) VX1 t t
VX = ( VX 2 − VX1 )[1 − { T1 exp( − ) − T2 exp( − )} + VX1 ]
T1 − T2 T1 T2
VX1 t t
= VX 2 [1 − { T1 exp( − ) − T2 exp( − )}]
T1 − T2 T1 T2
(t) VY 1 − VY 2 t t
VY = { T1 exp( − ) − T2 exp( − )} + VY 2
T1 − T2 T1 T2
Therefore, the coordinates of the tool path at time t are calculated from the following equations:
X( t ) = ∫ VX ( t )dt − X 0
1
VX 2 − VX1 t t
= { T1 exp( − ) − T2 exp( − )} − VX 2 ( T1 + T2 − t )
2 2
T1 − T2 T1 T2
∫
1
Y( t ) = VY ( t )dt − Y0
0
V Y 2 − V Y1 t t
= { T1 exp( − ) − T2 exp( − )} − VY 2 ( T1 + T2 − t )
2 2
T1 − T2 T1 T2
- 1104 -
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS
E.2 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING

When a servo motor is used, the positioning system causes an error between input commands and output
results. Since the tool advances along the specified segment, an error is not produced in linear
interpolation. In circular interpolation, however, radial errors may be produced, sepecially for circular
cutting at high speeds.
This error can be obtained as follows:
Y Δr
Command path
Actual path
1 2 V2
Δr = (T1 + T2 2 (1 - α 2 )) . . . . . (1)
2 r
Δr : Maximum radius error (mm)
v : Feedrate (mm/sec)
r : Circle radius (mm)
T1 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constantat cutting (sec) (T=0)
T2 : Time constant of positoning system (sec)
(Inverse of positon loop gain)
α: Feed forward coefficient (%)
In the case of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration and linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
interpolation, an approximation of this radius error can be obtained with the following expression:
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation

1 1 V2
Δr = ( T12 + T2 2 (1 - α 2 ))
24 2 r
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation
1 1 V2
Δr = ( T12 + T2 2 (1 - α 2 ))
48 2 r
Thus, the radius error in the case of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration and linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is smaller than in case of exponential acceleration/deceleration by a factor of 12, excluding any error
caused by a servo loop time constant.
Since the machining radius r (mm) and allowable error Δr (mm) of the workpiece is given in actual
machining, the allowable limit feedrate v (mm /sec) is determined by equation (1).
Since the acceleration/deceleration time constant at cutting which is set by this equipment varies with the
machine tool, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
- 1105 -
F. SETTINGS AT POWER-ON,
IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR
IN THE RESET STATE APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
F SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR

STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE
Either the clear state or reset state is entered during a reset is set by bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 (0:
reset state/1: clear state).
The symbols in the figure below have the following meanings.
○ : The setting remains unchanged or the operation continues.
× : The setting is deleted or the operation stops.
Item Power-on Clear state Reset state

Settings Offset ○ ○ ○
Set data ○ ○ ○
Parameter ○ ○ ○
Various Program in memory ○ ○ ○
data items Information of the block
read in advance during × × ×
automatic operation
N (sequence number) × (Note 7) × (Notes 1, 2, 7) ○ (Note 1, 2)
One-shot G code × × ×
Initial value (Note 3)
Initial value (Note 3)
G20 and G21 are set to
Modal G code G20 and G21 are not ○ (Note 2 and 6)
the state at the previous
changed (Note 2).
power-off.
F 0 0 ○ (Note 2)
S, T, M × ○ (Note 2) ○ (Note 2)
K (count specification) × × ×
Coordinate Workpiece coordinates 0 (Note 4) ○ ○
Operation Movement × × ×
during Dwell × × ×
execution M, S, T code output × × ×
Tool radius × × ×
compensation
Storing a called × × (Note 5) ×
subprogram
Output "0”(when no alarm cause “0” (when no alarm “0” (when no alarm
CNC alarm signal AL
signals is present) cause is present) cause is present)
Reference position
○ (or × for emergency ○(or × for emergency
return completion signal ×
stop) stop)
ZPx
S, T, B codes × ○ ○
M code × × ×
M, S, T, B strobe × × ×
signals
CNC ready signal MA “1” ○ ○
“1” “1” “1”
Servo ready signal SA (when a servo alarm does (when a servo alarm does (when a servo alarm does
not occur) not occur) not occur)
Cycle start signal STL × × ×
Feed hold signal SPL × × ×
Tool position compensation at a reset
○ : Cancelled.
× : Not canceled.
- 1106 -
F.SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN
THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX RESET STATE
NOTE
1 When the beginning position is found, the main program number is displayed.
2 If a reset is made during execution of a block, the states of the modal G code
and modal address (such as N, F, S, T, or M) specified in the block are not
reflected. The modal information specified in the previous and preceding
blocks is kept.
3 The initial value of the modal G code depends on the following parameters. For
details, refer to the parameter manual (B-64490EN).
- Bit 0 (G01) of parameter No. 3402
- Parameters No. 3406 to 3409
4 For detection of an absolute position, the value is generated from machine
coordinates and a workpiece origin offset.
5 When a reset is made during execution of a subprogram, a return to the main
program is performed. Execution at a midpoint in the subprogram is
impossible.
6 When one of the following two settings, which hold the modal G code in group 1
by a reset is set:
- Reset state (bit 6 of parameter No. 3402 is 0)
- Clear state (bit 1 of parameter No. 3402 is 1) and the modal G code in group
1 is held at a time of a reset (bit 1 of parameter No. 3406 is 1),
7 When bit 0 (SEK) of parameter No. 11353 is set to 1, sequence number N can
be held even at power-on or in the clear state.
- 1107 -
G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES
CORRESPONDENCE APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
G CHARACTER-TO-CODES
CORRESPONDENCE TABLE
Appendix G, "CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE", consists of the following
sections:
G.1 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE ........................................................1108

G.2 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE............................................................1109
G.1 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark
G 071 “ 034 Quotation mark
H 072 # 035 Sharp
I 073 $ 036 Dollar sign
J 074 % 037 Percent
K 075 & 038 Ampersand
L 076 ‘ 039 Apostrophe
M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis
N 078 ) 041 Right parenthesis
O 079 * 042 Asterisk
P 080 + 043 Plus sign
Q 081 , 044 Comma
R 082 - 045 Minus sign
S 083 . 046 Period
T 084 / 047 Slash
U 085 : 058 Colon
V 086 ; 059 Semicolon
W 087 < 060 Left angle bracket
X 088 = 061 Equal sign
Y 089 > 062 Right angle bracket
Z 090 ? 063 Question mark
0 048 @ 064 At mark
1 049 [ 091 Left square bracket
2 050 ] 093 Right square bracket
3 051 ^ 094
4 052 _ 095 Underscore
5 053
- 1108 -
G.CHARACTER-TO-CODES
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX CORRESPONDENCE TABLE
G.2 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE
- 1109 -
- 1110 -
- 1111 -
- 1112 -
- 1113 -
- 1114 -
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST
H ALARM LIST
Appendix H, "ALARM LIST", consists of the following items:
(1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm) ...................................................................................1115

(2) Background edit alarms (BG alarm) ..................................................................................................1115
(3) Communication alarms (SR alarm) ...................................................................................................1115
(4) Parameter writing alarm (SW alarm).................................................................................................1135
(5) Servo alarms (SV alarm)....................................................................................................................1135
(6) Overtravel alarms (OT alarm)............................................................................................................1142
(7) Memory file alarms (IO alarm)..........................................................................................................1142
(8) Alarms requiring power to be turned off (PW alarm)........................................................................1143
(9) Overheat alarms (OH alarm)..............................................................................................................1144
(10) Other alarms (DS alarm)..................................................................................................................1144
(11) Malfunction prevention function alarms (IE alarm) ........................................................................1151
(1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm)

(2) Background edit alarms (BG alarm)
(3) Communication alarms (SR alarm)
Alarm numbers are common to all these alarm types.

Depending on the state, an alarm is displayed as in the following examples:
PS"alarm number" Example: PS0003
BG"alarm number" Example: BG0085
SR"alarm number" Example: SR0001

0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the
diagnostics screen.
0002 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting bit 0 (TVC) of
parameter No. 0000 to “0”.
0003 TOO MANY DIGIT Data entered with more digits than permitted in the NC
instruction word.
The number of permissible digits varies according to the
function and the word.
0004 INVALID BREAK POINT OF WORDS NC word(s) address + numerical value not in word format.
This alarm is also generated when a custom macro does not
contain a reserved word, or does not conform to the syntax.
0005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS NC word(s) address + numerical value not in word format.
This alarm is also generated when a custom macro does not
contain a reserved word, or does not conform to the syntax.
0006 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN A minus sign (–) was specified at an NC instruction word or
system variable where no minus signal may be specified.
0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no
decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were
specified.
0009 IMPROPER NC-ADDRESS An illegal address was specified, or parameter 1020 is not set.
- 1115 -
H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64504EN/02

0010 IMPROPER G-CODE 1) An unusable G code is specified.
2) The continuous circle motion-based groove cutting option
parameter is not effective.
3) The continuous circle motion-based groove cutting enable
signal is "0".
0011 FEED ZERO ( COMMAND ) The cutting feedrate instructed by an F code has been set to
0.
0015 TOO MANY SIMULTANEOUS AXES A move command was specified for more axes than can be
controlled by simultaneous axis control.
Either add on the simultaneous axis control extension option,
or divide the number of programmed move axes into two
blocks.
0020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS An arc was specified for which the difference in the radius at
the start and end points exceeds the value set in parameter
No. 3410. Check arc center codes I, J and K in the program.
The tool path when parameter No. 3410 is set to a large value
is spiral.
0021 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The plane selection instructions G17 to G19 are in error.
Reprogram so that same 3 basic parallel axes are not
specified simultaneously.
This alarm is also generated when an axis that should not be
specified for plane machining is specified, for example, for
circular interpolation or involute interpolation.
To enable programming of 3 or more axes, the helical
interpolation option must be added to each of the relevant
axes.
0022 R OR I,J,K COMMAND NOT FOUND The command for circular interpolation lacks arc radius R or
coordinate I, J, or K of the distance between the start point to
the center of the arc.
0025 CIRCLE CUT IN RAPID (F0) F0 (rapid traverse in inverse feed or feed specified by an F
code with 1–digit number) was specified during circular
interpolation (G02, G03) or involute interpolation (G02.2,
G03.2).
0028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The plane selection instructions G17 to G19 are in error.
Reprogram so that same 3 basic parallel axes are not
specified simultaneously.
This alarm is also generated when an axis that should not be
specified for plane machining is specified, for example, for
circular interpolation.
0029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE Illegal offset No.
0031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 The relevant data input or option could not be found for the L
No. of G10.
No data setting address such as P or R was specified.
An address command not concerned with data setting was
specified. An address varies with the L No.
The sign or decimal point of the specified address is in error,
or the specified address is out of range.
0032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset
amount by system variables, the offset amount was
excessive.
0033 NO INTERSECTION AT G41/G42 The intersection cannot be obtained by the intersection
calculation in tool radius compensation. Modify the program.
0034 ONLY G00/G01 ALLOWED IN In tool radius compensation, a startup or cancellation is
STUP/EXT BLK performed in the G02 or G03 mode. Modify the program.
- 1116 -

0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - Skip function(G33) cannot be specified. This alarm is
generated when a G code (such as for tool radius
compensation) of group 07 is not canceled.
- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip
command (G33P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip
in the PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit
override by address Q.
0037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN The compensation plane G17/G18/G19 was changed during
G41/G42 cutter radius compensation. Modify the program.
0038 INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting will occur in tool radius/tool nose radius
BLOCK compensation because the arc start point or end point
coincides with the arc center. Modify the program.
0039 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN Chamfering or corner R was specified with a start-up, a
G41,G42 cancel, or switching between G41 and G42 in G41 and G42
commands (tool radius compensation). The program may
cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner R. Modify
the program.
0041 INTERFERENCE IN G41/G42 In tool radius compensation, excessive cutting may occur.
Modify the program.
0043 ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND On a system with a DRILL-MATE ATC installed, M06 is not
specified in a block that specifies a T code. Alternatively, a T
code beyond the allowable range is specified.
0060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND [External data input/output]
The specified number could not be found for program
number and sequence number searches.
Although input/output of a pot number of tool data or
offset input was requested, no tool number was input after
power on. The tool data corresponding to the entered tool
number could not be found.
[External workpiece number search]
The program corresponding to the specified workpiece
number could not be found.
0070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient.
Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
0071 DATA NOT FOUND - The address to be searched was not found.
- The program with specified program number was not
found in program number search.
Check the data.
0072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic),
125 (option), 200 (option), 400 (option) or 1000 (option).
Delete unnecessary programs and execute program
registration again.
0073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs
and execute program registration again.
0074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER The program number is other than 1 to 9999. Modify the
program number.
0075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number
was protected.
In program matching, the password for the encoded program
was not correct.
An attempt was made to select a program being edited in the
background as the main program.
An attempt was made to call a program being edited in the
background as a subprogram.
- 1117 -

0076 PROGRAM NOT FOUND The specified program is not found in the subprogram call,
macro call or graphic copy.
The M, G, T or S codes are called by a P instruction other
than that in an M98, G65, G66, G66.1 or interrupt type custom
macro, and a program is called by a No. 2 auxiliary function
code.
This alarm is also generated when a program is not found by
these calls.
0077 TOO MANY SUB,MACRO NESTING The total number of subprogram and macro calls exceeds the
permissible range.
Another subprogram call was executed during an external
memory subprogram call.
0078 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND The specified sequence No. was not found during sequence
number search.
The sequence No. specified as the jump destination in
GOTO–– and M99P–– was not found.
0079 PROGRAM NOT MATCH The program in memory does not match the program stored
on tape.
Multiple programs cannot be matched continuously when bit 3
of parameter No. 2200 is set to “1”.
Set bit 3 of parameter No. 2200 to “0” before executing a
match.
0085 OVERRUN ERROR The next character was received from the I/O device
connected to RS232C interface 1 before it could read a
previously received character.
0086 DR OFF During I/O process by RS232C interface 1, the data set ready
input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible causes
are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable, and a defective
printed circuit board.
0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW During a read by RS232C interface 1, although a read stop
command was issued, more than 10 characters were input.
The I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.
0090 REFERENCE RETURN 1. The reference position return cannot be performed
INCOMPLETE normally because the reference position return start point
is too close to the reference position or the speed is too
slow. Separate the start point far enough from the
reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speed for
reference position return.
2. An attempt was made to set the zero position for the
absolute position detector by return to the reference
position when it was impossible to set the zero point.
Rotate the motor manually at least one turn, and set the
zero position of the absolute position detector after
turning the CNC and servo amplifier off and then on
again.
0091 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION Manual return to the reference position cannot be performed
RETURN IS NOT PERFORMED IN when automatic operation is halted. Perform the manual
FEED HOLD return to the reference position when automatic operation is
stopped or reset.
0110 OVERFLOW :INTEGER An integer went out of range during arithmetic calculations.
0111 OVERFLOW :FLOATING A decimal point (floating point number format data) went out
of range during arithmetic calculations.
0112 ZERO DIVIDE An attempt was made to divide by zero in a custom macro.
0113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro is
commanded. Modify the program.
- 1118 -

0114 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The format used in an expression in a custom macro
statement is in error. The parameter tape format is in error.
0115 VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE A number that cannot be used for a local variable, common
variable, or system variable in a custom macro is specified.
In the EGB axis skip function (G31.8), a non-existent custom
macro variable number is specified. Or, the number of custom
macro variables used to store skip positions is not sufficient.
Alternatively, the header data in high-speed cycle machining
is improper. This alarm is issued in the following cases.
1) The header corresponding to the specified call machining
cycle number is absent.
2) The value of cycle connection information falls outside the
allowable range (0 to 999).
3) The number of data items in the header falls outside the
allowable range (1 to 65535).
4) The storage start data variable number of executable data
falls outside the allowable ranges (#20000 to
#85535/#200000 to #986431/#2000000 to #3999999).
5) The storage end data variable number of executable data
falls outside the allowable ranges
(#85535/#986431/#3999999).
6) The storage start data variable number of executable data
is the same as the variable number used by the header.
0116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the left
side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the
right side of an expression.
0118 TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING Too many brackets “[ ]” were nested in a custom macro.
The nesting level including function brackets is 5.
0119 ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF The value of an argument in a custom macro function is out of
RANGE range.
0122 TOO MANY MACRO NESTING Too many macro calls were nested in a custom macro.
0123 ILLEGAL MODE FOR A GOTO statement or WHILE–DO statement was found in the
GOTO/WHILE/DO main program in the MDI or DNC mode.
0124 MISSING END STATEMENT The END instruction corresponding to the DO instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
0125 MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in a macro statement in a custom macro is in
ERROR error.
0126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER DO and END Nos. in a custom macro are in error, or exceed
the permissible range (valid range: 1 to 3).
0127 DUPLICATE NC,MACRO An NC statement and macro statement were specified in the
STATEMENT same block.
0128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The specified sequence No. could not be found for sequence
NUMBER number search.
The sequence No. specified as the jump destination in
GOTO-- and M99P-- could not be found.
0129 USE 'G' AS ARGUMENT G is used as an argument in a custom macro call. G can be
specified as an argument only in an every-block call (G66.1).
0130 NC AND PMC AXIS ARE The NC command and the PMC axis control command were
CONFLICTED conflicted. Modify the program or ladder.
0138 SUPERIMPOSED DATA The total distribution amount of the CNC and PMC is too large
OVERFLOW during superimposed control for PMC axis control.
0139 CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL The PMC axis was selected for the axis for which the PMC
AXIS axis is being controlled.
0140 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN In the background, an attempt was made to select or delete
USE the program being selected in the foreground. Perform the
correct operation for the background edition.
- 1119 -

0142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE The scaling rate is 0 times or 10000 times or more.
Modify the setting of the scaling rate. (G51P_ … or
G51I_J_K_ … or parameter No. 5411 or 5421)
0143 COMMAND DATA OVERFLOW An overflow occurred in the storage length of the CNC internal
data. This alarm is also generated when the result of internal
calculation of scaling, coordinate rotation and cylindrical
interpolation overflows the data storage. It also is generated
during input of the manual intervention amount.
0144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane and arc or tool radius⋅tool nose
radius compensation plane must be the same. Modify the
program.
0148 SETTING ERROR Automatic corner override deceleration rate is out of the
settable range of judgment angle. Modify the parameters
(No.1710 to No.1714).
0160 MISMATCH WAITING M-CODE A waiting M-code is in error.
<1> When different M codes are specified for path 1 and path
2 as waiting M codes without a P command.
<2> When the waiting M codes are not identical even though
the P commands are identical
<3> When the waiting M codes are identical and the P
commands are not identical (This occurs when a P
command is specified with binary value.)
<4> When the number lists in the P commands contain a
different number even though the waiting M codes are
identical (This occurs when a P command is specified by
combining path numbers.)
<5> When a waiting M code without a P command (2-path
waiting) and a waiting M code with a P command
(3-or-more-path waiting) were specified at the same time
<6> When a waiting M code without a P command was
specified for 3 or more paths.
0161 ILLEGAL P OF WAITING M-CODE P in a waiting M-code is incorrect.
<1> When address P is negative
<2> When a P value inappropriate for the system
configuration was specified
<3> When a waiting M code without a P command (2-path
waiting) was specified in the system having 3 or more
paths.
0177 CHECK SUM ERROR (G05) A checksum error occurred.
0178 ILLEGAL COMMAND G05 The settings of bits 4 to 6 of parameter No.7501 are invalid or
G05 was specified in any of the following mode.
- Tool radius compensation (G41/G42)
- Normal direction control (G41.1/G42.1)
- Scaling (G51)
- Programmable mirror image (G51.1)
- Coordinate system rotation (G84)
- Macro interruption(M96)
0179 PARAM. (NO.7510) SETTING The number of controlled axes set by the parameter No. 7510
ERROR exceeds the maximum number. Modify the parameter setting
value.
0199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro.
0210 CAN NOT COMMAND M198/M99 The execution of an M198 or M99 command was attempted
during scheduled operation. Alternatively, the execution of an
M198 command was attempted during DNC operation. Modify
the program.
- 1120 -

0213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In feed axis synchronization control, the following errors
SYNCHRO-MODE occurred during the synchronous operation.
1) The program issued the move command to the slave axis.
2) The program issued the manual operation (jog feed or
incremental feed) to the slave axis.
3) The program issued the automatic reference position
return command without specifying the manual reference
position return after the power was turned on.
0222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN Input and output are executed at a time in the background
BG-EDIT edition. Execute a correct operation.
0224 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED A reference return has not been performed before the start of
automatic operation.
(Only when bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is 0)
Perform a reference position return.
0231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 L52 Errors occurred in the specified format at the
programmable-parameter input.
0232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS Three or more axes were specified as helical axes in the
COMMAND helical interpolation mode. Five or more axes were specified
as helical axes in the helical interpolation B mode.
0233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that
connected via the RS-232-C interface, other users were using
it.
0241 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.2/G03.2 The end point of an involute curve on the currently selected
plane, or the center coordinate instruction I, J or K of the
corresponding basic circle, or basic circle radius R was not
specified.
0245 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS One of the G codes, G50, G10, G04, G28, G30.1, and G53,
BLOCK which cannot be specified in the same block as a T code, was
specified with a T code.
0247 THE MISTAKE IS FOUND IN THE When an encrypted program is output, EIA is set for the
OUTPUT CODE OF DATA. output code. Specify ISO.
0300 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SCALING An illegal G code was specified during scaling. Modify the
program.
0301 RESETTING OF REFERENCE Although bit 0 (IDGx) of parameter No. 1012 was set to 1 to
RETURN IS INHIBITED inhibit the reference position from being set again for
reference position setting without a dog, an attempt was made
to perform a manual return to the reference position.
0302 SETTING THE REFERENCE The reference position could not be set for reference position
POSITION WITHOUT DOG IS NOT setting without a dog. Possible causes are:
PERFORMED - The axis was not moved in the direction of a return to the
reference position for jog feeding.
- The axis was moved in the direction opposite to the
direction of a manual return to the reference position.
- Since the one-rotation signal sent from the position
detector is not detected, the grid for manual reference
position return is not established. (Bit 6 of diagnostic data
No. 0201 must be 1.)
0304 G28 IS COMMANDED WITHOUT Although a reference position was not set, an automatic return
ZERO RETURN to the reference position (G28) was commanded.
0307 CAN NOT START REFERENCE An attempt was made to set a butt-type reference position for
RETURN WITH MECHANICAL an axis for which to use the function to set a reference
STOPPER SETTING position without a dog.
0310 FILE NOT FOUND The specified file could not be found during a subprogram or
macro call.
0311 CALLED BY FILE NAME FORMAT An invalid format was specified to call a subprogram or macro
ERROR using a file name.
- 1121 -

0331 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER IN AX[] An illegal value is specified for an AX[] axis number.
0332 ILLEGAL AXIS ADDRESS IN An illegal value is specified for an AXNUM[] axis address.
AXNUM[]
0334 INPUT VALUE OUT OF EFFECTIVE An offset data which was out of the effective range was
RANGE specified. (malfunction prevention function)
0335 PLURAL M CODE Multiple M codes are commanded simultaneously in a block
for a wait function with peripheral devices by an M code.
0337 EXCESS MAXIMUM INCREMENTAL The command value exceeded the maximum amount of
VALUE incremental. (malfunction prevention function)
0365 TOO MANY MAXIMUM SV/SP AXIS The maximum control axis number or maximum control
NUMBER PER PATH spindle number which could be used within a path was
exceeded.
(For a loader path, this alarm is generated if the number of
axis per path is set to 5 or greater.)
0366 IMPROPER G-CODE IN TURRET When the turret change tools method was selected (bit 3
METHOD (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 = 0), G43, G43.1, G43.4, G43.5,
or G43.7 was commanded.
0369 G31 FORMAT ERROR - No axis is specified or tow or more axes are specified in
the torque limit switch instruction (G33P98/P99).
- The specified torque Q value in the torque limit switch
instruction is out of range. The torque Q range is 1 to 254.
- The high-speed continuous skip option is not present.
0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR 1) The specified address P value for skip instruction (G33) is
out of range. The address P range is 1 to 4 in a
multistage skip function.
2) The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range.
The address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip
function.
3) P1-4 for G33, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a
multistage skip function option.
0371 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 In a command format for a programmable parameter input, an
attempt was made to change the parameter for an encryption
(No. 3220), key (No. 3221), or protection range (No.3222 or
No.3223) as a "the encryption function for the key and
program." Modify the program.
0373 ILLEGAL HIGH-SPEED SKIP In the skip commands (G33, G33P1 to G33P4) and dwell
SIGNAL commands (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4), the same high-speed
signal is selected in different paths.
0376 SERIAL DCL: ILLEGAL 1. When bit 1 of parameter No. 1815 is set to “1”, parameter
PARAMETER No.2002#3 is set to “0”
2. The absolute-position detection function is enabled. (Bit 5
of parameter No. 1815 is set to “1”. )
0377 ILLEGAL MODE FOR The GOTO statement, WHILE statement, and DO statement
GOTO/WHILE/DO cannot be executed in a program created in the MDI mode.
When a program including those statements is to be
executed, register the program in the program memory then
call the program for execution.
0387 ILLEGAL RTM DI/DO VAR There is no DI/DO variable that has a specified signal address
(alphabet, number).
0389 ILLEGAL RTM SIGNAL BIT Bits other than bits 0 to 7 cannot be specified with a DI/DO
signal.
0390 ILLEGAL MACRO VAR A macro variable which was not supported by the real time
custom macro function was used.
0391 RTM BRANCH OVER The number of branches supported with real time custom
macros was exceeded.
- 1122 -

0392 TOO MANY SENTENCE CONTROL Many reserved words (ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE, ZDO,
ZEND, G65, M99) for RTM control were used in a real time
macro command.
0393 NO SENTENCE CONTROL In a real time macro command, there is no data to be
assigned.
0394 ILLEGAL SENTENCE CONTROL The matching of reserved words (ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE,
ZDO, ZEND, G65, M99) for RTM control is incorrect.
0395 ILLEGAL NC WORD CONTROL Control code G65 or M99 for calling a subprogram or
returning from a subprogram is not coded correctly.
0396 ILLEGAL RTM SENTENCE In other than a real time macro command, a reserved word
CONTROL (ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE, ZDO, or ZEND) for RTM control
is used.
0397 RTM BUFFER OVER There is no buffer available for real time macro commands.
Too many blocks read in advance are buffered as triggers
used by real time macro commands.
0398 'ID OVER IN BUFFER In blocks read in advance, there are too many real time macro
commands with the same ID.
0399 'ID EXECUTION IN SAME TIME An attempt was made to execute real time macro commands
with the same ID by using the same NC statement as a
trigger.
0400 ONESHOT CMDOVER Too many one-shot real time macro commands are specified.
0401 EXEC CMD NUM OVER IN SAME The number of real time macro commands that can be
TIME executed simultaneously was exceeded
0402 ILLEGAL TOKEN FOR RTM A token, variable, or function that is not supported by the real
time custom macro function was detected.
0403 ACCESS TO RTM PROTECT VAR An attempt was made to access a protected variable.
0404 RTM ERROR An error related to a real time macro command occurred.
0406 CODE AREA SHORTAGE The storage size of the real time macro area is insufficient.
0407 DOULE SLASH IN RTM MODE In the compile mode, an attempt was made to set the compile
mode again.
0408 G90 IS NOT PERMITTED The absolute command cannot be specified.
0409 ILLEGAL AXIS NO An invalid axis number is specified.
0410 MIDDLE POINT IS NOT ZERO An intermediate point other than 0 is specified with G28.
0411 SIMULTANEOUSLY AXES OVER The maximum number of axes that can be controlled
simultaneously was exceeded.
0412 ILLEGAL G CODE An unusable G code was used.
0413 ILLEGAL ADDRESS An unusable address was used.
0414 ILLEGAL PMC AXIS NO. An invalid PMC axis number is specified.
0415 GROUP IS IN USE The group to which the specified axis belongs is already in
used.
0416 UNABLE TO USE THE AXIS The specified axis cannot be used.
0417 AXIS IS UNABLE TO MOVE The specified axis is placed in the inoperative state.
0418 ILLEGAL FEED SETTING An incorrect feedrate is set.
0419 ILLEGAL DISTANCE SETTING A travel distance beyond the specifiable range is specified.
0420 CONSTANT NUMBER P A subprogram is specified not by using a constant.
0421 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT G54 With G65, an invalid argument, L, is used.
0422 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT G54 With G65, an invalid argument is used.
0423 NO PMC AXIS CONTROL OPTION The option for PMC axis control is missing.
0424 MULTIPLE AXES IN ONE GROUP Multiple axes are using one group.
0425 ONE AXIS USE MULTIPLE GROU One axis is using multiple groups.
0459 ALL PARALLEL AXES IN PARKING All the axes specified during automatic operation are parking.
0501 THE COMMANDED M-CODE CAN The M code specified in parameter No. 11631 to 11646 was
NOT BE EXECUTED specified in other than an execution macro, macro interrupt,
macro call using a G or M code, or subprogram call using a T,
S, or second auxiliary function code.
- 1123 -

1001 AXIS CONTROL MODE ILLEGAL Axis control mode is illegal.
1013 ILLEGAL POS. OF PROGRAM NO. Address O or N is specified in an illegal location (e.g. after a
macro statement).
1014 ILLEGAL FORMAT OF PROGRAM Address O or N is not followed by a number.
NO.
1016 EOB NOT FOUND EOB (End of Block) code is missing at the end of a program
input in the MDI mode.
1059 COMMAND IN BUFFERING MODE The manual intervention compensation request signal MIGET
became “1” when a advanced block was found during
automatic operation.
To input the manual intervention compensation during
automatic operation, a sequence for manipulating the manual
intervention compensation request signal MIGET is required
in an M code instruction without buffering.
1077 PROGRAM IN USE An attempt was made in the foreground to execute a program
being edited in the background.
The currently edited program cannot be executed, so end
editing and restart program execution.
1079 PROGRAM FILE NOT FOUND The program of the specified file No. is not registered in an
external device. (external device subprogram call)
1080 DUPLICATE DEVICE SUB Another external device subprogram call was made from a
PROGRAM CALL subprogram after the subprogram called by the external
device subprogram call.
1081 EXT DEVICE SUB PROGRAM CALL The external device subprogram call is not possible in this
MODE ERROR mode.
1090 PROGRAM FORMAT ERROR A lowercase alphabetic character is found in other than an NC
program statement comment section, program name, or folder
name.
1091 DUPLICATE SUB-CALL WORD More than one subprogram call instruction was specified in
the same block.
1092 DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL WORD More than one macro call instruction was specified in the
same block.
1093 DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99 An address other than O, N, P or L was specified in the same
block as M99 during the macro modal call state.
1095 TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT More than ten sets of I, J and K arguments were specified in
the type–II arguments (A, B, C, I, J, K, I, J, K, ...) for custom
macros.
1096 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME An illegal variable name was specified. A code that cannot be
specified as a variable name was specified. [#_OFSxx] does
not match the tool offset memory option configuration.
1097 TOO LONG VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name is too long.
1098 NO VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name cannot be used as it is not
registered.
1099 ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ] A suffix was not specified to a variable name that required a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
A suffix was specified to a variable name that did not require a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
The value enclosed by the specified [ ] was out of range.
1100 CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL Call mode cancel (G67) was specified even though macro
continuous–state call mode (G66) was not in effect.
1101 ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT. An interrupt was made in a state where a custom macro
interrupt containing a move instruction could not be executed.
1115 READ PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the right
side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the
left side of an expression.
- 1124 -

1120 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT FORMAT The specified argument in the argument function (ATAN,
POW) is in error.
1124 MISSING DO STATEMENT The DO instruction corresponding to the END instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
1125 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The description of the expression in a custom macro
statement contains an error.
A parameter program format error.
The screen displayed to enter periodic maintenance data or
item selection menu (machine) data does not match the data
type.
1128 SEQUENCE NUMBER OUT OF The jump destination sequence No. in a custom macro
RANGE statement GOTO instruction was out of range (valid range: 1
to 99999999).
1131 MISSING OPEN BRACKET The number of left brackets ([) is less than the number of right
brackets (]) in a custom macro statement.
1132 MISSING CLOSE BRACKET The number of right brackets (]) is less than the number of left
brackets ([) in a custom macro statement.
1133 MISSING '=' An equal sign (=) is missing in the arithmetic calculation
instruction in a custom macro statement.
1134 MISSING ',' A delimiter (,) is missing in a custom macro statement.
1137 IF STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR The format used in the IF statement in a custom macro is in
error.
1138 WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the WHILE statement in a custom macro is
ERROR in error.
1139 SETVN STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the SETVN statement in a custom macro
ERROR is in error.
1141 ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN VAR. The SETVN statement in a custom macro contacts a
NAME character that cannot be used in a variable name.
1142 TOO LONG V-NAME (SETVN) The variable name used in a SETVN statement in a custom
macro exceeds 8 characters.
1143 BPRNT/DPRNT STATEMENT The format used in the BPRINT statement or DPRINT
FORMAT ERROR statement is in error.
1144 G10 FORMAT ERROR The G10 L No. contains no relevant data input or
corresponding option.
Data setting address P or R is not specified.
An address not relating to the data setting is specified. Which
address to specify varies according to the L No.
The sign, decimal point or range of the specified address are
in error.
1145 G10.1 TIME OUT The response to a G10.1 instruction was not received from
the PMC within the specified time limit.
1146 G10.1 FORMAT ERROR The G10.1 instruction format is in error.
1160 COMMAND DATA OVERFLOW An overflow occurred in the position data within the CNC.
This alarm is also generated if the target position of a
command exceeds the maximum stroke as a result of
calculation such as coordinate conversion, offset, or
introduction of a manual intervention amount.
1180 ALL PARALLEL AXES IN PARKING All of the axis specified for automatic operation are parked.
1200 PULSCODER INVALID ZERO The grid position could not be calculated during grid reference
RETURN position return using the grid system as the one–revolution
signal was not received before leaving the deceleration dog.
This alarm is also generated when the tool does not reach a
feedrate that exceeds the servo error amount preset to
parameter No. 1841 before the deceleration limit switch is left
(deceleration signal *DEC returns to “1”).
- 1125 -

1298 ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC An error occurred during inch/metric switching.
CONVERSION
1300 ILLEGAL ADDRESS The axis No. address was specified even though the
parameter is not an axis–type while loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape or by entry of the
G10 parameter.
Axis No. cannot be specified in pitch error compensation data.
1301 MISSING ADDRESS The axis No. was not specified even though the parameter is
an axis–type while loading parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape or by entry of the G10
parameter.
Or, data No. address N, or setting data address P or R are not
specified.
1302 ILLEGAL DATA NUMBER A non–existent data No. was found while loading parameters
or pitch error compensation data from a tape or by entry of the
G10 parameter.
An invalid address R value is specified in a pattern program
for each machining purpose on the high–speed high–precision
setting screen.
This alarm is also generated when illegal word values are
found.
1303 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER An axis No. address exceeding the maximum number of
controlled axes was found while loading parameters from a
tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
1304 TOO MANY DIGIT Data with too many digits was found while loading parameters
or pitch error compensation data from a tape.
1305 DATA OUT OF RANGE Out–of–range data was found while loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape.
The values of the data setting addresses corresponding to L
Nos. during data input by G10 was out of range.
This alarm is also generated when NC programming words
contain out–of–range values.
1306 MISSING AXIS NUMBER A parameter which requires an axis to be specified was found
without an axis No. (address A) while loading parameters from
a tape.
1307 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN Data with an illegal sign was found while loading parameters
or pitch error compensation data from a tape, or by entry of
the G10 parameter. A sign was specified to an address that
does not support the use of signs.
1308 MISSING DATA An address not followed by a numeric value was found while
loading parameters or pitch error compensation data from a
tape.
1329 ILLEGAL MACHINE GROUP An machine group No. address exceeding the maximum
NUMBER number of controlled machine groups was found while loading
parameters from a tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
1331 ILLEGAL PATH NUMBER An path No. address exceeding the maximum number of
controlled path was found while loading parameters from a
tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
1332 DATA WRITE LOCK ERROR Could not load data while loading parameters, pitch error
compensation data and work coordinate data from tape.
1333 DATA WRITE ERROR Could not write data while loading data from tape.
- 1126 -

1470 G40.1 –G42.1 PARAMETER MISS A parameter setting related to normal direction control is
illegal.
The axis number of a normal direction controlled axis is set in
parameter No. 5480, but that axis number is in the range of
the number of controlled axes.
The axis set as a normal direction controlled axis is not set as
a rotation axis (bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006) = 1 and
No.1022=0).
1471 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G40.1 An invalid G code was specified in the normal direction control
–G42.1 mode.
1580 ENCODE ALARM (PSWD&KEY) When an attempt was made to read a program, the specified
password did not match the password on the tape and the
password on tape was not equal to 0.
When an attempt was made to punch an encrypted tape, the
password was not in the range 0 to 99999999.
The password parameter is No. 2210.
1581 ENCODE ALARM (PARAMETER) When an attempt was made to output an encrypted tape, the
output code parameter was set to EIA. Set bit 1 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0000 to “0”. An incorrect instruction was
specified for program encryption or protection.
This alarm is generated if an attempt is made to perform
program editing, deletion, or range-specified output in the
protected range in the lock state. Or, a program outside the
protected range is specified in rage specification output in the
unlock state.
The protected range is defined from the program No. preset
by parameter No. 3222 up to the program No. preset to
parameter No. 3223. When both parameters are set to “0”, the
protected range becomes O9000 to O9999.
1590 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the
diagnostics screen.
1591 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting bit 0 (TVC) of
parameter No. 0000 to “0”.
1592 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a
block.
This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the end
of the NC program is read.
1805 ILLEGAL COMMAND [I/O Device]
An attempt was made to specify an illegal command during
I/O processing on an I/O device.
1806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently
selected in the setting was specified.
This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed
even though the I/O device is not a FANUC Cassette.
1807 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An I/O interface option that has not yet been added on was
specified.
The external I/O device and baud rate, stop bit and protocol
selection settings are erroneous.
1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being
accessed.
- 1127 -

1820 ILLEGAL DI SIGNAL STATE 1. An each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal
was turned “1” in the state in which all axes on the path
including the axis on which to perform preset with the
each axis workpiece coordinate system were not stopped
or in which a command was in execution.
2. When an M code for performing preset with an each axis
workpiece coordinate system preset signal was specified,
the each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal
was not turned “1”.
3. The auxiliary function lock is enabled.
4. When bit 6 (PGS) of parameter No. 3001 was set to 0 (M,
S, T, and B codes are not output in the high speed
program check mode), an M code for turning “1” an each
axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal in the
high speed program check mode was specified.
1823 FRAMING ERROR(1) The stop bit of the character received from the I/O device
connected to RS232C interface 1 was not detected.
1830 DR OFF(2) The data set ready input signal DR of the I/O device
connected to RS232C interface 2 turned OFF.
1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) The next character was received from the I/O device
connected to RS232C interface 2 before it could read a
previously received character.
1833 FRAMING ERROR(2) The stop bit of the character received from the I/O device
connected to RS232C interface 2 was not detected.
1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) The NC received more than 10 characters of data from the I/O
device connected to RS232C interface 2 even though the NC
sent a stop code (DC3) during data reception.
1912 V-DEVICE DRIVER ERROR (OPEN) An error occurred during device driver control.
1919 FATAL ERROR(USB MEMORY) A fatal error occurred in the USB file system. To restore the
file system, turn the power off.
1924 UNEXPECTED ERROR(USB An unexpected error occurred in the USB file system.
MEMORY)
1925 ILLEGAL PATH/FILE(USB An invalid path or file name was specified.
MEMORY)
1926 ACCESS DENIED(USB MEMORY) The USB memory could not be accessed.
1927 DEVICE IN FORMATTING(USB The USB memory is being formatted.
MEMORY)
1928 DEVICE NOT FOUND(USB No USB memory is inserted. Check the connection.
MEMORY)
1932 DEVICE IS FULL(USB MEMORY) The capacity of the USB memory is insufficient.
1937 RECOGNITION ERROR(USB The format of the USB memory is invalid. Format the USB
MEMORY) memory in FAT or FAT32 format. If the alarm is still issued,
replace the USB memory.
1938 END OF FILE FOUND(USB The end of file was detected before EOR(%) was read. The
MEMORY) file may be damaged.
1939 UNDEFINED ERROR(USB An undefined error occurred.
MEMORY)
1951 DEVICE IS BUSY(USB MEMORY) The USB memory is busy.
1952 TOO MANY FILES(USB MEMORY) The maximum number of files that can be opened
concurrently is exceeded.
1953 REMOVED IN ACCESSING(USB The USB memory was removed while being accessed.
MEMORY)
1954 PATH/FILE EXIST(USB MEMORY) The specified path or file already exists.
1955 PATH/FILE NOT FOUND(USB The specified path or file is not found.
MEMORY)
1956 DEVICE OVERCURRENT(USB Overcurrent was detected in the USB memory. Replace the
MEMORY) USB memory.
1957 PARITY ERROR(USB MEMORY) A parity error occurred in the USB memory. Turn the power to
the CNC off.
- 1128 -

1960 ACCESS ERROR (MEMORY CARD) Illegal memory card accessing
This alarm is also generated during reading when reading is
executed up to the end of the file without detection of the EOR
code.
1961 NOT READY (MEMORY CARD) The memory card is not ready.
1962 CARD FULL (MEMORY CARD) The memory card has run out of space.
1963 CARD PROTECTED (MEMORY The memory card is write–protected.
CARD)
1964 NOT MOUNTED (MEMORY CARD) The memory card could not be mounted.
1965 DIRECTORY FULL (MEMORY The file could not be generated in the root directory for the
CARD) memory card.
1966 FILE NOT FOUND (MEMORY The specified file could not be found on the memory card.
CARD)
1967 FILE PROTECTED (MEMORY The memory card is write–protected.
CARD)
1968 ILLEGAL FILE NAME (MEMORY Illegal memory card file name
CARD)
1969 ILLEGAL FORMAT (MEMORY Check the file name.
CARD)
1970 ILLEGAL CARD (MEMORY CARD) This memory card cannot be handled.
1971 ERASE ERROR (MEMORY CARD) An error occurred during memory card erase.
1972 BATTERY LOW (MEMORY CARD) The memory card battery is low.
1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST A file having the same name already exists on the memory
card.
2032 EMBEDDED ETHERNET/DATA An error was returned in the built-in Ethernet/data server
SERVER ERROR function.
For details, see the error message screen of the built-in
Ethernet or data server.
2051 #200-#499ILLEGAL P-CODE An attempt was made to enter a custom macro common
MACRO COMMON INPUT(NO variable not existing in the system.
OPTION)
2052 #500-#549P-CODE MACRO The variable name cannot be entered.
COMMON SELECT(CANNOT USE The SETVN command cannot be used with the P-CODE
SETVN) macro common variables #500 to #549.
2053 THE NUMBER OF #30000 IS An attempt was made to enter a P-CODE-only variable not
UNMATCH existing in the system.
2054 THE NUMBER OF #40000 IS An attempt was made to enter an extended P-CODE-only
UNMATCH variable not existing in the system.
2090 INTERRUPTED BLOCK NOT The termination coordinate of the interrupted block that the
FOUND searched and the memorized is different.
Possible causes are as follows:
・There is interruption in the movement block skipped by
#6060.
・The program is changed after it interrupts.
・The offset value is changed after it interrupts.
・The coordinate system after it interrupts.
4010 ILLEGAL REAL VALUE OF OBUF : The real value for a output buffer is in error.
- 1129 -

4500 REPOSITIONING COMMAND (1) M code for clamping a workpiece or M code for releasing
ERROR the workpiece is not set.
(2) A repositioning command(G75) and M/T code is
commanded in the same block.
(3) A repositioning command(direct command of M code for
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the circular
interpolation(G02, G03) mode.
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the coordinate
system rotation(G84) mode.
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the offset(G41,
G42) mode.
4502 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN BOLT HOLE The bolt hole circle (G26) was executed in the following state,
・I, J or K was not specified.
・I ≦ 0
・K = 0
4503 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LINE AT The line at angle (G76) was executed in the following state,
ANGLE ・I, J or K was not specified.
・K ≦ 0
4504 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN ARC The arc (G77) was executed in the following state,
・I, J, P or K was not specified.
・I ≦ 0
・K ≦ 0
4505 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN GRID The grid (G78, G79) was executed in the following state,
・I, J, P or K was not specified.
・P ≦ 0
・K ≦ 0
4506 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SHARE The shear proof (G86) was executed in the following state,
PROOFS ・I, J or P was not specified.
・In case of parameter AIP (No.16202#0) = 0
| I |＜ 1.5×| P |
・In case of parameter AIP (No.16202#0) = 1
| I |＜ | P |
・P = 0
4507 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SQUARE The square (G87) was executed in the following state,
・I, J or P was not specified.
・P ≦ 0
・Q ≦ 0
・| I | ＜ 3×| P |
・| J | ＜ 3×| Q |
4508 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN RADIUS The radius (G88) was executed in the following state,
・I, J, K, P or Q was not specified.
・I ≦ 0
・Q ≦ 0
・In case of specifying negative value for P
| P | ＞ 2.0 × I
・Commanded arc length ＜ Q
4509 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN CUT AT The cut at angle (G89) was executed in the following state,
ANGLE ・I, J, P or Q was not specified.
・Q ≦ 0
・I ＜ Q
- 1130 -

4510 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN The linear punching (G45) was executed in the following state,
LINE-PUNCH ・X, Y or P was not specified.
・Line length ＜ 1.5 × P
・P ≦ 0
・Q ≦ 0
4511 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN The circular punching (G46,G47) was executed in the
CIRCLE-PUNCH following state,
・R or Q was not specified.
・R = 0
・Q ≦ 0
・Start point = End point
・Arc length ＜ Q
4520 INHIBITED IN NIBBLING-MODE T code, M code, G04, G05, G05.1, G08, G28, G30.1, G70 or
G75 was specified in the nibbling mode.
4521 EXCESS NIBBLING MOVEMENT In the nibbling mode, the X-axis or Y-axis traveling distance
(X,Y) was larger than or equal to the limit ( No.16188 to 16192 )
4522 EXCESS NIBBLING MOVEMENT In the nibbling mode, the C-axis traveling distance was larger
(C) than or equal to the limit (No.16194)
4523 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN The circular nibbling (G68) was executed in the following
CIRCLE-NIBBL state,
・I, J, K, P or Q was not specified.
・I, J, K, P or Q was out of range.
・In case of specifying negative value for P
|P| ≧ 2I
・Q ＞ Maximum pitch (parameter No.16186)
4524 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LINE-NIBBL The linear nibbling (G69) was executed in the following state,
・I, J, P or Q was not specified.
・I, J, P or Q was out of range.
・Q ＞ Maximum pitch (parameter No.16186)
4530 A/B MACRO COMMAND ERROR (1) M code for clamping a workpiece or M code for releasing
the workpiece is not set.
(2) A repositioning command(G75) and M/T code is
commanded in the same block.
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the circular
interpolation(G02, G03) mode.
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the coordinate
system rotation(G68) mode.
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the offset(G41,
G42) mode.
4531 U/V MACRO FORMAT ERROR An attempt was made to store a macro while storing another
macro using a U or V macro.
A V macro was specified although the processing to store a
macro was not in progress.
A U macro number and V macro number do not correspond
with each other.
4532 IMPROPER U/V MACRO NUMBER The number of an inhibited macro was specified in a U or V
macro command.
4533 U/V MACRO MEMORY OVERFLOW An attempt was made to store too many macros with a U or V
macro command.
4534 W MACRO NUMBER NOT FOUND Macro number W specified in a U or V macro command is not
stored.
4536 NO W,Q COMMAND IN W or Q was not specified in the command for taking multiple
MULTI-PIECE workpieces.
- 1131 -

4537 ILLEGAL Q VALUE IN MULTI-PIECE In the command for taking multiple workpieces, Q is set to a
value beyond the range from 1 to 4.
4538 W NO. NOT FOUND IN Macro number W specified in the command for taking multiple
MULTI-PIECE workpieces is not stored.
4539 MULTI-PIECE SETTING IS ZERO The command for taking multiple workpieces was specified
although zero is specified for the function to take multiple
workpieces (No. 15649 or signals MLP1 and MLP2 (PMC
address G231, #0 and #1)).
4540 MULTI-PIECE COMMAND WITHIN The command for taking multiple workpieces was specified
MACRO when a U or V macro was being stored.
4542 MULTI-PIECE COMMAND ERROR Although G98 P0 was specified, the G73 command was
issued.
Although G98 K0 was specified, the G74 command was
issued.
4543 MULTI-PIECE Q COMMAND Although G98 P0 was specified, the Q value for the G74
ERROR command was not 1 or 3.
Although G98 P0 was specified, the Q value for the G73
command was not 1 or 2.
4544 MULTI-PIECE P/R COMMAND (1) In the command for resuming taking multiple workpieces,
ERROR the resume position (P) is set to a value beyond the range
from 1 to total number of workpieces to be machined.
(2) In the command for end position of taking multiple
workpieces, the end position (R) is set to a value beyond
the range from 1 to total number of workpieces to be
machined.
(3) In the command for end position of taking multiple
workpieces, the end position (R) is set to a smaller value
than the resume position (P).
4600 T,C COMMAND IN INTERPOLATION In the linear interpolation(G01) mode or circular interpolation
(G02,G03) mode, a T command or C-axis command was
specified.
4601 INHIBITED T,M COMMAND In the block of G10, G22, G23, G52, G53, G72, G73, G74,
G75, G92, G98 a T or M command was specified.
4602 ILLEGAL T-CODE The specified T command in not cataloged on the tool register
screen.
4604 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION A C-axis command was specified in the block containing a T
command for multiple tools.
4606 INHIBITED T COMMAND A T command was specified during normal line control.
4630 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LASER In the laser mode, a nibbling command or pattern command
MODE was specified.
In gap control mode, an attempt was made to make a switch
to the punch mode.
4650 IMPROPER G-CODE IN OFFSET In the cutter compensation mode, an inhibited G code was
MODE specified.
4751 CAN NOT COMMAND C AXIS The C axis was commanded at the C axis command invalid
block.
4872 AUTO SETTING COMMAND M code, S code, T code is specified with safety zone auto
ERROR setting command(G32).
G32 is specified in the nibbling mode, in the cutter
compensation, in the rotation mode or the scaling mode.
5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE BLOCK The number of words in a block exceeds the maximum. The
maximum is 26 words. However, this figure varies according
to NC options. Divide the instruction word into two blocks.
- 1132 -

5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE Due to compensation, point of intersection calculation,
interpolation or similar reasons, a movement distance that
exceeds the maximum permissible distance was specified.
Check the programmed coordinates or compensation
amounts.
5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRY RUN) The dry run feedrate parameter No. 1410 or maximum cutting
feedrate parameter No. 1422 for each axis has been set to 0.
The parameter for the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
is No. 1432 if acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
enabled and No. 1430 otherwise.
Functions that cause acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation include AI contour control.
5010 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a
block. This alarm is also generated when the percentage at
the end of the NC program is read.
5011 PARAMETER ZERO (CUT MAX) The maximum cutting feedrate parameter No. 1430 has been
set to 0.
The parameter is No. 1432 if acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is enabled and No. 1430 otherwise.
Functions that cause acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation include AI contour control, tool center point
control, and workpiece setting error compensation.
5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND A transfer could not be made because of no trace data.
5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M M codes which belonged to the same group were specified in
CODES a block. Alternatively, an M code which must be specified
without other M codes in the block was specified in a block
with other M codes.
5020 PARAMETER OF RESTART ERROR An invalid value is set in parameter No. 7310, which specifies
the axis order in which the tool is moved along axes to the
machining restart position in dry run. A value ranging from 1 to
the number of controlled axes may be set in this parameter.
5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (S-COMP) The setting of a parameter related to straightness
compensation contains an error.
Possible causes include:
- A non-existent axis number is set in a moving or
compensation axis parameter.
- More than 128 pitch error compensation points are set
between the furthest points in the negative and position
regions.
- The straightness compensation point numbers do not
have correct magnitude relationships.
- No straightness compensation point is found between the
furthest pitch error compensation point in the negative
region and that in the positive region.
- The compensation per compensation point is either too
large or too small.
5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT Circular interpolation has been specified on a plane consisting
of axes having different increment systems.
5065 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT(PMC Axes having different increment systems have been specified
AXIS) in the same DI/DO group for PMC axis control. Modify the
setting of parameter No. 8010.
5068 FORMAT ERROR IN G31P90 No travel axis was specified. Two or more travel axes were
specified.
5073 NO DECIMAL POINT No decimal point has been specified for an address requiring
a decimal point.
- 1133 -

5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address has been specified two or more times in a
single block. Alternatively, two or more G codes in the same
group have been specified in a single block.
5110 IMPROPER G-CODE (AICC MODE) An unspecifiable G code was specified in the AI contour
control mode.
5115 ILLEGAL ORDER (NURBS) There is an error in the specification of the rank.
5116 ILLEGAL KNOT VALUE (NURBS) Monotone increasing of knots is not observed.
5117 ILLEGAL 1ST CONTROL POINT The first control point is incorrect.
(NURBS) Or, it does not provide a continuity from the previous block.
5118 ILLEGAL RESTART (NURBS) After manual intervention with manual absolute mode set to
on, NURBS interpolation was restarted.
5199 ILLEGAL FINE TORQUE SENSING The setting of a fine torque sensing parameter is invalid.
PARAMETER - An invalid controlled axis number is set as the target axis.
5220 REFERENCE POINT ADJUSTMENT In case of distance coded linear scale I/F, the reference point
MODE auto setting bit 2 of parameter No. 1819 is set to "1". Move the
machine to reference position by manual operation and
execute manual reference return.
5257 G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation was specified in
MODE MDI mode. (Depending on the setting of the bit 4 (MCR) of
parameter No. 5008)
5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR The touch panel is not connected correctly, or the touch panel
cannot be initialized when the power is turned on. Correct the
cause then turn on the power again.
5362 CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS An inch/metric conversion was performed at a position other
than the reference position. Perform an inch/metric conversion
after returning to the reference position.
5364 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN PROGRAM (1) An unspecifiable G code was specified in the high-speed
CHECK program check mode.
(3) One of the following operations was performed.
- Reference position return of an axis for which the
reference position is not established, in the
high-speed program check mode
(4) Switching of PMC axis selection signal EAX*<G0136>
was performed.
(5) G10 was specified for bit 3 (PGR) of parameter No. 3454
in the high-speed program check mode.
(6) G10 was specified for bit 6 (PGS) of parameter No. 3001
in the high-speed program check mode.
5365 NOT CHANGE OF PROGRAM Switching of high-speed program check input signal
CHECK MODE PGCK<Gn290.5> was performed during execution of the
program.
5372 IMPROPER MODAL G-CODE In a block in which G53.2 is specified, a G code in group 01
(G53.2) other than G00 and G01 is specified.
Or, G53.2 is specified when the modal G code in group 01 is
in a state other than the G00 and G01 states.
5379 WRITE PROTECTED TO SLAVE A parameter cannot be set directly for a slave axis of axis
AXIS synchronous control.
5406 G41.3/G40 FORMAT ERROR The G40 block contains a move command.
5446 NO AVOIDANCE AT G41/G42 Because there is no interference avoidance vector, the
interference check avoidance function of tool radius/tool nose
radius compensation does not work.
5447 DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE AT The interference check avoidance function of tool radius/tool
G41/G42 nose radius compensation operation will lead to danger.
5448 INTERFERENCE TO AVD. AT In the interference check avoidance function of tool radius/tool
G41/G42 nose radius compensation, a further interference occurs for an
already created interference avoidance vector.
- 1134 -
(4) Parameter writing alarm (SW alarm)

SW0100 PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON The parameter setting is enabled (bit (PWE) of parameter No.
8000 is set to “1”).
To set the parameter, turn this parameter ON. Otherwise, set
to OFF.
(5) Servo alarms (SV alarm)

SV0001 SYNC ALIGNMENT ERROR In feed axis synchronization control, the amount of
compensation for synchronization exceeded the parameter
No. 8325 setting value.
This alarm occurs for a master or slave axis.
SV0002 SYNC EXCESS ERROR ALARM 2 In feed axis synchronization control, the amount of
synchronization error exceeded the parameter No. 8332
setting value. When the synchronization is not completed after
power-up, the determination is made by the parameter value
(No. 8332) multiplied by the parameter No. 8330 multiplier.
This alarm occurs only for a slave axis only.
SV0004 EXCESS ERROR (G31) The amount of positional deviation during torque limit skip
command operation exceeded the limit value of the parameter
No.6287.
SV0005 SYNC EXCESS ERROR (MCN) In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the
difference value of the machine coordinate between a master
and slave axes exceeded the parameter No. 8314 setting
value.
This alarm occurs for a master or slave axis.
SV0006 ILLEGAL TANDEM AXIS For the slave axis under tandem control, absolute position
detection is set (parameter bit 5 (APC) of parameter No. 1815
= 1).
SV0007 SV ALM ANOTHER PATH(MULTI When a multi-axis amplifier was used in a multi-path system
AMP.) across paths, a servo alarm occurred on an axis belonging to
another path.
When a system with two or more paths and multiple servo
axes between paths are controlled by a multi-axis amplifier, if
a servo alarm occurs on an axis belonging to another path of
the same amplifier, the MCC of the amplifier goes down and
SV0401 V-READY OFF occurs on an axis belonging to the
local path in the same amplifier. Since SV0401 is caused by a
servo alarm occurred on an axis in another path, SV0007 is
caused together to clearly indicate the fact.
The axis belonging to another path in the same amplifier
resolves the cause of the servo alarm.
SV0010 SV OVERHEAT Amplifier internal overheat
SV0011 SV MOTOR OVER The digital servo software detected an abnormal specified
CURRENT(SOFT) value. Possible causes include an unconnected power cable,
cable disconnection (open phase), and short-circuit.
SV0012 SV DRIVE OFF CIRCUIT FAILURE The two drive off inputs are not in the same status or a drive
off circuit error occurred.
SV0013 SV CPU BUS FAILURE An error was found in CPU bus data in the amplifier.
SV0014 SV CPU WATCH DOG An error occurred in CPU operation in the amplifier.
SV0015 SV LOW VOLT DRIVER The driver power supply voltage has dropped in the amplifier.
Possible causes include improper insertion of the control PC
board and amplifier failure.
- 1135 -

SV0016 SV CURRENT DETECT ERROR An error was found in motor current detection data in the
amplifier. Possible causes include improper insertion of the
control PC board and amplifier failure.
SV0017 SV INTERNAL SERIAL BUS An error occurred in serial bus communication in the amplifier.
FAILURE Possible causes include improper insertion of the control PC
board and amplifier failure.
SV0018 SV ROM DATA FAILURE An error was found in ROM data in the amplifier.
SV0019 PS GROUND FAULT A ground fault occurred in the motor, power cable, or
amplifier.
SV0020 PS GROUND FAULT A ground fault occurred in the motor, power cable, or
amplifier.
SV0021 PS OVERCURRENT 2 Overcurrent flowed in the input circuit.
SV0024 PS SOFT THERMAL A load higher than the rating was applied.
SV0025 PS OVER VOLT. DC LINK 2 Overvoltage of the DC link section
SV0028 PS LOW VOLT. DC LINK 2 The DC link voltage has dropped.
SV0031 PS ILLEGAL PARAMETER An invalid value is set for a PS control parameter.
SV0032 PS CONTROL AXIS ERROR 1 An invalid value is set for parameter No. 2557.
SV0033 PS CONTROL AXIS ERROR 2 An invalid value is set for parameter No. 2557.
SV0034 PS HARDWARE ERROR A PS hardware error was detected.
SV0301 APC ALARM: COMMUNICATION Since the absolute-position detector caused a communication
ERROR error, the correct machine position could not be obtained.
(data transfer error)
The absolute-position detector, cable, or servo interface
module is thought to be defective.
SV0302 APC ALARM: OVER TIME ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused an overtime error,
the correct machine position could not be obtained. (data
transfer error)
SV0303 APC ALARM: FRAMING ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a framing error,
the correct machine position could not be obtained. (data
transfer error)
SV0304 APC ALARM: PARITY ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a parity error, the
correct machine position could not be obtained. (data transfer
error)
SV0305 APC ALARM: PULSE ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a pulse error, the
correct machine position could not be obtained.
The absolute-position detector, or cable is thought to be
defective.
SV0306 APC ALARM: OVER FLOW ERROR Since the amount of positional deviation overflowed, the
correct machine position could not be obtained.
Check to see the parameter No. 2084 or No. 2085.
SV0307 APC ALARM: MOVEMENT EXCESS Since the machine moved excessively, the correct machine
ERROR position could not be obtained.
SV0360 ABNORMAL CHECKSUM(INT) The checksum alarm occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
- 1136 -

SV0361 ABNORMAL PHASE DATA(INT) The phase data abnormal alarm occurred on the built–in
Pulsecoder.
SV0363 ABNORMAL CLOCK(INT) The clock alarm occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0364 SOFT PHASE ALARM(INT) A digital servo soft detected an abnormality on the built in
Pulsecoder.
SV0365 BROKEN LED(INT) The digital servo software detected abnormal data on the
built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0366 PULSE MISS(INT) A pulse error occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0367 COUNT MISS(INT) A count error occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0368 SERIAL DATA ERROR(INT) The communications data could not be received from the
built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0369 DATA TRANS. ERROR(INT) A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the communications
data from the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0380 BROKEN LED(EXT) Separate detector error
SV0381 ABNORMAL PHASE (EXT) An abnormal alarm in the position data occurred on the
separate detector.
SV0382 COUNT MISS(EXT) A count error occurred on the separate detector.
SV0383 PULSE MISS(EXT) A pulse error occurred on the separate detector.
SV0384 SOFT PHASE ALARM(EXT) The digital servo software detected abnormal data on the
separate detector.
SV0385 SERIAL DATA ERROR(EXT) The communications data could not be received from the
separate detector.
SV0386 DATA TRANS. ERROR(EXT) A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the communications
data from the standalone detector.
SV0387 ABNORMAL ENCODER(EXT) An abnormality occurred on a separate detector. For more
information, contact the scale manufacturer.
SV0401 IMPROPER V_READY OFF Although the ready signal (PRDY) of the position control was
ON, the ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control was OFF.
SV0403 CARD/SOFT MISMATCH The combination of the axis control card and the servo
software is incorrect.
Probable causes are given below.
- The correct axis control card is not attached.
- The correct servo software is not installed in flash
memory.
SV0404 IMPROPER V_READY ON Although the ready signal (PRDY) of the position control was
OFF, the ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control was ON.
SV0409 DETECT ABNORMAL TORQUE An abnormal load was detected on the servo motor, or during
Cs axis or spindle positioning.
The alarm can be canceled by RESET.
SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) The amount of positional deviation during stopping exceeded
the parameter No. 1829 setting value.
SV0411 EXCESS ERROR (MOVING) The amount of positional deviation during traveling became
excessive than the parameter setting value.
SV0413 LSI OVERFLOW The counter for the amount of positional deviation overflowed
SV0415 MOTION VALUE OVERFLOW The velocity exceeding the travel velocity limit was
commanded.
- 1137 -

SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect.
When bit 4 of diagnosis data No. 203 is 1, an illegal parameter

was detected by the servo software. Identify the cause with
reference to diagnosis data No. 352.
When bit 4 of diagnosis data No. 203 is 0, the CNC software

detected an illegal parameter. Probable causes are given
below (see diagnosis data No. 280).
1) The value specified in parameter No. 2020 as the motor
model falls outside the specified range.
2) The motor rotation direction in parameter No. 2022 is not
set to a correct value (111 or -111).
3) The speed feedback pulse count per motor rotation in
parameter No. 2023 is set to a negative or other incorrect
value.
4) The position feedback pulse count per motor rotation in
parameter No. 2024 is set to a negative or other incorrect
value.
SV0420 SYNC TORQUE EXCESS In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the
difference value of torque between a master and slave axes
exceeded the parameter No. 2031 setting value.
This alarm occurs for a master axis.
SV0421 EXCESS ERROR(SEMI-FULL) The difference between the feedback from the semi and full
sides exceeded the setting of parameter No. 2118.
SV0422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was
exceeded.
SV0423 EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE In torque control, the total permissible move value specified
as a parameter was exceeded.
SV0430 SV MOTOR OVERHEAT The servo motor has overheated.
SV0431 PS OVERLOAD Overheat
SV0432 PS LOW VOLT. CONTROL The control power supply voltage has dropped.
SV0433 PS LOW VOLT. DC LINK Low DC link voltage
SV0434 SV LOW VOLT CONTROL Low control power voltage
SV0435 SV LOW VOLT DC LINK Low DC link voltage
SV0436 SOFTTHERMAL(OVC) The digital servo software detected a software thermal (OVC).
SV0437 PS OVERCURRENT Overcurrent on input circuit section.
SV0438 SV ABNORMAL CURRENT Motor overcurrent
SV0439 PS OVER VOLT. DC LINK The DC link voltage is too high.
SV0440 PS EXCESS-REGENERATION2 Excessive generative discharge
SV0441 ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the
motor current detection circuit.
SV0442 PS PRE-CHARGE FAILURE The spare charge circuit for the DC link is abnormal.
SV0443 PS INTERNAL FAN FAILURE Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0444 SV INTERNAL FAN FAILURE Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0445 SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a disconnected
Pulsecoder.
SV0446 HARD DISCONNECT ALARM The hardware detected a disconnected built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0447 HARD DISCONNECT(EXT) The hardware detected a disconnected separate detector.
SV0448 UNMATCHED FEEDBACK ALARM The sign of the feedback signal from the standalone detector
is opposite to that from the feedback signal from the built–on
Pulsecoder.
SV0449 SV IPM ALARM The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an alarm.
- 1138 -

SV0453 SPC SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM Software disconnection alarm of the built-in Pulsecoder.
Turn off the power to the CNC, then remove and insert the
Pulsecoder cable. If this alarm is issued again, replace the
Pulsecoder.
SV0454 ILLEGAL ROTOR POS DETECT The magnetic pole detection function terminated abnormally.
The magnetic pole could not be detected because the motor
did not run.
SV0456 ILLEGAL CURRENT LOOP An attempt was made to set the current loop that could not be
set.
The amplifier pulse module in use does not comply with HIGH
SPEED HRV. Or, requirements to control are not satisfied in
the system.
SV0458 CURRENT LOOP ERROR The specified current loop differs from the actual current loop.
SV0459 HI HRV SETTING ERROR For two axes whose servo axis numbers (parameter No.
1023) are consecutively even and odd numbers, HIGH
SPEED HRV control is possible for one axis and impossible
for the other.
SV0460 FSSB DISCONNECT The FSSB connection was discontinued.
Probable causes are:
1. The FSSB connection cable was disconnected or broken.
2. The amplifier was turned off .
3. In the amplifier, the low-voltage alarm occurred.
SV0462 SEND CNC DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received on a slave side
because of the FSSB communication error.
SV0463 SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received in the servo software
because of the FSSB communication error.
SV0465 READ ID DATA FAILED A read of the ID information for the amplifier has failed at
power-on.
SV0466 MOTOR/AMP. COMBINATION The maximum current of an amplifier is different to that of a
motor.
Probable causes are:
1. The connection command for an amplifier is incorrect.
2. The parameter No.2165 setting is incorrect
SV0468 HI HRV SETTING ERROR(AMP) An attempt was made to set up HIGH SPEED HRV control for
use when the controlled axis of an amplifier for which HIGH
SPEED HRV control could not be used.
SV0474 EXCESS ERROR(STOP:SV ) The servo detected that the positional deviation during a stop
exceeded the setting (parameters Nos. 1839 and 1842) in the
n-axis.
SV0475 EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:SV) The servo detected that the positional deviation during a travel
exceeded the setting (parameters Nos. 1838 and 1841) in the
n-axis.
SV0476 ILLEGAL SPEED CMD.(SV ) The servo detected that the speed command exceeded the
safety speed (parameters Nos. 13821 to 13824 (during
position control) or parameters Nos. 13826 to 13829 (during
speed control)) during safety monitoring (when safety
monitoring request signal *VLDVx is 0) in the n-axis. Keep the
safety speed.
SV0477 ILLEGAL MACHINE POS.(SV) The servo detected that the machine position fell outside the
safety area (setting by parameters Nos. 13831 to 13838)
during safety monitoring (when safety monitoring request
signal *VLDVx is 0) in the n-axis. Keep the safety area.
A machine position check is performed only on the axis for
which the reference position has been established. The axis
for which the reference position is not established is not
subjected to a machine position check.
- 1139 -

SV0478 ILLEGAL AXIS DATA(SV) The servo detected that an error occurred during transfer of
axis data in the n-axis.
When an alarm occurred because the configuration of the
servo amplifier was changed, set the axis number for the
servo amplifier (set bit 4 of parameter No. 2212 of the
corresponding axis to 1 and then 0 and turn off the power of
the entire system). When using a multiaxis amplifier, this
operation may not clear the alarm. In this case, repeat this
operation for the axes on which the alarm persists.
If an alarm occurs due to a cause other than the above,
replace the servo amplifier.
SV0481 SAFETY PARAM ERROR(SV) The servo detected that a safety parameter error occurred in
the n-axis.
SV0484 SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR(SV) A safety function error related to the servo was detected in the
n-axis.
- The servo or CNC detected that the safety function was
not executed in the servo.
- The result of a servo safety function check did not match
the result of a CNC safety function check.
- An error occurred during a test of the CPU of the servo.
- An error occurred during a check of RAM of the servo.
SV0488 SELF TEST OVER TIME An MCC interruption test was not complete within the set
period of time (parameter No. 1946). Check the MCC contact.
SV0489 SAFETY PARAM ERROR(CNC) The CNC detected that a safety parameter error occurred in
the n-axis.
SV0490 SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR(CNC) A CNC safety function error occurred in the n-axis.
- The servo detected that the safety function was not
executed in the CNC.
- The result of a servo safety function check did not match
the result of a CNC safety function check.
SV0494 ILLEGAL SPEED CMD.(CNC) The CNC detected that the speed command exceeded the
safety speed (parameters Nos. 13821 to 13824 (during
position control) or parameters Nos. 13826 to 13829 (during
speed control)) during safety monitoring (when safety
monitoring request signal *VLDVx is 0) in the n-axis. Keep the
safety speed.
SV0495 ILLEGAL MACHINE POS.(CNC) The CNC detected that the machine position fell outside the
safety area (set range by parameters Nos. 13831 to 13838)
during safety monitoring (when safety monitoring request
signal *VLDVx is 0) in the n-axis. Keep the safety area.
A machine position check is performed only on the axis for
which the reference position has been established.
SV0496 ILLEGAL AXIS DATA(CNC) The CNC detected that an error occurred during transfer to
axis data.
When an alarm occurred because the configuration of the
servo amplifier was changed, set the axis number for the
servo amplifier (set bit 4 of parameter No. 2212 of the
corresponding axis to 1 and 0 again and turn off the power of
the entire system). When using a multiaxis amplifier, this
operation may not clear the alarm. In this case, repeat this
operation for the axes on which the alarm persists.
If an alarm occurs due to a cause other than the above,
replace the servo amplifier.
SV0498 AXIS NUMBER NOT SET(CNC) The CNC detected that the axis number of the n-axis was not
set for the servo amplifier. The axis number is set
automatically, so turn off the power of the entire system.
- 1140 -

SV0600 SV DC LINK OVER CURRENT DC link overcurrent.
SV0601 SV EXTERNAL FAN FAILURE Radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0602 INV. OVERHEAT The servo amplifier radiator has overheated.
SV0603 INV. IPM ALARM(OH) The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an overheat
alarm.
SV0604 AMP COMMUNICATION ERROR The communication between Servo Amplifier (SV) and
Common Power Supply (PS) is in error.
SV0605 PS EXCESS-REGENERATION1 The motor regenerative power is too much.
SV0606 PS EXTERNAL FAN FAILURE External radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0607 PS IMPROPER INPUT POWER An abnormality was found with the input power supply.
SV0646 ABNORMAL ANALOG SIGNAL(EXT) An error occurred in the analog 1Vp-p output of the separate
detector. The separate detector, cable, or separate detector
interface unit may be failed.
SV0652 TEMP.ERROR Communication between the separate detector interface unit
and temperature sensor was disconnected.
SV0654 DB RELAY FAILURE A failure occurs in the dynamic brake relay of the servo
amplifier. Replace the amplifier.
SV1025 V_READY ON (INITIALIZING ) The ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control which should
be OFF is ON while the servo control is ON.
SV1026 ILLEGAL AXIS ARRANGE The parameter for servo axis arrange is not set correctly.
- Parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number of each axis) is
set to a negative value or a duplicate value.
- The settings for parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number
of each axis) were made with a certain setting skipped
among 1 to 6, 9 to 14, or 17 to 22.
- A setting of a multiple of 8 or a multiple of 8 minus 1 was
made.
SV1055 ILLEGAL TANDEM AXIS In tandem control, the setting of the parameter No. 1023 is
incorrect.
SV1067 FSSB:CONFIGURATION An FSSB configuration error occurred (detected by software).
ERROR(SOFT) The connected amplifier type is incompatible with the FSSB
setting value.
SV1068 DUAL CHECK SAFETY ALARM An alarm that turns off the MCC of the entire system occurred
in the Dual Check Safety function.
SV1069 EXCESS ERROR(SERVO OFF:CNC) The CNC detected that the positional deviation during
servo-off exceeded the set value (parameter No. 1840) in the
n-axis.
SV1070 EXCESS ERROR(SERVO OFF:SV) The servo detected that the positional deviation during
servo-off exceeded the set value (parameter No. 1840) in the
n-axis.
SV1071 EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:CNC) The CNC detected that the positional deviation during a travel
exceeded the set value (parameters Nos. 1838 and 1841) in
the n-axis.
SV1072 EXCESS ERROR(STOP:CNC) The CNC detected that the positional deviation during a stop
exceeded the set value (parameters Nos. 1839 and 1842) in
the n-axis.
SV1100 S-COMP. VALUE OVERFLOW The amount of compensation for the straightness exceeded a
maximum value of 32767.
SV5134 FSSB:OPEN READY TIME OUT In the initialization, the FSSB could not be in an open ready
sate. The axis card is thought to be defective.
SV5136 FSSB:NUMBER OF AMP. IS The number of amplifier identified by the FSSB is insufficient
INSUFFICIENT than the number of control axes. Or, the setting of the number
of axes or the amplifier connection is in error.
SV5137 FSSB:CONFIGURATION ERROR An FSSB configuration error occurred.
The connecting amplifier type is incompatible with the FSSB
setting value.
- 1141 -

SV5139 FSSB:ERROR Servo initialization has not completed successfully. It is
probable that an optical cable failed or a connection between
the amplifier and another module failed.
SV5197 FSSB:OPEN TIME OUT The FSSB could not be opened although the CNC permitted
the opening of the FSSB.
Check the connection between the CNC and the amplifier.
SV5311 FSSB:ILLEGAL CONNECTION Different current loops (HRV) are set for FSSB lines.
Specify the same current loop for the FSSB lines.
(6) Overtravel alarms (OT alarm)

OT0500 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 1.
OT0501 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) Exceeded the negative side stored stroke check 1.
OT0502 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 2 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 2. Or, in the
chuck tail stock barrier, an entry to the inhibited area was
made during movement in the positive direction.
OT0503 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 2 ) Exceeded the negative side stored stroke check 2. Or, in the
chuck tail stock barrier, an entry to the inhibited area was
made during movement in the negative direction.
OT0504 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 3 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 3.
OT0505 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 3 ) Exceeded the - side stored stroke check 3.
OT0506 + OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) The stroke limit switch in the positive direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke
end.
When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped
During manual operation, only the feed of the axis on which
the alarm occurred is stopped.
OT0507 - OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) The stroke limit switch in the negative direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke
end.
When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped
During manual operation, only the feed of the axis on which
the alarm occurred is stopped.
OT0510 + OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) The tool exceeded the limit in the negative direction during the
stroke check before movement.
OT0511 - OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) The tool exceeded the limit in the positive direction during the
stroke check before movement.
OT1710 ILLEGAL ACC. The permissible acceleration parameter for the optimum
PARAMETER(OPTIMUM TORQUE torque acceleration/deceleration is in error. A possible cause
ACC/DEC) is either of the following:
(1) The ratio of a negative acceleration to a positive
acceleration is not more than the limit value.
(2) The time to reduce to a velocity of 0 exceeded the
maximum time.
(7) Memory file alarms (IO alarm)

IO1001 FILE ACCESS ERROR The resident–type file system could not be accessed as an
error occurred in the resident–type file system.
IO1002 FILE SYSTEM ERROR The file could not be accessed as an error occurred in the
CNC file system.
IO1030 CHECK SUM ERROR The checksum of the CNC part program storage memory is
incorrect.
- 1142 -

IO1032 MEMORY ACCESS OVER RANGE Accessing of data occurred outside the CNC part program
storage memory range.
(8) Alarms requiring power to be turned off (PW alarm)

PW0000 POWER MUST BE OFF A parameter was set for which the power must be turned OFF
then ON again.
PW0001 X-ADDRESS(*DEC) IS NOT The X address of the PMC could not be assigned correctly.
ASSIGNED. This alarm may occur in the following case:
- During the setting of parameter No. 3013, the X address
could not be assigned correctly for the deceleration dog
(*DEC) for a return to the reference position.
PW0002 PMC address is not correct(AXIS). The address to assign the axis signal is incorrect.
This alarm may occur in the following case:
- The parameter No.3021 setting is incorrect.
PW0004 SETTING THE LOADER SYSTEM The loader system could not be assigned correctly.
PATH IS NOT CORRECT. The parameter No. 984 setting is incorrect.
- The number of loader systems and the number of
systems specified to the loader system in the bit 0 (LCP)
of parameter No. 0984 does not match.
- The bit 0 (LCP) of parameter No. 0984 of the system 1 is
set to 1.
PW0006 POWER MUST BE OFF The malfunction prevention function detected an alarm to
(ILL-EXEC-CHK) require the power off.
PW0007 X-ADDRESS(SKIP) IS NOT The X address of PMC could not be assigned correctly.
ASSIGNED Possible causes are:
- During the set of parameter No. 3012, the skip signal of
the X address was not assigned correctly.
- During the set of parameter No. 3019, the address other
than the skip signal of the X address was not assigned
correctly.
PW0008 CPU SELF TEST ERROR(DCS On the DCS PMC side:
PMC) - An error was detected by the CPU self diagnosis function.
- An error was detected by the RAM check function.
PW0009 CPU SELF TEST ERROR(PMC) On the PMC side:
- An error was detected by the CPU self diagnosis function.
- An error was detected by the RAM check function.
PW0010 SAFE I/O CROSS CHECK On the DCS PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O cross
ERROR(DCS PMC) check function in system-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0011 SAFE I/O CROSS CHECK On the PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O cross
ERROR(PMC) check function in system-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0012 USER I/O CROSS CHECK On the DCS PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O cross
ERROR(DCS PMC) check function in user-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0013 USER I/O CROSS CHECK On the PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O cross
ERROR(PMC) check function in user-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0014 CPU TEST ALARM (CNC) An error occurred in a test of the CPU of the CNC.
PW0015 SAFETY PARAM ERROR The CNC detected that an error occurred in a safety
parameter for other than servo axes or spindle axes.
PW0016 RAM CHECK ERROR An error was detected in a RAM check of the CNC.
PW0017 INEXECUTION OF SAFETY The safety function was not executed normally in the CNC.
FUNCTIONS
PW0018 CRC CHECK ERROR An error was detected in a CRC check of the CNC.
- 1143 -

PW0041 DATA TABLE(D) SETTING IS The address of data table (D) PMC calculated from
ILLEGAL parameter (No.1313), stored stroke limit range switching
data selection signal (OTD0-OTD15), and the switching
data area is illegal.
(1) The specified first address is illegal.
(2) It is not a multiple of four.
(3) The range of the specified data table is illegal.
PW1102 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP.) The parameter for setting slope compensation is incorrect.
This alarm occurs in the following cases:
- When the number of pitch error compensation points on
the axis on which slope compensation is executed
exceeds 128 between the most negative side and most
positive side
- When the size relationship between the slope
compensation point Nos. is incorrect
- When the slope compensation point is not located
between the most negative side and most positive side of
pitch error compensation
- When the compensation per compensation point is too
small or too great.
PW1103 ILLEGAL PARAMETER The parameter for setting 128 straightness compensation
(S-COMP.128) points or the parameter compensation data is incorrect,
PW4549 ILLEGAL TOOL DATA FORMAT The size of the registered tool data patterns has exceeded the
upper limit of 32KB.
PW5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (S-COMP.) The setting of a parameter related to straightness
compensation is invalid. Possible causes are:
- A nonexistent axis number is set in a moving or
compensation axis parameter.
- More than 128 pitch error compensation points are set
between the furthest points in the negative and positive
regions.
- The straightness compensation point numbers do not
have correct magnitude relationships.
- No straightness compensation point is found between the
furthest pitch error compensation point in the negative
region and that in the positive region.
- The compensation per compensation point is either too
large or too small.
PW5390 R-ADDRESS SETTING IS ILLEGAL The start address or the set range of the PMC R addresses
set by parameters Nos.13541 and 13542 is invalid.
(9) Overheat alarms (OH alarm)

OH0700 LOCKER OVERHEAT CNC cabinet overheat
OH0701 FAN MOTOR STOP PCB cooling fan motor abnormality
(10) Other alarms (DS alarm)

DS0001 SYNC EXCESS ERROR (POS DEV) In feed axis synchronization control, the difference in the
amount of positional deviation between the master and slave
axes exceeded the parameter No. 8323 setting value.
This alarm occurs for the master or slave axis.
- 1144 -

DS0002 SYNC EXCESS ERROR ALARM 1 In feed axis synchronization control, the difference in the
amount of synchronization between the master and slave
axes exceeded the parameter No. 8331 setting value.
This alarm occurs only for the slave axis.
DS0003 SYNCHRONIZE ADJUST MODE The system is in the synchronize adjust mode.
DS0004 EXCESS MAXIMUM FEEDRATE The malfunction prevention function detected the command in
which a value exceeding the maximum speed was specified.
DS0005 EXCESS MAXIMUM The malfunction prevention function detected the command in
ACCELERATION which a value exceeding the maximum acceleration was
specified.
DS0006 ILLEGAL EXECUTION SEQUENCE The malfunction prevention function detected an illegal
execution sequence.
execution sequence.
execution sequence.
execution sequence.
DS0010 ILLEGAL REFERENCE AREA The malfunction prevention function detected an invalid
reference area.
reference area.
reference area.
reference area.
DS0016 SERIAL DCL:FOLLOW-UP ERROR (1) The settings of parameters Nos.1883 and 1884 fall
outside the range.
(2) The current position at establishment of the origin
subtracted by the distance between the reference
positions (detection unit) exceeded ±2147483647.
Change the current position or reference position to
prevent this situation.
DS0017 SERIAL DCL:REF-POS ESTABLISH The travel amount at the FL speed at establishment of the
ERR origin exceeded the setting of parameter No. 14010.
DS0018 SERIAL DCL:MISMATCH(SSYNC Of the master and slave axes for feed axis synchronous
CTRL) control, one axis is a linear scale with the origin and the other
is not a linear scale with the origin. In such a configuration, the
feed axis synchronous control selection signal
(SYNC<Gn138> or SYNCJ <Gn140>) needs to be set to 0 to
establish the origin.
DS0022 DUAL CHECK SAFETY IS NOT Bit 6 (DCE) of parameter No. 1902 has set the Dual Check
WORKED Safety function to be disabled.
DS0023 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP The setting of the inclination compensation parameter is
VAL) incorrect.
The compensation per compensation point is too large or too
small.
DS0027 MISMATCH OF SYNCHRONOUS Master/slave axes of axis synchronous control, one of them is
AXIS(D.C.S) the linear scale with distance-coded reference marks, and the
other of them is not the linear scale with distance-coded
reference marks.
Please establish reference position with the input signal
SYNCn<G138>, SYNCJn<G140> or parameter setting to 0.
- 1145 -

DS0050 TOO MANY SIMULTANEOUS AXES A movement was performed along more axes than can be
controlled by simultaneous axis control.
Check whether a command in the program is specified for
more axes than can be controlled by simultaneous axis
control.
DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND [External data I/O]
The No. specified for a program No. or sequence No.
search could not be found.
There was an I/O request issued for a pot No. or offset
(tool data), but either no tool numbers have been input
since power ON or there is no data for the entered tool
No.
[External workpiece No. search]
The program corresponding to the specified workpiece
No. could not be found.
DS0131 TOO MANY MESSAGE An attempt was made to display an external operator
message or external alarm message, but five or more displays
were required simultaneously.
DS0132 MESSAGE NUMBER NOT FOUND An attempt to cancel an external operator message or
external alarm message failed because the specified
message number was not found.
DS0133 TOO LARGE NUMBER A value other than 0 to 4095 was specified as the external
operator message or the external alarm message number.
DS0300 APC ALARM: NEED REF RETURN A setting to zero position for the absolute position detector
(association with reference position and the counter value of
the absolute position detector) is required. Perform the return
to the reference position.
This alarm may occur with other alarms simultaneously.
In this case, other alarms must be handled first.
DS0306 APC ALARM: BATTERY VOLTAGE 0 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector has
dropped to a level at which data can no longer be held. Or,
the power was supplied to the Pulsecoder for the first time.
The battery or cable is thought to be defective. Replace the
battery with the machine turned on.
DS0307 APC ALARM: BATTERY LOW 1 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector has
dropped to a level at which a replacement is required.
Replace the battery with the machine turned on.
DS0308 APC ALARM: BATTERY LOW 2 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector dropped
to a level at which a replacement was required in the past.
(including during power off)
Replace the battery with the machine turned on.
DS0309 APC ALARM: REF RETURN An attempt was made to set the zero point for the absolute
IMPOSSIBLE position detector by MDI operation when it was impossible to
set the zero point.
Rotate the motor manually at least one turn, and set the zero
position of the absolute position detector after turning the
CNC and servo amplifier off and then on again.
DS0310 NOT ON RETURN POINT The return position recorded during retraction is not reached
during recovery. The position may be displaced during
recovery due to a machine lock or mirror image.
Perform the operation again after making a reset.
- 1146 -

DS0405 ZERO RETURN END NOT ON REF The axis specified in automatic zero return was not at the
correct zero point when positioning was completed.
Perform zero return from a point whose distance from the zero
return start position to the zero point is 2 or more revolutions
of the motor.
Other probable causes are:
- The positional deviation after triggering the deceleration
dog is less than 128.
- Insufficient voltage or malfunctioning Pulsecoder.
DS0608 SV COOLING FAN FAILURE Internal agitating fan failure.
DS0609 SV RADIATOR FAN FAILURE Radiator cooling fan failure.
DS0610 PS INTERNAL FAN FAILURE Internal agitating fan failure.
DS0611 PS EXTERNAL FAN FAILURE External radiator cooling fan failure.
DS0612 PS OVERLOAD Overheat
DS0613 PS IMPROPER INPUT POWER Input power supply fault
DS0651 ACC.ERROR Communication between the separate detector interface unit
and acceleration sensor was disconnected.
DS1120 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (HIGH) The upper 4 bits (EIA4 to EIA7) of an external data I/O
interface address signal are set to an undefined address (high
bits).
DS1121 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (LOW) The lower 4 bits (EIA0 to EIA3) of an external data I/O
interface address signal are set to an undefined address (low
bits).
DS1124 OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR An output request was issued
during external data output, or an output request was issued
for an address that has no output data.
DS1128 DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE The numerical value input by external data input signals ED0
to ED31 has exceeded the permissible range.
DS1130 SEARCH REQUEST NOT No requests can be accepted for a program No. or a
ACCEPTED sequence No. search as the system is not in the memory
mode or the reset state.
DS1131 EXT-DATA ERROR (OTHER) [External Data I/O]
An attempt was made to input tool data for tool offset by a
tool No. during loading by the G10 code.
DS1150 A/D CONVERT ALARM A/D converter malfunction
DS1184 PARAMETER ERROR IN TORQUE An invalid parameter was set for torque control.
The torque constant parameter is set to “0”.
DS1185 OVER MAXIMUM FEED The maximum cutting feedrate or rapid traverse feedrate was
exceeded in G54.3.
DS1448 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (D.C.S.) The setting value of parameter for reference marks is satisfied
the following any conditions.
- The absolute-position detection function is enabled.
- Either parameter 1821 (mark-1 interval) or parameter
1882 (mark-2 interval) is set to 0.
- Parameters 1821 and 1882 have identical settings.
- The difference between the settings made for parameters
1821 and 1882 is greater than or equal to twice either
setting.
- The setting value of parameters 1883 and 1884 are over
the valid data range.
DS1449 REFERENCE MARK ARE In case of distance coded linear scale I/F, the actual interval
DIFFERENT FROM PARAMETER of reference marks is different from parameters Nos.1821 and
1882 setting value.
- 1147 -

DS1450 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED 1st reference position return (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 17h (Hex))
was specified when the manual reference position return was
not executed with the reference position return function
enabled (bit 0 (ZRN) of parameter No. 1005 set to “0”).
DS1451 IMPROPER PMC AXIS COMMAND The PMC axes cannot be controlled in this state.
DS1710 ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER There are errors in the parameters of permissible acceleration
(OPTIMUM TORQUE ACC/DEC) for Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration.
One of the following is the cause.
1) The ratio of the acceleration for deceleration to the
acceleration for the acceleration is lower than the limited
value.
2) The time to decelerate to 0 is larger than the maximum.
DS2091 CAN NOT RETURN TO Because the machine lock was used, it can not return to
BREAKPOINT breakpoint.
DS4251 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART START When the program auto restart function was used, it was not a
ERROR(RESET) state of reset.
DS4252 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART START When the program auto restart function was used, the
ERROR(DATA) processing breakpoint was not recorded. The following are
thought as a cause.
･ When the restart data preservation function is invalid ,the
program is never executed.
･ After SRAM is changed because of CNC soft a change, the
program is never executed.
DS4253 PROGRAM AUTO RESTART When the interruption block is the following conditions, the
INVALID(MODE) program auto restart function cannot be used.
･ Nano smoothing mode.
･ NURBS interpolating.
･ smooth interpolating.
DS4259 OPERATION ERROR IN PUNCH In the punch mode, a gap control signal TCST <Gn225.3>
MODE was input.
In the punch mode, a cutting restart was performed.
DS4260 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LASER In gap control mode by a gap control signal TCST <Gn225.3>,
MODE an attempt was made to make a switch to the punch mode.
DS4603 C AXIS SYNCHRONOUS ERROR The difference between the position deviation value of C1
axis and C2 axis exceeds the parameter value (No. 16364,
16365) with the C axis synchronous control function.
DS4605 NEED C AXIS REFERENCE The C axis synchronization is not done normally.
RETURN
DS4610 RAM AXIS POSITION IS WRONG Ram-axis is not located on the press start position.
DS4750 TOOL OFFSET CANNOT BE The state of mirror image is different between the time when
EXECUTED look-ahead of a block for tool offset was performed and the
time when execution of the block was started, so tool offset
cannot be executed.
DS4752 C AXIS OFFSET CANNOT BE The state of mirror image is different between the time when
EXECUTED look-ahead of a block for C axis offset was performed and the
time when execution of the block was started, so C axis offset
cannot be executed.
DS4800 ZONE : PUNCHING INHIBITED 1 When a safety zone check was executed, a punch command
was specified in area 1 where punching is inhibited.
- 1148 -

DS4810 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 +X When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving
in the positive X direction entered area 1 into which entry is
inhibited.
DS4811 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 -X When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving
in the negative X direction entered area 1 into which entry is
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
- 1149 -

DS4830 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 +Y When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving
in the positive Y direction entered area 1 into which entry is
inhibited.
DS4831 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 -Y When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving
in the negative Y direction entered area 1 into which entry is
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
DS4870 AUTO SETTING FEED ERROR The feed rate of safety zone auto setting is other than the
parameter value (No. 16538, No. 16539).
DS4871 AUTO SETTING PIECES ERROR In safety zone auto setting, the safety zone pieces are not
correct. Or the position detector has gone wrong, please tell
your machine tool builder.
DS5258 FEED HOLD IN RESTART Restart processing is interrupted by feed hold operation.
To perform restart processing correctly, press the reset switch
(to release the alarm), and then press the restart switch again.
- 1150 -

DS5259 INTERRUPTED POSITION NOT The interruption point (restart point) is missing. (The
FOUND termination coordinate of that the searched and the
memorized is different.)
Possible causes are as follows:
- manual intervention is performed during a feed hold stop
or single block stop
DS5340 PARAMETER CHECK SUM ERROR Since a parameter was changed, the parameter checksum did
not match the reference checksum.
Set the original value to the parameter or set the reference
checksum again.
DS5387 CAN NOT START REFERENCE The slave axis is not within the in-position width, for example,
RETURN WITH MECHANICAL when the distance between the mechanical stoppers for the
STOPPER SETTING master and slave axes is larger than the withdrawal distance
specified in parameter No. 7181 or 7182 for the master axis.
Adjust the position of the mechanical stoppers or the setting of
parameter No. 7181 or 7182.
(11) Malfunction prevention function alarms (IE alarm)

IE0001 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored
stroke check 1 on the positive side was exceeded.
IE0002 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored
stroke check 1 on the negative side was exceeded.
IE0007 EXCESS MAXIMUM REV. DATA The malfunction prevention function detected the command in
which a value exceeding the maximum speed was specified.
IE0008 ILLEGAL ACC/DEC The malfunction prevention function detected the
acceleration/deceleration error.
- 1151 -
I.WARNING LIST APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
I WARNING LIST
Appendix I, "WARNING LIST", consists of the following items:
(1) Data input-related ..............................................................................................................................1152

(2) EDIT related ......................................................................................................................................1152
(3) Program List Related .........................................................................................................................1153
(4) Input and output related .....................................................................................................................1158
(5) Execute related...................................................................................................................................1159
(6) Work coordinate system related ........................................................................................................1159
(7) Other ..................................................................................................................................................1159
(1) Data input-related

Message Description
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE A value tried to be set to the amount of the amount of the offset, etc.
is out of the range that is set by parameter.
Set the value within the range set by the parameter.
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE A value tried to be set to the parameter or the offset, etc is out of the
range.
Set data within the range.
TOO MANY DIGITS A number that exceed valid digits was entered to the O number or
the offset value, etc.
Enter a number within the valid range.
WRONG MODE Such as selecting the main program or inputting the parameter could
not execute in the current mode.
Switch to the correct mode, and retry.
PARAMETER WRITE PROTECT When the parameter write is disabled, the parameters have been
written.
Set the parameter write enable and write the parameters.
(2) EDIT related

Message Description
PROTECTED The protected program was edited.
Release protecting.
BG EDIT REJECTED The protected program was selected on the program folder screen,
the INPUT key was pressed and background editing was performed.
Release protecting, and select the program.
EDIT REJECTED The program which is protected from editing tired to be edited by the
background editing.
SPECIFIED PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS The program of the same name had already existed when the
program was created or was moved.
Change the name of the program or delete an existing program of
the same name.
SPECIFIED PROGRAM NOT FOUND The specified program was not found in program search.
The specified program was not found in deleting a program on word
editing screen.
Check the program name.
TOO MANY CHARACTERS Exceeds the number of characters that can be specified editing
(create, copy, move, etc.) of program and folder in the program
name and folder name was specified.
Try again by changing the number of characters that can be
specified.
characters not found Search string can not be found in the program.
Check the search string.
- 1152 -
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX I.WARNING LIST
Message Description
NO MORE SPACE In all replacements, disk free space is low.
Delete some programs, and increase disk space.
(3) Program List Related

Message Description
ABNORMAL END The error occurred by the data server factor when [GET], [PUT],
[MGET], [MPUT], [LIST-GET], [LIST-PUT], [LIST-DELETE] was
done or operation was canceled for the data server host's program
(file) on program folder screen.
The presumed cause is as follows. Remove it and operate again.
- Connect or login to the host failed.
- Specified file does not exist or the specified number of files is
too much.
- List file does not exist or mistake is found in the format of list file.
- The file transfer was rejected from the FTP server. (there was
no right to access for the folder or same name folder exists, etc.)
CNC RUNNING ATA card of the data server function, present connected host or
connected host of built-in Ethernet function are used by other
function when the file operation of copy, move, and delete, etc. was
done on the program folder screen. Operate it after the use of other
function ends.
CAN NOT COPY/MOVE The device that was not available to be selected to the copy origin or
copy destination was selected on the program folder screen.
Change the device.
DISABLE TO SELECT (a) On the program folder screen, when the copy or move method is
old type (No.11374#4=1), the folder was selected as a copy or
move target.
Don't select it.
(b) On the program folder screen, "RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER"
is selected as a copy or move target.
Don't select it.
(c) On the USB folder screen, the file or folder whose name length
is 33 or more was selected.
Don't select the file or the folder, because the max length of
name is 32 characters in CNC.
(d) On the USB folder screen, the name of the file or folder which
was omitted by "~" (tilde) was tried to be changed.
The name of the file or folder which was omitted by "~" (tilde)
can not be changed.
(e) On the program character editing screen, %(EOR) was selected.
Don't select it.
CNC MODE ERROR (a) Mode was changed from EDIT to the others before the program
insertion ends on program (word/character) editing screen. Do
not change the mode from EDIT to others during processing.
(b) Copy or move was interrupted by the following causes on
program folder screen.
- Copy/move was done during automatic operation
- Mode was changed from EDIT to the others or emergency
stop state was canceled during processing
It is possible to copy/move the file between the data server and
the USB memory in the state of automatic operation stops and
all paths are EDIT mode or the emergency stop.
- 1153 -
Message Description
WRITE PROTECTED (a) Data server program (file) which was tried to be copied, moved
or deleted on the program folder screen was protected.
(b) Program which was tried to be deleted or rename on program
folder screen was protected.
(c) Program to which the program insertion was done on program
editing (word/character) screen was protected.
(d) Folder tried to make a new program on program editing screen
was protected.
REJECT CNC (a) Heading the program pointer was tried on program screen or
program check screen during automatic operation. Heading
again after the automatic operation ends.
(b) Operation was not able to be completed because the specified
program was in automatic operation when copy, move or delete
of the program was done on program folder screen. Operate
again after the automatic operation ends.
CAN'T CREATE SPECIFIED FOLDER. Folder name that was not able to be used to create folder was used
on program folder screen.
CLEAR DNC DATA Schedule operating was attempted to be set though the DNC
operating is being set.
Release the setting of the DNC operating.
CLEAR SCHEDULE DATA DNC operating was attempted to be set though the schedule
operating is being set.
Release the setting of the DNC operating.
CAN'T MOVE TO FOLDER The following folders ware tried to be moved to another folder.
- Folder with the main program
- Folder with protected program
- Folder that is edit interdiction attribute
Move after releasing the above condition.
SPECIFIED FOLDER NOT EXISTS In program folder operation, the specified folder doesn't exist.
Confirm the name of the folder.
MAKE FOLDER NAME WITHIN 28 In multi path program management function, the name of the folder
CHARACTERS created in WORKS folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/WORKS) exceeds 28
characters.
Specify the name within 28 characters.
MAKING MULTI PATH PROG FOLDER In Multi path program management function, the multi path program
FAILED folder cannot be made.
Check whether there is free space in CNC_MEM.
CAN'T MOVE INTO MULTI PATH PROG In Multi path program management function, the setting that cannot
FOLDER be moved to the multi-path program folder had been done.
Check the setting of the wrong operation prevention screen.
RENAMING OF MULTI PATH PROG FLD In Multi path program management function, the change name of the
FAILED main program in each path failed in the multi path program folder.
Check whether the program of this name exists in the folder.
NO FILE SELECTED In file delete operation for USB memory in program folder screen,
the files are not selected.
Operate it after selecting the files.
NO MORE SPACE The program cannot be edited because program memory is full.
Delete unnecessary programs or execute program condense.
PROGRAM IN FOLDER IS NOT DELETED The folder including the program was deleted.
Delete the folder after deleting the file in the folder.
CAN'T MOVE TO UPPER FOLDER Though the operation to move to upper folder was done on the
program folder screen, the operation cannot be completed because
it is in the most upper folder.
- 1154 -
Message Description
CAN'T MOVE FROM THIS FOLDER BY The main program search was done. However, it is a setting that
SEARCH cannot display the folder of the main program.
Operate it after changing the setting that can display the folder of the
main program.
IMPOSSIBLE TO OUTPUT The operation to the USB device was done. However, the USB
device is in the state that cannot be used.
Attach the USB device again or use a different USB device once.
SETTING A BACKGROUND FOLDER The folder for the background was not able to be set.
FAILED Operate it again after confirming the attribute of the folder, etc.
DNC FILE SET FAILED The program of an external device of the data server, the data
server host, and the floppy disk cassette was not able to be selected
as DNC operation target.
Set the device that can be used by the DNC operation.
SPECIFIED FILE NOT EXISTS The operated file was not found.
Check the file name.
FILE OF COPY PLACE IS SELECTED BY Because the program of the copy or the moving destination has
NC been selected as the main program, it is not possible to overwrite.
Delete the program of the copy or the moving destination.
SELECTED FILE IS SELECTED BY NC Because the specified file exists, and has been selected as the main
program, it is not possible to operate it to the file.
Operate it again after selecting a different program as the main
program.
SPECIFIED FOLDER ALREADY EXISTS (a) The folder name that already existed was specified in creating
and rename of folder.
Change the folder name.
(b) The folder name that already existed was specified in creating
new machining data in template program function.
Change the folder name.
FOLDER CAN NOT BE DELETED The selected folder in NC was specified in deleting a folder of under
the template folder or WORKS folder in template program function.
Release the selection of the specified folder.
FOLDER IS NOT EMPTY Contents of a folder that specified to delete are not empty.
Delete file/folder in the specified folder.
SELECTED FOLDER IS SELECTED BY NC The selected folder in NC was specified in renaming a folder and
deleting a folder.
Release the selection of the specified folder.
SETTING A FG/BG FOLDER FAILED Creating of multi-path program folder or selecting of main program
was done in a mode other than EDIT mode in multi-path program
management function.
Switch to EDIT mode.
SETTING A FOREGROUND FOLDER (a) Selecting of main program was done in a mode other than EDIT
FAILED mode in template program function.
(b) Creating of multi-path program folder or selecting of main
program was done in a mode other than EDIT mode in
multi-path program management function.
(c) Setting of foreground folder was done in a mode other than
EDIT mode.
Switch to EDIT mode
M198 FOLDER SET FAILED M198 operation folder was set in a mode other than EDIT mode.
- 1155 -
Message Description
SETTING A MAIN PROGRAM FAILED Selecting of main program was done in illegal conditions.
- Set the unlock state in keys and program encryption.
- Set the automatic operation stop state or the reset state when
bit 1 (OPC) of parameter No. 3204 is 0.
- Set the reset state when bit 1 (OPC) of parameter No. 3204 is 1.
- The specified program is editing in background.
End the background editing.
- The folder is specified.
Specify the program.
THE NUMBER OF REGISTRATION IS FULL The number of registration was filled with the following operations.
- create/copy of file/folder
- addition of screen to main menu
Ensure the number of registration.
SEARCHING FAILED The search failed on USB memory file list screen.
- Adjust the length of word to 28 characters or less.
- Check the searching string.
LIMITS OVER The number of selected program to copy/move/delete exceeds the
upper bound.
Adjust the number of selections of programs to ten or less.
CHANGING A WORK FOLDER FAILED IN The error occurred by changing a working folder in memory card of
ATA CARD Data Server.
Confirm whether there is a specified folder.
Check the log message of Data Server.
COPYING A FILE FAILED IN ATA CARD The error occurred by copying the file in the memory card of Data
Server.
The presumed cause is as follows.
- There is not a source file.
- Destination file already exists.
REMOVING THE FILE FAILED FROM ATA The error occurred by deleting the file in the memory card of Data
CARD Server.
- There is not a specified file.
- A specified file is being used.
THE SPECIFIED FILE IS NOT FOUND The error occurred by searching the file in memory card of Data
Server, in host computer of Data Server, or in host computer of
Embedded Ethernet.
Check the specified file name.
REMOVING THE FILE FAILED ON FTP The error occurred by deleting the files in the host computer of Data
SERVER Server or Embedded Ethernet.
Check the log message of Data Server or Embedded Ethernet.
ERROR OCCURRED ON GET OPERATION The error occurred by GET operation of Data Server.
There is a possibility of the problem on the personal computer side,
too.
GETTING A FILE LIST FAILED The error occurred by displaying the file list in memory card of Data
Server, in host computer of Data Server, in host computer of
Embedded Ethernet, or in USB memory stick.
In case of displaying the file list in host computer, there is a
possibility of the problem on the personal computer side, too.
Check the log message of Data Server, Embedded Ethernet, or USB
memory stick.
- 1156 -
Message Description
CHANGING A WORK FOLDER OF HOST The error occurred by changing the working folder in the host
FAILED computer of Data Server or Embedded Ethernet.
Check the working folder of Data Server or Embedded Ethernet.
REMOVING THE FILE FAILED FROM The error occurred by deleting the files in the host computer of Data
HOST Server or Embedded Ethernet.
- There is no access right of a specified file.
MAKING A NEW FOLDER FAILED IN HOST The error occurred by making the folder in the host computer of Data
Server or Embedded Ethernet.
- The name of a specified folder is incorrect.
- There is no access right for write operation.
RENAMING A NAME OF HOST FAILED The error occurred by renaming the file in the host computer of Data
Server or Embedded Ethernet.
- There is no access right of a specified file.
- There is a file after changing.
ERROR OCCURRED ON LIST-DEL The error occurred by LIST-DEL operation of Data Server.
OPERATION Check the log message of Data Server.
ERROR OCCURRED ON LIST-GET The error occurred by LIST-GET operation of Data Server.
OPERATION There is a possibility of the problem on the personal computer side,
too.
ERROR OCCURRED ON LIST-PUT The error occurred by LIST-PUT operation of Data Server.
too.
ERROR OCCURRED ON MGET The error occurred by MGET operation of Data Server.
too.
MAKING A NEW FOLDER FAILED IN ATA The error occurred by making the folder in the memory card of Data
CARD Server.
- A specified folder already exists.
- The name of a specified folder is incorrect.
ERROR OCCURRED ON MPUT The error occurred by MPUT operation of Data Server.
too.
ERROR OCCURRED ON PUT OPERATION The error occurred by PUT operation of Data Server.
There is a possibility of the problem on the personal computer side,
too.
- 1157 -
Message Description
RENAMING A FILE NAME FAILED IN ATA The error occurred by renaming the file in the memory card of Data
CARD Server.
- A file name after changing is incorrect.
- There is a file after changing.
REMOVING THE FOLDER FAILED FROM The error occurred by deleting the folder in the memory card of Data
ATA CARD Server.
- There is not a specified folder.
- The contents of a specified folder are not empty.
PROGRAM NOT SELECT The program has not been selected by deleting, copying, and
moving the program.
Execute them after selecting the program.
DELETE FILE ? On the USB folder screen, this is displayed to confirm a deleting of
file.
DELETE FILE OR FOLDER ? On the USB folder screen, this is displayed to confirm a deleting of
file or folder.
DELETE PROGRAM (FOLDER) ? On the program folder screen or the data server file list screen, this
is displayed to confirm a deleting of program or folder.
(No.11374#4=0)
DELETE FOLDER ? On the tree display of the program folder screen or the data server
file list screen, this is displayed to confirm a deleting of folder.
DELETE PROGRAM ? On the program editing screen or the program folder screen or the
data server file list screen, this is displayed to confirm a deleting of
program.
CANNOT COPY TO SAME FILE On the program folder screen, the copy or move target program is
same to the copy or move destination.
Set different program name.
SCHEDULE ERROR The setting of the schedule operation is wrong.
Confirm the schedule operation setting.
(4) Input and output related

Message Description
CHANGE TO EDIT MODE The input/output of the program was operated in a mode other than
EDIT mode.
CANNOT USE I/O DEVICE The input/output of data was operated.
The device is busy according to other input/output operations.
Operate input/output after completing other input/output operations.
PLEASE RELEASE EMERGENCY STOP In the state of the emergency stop, output operation was done on all
data output screen.
Operate all data output after releasing the emergency stop.
EXCUTING OR MODE CHANGING The previous operation hasn't finished in All I/O screen.
Operate after the previous operation has finished.
FILE ALREADY EXIST NC data can't be output to external device because the file of the
same name already exists.
Change the name of output file or delete the file of the same name in
external device.
FORMAT ERROR The format of memory card or USB memory is illegal.
Use the memory device in proper format.
- 1158 -
Message Description
PARAMETER SETTING ERROR When the output was operated, the settings of the parameters were
not correct in NC data output function.
- Set bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No. 138 to 1
- Set parameter No. 20 to 4 (Memory card) or 17 (USB memory)
- Set parameter No.20 and parameter No.21 to the same value
- Set parameter No.20 to the same value when the screen is
displayed and data output
USB MEMORY IS NOT MOUNTING USB memory was not inserted in the USB slot when using.
Retry after insert the USB memory.
OVER WRITE FAILED When [REWRITE] or [ALL] is executed in data output, overwriting
failed because overwrite file is protected.
Retry after removing protection of object file.
I/O DEVICE SETTING ERROR The setting of the input/output device was changed other than USB
memory while displaying USB memory on ALL/IO screen.
Select the input/output device correctly.
MEMORY CARD IS NOT MOUNTING On the memory card folder screen, Input/output or search was
operated when the memory card is not attached.
Attach the memory card.
(5) Execute related

Message Description
START FROM MIDDLE OF The cycle start tried to be executed halfway in the program.
PROG(START/RESET) - If you want to execute the cycle start from halfway , turn the
cycle start signal ST from "1" to "0", and start the program
operation again.
- If you want to execute the cycle start from top, rewind the
program.
(6) Work coordinate system related

Message Description
NG SETTING (U-LMT AND L-LMT ILLEGAL) In Workpiece origin offset function, the offset value is out of the
range.
Set it according to a set unit.
NG SETTING (OFFSET NUM OVERLAP) The offset number of Workpiece origin offset overlaps.
Specify the number not used.
(7) Other
Message Description
THERE IS NO SPECIFIED NAME OF AXIS (a) On work coordinates screen, the axis specified by measured
value input or counter input does not exist. Confirm the axis
name.
(b) On position screen, the axis specified by workpiece coordinate
system preset or resetting relative coordinates does not exist.
Confirm m the axis name.
(c) On the manual handle interruption screen, the axis specified by
clearing the amount of interruption does not exist. Confirm the
axis name.
DATA NOT FOUND The signal address that did not exist was searched on the safety I/O
signal history screen of dual check safety function.
Confirm the searched signal address.
DATA SETTING ERROR The combination of the waveform data kind of settings to which the
trouble diagnosis parameter screen can be displayed at the same
time is wrong.
Set the waveform data kind of the combination that can be displayed
at the same time.
- 1159 -
Message Description
FORMAT ERROR The format of input data such as parameters and offset etc by MDI
key is wrong.
Input in correct format.
ILLEGAL LEVEL In 8 level data protection setting screen, the operation is forbidden
under the present operation level was operated.
Operate it after the limit of the operation is released.
INCORRECT CHARACTER CODE IS The character code that cannot be used is input in periodic
CONTAINED maintenance screen.
Input the allowed character code.
LACK OF DATA The password for 8 level data protection is too short.
Set the password from 3 to 8 characters.
OUTPUT ERROR(PMC PARAM) Output of the PMC parameter failed.
Output it again after confirming the output device.
WRITE PROTECT For protected data such as "8-level data protection and key signal",
data was entered.
By releasing the protection, enter your data.
AUTO SET IS PROHIBITED FSSB automatic setting is forbidden.
Check bit 0 (FMD) of parameter No.1902.
NUMBER OF ICON IN CATEGORY IS 0 The category to which any icon is not registered exists in main menu
screen.
Register one or more icons in any category.
REGISTRATION PROHIBITION SCREEN The registration of the screen to main menu screen was tried.
The object screen cannot be registered in main menu screen.
DIFFERENCE WITH NEAR IS RANGE In Stored pitch error compensation total value input function, the
OVER difference between two consecutive data is range over.
Adjust the difference between two consecutive data within the range
of -128 to +127.
NOT DELETE (a) In Main menu function, the icon can not be deleted.
(b) In paste of the program, the program can not be deleted.
Check the program has not been protected."
EXECUTING AUTOMATIC OPERATION In High-speed program management function, saving the program
was executed during the operation of the program.
Save the program after stopping operation.
PROGRAM HAS BEEN VERIFIED In the program verification function, the verification is success
between the program of the I/O device and the program of the CNC
build-in memory.
FAILED TO SAVE PROGRAMS In the high-speed program management function, this is displayed
when program registering is failed. (without automatic operation
executing)
Try again later.
THERE IS NO INIT-VALUE On the parameter setting screen and axis setting screen, this is
displayed when the initialization is not executed.
ID DATA COMPLETE On the servo information screen, the ID has already been acquired
when the servo ID information reading operation is executed.
This message means that ID acquisition is finished, so next
operation is not necessary.
NOT READ ID The servo ID information was not correctly read in the servo
information screen.
Check whether servo motor and amplifier are correctly connected.
CHECK CODE CAN NOT BE REGISTERED The check code can not be registered because registration object
such as C language executor program doesn’t exist in the data
modification detection setting screen.
Check whether the registration object exists.
OPERATION IS ENABLED The password has been input and the operation has become
possible in the data modification detection setting screen.
- 1160 -
Message Description
INPUT PASSWORD AGAIN (a) When the password was changed, a new password was input
once.
(b) When the password is changed, the message is generated on
the parameter screen and warning function against modification
of setting.
(c) When the password of the following parameters is changed, the
message is generated on the parameter screen in case of bit 6
(RPW) of parameter No.11391is set to 1.
- No.3210 Program protection (PSW)
- No.3220 Password (PSW)
- No.11311 Password for embedded macro
- No.3225 Password for protecting against modifications
to parameters related to Dual Check
Safety function
Input the same password again for confirmation.
PASSWORD CHANGED (a) The password was changed.
(b) When the password is changed, the message is generated on
the parameter screen and warning function against modification
of setting.
Safety function.
ILLEGAL CHARACTER USED In the warning function against modification of setting, when the
password was input, the character that was not able to be used was
input.
Input the following characters.
”A” - “Z”, “a” - “z”, “0” - “9”
PASSWORD TOO LONG In the warning function against modification of setting, a too long
password was input.
Input the password up to 16 characters.
PASSWORD MISMATCH (a) A wrong password was input.
(b) When the password is input, the message is generated on the
parameter screen and warning function against modification of
setting.
Safety function
Input a correct password.
SPECIFIED PASSWORD CAN NOT BE SET In warning function against modification of setting, the same
password as an initial password of the shipment of CNC was input.
Input other passwords.
SET FORMAL PASSWORD In warning function against modification of setting, an initial
password of the shipment of CNC is set.
Set formal passwords other than an initial password.
- 1161 -
Message Description
MEMORY CARD IS NOT READY. In memory card program operation/editing function, the memory card
is not mounting.
Mount the memory card.
THE MEMORY CARD CAN BE TAKEN OUT In memory card program operation/editing function, the memory card
can be detached.
MEMORY CARD IS USED BY OTHER In memory card program operation/editing function, the device was
FUNCTION changed or the memory card was detached while using the memory
card.
Detach the memory card or change the device after the use of the
memory card is canceled or use ends.
MEMORY CARD IS USED BY AUTOMATIC In memory card program operation/editing function, the memory card
OPERATION is used by automatic operation.
Detach the memory card after the use of the memory card is
canceled or use ends.
NO EXTENSION OPTION In memory card program operation/editing function, the number of
programs registered on the memory card has exceeded 63.
When the program that exceeds 63 is used, the option of the
memory card program registration number enhancing is necessary.
THIS DEVICE IS NOT AVAILABLE In memory card program operation/editing function, the program in
the device of "MEM CARD" was edited.
This program can not be edited on CNC.
NG SETTING (WORK COORD VAL In wrong operation prevention function, the valid setting range of the
OVERLAP) workpiece zero point offset overlaps.
Set the valid setting range correctly.
THE STRING IS NOT FOUND The address specified in the symbol screen or I/O diagnostic screen
does not exist.
Retry after confirmation of the string you want to search.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED In the real time macro range select screen, the start number or end
number is input though the address is not set.
Set the address previously.
INPUT INVALID (a) The address specified in the safety IO signal history screen
does not exist.
(b) Input on the module configuration screen is invalid.
Retry after checking the input value.
- 1162 -
J.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING
J PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM

OPERATION/EDITING
Appendix J, "PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING", consists of the
following sections:
J.1 PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING ...................................1163

J.2 NAMING RULES...........................................................................................................................1172
J.3 RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE .......................................................................1173
J.4 ERROR MESSAGE AND NOTE...................................................................................................1174
J.1 PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM

OPERATION/EDITING
Overview
By using this PC tool, you can make the memory card program file ("FANUCPRG.BIN") which is
needed for the function "Memory Card Program Operation/Editing".
The maximum size of the memory card program file is 2048 Mbytes (2 Gbytes). The "Memory Card
Program Operation/Editing" function needs the memory card which has the memory card program file on
the FAT formatted memory card.
This PC tool can be operated on a PC in the marketplace and with following OS :
- Windows(R)NT4.0 Workstation (SP5 or later)
- Windows(R)2000 Professional (SP4 or later)
- Windows(R)XP Professional (SP2 or later)
- Windows(R)Vista Ultimate
And acceptable specification is as followings :
- Memory : 32Mbytes or more
- Hard disk : 10Mbytes or more free space and additional space for the memory card program file
J.1.1 Usage Notes

Before using this PC tool, please make sure there is no [temp] folder on the same place of this PC tool.
[temp] folder is created and used by this PC tool as work folder.
If [temp] folder is created, please do not access this folder.
[temp] folder and the files located in this folder will be deleted by this PC tool.
J.1.2 List of Functions of PC Tool

- Browsing the folders of the memory card program file
- Adding a program to the memory card program file by dropping the program into this PC tool from
Explorer etc. (hereinafter referred to as "drop in")
- Extracting a program in the memory card program file as a text file on Windows file system by
dropping out from this PC tool into Explorer etc. (hereinafter referred to as "drop out")
- Renaming a program in the memory card program file
- Deleting a program in the memory card program file
- Creating a new folder into the memory card program file
- Renaming a folder in the memory card program file
- Deleting a folder in the memory card program file
- Display of free space on the memory card program file
- Sorting list view of the memory card program file
- 1163 -
J. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD
PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
J.1.3 Explanation of Operations

- Outline of screen
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(1) Menu bar : The menu of this PC tool is displayed.
(2) Tree view : Browsing the folders of the memory card program file.
(3) Column : Attributes of each file or folder in the memory card program file.
(4) List view : Contents of selected folder are displayed.
(5) Status bar : Used and Unused space in the memory card program file are displayed.
- Initial Option dialogue window
When this PC tool starts up, the Option dialogue window is displayed. Please select "Open an existing
file" or "Create a new file".
• When "Open an existing file" is selected

After OK button pushed, "Open" dialogue window is displayed.
Please select the existing memory card program file.
- 1164 -
• When "Create a new file" is selected

After OK button pushed, "Save As" dialogue window is displayed.
Please create a new memory card program file on the selected folder.
When the new memory card program file is created, the following items need to be selected:
- Folder/Program Numbers
- Program Size
"Folder/Program Numbers" can be selected among 63 / 500 / 1000. The default value is 63.
"Program Size" can be selected among 2Mbyte, 4Mbyte, 8Mbyte, and Customize. The default value is
2Mbyte.
NOTE
1 When "Customize" size is selected, it is available to cover the range from
2Mbyte to 2048Mbyte.
2 Though the maximum size is 2048Mbyte, a slight loss exists by system use.
3 Only numeric character can be input.
4 The number of "Folders" in the status bar includes number of program file and
folder.
During creating of the memory card program file, the progress bar is being displayed. This progress bar is
also displayed during executing of Drop-in and Drop-out.
If you push [Cancel] button, the execution is stopped.
- 1165 -
- Menu
File menu
[New]
Create a new memory card program file.
[Open...]
Open the existing memory card program file.
[Exit]
Terminate this PC tool.
Edit menu
[New Folder]
Create new folder. It is available during Tree view selected.
Up to seven hierarchical levels starting from the user root folder (/USER) are permitted.
/USER/PATH1/Aaa/Bbb/Ccc/Ddd/O123
1 2 3 4 5 6 7(not folder)
[Delete]
Delete program files or folders.
If you delete a folder, all folders and program files in the folder will be deleted.
- 1166 -
[Rename]
Rename a folder or file.
NOTE
For naming folder and program file, characters which can be used are limited.
Please refer to "Naming rules".
Option menu
[Hide Confirm Message]

When the following operations are executed, the following Confirm Message is popped up
before the memory card program file is modified.
(1) Delete folder or program file

(2) Rename folder or program file
(3) Drop-in program file
(4) Add folder
If the [OK] button is pushed, the operation advances.

If the [Cancel] button is pushed, the operation is abandoned.
When the [Hide Confirm Message] in menu bar is checked, the Confirm Message is not
displayed and the operation advances at once. The default setting is the Confirm Message
displayed.
[Ignore Error Code]

When the [Ignore Error Code] in menu bar is checked, program file which includes unusable
characters can be dropped in. The unusable characters in the program file will be ignored and
will not be written into the memory card program file.
- 1167 -
[Change Work Folder]
Work folder is used for temporarily keeping the dropped out files. If work folder has no enough
free space, Drop-out will not be executed. To avoid this, you can check this option and change
the work folder to an area where there is enough free space. With default setting, work folder
[temp] will be created on the same place of this PC tool "FANUCPRG.exe".
If you changed the default work folder, the following warning message is popped up.

If the work folder has been changed before, the following warning message is popped up.

WARNING
1 At this PC tool terminated, all files in the work folder are deleted.
2 During this PC tool executing, do not access the files in the work folder. If the
access is done, there is no assurance of normal operation.
Help menu
- 1168 -
[About...]
Version number of this PC tool is displayed.
- Mouse Operation
[Drop-in and Drop-out]
• Drop-in from Explorer
NC program can be added by dropping files including the NC files into the List view window of this
PC tool from Explorer
NC program name and update time is the same as the Dropped-in files.
If "Oxxxxxxxx" or "<xxxx>" exists at the top of files, These "Oxxxxxxxx" and "<xxxx>" become
NC program name. If not exist, each file name becomes NC program name.
Examples
Name of external file Top of external file Name of internal file Program number
O1234 N10G00 O1234 1234
O123N10G00 N10G00 O123N10G00 Not an O number program
test.txt O1234N10G00 O1234 1234
test.txt <O1234> O1234 1234
test.txt <O1234N10> O1234N10 Not an O number program
O1234 <O1234N10> O1234N10 Not an O number program
O001234 N10G00 O1234 1234
O001234N10G00 N10G00 O001234N10G00 Not an O number program
test.txt O001234 O1234 1234
test.txt <O001234> O1234 1234
test.txt <O001234N10G00> O001234N10G00 Not an O number program
NOTE
1 For naming program file, please refer to the following chapter "Naming rules of
Program file".
2 For usable characters in Program file, please refer to the following chapter
"Rules of characters in Program file".
3 The updating time of program file is available from 1997 to 2037.
This PC tool can check contents of dropped-in program file according to "Rules of characters in
Program file". However, this PC tool does not check grammar of NC program.
The program file can only have one NC program. Therefore, the NC program output from CNC
cannot be dropped in directly.
- 1169 -
Example of Program
Available for Drop-in Unavailable for Drop-in
O1 <O1> % O1
G91 X10. Y10. G91 X10. Y10. O1 G91 X10. Y10.
M30 M30 G91 X10. Y10. M30
M30
% O10
G91 X10. Y10.
M30
NOTE
1 If the same named program file exists, another same named program file cannot
be dropped in.
2 If free space on the memory card program file is lacking, new program file
cannot be dropped in.
3 If the NC program name is not compliant with "Naming rules of Program file", the
program file can not be dropped in.
If the File name acts as Program number, "O" is displayed on the first row of list view.
• Drop-out from List view window

Drop-out from list view of this PC tool to Explorer is available.
NOTE
Do not drop out to Work folder. If dropped out to Work folder, this PC tool cannot
continue to function normally.
- Pop-up menu
Pop-up menu is displayed by clicking the right mouse button.
• Focus on Tree view
Clicking "New Folder", a new folder is created on selected folder.

Clicking "Delete", the selected folder is deleted.
- 1170 -
Clicking "Rename", the selected folder is renamed.
If clicking on root folder, "Delete" and "Rename" are not activated.
• Focus on List view
• Clicking "Delete", the selected folder or program file is deleted.

• Clicking "Rename", the selected folder or program file is renamed.
- Display of free space on the memory card program file ("FANUCPRG.BIN")

Number of used folder, size of used space, number of unused folder, and size of free space are displayed
on status bar in the lower portion of the screen.
When a new memory card program file is created, two reserved folder are also created. Therefore, the
number of used folder is two. However it does not show that number of unused folder is reduced.
The display of status bar is renewed at creating or deleting a folder, dropping-in from Explorer, and
deleting a program file.
- Sorting list view of the memory card program file

When a column is being clicked, the list view of the memory card program file is being sorted by the
column key in ascending or descending order.
The initial display is sorted by NAME key in ascending order.
Clicking
- 1171 -
J.2 NAMING RULES

Overview
Naming rules of folder and program file are described as follows.
J.2.1 Naming Rules of Program File

Here are Naming rules of Program file:
• Program file name can have a maximum of 32 characters.
• Program file name can have following characters.
Alphabet(Upper and lower case letter), numeric character,
"-"(minus), "+"(plus), "_"(under bar), "."(dot)
"." and ".." can not be used since these are reserved for system use.
- The File name acts as Program number

When the File name is "O"+ 1-99999999, the file name acts as Program number.
Example)
"O123" Program number 123
The file name does not act as Program number, and can be dropped in:
"ABC" Top of character is not upper case letter of "O".
"o123" Top of character is not upper case letter of "O".
"O0123XY" Characters following the "O" contains alphabet.
The file name does not act as Program number, and cannot be dropped in:
"O123456789" Numeric characters exceed 8 digits.
NOTE
1 Program file name cannot be repeated in a Folder.
2 If program file name starts with "O" and the next eight characters are all numeric
characters, the "0" (zero) after the "O" will be deleted.
J.2.2 Naming Rules of Folder

Here are Naming rules of Folder:
• Folder name can have a maximum of 32 characters.
• Folder name can have following characters.
Alphabet(Upper and lower case letter), numeric character,
"-"(minus), "+"(plus), "_"(under bar), "." (dot)
"." and ".." can not be used since these are reserved for system use.
NOTE
Folder name cannot be repeated in a Folder.
- 1172 -
J.3 RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE

Overview
Words in parentheses "( )" in Program file are treated as comments.
The mark of comment start "(" is named "Control-out".
The mark of comment end ")" is named "Control-in".
"Control-out" and "Control-in" must make a pair. The order is 1st - "Control-out" and 2nd -"Control-in".
And nested parentheses is not available.
NOTE
1 When a program file is dropped in, space code (0x20 SPC) , tab code (0x09
HT) , carriage return code(0x0d CR) and percent code(0x25 %) is deleted. If
space code is found in Control-out (characters in parentheses), it is not
deleted. If "%" is found in Control-in, characters between "%" and next "LF"
(0x0a) is deleted.
2 The front of program number ":" is changed to "O"(O as in Oscar) while the
program file dropped in.
3 The program file can only have one NC program.
J.3.1 Usable Characters in Program File

- Usable characters in Control-in
List of ANSI(ASCII) codes of usable characters(hexadecimal form)

Code Character Code Character Code Character Code Character
0a LF 3f ? 58 X 74 t
23 # 40 @ 59 Y 75 u
26 & 41 A 5a Z 76 v
28 ( 42 B 5b [ 77 w
29 ) 43 C 5d ] 78 x
2a * 44 D 5f _ 79 y
2b + 45 E 61 a 7a z
2c , 46 F 62 b
2d - 47 G 63 c
2e . 48 H 64 d
2f / 49 I 65 e
30 0 4a J 66 f
31 1 4b K 67 g
32 2 4c L 68 h
33 3 4d M 69 i
34 4 4e N 6a j
35 5 4f O 6b k
36 6 50 P 6c l
37 7 51 Q 6d m
38 8 52 R 6e n
39 9 53 S 6f o
3a : 54 T 70 p
3c < 55 U 71 q
3d = 56 V 72 r
3e > 57 W 73 s
- 1173 -
NOTE
In the Control-in, "O", ":", and "<" can not be used at top of the line except for the
1st line.
- Usable characters in Control-out(characters in parentheses)
List of ANSI(ASCII) codes of usable characters(hexadecimal form)

Code Character Code Character Code Character Code Character
0a LF 3c < 55 U 71 q
20 SPC 3d = 56 V 72 r
22 “ 3e > 57 W 73 s
23 # 3f ? 58 X 74 t
24 $ 40 @ 59 Y 75 u
26 & 41 A 5a Z 76 v
27 ‘ 42 B 5b [ 77 w
2a * 43 C 5d ] 78 x
2b + 44 D 5f _ 79 y
2c , 45 E 61 a 7a z
2d - 46 F 62 b
2e . 47 G 63 c
2f / 48 H 64 d
30 0 49 I 65 e
31 1 4a J 66 f
32 2 4b K 67 g
33 3 4c L 68 h
34 4 4d M 69 i
35 5 4e N 6a j
36 6 4f O 6b k
37 7 50 P 6c l
38 8 51 Q 6d m
39 9 52 R 6e n
3a : 53 S 6f o
3b ; 54 T 70 p
J.4 ERROR MESSAGE AND NOTE

Error may occur when using this application, hereafter explains the error messages and gives relative
instructions.
J.4.1 List of Error Message

When an error occurred, the error message box is displayed as follows.
Message Remarks
Failed to open the file you specified. If failed to open once again, the file may be broken.
Failed to read or write to the specified file.
There is insufficient disk space. There is no enough free space to create a new memory card
program file or to put drop out files to work folder. In the latter case,
please refer to chapter "Menu" [Change Work Folder]
File name is not correct. Please refer to the chapter "Naming rules of Program file".
Input name is already exists. Please input another name.
File name is already exists. Please input another name.
Input name is not correct. Please refer to the chapter "Naming rules".
- 1174 -
Message Remarks
Please input an integer between 2 and 2048 The size of the memory card program file is available from 2Mbyte
to 2048Mbyte.
An illegal character is included in the Please refer to the chapter "Rules of characters in Program file".
specified file.
Last update time of the specified file is The updating time of program file is available from 1997 to 2037.
unsupported.
The memory card program file you specified The specified file format is not the memory card program file
cannot be identified.
There is insufficient free folder. Please delete unnecessary program files or folders.
There is insufficient free program space. Please delete unnecessary program files.
Folder deeper than 7 cannot be created.
Root folder cannot be deleted.
Root folder cannot be renamed.
Failed to create work folder. Please check whether the [temp] work folder is able to create or
not.
In default, the [temp] work folder is created on the same place of
this PC tool "FANUCPRG.exe".
Process has been cancelled.
The specified work folder is not found. The Drop-out cannot be executed.
Terminate this PC tool. And check the setting of Work Folder on the
Option dialogue window.
Only one instance of this application can be Double activation of this PC tool cannot be executed.
executed.
J.4.2 Note
- Folder and Program Numbers
Folder and Program Numbers can be selected among 63 / 500 / 1000.
For selecting the Numbers of 500 or 1000, the option "Registered programs expan. On the memory card"
is needed in CNC side.
- 1175 -
K. ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION
TOOL APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
K ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL

Overview
FANUC ISO Converter is a tool that converts a file created or externally output with ASCII code to ISO
code format.
This tool runs on Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Vista.
This tool can be used in two modes, CUI and GUI.
CUI
Start the executable file from the command prompt.
Specify the following arguments when starting the tool.
/c : Specify that the tool runs in command line mode.

When /c is omitted, the tool runs in GUI mode.
/i= : Specify the name of an input file to be converted.
/o= :Specify the name of the converted file.
Example
C:¥>ISO_CONV.EXE /c /i=ALL-PROG.TXT /o=ALL-PROG.ISO
Multiple files can be converted at a time by listing them in a batch file.
- 1176 -
K.ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION
B-64504EN/02 APPENDIX TOOL
GUI
When you double-click the icon, the following screen appears, allowing you to select and convert a file.
Conversion procedure
1. Step 1
In [Target File], specify a file you want to convert.
When you click the [Select...▼] button, a file selection dialogue appears, allowing you to select a
file.
2. Step 2
After you specify the file name in step 1, you can determine the code of the specified file by clicking
the [File Check] button. When you select the file by clicking the [Select...▼] button, the code is
automatically determined.
The file is determined as an ASCII file, ISO file, or ASCII/ISO-mixed file, or is indeterminable. In
[Message], an additional message appears depending on the determination result.
If the file is determined as an ASCII/ISO-mixed file, it cannot be converted, so you cannot proceed
to the next step. The [File Convert] button is disabled and you cannot click it. If file contains only
characters represented by the code values common to ASCII and ISO, the code of the file is
indeterminable. This file need not be converted, so the [File Convert] button is disabled and you
cannot click it.
- 1177 -
K. ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION
TOOL APPENDIX B-64504EN/02
3. Step 3
When you specify the name of a converted file and click the [File Convert] button, the converted file
is created. When the original file is an ASCII file, an ISO file is created; when the original is an ISO
file, an ASCII file is created.
You can also click the [Select...▼] button and specify the name of the converted file from a file
selection dialogue.
Other
When you click the [Version] button, the software version information is displayed as shown below.
- 1178 -
B-64504EN/02 INDEX
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 944 / Volume 2 : P. 945 to 1178
INDEX
Bolt Hole Circle (G26).................................................131
<Number> BRANCH AND REPETITION....................................288
10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel (12.1"/15"/19" LCD
CNC Display Panel) .................................................415 <C>
8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel......................................414 C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING) ........385
CALCULATION KEY FUNCTION ...........................894
<A> Call stack display .........................................................689
ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL Call stack display (15/19-inch display unit).................718
PROGRAMMING......................................................68 C–axis Command and its Operation.............................388
ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM C–axis Command in Nibbling Mode............................390
OCCURRED ............................................................934 CHANGING CURRENT FOLDER.............................634
Actual Feedrate Display ...............................................673 CHANGING FILE ATTRIBUTES..............................639
Actual Feedrate Display (15/19-inch Display Unit).....680 CHANGING FOLDER ATTRIBUTES.......................636
Ai Contour Control Function I .....................................373 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System ......................62
ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS......523 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE
Alarm Display .......................................................411,523 TABLE...................................................................1108
ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY ...................................525 Check by Running the Machine...................................404
ALARM LIST............................................................1115 CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY................526
All Data Output Screen ................................................579 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)................29
Altering a Word ...........................................................598 Circular Nibbling (G68).................................................77
Arc (G77) .....................................................................134 Circular Punch Commands (G46 and G47)..................167
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION ...............278 CODES AND RESERVED WORDS USED IN
ARITHMETIC AND LOGICAL OPERATION..........345 CUSTOM MACROS................................................318
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ..........................387 Color Setting Screen ....................................................828
Automatic Coordinate System Setting ...........................65 Color Setting Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..........851
Automatic Corner Override............................................45 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS -
AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE AUXILIARY FUNCTION.........................................16
NUMBERS...............................................................589 Command for Restarting Machining Multiple Products161
AUTOMATIC OPERATION ...............................403,449 Command to End Punching Multiple Products ............162
Automatic override for inner corners (G62)...................45 COMMON MEMORY BETWEEN EACH PATH .....397
AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) ....................147 Compensating Backlash Along the C–axis for Each
Automatic Setting of the Safety Zone ..........................515 Tool Group ...............................................................390
AUXILIARY FUNCTION.............................................96 Compensating the Position of the C–axis.....................390
AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION).................96 COMPENSATION FUNCTION .................................171
Auxiliary Function Lock ..............................................484 Condition Transition (ZEDGE Statement)...................348
Available Keys.............................................................610 Conditional Branch (IF Statement) ..............................289
Axis Control by PMC...................................................443 Conditional Branch (ZONCE Statement).....................347
AXIS CONTROL COMMAND...................................354 Confirmation of a data update during the data setting
AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS .................................383 process......................................................................502
Axis status display .......................................................504 Confirmation of incremental input...............................500
Axis Synchronization Control ......................................442 Confirmation of the deletion of all data .......................502
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ..........................383 Confirmation of the deletion of the program................501
Confirmation of the start from a middle block.............505
<B> CONTINUOUS HIGH-SPEED SKIP FUNCTION .......37
Background Editing .....................................................704 CONTROL ON REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS346
Background Editing (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...........732 CONTROLLED AXES..................................................20
BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS ..................935 Controlling the C–axis .................................................169
Base Point Command (G72).........................................130 CONTROLLING THE TURRET-AXIS (T-AXIS) .......91
Base Point Command of Multi-Piece Machining (G98)156 COORDINATE SYSTEM .............................................58
Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC) .................................941 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate
BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, G39).................163 System Specified by CNC - Coordinate System ........13
Block in which Punching is Made..................................73 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G84, G85)...237
Blocks Where C–axis Command is Possible................387 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION...............68
i-1
INDEX B-64504EN/02
NOTE
Copy.............................................................................613 Displaying and Entering Setting Data (15/19-inch

Copy and movement between different devices...........644 Display Unit)............................................................786
CREATING A FOLDER .............................................633 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common
CREATING PROGRAMS...........................................588 Variables ..................................................................755
CREATING PROGRAMS IN TEACH IN MODE Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common
(PLAYBACK)..........................................................590 Variables (15/19-inch Display Unit) ........................794
CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI PANEL588 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA.......................406
Creation........................................................................614 Displaying and setting items on the initial tool
Current Position Display ..............................................410 registration screen ............................................. 768,808
CURSOR MOVEMENT LIMITATIONS ON Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting
PROGRAM EDITING .............................................605 Screen.......................................................................781
CUSTOM MACRO......................................................244 Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting
Custom Macro Variables..............................................343 Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit).............................819
Cut................................................................................613 Displaying and setting items on the screen for the
Cut at Angle (G89).......................................................142 number of press operations................................ 771,810
CUTTING FEED ...........................................................43 Displaying and setting items on the tool figure
CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL .............................44 registration screen (for drawing figures) ........... 773,812
Displaying and setting items on the tool figure
<D> registration screen for multiple tools (for drawing
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT .............................................530 figures) .............................................................. 776,815
Data range check..........................................................506 Displaying and setting items on the tool number
DATA TYPE..............................................................1088 registration screen ............................................. 770,809
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING..........................71 Displaying and setting items on the tool number
Default Folders.............................................................107 registration screen for multiple tools ................. 775,814
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Number
NOTE ........................................................................s-1 Registration Screen for Multiple Tools (15/19-inch
Deleting a Block...........................................................600 Display Unit)............................................................814
DELETING A FILE.....................................................638 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration
DELETING A FOLDER..............................................636 Screen for Multiple Tools.........................................775
Deleting a Word ...........................................................598 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration
Deleting All Programs..................................................604 Screens .....................................................................768
DELETING BLOCKS .................................................600 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration
Deleting Multiple Blocks .............................................601 Screens (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...........................807
Deleting One Program..................................................604 Displaying and Setting Parameters ..............................824
DELETING PROGRAMS ...........................................604 Displaying and Setting Parameters (15/19-inch Display
Deletion of Stored Macros ...........................................156 Unit) .........................................................................847
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS...........................947 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data756
Details ..................................................... 621,895,912,922 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data
Details of Functions .....................................................325 (15/19-inch Display Unit) ........................................796
DETAILS OF TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION....188 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and
Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Time .........................................................................751
Measured ..................................................................754 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and
Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Time (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...............................790
Measured (15/19-inch Display Unit) ........................793 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen....836
DISPLAY.....................................................................409 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen
Display interpreted and original programs on the same (15/19-inch display unit) ..........................................859
screen........................................................................691 Displaying and setting the FSSB servo amplifier setting
Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen .......................................................................835
screen (15/19-inch display unit) ...............................721 Displaying and setting the FSSB servo amplifier setting
Display of Run Time and Parts Count..........................675 screen (15/19-inch display unit) ...............................859
Display of Run Time and Parts Count (15/19-inch Displaying and setting the servo setting screen............836
Display Unit) ............................................................681 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen
DISPLAY OF SYSTEM VARIABLES .......................275 (15/19-inch display unit) ..........................................860
Display of updated modal information.........................503 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen ............837
Displaying and Entering Setting Data ..........................747 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen
(15/19-inch display unit) ..........................................861
i-2
B-64504EN/02 INDEX
NOTE
Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel 758 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS........................318
Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198) ............459
(15/19-inch Display Unit).........................................797 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALLS USING THE
Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset DATA SERVER AVAILABLE IN MULTI-PATH
Value ........................................................................753 SYSTEMS................................................................463
Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset
Value (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..............................792 <F>
Displaying and Switching the Display Language ........761 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE
Displaying and Switching the Display Language TABLE...................................................................1109
(15/19-inch Display Unit).........................................800 FEED FUNCTIONS ......................................................41
Displaying Memory Data .............................................829 FEED-FEED FUNCTION .............................................11
Displaying Memory Data (15/19-inch Display Unit)...852 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY
Displaying the executed block ..............................686,718 CIRCLE FOR A ROTARY AXIS..............................48
Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item831 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ............................................484
Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item File Format and Error Messages ..................................569
(15/19-inch display unit) ..........................................854 FIVE AXES DISPLAY IN ONE SCREEN FOR THE
Displaying the Program Name .....................................891 8.4-INCH DISPLAY UNIT......................................877
Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
Sequence Number.....................................................887 (G30.1) .......................................................................56
Displaying the Program Number, Program Name, and Folder Attributes ..........................................................107
Sequence Number (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..........891 Folder Configuration....................................................105
DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER/NAME, Folder for Subprogram/Macro Calls ............................648
SEQUENCE NUMBER, AND STATUS, AND FOLDER MANAGEMENT ........................................645
WARNING MESSAGES FOR DATA SETTING OR Folder tree display........................................................701
INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION ..............................887 Folder tree display (15/19-inch display unit) ...............730
Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone ................517 FOLDERS....................................................................105
Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Format..........................................................................581
Input/Output Operation ............................................888 FTP File Transfer Function..........................................570
Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Function Keys ..............................................................420
Input/Output Operation (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..892 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS.......................419
DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE440 Functions that are Used When Data is Set ...................499
Distance Coded Rotary Encoder ..................................441 Functions that are Used when the Program is Executed503
DNC OPERATION......................................................454 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING .......129
DRY RUN....................................................................486
DWELL..........................................................................51 <G>
G CODE LIST ...............................................................24
<E> G00 Command in Nibbling Mode..................................84
EDIT DISABLE ATTRIBUTE AND DISPLAY G01, G02, and G03 Commands in Nibbling Mode ........85
DISABLE ATTRIBUTE ..........................................593 GENERAL.............................................................3,9,401
Edit of multi-path program...........................................924 General Screen Operations...........................................419
EDITING A PROGRAM ......................................406,694 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............... s-2
Editing a Program (15/19-inch Display Unit) ..............723 GOTO Statement Using Stored Sequence Numbers ....288
EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS ............................604 GRAPHIC DISPLAY SCREEN AND DRAWING.....902
EDITING PROGRAM CHARACTERS......................608 GRAPHIC FUNCTION ...............................................897
EDITING PROGRAMS...............................................593 Grid (G78, G79)...........................................................135
EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS.................570
EMERGENCY STOP ..................................................491 <H>
Error message...............................................................586 Heading a Program.......................................................597
ERROR MESSAGE AND NOTE..............................1174 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)...................32
Exact Stop (G09, G61), Cutting Mode (G64) ................45 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK FUNCTION.......488
EXAMPLE...................................................................905 HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS.....................373
Explanation of Operations..........................................1164 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ............650
EXPLANATION OF THE MDI UNIT........................417 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL (G33).............................36
EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES.........................................428 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the
EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION.............................88 Tool (Absolute and Incremental Programming) .........14
External Operator Message History .............................871
i-3
INDEX B-64504EN/02
NOTE
How to View the Position Display Change without <J>

Running the Machine ...............................................406 JOG FEED (JOG) ........................................................431
<I> <K>
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) ................68 KEYS AND PROGRAM ENCRYPTION ...................615
INCREMENT SYSTEM.........................................21,387
Incremental Command Just After Pattern Function .....142 <L>
INCREMENTAL FEED ..............................................432 LCD mounted type CNC..............................................581
INDIRECT AXIS ADDRESS SPECIFICATION........285 LIMITATION ..............................................................364
Input data range check .................................................499 Limitations ..................................................... 911,921,930
Input Mode...................................................................611 Line at Angle (G76) .....................................................133
INPUT/OUTPUT FILE NAME FOR MULTI-PATH Line Number Display...................................................611
SYSTEM ..................................................................586 Line Search ..................................................................614
Input/output format of operation history signal selection LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND ....165
data ...........................................................................551 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) ..............................27
Input/output format of pitch error compensation data..543 Linear Nibbling (G69) ...................................................81
Input/output of Multi-path program .............................925 Linear Punch Command (G45) ....................................165
INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN.......................533 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED
INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN............554 REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL)...........................445
Inputting a program......................................................533 List of Error Message.................................................1174
Inputting and Outputting a Program.............................533 LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT
Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common ................................................................................1094
Variables...................................................................545 List of Functions of PC Tool......................................1163
Inputting and outputting of O8-digit ............................537 List of Message ............................................................585
Inputting and Outputting Offset Data....................539,563 List of Output Data ......................................................584
Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data.549,568 LOAD METER SCREEN............................................885
Inputting and Outputting Parameters.....................537,561 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM ...............................66
Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Local variables .............................................................345
Data ..........................................................................541
Inputting and Outputting Tool Data .............................552 <M>
Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates M Code Group Check Function ...................................101
System Data.......................................................547,567 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION..............................99
Inputting custom macro common variables..................545 M COMMAND FOR SWITCHING THE PUNCH
Inputting offset data .....................................................539 AND LASER MODE ...............................................103
Inputting operation history signal selection data..........549 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM..........................58
Inputting parameters.....................................................537 Machine Lock ..............................................................483
Inputting pitch error compensation data.......................541 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Inputting tool data ........................................................552 LOCK.......................................................................483
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data ................547 Macro Call ..................................................... 153,294,352
Inputting/Outputting a Program ...................................557 MACRO CALL ARGUMENT FOR AXIS NAME
Inputting/Outputting all Programs and Folders ............560 EXPANSION ...........................................................313
Inputting/Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables Macro Call Using a G Code .........................................301
..................................................................................566 Macro Call Using a G Code (Specification of Multiple
Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data ..564 Definitions) ..............................................................302
Inserting a Word...........................................................597 Macro Call Using a G Code with a Decimal Point
INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A (Specification of Multiple Definitions) ....................303
WORD......................................................................594 Macro Call Using an M Code ......................................304
Interference Check .......................................................223 Macro Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple
Interference check alarm function................................227 Definitions) ..............................................................305
Interference check avoidance function.........................228 MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS..287
Internal circular cutting feedrate change ........................47 Macro Storage Capacity...............................................155
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS .................................26 MAKING A PROGRAM COMPACT.........................641
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO .............324 Making of machining programs ...................................922
ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL ................1176 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON........................................436
Manual Continuous Feed, Incremental Feed, Manual
Reference Point Return ............................................387
i-4
B-64504EN/02 INDEX
NOTE
MANUAL HANDLE FEED ........................................433 Operating Monitor Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) 683
MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION .....................464 Operation ....................................................... 895,898,915
MANUAL OPERATION......................................401,430 Operation confirmation function setting screen ...........507
MANUAL PUNCH......................................................490 Operation level setting .................................................762
MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN.........430 Operation level setting (15-inch display unit)..............801
Maximum incremental value check .............................506 Operation of Inputting and Editing for Each Program .929
Maximum Programmable Dimension ..........................387 Operation to be performed if an interference is judged to
MAXIMUM STROKE...................................................22 occur.........................................................................226
MDI OPERATION ......................................................451 OPERATIONAL DEVICES ........................................413
MEMORY AND CALL BY A/B MACRO .................146 Operational Notes ..........................................................94
MEMORY OPERATION ............................................449 OTHERS ......................................................................353
METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY ....................937 Output Directory ..........................................................581
MIRROR IMAGE ........................................................470 Output format of tool data............................................554
Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66)......298 Output operation ..........................................................580
Modal Call: Each Block Call (G66.1) ..........................299 Outputting a program ...................................................535
Modal Real Time Macro Command / One-shot Real Outputting custom macro common variables...............545
Time Macro Command.............................................334 Outputting offset data...................................................540
MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION......................393 Outputting operation history data.................................549
MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION .......................620 Outputting operation history signal section data ..........550
Multi-path program folder............................................922 Outputting parameters..................................................538
MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Outputting pitch error compensation data ....................542
FUNCTION..............................................................922 Outputting tool data .....................................................553
Multi–Piece Machining Commands (G73, G74)..........159 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data .............548
MULTI–PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION ...............156 Overall Position Display ..............................................671
MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK.98 Overall Position Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) ....677
MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL.....................................92 OVERTRAVEL ...........................................................491
Multi-statement (ZDO...ZEND Statement) ..................350 OVERVIEW ............................... 41,188,393,620,894,942
MULTI-STEP SKIP (G33) ............................................35 OVERVIEW OF TOOL COMPENSATION (G40-G42)
..................................................................................183
<N> OVERWRITING FILES ON A MEMORY CARD/USB
Name change of the Multi-path program folder ...........928 MEMORY................................................................531
NAMES OF AXES ........................................................20
NAMING RULES......................................................1172 <P>
Naming Rules of Folder .............................................1172 Parameter Tuning Screen .............................................831
Naming Rules of Program File...................................1172 Parameter Tuning Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) ...854
NC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION...............................579 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) .........................835
Nesting Call of Macros ................................................154 Parameter tuning screen (axis setting) (15/19-inch
Next Block Display Screen ..........................................703 display unit)..............................................................858
Next Block Display Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) 730 Parameter tuning screen (miscellaneous settings) ........837
NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION.....................................84 Parameter tuning screen (miscellaneous settings)
NIBBLING FUNCTION................................................75 (15/19-inch display unit) ..........................................860
NOMOGRAPHS........................................................1102 Parameter tuning screen (system setting).....................833
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL Parameter tuning screen (system setting) (15/19-inch
(G40.1,G41.1,G42.1, or G150,G151,G152).............178 display unit)..............................................................857
Note.....................................................................443,1175 PARAMETERS ...........................................................947
NOTES.........................................................................363 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT ............12
Notes on Circular Nibbling (G68) and Linear Nibbling Part Program Storage Size / Number of Registerable
(G69) ..........................................................................82 Programs ..................................................................113
Notes on Nibbling by M Function..................................88 Parts Count Display, Run Time Display ......................412
Notes on Pattern Functions ..........................................145 PASSWORD FUNCTION ...........................................606
NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL .......................5 Password modification .................................................763
NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA.....................6 Password modification (15-inch display unit)..............803
NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES..........................20 Paste .............................................................................613
PATH NAME EXPANSION DISPLAY FUNCTION.881
<O> PATTERN FUNCTION...............................................129
Operating Monitor Display ..........................................676
i-5
INDEX B-64504EN/02
NOTE
Pattern Function, Nibbling Function and C–axis Protection level setting (15-inch display unit) .............804
Command .................................................................389 Protection of Data at Eight Levels ...............................762
PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM Protection of Data at Eight Levels (15/19-inch Display
OPERATION/EDITING ........................................1163 Unit) .........................................................................801
Periodic Maintenance Screen .......................................838 PUNCH ........................................................................490
Periodic Maintenance Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area
..................................................................................861 (Type A) ...................................................................512
PLANE SELECTION ....................................................67 Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area
Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System....669 (Type B) ...................................................................513
Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System668 PUNCH FUNCTION (1-CYCLE PRESSING)..............73
POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF (G70) ....................75
POSITIONING (G00) ....................................................26 <R>
Positioning in Smaller Angle Rotating Direction.........387 Radius (G88)................................................................141
Power Disconnection ...................................................414 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE
POWER ON/OFF.........................................................413 CUTTING ..............................................................1105
Precision Specification for Macro Relational Operators292 RAM-AXIS CONTROL ..............................................391
PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)...........23 RAM-axis Up Motion ..................................................392
PRESS FUNCTION.......................................................73 RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE ...........................1099
Press Motion by RAM-axis Control.............................392 RAPID TRAVERSE ......................................................42
Prevention of Overcutting Due to Tool Radius RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE ...............................485
Compensation...........................................................220 READING AND WRITING VARIABLES FOR
Procedure for Reference Position Establishment .........440 ANOTHER PATH ...................................................275
PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENTS ...................315 READING PARAMETERS ........................................286
PROGRAM AND FOLDER COPY/MOVE Real time macro variables (RTM variables) ................342
FUNCTION..............................................................641 REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO ...............................332
Program Attributes .......................................................110 REFERENCE POSITION..............................................53
PROGRAM AUTO RESTART ...................................472 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position) ............12
Program Check Screen .................................................703 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ......................53,441
Program Check Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit).......731 Register and Change of Tool Life Management Data....95
PROGRAM CODE LIST...........................................1091 REGISTERING CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMS....318
PROGRAM COMPONENTS OTHER THAN REGISTERING THE TOOL FIGURE ........................898
PROGRAM SECTIONS ..........................................116 Related Parameters.......................................................112
PROGRAM CONFIGURATION............................17,115 RELATION WITH CONVENTIONAL FUNCTIONS110
Program Contents Display ...........................................685 Relation with Folders ...................................................110
Program Contents Display (15/19-inch Display Unit) .717 Relation with Program Names .....................................111
Program Display ..........................................................409 Relationship between the Multiple–Tool System and the
Program Folder Screen.................................................696 C Axis ........................................................................93
Program Folder Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit).......725 Relationship with Absolute/Incremental Command
PROGRAM MANAGEMENT .............................105,626 (G90/G91) ................................................................387
Program Management only in the Path Folder.............647 Relationship with Other Functions...............................529
Program Management under the Path Folder ...............646 RENAMING A FILE...................................................638
Program Name .............................................................108 RENAMING A FOLDER............................................634
Program Screen for MDI Operation .............................696 Repetition (WHILE Statement)....................................290
Program Screen for MDI Operation (15/19-inch Display Repetition (ZWHILE Statement) .................................349
Unit) .........................................................................725 Replacement.................................................................612
PROGRAM SEARCH .................................................601 REPLACING A WORD OR ADDRESS.....................599
PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION...............118 Replacing batteries.......................................................942
PROGRAM VERIFICATION .....................................649 Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders................942
PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT (G10) .................367 Replacing Battery for Control Unit..............................938
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1) Replacing the batteries in a separate battery case ........943
..................................................................................177 Replacing the battery built into the servo amplifier .....943
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ....368 RESTRICTIONS .........................................................322
PROGRAMS................................................................108 RETRACE ...................................................................475
Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key..........501 RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN .................527
Protection Function ......................................................919 Reversing Edit Operations (Undo Function)................613
Protection level setting.................................................765 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER....................................384
i-6
B-64504EN/02 INDEX
NOTE
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ......................................933 Setting the Safety Zone ................................................514

RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE...1173 Setting the Tool Shape Area ........................................515
SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE,
<S> OR IN THE RESET STATE..................................1106
SAFETY FUNCTIONS ...............................................491 Share Proofs (G86).......................................................137
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1 Simple Call (G65) ........................................................294
SAFETY ZONE AREA EXTENSION (EIGHT SIMULTANEOUS EDITING OF MULTIPATH
AREAS) ...................................................................522 PROGRAMS............................................................618
SAFETY ZONE CHECK.............................................512 Simultaneously Controlled Axes..................................387
Saving ..........................................................................614 SINGLE BLOCK.........................................................487
SCALING (G50, G51) .................................................171 Single-path Display......................................................885
SCHEDULE OPERATION .........................................456 SKIP FUNCTION (G33) ...............................................34
SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND SKIP POSITION MACRO VARIABLE
AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION ..883 IMPROVEMENT.......................................................36
SCREEN HARD COPY FUNCTION..........................576 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)........................................416
SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY 668,685, Soft Keys......................................................................421
....................................................................745,824,871 Special Macro Call using M code ................................306
Search...........................................................................611 Specification Method ...................................................325
SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (B CODES) ...101 SPECIFYING DRAWING PARAMETERS ...............899
SELECTING A DEFAULT FOLDER.........................637 Split display on the program folder screen............ 697,726
SELECTING A DEVICE.............................................627 Square (G87)................................................................139
Selecting a From Cassette as a Device .........................631 SRAM data and User files............................................585
SELECTING A MAIN PROGRAM ............................640 Stamping the Machining Time.....................................709
Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device...........627 Stamping the Machining Time (15/19-inch Display
Selecting a USB Memory as a Device .........................632 Unit) .........................................................................737
Selecting a Workpiece Coordinate System ....................61 Stand-alone type CNC (with personal computer
Selection of machining program ..................................925 function / Ethernet connection) ................................583
SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS Stand-alone type CNC (with personal computer
MACHINING - TOOL FUNCTION ..........................15 function / HSSB connection)....................................581
Sequence Number Comparison and Stop .....................749 Stand-alone type CNC (without personal computer
Sequence Number Comparison and Stop (15/19-inch function) ...................................................................581
Display Unit) ............................................................788 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key)...................................415
SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ..............................603 Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key) ..........................416
Servo Parameters..........................................................826 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES....1089
Servo Parameters (15/19-inch Display Unit)................849 Start check signal .........................................................503
Servo Tuning................................................................827 Storage and Call of Multiple Macros (Macro Numbers
Servo Tuning (15/19-inch Display Unit)......................850 90 to 99) ...................................................................155
Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System........................60 Storage of Macros ........................................................152
Setting an M Code Group Number Using a Program...100 STORED STROKE CHECK .......................................492
Setting an M Code Group Number Using the Setting STORED STROKE LIMIT RANGE SWITCHING
Screen .........................................................................99 FUNCTION BY SIGNAL........................................498
SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS .............................414 STROKE LIMIT AREA CHANGING FUNCTION ...497
SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA.......................652 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE...............495
Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value....... SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99)......................................124
...........................................................................746,785 Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address .................311
Setting of Machining Method for Multi–Piece Subprogram Call Using an M Code .............................308
Machining.................................................................160 Subprogram Call Using an M Code (Specification of
Setting RAM-axis Motion Pattern................................391 Multiple Definitions)................................................309
Setting Screen ..............................................................507 Subprogram Calls Using a Secondary Auxiliary
Setting the change protection level and output Function....................................................................310
protection level of a program....................................767 Subprogram Calls Using a T Code...............................309
Setting the change protection level and output Subprogram Calls Using an S Code .............................310
protection level of a program (15-inch display unit) 806 SWITCHING BETWEEN MULTI-PATH DISPLAY
Setting the Floating Reference Position .......................676 AND SINGLE-PATH DISPLAY FUNCTION........874
Setting the Floating Reference Position (15/19-inch System Configuration Screen.......................................845
Display Unit) ............................................................683
i-7
INDEX B-64504EN/02
NOTE
System Configuration Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit) <V>

..................................................................................869 VARIABLES ........................................................ 244,339
SYSTEM VARIABLES.................................249,340,344 Variables Dedicated to Real Time Custom Macros .....340
VIRTUAL MDI KEY ..................................................908
<T> VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION .............................908
T COMMAND NEGLECT ............................................90
TABLE OF CONTENTS ..............................................c-1 <W>
TANDEM CONTROL .................................................385 WAITING FUNCTION FOR PATHS .........................394
T–AXIS AND C–AXIS SIMULTANEOUS WARNING LIST .......................................................1152
CONTROL ...............................................................391 Warning message .........................................................585
T–axis Command Ignore Signal TNG and C–axis WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
Command .................................................................390 HANDLING.............................................................. s-6
TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION .......................912 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
TEST OPERATION.....................................................483 PROGRAMMING..................................................... s-3
TESTING A PROGRAM.............................................404 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY
Text data.......................................................................584 MAINTENANCE...................................................... s-8
Text display..................................................................688 Word Search.................................................................595
Tool Compensation ........................................................94 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM .....................60
TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ..........................672
COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ENTERING Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (15/19-inch
VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) ..............235 Display Unit)............................................................679
TOOL DATA INPUT ..................................................372 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1)...............63
Tool Data Setting Function ..........................................779 WORKPIECE HOLDER INTERFERENCE
Tool Data Setting Function (15/19-inch Display Unit) 817 AVOIDANCE FUNCTION .....................................518
TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) .............................89 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen ...............510
Tool Life ........................................................................95 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS498
Tool Life Management Data ..........................................94
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION .................94 <Y>
TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS Y–AXIS CRACK CANCEL........................................170
FIGURE-INTERPOLATION.....................................10
TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING -
AUTOMATIC OPERATION...................................402
Tool Movement in Offset Mode...................................196
Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel.......................214
Tool Movement in Start-up ..........................................191
TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE....................19
Tool Number ..................................................................92
TOOL OFFSET..............................................................91
Tool offset range setting screen ...................................508
TOOL PATH AT CORNER ......................................1102
Tool Radius Compensation for Input from MDI..........234
TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION .................................89
Tool/Workpiece Holder Areas .....................................521
TORQUE LIMIT SKIP..................................................38
Turning on the Power...................................................413
Two-path Display and Three-path Display ..................886
Type B..........................................................................518
TYPES OF REAL TIME MACRO COMMANDS......334
<U>
U/V/W MACRO FUNCTION .....................................152
Unconditional Branch (GOTO Statement) ...................288
Usable Characters in Program File.............................1173
Usage Notes ...............................................................1163
USB FUNCTION.........................................................578
i-8
B-64504EN/02 REVISION RECORD
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
• Addition of following items
Programmable mirror image (G50.1,G51.1) / Display of system variables / Special
macro call using M code / Macro call argument for axis name expansion /
Programmable data input (G10) / Stored stroke limit range switching function by signal /
Inputting and outputting of O8-digit / Inputting/outputting all programs and folders / NC
data output function / Input/output file name for multi-path system / Creating programs
in TEACH IN mode (playback) / Changing current folder / Folder management /
Program verification / High-speed program management / Call stack display / Display
02 Dec.,2014 interpreted and original programs on the same screen / Folder tree display / Load
meter screen / Calculation key function / Multi-path program management function /
Warning list / ISO/ASCII code conversion tool
• Correction of descriptions of following items
Program and folder copy/move function
• Deletion of following items
Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration / Program copy function / Displaying and
setting pitch error compensation data
• Correction of errors
01 Oct., 2010
r-1
B-64504EN/02
* B - 6 4 5 0 4 E N / 0 2 *

B-64504en - 02 Fanuc Series 30i-Pb, Series 31i-Pb Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-64504en - 02 Fanuc Series 30i-Pb, Series 31i-Pb Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC Series 30+-PB

FANUC Series 31+-PB

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)................................................................ 27

11 AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................................................................ 96

13 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION........................................................... 115

14.1 PATTERN FUNCTION .............................................................................. 129

15.6 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF COMPENSATION VALUES,

17 REAL-TIME CUSTOM MACRO .......................................................... 332

17.2.1.1 System variables .............................................................................................. 340

21 MUITI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION.................................................. 393

21.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 393

2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES .................................................................. 413

3.7 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL)

8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ....................................................................... 530

8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN.............................................. 554

11 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ............................................................... 626

12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System .......................................668

12.2 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................................... 685

12.3 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................................... 745

12.4 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................................... 824

12.5 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................................... 871

13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION......................................................................... 897

15 TEMPLATE PROGRAM FUNCTION .................................................. 912

16 MULTI-PATH PROGRAM MANAGEMENT FUNCTION..................... 922

1.3.3.3 Replacing the batteries in a separate battery case ............................................ 943

K ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL........................................... 1176

About this manual

Model name Abbreviation

Related manuals of Series 30i/31i-PB

Table 1 (a) Related manuals

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series

Table 1 (b) Related manuals

1.1 NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL

1.2 NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA

1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-INTERPOLATION .....................10

(1) Punching is performed after positioning..............Punching function

Punching Punching Program command

Tool T01 Tool T02

1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-

- Tool movement along a straight line

Fig. 1.1 (a) Tool movement along a straight line

- Tool movement along an arc

Fig. 1.1 (b) Tool movement along an arc

Fig. 1.1 (c) Interpolation function

1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION

Fig. 1.2 (a) Feed function

1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT

1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position)

Distance between reference point

The distance between the

Fig. 1.3.1 (a) Reference position

1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System

Fig. 1.3.2 (a) Coordinate system

230 Present tool position

300 Distance to the zero point of a coor-

Fig. 1.3.2 (b) Coordinate system specified by the CNC